Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Two teenage super-genius brothers without a clue get mixed up an in adventure beyond their imaginations.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter One: “The Two Brothers and The Three Sisters.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Cowboy Bebop Reality. Mars. Tharsis City. At a high school, American football field, with stadium bleachers on both sides long sides of the field. Friday, October fifteenth, twenty-one hundred. Eight thirty PM local time.
It was a slightly warm night in October, with Autumn still not fully arrived.
Even thought it was night time at the open air stadium, the stadium lights illuminated the area well enough to be looking out some distance, from the field, with no difficulty.
At the moment, it was near the end of the fourth and final quarter of the American style, high school football game currently being played.
Presently, the visiting team had the football, and they were getting close to the home team's goal line. And all the visiting team needed as one more touchdown to win the game.
From the side line of the home team, the football coach for the home team blew his whistle. He then signaled a player change with his hands. With him then pointing at which player he wanted to come off of the field.
The coach was an older fair skinned man, in his fifties. He had short blond hair that was turning silver white, along with a well kept full beard of the same color. He was still in great health, and physical shape for his age.
The home team's coach pointed at the player he wanted to come in.
As that player ran towards him, from the field, and the bench, the coach looked over at the bench of players, as he ordered, in english, “Lowe. You are up.”
The teenage boy in football gear, picked up his helmet, stood up, and approached the Coach.
The boy had a black haired and tanned skinned. He had a muscular, medium set build, and he was slightly above average height for most boys his age. His hair was a little on the shaggy side, and cut to his neck like.
As the tanned skinned player came to a stop in front of his coach, the football coach looked at him. The coach ordered, “Break their lines, Lowe.”
The boy replied, in english, “Yes, sir.” He then put on his helmet, as he turned, and ran out onto the field, as another player came back to the bench.
The name on the coach's jacket chest pocket stated, “Caxton.”
As Shane Caxton watched the game, he thought, 'This is a good retirement. Who knew that I would have ended up being a high school american football coach, on Mars, of all places. Good thing most of the people here speak english. It made settling down here much easier. And it has all been so good for me.'
He looked at the wedding ring on his left forth finger, as he continued his thoughts, 'I found love, and married a good woman. She is a few decades younger than me, but we still have a wonderful relationship. She gave me two wonderful children. A boy and a girl. Both of whom are still young. And the best part is that with the modern medicine here, I will more than likely I will live to see both my children get married, and have children of their own. Who knew that I would go into the depths of hell, and come out the other side into heaven. This is a good life. I wonder how Bao is doing?'
Shane turned back to look at his players on the field, as he mentally reflected, 'I also wonder about the Lovelace household. I have mixed feelings on the matter. Due to me being responsible for the death of Garcia's father, Diego Lovelace. Whom did not deserve to die. And Roberta killing some of my men. But, I had a debt of honor to help Garcia, as much as I could.'
'I am also glad that both Garcia and Roberta fully healed from their wounds. Well, with Roberta, what left of her was able to finally heal. She is a lesson on what happens when one pushes themselves to far.'
'Along those lines, I believe that by helping Roberta close her past, I help both of them. Also, that Fabiola girl seemed like a good kid.'
'I would have stayed longer, if my superiors had not called me back, from the hotel I was staying out, while helping the Lovelace family. It just didn't feel right to do so.'
'Though, clearly my superiors had no clue as to why I was in Venezuela. Or, they would have not called me back into service. And had me return to the hellhole in Thailand. With that place going from a hive of scum and villainy. To a nearly deserted town, with a fortress of horrors behind it.'
'Still, I am not going to complain. If I had not gone, I would have no ended up here. Where I have gained so much that I have now.'
'Now, let's see if of my best and brightest player still has his touch. And I think he does.'
Shane then calmly continue to watch the game, from where he was standing on the sidelines.
(_)
As the boy ran toward his team, the announcer yelled through the microphone, to the stadium speakers, “What is this?! The home team's coach has called in the big guns! That's right ladies and gentlemen, number, 69! Stan Lowe, the linebreaker!”
The cheerleaders by the field, and the audience in the stands, cheered at hearing Stan's name being called.
(_)
A few seconds later, the seventeen year old, Stan Lowe joined the defensive line.
When the game resumed, Stan went onto push the visiting team back several yards, by breaking through the lines and tackling the ball carrier, over an over again. Soon, the home team got the ball, and the game was soon over, with the home team winning the game.
As the game ended, the crowds cheered on Stan Lowe, the linebreaker, for the home team's victory.
(_)
In the stands, three teenage girls sat side by side with each other, on a bleacher, as they talked to one another.
All three teenager girls appeared to be seventeen years old, and by their looks, they were sisters. They had slender, muscular frames. Average height. And they were quite beautiful. They wore blue jeans, black leather belts, and tennis shoes. And each wore a t-shirt that matched their hair color.
One sister had long purple hair that was put into a pony tail with a purple scrunchy.
Another sister had long green hair, which she let flow free down her back.
The last sister had blue hair, with black highlights, which was cut short at her neckline.
The sister with the blue hair asked, in japanese, “Is that one of them?”
The purple hair sister answered, in japanese, “Yes.”
The green haired sister stated, in japanese, “It is going to be so much fun meeting them.”
The blue haired sister said, “Okay. Let's follow him. But, let's do this discreetly. So, he can lead us to the other one. So, we learn what both of them look like.”
The three sisters then got up from their seats, as they planned to secretly follow the one they were interested in, so he would lead them to the other person they were interested in.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, inside large classroom, in a high school building, by the football field, two individuals were working on a huge mathematical formula, on a large white marker board, which was mounted to the wall, facing the adult sized school desks in the room.
The room itself was large, and the room was like a college forum. Where each row of desks, went up, a few inches, to another step. With there being twenty rows of desks in all, and forty desks per row. There were three aisles going between the rows of desks. Two on the sides, by the wall, and one in the middle of the room, that lead directly to the back entrance of the room, which was a set of double-doors.
There was also a single door, on each of the sides walks, by the front corners of the room, near the large white marker board.
The room was dimly lit by a simple lamp light on the teachers desk, near the marker board, at the front of the room, on the bottom floor.
One of the individuals, was a slender, though well toned, pale skinned woman, with short white hair. She was quite beautiful, and appeared to be in her mid-twenties. She was dressed in a simple a white button up short sleeved shirt, black pants, black belt, and black flat sole slippers.
The other person was a seventeen year old boy in a white t-shirt, blue jeans, a simple belt, white socks, tennis shoes, and a short white long sleeved lab coat.
The woman was clearly the teacher, and the teenage boy was her student.
The teacher said, in a pleasant, feminine voice, “That is the way, young Lewis Lowe. I have found that mathematical formulas are like music. They have to flow. They have to feel right. They have to make sense. And you are doing three, in a beautiful manner.”
The seventeen year old Lewis replied, “Thank you. Professor Cosupsir.”
Like his brother, Stan, Lewis had a black haired and tanned skinned. He as a muscular, medium set build, and he was slightly above average height for more boys his age. Though, his hair was cut slightly shorter than his brother, Stan's hair.
Both Lewis and his brother looked close enough alike, that they could pass for each other, if they were not standing beside each other.
After Lewis used the marker to change to symbols along the formula, he stated, “I think I have this. The problem is, I am not sure. I need to think on this formula for a few more days.”
Professor Cosupsir stated, in a calm, professional, tone of voice, “There is no rush, Lewis. You have come a long way, since I first started tutoring you, a few years ago. And if it takes another year or so to work out this formula, then so be it. I found that patience offers its own reward.”
Lewis said, “Thank you professor, for having faith in me.”
Professor Cosupsir coyly smiled, as she stated, “You are well worth the effort.”
Suddenly, both individuals heard the double-doors open, on the top floor, in the back of the classroom.
Both Lewis, and Professor Cosupsir turned to see who is was.
There were three teenagers standing at the door. Stan Lowe, whom was wearing the same clothing as Lewis, only instead of a lab coat, he had on a red varsity jacket, with his jersey number, 69, labeled in large white number on the back of the jacket.
To both sides of Stan, there were two pretty teenage girls his age, whom were both wearing casual clothing.
Stan looked down at Lewis and Cosupsir, as he said, “Come on brother. We won the game. Let's get something to eat and celebrate. I even got you another date.”
Lewis turned to his teacher, as he requested, “Is it okay that I leave, professor.”
Professor Cosupsir turned to Lewis. She warmly smiled at him, as she said, “Go ahead, Lewis. Have some fun with your brother. As I said. This work can wait a little longer.”
Lewis responded, “Thank you.” He turned, and walked up the steps, in the middle aisle, and to the back of the classroom, where joined his brother, and the two girls.
Cosupsir quietly watched Lewis leave.
When Lewis reached the other three teenagers, they then left turned, and left the room, with them gently shutting the double-doors behind them.
Professor Cosupsir turned her attention back to the large, long formula on the marker board, as she thought, 'My, my, young Lewis. You really are truly worth the time and trouble to teach. I will not make the same mistakes I have made with others that could compare to my intellect.'
'It is unfortunate that your brother, young Stan, whom is your equal in intelligence, is not so interested in the math and sciences... Oh well, I need only one of you to complete my current designs.'
'And I will not be ungrateful for your work. I plan to reward you for your efforts. But, that will be later, after we have achieved our goals of figuring out this formula, and applying it, in practical applications.”
(_)
A few minutes later, the four teenagers were riding in the Lowe family car, which was just a four door, cheery red convertible. The car had a right side driver's seat. The top was up, but the windows were rolled down, so the four teenagers could enjoy the air, as they headed down left side of the road.
The four teenagers were heading to a diner, that the Lowe brothers liked to go to.
Stan drove, with his girlfriend, Stephanie, riding beside him, to his left side.
Lewis was right behind Stan, with the new girl Stan got for him, Brittney, beside him, to his left side.
(_)
An hour later, the four teenagers were at an all night diner, where they were just finishing their dinner.
Their diner was pleasant, and the conversation was polite. Though, Lewis continued going on the formula he was working on.
Lewis said, “If I can crack this formula, it could open up whole new fields of science for humanity. We already know that multiple planes of reality exist in this reality, that is how the hyperspace gate system works. Just imagine if we could chart entire different possibilities.”
Stan stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Ever since you got into dad's old book collection, years ago, you have been going on and on about M-theory. It is an obsession with you. There is no such thing at M-theory. You should instead become a researcher in medicine. Maybe find a way to invent a treatment to extend life further.”
Brittney asked, “What is M-theory?”
Stephanie cautioned, “Trust me, girl. You do not want to ask, Lewis, that question. He will go on about it from hours Why do you think he doesn't have steady girlfriend? I mean, Stan here has been trying to get him one. One girl after another. And they just don't stay.”
Stan commented, “To avoid an hour long discussion on subject, I will answer the question. M-theory is short for multiverse theory. Like the word, universe. Only this theory states that instead of there being one universe, there are a near infinite number of realities. Multi, meaning many. Instead of, uni, meaning one. Hence, multiverse.”
“What M-theory is about is imagine that every decision, every action, we make there are multiple outcomes. Now, when we make a decision, or take as action, we have a certain set of outcomes from those decisions and actions. Simple cause and effect. But, M-theory states that in another universe, another reality, we would have made a different choice, action, or result, that has a different outcome, and, from there, the universes diverges into multiple realities.”
Brittney said, “That is fascinating.”
Stan said, “That is not even scratching the surface of how wild some M-theories are. The most extreme theories state that even fictional realities exist in their own universes.”
Stephanie said, “He read the same books that his brother did.”
Stan stated, “Of course, I did. It was the only way I could find to counter his arguments.”
Brittney commented, “Still, there are some fictional series I would like to visit.”
Stan gently countered, “Everyone has those fantasies. It does not make them any more real.”
Lewis questioned, “But Stan, don't you sometimes feel like we don't belong here? Like you want to travel to the unknown? Places that you don't know exist, except in your heart?”
Stan admitted, “I sometimes do feel that way. But, I get it out of my system when we go fishing on Ganymede. I think we are due for that again. The last time we did that was back in July, for our birthday.”
The four teenagers then heard a man nearby ask, “Does anyone have a light?”
Stan turned to the man. He pulled out his metal zippo lighter from his pocket and lit it.
The person then walked up to Stan, and he lit their cigarette. He turned to Stan, as he said, “Thank you.”
Stan looked over at the man, as he replied, “No problem.” He then closed the lighter and put it back in his pocket.
The man then walked off, and Stan turned his attention back to Lewis, Stephanie, and Brittney.
Lewis asked, “You still got that lighter?”
Stan stated, “Just because mom and dad won't let me smoke, doesn't me I can't keep the lighter.”
Lewis countered, “I agree with them, my dear fraternal brother. We are seventeen. By Earth standard annual calendar. And it is never to early to start to live healthy. And given you have a college sports scholarship, you need to be as healthy as possible.”
Stan commented, “I am not arguing that fact. Though, I still find it hard to believe that you got that science scholarship.”
Lewis replied, “Our physics professor was of great help with that achievement.”
Stan said, “Even so. Let's not forget that mom and dad forbid you from working on that formula.”
Lewis responded, “That is why I do my work on it at school, with our math and science professor. Anyway, our parents are off world, on a business trip, until the end of the weekend. What they don't know, won't hurt them. And I know I am close to cracking this formula. With your help, I know we could do it. You have taken the same advance math and science courses I have. And your grades are as just as good mine.”
Stan stated, “I know. And we both spot for each other at the gym. You are as physically fit as I am. And I am just as intelligent as you. You really should reconsider joining the football team. I am sure the coach would love to have you. Together, we could become sports legends.”
Lewis replied, “Nah. I prefer more scholarly pursuits. Anyway, I know with your help we can crack this formula. And once that happens, we could win the Nobel prize, together. So, let's do it.”
Stan sighed in defeat, as he said, “Fine. You can show me what you have.”
The four of the teenagers then got up from their table. Next, Stan went to pay for their meals. Afterward, they left the diner, for the Lowe family's red convertible.
(_)
At a nearby table, three teenage girls heard the entire conversation.
As the three girls watched the four teenagers leave the diner, the blue haired girl said, “Their are completely cut off, and still they are drawn to the truth.”
The green haired girl suggested, “We have to formally meet with them.”
The purple haired girl stated, “We already have their address. We now know their parents are out of town. We will visit them in an hour, or so.”
(_)
Thirty minutes later, after dropping the girls off at their homes, the brothers returned to their family home. They were presently in the living room of their home.
The living room was on the second story of this home, along with their bedrooms, dining, and kitchen. The first story had an entertainment center, laundry, and electronics room. Both floors had full bathrooms. There was an inside staircase that attached both floors to each other, that was located in the living room, across the room from the outdoor entrance.
There was a door outside from the living room that was attached to a platform and stairs. This was originally designed as a fire escape. But, over time, it was remodeled, and became the main entryway into the home. Still, there were also outside doors on the bottom floor.
The outsides stairs lead to a second story platform, that had a door that lead to the living room. There were railings on the outside of the platform and stairs.
The brothers still had on their jackets.
Lewis had pulled out his white marker board, from his bedroom, and he brought it into the living room. He was just finishing the last of the equations.
After Lewis was done working on the marker board, Stan walked over to the marker board, and he looked the over mathematical formula.
A few minutes later, Stan had finished looking over it. He then said, “I see what you are doing wrong.”
Stan took a marker, from the bottom of the board, and he changed two places on the board. Afterward, he set the marker down, on the small bottom shelf of the board.
Stan stated, “There. And there. The numbers need to be reversed. Except for that, the formula looks right to me.”
Lewis looked over Stan's changes for a few seconds. He then responded, “You're right. It does look correct. Thanks, bro.”
Stan suggested, “You're welcome. Though, just make sure that you do not create a hyperspace gate explosion across the multiverse.”
Lewis stated, “That is a good point. And that is why we will check the math on this for at least a month, before we tell others about it.”
Stan praised his brother, as he said, “That is a very good idea.”
Suddenly, there was knock on the locked, outside door of the living room.
Stan said, “I'll get it.”
Stan then turned and walked to the door that lead to the outside stairway. When he reached the door, he looked thought the peephole of the door. He saw three teenager girls, around their age, with weird hair colors, standing on second story platform, facing the door.
Lewis asked, “Who is it?”
Stan turned back to his brother, as he answered, “Three teenage girls, with weird hairs colors.”
Lewis inquired, “How weird?”
Stan replied, “Faye level weird.”
Lewis said, “Got you.”
Stan said, “Now, let us find out who they are. And why they are here so late at night.”
Stan turned back towards the door. As he looked back into the peephole of the door, he asked, through the door, “Hello. Who are you?”
The green hair girl calmly requested, in english, “Hello, Lewis, and Stan Lowe. We are your distant cousins, on your father's side. Could we please come in, and talk?”
Stan said, through the door, “I don't know of any cousins on our father's side of the family.”
The green hair girl stated, “We will explain everything when after we come inside.”
Stan looked over at Lewis, he said, “The girls outside claim to be our cousins.”
Lewis said, “Go ahead. Let them in. They are just girls. What is the worst that could happen?”
Stan shrugged, as replied, “Okay.” He turned back around, unlocked, and opened the door, to let the girls in.
After the three girls had entered the living room, Stan gently closed the door behind them. He then locked the door.
Next, Stan walked over to stand beside Lewis, to Lewis' left side.
As Lewis and Stan looked at the three teenage girls, Lewis thought, 'They look cute. But, something about them screams danger. Now, I know why Stan is on edge. But, mom and dad taught us to try to make the best of a bad situation.'
Lewis stated, “Hello. I am Lewis Lowe. And this is my brother, Stan Lowe.”
Stan said, “Nice to meet you.”
The green haired girl introduced herself, “Hello. We are all half-sisters to each other. And I am Yurika.”
The blue haired girl, with black highlights, stated, in english, “Hi. You can called me, Mikoto.”
The purple haired girl said, in english, “Pleasure to meet you. My given name is, Nodoka.”
Stan commented, “Oriental names. I did not know dad had asian ancestry. Kind of obvious with mom. But, not dad.”
Yurika explained, “Actually, uncle Bob has ancestry with a pacific island that we both share relatives from. Except Nodoka. She is not technically related to you.”
Lewis offered, “If you two are related to us, and sisters to her, then that is close enough for me.”
Stan agreed, “For me, as well.”
The girls smiled as the boys comments, as Nodoka said, “Thank you.”
Lewis thought, 'At least we put them in a good mood. And now to soften the situation, even more.' He offered, “Can we get something for you? Something to drink? A snack? Why don't you sit down, make yourselves at home.”
Nodoka responded, “It is okay. We prefer to stand.”
Lewis commented, “Okay. Though, I wish our parents were at home. We could really have a nice discussion about this, with them here.”
Nodoka commented, “Actually, we came here, right now, because your parents were not at home.”
Mikoto turned to Nodoka, as she snapped at her purple haired sister, “Nodoka.”
Nodoka looked over at Mikoto, as she sheepishly replied, “Oops.”
All three sisters turned to face the brothers.
Nodoka's comment immediately caught the brothers attention.
Lewis thought, 'Ah oh. This is the type of a situation our parents warned us about. We have scholarships. We do not need to get into any trouble. And the three teenage girls are clearly trouble.'
Stan thought, 'This is not good. Anytime three girls want to come over, when the parents are away, if never good. Still, we need to find out what is going on, before we ask them to leave.'
Stan carefully asked, “You know our parents are gone, right now.?”
Yurika answered, “Yes. But, we did not come here to cause trouble. There are some things about your parents, and others whom you know, that you do not know about. Information that has been kept from you. Things we wish to inform you of.”
Lewis thought, 'Okay. Perhaps we are jumping the gun a bit. At least we can do, is hear them out.' He inquired, with a bit of curiosity in his tone of voice, “What do you want to tell us, that our parents would not tell us about?”
Mikoto said, “Oh so much. For example. Why you look so much alike. And why you share the same birthday.”
Stan shrugged, as he casually replied, “We're fraternal twins. And if you are wondering. I am the older twin.”
Lewis commented, “Only by a few hours.”
The girls giggled, for a few seconds.
Lewis inquired, with concern in tone of voice, “What is so funny?”
By then, the girls had calmed down. Mikoto shook her head a few times, as she commented, “It is so obvious that your parents did not tell you anything about what is really going on.”
Nodoka smirked, as she stated, “It is going to be fun educating you two on the reality of your situation.”
Yurika turned to Nodoka, as she commented, “Nodoka, you always do like using puns.”
Nodoka looked over at Yurika. She shrugged towards her green haired sister, as she replied, “It is just so much fun.”
Yurika and Nodoka then turned back to look at the Stan and Lewis.
Yurika said, “Still, Nodoka is right. This is going to be fun.”
Stan questioned, “And so the only reason you came here was to inform us of some horrible secrets our parents kept form us?”
Yurika answered, “Not horrible secrets. Just strange, yet wonderful secrets. And no. We also came here because we think what your parents have done to you is wrong. They have denied you so much. The truth. Your heritage. So much that has been kept from you.”
Lewis commented, “Brother, I got a feeling that our life is about to take a turn for the strange.”
Mikoto said, “That is an understatement. The question is where to start?”
Nodoka suggested, “How about a simple question. Do you know where you father is from?”
Stan answered, “Earth. So, is our mother. There is where they met.”
Nodoka pointed out, “Yet. Uncle Bob does not act like any of the people from Earth that you know of.”
Lewis pointed out, “Well, besides our maternal grandfather, we don't know anyone that acts like our mother, either.”
Nodoka conceded, “Point taken.”
Stan commented, “You seem to personally know our father.”
Nodoka smiled, as she said, “We know sides of your father that you don't have the slightest clue about.”
Yurika and Mikoto let out a laugh at their sister's comment.
Yurika then commented, “But, we will get to that in a moment. What about your mother? Do you know what she was like when she was younger.”
Lewis spoke up, “Yea. She is a skill hacker and super-genius. We got our intelligence from her. From what Jet and Faye told us, a few years ago, that our mom also use be a little crazy, in a playful way. They said that we got our sanity from our father. But, she seems to have gotten her act together after we were born.”
Mikoto agreed, “That is true. At least you know some things about your family.”
Lewis inquired, “What revelation are you three tiptoeing around?”
Suddenly, Yurika accidentally sneezed.
Stan and Lewis watched, as Yurika's body immediately changed from a teenage girl to a teenage boy.
Except for being a few years young, the teenage boy could pass for Yurika's brother. Because he was a few years younger, he could still fit into his female clothing. Also, he had the same skin tone, hair color and hair style, as before.
Yurika apologized, in a more masculine voice, that sounded like his voice just broke, “Sorry for that. We were planning to show you this a little later in the conversation.”
Mikoto commented, “Well, the cat is out of the bag.”
Nodoka stated, “Yurika, you know better than to sneeze.”
The brothers were in a slight state of shock at what they saw.
Lewis questioned, “Bro, did you just see that?”
Stan requested, “In what since of the term, are you using the word, that?”
Lewis elaborated, “The chick turned into a guy with a sneeze.”
Stan responded, “Yes. I saw that.”
Lewis replied, “Good. It means I have haven't cracked from all that studying I have done.”
Stan said, in a comforting tone, “Don't feel bad, bro. After seeing that, thinking I had just gone insane, was my first thought, as well.”
Mikoto said, in a calm tone of voice, “Lewis. Stan. Please stay calm. What you just saw is real. It is not an illusion. We will explain everything, if you give us a chance. But, keep in mind, that is still your cousin, Yurika. And even though she is now a he, he is still the same person in mind and soul.” Mikoto turned to her brother, Yurika, as she suggested, “Yurika, you might want to change back.”
Yurika responded, in his masculine voice, “Good idea.”
The brothers suddenly watched Yurika change back into the girl she had been, without sneezing. Yurika then stated, in her feminine voice, “See, easily fixed.” The others then watched her grab her chest and back, as she said, “The one problem with changing genders by accident, is that it messes up with the position of one's bra...”
Yurika used her hands to adjust her bra. When she finished, she dropped her hands back to her side, as she commented, “Ah. That is much better.”
Mikoto commented, “Yes. Which is why I know better than to sneeze without thinking.”
Nodoka turned to the two brothers, as she stated, “Again. We apologize for our sister's actions. We were planing to ease you into learning the truth. Still, what is done, is done. And I am sure this is all very new and strange for both of you. But, we can all change genders. We change genders by will, and my siblings can also change genders by sneezing.”
The teenage boys then watched as Mikoto and Nodoka changed into boys. Both had the same skin tone, hair color and hair style, as their female forms.
Nodoka was the same age as his female gender, but Mikoto seemed a few years younger. Nodoka's clothing strained against his current male body, while Mikoto male boy was younger and around the same size as his female gender body, and his clothing still fit, though it looked odd on him.
A second later, Nodoka and Mikoto changed back into their female genders. And they quickly readjusted their bras, with their hands.
Lewis said, “Stan, please tell me you drugged my drink, from earlier. At the diner.”
Stan responded, “I wish that was the case, but I am seeing the same thing, as you are seeing.”
Nodoka explained, “Yes. As you can plainly see, all three of us, can change genders. The reason for my male form being older than their male forms is due to a genetic quark they have, that I do not have. We have been able change genders since we were children. It just makes life more interesting.”
The brothers looked at each other. The brothers could see the looks in each others faces and eyes. The brother then turned to look at the Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika.
Lewis through, 'I should have got with my first instincts, on this matter. These girls have got to go. And they need to go now.' He calmly stated, in a stern tone of voice, “I think you three should leave, now.”
Nodoka flatly responded, in an equally stern tone of voice, “No. We have come a very, very long way. And we are not leaving until we tell you everything”
Stan asked, “You girls aren't aliens? Are you?”
The three girls laughed, for a few seconds.
As the girls calmed down, Mikoto then explained, “Yurika and I are partly alien. But, mostly human. And it does explain part of our gender changing abilities, for us. Your father is also part alien.”
Stan stated, “While, I will admit that our father could be odd sometimes. Though, not as much as our mother can be. I doubt he is an alien.”
Nodoka smirked, as she said, “Oh. You did not know Bob and Ed before you were born. Let us just say they traveled a lot.”
Lewis spoke up, “So, they traveled. That is no surprised. Before we were born, they were bounty hunters. That is all. Still, back to the gender changing. Okay. You explained that your two sisters gender change due to alien genes. But, how are you, Nodoka, able to change back and forth?”
Nodoka complimented, “You two really do have Ed's intelligence. It is nice that you are on the uptake. And that is a fair question. My sisters gender changing is due to alien genes, and abilities from their inherited alien powers. My gender change due is due inherited alien powers, and magic abilities, from my parents.”
Stan stated, “Let me guess. The parent with the alien powers, is all three of your fathers?”
Mikoto commented, “You are partly correct. That person is the father to my sisters, and she was my mother.”
Lewis stated, with disbelief in his voice, “So, this person fathered two of you, and was the mother to the third?”
Yurika stated, “I know it is a weird concept. That someone that can change gender would be willing to be both a mother and father to different children. But, you need to get use to the concept. Still, if it helps, to add to the strangeness, Mikoto's father is my mother. Mikoto and I are fully blood sisters, while Nodoka is our half sister, by my father, Mikoto's mother, whom is the same person.”
The brothers just looked at her, with their eyes and faces showing further disbelief.
Yurika added, “Yea. It takes a few minutes to wrap one's mind around such facts.”
Stan responded, “For the sake of the sanity of both my brother and I, we will move along this conversation. So, on top of aliens. Which you claim we partly are, as well. Due to our father being part alien. Well, slightly alien. You are also claiming that magic exists as well? Isn't that a little far fetched?”
Lewis agreed, “I agree. We have both studied high level quantum physics, and sciences. And we were taught that magic is just a poor excuse for natural events, science, and technology, that cannot yet be properly explained by science and math.”
The girls just burst out laughing, for a few seconds.
The sisters calmed soon down. Nodoka then shook her head a few times, as she said, “Ah, Arthur C Clarke theory on magic. I assure you, Mister Clarke is very wrong. Magic is real, and does exist in so many ways. This is a good example as to how you both have no idea what is out there. That is why we came here in the first place.”
Lewis realized what Nodoka was alluding to, as he said, “Listen, we can guess where this conversation is heading. I can already tell you that we decline. We do not want, nor need, a life of adventure. We are both set for success in our current life tracks.”
Stan stated, “What my brother said. No thanks. We are not interested.” He gestured with his hands, towards the outside door, as he continued, “So again, please leave. Though, we will talk about this, with our parents, when they get home.”
Yurika smirked, as she commented, “That is the thing about adventure. When it comes calling, you usually don't have a choice.”
Yurika held out her hands in front of her, parallel to each other. With the palms of her hands set a few inches from each other. And all her fingers, on both her hands, outstretch. The brothers then watched as blue arcs of electricity crisscrossed Yurika's fingers, and hands.
Lewis and Stan then turned to the other two teenager girls.
Mikoto has held out her right hand, with said hand was suddenly surrounded by flames.
A second later, the flames then immediately disappeared, and Mikoto's right hand appear under injured.
Mikoto said, “Don't worry, boys. We had no interest in burning down, nor otherwise destroying your home. Nor, do we plan to seriously harm you.”
On the other hand, the brothers then watched as Nodoka pull the moisture from the air around them, to form a staff of ice in her right hand, which she held at a horizontal angle to her body. With staff ends pointing in front and behind her. She stated, “But, the use of water, ice, and even fog, are not that immediately destructive.”
The brother instinctively took a few steps back from the three strange, teenager girls.
Yurika calmly requested, “Now, hold still boys. This is only going to hurt a little bit. Then, it is going to be a whole lot of fun for all five of us.”
Stan said one word, “Kitchen.”
Lewis replied, “Agreed.”
Stan and Lewis turned and ran towards the kitchen, with Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka right behind them.
A few seconds later, the brothers made it into the kitchen of their home, was directly connect to the living room, from a doorway, on the opposite side of the living room, from the outside door.
The three sisters calming followed the two brothers into the kitchen.
Just as the three sisters reached the doorway to the kitchen, Yurika was in front, as she continued to radiate electricity through her hands.
Yurika was the first to entered the kitchen. As she walked into the room, she saw
Yurika saw that Stan and Lewis was standing by the kitchen sink, across the room front her. Also, she noticed that Stan and Lewis smiling at her, as Lewis held the nozzle of the kitchen sink spray hose in his right hand.
Yurika also realized that Lewis has already pressed the sprayer, which he aimed it at her.
Less than a second later, the water came out of the sprayer, and it crossed the room, towards Yurika.
Yurika has just enough time to think, 'Oh hell.' Then, the water hit her, causing her powers to short out, as her electricity grounded to the floor.
Though, none of the water hit the other girls.
Yurika was not injured, as she thought, 'I hate when that happens.'
Nodoka asked, “Are you okay?”
Yurika stated, “Yes. You two handle them.”
Mikoto and Nodoka replied, in unison, “Okay.”
Yurika then headed back to the living room, while her sisters walked into the kitchen, to handle the brothers. With Nodoka standing to Mikoto's left side.
While the sisters slowly walked towards them, Stan did not want to wait, as he charge at the Mikoto and Nodoka.
Stan cocked his right fist. He then aimed his right fist as Mikoto's jaw, and he threw his punch.
Without showing any effort, Mikoto easy caught Stan's fist with her left hand, while she placed the flat palm of her right hand, against Stan's chest to stop his momentum in his tracks.
Mikoto smirked, as she calmly said, “Nice try, jock.”
Stan immediately realize how strong she was. He tried to use his left hand to free his right fist from her grip, but he was unable to do so. Fortunately, while the grip was strong, it was not painfully tight for Stan's right hand.
Stan demanded, “How are you so damn strong?”
Mikoto answered, “We didn't just inherit youth, and elemental powers from our parents. We are also stronger, faster, more agile, tougher, and have more endurance than you will ever have.”
Stan replied, “I wish I had known that sooner. I would have done things differently.”
Mikoto complimented, “Glad you are showing some intelligence in this fight. Now, if I was a sadist. I would burn your hand, right now. But instead, I will just throw you.”
Mikoto changed the grips she had on Stan. She grabbed the front of Stan's shirt with her right hand, while she let go of his right fist. She then quickly gripped Stan's right forearm, as she turned to her right, allowing her to throw Stan passed her, through the door way, and into the living room.
A split second later, Stan realized he was airborne.
A second later, he hit the marker board with Lewis' formula on it. As he knocked the marker board away, while he landed, he smudged a corner of the mathematical numbers and symbols.
Stan was still awake and aware of his surrounds, as he turned over onto his back.
Stan did a quick check of himself, to find that he was uninjured.
Then, he looked up and saw Yurika, whom has since found a towel, from a nearby bathroom.
As Yurika was drying off herself and her shirt, which she still wore, she looked down at him.
Yurika casually offered, “You know. You can surrender now. We didn't come here to hurt you.”
Stan asked, “Then, why the hell are you trying to electrocute us?”
Yurika cryptically answered, “We are just liberating you of your limitations.”
Stan remember an old movie quote from his father's video collection.
Stan began to get up, as he quipped, “A man has got to know his limitations.”
Yurika replied, “Good quote. But, you clearly don't know your limitations. We are just trying to free you over those limitations.”
Just then, they lost sight of each other, as smoke suddenly filled the room.
(_)
Several seconds earlier, in the kitchen, Nodoka approached Lewis, with her ice staff in both hands.
Nodoka saw that just as Lewis had seen where his brother landed.
Lewis then turned around, and he was quickly rummaging around in a nearby, kitchen drawer.
Nodoka smirked, as she casually, in a causal tone of voice, “You know you are out outmatched. So, what are you going to do now, nerd?”
Lewis pulled out a couple of items, that were in his right hand.
Lewis looked over at Nodoka, as he answered, “This.” He then threw down the items that were in his right hand, to the floor.
As the items hit the floor, Nodoka realized to late, that they were smoke bombs.
There was no explosions, as smoke flooded the entire floor of the home.
Lewis ran passed Nodoka and Mikoto, and into the living room.
Fortunately, Lewis had time to see where Stan had landed, and they live in their family home for so long, that Lewis didn't need his eyes know his way around his home.
As such, Lewis easily avoiding the furniture. He swiftly navigate the living room, as he gripped his brothers left wrist, with his right hand, as he pulled his now standing brother to the outside door.
And Lewis knew that it was his brother, and not one of the sisters, by the feel of Stan's cloth jacket, covering Stan's forearm.
When Lewis and Stan reached the door, Lewis used his left hand to quickly unlock, and open the door.
The brothers coughed a little on the smoke, as they swiftly exited the home, and heading down the outside stairs, and to their family car.
As the two brother safely reached the concrete floor, at the bottom the outside stairs, Stan congratulated his brother, “Thanks for the save, Lewis.”
By then, they were ten feet from where they had parked the car, in front of the home, on the crescent shaped, concrete driveway. With both ends of the driveway being on the road, and the middle of the driveway being set by the front of the home. There was even plants and bushes planted in the drive, between the two exits of the driveway, and to the sides of the driveway, and in the rest of the front yard. Except for the concrete pathway that lead to outside stairway, on the left side of the building.
As the two brother approached their red convertible, Lewis replied, “No problem. You drive.”
As the two brothers reached the car, Stan pulled out his keys, and used the electronic clicker to unlock the car doors, as he got into the right driver's side, and Lewis got into the left passenger side, of the car.
The red convertible's windows and roof were currently up.
A few seconds later, Stan has started the car. He then quickly had drove it forwards, as they exited the right side of the crescent shaped driveway. Next, Stan turned to his left, onto the empty two lane road of the neighborhood.
The neighborhood itself was a middle class neighborhood, with nice homes lining both sides of the street. With nice families living in the street. Though, it was late a night, and everyone was either gone, doing something in the city. Or, the were in their home, with doing something, or getting some sleep.
Lewis turned back to look at their home, as he asked, “What are we going to do now?
Stan continue to look down the road, as he drove. All the while, he slowly pushed the gas pedal further down, as the vehicle gained speed. He stated, “Let me think.”
Suddenly, Lewis saw with his own eyes, and Stan with the rearview mirrors, as the three sisters jumping through the living room windows and onto the front yard, with no signs of trouble.
The sister then turned towards them, and started running after the brothers, in their car.
Why keeping an eye on the road in front of him, and an eye in his rearview mirrors, Stan inquired, “Would it be a bad time to mention that Mikoto stated they were stronger, faster, and have more endurance than we do.”
Lewis answered, “No. It would not. I find knowing information. Any information. To be a good thing.”
Stan replied, “I agree.” Stan then noticed something about the sisters chasing them on foot. He answered, “Are they now doing what I think they are doing?”
Lewis replied, “Yes. They are getting closer.”
The sisters were gaining on them.
Fortunately, the road the they were on was a straightaway, with a traffic light two hundred yards down the road, from their location.
Stan smirked, as he commented, “Let's see if these girls can do ninety.”
Stan then pressed the gas pedal all the way down, making the car build up speed at a faster rate.
Lewis stated, “They are slowing down. They have stopped.”
Stan replied, “Good.”
Fortunately, the traffic light was green, and Stan slowed down, as he turned to his right side, and onto another street. He continued slowing down, as he finally was below the speed limit.
Meanwhile, Lewis turned around, to face the front of the car. He sat down in his seat, as he turned to his bother.
After a few more turns, they were a few miles from the house.
After Stan stopped at traffic light that was red, Stan turned to his brother, as he said, “Lewis, I have been thinking on your question. The solution is so simple, brother. We call for help. Surely someone we know is home. And if that fails, we hide with someone we know. Whom will help us. Until our parents come home, and we let them sort out this mess.”
Lewis responded, “Good idea. Now, let's find some pay vidphones we can use.”
As the light turned green, Stan pushed on the gas pedal, as he continued to drive to someplace they could make a few phone calls.
(_)
A few minutes age, on the two lane street that the Lowe family set beside, Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka were running towards the Lowe family car.
The three teenage girls then notice the car suddenly start to speed up very quickly.
Upon realizing this, Mikoto slowed down, as she ordered, “Girls. Stop.”
All three of them start slowing down, until they came to a safe stop.
When they did, none of them were winded.
Nodoka and Yurika turned to Mikoto, as Mikoto looked her two sisters.
Mikoto stated, “It is not worth chasing them. Though, we would likely catch them at a traffic light, or busy intersection. When we caught of with them, even with our abilities, we would likely be to exhausted to confront them. Or, we might spook them into causing a wreck, and we don't want them harmed.”
Yurika agreed, “You're right. And it was such a simple plan. Which was to show the boys that their normal life was a farce. And then show them the grand opportunities they have been willfully denied by their parents.”
Nodoka said, “Yea. And I hate it. when someone keeps secrets from their family members. And the plan was simple. We would tell them the truth. Explain both yours and their alien ancestry, and our abilities. Then, show them the gender bending abilities. Explain they have the same dormant abilities. Then, we would activate their genes, with a constant, low level shock from Yurika's abilities. And by doing all this, we would show them they have been living a lie.”
Nodoka turned to Yurika, as she continued, “Though, I am not that upset with you, Yurika. But, you messed up the order sis, and now we have them running away from us.”
Yurika turned to Nodoka, as she sadly replied, “True. This is on my head.”
Mikoto inquired, “Accidents happen. Yet, are we sure they can change genders? Even if their alien genes are activated?”
Yurika answered, “Yes. At one of the Lagoon bikini parties, I overheard Ed talking to our moms. She stated that genetic tests confirmed they could. And she was asking for our parents advice, should their gender abilities be triggered by accident.”
“I didn't get the whole story, but Ed stated that her sons secretly went to a nearby junkyard, when they were younger, and they built a working robot, together. She was worried that if they did that again, they might electrocute themselves, and not only trigger their abilities, but might get themselves seriously injured, or killed.”
Mikoto responded, “I guess our parents would be the ones to go to for advice on this.”
Nodoka stated, “Yes. They likely have the most experience in raising gender bending children. Outside of one of those gender bending plague worlds. And while, I disagree with them keeping secrets from their sons. I do admire that they care about the welfare of their sons. And it does show in the actions of towards sons.”
Mikoto commented, “Yes. Ed and Bob have raised to very well adjust teenage boys. But, that is part of the problem. They are not just teenage boys. They are latent gender benders.”
Yurika said, “True. And gender bending was so easy for us. Why would they not want to have their genes activated?”
Nodoka pointed out, “Well, we were three years old when we first started changing. I am sure that made things interesting for our parents. And our gender changing happened then due to our other powers manifesting. Because of this, we grew up thinking changing back and forth and between genders was normal.”
“At the time, we really did not know the emotional differences between girls and boys, when is came to behavior. In someways, we still don't know. And we forgot that these two are set as male in their minds. They view themselves as one gender. Seeing people that can change back and forth, between genders, like a change of clothes, is probably unsettling to them.”
Mikoto responded, “I think you might be right. And I think we were to vague on the latent gender bending abilities. I don't think they realize they could do the same things we can do.”
Nodoka commented, “That might be the case. Though, on that note, I am happy I don't change with water. And I only change gender at will. I am sure colds are no fun for either of you.”
Mikoto said, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Yea. You got lucky. Complete control and changing back and forth resets your cycle. While we have to be careful when we sneeze. Still, not having to deal with periods is nice.”
Nodoka said, “True. And we have so many other abilities, as well. Including, we will all remain young. It will just take a few years for your male sides to catch up with your female sides. And we checked. Unlike two of our parents, none of us will lock in one of our gender forms, because we will remain young in both forms. So, we got the best of all worlds.”
Yurika agreed, “I agree. Still, back to the brothers. I would not be surprised if they think women are weak.”
Mikoto pointed out, “I doubt that. We spent the last couple of days learning about them, from other people. We heard that Lewis has a female teacher whom he respects. And Stan treats his girlfriend well. Also, I think it is cute that Stan got his brother a date earlier tonight.”
Yurika agreed, “Yes. That was touching. Though, the worst part is we didn't get a chance to tell them about Bob's own abilities, and the events surrounding their birth.”
Nodoka commented, “Yes. The wonders of time dilation allow for it to only be a few months ago for us, when Ed and Bob both showed up at a Lagoon bikini party, with both of them pregnant. I am surprised that did not cause much of a discussion on the island.”
Mikoto pointed out, “Likely because is has been done to many times. It is an old hat.”
Nodoka shrugged, as she responded, “That is likely. And yet, we learned Ed, B, the Serenity crew, and Bob, with her youthful female side, secret. They were not coming as often as us. And for them, it was nearly eighteen years, when it was only several months for us.”
“They found the party schedule, and use to, they used the schedule, to adjust to their own time table.”
“And when we learned of this, we looked into the situation, and we found that our cousins has been completely cut off from what was going on. They had not be told, due to their parents misguided belief of trying to raise them to have a normal life.”
Yurika nodded a few times, as she stated, “I agree. The hypocrisy was just too great. That is why we are here. Still, there is no point in crying over spilled milk. We need to go talk to our parents and the brothers parents, before they find out on their own.”
Mikoto said, “We might as well head back to their home, and try to find something to salvage from this situation.”
Yurika pointed out, “I think I saw something that will help our argument that Bob and Ed's actions were a farce to their children.”
The three sisters them headed back to the Lowe family home.
(_)
A few minutes later, they had returned to the Lowe family home. The smoke has already dissipating completely.
The three teenage girls entered the second story living room, from open door to the entrance, on the outside stairway.
Nodoka shut and locked the outside door behind them.
Yurika looked around, and she quickly found what she was looking for. She walked over to something, leaned down, and pulled it up right. She said, “This is what I am talking about.”
It was the marker board with Lewis' mathematical formula.
Nodoka and Mikoto walked over to the board. With all three sisters looked at the formula, Nodoka stated, They must have been working on that before we came in. Still, this is beyond us. They truly are super-geniuses.”
Yurika commented, “I think this is that formula they were talking about at the diner. And from the looked of it, I think they cracked what they were working on.”
Mikoto pointed to the bottom right corner of the formula, that was smeared. She mentioned, “Part of it is missing.”
Nodoka stated, “Who cares? We can use this as our defense.”
Mikoto agreed, “True. Still, we are going to have pay for those windows. Though, since this is the second story, I doubt anyone is going to come in through those windows. From what we have learned about this place, this is a nice neighborhood.”
Yurika said, “Good point. And replacing the windows is a small matter. We have done a lot more stupider things than that in our lives, that our parents forgave us for. It is a good thing that aunt Ranma taught us how to do interior construction. We can buy the windows and install them without a problem.”
Nodoka stated, “Yea. That is understandable, considering when mom was a teenager, she, or he at the time, had to repair the home he was living in almost every other week.”
Three three girls giggled at Nodoka's comment.
As the sisters calmed down, Mikoto said, “Okay. We need to check that everything is turned off. I do not want this house to accidentally burn down. And check the outside locks, as well. Then, we will meet back here, and take the board with us.”
The three girls then split up.
After the three girls finished checking to make sure the outside doors were locked, everything was turned off, the girls returned to stand by the marker board.
They then moved the marker board to a clear space in the room, with the three of the continuing to stand by the marker board.
Nodoka commented, “Even though we all have a reality device, I will use mine to head to the Lagoon Island at the proper time, and place.”
The other two teenage girls nodded in acknowledgment, and agreement.
Nodoka then pulled out her reality device from her right, side pants pocket. She thought of the proper reality, place, and time, she needed to be on Lagoon Island. She then pressed the red button on her device. Then, she, her two sisters, and the marker board, disappeared, as they are instantly jumped to another reality.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, in another part of town, at a set of pay vidphones, Lewis and Stan were making phone calls to the adult friends they knew, that could help them out.
Their car was parked nearby, next to the curb of the street. Just in case they had to make a quick escape.
Stan was on one of the vidphones. A few seconds later, hung up his vidphone. He looked over at his brother, as he said, “B isn't answering her phone.”
Lewis hung up his vidphone, as he turned to his brother. He responded, in a disappointed tone of voice, “I just tried mom and dad's emergency contact number for the Serenity. No answer either.”
Stan inquired, “At least we got a hold Jet and Faye on the phone, earlier. But, they are on the other side of the system, and they cannot get to us in time. Still, where is everyone else?”
Lewis replied, “Don't ask me.”
Stan wondered out loud, “Who else can we go to for help? The police are not going to believe we were chased out of our home by weird, gender bending, superhuman, teenage girls. I would suggest my coach, but he has a family, and I don't want to bother him this late at night.”
Lewis suggested, “How about the professor? She is still probably at school. She says she enjoy the quiet there at night, as she grades her students' paper, on their freehand, mathematical formulas.”
Stan said, “Okay. We will try her. And should that fall through, then I will call the coach. And see if he will help us.”
Lewis stated, “I can agree with that.”
Lewis then turned to his vidphone, as he pulled out his ID card to pay for his next phone call, with a number that was a direct line to his professor's vidphone, on her office desk. He then held the receiver up to his right ear.
A few minutes later, Lewis got off the phone. He hung up the receiver, as he turned to his brother. He said, “She will meet us at her classroom, at the school. And we can get into the school, through the back entrance. Because, I have a key to those double-doors.”
Stan replied, “Good. Now, let's head over there.”
Both brothers then headed for to their family's car, which was parked nearby them.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, the two brothers reached the empty parking lot of their highschool.
Stan then parked their car, near the back entrance. The two brothers then got out of the car, and headed towards the back entrance to the school.
A minute later, Lewis used a key that Professor Cosupsir has secretly given him, to unlock the back double-doors to the school.
Lewis opened the right door, he thought, 'I have never. Not even once. Abused the privilege I had been given, by receiving this school key. And this is an emergency, so we should be okay.'
The two brothers then walked inside. And Lewis used his key to lock the doors behind them. Next, Lewis pocket his school key.
The two brother then made it to their physics teacher's classroom.
A few minutes later, they found the door to left, bottom floor entrance to Professor Cosupsir's classroom, to be open.
As they approached the door, they saw the room was still dimly lit by a lamp light, from the Professor's lamp, on her desk.
Stan was the first one to step into the room, as he jokely stated, “Knock. Knock. Anyone here?”
The professor, sitting behind her desk, grading papers, looked up at them. She stated, “Come in boys. And tell your teacher what is wrong.”
A few seconds later, the brothers to stand in of front of their teacher's desk. With Lewis standing to Stan's left side.
As they looked at their teacher, the white haired woman looked back at them, as she said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Lewis, on the phone, you said you were in trouble. But, you didn't elaborate. What happened?”
Lewis stated, “It has been a long night. I will start at the beginning. After we came home, we received a knock at the door. It was three teenage girls, whom wear our age. They claimed to be our distant cousins. And we were foolish enough to let them into our home.”
Cosupsir inquired, “Could you describe them? Did you get their names?”
Stan spoke up, as he answered for his brother, “Yes. There were athletic teenage girls. But, they had odd hair colors. The one with purple hair was named, Nodoka. The one with green hair was named, Yurika. The one with blue hair, with black highlights was named, Mikoto.”
The boys could have sworn that their teacher has muttered a single word, under her breath. The word they believed she said was, “Them.”
Stan said, “They claimed they were there to tell us secrets that our parents had kept from us. They even claimed our father was part alien.”
The professor raised an eyebrow in interest, as she questioned, with curiosity in her tone of voice, “Really?”
Stan answered, “Yes. And they had elemental superpowers. Like out of a comicbook. That is not the weirdest thing about them. They changed genders at will. Girl to boy, and back, in an instant. No illusion. They literally changed shape before our eyes. After that, a one sided fight happened, with us on the receiving in. Lewis, since you were the one that save us, you tell our professor the rest of the story.”
Lewis stated, “I got lucky, and I found some of our mother's smoke bombs. I used them to distract the girls, which allowed us to get outside, to our family car, and escaped. Later, we found a bank of vidphones, where we tried to call for help. We called everyone we knew. And they have either disappeared, or they are on the other side of the system.”
The professor slightly smiled, as she commented, in a joking manner, “Maybe they went to a party.”
Stan stated, “Either way. That is when Lewis suggested we call you. And I agreed. Our plan is simple. We would like to hide out with you, are your home, for the weekend. Until our parents are back Monday. We will then let them sort out this mess.”
Cosupsir complimented, “A simple, but effective plan. And I do not see a problem with you staying at my place. I do enjoy having company. Especially with those that are as intelligent as I am.”
Lewis said, “Good. While we are there. We can show you what we have done with the formula. With Stan's help, earlier tonight. I think we completed the formula. And I would love to run the numbers by you. You are the only other person, except for Stan, our mother, and I, that could understand the numbers. It would give us something to do.”
Lewis' comment gained the professor's undivided attention, as she asked, “You completed the formula?”
Lewis stated, “We think so. But, like all things. We need to double check our results.”
The professor coyly said, “That is great to hear. I look forward to reviewing your efforts. Still, it is time to make use of that knowledge.”
The professor the swiftly used her right hand to pull out a small stun gun from her dress. And she shot both boys with her weapon.
Both teenagers fell to the ground, unconscious. Though, they were unharmed.
The professor then got up from her seat. Walked to her left, around the desk. And she checked to make sure they were both unharmed.
After Cosupsir was sure the boys were fine. She learned back up straight. She looked down at the two brothers, as she smirked. She thought, 'Well, that went more easily than I expected. Now, to start the ball rolling on the next part of my plans. And I do love it when a plan comes together.'
'And I believe my two students are going to enjoy the next part of my plan. As an old acquaintance of mine would likely say. The next part of my plan will be out of this world.'
(_)
Hours passed, until the first sensation Stan felt as he returned to consciousness, was someone poking him in the chest.
While Stan opened his eyes, he realized he was sitting in a chair. The dim light in the room allowed him to see his surroundings. He saw a couple of people in strange, sci-fi black armor, and domed shaped black helmets. On of those individuals was standing right in front of him.
Stan thought, 'I guess that was the person that poked me. To wake me up. Now, to figure out what is going on.'
Stan quickly looked around to assess his situation.
Stan beyond the person that standing in front of him, he saw a person, in black armor, sitting in the seat in front of him. With another empty seat to the person's left side.
Beyond the armor seated person, there appear to be two seats, in a row, with people in black uniforms, sitting at cockpit. There was a large window in front of them, showing only stars. Meaning, they were in a ship.
Stan sarcastically thought, 'Great. We are in some sort of small ship. And we are in space. But, why did I still feel gravity? We are clearly not in a centrifuge.'
Stan then noticed that his hands were bound behind his back. As he tried to pull them around, he found that he could not, as he mentally noted, 'I am handcuffed.'
Stan looked around some more. Besides the window in front, there were not other windows.
There was a next hatch to Stan's right side, on the wall, right behind his chair.
While he could not see by himself, he did note that he was in a row two seat, with him in right seat, by the right wall of the hull of the ship. And Lewis in the other seat, to his left side.
Stan noticed that Lewis' hands were behind his back, as well.
And he noticed that Lewis was awake, with Lewis looking at him.
Stan thought, 'I see Lewis has his hands behind his back, as well. And I guess that person awoke both of us. Now, to check on my brother.'
Both brothers looked at each other, as Stan said, “Lewis?”
Lewis replied, “Stan?”
Just then, the guard that had awoke the brothers moved to sit down by the guard, in the row in front of the brothers. In the empty seat, in front of Lewis, on the left side of the ship.
With the guard sitting down, saw that the open aisle in the middle of the ship offered them a good view of the window in front of them.
Lewis commented, “I have a feeling that going to the professor was a bad idea.”
Stan complimented, “At least you are willing to openly admit to your mistakes.”
Both brothers then looked in front of them, and out the window, at the stars they saw in the distance.
Stan thought, 'Lewis and I are intelligent enough not to talk about escape while surrounded by those that are guarding us.'
Lewis asked, “Do you recognize any of those star constellations?”
Stan answered, “No. You?”
Lewis responded, “Me neither.”
Then, the ship pitched downward, and what window panned to something else that they could not believe they were seeing.
A fleet of ships in the distance that neither brother recognized.
There was so many, along with the window not showing all of them, that they could not count all the ships in front of them.
The ships in the distance were shaped a thick circular tube, with a giant thin cylinder stuck through the walls of the tube, until the cylinder exited opposite outer walls of the tube. Also, each of these ships covered in brown armor, and lots of large guns.
Lewis inquired, “Are you seeing this, Stan?”
Stan stated, “Yes, Lewis. Besides not recognizing the star constellations, I don't recognize any of these ships.”
Lewis said, “That is because, from the different constellations, and the look of those ships, and the gravity technology. We have either been captured by aliens from a distant star system. Or, we are not in the same reality. Given the work my professor had me doing dealt with reality travel. I am guessing we are not in the same reality, as our home reality.”
Stan replied, “That makes sense. Though, they look human.”
Lewis questioned, “I noticed that, as well. So, you going to finally admit that you believe in m-theory?”
Stan answered, “After this, brother, you made me a convert. I believe man. I believe.”
Lewis suggested, “Okay. We cannot do anything right now. So, let's see how this pans out.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
The brothers then became quiet, as the watched in disbelief, as they got closer to the in the window ships.
Over the course of minutes, as they got closer, the ships kept getting bigger. Until they started to pass by them, and the brothers realized that the ships could be measure in size, by kilometers.
Along with the very large ships, were slightly smaller ships that were the size of transport stations back in their home reality. Also, the brothers saw smaller shuttles and spacefighters fly by their ship, while in formation.
A couple of minutes later, the brothers overheard the pilots speaking to someone. They spoke in a language that the brothers had never heard before.
A few seconds after the starfighters flew by, the ship pitched to the right, as it headed for one of the very large, giant tube shaped spaceships.
Lewis and Stan watched though the front window, as they entered some a large shuttle bay of the large ship.
Stan asked, “Why does this remain me of the tractor beam scene of the Millennium Falcon, when the ship was being pulled into the Deathstar in Episode Four of the Star Wars movies?”
Lewis answered, “Because we are more screwed than they were. At least they had a jedi with them.”
Stan commented, “I would settle for a wookie, right now.”
Lewis countered, “Forget a wookie. R2 is the droid to go with.”
Stan agreed, “Good point. And that droid has seen a lot of action.”
The black armored guard seated in front of Lewis, got up. He walked into the aisle. He turned to face Lewis and Stan. With his right hand, he pointed with his right hand, at Lewis, and then at Stan. Next, he motioned for the brothers to looked at him.
The guard then held up his right index finger in front of his faceplate, to signal for the brothers to be quiet.
Both brothers nodded in acknowledgment, and the guard then returned to his chair.
Meanwhile, Stan and Lewis went silently, as they looked out the front window, Stan thought, 'I guess some body languages are universal.'
Half a minute later, the brothers felt as the shuttle they were riding in land.
A few seconds later, the hatch to Stan's right side automatically opened and lowered to the floor of the shuttle bay. With the door being located right behind Stan's seat, to his right side.
The guards stood up, as they motioned for the brothers to get up, as well.
Just as they brothers got up, as the guard that was seating in front of Stan, walked down the aisle, between Stan and Lewis. The guard then exited the hatch.
The other black armor guard, that had sat behind Lewis, point for the brothers to exit the ship.
Stan walked out of the ship first, then Lewis. With the other guard, that following behind Lewis.
The brother exited the shuttle, and walked down the steps of the hatch.
As the brothers set their feet onto the deck of the bay, they looked around. They saw they were in a very well lit, gigantic shuttle bay. There were several types of ships parked there, with people in different uniforms and armor, going about their jobs, in the shuttle bay.
The guard in front of them, turned around to face them. He pointed for them to follow him. He then turned back around, and started walking, as the brothers followed the guard.
The other guard that had been with the brothers, followed behind them.
The brothers walked side by side, with Lewis' so Stan's left side.
They soon passed though metal hallways, rode an elevator, passed through some more hallways, until they came to a door, which one of the front guard used a key in a code on a panel by the door.
The door slid open, as the guards lead the brothers inside the locked room.
The brothers saw that the room was very fifty feet deep, sixty feet while, and thirty feet wide.
The room was dimly lit by ceiling lights. But, there was plenty of light to see around the room. With no one light being brightly lit, but the number lights along the ceiling, that were lit, allow for plenty of illumination for those in the room.
Also, the room was very spared, with only a single black desk in the middle of the room, with a black, cushioned, arm chair behind the desk.
The walls had wall cloth tabards hanging on the walls. All the tabards showed the same symbol, which looked like the Soviet propaganda symbol, Beat the Whites with the Red Wedge.
The other other item worth noticed in the room with only a vase with white flowers on the left side of the desk, from the brother's current point of view.
The guards lead the brother to where they were standing beside each other, facing the black deck, which was ten feet away from them. With Lewis still standing to Stan's left side.
For the Lowe brothers, the most surprising part of their situation, was that the brothers saw that the person sitting in the desk, in her chair, was Professor Cosupsir, wearing black clothing.
The professor looked up at the brothers, as she smiled. She said, in a happy tone voice voice, in english, “Ah. I see you have finally arrived.”
She then stood up, and walked around the desk, to her right side, to greet them.
As the brothers got a full view of Professor Cosupsir, they saw she was wearing a black leather and armor suit, long coat. With only her head showing.
Cosupsir then spoke in the same language as the others, and suddenly, the guards took off the brothers' cuffs, and left the room.
The brothers brought their hands back around their front, as they rubbed their wrists and hands for a few seconds. They then dropped their hands back to their sides.
As the door slid closed behind the guards, the professor turned back to look at the brothers. With the brothers looking over at her.
The professor said, in a sincere tone of of voice, in english, “I apologize for the handcuffs. But, I did not want to risk either of you doing something unwise, right after you woke up. Still, are you hands and wrists alright?”
Lewis answered, “I am okay.”
Stan said, “Yes. My hands and wrists are fine.”
Lewis requested, “Professor Cosupsir, could you please explain why we are here? And who are you really?”
Stan commented, “Yea. I would like to know what is going on to?”
The professor smile turned into a smirk, as she spoke, in a calm manner, “Well, young Lewis, and young Stan, to start with, Cosupsir is not my real name. We will get to that in a minute. Normally, you would have been injected with translator microbes, so you could understand everyone. But, given your level of intelligence, along with your unique latent abilities, I thought it unwise to do so. Thus, I may sure that no such an injection did not happen to either of you.”
Stan stated, “Okay. We don't know what translator microbes are. And second. We are geniuses. Not mind readers. So, what is going on?”
Cosupsir just laughed. She then stated, “Boys. Boys. Boys. First, translator microbes are nanites that move to the brain of the person they are injected with. They allow for a person to understand the language of other cultures and species. They cannot be use to control a person. And they will not harm a normal human being. I know that as a fact. Given some humans have already used them, with no negative side-effects.”
“Now, as to your second question... Well, we have such great things ahead of us. As you can guess, I am not just a school teacher. And given the field of studying we have been all been working on, I am sure you have guessed that this is not your native reality.”
“My given name is, Scorpius. Cosupsir is just an anagram for my real name.”
“I am not human. I am Sebacean. An offshoot of the humans from this reality, that were taken tens of thousands of years ago, before modern civilization developed on Earth. To be specific, my people were taken by an ancient alien species. This is why the crew of these ships appear to be human. And while humans and Sebaceans can breed, and produce healthy offspring, there are differences when it comes to our blood and organs.”
“The aliens whom took the humans off of Earth, were known as the Eidolons. The Eidolons bio-engineered the humans they took, to become peacekeepers solders. To maintain order in the galaxy. And while most of the Eidolons have died out, the peacekeepers have continued their mission in maintaining order in the galaxy.'
Stan thought, 'Quoting Darth Vader is rarely a good thing.'
Scorpius continued, “And that is what we have become. Peacekeepers. We are one of the dominant powers in this galaxy. And a few years ago, due to myself being purged of... impurities... I found myself in a situation where I could finally take my rightful place as, Grand Chancellor, and leader of the Peacekeeper forces.”
Lewis stated, “Please understand, I am not disagreeing with you professor. I believe what you have said. But, I would think that running a galaxy wide nation would be a full time job. Where did you find the time to be a school teacher, as well?”
Scorpius explained, “A fair question, for those inexperienced of reality travel. Time dilation let me be in two places at once. The technology I have not only lets me jump to any reality, but also any place and time in that reality.”
“The technology allows myself to travel to another reality, or time, and spent as much time as I want there, and when I return. For those here, it is only five minutes after I left. So, this is also time travel.”
“And with my extended Sebacean longevity, which was further enhanced by a person named Chang, I have all the time I need.”
“Now, as to where we are. We are currently in my personal office, on the peacekeeper flagship command carrier, of my space fleet.”
Stan inquired, “If you could bring us anywhere? Why not just wake us up here? Why the tour?”
Scorpius smiled, as she stated, “To paraphrase what a friend of mine would likely say. A girl likes to show off what she has. I wanted you to understand that this is not a trick. No illusions. You are standing on an alien military spaceship. Surrounded by a fleet of similar ships. With stars constellations that you don't recognize. Crewed by people that do not speak a language you know, nor act like humans you know.”
Lewis stated, “Trust me, professor. Is it still okay if I call you, professor.”
Scorpius answered, “Sure. I do enjoy my role as your teacher.”
Lewis said, “Anyway, professor, we believe you.”
Scorpius saw Stan nodding in agreement.
Lewis inquired, “Still, do the peacekeepers control Earth of this reality?”
Scorpius responded, “No. I know for a fact that they barely even know aliens exist. I was there during their official first contact. For your next question. This is technically the past, compared to the time you existed in, in your native reality. Just under eighty years before your present time, in your reality. I believe you would call it, the early twenty-first century.”
Stan stated, “Okay, professor. You are an alien leader of a galaxy spanning empire, in another reality. I just have two questions. How did are our parents, and ourselves get involved in all this? And why did you choose us to work on the formula?”
Lewis spoke up, “Along with what my brother is asking. What is the big secret about our father that everyone is hiding from us?”
Scorpius complimented, “All good questions. I will start with the reasons I included you in my plans. It is simple. Resources and transportation. The problem is that even with reality technology we have now, we are still somewhat limited in a few ways.”
“Such as the energy that it takes to transport even a shuttle, is taxing on resources, in the long term. Outside of individual and small group travel, our current methods of travel are not efficient.”
Stan interrupted, “I can guess where this is going. All this is a plan to conquer to multiverse?”
Scorpius said, “No. Not to start with, I hope. I have seen what is out there, and my forces, though formidable, would likely not weathered in such a war. My plans are for commerce and knowledge. And to have such things, one must be able to have a reliable, though controllable from of travel. Giving everyone the small devices we use to reality travel would lead to chaos. What we need is a highway system between the realities. And while some such systems exist, they are hard to navigate, and nearly impossible to understand. That is where your reality's hyperspace gate system comes in.”
“It is doubtful that you realize this, but your reality did something that almost no other human species has ever done before, anywhere in the multiverse. I know. I have looked. Sure, there is warp travel. And spacial folding. But, for humanity to create a hyperspace gate system from the ground up is unheard of.”
“When it comes to hyperspace gate technology, humans and aliens species usually backwards engineer technology they found from the ruins of older aliens species. Most of these ancient, alien species have died out, or devolved to the point of being useless. And at their height of their civilization, they were very strict on what technology they shared outside of their species.”
“Also, these ancient aliens use esoteric styles of math as the basis of their technology. I have experience with such formulas, and they are extremely difficult to understand. Yet, unlike those formulas, the mathematical formulas for the hyperspace gate of your reality is so simple to understand that it is sublime in its simplicity and beauty.”
“I, and my science teams, have looked at the hyperspace gate system formulas of your realities. We all agree that the technology is workable, and could be used as a basis for a multiversal hyperspace gate system. Which could link much of the branch realities of this section of the multiverse. Also, the resources needed, and energy spent for using such a gate system would be very cost efficient.”
Lewis stated, “Okay. That explains your motives. But, I still don't see how we figure into you plans. You already have science teams that could work on this.”
Scorpius pointed out, “But, they lack your intelligence. I dare say, that at your full potential, either of you would even be more brilliant than I am.”
Stan said, “It is said that is it a high compliment for the student to receive, is for that student to surpass their teacher.”
Scorpius responded, “Quite true. And that is why you are here, Stan. You may lack the passion you brother has for the sciences, but you still have quite the talent for the such sciences.”
“Anyway, at the local date I arrived in you native reality, when I was looking in your reality's gate technology, I had learned that your family was currently living on Mars.”
“I had long since heard about you family. You of the Lowe family are quite the talk among several circles within the groups that travel the multiverse. Your parents made a lot of friends. And fortunately, very few enemies. You can thank Bob for that. He has always been diplomatic in his dealings with the people's of other realities. Even though, he has been caught in some very interesting situations in his life, that have effected the course of entire galaxies.”
“And when I looked into your lives, young men, I found out something interesting about the two of you. You have her mother's super-intellect, but you father's sanity. A wonderful combination. And I felt that given the gate technology was native to your home reality, as well. You both could be convinced to help me.”
'”Unfortunately, when I first met with you, four years ago, you were still young teenagers at the time. And you lacked proper education to help me. But, I realized that had the potential that would allow myself to teach you. So, in a clandestine manner, I subtly had your schooling being slowly increased to where your lessons would be helpful to the fine minds you both have. And my efforts have finally born fruit.”
Stan and Lewis looked at each other for a few seconds. They then looked back towards Scorpius, as Lewis commented, “I believe we missed a very important question, beforehand. How did you know about our reality in the first place.”
Scorpius said, “I was wondering how I was going to mention this fact to you. And you have just given me the perfect opportunity to explain. You may not realize this. But, this reality, and your reality. Along with every reality I, and the peacekeepers have charted, is a work of fiction of someone else's reality.”
Stan stated, “Okay. Gender benders I can grasp. They just make life more interesting.”
Scorpius couldn't hide her smirk.
Stan continued, “And realty travel. Sure. The math is there for it. We just never figured out how to do it locally. And galaxy spanning civilizations. Very possible. Neither of us are ignorant enough to believe that humanity is the center of the universe. Or, multiverse, as the case maybe. But, I find it very hard to believe that my reality, your reality, and all the realities you have been to are works of fiction.”
Lewis agreed, “Yes, professor. That is stretching it a bit.”
Scorpius let out a breath. She then stated, “I can understand, your skepticism. Still, you would likely find it intriguing to know that the fictional series that featured your reality, starred you mother, Ed, as one of the main characters. At the time, she was a child.”
“The series is a japanese anime that was made in other realities around the turn of the last millennium. The title for the series is called, Cowboy Bebop. And it is set In the year two-thousand seventy one of your reality's calendar. I have a copy of the series, for you both to watch it later.”
Lewis responded, “No thank you. I feel our sanity is being stretched to its limits, as is.”
Stan commented, “And I am not sure how I would emotionally handle such information.”
Scorpius agreed, “Wise points, young Lewis, and young Stan. And your father, Bob, has several secrets. Such as Bob is from another reality. When Bob was just a teenage video story clerk, in another reality, he accidentally got sent to this Cowboy Bebop reality. This event started his epic adventures across the multiverse. In addition, it is worthy noting that his home reality in an amalgamation of several fictional series.”
Stan asked, “I am not sure I believe you, but what reality is this?”
Scorpius answered, “I would like to tell you. But, I will decline to do so for right now.”
Scorpius thought, 'Though, I am happy I watched the Farscape series, and mini-series finale. I even read the comics that did not happen to me. Yet, I have to admire my counterparts style. And from watching my series, I realize how many things I did wrong. And I learned from those lessons. Such as how I am treating you two, right now.'
Stan muttered, “That figures.”
Scorpius commented, “But, I will say I learned a lot from my own mistakes by watching my own series, from a third party point of view.”
Lewis commented, “They say hindsight is twenty-twenty.”
Scorpius responded, “That is true. Now, onto Bob. Your father. Well, one of your fathers, at least.”
Stan inquired, “What do you mean? Are we half-brothers?”
Scorpius answered, “No. You are full blood brothers. But, I know this is going to be difficult for you to accept. So, I will walk you through it.”
Lewis spoke up, “Let me guess. This is the big secret.”
Scorpius replied, “Yes. As you human sometimes say. This one may floor you.”
The brothers looked at each other, as Stan said, “Not good.”
They then looked back at the white haired woman.
Scorpius explained, “To confirm some rumors I heard about your family, I needed some samples of your DNA. Getting your DNA samples from you two, was not hard. A strand of hair was all I needed from each of you. Unfortunately, given how perceptive your parents are, I made sure to have as little contact with them as possible. So, I could not get DNA samples from them. When I tested both your DNA, I found several odd results. Especially, when I compared the samples between the two of you.”
“Your chromosomal DNA shows that you are full blooded brothers, with no signs of any third parentage. But, when it comes to your parentage, your mitochondria DNA is reversed.”
The brothers realized those chromosomal test results can mean only one thing. And given what their cousins could do, it wasn't so impossible an explanation.
Stan questioned, “You are not saying?”
Lewis commented, “There is only one way that is possible.”
Scorpius stated, “Yes. You have the same parents. But, one of them is your mother and your father. And the other is your father and your mother. Your parents are gender benders. And I believe that medical equipment was used in your conceptions, given your parents obviously became pregnant at the same time.”
“Though, I suspect your mother, Ed, used a magical powder known as instant spring of drown man, to temporally become a man, to impregnate your father, as a woman.”
“On the other hand, your father, has a more permanent version of gender bending, like your cousins. And yes, it is caused by their shared alien heritage.”
“And no, the alien species in question is not Sebacean. I am not sure what alien species, or combination of multiple species, were needed to create that interesting ability.”
Stan put his right hand to his mouth, as he quietly said, “I feel like I want to vomit.”
Lewis used his left hand to rub the left side of his head, as he stated, “You are not the only one.”
Stan lowered his right hand, as he looked over at his teacher. He asked, “Do you know which of us, our father, Bob, gave birth too?”
Scorpius answered, “Sadly. No. As I said, I did not risk getting DNA samples from your parents. So, I have not way of comparing the results. Still, for any parent to be willing to go through pregnancy and birth, to have you, means they love you very much.”
Lewis dropped his left hand to his side, as he looked over at his teacher. He said, “We are not arguing over that fact. It has just been a very long day for us.”
While smiling, Scorpius replied, “I can appreciate that.”
Stan looked his right hand back to his side, as he turned to look at Lewis. He said, “At least we now know why we sometimes do not feel like we belong where we lived. Our father is from another reality. And he is part alien.”
Scorpius spoke up, “Only a small part. He is mostly human.”
Stan turned to Scorpius, as he stated, “Still, this is just too twisted to handle. It is just one bombshell after another.”
Scorpius commented, in a comforting tone of voice, “If it makes you feel any better. This is the last major revelation I have for you both.”
Stan replied, “Not really, but thank you for letting us now that this line of train wrecks have ended.”
Scorpius said, “You are welcome, young Stan.”
Lewis commented, “After learning so much, when this over, I am going to need months of therapy.”
Stan replied, “I don't know about you, but after this, I am planning to get as much alcohol as I can find, and spend the weekend in private with my girlfriend, to deal with this.”
Lewis turned to Stan, as he stated, “One thing is for sure. The next chance we get when we are together with our parents. We are going to have a very long discussion with them about the secrets they have withheld from us.”
Stan looked over at Lewis, as he responded, “Agreed. Also, this means we likely have different birthdays than we were told.”
Lewis agreed, “True. And you might not be the older brother. And that is one strange quark that dad has.”
Scorpius spoke up, “Actually, besides his genre savviness, and manners, it is the genetic genetic quark that I respect about your father. It proves how hybrids can be very interesting. Anyway, did the cousins inform you of the trigger?”
Lewis and Stan turned to Scorpius, as Lewis stated, “Yes. The trigger is sneezing.”
Scorpius said, “Good. At least you learned that. Your cousins, and their parents, are an energetic lot”
Lewis asked, “If the cousins is any example, then I am sure that is the case for their parents. The next question is. Who does our father look like as a woman?”
Scorpius answered, “From what I understand. This same genetic quark makes the alternate gender form be much younger counterpart version of themselves. As female, Bob looks like his own, younger twin sister.”
Stan inquired, “What do you mean, younger? Why do they appear younger in their alternate gender form. I noticed that with our cousins, as well.”
Scorpius said, “For your father, and cousins, when the gender bender reaches adulthood, they age normally in their original gender form, but remain young, in their twenties, in their alternate gender form. The gender they were not born as. Consequently, from what I also have been told, eventually, when the person reaches old age, they will involuntarily lock in their alternate, younger gender form, as a way for their body keep from dying of old age.”
Stan realized, as he commented, “That means that our hot, twenty something aunt, that came to visit, when our father was sick, was really our dad.”
Scorpius replied, “That is correct. Also, I believe that you should know that you both share this same genetic quark.”
The brothers became silent and still first a few seconds, as they absorb this current piece of information.
Stan then stated, “I do not want to be a girl.”
Lewis agreed, “Neither, do I.”
Scorpius said, in comforting tone of voice, “I would not worry. The gender shifting genes in you both are dormant. And from what I understand, the only way to turn the genes on is to be shocked with energy. Most likely electricity.”
Both brothers breathed a sigh of relief.
Lewis stated, “So, that is why mom and dad always kept us from working on electronics. They were afraid we would get shocked and...”
Stan continued for his brother, as he said, “I will give them credit on that one.”
The brothers then looked at each other, in horror, as they remembered what Yurika had tried to do to them, in their home, on a few hours ago, for them.
Lewis commented, “And that is why Yurika wanted to electrocute us.”
Stan stated, “We really dodged a bullet there.”
Lewis agreed, “Yea brother. We did.”
Scorpius commented, “Well, it looks like you have greater worries than being here. So, let us get down to business. I am looking forward to seeing that completed formula. I always knew that if you two worked together, you would be able to do accomplish this task. Though, even with that being the case. I did not wish to risk alienating you, young Stan, by attempting to wreck you sports curriculum.”
“So, I just waited, and hoped that when we got close. Lewis would either be able to accomplish this task, with my help. Or, Lewis would accomplish the formula on his own. Or, Lewis would eventually convince you, Stan, to help him complete the formula.”
“And I am happy that it was the last option. So, both of you can claim direct credit on completing formula.”
Scorpius thought, 'It is fortunate, that even through Ed and Bob learned of this forumla. They did not realize it was me that was the one that gave Lewis this idea. And while he was banned from working on it at his home. I just convinced him to work on it, at our school.'
Both brothers turned back to looked at Scorpius.
Stan stated, “Thank you. And I appreciate that you did not try to force me to work on the formula. Though...” He turned to Lewis, as he continued, “Though, since Lewis here is more your student than myself. I would prefer if he tells you what is going.”
Lewis turned to look at his brother. He said, “Thank you, Stan.”
The two brothers then looked at Scorpius.
Lewis commented, in a sad tone of voice, “I am sorry, professor. But, after all this. We cannot give you the proper formula, until we check in it private for a while. For any possible flaws in our formula.”
Stan said, “And by private, we mean not on this ship. Where our quarters could be bugged. But, at our home. Where we are sure our parents had swept our home of possible electronic bugs.”
Scorpius thought, 'I admit. That thought crossed my mind. But, I think it is best I not mention this to them. Especially, right now.'
Lewis went onto say, “We have very good reasons for being so cautious. If you know about the hyperspace gate system, then you know about its history. And how the first hyperspace gate explodes, literally tearing a chuck of the moon into an asteroid field that turned the Earth into a shooting gallery for the last several decades. And thus driving most of humanity from the Earth.”
“We are worried that if our math is not exactly right. And I do mean exactly right. We would cause another gate explosion, only this time across the multiverse. I think we can agree that would be a very bad thing to happen, for everyone involved.”
Scorpius turned to Stan, as she asked, “Do you feel the same way on this matter, Stan?”
Stan answered in a firm tone of voice, “Yes.”
Scorpius said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “I was worried you were both were going to say that. Well, until you change your minds, you both can cool your heels in the brig. Though, know that if one you decides to help, I will release both of you from the brig. And you are not my hostages. I have no interest in holding you for ransom, for you parents, nor someone else.”
Stan thought, 'That is a nice divide and conquer attempt. But, the stakes are too high for that to work. And Lewis and I know this.' He said, “I doubt we will change are minds on this matter, any time soon.”
Lewis firmly stated, “No, we are not.”
Scorpius replied, “I am disappointed to hear that, from both of you. And I do regret what I am about to do. But, it is necessary.”
Scorpius leaned over on the desk, and tapped a button on her desk computer terminal, to turn on the intercom. She then stated, in english, “Have the guards come to my office, to escort my guests to the brig.”
Stan thought, 'She used english for our benefit. And if those translator microbes are real, her subordinates will understand what she just said.'
Scorpius then press a button to turn of the communications.
As Scorpius leaned back up straight, she turned to the boys. She calmly said, “The guards will be here in a few seconds. I do hope you change your minds. There is still time to do so.”
Lewis commented, “Sadly, I do not think that is going to happen, professor.”
Stan inquired, “Let me guess, professor. Given the abilities of our cousins. You are physically more powerful than us, along with being better trained, and you could easily overpower us?”
Scorpius cracked a smile, as she complimented, “That is why I enjoy talking to intelligent people, such as yourselves. You clearly understand the situation.”
Lewis commented, “Yes. We do. And that is why were not going to fight you. The only thing we got going for us is being in your good graces.”
Scorpius continued smiling as she agreed, “Yes. And just for your information. I am not upset with either of you. You both made valid points. I just believe you are being too cautious. And that is why I am only sending you to the brig, instead of actually harming you. Perhaps you will change you minds on your own. And I will check on you, in a few hours. To see if you have decided to begin to view things my way.”
Less than a minute later, the door to Scorpius' office slid open.
Lewis, Stan, and Scorpius then turned to face the door.
They saw two guards, in black armor, and black domed helmets walked in. They had some sort of sci-fi pistols in the holster attached to the right sides of their belts.
Stan and Lewis did not struggled, as the guards pulled their wrists behind their backs, and cuffed them.
Scorpius ordered, in english, “Guard, do not harm these boys. Should these boys wish to contact me, allow them to do so. Also, have them share a cell. And please inform your coworkers of my orders.”
Stan though, 'Now, that was a nice gesture for our benefit.'
The guards stated something in their peacekeeper native language.
Lewis turned to Scorpius, as he said, “Thank you.”
Lewis and Stan turned around. And the guards then escorted them from the room, and towards a nearby brig.
Scorpius watched them leave. As the door slid shut behind them, Scorpius turned back to her desk.
Scorpius walked around her desk, and back to her seat, behind her desk. As she sat down, she thought, 'I will not do anything horrible to them. I even got rid of the aurora chair. In retrospect, that chair has caused me nothing but headaches, and trouble, in so many ways.'
'That is why I am using the approach of kindness, and patience, under my current leadership. Still, they do have a point about not wanting to have a multiverse gate explosion. I took the time to see what the gate explosion in their reality caused on that Earth's moon, and the Earth itself. That must have been an impressive explosion.'
'On a scale equal to one of John Crichton's more destructive actions So, I will have to check their math as well, before we do anything.'
'Just because they are being cautious, does not mean they are incorrect. The problem is just that they do not want to share their completed formula with me.'
'But, for now. I have other matters to attend to. While Commander Meka does a wondeful job of handling the day to day affairs of this ship, I do have a galatic nation to run.'
'But, I will check on the boys, in a few hours. As I promise.'
Scorpius then used her desk controls to contact the necessary people, for the moment. Whom she needed to contact. So, she could carry out her duties, as Grand Chancellor of the Peacekeepers.
(_)
Ten minutes later. After walking through a few hallways. And taking a few elevators. The boys were lead into a brig, where the guards opened a cell door, made of crisscrossed metal bars. They removed the brothers' cuffs, and directed them into a single, two bunk cell.
The beds were placed against the wall, one on top of the other. With enough space between the two, for the person in the bottom bunk to get in and out, without much difficulty. While, a person of average high could still reach, and climb onto the top bunk.
On the back wall, to the left of the bunks, there was also a toilet, toilet paper, and a sink, with a bar of soap.
As the cell door closed, and the boys walked over to the bottom bunk and sat down, beside each other, as they faced the cell bars.
Stan sat to Lewis right side.
They both continued to look at the cell bars in front of them, the hallway behind that, as Lewis said, “Perhaps, we should have just gone to seen the coach.”
Stan responded, “Nah. Now, that I think about it, with our luck, our coach would have turned out to be a retired government assassin from another reality.”
Lewis responded, “The sad part is, with everything that has happened in the last few hours, or so, I think you might be right.”
Stan stated, “Yea. You know, I think this all started when we built that junkyard robot, when we were twelve years old.”
Lewis commented, “I am beginning to agree with you.”
Stan said, “Yea. We built one eight feet tall robot in the local junk yard, it then went on a small rampage in said junkyard, and we never hear the end of it from our parents.”
Lewis responded, “Well, I still say the software we wrote was solid. It was a faulty solid state hard drive that caused the problems. Still, the mini-rampage happened in the junkyard. No one was harmed. No noticeable damage occurred. And the robot then severed its power cord, and then immediately shut down on its own.”
“And we then immediately took the robot apart.”
“The only reason we were caught was the junkyard owner saw us and what the robot did, and he called our parents on us.”
“Though, even dad found it cool that we actually had the abilities to build a robot, in the first place.”
Stan stated, “But, mom was furious. She grounded us for a month afterward. Forbid us from ever building another robot. And when she found out that we got the idea from watching dad's animation collection. She banned up from that collection for a year. While she also cut off our tv and computer time way down.”
Lewis said, “Internet withdraw is not fun.”
Stan commented, “No. It is isn't. I embraced sports as a way to deal with it. That, and I found sports to be a fun challenge. I mean science and math is just so easy for us.”
Lewis stated, “You're right. And that was why I was studying math and sciences from books all the time. I started studying high end level physics as a fun challenge. It was at a library, when I was doing just that, when Professor Cosupsir... I mean Professor Scorpius met me.”
Stan lamented, “And you then introduced her to me. Still, I found what mom did to be hypocritical, considering mom admitted that she hacked the computer systems of an entire planet when she was that age.”
Lewis agreed, “No argument there. To compound mom's hypocrisy, it is clear the real reason they didn't want us to build a robot was that we might have accidentally shocked ourselves, and ended up with the same problem as our cousins, and dad. If mom and dad, had actually explained that to us, we would have been more than happy to have not work on robots.”
Stan said, “True. The secrets just keep getting deeper with them.”
Lewis suggested, “Yes. It is sad. But, now that we know the truth about our alien genes, we can take precautions. Also, we may want to look into building some robots, if we have the opportunity to, as a way help us fight against our enemies.”
Stan replied, “That is not a bad idea. Though, this time, let's use quality parts. Including a stable solid state hard drive.”
Lewis smiled, as he said, “You got that right.”
The brothers then heard, a female voice, from the cell next to theirs, to their right sides, say, in english, “Hello. Who is there?”
Stan and Lewis looked at each other, as Lewis commented, “She knows english. You talk to her. You have better luck with women.”
Stan smiled, as he replied, “Thanks.” He then stated, in a slightly louder tone of voice, “You speak english.”
The woman questioned, “Yes. Who are you?”
Stan answered, “I doubt you would know us. We are find another reality.”
The woman responded, “I am, as well. So, informing me will not hurt your situation.”
Stan stated, “My name is Stan Lowe. I am with my brother, Lewis Lowe.”
The woman asked, with disbelief in her voice, “Ed and Bob's children?”
Lewis spoke up, in a slightly loud tone of voice, “You do know us?!”
The woman answered, “Yes. How did you end up here?”
Lewis explained, “Long story short. Our highschool physics professor on Mars turned out to be leader of these people. She kidnapped and brought us here.”
The woman inquired, “Is her name, Scorpius?”
Lewis answered, “Yes.”
The woman said, “Damn. You boys are in trouble. Serious trouble.”
Stan stated, “We realize that. So, how did you end up in here?”
The woman stated, “It is likely a longer story. I heard some rumors about what Scorpius was doing here, and I wanted to check those rumors out. But, when I snuck onto this ship, I got caught. I only let myself be captured because it would buy me more time, since Scorpius would be less likely to be informed of an intruder, than when the alarm sounded for a battle.”
Lewis agreed, “That makes sense.”
The woman went onto say, “But, now that you two are here. We have to get you out of here. Whatever Scorpius has planned for you, it cannot be good.”
Stan pointed out, “Easier said than done. First, you have to have the means to break out of your cell. Then, you have to fight you way through a literal army. Next, find a way to escape. And finally, find a way to leave this reality.”
The boys heard a snap-hiss, and then some metal hitting the floor.
A few second later, the cell door opened, and the woman they had been talking to walked over to stand in the hallway, right in front of their cells. With the woman facing them.
The woman had a slender, athletic build, with fair skin. In age, she appeared to be in her mid-twenties. She had brown hair, which was cut short, to her shoulder line. She wore a white loose shirt, loose brown pants, brown belt, brown leather laced shoes that were tied, and a loose brown robe over her clothing.
That was not the strangest part about her. She seemed to be holding a red bladed lightsaber in her right hand. Though, she had a calm expression on her face.
The woman smirked, as she stated, “Well boys, you are in luck. I have done this so many times, that I know it by heart. I sense that we have about half a minute before they get here, and the battle begins.”
Stan thought, 'Our parents taught us that if someone is doing something strange, while trying to help us, for us to not comment on it. And I, and I am sure Lewis, happen to agree with them on this matter. Well, it looks like it is time for us to get out of here.'
The boys quickly stood up from the bottom bunk, and walked towards her, as Lewis inquired, “So, you have precognition abilities?”
The woman answered, “Yes.”
As Stan and Lewis walked out of the cell, and up to stand a few feet from her, Stan commented, “That must be nice.”
The woman continued smiling, as she said, “It has saved my hide more times than I can count.”
Lewis stated, “Thank you for your help.”
The woman said, “No problem. I am happy to help Ed and Bob's kids.”
Stan asked, “How well do you know our parents?”
Annie answered, “I know them very well. And I am good friends with both of them, but now is not the time to talk about such matters.”
Stan mentally complained, 'More damn secrets. Still, given how cliché this escape looks to be going, I might as well ask.' He asked, “Ms. Please tell me that your escape plan does not including going through the garbage chute?”
Annie groaned, as she muttered, under her breath, to the point the brothers barely heard her say, “Why does everyone joke about those movies?” She then turned to the brothers, as she answered, “No. I have already done that way too many times. And I was never able to get the garbage smell out of my clothing.”
Stan responded, “That is what I was concerned about. I like my jacket too much to throw it away after this escape. And glad to hear that is not your plan.”
Lewis commented, “Though, I do hope you have a plan.”
The woman said, “Don't worry boys. I do have a plan. And I will get you out of here.”
Lewis replied, “By the way, what is your name?”
Annie answered, “Annie. And remember my name. It is going to be very important, later on. Now, come on. The sooner we get out of here, the sooner we can get you back to your parents.”
Annie turned and started walking toward the main door to the brig, as the brothers follow her. With both of the boy certain they were about to walk into a battle unarmed, and untrained. But, they also realized they had no choice in the matter.
Stan stated, “Looks like we have an adventure, whether we like it, or not.”
Lewis commented, “Let's just hope we survive this adventure.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
Annie continued walking, with her back turned to the brothers, as she stated, “Don't worry. I have escorted others with no combat experience through worse battles before. Just stick close behind me, and you both should be fine.”
Both brothers said, in unison, “Yes ma'am.” They then did as they were instructed to do so, by Annie. As they caught up to her.
And in doing so, the brothers took a giant step forward towards their destinies.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
I had a lot of fun writing this chapter. Especially, the beginning scenes. From showing what happened to Shane Caxton. To the beginning game scenes, and the school room scenes, to the diner scenes.
On Shane Caxton. Of the entire Black Lagoon cast, I find him to be one of the most has a sense of personal responsibility and integrity.
When Shane learned from Garcia what he had killed the wrong person. Which, it could be viewed that he realized that he was lied to about the targets of those mission. He stopped his men from killing Garcia. And he then gave Garcia his pistol to choose to kill him.
Then, when Roberta show up, he and his men protected Garcia from her.
Later, Shane and his men did Rock's plan to save Roberta, while completely their mission. They were able to do both, though they suffered casualties.
And finally, in the anime, Shane is last seen at the entrance of the Lovelace home, in Venezuela, helping the Lovelace family.
Shane is likely the most positive example of concept, honor before reason, I have ever seen. Therefore, I believed that he deserved a chance at a good life.
I know people in real life that have a similar personality as Shane, when it comes to responsibility and integrity.
As such, I had to get Shane out of Chang's line of fire in Book Two. So, I made sure he would end up somewhere in the multiverse that Chang could not track him too.
I also gave Shane a loving wife, nice children, good friends, and a pleasant job.
Now, why I gave Shane the job of a american style football high school coach. I had a few reasons.
Given most of the culture the Cowboy Bebop series is a mix of U.S. and Chinese culture, it makes sense that american style football would survive as a sport.
Shane seems like he would have the personality, interest, and ability to be a high school american style football coach.
And it allowed me to make Stan a football player. I came up with the nickname, 'linebreaker' for Stan. And I liked it. Because it solved two problem.
First, I figured out what sport Stan would play. And it showed that he was so good at that sport that he has a nickname.
Second, it also shows that Stan is on the defensive line. Not, the offensive line. So, I avoid the cliché of making Stan the quarterback.
Though, Stan is dating a cheerleader.
Also, both Stan and Lewis' looks are decent. Not very handsome, but they are nowhere near being ugly.
I found the more entertaining scenes in this chapter, for me, is when the brothers meet the sisters, and find out the sisters' secret, along with the brothers learning they are out matched, to the escape scene, and after the capture scene, where the brother realize they are no in Kansas anymore. On, in this case, Mars anymore.
Also, the concept for the multiversal hyper-space gate formula was interesting to create. And given Scorpius' fascination with wormholes, the Cowboy Bebop reality hyper-space gate, and the math behind it, would be right up her alley.
Though, after the wormhole weapon event, at the end of the Farscape Peacekeeper Wars mini-series. It would make sense that
But, travel and commence are a completely different matter.
And I think most of you would agree, now being a young, healthy, pure Sebacean, with her intelligence and cunning, Scorpius would have no problems taking control of the Peacekeepers.
And while Scorpius is now female. She considers her gender change a good trade off for her now healthy, Scarran free body. And she considers her beauty to be a nice bonus out of the change.
On the formula itself. There is a very good reason why Stan and Lewis are fearful of making a mistake on the math. Because, if the math was incorrect on the formula, and people used to to create a multiversal gate system, it could lead to another gate explosion. Only, an explosion far more destructive than the hyperspace gate explosion, that destroyed a chuck of Earth's Moon in the Cowboy Bebop reality.
Stan and Lewis know they are playing with fire. And they are being very careful about the situation. This is way they are all about taking their time of the formula, and getting it right the first time.
And even Scorpius will admit to herself that she needs make sure the formula is correct, before she tries to apply it.
On a related subject. Yes. Like Bob use to be. Stan and Lewis are latent gender benders. And they did not know this, until Scorpius told them. Though, they had so much on their minds, they have not yet had time to fully appreciate their situation.
Now, given who Stan is. I figured giving him the number, “69”, for his team number, on his jacket, works on several levels.
Yes. That is a symbol of a sexual position. But, “69” can be view also a reverse of the Taoism Yin/Yang symbol.
And I could not think of a more fitting number to give to a latent gender bender.
On Annie infiltrating Scorpius' flagship command carrier.
Given Annie use to Anakin Skywalker, with her power, abilities, and personality, she the person mostly likely to go out alone, and check on what Scorpius is up to.
And yes, Scorpius realizes who Annie is. And she will be careful in her dealings with Annie.
Also, once Annie realized that Lewis and Stan were present. And given they were the children of her friends, she had to change her mission to rescuing them.
And yes. There is a running gag, that Annie of having to deal people cracking Star Wars jokes, in her presence, with some of those jokes being at her expense.
Though, she hasn't harmed anyone, over the matter, yet.
Yet, one would have to be crazy knowingly tease a woman that use to be Darth Vader. Unfortunately, most of the cast is likely passed being crazy, and they are just flat out insane.
Now, on the matter of Scorpius herself. Since the gender change in Book Two. Scorpius has done very well for herself. And without her Scarran side, she is much more calmer, than she use to be. This makes her far, far more dangerous. As you will find out in future chapters of Book Four.
But, like Scorpius in Farscape, Scorpius in my story is not completely evil, so much as morally ambiguous. Though, Scorpius has learned that torture will not get what she wants. So, she no longer does that.
Also, Scorpius has gotten even better adjusting her plans according to her needs. And Scorpius was already a master of this before. And she is even better now.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Two: “Sunny Insanity.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Farscape Reality, Place, Peacekeeper Armada, aboard Scorpius' flagship command carrier.
It has been twenty minutes since the break out, as the brothers followed closely behind Annie.
The three of them made their way through hallways and stairwell, as Annie battled her way through wave after wave of black armor, and domed helmet clad, pulse rifle armed, peacekeeper security forces.
Annie used her red bladed lightsaber to both deflect blasts, from both her and the brothers, while using the lightsaber to also cut into her enemies. Annie also used, what the brother guess was, telekinesis to deal with the peacekeepers that were too far away for from her lightsaber.
Currently, Stan, Lewis, and Annie, remained unharmed
Stan whispered, “I am glad she is on our side.”
Lewis softly replied, “I agree. She is a walking killing machine.”
Just then, Annie had dealt with the security forces that had been in the room.
As the three walked through another hatch, and into another hallway. Stan thought, 'Considering fictional realities exist. And the way she is using the energy sword, with the telekinesis. I have to ask.”
Stan questioned, “You are like a jedi from Star Wars? Aren't you?”
Stan thought, 'Even with the red energy blade, she could not be a Sith. A Sith would not help us.'
Without turning to face the brothers, Annie laughed, as she continued walking. She then said, “Your parents didn't tell you anything? Did they?”
Lewis deadpanned, “Apparently not.”
Then, the next wave of peacekeepers showed up, and Annie fought them.
As Annie used her lightsaber to deflect the pulse blasts back on the attackers, killing them, thought the force, she sense they were about to flanked.
Fortunately, Annie had killed all, but one, of the attackers. Whom was to far away to kill with her melee skills.
Annie used her telekinesis to knock the peacekeeper around, on her feet, so the guard could not her pulse rifle to shot at them.
Annie threw lightsaber, as she turned back towards the brothers. She used the force to close the hatch they had just passed through, and warp the door, so it could not open.
Meanwhile, the brothers watched as the spinning red lightsaber head towards the peacekeeper.
As the peacekeeper turned around, the peacekeeper had just enough time to see the lightsaber blade decapitate her.
While the dead peacekeeper fell to the ground, and spinning lightsaber returned towards them as like a boomerang.
As the lightsaber came within fifteen feet of them, it began to slow down as it stopped spinning, with the blade pointing away from them.
At the same time, Annie turned around to face the lightsaber. She held out her right hand, and the hilt of the lightsaber slid effortlessly into the grip of her right hand.
Annie then sensed no immediate danger. She pointed her lightsaber directly down to her right side, as she turned to face the brothers. She asked, in a casual tone of voice, “So, boys, how big of fans are you to the Star Wars movies and others series, are you?”
Lewis answered, “We used to be really into Star Wars, when we were kids. But eventually, other priorities forced us to slack off on such hobbies.”
Annie inquired, “Fair enough. Any questions you have about Star Wars?”
Stat stated, “The only issue we have left, when it comes to Star Wars, is we could not decide who of the main characters was the better starfighter pilot. I say it was, Luke Skywalker. He is younger, and more healthier.”
Lewis spoke up, “I say it was, Darth Vader. He just has more experience.”
Annie answered, “Luke is the better pilot. He is better at remaining calm under pressure. That is a useful trait to have... Vader has always had trouble with that ability. Trust me on this. I know. Now, I believe the nearest shuttle bay is about fifty meters this way.”
Annie then turned and started walking the hallway in front of them, as the boys followed close behind her.
(_)
Meanwhile, in Scorpius' office, Scorpius was sitting in her chair, behind her desk, as she was getting regular reports of the jail break, which started just minutes after the break out, from a nearby brig, on her flagship.
Scorpius mentally berated herself in disappointment, 'I should have seen this coming. I honestly should have. This situation was staring me in the face, and I missed it. I have long since studied all the pop-culture that John was raised on. Which made him the crazy awesome individual I got to know so well.'
'Speaking of the term, crazy awesome, I even read up on that website, Tvtropes. I especially found the Evil Overlord List to be enlightening.'
'Though, humanity is not as technologically advanced as us, we have seriously underestimated the intelligence, wisdom, and creativity that humanity has attained, as whole.'
'I have to admit to myself, I was tempted to put the brothers into a VIP suite, in the command carrier, with several beautiful whores, to give them a night's entertainment. They would have been eating out of my hands by morning.'
'Still, I considered that doing so would be tasteless. Corrupting them like that would just not be right. I am not Grayza. Speaking of which, killing that bitch made my day.'
'Besides being purged of my Scarran side, and becoming a pure blooded Sebacean. I consider watching the Farscape Peacekeeper mini-series finale to be a major turning point in my takeover of the peacekeepers.'
'The Farscape series allowed me to learn from my mistakes in ways I previously was unable to do so. And the mini-series showed so much. Such as never give a pregnant woman, going through labor, a loaded weapon.'
'Also, the mini-series showed that political assassinations can backfire, when they are fully documented.'
'While, I could not use the mini-series itself as evidence, it did point me in the directions I needed to gather evidence.'
'It is not surprising that Grayza was able to get her hooks into Grand Chancellor Maryk. With that implanted gland in her body, in her chest, that produced heppel oil.'
'As John would likely say. If John, with his incredible will power, could fall under the influence of heppel oil, for a time. Then, Maryk would be putty in Grayza's hands. I am not sure when she first came to influence Maryk. But, I believe that much of her support in the peacekeeper command structure, came from the strings she used to pull Maryk with.'
'Though, the alluring effects of heppel oil, on its victims is temporary. And a victim does slowly build a tolerance to the effects of heppel oil.'
'Grayza likely poison Maryk because he was building a tolerance to heppel oil. And he would eventually come to his senses.'
'Still, Grayza should have not used poison to murder Grand Chancellor Maryk. Even if she disposed of his body, afterward. Maryk was many things. But, he was not a fool. Though, he tastes in women were questionable, and ultimately proved fatal for him. But, I have had similar experiences. Such as Natira and Sikozu.'
'Fortunately, I survived such betrayals because I believe in being prepared for anything.'
'While, I did not agree with many of Maryk's policies. He was a good leader for the Peacekeepers. And I feel that many of the policies that I disagreed with, which he supported, had originated from Grayza.'
'Also, Maryk knew, that given his position, that someone may try to kill him at the least expected moment. And he was proven correct.'
'Years ago, Maryk had an implant put into him, that constantly monitored his vital, and scanned for any poisons. To my knowledge, only a handful of people know of this implant. Such as Maryk's personal doctor.'
'Clearly, Grayza did not know of this implant, or she would have covered her tracks more thoroughly. I only knew of this, due to my diligence of studying every angle I could, in maintaining my command authority within the Peacekeepers.'
'Given the circumstances of his death, those monitoring his vitals quickly realized that they had just witnessed a coup. And they wisely escaped in the confusion of the Peacekeeper-Scarran War.'
'Still, finding out who was there. Who knew. Who left. And tracking them down was not too difficult for someone of my abilities. And they were more than willing to provide the records of Maryk's death, in exchange for their protection. I gave them the protection they desired, in exchanged for the records.'
'All of the witnesses whom helped me were rewarded. They are now wealthy, and living in hiding on some of the much better worlds in Peacekeeper controlled space.'
'With the evidence in hand. I then pulled together those that would support me. Fortunately, Grayza had made a lot of enemies within the Peacekeeper hierarchy, and it was not very difficult to pull together a secret coalition to deal with her.'
'After I garnered the needed support within the Peacekeeper organization, we confronted Grayza. Since the records of Maryk's death showed he had consumed liquid right before his death, and when we found a non-traceable poison that caused the exact type of death he had, within Grayza's personal quarters, her guilt was confirmed.'
'There was a secret trial, and she was soon executed. Though publicly, her death was reported to be a shuttle accident.'
'After her death, I found that becoming Grand Chancellor was even more easier than I suspected. Ironically, Grayza has already done most of the work for me.'
'During the full annual cycle, in which Grayza controlled the Peacekeepers. She replaced most of upper level ranks of the Peacekeepers with those completely loyal to her.'
'The lower level ranking Peacekeepers had to be forced to watch as those officers they respected were replaced with sycophants that was solely loyal to Grayza, and not the Peacekeepers.'
'Those that were replaced were either forced into retirement, demoted in rank, reassigned away from her power base, or killed outright in ways that were made to look like accidents, or health related deaths.'
'I, and my crew, were some of the first to be dealt with these reassignments. Given how much I have survived, Grayza knew better than to try to kill me. And she knew I would not retire. Along with this, I still has enough influence to prevent from being demoted in rank. Especially, since I had a direct part in stopping the Peacekeeper-Scarran War.'
'So, Grayza just had my commander carrier reassigned to the Peacekeeper-Scarran border, to see if the Scarrans had better luck with killing me.'
'This was when Chang's second in command, Lotton, found me. When he first appeared in my personal quarters, unannounced, I was more intrigued than anything else. Given my ability to see heat, which I kept with the change, along with my intelligence, strength, and a few other things, I could immediately tell that he was a human.'
'I asked how he just appeared out of nowhere. He gladly answered my question. He then explained who he was. Where he was from. Whom he worked for.'
'Lotton then made his offer. He would help me, in exchange for advice on dealing with John. Then, he explained why he knew so much about me. That I and my entire reality was the work of human fiction.'
'I did not fully believe Lotton's claim of my reality being human fiction. But, he then offered to bring me evidence. I allowed him to leave. He returned roughly two hundred microts later, with a human lap top computer, a large box of disc, a smaller box with discs, a power cord for the computer, a power adapter.'
'Though, I had to modified the power adapter, to allow me to use the electricity the peacekeeper technology used, to safely power the human computer. Though, for a person of my talents. This was surprisingly easy, and quick, task to accomplish.'
'While Lotton presented me with those gifts, he explained the computer was so I could view the discs. He explained the large box was the Farscape series. The small box contained the mini-series finale to Farscape. That this was the fictional series of my reality. He did warn me watching this could break my sanity.
Also, he stated he would return in seven solar days for my answer to his offer. To give me time to think on his offer.'
'As soon as I had the power adapter modified, and the computer turned on, and logged in. In the privacy of my own office. I began watching the Farscape series, from the first episode. And I soon realized Lotton's claims were correct.'
'Due my duties. And needed rest, and other activities. I could not watch the series all the time. As such, it took me six solar days to watch the entire series. And my sanity did take a few minor hits. But, I did learn a lot about John, the others, and myself. Including, my mistakes.'
'Seven solar days after Lotton left, he returned to my personal quarters. I told him that I accepted his offer.'
'Lotton then took me to Chang's tower. Where I talked to Chang. And the three of us. Lotton, Chang, and myself, finalized our bargain.'
'And what Lotton and Chang offered me was beyond even my greatest desires. What they delivered was even greater than I had hoped.'
'I found having my gender changed to a woman was a small price to pay for being purged of my Scarran side. I am now a pure, healthy Sebacean, and I looked like healthy Sebacean, as well. I even resembled my mother in appearance. But, I kept all my strengthens, and Chang's process even extended made a younger adult women, gave me greater health, and increase my longevity.'
'All in all, I was very happy with the results. And I consider it a bonus that I am now very pleasing to the eyes of others.'
'I gained so much in return for so little.'
'Along with changes to my body. By helping Lotton and Chang, I was given access to the reality jumping technology and research. And that was just the start of what I learned while in Chang's Tower. The other technology and knowledge was just as valuable.'
'When Chang's organization fell, I escaped with the technology and knowledge I acquired. Taking it back to my Command Carrier. For those on my Carrier, I was only gone for two hundred microts.'
'Though, convincing Captain Braca, and the others of the crew, of who I was, was a bit of a chore. But, once that was achieved, I realized I could implement my plan for taking over the Peacekeepers from Grayza.'
'Originally, due to my nature as a hybrid, I had planned to either put Captain Braca, or someone else in charge the Peacekeepers. They did not even have to be a puppet, as long as someone competent was in charge of the Peacekeepers, that was all that mattered to me. And I was sure that Braca could have done the job.'
'Though, now that I had been purged of my Scarran side, I could take the reigns of leadership myself. I made sure that I pass the purity tests. I checked three times. With every test I could find on the matter. The test results were always the same. That I was now a pure Sebacean.'
'Next, before word got back to Grayza of my change, I rounded up all the high ranking Peacekeeper officers that had weathered her political purges, and whom would like to help replace her.'
'Arranging this meeting, in secret, and quickly, was easy enough. I just used one of Chang's new small reality jump devices. This allowed me all the time I needed to bring them together, and meet with them. With them on being gone from their posts for a few hundred microts. A hardly noticeable amount of time.'
'When I had these officers together, along with Braca, I made my offer. I would give the peacekeepers the reality technology, which they had just seen used, first hand, along with other technology to the Peacekeepers. In exchange for their help in removing Grayza, and lending me their support for becoming the next Grand Chancellor of the Peacekeepers, for one solar cycle. Should, I do a good job, they would continue to support of myself, as their leader, for the foreseeable future.'
'Everyone there knew that I was a man... And I guess now, woman of my word. I stated that if I failed in my duties as leader of the peacekeepers, I would resigned from the position, on my own.'
'Fortunately, my intelligence, loyalty, and leadership were never in question. My weapons breakthroughs spoke for themselves. I had some of the best genuine crew evaluations in the fleet. And my leadership in battle and politics was well respected. Even though I left my post, I did so to save the Peacekeepers from destruction from the Scarrans. And my actions saved the Peacekeepers from a losing to the Scarrans. So, I was not reprimanded my absence. Nor, did those at the meeting, hold my actions against me.'
'And the technology I was offering them was too tempting to pass up.'
'I even offered the evidence of how Grayza had murdered Maryk, to take over the peacekeepers. Once those present learned of this, they were further displeased with Grayza.'
'Their one worry was about the fact that I was a hybrid.'
'But, I pointed out that given my changed appearance, the question of me being a hybrid was put into question.'
'I think willingly submitted myself to spend three days of being subject to every test the officers could think of, to both prove that I was Scorpius, and now a pure Sebacean.'
'Though, this was an unpleasant experience, is necessary for my goals. And once it was established that I was Scorpius and now a pure Sebacean woman, they accept my offer.'
'With the help of the reality devices, and my new allies, I was able to collect the further evidence to condemn Grayza, revoke her authority, try her for treason, and have her executed by firing squad. And I personally made sure the body was hers, before I personally incinerated her body.'
'Removing her subordinates was not a problem. Though, I realized that having them killed might poison my relationship with my new allies. Instead, I decided to just have this discharged from peacekeepers service. While, I did make sure to keep tabs on the more troublesome ones.'
'Then, I started to rebuild the Peacekeepers. Along with giving assignments that my new allies could handle. And I tracked down a brought back a number of Peacekeeper officers that were forced into retirements. I reinstated their ranks, authority, and position. This ingratiated them to me. Making them loyal to me, as well. And this help my authority with those whom were loyal to those I reinstated.'
'For those that helped my rise to power, whom that I could not find a direct place for in my command. I either gave them planetary governorships. Or, I would simply make sure they had a wonder retirements, where they and their families would be well taken of. None of them were unhappy with these offers. And this reinforced my relationship with my allies, and those that still influenced in my chain of command.'
'Also, I began research in the reality technology, and other technologies I had taken from Chang. And the Peacekeepers intelligence branch started to clandestinely chart the multiverse.'
'I was careful not to make the same mistakes as Chang did. I did not steal from the multiverse, I only had the multiverse studied and charted. I did not want to end up a hedonist like Chang.'
'Though, during my time in Chang's tower, I quickly realized that Chang changed herself into a woman. With her using a cyberdroid double, that looked like her male form. I even learned that the fictional series she and the reality her Tower was located in, was title the Black Lagoon anime. Which I have a copies of. And I have watched. Including, the english dub version, that I learned many of those from that series, prefer, over the original japanese dialogue, considering know english, and not japanese. With I find amusing, on several levels.'
'I have even collected the nine Black Lagoon mange volumes, and read them, as well.'
'When the Scarrans learned I was now in charge Peacekeepers, my appointed to the position of Grand Chancellor nearly started a war. But, I made them a simple offer. They stay on their side of the border. The Peacekeepers stay on our side of the border. And we continue to abide by the treaty.'
'Given my reputation, and known abilities. They wisely accepted my offer.'
'In addition, I ordered that no one was to go after John Crichton, his family, nor his friends, unless they asked, and received my permission first. And they had a good frelling reason to make the request, or they would face my fury.'
'I repeated, my order twice, to make sure that it was understood. And from what I have learned, my order has been obey to leave John, his family, and his friends alone, has been obeyed.'
'Last I heard. After John returned from helping defeat Chang. That he, and those with him, are happily living their lives, in peace, on board Moya, as they travel the galaxy.'
'At the end of my first solar cycle as Grand Chancellor of the Peacekeepers, my allies within the upper Peacekeeper ranks all agreed I was doing a fantastic job, and that I should remain leader of the Peacekeepers.'
'Nine solar cycles later, the Peacekeepers have never been stronger. I even altered a number of Peacekeepers policies in dealing with our job of maintaining order, so as to make our job easier to do, while not antagonizing those governments and populations we oversee.'
'Basically, I changed the shoot first and ask questions later policy, to a, be prepared to fight, but try not to start a fight, policy. Also, other changes were that peacekeepers grunts, before going to a world, to police that population, will have a through understanding of the culture and people they will be meeting, so as not to start a fight, but still be able to finish it.'
'Along those lines, I abolished the policy of 'Irreversible Contamination'. How can my peacekeepers deal with other culture and species, if my subordinates are afraid of even talking to them. For fear of being accused of irreversible contamination, and being put to death.'
'Also, training of peacekeepers is no longer so lethal. Those that fail are assigned to menial tasks. This has reduced our need for drafting children into training and service, which I find disgusting, and I working on abolishing. Along with these changes, I reduced the need of hiring of outside support in certain situations.'
'I also abolished the 'no romantic relationship' regulation. Especially, with this regulation dealt with procreation. This is no longer a crime, in of itself. Though, I still placed strict regulations on the matter. So, I could maintain discipline, and structure, within the rank.'
'But, the peacekeepers now have guidelines and regulations to follow on the matter. If they chose to pursue a relationship with each other. And I grant a general amnesty for all those whom likely did it. Including those that were caught, and not killed. As long as they reported their actions, and then followed the guidelines and regulations I set up for these relationships.'
'These simple changes, along with a few other changes, have garnered much loyalty and support from myself, from both within the Peacekeeper ranks, those governments, and sometimes much of the various populations, that are within the Peacekeepers' authority.'
'I have even kept the Scarrans from going to war with us. Still, with the reality technology, which I have kept secret from the Scarrans, and many other enemies the peacekeepers, for this long. And with that technology, if we went war with them, it would be a very one sided battle. With them on the losing end.'
'Though, given the secrecy, open use of reality technology is against my orders... For right now. I hope someday that will change, with the creation of a multiversal hyperspace gate system.'
'On that noted, I am not sure how, but likely due to not having agonizing health problems, along with no longer having the Scarrans natural hotblooded nature and tempter, I am much more calmer as a Sebacean woman. I like the way I currently feel. It is nice to be at peace with myself. I can think so much more clearly now.'
'My hatred for the Scarrans has also cooled to the point of where I no longer want to exterminate every last one of them, to where I just done given damn about them. As long as they behave, and stay out of peacekeeper affairs.'
'Still, these was one loose end in dealing with Grayza. Her healthy infant daughter. Whom Grayza gave birth to, soon after the end of the Peacekeeper-Scarran War.'
'I willfully allowed Grayza's daughter to live. And I made sure that Grayza's daughter was adopted by a nice, fairly well off Sebacean couple, in a very stable home, on a nice planet. I made sure that any genetic abnormalities that flags on her medical check ups, would be ignored, unless they were affecting her health. In which case, I would be immediately informed.'
'And I check up on her every few months, to make sure things are going well with her. I want to insure that she has a good life. So inevitably, when she does grow up, learns about me killing her mother, and calls me on it. I can point out how good life I gave her.'
'Though, I can see that is going to cause me, John, and John's family problems in the future. I checked her DNA, she is the child of both Grayza and John. But, at least when she does confront me, the girl, more likely the case, the grown woman will be well adjusted enough to not immediately become violent.'
'The one problem about being genre savvy, is that I know if I had tried to killer that girl, she would have somehow survive, and grow up with a thirst for vengeance against me. At least, with the situation as it is now, I know where she is, I know she is doing fine, and I know she is sane.'
'And presently, I have time to figure out what I am going to tell her when she grows up, and asks about her biological parents. Including my killing of her mother. But, also how her mother raped her father. That is quite the reverse of my situation. I already realize that this is going to be interesting conversation. At least I have copies of the Farscape series, to prove how evil her biological mother was. But, I will have to be careful in how I show her the series, so her mind does not completely snap from the revelation.'
'Given how manipulative and honorless Grayza was, I do not even want to think about how she would have corrupt her and Crichton's child. The only reason I did not turn the child over to John and Aeryn is that it would have create problems with their relationship, and their son, in having to deal with a child that was not biologically related to both of them. The girl would just be a reminder of some of the darker times in their lives. So, I figured given the girl a fresh start, would be better for her.'
'As of right now, the girl is current ten cycles old. She is goes to well accredited school. She is getting good grades. She has a nice set of friends. And her adopted family truly loves her, along with treating her well. Her adopted parents even had children of their own. And the girl and her step-siblings get along well. I could not hope for a better outcome with her.'
'But, even so, that girl will be one issue that I will have to deal with someday. Just not today.'
'Now, to deal with current matters, which require my attention.'
Scorpius stated into the intercom on her desk, “What is the current status to the two human teenage boys? As I said before, I do not want those boys harmed in any way. They are the keys to my current plans.”
The female voice of a peacekeeper officers on the other end stated, “Grand Chancellor Scorpius, we have been trying to avoid hitting the boys. And security cameras show that they have not yet been harmed. Instead, we have been focusing on the woman. But, she fights like a Luxan Orican Paladin. We are unable to stop her with just infantry forces. And we cannot pull out the heavy weapons.”
Scorpius requested, “Commander Meka, describe this woman.”
Meka answered, “She looks to be a young Sebacean woman. Fair skin, brown hair. She is wearing brown robe, and using some sort cylinder shaped weapon in her hands. Her weapon emits a constant red energy blade, from one of the ends of the cylinder.”
Scorpius mentally cursed, 'Annie! Frell! Of all the people to sneak on board my ship, it had to be her!'
Scorpius then forced herself to calm down. She then said, in a calm tone of voice, “Commander Meka, I know who this woman is. And while I understand why you are making this request. Please, understand that I will not authorize use of such weapons in our own home. Where are they now?”
Meka answered, “They are almost to shuttle bay number twelve.”
Scorpius ordered, “Let them be. The woman is a literal a force of nature, and beyond our abilities to handle, without destroying large sections of this ship. Getting her off this ship takes priority to capturing the boys. We will just have to recapture the boys, later.” She mentally added, 'I will have other opportunities to bring the boys back. That is what back up plans are for. Also, I wonder...'
Scorpius inquired, “Also, why was I not informed of this woman's capture immediately after she was caught?”
Meka answered, “We are still trying to determine the reason for that. From the audio and video recordings of her capture. What we guess is that she also has mental powers, like a Delvian mystic. And she convinced those whom captured her to wait to inform their superiors until they identified her. And she must have also tricked them into not searching her for weapons.”
Scorpius responded, “Understood. Do not reprimand those that captured her. They had no way of knowing how dangerous she was. Though, we will have to be better next time.”
Meka replied, “Yes, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius reached out and hit a button on her desk to cut the communication to the intercom on her desk.
Scorpius leaned back in her chair, as she thought, with mild annoyance, 'Well, for Annie, or should I say, Vader, to show up and spy on me. It shows that I have started to attract the attention of others. Maybe it was her mysterious force, or something else. But eventually, this will get back to her friends, including John Crichton, himself.'
'And since I am letting them escape, I need to make this look good. So, they think I am not just letting them go.'
'With the anti-reality jumping field I have, I am guess that Annie will put the brothers on a ship, and get them out of here, with her reality device. Meanwhile, she will stayed behind. And in doing so, she will only cause more damage, until I fool her into getting one of my reality devices. And it will have to be a working device, or her force will warn her if it is trap.'
'A force master can be as dangerous as John on bad day. This battle is already costly. I need to prevent the cost of this battle from becoming catastrophic. So, how do I get her off my ship... Perhaps I should just take a page from John's playbook... That might work. And it is so simply.'
Scorpius then sat up, and she activated the intercom on her desk.
She stated, “Commander Meka. I have orders for you. Those guards whom captured the woman. Given we are tracking the woman. Give those guards a basic reality device, with orders to simply give to her, so she can leave. When it is confirmed she has the device, shutdown the anti-reality teleportation field, until we are sure she has left. Then raise the field back up.'
'Though, make sure the anti-reality teleortation field is shutdown for no more than five minutes. Also, do a sensor sweep of the ship, after she has left, to make sure no one, nor weapons, have come on board, during the dropping of our defenses.”
Meka replied, “Yes sir.”
Scorpius thought, 'If they die. They die. If not, then in living they show the competence to remain living. And either way, I get that bitch off my ship. Now, about the boys...'
Scorpius said, “Also, I expect a ship to leave the command carrier soon. Do not destroy it. Instead used the frag cannons to fire a few warning shoots, towards the ship. Use level eight flares to go off as a safe distance from the front of the ship. And when life signs disappear from the ship, send a retrieval team for the ship.”
Meka stated, “Yes sir.”
Scopius thought, 'That should scare the boys into thinking about home. Or, some other place that they feel is safe, when they jump realities. That should narrow down the search. Still, I will have to find people to go after them. Most peacekeepers lack the creativity and inventiveness needed for multiverse retrieval of people. Even the disruptor agents. And tracking devices for reality are a poor substitute. So, who do I send after the boys, to capture them...'
'Those types of people might work, but they will not be gentle... It looks like I may have to sacrifice one of the boys to get what I need. It would be sad, but that maybe necessary. Though, I hope not. And I can take precautions to prevent that event from happening. For if one of them dies, it will make it more difficult to get the other to cooperate.'
'I am so glad I made this list, a few cycles ago.'
Scorpius then punched up a list on her terminal, as she commented, “And Commander, I am sending you a list of locations, places, and times, for people I know of. I wish for you to send our best agents, that are not out on the field, on an invitation missions.”
“To inquire those on this list, for potential freelance retrieve work, for a fee, including equipment and other items. I will work out the details after we have this woman offer this ship.”
“Our agents are to bring them here. If they say no, leave them be.”
Meka responded, “Yes, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius then cut the communication again, as she mentally reflected, 'Well, with luck, and some effort, I can still salvage this situation. Now, I just have to prepare an inspiration speech for my soon to be hired personal of freelance professionals and rogues.'
(_)
Around that moment, in another part of the flagship command carrier, Annie, Stan, and Lewis walked into a shuttle bay, which Annie had lead the brothers to.
They saw that there were several different types of spaceships parked in the hug shuttle bay.
When they were all inside the bay, Annie came to a stop. The brothers stopped right behind her.
Annie turned off her lightsaber. Though, she held her weapon in her right hand.
Next, Annie turned to look at the boys, as she said, “I sense no one around. Still be on your guard.”
Annie then turned, and looked around the room, at the spaceships, as she commented, “Now, which one will do the job of getting you boys out of here?” She then saw the ship she was looking for, as she stated, “That one will do.”
Annie then walked over to the ship Annie picked out.
The boys followed Annie to the side of what looked to be a small personnel transport shuttle.
Annie walked to the right side of the ship, and to a small panel by the side of the hatch. She punched a button.
A second later, the hatch lower to the ground, creating a set of steps into the ship.
Annie said, “Follow me.”
The boys did so, as all three got into the ship, and headed for the cockpit.
They soon came to a stop in front of the two seat cockpit, with Annie standing between the two cockpit seats. The gap between the two seats was large enough to allow a person to stand in place.
Annie turned around, to face the brothers. She explained, “Now boys, for your first lesson on the multiverse. That being, even thought the language, and systems of measurements are different, some things across the multiverse are the usually same. Such, as the basic layouts of cockpit controls. This is like a starfighter cockpit. Do either of you know how to pilot a starfighter?”
Lewis asked, “Do zipcraft count?”
Annie replied, “Yes.”
Lewis replied, “Good. Because a few years ago, our parents, with Faye and Jet, taught us the basics to flying zipcraft.”
Annie thought, 'It figures those two would be the one's to teach these boys, considering they are good friends with Ed.' She stated, “Then, you should be fine. You are also going to need this.” She then pulled out a small TV remote shaped device, from her left, front pants pocket.
She handed the reality device to Stan.
Stan looked at the device. It was shaped like a TV remote, with a numerical pad in the center of the device, and red button near the middle, among the numerical buttons. There was also an LED screen at the top of the device.
Annie stated, “This is my reality jumping device. Stand near each other, press the red button, and it will take you where you want to go.”
Lewis inquired, “What do you mean?”
Annie replied, “Don't ask how it works. I never bothered to find out myself. Though, I do know for a fact that you mother knows the formulas to these devices. She has build plenty of them over the years for us.”
Stan looked up from the device, as he grumbled, “And none of them for us.”
Annie point out, “Actually, I believe this is one of the devices she, herself, built.”
Lewis said, “Thank you. I guess it is sort of like in Star Wars, when Luke received his father's lightsaber.”
Annie thought about Lewis' comment for a few seconds. She then burst out laughing, as she stated, “I guess it is. And I guess that would make me the Obiwan. Oh the irony.”
Lewis thought, 'I wonder why she thinks this ironic. Though, we don't have time for this. Also, I have another question for her.' He asked, “If you had this device on you. Why you have us use this in the brig? It would have saved us a lot of trouble.”
Annie heard Lewis' question. She forced herself to stop laughing and calm down, as she said, “I snuck on this ship, using a shuttle. Once I was here, I was soon discovered. So, I tried to use my reality device, and it did not work. So, I let them capture me, because a battle, as we have seen, would only draw more attention for Scorpius.”
“It seems that reason I could not escape is that Scorpius has some sort of anti-reality jumping field on this Command Carrier. Which is understandable, given how crazy prepared that woman is. It makes sense she would not want to have to deal with uninvited guests, nor weapons.”
Lewis agreed, “True. From what we know of her, she is very thorough about everything she does. Now, let's get out of here.”
Annie stated, “Sorry, I cannot go with you. Someone has to stay behind, and open the bay doors. Since the control tower is right by this shuttle bay, it will only take me a minute or two, to get there, and use the controls to open the doors. The bay doors are straight out of the front windows. You cannot miss them.”
Lewis thought, 'I wonder? Let's drop the term, and see if she takes the bait.' He suggested, “Why don't you just use the force to open the bay doors?”
Annie looked Lewis, as she calmly explained, “So, you figured out I use the force. Okay. Still, to answer you question. Those bay doors are design to having a ship crash into them and stay in one place. I am powerful. But, not that powerful. Besides, if I tried to use the force to make the doors open, I risk warping the doors, and having them be stuck in place. Then, we really would be screwed.”
Lewis thought, 'So, she does use the force. And the Star Wars reality is real.'
Stan realized, 'She really does use the force. Still, I do have a question of my own, for her.' He commented, “So, that is why no Jedi tried to open sliding metal doors with the force?”
Annie replied, “Exactly.”
Lewis suggested, “We could wait for you.”
Annie responded, “There is not enough time. Once those bay doors open completely, they will soon start to close, by an override command, that I will have to fight, to give you time to leave.”
As Stan held up the device, he pointed out, “Without this device, you won't be able to escape.”
Annie responded, “Scorpius has access to her own reality devices. I will just find, and take, one of hers. You have already seen that I can handle myself in a fight. While you cannot.”
Stan admitted, “That is a fair point.”
Lewis requested, “Annie. Before you leave, could you please show us where the, on, switch is for this ship.
Annie just smirked, as she turned around, and faced the cockpit. She then punched a button. All the lights on the dashboard came on.
Annie then turned around, to face the boys. She said, “See you later, boys.” She then walked between the brothers, and towards the hatch. A few seconds later, Annie exited the ship.
When Annie exited the ship, she use the outside panel shut the hatch.
As the hatch shut, and sealed itself, the two brothers got into the cockpit seats. Lewis go into the left cockpit seat, and Stand got into the right cockpit seat.
Stan looked down at the reality device, as he requested, “Lewis, you drive. I am going to looked at this device.”
Lewis cautioned, “Okay. But, you do remember that Mom and Dad taught us to never touch a red button unless we absolutely have too.”
Stan stated, “Oh, I remember.”
Lewis commented, “So, I guess we just wait here for the doors to open?”
Stan looked up from the device, as he answered, “Yes.” He then looked at the control panel, and the steering yokes, as he stated, “Well, except for the alien language and numbers, Annie was right, this does look like the controls of a zipcraft. We should be able to operate it.”
Lewis stated, “Let's hope so. Or, this is going to be the shorted trip in history.”
Stan commented, “Agreed. Also, there is something about Annie. I cannot place my finger on it, but it is like I have seen her somewhere before.”
Lewis said, “I know. It is like we have seen her a lot, but my mind is drawing a blank on where.”
Stan stated, “And that did look like a lightsaber.”
Lewis commented, “It likely is. When I dropped the term, the force. She admitted that she use the force. Instead of just saying she used telekinesis. She is probably a jedi.”
Stan pointed out, “I agree that she is a force user, as well. The problem is that I am sure you realize how many human and near-human jedi woman there are in the Star Wars franchise.”
Lewis replied, “I know. It is a needle in a haystack. And that is not counting the extras. But, she had a red energy blade on her lightsaber. That is a sith lightsaber.”
Stan stated, “I noticed that, as well. That is why I said, force iser, and not, jedi. Though, that woman was to nice to be sith. Sith don't help the helpless. Such as us.”
Lewis responded, “Good point.”
The brothers then noticed the bay doors start to open.
Lewic commented, “That was quickly.”
Stan stated, “Yes. It was. And that is our cue.”
Lewis started working the controls, as he said, “Looks like Annie just bailed us out. Let's see if I can get this thing in the air before these doors fully open.”
A few seconds later, Lewis had the ship in the air, with the ship heading towards the bay doors.
Though, Lewis took it slowly, so as to give the doors time to open to where his ship would fit.
Seconds later, their transport shuttle was able to exit the shuttle bay, and into space.
Stan commented, “Something just occurred to me. What if they shoot us down?”
Lewis cracked a grin, as he pointed out, “With those guns, we would be dead before we knew it. Besides, our teacher wants us alive.”
Stan agreed, “Good point. Get us out of here.”
Lewis said, “My thoughts exactly. Let's see what this baby can do.”
Lewis the pushed the engines to full, as he flew the shuttle as fast as he could away from the command carrier. A few seconds later, he turned slightly so, as to keep going away from the other parts of the fleet, as well.
Stan looked down at his device, as he said, “How far do you think we need to go, before we can use the device?”
Suddenly, Scorpius' Commander Carrier Flagship fired one round with one of its frag cannons, towards the boys' ship.
The shot missed them, and continued going further in front of them, until it went off in the distance with a large explosion.
The boys were shocked at the size of the explosion, as Lewis redundantly inquired, “Did you see that?”
Stan answered, “Yes. I think this is far enough.”
Lewis said, “I agree.”
Stan and Lewis got out of their seats and stood near each other, in the gap between the two cockpit seats.
Stan commented, “Annie said, stand close together, push the red button, and the device will take us where we want to go. The question, is how do we tell device where we want to go?”
Lewis said, “I tried to ask her what she meant, but she misunderstood the question. With her thinking I was asking how the device worked. And not how to work the device.”
Stan said, “Listen. We are geniuses. And this is a simple push single button operation. We can figure this out.”
Lewis asked, “But, how did you navigate?”
Stan stated, “I don't know. But, it cannot be that hard. It has only one big red button. This thing was clearly designed to be idiot-proof.”
Lewis suggested, “Okay. Perhaps we are overtaking the problem. Let's just push the red button, and find out what happens.”
Stan said, “Okay. I just want to see Mom and Dad.” He then pushed the red button.
The next thing the brother knew was sudden brightness, and a sense of falling for two seconds, before they felt themselves hitting some things that broke their fall, while they landed on the dirt below them.
As their eyes adjusted to the light, the first thing they noticed was the sunny, pearl blue, afternoon sky above them.
Then, they looked around and saw that they were in a large, grassy field, with forest lines being tropical trees and bushes.
The area was warm, with a light breeze.
That was not the most interesting part.
The most interesting part was they they were surrounded by women, all of whom were wearing bikinis. There were also some teenagers that either wore bikinis, or one piece swimsuits. And a few younger girls in one piece swimsuits.
Then, they looked down, and they saw whom had broken their fall. Five teenagers girls, around their age. All of whom were in bikinis. Of the five teenage girls, there were two blonds with tanned skin. Two redheads with tanned skin. And one dark haired girl with brown dreadlocks.
It was then they noticed the snack table behind them.
To the boys' credit, they were not sexually turned off by the situation, because both of them knew something was very wrong with the situation, given they saw no men, nor boys around.
Everyone went dead silent, with they all looked at the brothers.
The only sounds were the wind, and the surf breaking in this distance.
Everyone was stunned by the situation. Waiting for someone else to make the first move.
(_)
In the distance, Ed and Bob, in her female form, looked at the two teenage boys in the distance. Like the rest of the women present, both were wearing bikinis.
Ed asked, “I wonder who those two foolish men are?”
Bob answered, “Ed, I think I know who they are. I recognized that jacket from anywhere. That is Stan.”
Ed took on a mask of worry, as she added for her husband, “And the other has to be Lewis. But, how did they get here?”
Bob answered, “How, doesn't matter right now. We just got to stop this situation from going very badly for our sons.”
(_)
By the snack table, Stan and Lewis looked at each other, then the women again, then at the mansion at the distance, and finally back to each other.
Stan made sure he still gripped their reality device, as the brother suddenly jumped up, and ran as quickly as they could, for the mansion.
Instantly, most of the women, and teenager girls, ran right after them, in a stampede.
(_)
In the distance, the brothers' parents watched in horror, as their sons were being chased by many of their friends, whom did not realize who they were chasing.
Ed said, “I think we are too late.”
Bob stated, “Not necessarily. Not if we get to the women, before they get to the boys.”
Ed and Bob ran towards the crowd heading for the mansion.
(_)
Fortunately, there were no women and girls between the brothers and the mansion. And as brothers made their way to the mansion, and the boys were able to out pace the women, but just barely.
When the brother reached the double doors, they quickly found them to be unlocked.
The brothers swiftly opened the doors, and shut the doors behind them.
They found themselves in an entryway.
The brothers quickly locked the seven deadbolt locks on the doors.
A second later, they could hear the women outside trying to get into the building.
Though, the brothers see a table by the table under a window, which they quickly moved to place beside the double-doors.
As the boys stood next to each other, they took a second to looked around, at their surroundings.
They noticed that across from the front outside doors, the entryway they were in had two staircases, leading up to the second floor.
The teenage boys look around further, and they did not see anyone else inside.
Stan then looked at the reality device in his hand, as he commented, “Well, this device is clearly not genius-proof. I don't know why we ended up in such a crazy place.” He handed the device to Lewis, as he continued, “Here. You handle it from now on.”
Lewis took the device, in his right hand, as he said, “Thanks. I will try to figure out how to get this thing working.”
Stan suggested, “Well figure it out fast. Also, how long do you think it will take for them to break in?”
Lewis looked around them, as he answered, “Well, given this is a mansion in a tropical environment, near the water I would guess doors are steel reinforced, the windows are storm windows, and the walls are reinforced with concrete and steel, to handle wind and water damage from hurricanes, typhoons, or whatever types of storms this region of the planet has.”
Stan inquired, “What planet has that kind of weather?”
Lewis stated, “Earth. I think we are on Earth. An Earth...” He continued, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Welcome to the multiverse. Your detestation for the strange and unusual.”
Stan quipped, “I would like have a refund for this trip...” He then said, in a more serious tone of voice, “Still, it figures we are an Earth. Though, very likely, not our Earth... Nor, our time period. Listen, we got seconds here. They are likely going to go around back, or breakthrough those doors. Possibly both.”
Lewis flatly said, “I know. Still, we don't have time to figure this out, right now. Just stand by me. We will have to figure out this thing when we reach our next destination. And hope that place is has nicer people than here.”
As Stan walked up closer to his brother, he responded, “Yea. You are right. This place is just full of crazy chicks.”
Lewis replied, “Agreed.”
Stan commented, “Still, I wonder who this place belongs to?”
Lee responded, “So, do I.” He then pressed the red button on the reality device.
A second later, the women broke down the door, just as they saw the boys disappear, with the brothers jumping to another reality.
(_)
A few seconds later, right outside the front entrance of the mansion, Ed and Bob ran up to the crowd of women, as both of them screamed, “Stop! Don't hurt them!”
When the married couple reached the crowd, Revy was near them. She turned to the couple, as she asked, “Why should we? Men and boys are not allowed on this island, during our parties. Unless the man are turned into women. And boys are banned, during our parties.”
Ed and Bob turned to Revy, as Ed stated, “Because, they are our kids!”
Bob mentioned, “And they know nothing about this place, or any of you. I think they came here by accident. Which is why they left so quickly.”
Revy gave an embarrassed expression, as she said, “Oh. Well, the good news is they disappeared, before we could get to them.”
Ed asked, in a dangerous tone of voice, “And what would you have done if you gone your hands on my sons?”
The women all looked at each other, including Revy. Revy then turned to Ed and Bob, as she answered, “I don't think we got that far, yet.”
Ed stated, “For the sake of civility, I am going to take your word on that.”
Rock was nearby. She approached Ed and Bob. She came to a stop, by the couple, with her standing by Revy, to Revy's left side. She turned to Ed and Bob, as she inquired, “Okay. The question is. Why did your teenage children come here? I thought you chose to keep you sons in the dark about the stranger parts of your lives. We even respected your wishes.”
Ed answered, “We did do that. So, the reason they came here is a big mystery, even for us? How they even got a reality device, is an even bigger mystery?”
Rock questioned, “Are you sure you did not accidentally leave one of this devices out for your boys to find.”
Bob stated, “We treat the devices like guns. We do not leave them out for others to find. As you know, I have first hand experience with accidental reality jumps, with little knowledge, beforehand. I know better.”
Rock agreed, “True. You do know better. And now that I think about it, I don't think you would leave one of those devices out. Still, how did they get one in the first place?”
Bob stated, “Ed and I intend to find out.”
(_)
Just then, Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto appeared in the field, with the upright white marker board. Fortunately, given the terrain was level, the board was able to stand up right on its own.
They were still dress in their casual clothing.
They turned and saw the crowd. Yurika asked, “What is going on?”
Nodoka stated, “Let's find out. Though, we should leave the board her.”
Mikoto complimented, “Good idea.”
They then left the white marker board behind, as they walked towards the crowd.
As they approached the crowd, the sisters saw that their three parents were nearby.
A few seconds later, they reached parents. Nodoka asked, “What is going on?”
Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru turned to face their daughters, as Ranma asked, “We had some intruders teleport onto the island, and they then escaped. They turned out to be Ed and Bob's boys, and it was all a big misunderstanding. Still, we are trying to figure out how they got here in the first place.”
The daughters immediately tense up, at the hearing that Lewis and Stan had been to the island, mere minutes before the sisters had returned.
And their mothers noticed the difference in their daughter's body language
Akira inquired, in a very motherly tone of voice, “Girls? Is there something you wish to tell us?”
Nodoka answered, “No.”
Natsuru stated, “You're lying. Now, tell us what you did.”
The sisters winced, as Nodoka began, “Well...”
(_)
A minute later, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma escorted Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka through the crowd of women and girls, whom had gathers around the front entrance of the mansion, with part of the crowd inside the entryway.
They soon reached Ed, Bob, Rock, and Revy, whom were having a conversation, outside, while the rest of the women around them watched and listened.
When the six member family reached the four adult women, the four adults turned to the newcomers, as Ed inquired, “What is it, ladies?”
Ranma flatly stated, “Ed. Bob. It seems that our daughters decided to pay a visit to you sons, while you were gone. We believe they may shed some light on why you boys showed up here. We will leave them to you.”
Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru then back away from their daughters. As they realized their daughters would not be harmed, but also, their teenage children would definitely be learning a lesson from their actions. Though, the did stay close enough to pay attention to what was being said.
The three daughters could clearly see that Ed and Bob are not pleased. Along with this, they saw that Rock and Revy did not look happy.
Bob demanded, in an even tone of voice, “What did you three do?”
Yurika said, “Ah. Screw it. I will just tell you. We went to visit our cousins, your kids, behind your back.”
Ed snapped at them, “You were forbidden to visit them!”
Nodoka flatly demanded, “And why is that?”
Bob yelled, “You fools! We wanted them to have a normal life. Now, because of your idiocy, that is out the window.”
Mikoto smiled wickedly, as she stated, “Normal? Ha! That is why we visited them in the first place. We realized that the time dilation that you two have been doing had reached the point where your sons were our age. And we realized you had already robbed them of a lifetime of experiences. So, we wanted to see who they are. Before they became to old for us to even relate to.”
“And we found some interesting things about them. First, even though they are not gender benders, yet. They are clearly no more normal than any of us. They are geniuses. Along with being very athletic, muscular, and physically strong. Though, they are nowhere near our level. But, that is due to lack of teaching, on your part, as their parents.”
Yurika pointed out, “We also followed them to a diner, and we listened to them talking. They both openly admitted that they sometimes feel like they don't belong where they are at.”
“They instinctively know they are not fully of their home reality. They have a need to travel and discover the truth on their own. And their instincts have directed them to work on some very interesting things. Would you like to see what you sons have been working on, when we met them? I promise you will find it interesting. It will just take us a minute to go get it. We will be right back.”
Ed stated, in a dangerous tone of voice, “Alright, but if you try to escape, I will hunt you down. Neither your martial arts, nor elemental powers, will save you from my wrath.”
The three teenage girl cringed a little bit. They then headed back into the grassy field.
Meanwhile, among the crowd, the five Lagoon daughters had long since joined the group, and were quietly listening in on the conversation.
A minute later, the three girls wheeled a white marker board, with mathematical formulas on one side, up to where Ed and Bob could view at it.
The three sisters, with their marker board, stopped six feet from Ed and Bob. Mikoto then pointed at the marker board, as she looked at Ed and Bob. She smirked, as she said, “Take a looked at what your so called normal children have been up too.”
Nodoka cracked a grin, as she questioned, “Do normal people write this?”
All the women circled around to look at the contents of the mathematical formula on the board. Though, Ed was probably the only person present whom could understand what the formula all meant.
Bob, and the others stayed quiet, as Ed read the formula
A minute later, Ed said, “Mommy is impressed with her boys.”
Bob inquired, “What is it Ed?”
Ed stated, “Well, I always wonder if our boys were actually more intelligent than I. Well, they are. They have done something that I thought would be impossible. And they figured out the math for it. Also, this is the formula that we caught Lewis working on a few years ago.”
Bob responded, “Back then, I thought we told Lewis to stop working on that formula.”
Ed responded, “We did. He clearly did not stop. And I am sure he roped Stan into helping him finished it.”
Bob asked, “How do you know that Stan helped? And that the formula is finished?”
Ed answered, “Because, except for the smudging on the bottom right corner, it looks finished. I even see two minor erased marks on the board. Lewis probably reached a point where he needed Stan. Stan looked over it, and made the two changes. Still, while I think it finished, without the information on the corner, I don't know for sure.”
Rock spoke up, “How much trouble are we talking about here, with that formula? What is the formula about?”
Ed turned to the black hair woman, as she answered, “My boys just figured out how to create a wormhole highway system between the various realities of the multiverse. A gateway system like the system in my home reality. With this gateway system using very little energy, so it can be left activated indefinitely. With the gates being big enough, where fleets of large spaceships can come and go, as they please, through the gate system.”
Rock stated, “That could be bad in the wrong hands.”
Ed agreed, “Yes. And it gets worse. I recognize part of the formula is from the original hyperspace gate system from my home reality. It uses that original gate system formula as a foundation for this multiversal gate system.”
“The problem is that there is a slight chance that if someone built it, they could accidentally cause something similar to the gate explosion in my home reality. Only, this gate explosion would rip across the multiverse, and doing literally incalculable amount so damage. I don't even want to think about how much damage such an explosion could be.”
Rock said, “Oh, that is worse.”
Bob pointed out, “I am sure our boys would know better than to try to create such a gate system, unless they were sure that it would not cause a gate explosion.”
Ed responded, “I agree. Though, if someone else got their hands on the formula, they might not be so careful.”
Bob turned to the trio sisters, as she asked, “So, when did you see our sons?”
Yurika answered, “Friday night. Local time. And we also broke your living room windows.”
Ed stated, “And you are going to pay for all those damages.”
Nodoka commented, “We realize that. And we are good for the money.”
Meanwhile, Violin has walked up behind the group, and she looked at the formula, as they talked.
Violin was a slender, fair skinned, young, asian woman, in her late teens. She had dark blue hair that went down to her shoulder blades.
Like the other adults. Violin was wearing a bikini.
As Violin read the formula, she spoke up, “I think I could finish this formula.”
Ed looked over at Violin, as she said, “Interesting. But, please don't.”
Violin turned to Ed, as she responded, “Okay. I wish my mom was here. She could help you with this. But, she is enjoying her time playing with my little brother.”
Ed stated, “That is completely understandable. Birdy has enough on her plate as is. I do not wish to burden her with our problems.”
Violin replied, “I agree.” She thought, 'And I believe it is best that I keep my family away from this mess. As much as possible.'
(_)
Just then, in the field, nearby the group of women and the mansion, Annie teleport onto Lagoon Island. She then clipped her lightsaber to her belt, and pocketed the reality device she had been given.
Next, Annie looked around. She immediately saw that the woman and girls, whom had all gathered near front entrance to the mansion.
Annie thought, 'I wonder what is going on.' She then jogged towards the group.
When Annie reached the group, she slowed down to a slow pace, as she asked, “What is going on?”
Futaba turned to her, as stated, “Hello Annie. Long story short. Ed and Bob's teenage boys dropped by, and then left.”
Annie responded, “They did? I need to speak to Ed and Bob, right now.”
Futaba pointed in a direction, near the front door of the mansion, as she stated, “They are over there, talking to Rock and Revy.”
Annie quickly marched through the crowd.
When Annie reached Ed and Bob, she interrupted their conversation, by saying, “Ed. Bob. We got a big problem.”
Bob, Ed, Rock, and Revy stopped their conversation, as they turned to Annie.
Bob said, “Sorry Annie. But, our hands are full right now.”
Annie responded, “I can guess why. My problem is your problem. Because, I deals with your children.”
Ed inquired, “What are you talking about?”
Annie answered, “The reality device they used was mine. I gave it to him.”
Ed questioned, “Annie, why did you, of all people, gave my boys your reality device?”
Annie answered, “Because we had all been captured by Scorpius. And I helped them escape her, and the peacekeepers, on her Commander Carrier Flagship.”
Bob, Ed, and Rock stated, in unison, “Scorpius?!”
Bob asked, “But, what would she want with our boys?”
Ed thought about her husband's question for a few seconds. She then winched, as she stated, “Of course. Cosupsir. It is an anagram of Scorpius.”
Bob turned to her wife. She slowly said, “Are you saying that Scorpius has been our boys' teacher for years? That Lewis' tutor is arguable one of the most manipulative, calculating badasses in the known multiverse?”
Ed turned her husband, as she responded, “Yes. I am worried, too. No wonder she never wanted to do any parent-teacher meetings. And she is probably directly responsible for convincing Lewis to continue the multiversal hyperspace gateway formula behind our backs.”
Bob commented, “The thought of that bitch getting her hooks into our boys, pisses me off.”
Ed agreed, “That makes two of us.”
Bob turned to Annie, as she inquired, “Annie, if you gave them your reality device. How did you escape?”
Annie stated, “Strangely, after the boys were gone. Some peacekeepers brought me a reality device. And they informed me that their superiors had temporally shut down her anti-reality field. I got the feeling they just wanted me gone. I even let those peacekeepers live.”
Bob said, “No offense. But anyone that knows you, would want you gone, if you were their enemy. And I am sure that Scorpius knows who you are by now, and she would want you gone. Scorpius likely knows about you, and that she would not be able to stop you without destroying much of the surrounding area. So, she just gave you what you wanted, so you would leave.”
Annie replied, “I can see the logic in your statement. That does explain why they stopped coming after us, right before we reached the shuttle bay.”
Bob responded, “That would make sense. Though, the question is, how did she learn about our kids?”
Ed stated, “Likely, third hand. Same way we know that she is now healthy woman, and in control of the Peacekeeper forces.”
Bob asked, “Why didn't anyone do anything about her?”
Rock answered, “There was nothing we could do. Though, we did check on her. And from a logical standpoint, Scorpius is a good leader. With her in command, the peacekeepers are a known quantity. And she does not do something without reason.”
Annie inquired, “Still, there are plenty of geniuses in the galaxy for Scorpius to get to work on this gateway project. Why would Scorpius be interested in your sons?”
Ed answered, “Because, unlike most geniuses at their level of intelligence, they are more... predictable. Well, to be honest. They are sane. While others, like myself, have been known, to not be that sane. Though, I have gotten better.”
“Also, they are from the reality that the original hyperspace gate system is from. So, they would be somewhat familiar with technical mechanics of such formulas. Finally, they are young, and this allowed Scorpius to somewhat mold them in the directions she wanted them to take.”
“Fortunately, it seems that she has not really corrupted them. Just pushed them, or at least Lewis, in the direction of doing a little more math than usual. Still, she probably did not interfered with Stan's sports activities, because doing so might have tipped her hand to us.”
Bob commented, “This is not good. We have to find Lewis and Stan, first.”
Ed replied, “I agree.”
Annie stated, “I wouldn't worry. I gave them my reality device. They are likely at your home, right now.”
Bob thought, 'Oh no. The might be why they ended up here. I have to ask to confirm my suspicions.' She asked, “Did you explain how to work the device?”
Annie asked, with confusion in her tone of voice, “Why would I? You probably already told them.”
Ed stated, “We never told them anything. They don't know how to work these reality devices. Let alone how they work.”
Annie cursed, “Oh hell.” She continued, in a more concerned tone of voice, “They could literally be anywhere in existence.”
Bob said, “Well, at least we know where they were a few minutes ago. Right here and now. So, we have a starting point. The events moved too quickly for us, as the boys took a look around, freaked out, and ran into the mansion, where they reality jumped again.”
Rock commented, “I have to admit, all of us chasing after them did not help manners.”
Bob deadpanned, “No. Likely not.”
Ed realized, as she said, “They were probably thinking about us, as they pressed the red button. They then ended up here. With them not knowing what was going on, they took one looked around, and they ran out of fear of this insane situation they found themselves in.”
Bob commented, “It is a safe bet the boys will eventually put two and two together, and realize that we are not a business trip. I am sure they are going to be pissed when they do put the pieces together.”
Ed pointed out, “At least they will be alive. And we have to find them.”
Bob commented, “I agree. But, they are blind jumping across the multiverse, without a clue as to what is going.” She turned to Annie, as she inquired, “By the way, does the force help with tracking someone using those reality devices.”
Annie sadly answered, “Unfortunately, no. I guess even the force has its limits.”
Ed said, “I wish B was here.”
Bob stated, “Me too. Unfortunately, she is with Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow, doing something. I think it is best if we left them be, and not know their activities.”
Ed replied, “Agreed.”
Annie said, “Since I am already involved, and partly responsible for the boys' situation, I would like to help.”
Ed responded, “Thank you. Your help is more than welcome, Annie.”
Annie smiled at Ed, and Ed returned Annie's smile.
Violin spoke up, “I would like to go with you, as well. Please. My parents do not want me to go on adventures. Though, with them not here, I see no reason why I cannot come. I have my mothers abilities, but I am a lot more well mannered. And I am eighteen. So, there is no legal issues. I am already an adult. I even just graduated high school.”
Bob and Ed turned to Violin. Bob said, in a serious tone of voice, “Okay. I could see how you could be of use. But, this is not going to be a pleasure trip. And if there is trouble. You stick by me like glue. Don't go charging into battle.”
Violin stated, “Don't worry. I have no interest in throwing myself into a fight. If I can help it.”
Bob replied, “Good.”
Ed stated, “Bob, I am glad you are fine with Violin coming. Because I was wondering how I was going to get her to come.”
Violin asked, “Why?”
Ed answered “Because you stated you understand that formula. Meanwhile, whatever is going on, you might get caught up in it. At least with us, we can keep an eye on you, and make sure nothing happens to you, while we sort out this mess.”
Violin replied, “Thank you.”
Nearby, Revy offered, “How would you like for me, and my friends, to come along, as well? We could raise a lot of hell together.”
Bob and Ed turned to Revy, as they said, in unison, “No.”
Ed stated, “We need to do this low key. And you Lagoon women, along with trios, are anything but low key.”
Revy shrugged, as she admitted, “True.”
(_)
Nearby, the trio of daughters had slowly moved away from both their parents, and the parents of Stan and Lewis Lowe. As they did so, they saw that the five Lagoon daughters were motioning with them hands, to walk over to them.
The trio walked over to them.
After the trio did so, Molly whispered to them, “How would you like to go after these boys, ourselves?”
The other seven teenagers nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Nodoka inquired, “Sure. But, why the interest?”
Kristina answered, “When those two boys came here, they literally dropped on top of us. Nobody does that to us and gets away with it, without a little payback. Though, I am not talking about maiming, nor killing them. Just a few punches will do.”
The other four Lagoon daughters nodded in agreement.
Nodoka said, “Okay.”
Yurika offered, “Interesting. Girls, I always liked your style. Want to make is a race to see who can catch them first?”
The five daughters looked at each other, then back at the trio. Molly smirked, as she stated, “Sure. What are the stakes?”
Yurika said, “Losers pays for the winners' dinners.”
Molly stated, “Deal.”
Mikoto suggested, “Let's make this interesting. The brothers cannot be seriously harmed, nor killed. Besides, our parents, and their parents would be pissed if we did do that to Stan and Lewis.”
Molly responded, “Good point. And we do love a challenge.”
Nodoka asked, “In the interest of fairness. Do you need a picture of the boys?”
Sarah answered, “No. We got a very up close, personal look at them, and their faces.”
Nodoka replied, “Okay.”
Molly said, “Good. Now, as soon as this crowd disperses, we will quietly go up to our rooms and get changed, while also retrieving our weapons, and equipment.”
Yurika smiled. She realized, as she said, “While we three will have a head start.”
Molly returned Yurika's smile. She stated, “Good luck.”
Yurika replied, “You too.”
The Lagoon sisters then quietly slipped into their mansion to get changed, and collect their personal weapons.
(_)
Several feet away, Daiyu and River both noticed the eight teenager girls talking. With the group the separating.
Daiyu quietly asked River, “What were those troublemakers talking about?”
River softly replied, “Hunting.”
(_)
Elsewhere in the crowd of women and girls, Violin turn to Ed and Bob, as she requested, “Okay. Since I am coming, do you have a picture of them? Just so, I clearly know what they look like. They came here and ran off so quickly that I am sure that most of us did not get a good look at them.”
Ed answered, “Yes. I will be right back.” She then ran into the Lagoon family's home, and to the room that she and Bob were assigned.
Less than a minute later, Ed came back with a family picture of the Lowe family. It was showed Stan, Lewis, Ed, and Bob, as a guy, as they were all fishing on a boat.
As Ed showed the group the picture in her right hand, she said, “This was taken a few months ago. When we went fishing on Ganymede, for the boys birthday.”
Bob commented, “That was a fun trip.”
Ed agreed, “True. Now, the one in the white coat, and short hair is, Lewis. The other boy, with the red varsity jacket, and slightly longer hair is, Stan.”
As everyone got a looked at the two teenage boys, Akira took a few steps closer to Ed and Bob. So, she could get a better look at the photo. She then realized something, as she commented, “I think I met, Stan.”
Bob and Ed turned to Akira, as they inquired, in unison, “What?”
Akira looked at the couple, as she stated, “It was decades ago for me. When I was seventeen. Over a year after I got my gender bending abilities. We had a transfer student named, Stan Lowe. Nice guy. Brilliant mind. He loved sports. He even wore that same jacket. He was only there for a month. He was nice enough to tutor my friend, and I in english. We passed our english course that year, due to his help. He even figured out my gender bending ability, but he seemed to not mind, and he kept it secret. Then, he met his brother, said his goodbyes, and he disappeared.”
By then, Futaba had made her way to Ed and Bob, so she could see what was going on. And she had heard Akira's comment about knowing Stan.
Futaba looked at the picture in Ed's right hand. She then commented, “That is odd, because I think I met a, Professor Lewis Lowe. And he looked like the other boy in the picture. Only, he was my physics teacher. He had that same short white lab coat. He was there for only a month. Great guy. At the time, I did not say anything about him being so young, because I have had other teachers that appeared younger. One day, the principal announced that he had left, we we never saw him again.”
The other women, including Ed and Bob, turned to Futaba. Bob commented, “That figures. Stan liked being a student. While Lewis would likely make a good teacher.”
Ed mentioned, “And both of them are geniuses. Futaba, Lewis likely did a better job of teaching you physics, with he has a strong grasp of the material, than your other teachers could have.”
Futaba commented, “I agree. Most of my other science and physics teachers were literally insane, mad scientists.”
Bob said, “Be that as it may, this is good. It means we know where they will be. As to when, depends on one's point of view, in the past of our home reality. In Tokyo Japan. Do either of you remember when exactly when you met them? It would make tracking them down much easier. We just cut to the chase, and meet them there, at the proper time, and take them home. Then, we deal with Scorpius.”
Akira answered, “Sorry. I don't remember exactly when I met Stan. He was a good friend. And I hope when he returned from his trip, we will continue to be friends.”
Futaba stated, “Same here. I wish I could tell you when Lewis taught me those classes. He was a great teach. And far saner than many of the school staff.”
Ed commented, “I am glad you two feel that way.”
Bob muttered, under her breath, “Damn it.” She then continued, in a normal tone of voice, “That is too large a time frame to just go there, and wait for them, for maybe up to a year.” She turned to Revy and Rock, as she requested, “Revy, Rock, could we borrow you tracking equipment to find our children.”
Rock answered, “Sure.”
Revy offered, “I will even show you how to work the equipment. Though, I suggest you don't take the equipment with you. You can use it here. Jump to that reality. And if you lose them. You can come back here to try to track them down again.”
Bob said, “Okay. That will work. And I can see how you did that to track Ed and I, years ago.”
Revy smiled, as she stated, “Yea. It made things easier, and calmer for us.”
Bob turned to Annie, as she requested, “Annie, speaking of tracking things, since that reality device was from Scorpius. It might have a tracking function she can use against us. Please, destroy it while we get dressed.”
Annie replied, “Will do.”
Ed stated, “Okay. That is done. Time to get dressed, and head out.”
Bob, Ed, and Violin went inside the mansion, and to their assigned room, to get dressed.
(_)
Five minutes later, Ed and Bob were inside the bedroom which had been assigned to them in the mansion.
They changed out of their bikinis and into their normal clothes.
Ed removed her bikini, and replaced them with silk panties and a sports bra, due to the chances they would be seeing some fighting soon. She then put on a t-shirt, jeans, belt, socks, and boots. She then grabbed her reality device and put it into her right front pants pocket.
Meanwhile, Bob took of her bikini and put on boxer shorts. She then put on a brown button up shirt, black pants, black belt, socks, and boots. All of the clothing were too big for her slender female frame.
Next, she put on her gunbelt, with her revolver.
Bob made sure that both her pants belt, and gunbelt were notched to be big enough to fit her male form.
After that, she picked up her reality device, and put it into her left, front pants pocket.
Finally, Bob put on her brown long coat, to cover her gunbelt, and pistol.
As Ed laced up and tied her boots, she noticed that something was bothering her husband.
When Ed finished with her boots, she leaned up straight, and turned to Bob. She asked, “Bob, what is wrong?”
Bob turned to Ed, as she quietly said, “I am just having some second thoughts on some of the decisions we made on raising our children. I am sixty-three years old. I am literally an old man. And while, right now, as a woman, I don't even look half that age, mentally I still sometimes feel the years I have lived. We burned through our lives faster than the others here.”
Ed countered, “I can say the same. Need I remind you I am only two years younger than you.”
Bob replied, “Yes. While we found a rejuvenation therapy for you to stay young in your birth form, I did not. I still prefer to live as a man. But, that choice is not going to last forever. That is why I have done my best to enjoy being a man.”
“But, Akira once told me that eventually, she and myself, will be permanently locked in our alternate gender forms. And I believe her. Akira stated she had evidence in that she met her future self, whom was eighty-one years old. But, she looked less than thirty. And this alternate self said she was locked into her female form in her mid-sixties.”
“I think I actually met that woman once.”
“Though, Akira also stated that good health might stave off the lock for a number of years. So, I have a few years, to a decade tops, before I am permanently female. And while the thought of living as a woman permanently no longer scares me as it use to. What is means for our family does.”
Ed stated, “We both knew that day was coming for a long time. I remember when you first told me what Akira told you.”
Bob said, “And your emotional support has been a great help for me, on this. Still, we should have told the boys something. And I admit that is on me, for not telling them.”
“We should have at least told them about my gender shifting ability. But, no. I wanted them to has much a normal life as possible. Now, I see that is a laugh. A joke. As we saw earlier, if they don't know already, they will figure it out soon enough.”
“And I know we both are going to get called on it by them, for everything we didn't tell them about our lives, and our genes. And when I do finally lock as a female, just looking at me, by them, will be a reminder of the betrayal of their trust, and of what we didn't tell them, when we had the chance.”
Ed responded, “I am sure they will forgive us both.”
Bob agreed, “I know. But, it is going to be rough road for us, until they do.”
Bob then made herself sneeze, changing back into a man. He body instantly filled out his clothes to the point they fit his male body.
Ed commented, “Well, we know for a fact that it will turn out alright for us, even after you lock. Remember when our future selves will, or we will, go back in time to visit us.”
Bob rolled his eyes, for a second. He then looked at Ed, as he admitted, “Yes. I do. It seems that our future selves wanted another pair of children, and future Ed wanted me to get her pregnant. It was fortunate that you didn't mind.”
Ed smiled, as she replied, “Why should I have? It is just me from the future. I knew that I would eventually become her, so there was no problem. Besides, I got to know the future you a bit more. It is comforting to know that you will remain sane even after you lock in your female form.”
Bob stated, “Yea. That was an interesting night.”
Ed smiled mischievously, as she said, “It was also fun using some instant spring of drown man on myself, to have some fun with your future female self. Though, we do that plenty of times, right now.”
Bob shrugged, as he replied, “True. I will agree with the others that such multiple options on gender combinations are nice in the bedroom.”
Ed responded, “I fully agree. And they left the next morning. Yet, the next night was even more interesting, when both our future selves show up six month pregnant, and informed us that each of us would some day be having a heathly girl. But, it was mean they would not give us an exact date at to how old we will be when we decide to do that. They coyly said to never ask women their age.”
Bob commented, “I am just happy that our future selves were still be happily together.”
Ed replied, “I agree.”
Bob then just silently looked over at his wife, for a few seconds.
Ed noticed his staring, as she asked, “What?”
Bob smiled, as he said, “Motherhood really agrees with you. Most women that get pregnant start acting more crazier during their pregnancy. On the other hand, you started acting more sane, and you stayed sane after the boys were born. You even started wearing socks”
Ed returned Bob's smile, as she responded, “That is because I had more to worry about than myself and our next adventure. Responsibility will make anyone grow up.”
Bob agreed, “That is true. Now, let's go rescue our boys.”
The couple then walked over to the door of their room, that lead to a hallway.
Bob opened the door to their room. In the hallway, they then saw Violin and Annie standing in front of their door.
Violin was dressed in dark blue pants, which matched her long hair, that went down to her shoulder blades. Like her mother's hair length and style, only much shorter. She also wore a red belt, a long sleeved white blouse, socks, and red tennis shoes.
Annie had on the clothing she had been wearing.
Annie said, “The force offers many advantages. Such as knowing when it is time to be somewhere. And when to be on time.”
Ed and Bob just laughed.
Bob pulled out his reality device from his pants.
Bob stated, “I don't want to say this to the others, but I already have an idea where to start looking for our boys. And I don't want to use Revy's reality tracking device unless I have too.”
Violin asked, “So, where are we going?”
Bob answered, “Well since Scorpius is involved, I am sure my boys will eventually run into John Crichton. So, we will go see him. With luck, we might even meet the boys there. If not, we will at least get some clues as to what to do next in dealing with Scorpius. We may even get the crew of Moya to help us.”
Annie stated, “Not a problem. John and I go way back.”
Bob thought, 'And nobody ever did tell us most of the back story between you, John, Rock, and the others.'
Annie continued, “We will teleport to around the same time period as I left Scorpius' flagship.”
Ed agreed, “Good idea.”
Bob said, “I agree.”
Annie pointed out, “But, we will need to get a shuttle, and contact them before we board. John, his family, and his friends, can be a bit trigger happy with uninvited guests.”
Ed said, “I understand, Annie. And that will not be a problem. We have have a small passenger ship that will fit all of us, that I wired to teleport to other reality devices.”
As the three older adults talked, they did not notice the smile slowing growing on Violin's face, as her energetic nature built up, until it exploded, in a loud squeal, “EEE! Yes!”
Violin then started talking slightly quicker than normal for her, as her voice was filled with excitement, “I love the sci-fi Farscape series! I am a big fan. I have always wanted to go there, but mom forbid me from going there. She said that reality is to dangerous, and too sexually twisted to visit. And dad agreed with her.”
Violin then began to babble on about the Farscape series, about the places in the series she would like to meet, and the places in the series that she would like to visit.
As Bob, Ed, and Annie, watched this display by Violin, Bob thought, 'Oh lord, she has a fangirl mode. This could be bad.'
Bob turned to Ed, as he inquired, “Ed. Do you have any second thoughts on bringing her along? Because, I have.”
Ed turned to her husband, as she flatly said, “No. She is coming with us.”
Bob slumped his shoulders in defeat, as he said, “Yes dear... But, we need to make sure that the crew of Moya does not mistake Violin's excitement for an attack.”
Ed commented, “I don't think that will be a problem. If she is as tough as her mother. One shot won't hurt her too badly. But, we will try to err on the side of caution. Besides, from what I understand, John can be a bit of a fanboy himself. He will recognize her as one sci-fi fan to another sci-fi fan.”
Bob agreed, “That sounds about right.”
Ed said, “Still, we need to calm her down.”
Ed turned to Violin, as she stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Violin. Birdy and Nataru may have a point with telling you not to go there. Some people call the Farscape series, one American's descent into Australia's S&M scene. And after seeing the series a few times, I can understand their opinion. Still, it is a good series.”
“And while I want you to come along. I need you to calm down. Or, I may have to change my mind.”
Violin heard what Ed said. She immediately calmed down, as she sheepishly said, “Alright. I can calm down, and behave.”
Ed replied, “Good.”
Bob stated, “Okay everyone, please, get in close, as we teleport to our ship, on a spaceport in Ed's home reality, on Mars.”
Annie inquired, “So, exactly when and where, are we going?”
Bob answered, “We will head to October sixteenth, twenty-one hundred. In the early evening. That will be a Saturday, on the day after the boys left. And as tempting as it is to just warn the boys, beforehand. We do not want to risk creating a paradox. We will head to our home. Board up the broken windows. Then, we will immediately head to the hanger that we have our shuttle parked in.”
Ed agreed, “Good idea.”
Annie replied, “Okay. Let's head over there.”
Ed, Annie, and Violin, whom had forced herself to calm down, walked to stand near Bob.
A few seconds later, Bob thought of where, when, and what reality, he wanted to go, in Ed's home reality. Which was in Ed's home reality, at their home on Mars, on the Saturday evening he had in mind. He held that thought, as he pushed the red button on his reality device, with all four of the adults disappearing, as they jumped realities.
(_)
At that moment, elsewhere in the Lagoon mansion, on the second floor, Molly and Sarah had since changed into their normal clothing, and collected their personal weapons, the two blond sisters were talking to each other in Sarah's room.
Around six years ago, the Lagoon parents allow their children to have re-modelers come in and remodel the children's bedrooms anyway their desired.
Kristina, Yukio and Rebecca's bedrooms were mostly casual, and fairly gender neutral. With a chair, desk, with electronic equipment, shelves over books on various topics, and a nice, conformable bed.
And like their parent's bedroom's, each of their children's bedrooms had their own bathroom, and walk in closet.
The reason there were no video collections in the sisters' bedrooms, is that the Lagoon family kept their large video, and electronic game collect in the recreational room, downstairs.
Though, unlike three of her sisters, Molly's bedroom had brightly painted walls, bright window curtains, she had shelve filled with manga, and school. She had shelves, a chest of drawers, a small nightstand by her bed, a chair, a desk with a computer, and a nice, comfortable bed. It was a classic schoolgirl bedroom.
On the other hand, Sarah's bedroom had very dark colored walls, dark window curtains, a nice, conformable bed. Also, there were some book shelves, but the shelves were barely half full of books of various topics. Also, there was a chest of drawers, a small night table by her bed, a computer on her desk, and a chair beside the desk.
But, feel of the room, was simple, and dark.
Everyone had wondered why this was, until a few years ago, for the Lagoon family, when Bob had pointed out all how the daughters were reincarnations of others their parents knew.
As the Lagoon family realized that the austere style that Ginji preferred for his bedroom had carried over to Sarah's life.
Inside Sarah's bedroom, with the hallway door to the room shut, Sarah and Molly were standing next to each other, as they quietly talking about their lives, and their personal problems with each other.
Sarah said, in a sad tone of voice, “Molly, we cannot keep this a secret forever.”
Molly agreed, in a sober tone of voice, “I know. But, even with the background information, they won't understand.”
Sarah responded, “I am not disagreeing with you are on that. But, in all honesty, we have been lucky so far. Our parents have enhance hearing, and smell. They will eventually pick up on this. Also, I think the sisters already suspect.”
Molly said, “I think they do too. Yukio at least has given me some hints. And Rebecca and Kristina are very perceptive.”
Sarah wondered, “Do you think they will tell on us?”
Molly commented, “That is doubtful. They will talk to us, first. Just like us, they are torn between what is right, and what is love. After we saw that series, they know we love each other, and they know we cannot be together.”
Sarah stated, “On the bright side, at least it is not a major age difference this time, and we are the same gender. So, if we get caught, the trouble will be equal for both of us.”
Molly agreed, “True. And at least we cannot get each other pregnant, without outside means. That keeps the most dangerous part of incest from occurring between us. That is the one saving grace of this situation. Still, after we found out, and started to remember, I realized why I gravitate to books and manga about forbidden and tragic love stories.”
Sarah said, in a confronting voice, “I know. Still, we have been given a second chance to be together in life. This is very rare opportunity. And I agree that we should not waste this opportunity.”
Molly complained, “I know. But, why did we have to be related? If we were the same age, and not blood related, we would not be hide that we care for each other, this deeply.”
Sarah walked up and gently hugged Molly.
Molly returned the hug, as Sarah said, “We are together. We love each other. We will figured out the rest as we go. And I think you are right. We can keep this secret going a little while longer.”
Molly responded, “Let us hope so.”
They broke the hug, though they remained where they were standing, close to each other.
Sarah asked, “Let us take our minds off of this... So, where do you think the brothers are?”
Molly grinned, as she questioned, “Which city does every badass multiversal adventurer, we know of, eventually visit?”
Sarah answered, “Roanapur. But, when?”
Molly stated, “It doesn't take a genius to figure out that the reason Lewis and Stan teleported here to see their parents. Even if they don't realize, the boys are going to gravitate to their parents. Either the parents of the present, or past. Because going into the future, with a reality device, requires a conscious action to do so.”
“And from what our parents told us, we know for a fact that Ed and Bob only visited Roanapur once in their past. For only two days. We just begin our search for the boys in that in that location, during time period.”
“And us heading there won't be a problem, because the city is in our home reality. We know exactly where Roanapur is. And when we reality jump, I will just think of Ed and Bob, with Boris, before Boris became B, when they visited Roanapur together. We should immidaitely head there, on the proper date.”
Sarah responded, “Sounds like you have everything figured out. And after I learned of the Black Lagoon series, I always want to visit Roanapur of the past, before it became a military guarded ghost town.”
Molly agreed, “So do I. Considering in our previous lives, we were the only two major characters of that series whom did not go to that city.”
Sarah commented, “I know. It is kind of like not be invited to the party. And with all five of us, I am sure we will be fine. As long as we keep our mouths shut, and don't pick a fight with one of the mafias there. Though, I can understand why our parents won't let us visit that city, in the past, or present. But, this is the perfect excuse to go see what Roanapur is all about, first hand.”
Molly responded, “My thoughts exactly.”
Sarah inquired, “Still, should we tell Ed and Bob what you figured out?”
Molly answered, “No. We do owe those two teenage boys some payback for falling on us. And Bob and Ed won't mind to much, as long as their boys are okay, other than a few bruises, when Lewis and Stan are returned to them.”
Sarah complimented, “I love your way of thinking.”
Molly warmly smiled towards Sarah, as she replied, “I know.”
Both of them then shared a deep kiss.
After they broke their kiss, Molly said, “Now, let us round up our sisters, and go find those boys.”
Sarah agreed, “Good idea. And doing so will take our mind off of our own problems.”
Sarah and Molly walked over the door to the hallway. Sarah opened door, and she let Molly exit first, before she left, closing the door behind her.
(_)
Reality, Star Wars Reality. Date, twelve years after the end of the Clone War. Place, a mid-rim, backwater world, with fields, farms, and constant comfortable weather. Time, later at night.
In a small town, inside a cantina that had just closed for the night, from behind the bar counter, bartender was wiping down his counter, with a rag.
The bartender was a male, Duros, in wearing casual clothing.
As the bartender continued to clean the counter, with his rage, he heard the front doors to his bar, open, and someone walk into the room.
The male bartender said, in an electronic voice, in galactic basic, “The bar is closed.”
The bartender heard a human male voice said, in galactic basic, “I am not hear for a drink. I am here to talk.”
The bartender looked up, as he set his rag down on the counter.
The bartender saw that the man was a fair skinned, black haired, male human, of average height, and physical build. He wore in a black military dress uniform, with a few pouches on the sides of his belt. Though, he saw no weapons on the man.
As the man slowly walked towards the bartender, the man said, in a calm, even tone of voice, “As you can see, I am unarmed. I have come looking for Cad Bane. And I believe you are the person I am looking for.”
The bartender stated, “I know all of us Duros look alike to you humans. Besides, you look like an imperial officer, human.”
By then, the man came to a stop, by the bar counter. As the man stood across the counter from the bartender, the man politely responded, “Given the circumstances, both are understandable, and incorrect conclusions to make, about myself. I am neither human, nor imperial. I am a Sebacean, and an agent for the Peacekeepers. You have not heard us because we do not exist in this reality.”
The bartender went silent for a few seconds. He then stated, “Well, then. You have my undivided attention. What do you know of Cad Bane?”
The Peacekeeper agent said, “Cad Bane, one of the top five most skilled bounty hunters, whom are currently alive in the galaxy.”
The agent noticed that the bartender cracked a grin. Though, the agent maintained an expression of calmness, over his face.
The agent continued, “Bounty Hunter Bane was most notably active in that later half of the Clone Wars. He was known to take on missions, as a freelance agent, for the Separatists and Hutts. Bane had many achievements in his career. Which included the successful theft of a Jedi holocron from a vault within the Jedi Temple. With his escape being the simple use of a jedi hood and robe to walk out the front doors of the temple.”
The agent noticed that the bartender's grin became a little wider.
The agent went onto say, “Unfortunately, or fortunately. Given how you look at it. Towards the end of the Clone Wars, Cad Bane was caught, arrested, and imprisoned by the Jedi and Republic forces. Bane was awaiting trial, in prison, as the Clone Wars ended, and thus, he was not a victim of the purges that happened to the Separatists forces.”
“It is likely that Bane was allowed to live until after his trial, due to propaganda purposes for the newly christened Galactic Empire.”
“But, due to Bane's own skills and abilities, he was able to escape while he was being transported from one prison to another prison.”
“Cad Bane has since been in hiding for the last twelve cycles. Still, when Darth Vader learned of Cad Bane's escape, he put a very large bounty on his head.”
The bartender commented, “That is not surprising. It is said that Darth Vader was once a Jedi, and Cad Bane had embarrassed the Jedi Order a number of times. With the only things going for Cad Bane being that it was considered professional curtsey for bounty hunters not to actively go after other bounty hunters, unless they accidentally run into said bounty.”
“Also, Vader was well known for not honor his bargains. Though, with Vader disappearing a few years ago, many now just ignore his posted bounties.”
The agent agreed, “Quite true, on all points. Still, tracking you down was difficult, and time consuming. But, I believe it will be worth my efforts. And I know that you are Cad Bane due to an identifying mark. That being the scar across the bridge of you nose.”
Cad Bane stated, “I always knew I could have gotten surgery to remove that scar. Well, if you are here for the bounty, you are not going to live long enough to collect it.”
The agent calmly said, “I am not here for your bounty. I am here to offer you an opportunity.”
Cad inquired, “What opportunity is that?”
The agent stated, “You are a very skilled, and cunning individual, at what you do. You are considered equal in skill to a Peacekeeper Disruptor. Which is a high compliment from within the upper levels of the peacekeeper ranks.”
“Unfortunately, you are also too well known here, and the side you worked for lost their war. So, your job here, as a bounty hunter, is over. But, that does not mean that your job as a bounty hunter is over. As I said before, I am not of this reality. Have you heard of the term, multiverse?”
Cad Bane grin curled into a smirk, as he said, “Yes. And like where this conversation is going.”
The agent gave Bane a simple smile, as he commented, “I thought you would. Here is my organization's offer. In exchange for your services, for one job in finding two young, human, teenage boys, you will be given a small retainer of precious metals get get you started. You will also be given a small reality travel device, along with instructions on how to use it. This will allow you to go anywhere, or any time, in the multiverse. We suggest you do not try to alter your past.”
Cad Bane stated, “I have no intention of trying to create a paradox.”
The agent said, “Good. You already understand the consequences in making such an attempt. You will also be given a holographic device that will mask you voice and appearance, so you can blend in with the native species of the planet you are on at the time.”
“Though, please understand, that if you do not capture the bounties, within the given mission parameters, you will not be paid any further for that assignment. But, you will still be allowed to keep these items. Thus, allowing you to either travel the multiverse, or set up a new life for yourself in another reality, where you can create a new life for yourself. Along with this, depending on how well you do at your job. Even if you do not capture the two humans. We may contact you, from time to time, for other job offers.”
“Though, these job offers will be voluntary, and not mandatory.”
Cad Bane said, “This sounds fair.”
The agent cautioned, “Please keep in mind, you are not the only bounty hunter we are hiring to search for our targets.”
Cad Bane replied, “Given the size, and scope, of the multiverse, that is completely understandable. And I like a challenge. Especially when dealing with competition.”
The agent stated, “In the equipment we will give you, there will be a device which we will use to send a cancellation signal. And later, an offer for new jobs from us. Including the amounts we will pay for those jobs. This is so you do not waste a lifetime for a bounty that someone else has received.”
“Also, we do not negotiate on our fees. In case this device malfunctions, the equipment will have an emergency transponder, you can use. So, you will not be stranded. We do like to keep an accounting of the technology we hand out.”
“We also ask that if you have not found your bounty within one stand cycle. I believe you call it a, year. For you to return to us, to check to see if the bounty has already been collected. There is one exception to our request, in your traveling the multiverse. That you never use your reality device to travel within the Peacekeeper home reality. The reality we are about go to.”
Cad stated, “So, one reality if off limits, but the rest of the multiverse is not. I get to keep the equipment I am given. Along with this, I already have a job offer already line up... Where do I sign up?”
The agent responded, “I am glad to have you accepted our offer, Cad Bane.”
Cad Bane stated, “My outfit, equipment, and weapons are in back. It will only take me a few minutes to change my clothing.”
Just as Bane was about to turn around, the agent stated, “Before you head into the back, to get changed. There are two subjects of note, which you may find interesting, about Darth Vader. For, whom he really was? And we do know what happened to Vader.”
Cad Bane looked at the agent, as he stated, “Alright. I will bite. Who is Darth Vader?”
The agent answered, “You knew him as Anakin Skywalker.”
Cad said, “Interesting. That does explained why Vader would put such a high bounty on me. Anakin and I fought several times. With him on the losing end, most of time. So, what happened him?”
The agent explained, “Vader as kidnapped by another organization in the multiverse. Vader's body was regenerated, and youth restored. With one interesting change. Vader had his gender completely changed from man to woman. He is now a fully functioning she, whom goes by the name, Annie.”
Cad Bane raised an eyebrow, as he replied, “Really?”
The agent answered, “Yes. Annie now looks like her own younger, cuter, adult sister.”
Cad began laughing.
He continued laughing, as he walked turned around, and into the back of the building, to change his clothing.
The agent thought, 'Good. He reacted the comment exactly as I expected he would. And just as my superiors, told me he would. While I am not sure. I have a feeling that my mission involved the Grand Chancellor. I will find out, soon enough. Though, this has her fingerprints all over it. Not, that it matters, the Grand Chancellor has been a good leader. I am sure this entire mission is for the good of the Peacekeepers.'
(_)
A few minutes later, Cad Bane walked out of the back, with his blaster pistols in his hands.
Though, Bane was pointing the weapons downward, so the agent was not concerned.
Cad Bane was still lightly chuckling, as he spun his blaster pistols in his hands. He then holstered his weapons into their hostlers, on the sides of his waist, as he walked around the bar counter, to where the agent was standing.
The agent saw that Cad Bane was now dressed in his usual outfit, and equipment.
Of note, Bane wore a brown long coat, and brown, wide brimmed, fedora hat.
Bane then came to a stop, in front of the agent.
The agent compliment, “Nice coat and hat. I think you will fit right in with our other freelance personal.”
Bane cracked a grin, as he replied, “Thank you.”
The agent then pulled out a small syringe from one of his pouches, on the right side of his belt.
The agent held the syringe, in the palm of his right hand, so Bane could see it.
The agent stated, “To start with your new equipment. I have this. These are translator microbes that need to be injected into you. They will move to your brain and allow you to understand our language, among other languages. You can rest assured that these microbes are not designed to brainwash, nor control you in anyway. They are a necessity for you to understand us. Only a few of us peacekeepers know how to speak the language you call, galactic basic. What others would call, english.”
“I have already reviewed your biology. And Duros are compatible to these microbes. These microbes are used across my native galaxy, on countless species. It allows us to understand each other, while literally speak different languages.”
Cad inquired, “So, with these microbes, I will be able to understand any language in existence?”
The agent answered, “Most languages. Though, you will not be able to speak that language.”
Cad Bane quickly took off his coat, and set it on the counter beside him. He then rolled up his left sleeve of his upper arm, as he stated, “Inject me already. This will only increase the opportunities for job offers.”
The agent injected the micros into Bane's upper left arm.
A few seconds later, Bane rolled down his left sleeve, and put back on his coat. He then turned to the agent, as he asked, “So, when should the micro it start working?”
The agent asked, in Sebacean, “That depends. Do you understand what I am saying?”
Cad answered, in galactic basic, “Yes.”
The agent replied, in Sebacean, “Then, the translator microbes are working.”
Cad commented, in galactic basic, “Interesting. I can understand you. But, if I listen carefully, it is a completely different language that what I am familiar with. Are all of your toys this useful?”
The agent could now help himself, as he cracked a grin. He stated, “Yes. Now, it is time for us to leave.”
Cad Bane watched the agent pulled out a small device, as he walked towards Cad Bane.
The agent came to a stop, less than three feet from Bane. He then requested, “Do not move. I am about to teleport us to my leader's Command Carrier Flagship.”
The next thing Cad Bane knew, he was in a dimly lit room, with metal walls, floor, and ceiling.
Bane asked, “So, this is what it is like to travel across realities. Much quicker and easier than I expected.”
The agent put away his reality device, as he agreed, “Yes. Simple. Quick. And efficient. The Peacekeeper way.”
Bane commented, “And I thought hyperspace travel was quick. I could get spoiled using such modes of travel, as this.”
The agent said, “Yes. It can be alluring. Now, please follow my. And I request that you remain silent.”
Cad stated, “As long as you hold up your end of this bargain, I will remain quiet, and comply with your requests. Within reason.”
The agent responded, “Good. Now, please follow me.”
Cad followed the agent to a nearby door, which slid open for them.
After the agent and Cad exited the door, the door slid closed, as they continued through the hallways, until they walked into the largest single shuttle bay, which was the main Commander Carrier shuttle bay of the Flagship.
The shuttle bay was well lit, with ceiling lights. The shuttle bay span two miles wide, by two miles long, by half a mile high.
While Cad continued follow the peacekeepers agent, he looked around. Cad thought, 'A person could fit a whole Star Destroyer in this shuttle bay, alone. If this room is this big, how big is this ship?'
Cad then noticed several other aliens, most he could not identify, along with either humans, near-humans, or Sebaceans, standing around, while wearing various types of clothing, with weapons holstered, or sheathed on their person.
Cad could tell that tens of thousands of these people were bounty hunters. And the very large group continuing into the distance, as far as he could see in the shuttle bay.
Bane thought, 'This is a lot of competition. Though, there is a lot of ground to cover.'
Bane then noticed that each of these bounty hunters was standing by Sebacean peacekeepers, in military uniform, like the agent that he was following. Though, the Peacekeepers differed in genders and appearance.
In addition, Bane saw that all of these people were standing in grids formation.
Cad thought, 'This operation has to have taken a small army, just to bring this many people here. That is not counting the logistics of organization this meeting, nor the resources for tracking down, and convincing this many people to come aboard.'
'And I am sure none of these bounty hunters were forced to come here. It is very hard for someone to get even a few of those like me to stand in such a formation like this. Let alone an entire army of us. I think these Peacekeeper put the Empire to shame when it comes to efficiency.'
'Along those thoughts. I am coming to believe that these Peacekeepers are who the Empire wished they were. I need to stay on my toes while I am here. Though, if I do so, I should be fine.'
The agent then stop by a place in the formation, that had enough room for him, and Bane.
The agent used his right hand, to point for Bane to stand in a spot. Cad noticed this, and he did so. The agent then stood behind Bane, to his left side.
The agent then used his right hand to point in front of them, at a podium in the distance.
Cad turned to the podium, and he saw that the podium was set up from the crowd. Also, there was a large, close hatch doors behind the podium.
Cad thought, 'I guess that is where this shuttle bay opens up into space.'
Cad suddenly saw large holographic pictures pop up above them.
The images were set every so often in shuttle bay, so everyone had a clear view of at least on of the holographic pictures.
The holographic images showed a white haired, fair skinned, young Sebacean woman, in black armor, and black cape. Only her head was not in armor.
Cad then noticed in the distance, a figure in black, with white hair, on the podium up front.
Bane thought, 'These images must be of the woman on the podium in front of us. Given the way she looks, and she is dressed, I wonder if she is Vader's counterpart of this reality? Or, maybe she is even the Imperial Emperor's counterpart?'
(_)
Meanwhile, on the podium, in the front of the shuttle bay, Scorpius surveyed her work, as she happily thought, 'It is surprising what one can do, when they have and entire army at their disposal. Still, to pull this together in two solar days impresses even me.'
'I reviewed the lists of bounty hunters that we were going to make the offer for. One quarter of them declined our offer. That is not surprising. And included in those that declined, were Boda Fett, along with Faye Valentine, and Jet Black. This is understandable, given their friends, or in Fett's case, his customers. They would have heard of myself, and my reputation.'
'Though, I made sure they would be left alone, after they declined my offer. I do not wish to make enemies of their friends. Especially, Lewis and Stan's mother, Ed. She could be as dangerous as John, if she wanted to be. And I know I am already in hot water with her, given I did kidnap her children, in the first place.'
'Though, I was not given much choice in the matter. The cousins of the Lowe brothers forced my hand. The brothers would have eventually found out who I was. Then, they would not have shared their findings with me.'
'I am fortunate that the Lewis and Stan finished the formula that night. Or, my plans might have become completely undone. As it stands, I can still salvage the situation. If I am careful in how I approach this matter.”
'Also, speaking about approaching matters. I rarely do get the chance to wear my black cape. And I to like do so. It is just not a day to day piece of clothing. Well, I might as well start the needed speech. And I know just what to say, what to offer, and how to make my offer, to get what I want.'
Scorpius spoke into her small microphone, located in the front part of the collar of her armor. The microphone was connected to the speakers in the shuttle bay. She stated, in Sebacean, in an authoritarian, though not an arrogant, tone of voice, “Greeting professionals, rogues, scoundrels, it is a pleasure to make you acquaintance. Now, I am sure that you find the posturing of others as annoying as I do. So, let us skip the formalities, and get down to business.”
Among the crowd, Cad listened to Scorpius' speech, as he thought, 'I like this woman.'
Cad could also see from the expressions of the faces of many of the bounty hunters, that they shared his thoughts on this matter.
Scorpius continued, “I am Scorpius, leader of this fleet of Peacekeepers. I am after two teenage human boys. Two brothers. Their names are Lewis and Stan Lowe. This is what they looked like.”
Scorpius used a small remote installed in her left glove, to control the holographic projections.
A second later, the holographic images above the crowd changed to show Stan and Lewis standing side by side, in their usual clothing.
Scorpius mentioned, “Lewis is the one with the white coat. And Stan is the one with the red jacket. And this is what you will get if you bring them one of them in, relatively unharmed, and alive. Minor bruises, and small cuts are fine. Broken bones, serious injuries, including head concussions, are not.”
The holographic images change to show a large pile of gold, silver, platinum coins, mixed with pearls and jewels.
The image stayed in place, as Scorpius went onto say, “And if you bring in both boys, the reward will be greater than what you see.”
Cad was impressed with Scorpius, as he mentally reflected, 'Show us a large bounty. Then, sweeten the deal even more. Allowing the bounty hunters own imaginations, and greed, to try to figure out what else they will get. Nice touch, Scorpius.'
Scorpius stated, “Now, understand me. As I said before. I do not want these two boys seriously harmed. Killing either of them will not only invalidate the bounty, but I will put an equally high bounty on the heads of those responsible. And I will find you. And you will not like what I will do you, when, not if, I get my gloved hands on you.”
Bane thought, 'And there is the stick, to her reward. I will have to make sure not to harm these two humans.'
Scorpius continued, “That being said, I only need one of them. But, to repeat, there will be a bonus if you can bring in both of them. The bounty ends when one, or both of them has been captured, and brought to me, at the same time.”
“After this speech has been concluded, you will be given the equipment promised to you, and the instructions on the use of said equipment, by the Peacekeeper agents that brought you here.”
“Also, whether you succeed in accomplishing your mission, or not, you may keep the equipment you are given, after the job is over.”
“You may choose to work together, and split the bounty. I do not care. All that I care about it, that you bring the boys here, unharmed. And do not create to much of a ruckus, in the multiverse, in front them, and bringing them here.”
“I do appreciate subtlety in one's actions.”
Cad thought, 'So, you want us to do this low key. That is understandable. And I can do things quietly, when I want to. And I might even think about the teamwork angle. I have completed several jobs, where working with a team was useful to me.'
“In addition, unlike others, I do not punish failure. I only punish incompetence, and betrayal.”
Cad thought, 'This woman just made my top ten list for my all time favorite clients. It is nice work for someone that does not immediately kill you for something beyond one's control. I think she just made several friends in this crowd, just by making that statement alone.'
Scorpius said, “Given what I have already offered you, and what you are being given before you even begin this assignment, you know my word is valid. I will make good on my rewards.”
Cad thought, 'And after this speech, and what you have already given us, I believe you are good for your word.'
Scorpius continued, “And I hope to make future job offers to you, as well. So, all I have left to say to you is, thank you for accepting my offer. And good hunting.”
Cad happily thought, 'I am going to enjoy working for this woman.'
(_)
Black Lagoon Reality. Place, Roanapur, Thailand. Time, the past.
The next thing the brother knew, they were in an alleyway, with one end of the alleyway being walled off to a dead end, and one end exited onto a street.
From the sky between the buildings, they could see that it was day time.
Stan looked over at Lewis, as he inquired, “Are you alright?”
Lewis replied, “Yes.”
Stan responded, “Good.” He then used his right hand, to point at the reality device in Lewis' hand. He cautioned, “Don't lose that, or we are screwed.”
Lewis put the reality device into his right, side pants pocket, as he said, “Don't worry, I won't. Now, let's get out of this side-street, and to an outside area. So, we can figure out where we are, and when we are.”
Stan nodded, as both brothers began walking out of the alleyway's one exit.
As Stan and Lewis walked out of the alleyway, they found themselves by one of the two lane streets of the city of Roanapur.
Stan stated, “Let's get to the right sidewalk. Standing in the entrance of the alleyway is going to attract unwanted attention.”
Lewis agreed, “Good point.”
They walked to their right side, they came to a stop, standing beside each other, on the sidewalk,
Lewis stated, “Now, let's look around.”
They looked around themselves, at the new reality they had found themselves in.
They saw people walk by them, on the sidewalk they were on, and the sidewalk across the two lane street from them. They also saw vehicles pass by them, in both directions, on the street in front of them.
As they looked around, they saw that the weather was a warm and partly cloudy, with a light breeze. They then looked at the sky.
Lewis turned to Stan, as he he commented, “From the position of the sun, I believe it is morning.”
Stan looked over at Lewis, as he replied, “I agree.”
Lewis said, “So, this is what Earth was like before the gate explosion. Very nice. I can see the appeal.”
Stan agreed, “True. It is nice. Especially, when we are not being chased by people.”
Lewis replied, “You got that right.”
Stan requested, “Now, please stay quiet, as I look around and listen. So, I can get our bearings.”
Lewis just nodded in response.
Stan looked around, while listening to what language the people were speaking, as he took a good, hard look around him.
Around half a minute later, Stan turned back to look at Lewis, while Stan saw Lewis looking at him.
Stan stated, “From the building structures. From the type of the few tropical trees I see in a nearby yard. From the people I see. Both in clothing, and race. And the types of vehicles. Along with the weather. I would guess we are in southeast Asia. And though I don't know the language, I do recognize the syntax, as Thai. So, I would guess we are in Thailand.”
“From the smell of salt in the air, and the strength of the breeze. On long we the direction of the breeze, in relation to the direction of the sun, and time of day, I would say the coast is to our west. So, that means that we are either by the Andaman Sea, or the Gulf of Thailand. My instincts tells me that we are by the Gulf of Thailand, meaning we are on the east side of Thailand's, n, shaped nation.”
“Also, from the clothing styles, and vehicle models, I would say that we are in the late twentieth century. Since I see not newer models beyond that date.”
Lewis smiled, as he complimented, “Nice job, history buff.”
Stan returned Lewis' smile, as he commented, “Well, it does pad on my scholarship. Math and physics are nice, but a well rounded school record goes a long way.”
Lewis agreed, “True. Since you are better at geography and history than me, which way do you think we should go from here?”
Stan used his right hand to point at the large, tall buildings in the distance, to their right. He suggested, “Let us go that way. Larger buildings usually mean the business district of a city. I am sure we can find some help from people that way.”
Lewis responded, “Good idea. Though, my instincts tell me that this city is more dangerous than it looks like.”
Stan stated, “You are not the only one. My instincts tell me this place is dangerous, as well. We will just have to be careful, and polite with locals. By being polite, we will not give the locals an excuse to harm us.”
Lewis replied, “That is a great idea. Still do you know why this place is so dangerous?”
Stan admitted, “No. Politics and economic history are your fields of expertise.”
Lewis smiled, as he stated, “I am glad you remember that. Well, now that we know where we are, I know the reason this place is dangerous. The eastern side of Thailand, during this time period, was notorious for smuggling. Both export, and import smuggling.”
“The eastern part of Thailand is on the southwest side of the Indochina peninsula. The heart of the Indochina peninsula is sometimes referred as the Golden Triangle. Where poppy flowers are planted in fields to be produced into the addictive, and illegal drug, opium, in bulk.”
“Thailand was... Or now, is currently well known for smuggling the opium produced in the Golden Triangle to the rest of the world. Also, Thailand is known for having smuggling routes into southeast Asia, from India to China, for illegal goods leaving, and brought into, the area from the rest of the world.”
Stan inquired, “So, this place is as dangerous as some of the worse parts of TJ.”
Lewis answered, “Pretty much. I agree with should head for the large buildings. Which are likely part of the business districts. I think the business districts should be our safest place for us. At least during the day. And given the time of day, we have plenty of time to figured out the device that Annie gave us, before it gets dark, and we have to leave.”
Stan stated, “Good. Then, let's start walking.”
Lewis nodded in agreement.
The two brother then started turned to their right, and they walking down the city sidewalk, in the direction of the buildings Stan had pointed too.
(_)
Five minutes later, as they continued walking, the insane situation was starting to mentally sink in for them.
Lewis asked, “So, how long do you think we will have to continue walking?”
Stan snapped, “How should I know?”
Lewis said, “Hey, don't be that way.”
Stan replied, “Then don't ask a stupid question.”
Lewis stated with annoyance, “I was just asking if you had a plan.”
Stan responded, “You come up with a plan. I have more important, and immediate worries to think about, than a simple plan. Like figuring out where we really are. Any ideas?”
On the sidewalk, the brothers were approaching three individuals that had just turned a corner and were approaching them.
To the brothers' left side, was a young adult, black haired, fair skinned man, in a brown long coat. In the middle was a tanned skinned, skinny redheaded woman around the man's age, whom was wearing a t-shirt, shorts, and tennis shoes, without socks. And to their right, was a much old brown haired, fair skinned man in a black long coat.
Without really looked at each other, the brothers moved to the outside of the sidewalk, while the three other adults moved to the interior of the side walk, as they passed by each other.
Lewis asked, “How should I know where we are?”
Stan said, “Well, you are the brains of this operation.”
Lewis replied, “You are just as intelligent as I am. If you just applied yourself. Besides, our parents never told us a damn thing.”
Stan stated, “You got that right. But, a more important question, where are we sleeping tonight. We have no money that will be accept here.”
Lewis said, “We are geniuses. We will figure something out.”
As the brothers turned the corner, on the sidewalk, Stan smiled, as he agreed, “You are right brother. We will figure something out.”
Lewis turned his brother's smile, as he responded, “Now, let us get to that business district, and then start working on getting some answers.”
(_)
The Lowe brothers had been walking for the next five minutes. They had decided to be silent, as they patiently walked towards what they guessed was the business district.
The brothers then turned a corner, and they ran into five teenage girls that were around the brothers age. All of whom had slender, muscular builds, and average heights for their races, and age. From the way their breasts were held until their shirts, all five girls were wearing sports bras.
One was a dark skinned girl, with brown dreadlocks that went to her neck line. She wore blue jeans, a purple belt, a purple t-shirt, dark socks, and purple boots. She had on what looked like purple, mechanical gauntlets.
There were two tanned skinned, redheaded girls. One redhead wore blue denim shorts, with a blue belt, a short sleeved, black t-shirt, white socks, blue boots. She had her hair cut short. She had two long knife scabbards attached to her back, in a crisscross pattern, with the straps going around her chest. She held a long knife in each of her hands.
The other redhead wore a red long skirt, white, short sleeved blouse, white shocks, and red tennis shoes. Her hair went to her should blades. She carried a huge M nineteen eighteen A two Browning Automatic Rifle machine gun in her hands, with a hundred round, double drum, beta c-magazine in her weapon.
The clear plastic on the back of the redhead's magazine, allowed her to see how much ammo she had for her weapon.
The redhead appeared to be strong than she should, because it appear she was effortlessly holding her large Browning Automatic Rifle, with just her hands. She was not using a shoulder strap for support.
The redhead's Browning Automatic Rifle was loaded with seven point sixty-two by sixty-three millimeter armor piercing cartridges.
The machine gun had hundred round, modified, beta c-magazine in the weapon. There was ninety-nine rounds in the magazine and one round in the chamber of redhead's weapon. Her trigger finger rested against the trigger guard of her weapon.
There were two tanned skinned, blond girls. One blond girl wore black pants, with a black belt, a gray short sleeved shirt, white socks, and black tennis shoes. Her hair was cut short. And she carried a katana in her hands, with a scabbard for her weapon, strapped to her left side of her belt, which was around the waist of her pants.
The final girl, the other blond teenager girl, wore plain yellow shorts, with a brown belt, a yellow t-shirt, with white socks, and yellow tennis shoes. Her hair went down to her neckline. Over her shirt were a brown leather, double shoulder holsters, for her two M Nine semi-automatic pistol.
The blond girl currently had her two stainless Beretta M-Nine semi-automatic pistols in her hands. Each weapon was loaded with a fifteen round magazine, of nine millimeter hollowpoint ammo. There was a round in each chamber, and fourteen rounds in each magazine. Her trigger fingers rests on the trigger guards of her weapons.
While none of the girls were pointing their weapons at the boys, they did give the boys feral grins.
Yukio, the redheaded girl with the machine gun, continued to grin at the boys, as she stated, in english, “Hi boys.”
Lewis and Stan didn't even bother to response, they just turned, and ran together across the empty street, as fast at they could.
Yukio turned to the other girls. She shrugged, as she said, “I was polite.”
Kristina, the dark skinner girl wearing the gauntlets over her hands, kindly commented, in english, “Some people just don't appreciate polite women.”
The other girls just giggled at her joke.
Molly, the blond girl with the semi-automatic pistols, ordered, in english, “After them.”
The five girls then turned and ran after the two boys.
Fortunately, for Stan and Lewis, the sidewalks and streets, they found themselves in, for that section of the city, were mostly empty of both pedestrians and vehicles.
They kept running across several streets, with the five teenage girls hot on their heels.
The teenagers kept running, until started running across an empty five lane street.
Just as the brothers reached the other side, with the sisters in the middle of the five lane street, thirteen police cars swoop in, from around the corner, and stop in front of them, to their right sides.
The cars were line up in a row, while the teenagers stopped in their tracks. The teenagers turned and looked at the interlopers.
The five teenagers girls then pointed their weapons at the newcomers.
While sixty feet from the teenagers, the cops got out of their cars, and behind their makeshift barricade, as they pulled out, and pointed their six round Smith & Wesson Model Ten revolvers at all seven teenagers.
The police officers wore light brown shirts, over black undershirts, with darker brown pants, dark brown shoes, dark brown belt. They also wore white hard hats, and sunglasses.
The teenagers saw there were twenty-five police officers in all.
Behind the vehicles, among the police officers, there was overweight, middle-aged, male police officer, with a light mustache, wearing green sunglasses, and a peaked cap. There was rank insignia medals, on both sides of the chest, on his shirt.
The overweight police officer stood to his right, of the center of the barricade. He looked over at the teenagers, as he loudly stated, in arrogant, in english, “Hello! I am police Chief Watsup, of the Roanapur PD!” Watsup then focused on the teenage girls, as he did a wolf whistled. Next, he commented, in a normal tone of voice, “Ah. Look what we have here, boys. This is new blood I see here. And fine blood at that.”
The police officers kept their weapons trained on the teenagers, as they chuckled a little at their Chief's comment.
Molly muttered two words under her breath, “Scumbag pigs.”
Her four sisters were the only ones that heard her comment. They simply nodded in agreement.
Watsup went onto say, in a slightly loud tone of voice, “For the last few hours, we have been getting reports of a group of five teenager girls, walking around town, carrying some serious hardware. And it just took this long for us to spring our trap. Now girls, while I don't know who you are, you should know there are rules in this town. The rules are real simple No pay. No play.”
Watsup then turned to the brothers, as he asked, “So, what is your story?”
Lewis and Stan noticed that Watsup was addressing them. Lewis answered, “In all honesty, we are not really sure ourselves. I know that doesn't help. But, please understand sir, we are unarmed, lost, and we are more than willing to cooperate with you, in any way possible.”
Watsup smiled, as he stated, “Thank you. It is so nice to get some genuine respect for my position and authority. Do you know who those girls are?”
Stan said, “No. We just saw them approach us, with their weapons in hand. One of them said. Hi boys. And we ran.”
Kristina stated, “We are from the bikini party.”
In response, Lewis and Stan turned to look at the teenage girls.
Sarah, the blond girl holding the katana, mentioned, with an annoyed tone of voice, in english, “You fell on top of us.”
Stan replied, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh.”
Lewis sheepishly said, “Sorry about that.”
Watsup commented, “Bikini party? This I have got to hear. So, you two are coming with me, as well.” He then turned to the girls, as he demanded, “Now, why don't you girls surrender your weapons, and come with me. Because I don't want to have to put your cute little asses in body bags.”
Molly plainly said, “Considering one of our mothers was raped by a cop, when she was younger than we are, we don't respect pigs. So, the answer is, no”
While the brothers looked at each other, as Lewis quietly asked, “One of your mothers?”
Stan shrugged, in response.
The brothers then turned back to look at both the teenage girls and the police.
Sarah stated, “We know who you are, Watsup. But, you do not know who we are.”
Rebecca, the redheaded girl holding the long knives, mentioned, in english, “We are giving you, and your men, one opportunity to walk away, right now.”
The police officers laughed.
Stan thought, 'My instincts tells me this is about to end very badly for these police officers.'
Chief Watsup ordered, “Oh well. I was hoping for some more eye candy in this town. But, have it your way. Take them down, boys!”
Before the officers could fire their revolvers, Molly, from the right side of her group, fired her semi-automatic pistols at the police officers, while Yukio, on the left side of her group, fired her machine gun at the police officers.
Both teenager girls fired their weapons in a crisscross pattern, as they aimed at waist level, above the front and back hoods of the cars. While they did so, Molly ran to the right side of the street, with Sarah, and Kristina, to avoid being shoot. Meanwhile, Yukio ran to the left side of the street, with Rebecca, to avoid being shoot.
Their attacks hit a few of the police officers, while forcing the rest, including Watsup, to dive for cover, behind their police cars.
While still firing, but being careful with her ammo supplies, Molly loudly yelled, in a mocking fashion, as she smirked, “You heard the man! Taken them down, girls!”
Rebecca and Sarah drew their blades. Kristina primed her flame throwers in her gauntlets.
Rebecca ran towards the left side of the cops car barricade. Sarah took the middle of the barricade. While Kristina to the left side of the barricade.
As all three girls swiftly reached the barricade, they each jumped over the cop cars in one bound.
They then cut loose on the cops.
Meanwhile, where their three sisters were not, Molly and Yukio shot at the cops.
After the first spray of bullets, to save on ammo, Yukio switched the fire select of her machine gun from full auto, to single fire. Also, Yukio's machine gun was loaded with armor piecing, allowing her to shot through the cars, and hit her targets on the other side.
Meanwhile, Molly's weapons were loaded with, hollowpoints, which could tear chucks of flesh off of a body. Molly knew better than to aim for the police officers' chests, for they were likely wearing bulletproof vests under their were they hit the cops So, Molly aimed for the officers whom were currently not close to her sisters, and she hit the heads of the officers that were standing, or had their heads above the cars.
On the left side of the barricade, Rebecca was using her long knives to literally slice through the ranks of the police officers, with ease.
Being so close, and not wanting to accidentally shoot their fellow officers, a few of the police officers tried to stop Rebecca with their nightsticks. That was a fatal mistake, as the blades of Rebecca's long knives cut through their nightsticks as easily as they did flesh and bone.
On the right side of the barricade, Kristina was enjoying herself a bit too much, as she was using the flamethrowers, on the top of her gauntlets, to immolate the cops around her.
Kristina loudly joked, “Anybody feel like a barbeque?! I'll do the cooking!”
Kristina then began laughing at the carnage she was creating.
In the middle of the barricade, Sarah was cutting through the cops, with her katana, without a problem.
Nearby, Watsup realized the danger he was in, as he thought, with worry, 'This is like dealing with five Revys at once.'
Watsup then noticed that Sarah directed her attention towards him.
As Sarah charged at him, Watsup brought his revolve to bare on the blond teenage girl.
Watsup was many things, but he knew that it was better to actually aim at his target, than fire wildly.
Watsup held his revolver with both his hands, as he took careful aim, and three fire three shoots, one after another, dead center at Sarah's chest.
What Watsup didn't count on, and was both the last, and biggest, surprise of his life. While he fired his revolver, he watched as Sarah used her katana to slice all three bullets, one after another, in half, leaving herself unharmed.
By then, Sarah had reached Watsup, and before the police chief could fire another round at her, she used her katana to slice off Watsup's hands off, at the wrists, in one swing.
Though, Watsup did not even have time to cry in pain, as Sarah followed up her first swing, with a fluid downward swing, from front top of Watsup's head, between his eyes, down, below his groin, cutting him completely in half long ways.
This single blow killed Watsup instantly.
Sarah did not even stop to admire her handy work, as she turned and continued killing the police officers around her.
Meanwhile, behind her, Watsup's badge, in the center, front of peaked cap, along with his green sunglasses, and clothing, split in half, as Watsup's body came apart, in two equal halves, like an overripe, bloody, melon, as he fell to the ground, in pieces.
(_)
About fifteen feet to the left of Yukio's firing position, Stan and Lewis watched the carnage unfold.
They didn't even bother to say a word, as they looked at each other. Then, they turned towards the alleyway behind them, that connected to another street. And they ran down that alleyway, as fast as they could, away from the violent insanity they had just seen.
(_)
By the time the brothers were nearly halfway through the alleyway, the sisters had finally finished killing all the cops that had attacked them.
As Molly stopped seeing any cops moving she stop firing. She yelled, “Hold your fire!”
Yukio stopped firing with her machine gun, and Kristina turned off her flamethrowers.
Molly requested, “Are they all dead?”
Sarah turned to her, as she stated, “Yes. As far as I can see.”
Rebecca said, “Same here.”
Kristina commented, “If they are not dead. They are going to wish they were.”
Molly ordered, “Okay. Everyone group up on me. And is anyone hurt?”
Yukio said, “No.” She then turned and walked over to Molly.
Rebecca commented, “Only my victims.” She walked between the cars, towards her sisters. When she got to the other side, she came to a stop. She then moved her knives around in her hands, to where she held both her knives by the hilts, with her right hand. Next, she used her left hand to she pull out a rag from her blue denim shorts, to wipe the blood off of the blades of her weapons.
Rebecca soon finished. She then put away her rag, as she now held a knife in each other her hands. Next, she resumed walking towards Molly.
Kristina stated, “I am fine.” She then used the cyro-frost function on the bottom of her gauntlets to put out any remained fires that could be smoldering around her.
Kristina thought, 'Momma always said not to leave a fire unattended.' When she finished, she hopped over the front hood of the car between her and her sisters, as she went over to join them.
Sarah plainly stated, “I am fine. How are you, Molly?” She then walked between the cars, to get to Molly. After passing by the cars, she came to a stop. She then pulled out a rag, to wipe the blood off the blade of her weapons.
Molly turned to Sarah, as she replied, “I am fine.”
Nearby, Sarah continued to carefully wipe blood off her katana blade, as she thought, 'Good. Molly is alright. Perhaps, sometime, I will get to test out my carbon fiber scabbard as a weapon. It was custom made to knock bullets out of the way, the same way I can slice bullets with my katana. And I have it, not only to hold my katana, but to be used as a substitute weapon, in case my katana is ever knock out of my hands, and not in immediate reach, in battle.'
By then, Sarah had finished getting the blood off her blade. She held the hilt of her katana in her right hand, as she used her left hand to put away her rag. She then started walking towards Molly.
As the other four sisters approached Molly, she took the time to replace the empty clips of ammo in her semi-automatic pistols, with fresh magazines. When she had finished reloading her weapons, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio had reached her.
Molly turned to Yukio, as she asked, “Yukio, how many rounds do you have left?”
Yukio looked at her clear plastic back of modified, beta c-mag, double drum clip, that was attached to her machine gun, to see how much ammo she had left. She answered, “About sixty, out of my hundred round magazine. And I do not have a spare magazine. I cannot figure out how to carry one in my clothing.”
Molly comforted her sister, as she responded, “Don't worry. If you run out of ammo, you can borrow one of my pistols.”
Yukio smiled, as she replied, “Thanks, sis.”
Rebecca looked down at her clothing, as she complained, “Just look at the drops blood on my clothes. I hate having to wash my clothing of such a mess.”
Sarah agreed, “You are not the only one. I hate how hard it is to wash out blood. And these are my favorite pair of pants.”
Kristina commented, “You two should talk. The one thing I do not like about burning things, is the burnt smell that stays in my hair and clothing afterward.”
Molly groaned, as she thought, 'This is not getting us anywhere. And I don't see Stan and Lewis around.' She sternly stated, “Hey. Everyone. We have a mission here. Did anyone see where the brothers went?”
Molly comment forced the others to quiet down, as they turned to look at her.
Kristina used her right hand to point towards an alleyway, as she answered, “I saw them take off running in that direction, after Sarah literally cut Watsup in half.” She turned to Sarah, as she complimented, “Nice work by the way. And I see you have gotten the slicing bullets in half, down pat.”
Sarah turned to Kristina, as she smiled. She replied, “Thanks. And I owe aunt Revy, and Annie, for their help on training to cut bullets in half. It is nice to finally be at the same level I was in my previous life.”
Rebecca turned to Sarah, as she said, “As interesting as that is, Sarah, Molly is right. We need to focus on the brothers. Though, I don't really blame them for running. They are newbies at this.”
Yukio pointed out, “And after seeing us do all this. They are likely not going to easily surrender. And we do want them back alive, and mostly unharmed. And at this point, I think them dropping on top of us was a completely accident.”
Molly stated, “I agree. We will corner them, and then talk them down.”
Sarah complimented, “Sounds like a plan. To that end, let's sheath and holster our weapons.” She then sheathed her katana in her scabbard, on the left side of her belt.
Molly said, “I agree.” She holders her pistols, in her shoulder holsters.
Rebecca replied, “Fine.” She sheathed her long knives on her scabbard, which were strapped across her back.
Molly ordered, “Good. Now, we need to go after them, before we lose them.”
All five teenage girls then ran down the alleyway, Kristina had pointed towards, as they pursued after the brothers.
(_)
About hundred yards ahead of the Lagoon sisters, Stan and Lewis continued running, from alleyway, to street, to alleyway. When the came to a street, they slowed down long enough to look both ways, before crossing, and into another alleyway in front of them. Fortunately, they had so far only passed through empty streets.
As they ran, side by side, with each other, Stan was to Lewis' left side.
Lewis stated, “I suggest we never speak of what we just saw to anyone.”
Stan responded, “Agreed. We could be consider accessories to the actions of those crazy chicks.”
Lewis said, “To be fair. Mom has her moments, but she has never been violent. Those chicks are both crazy and violent.”
Stan replied, “Yes. They are the ones you don't bring back home to introduce to mom and dad.”
Lewis replied, “Agreed.”
After another minute of running, Lewis risked a glance behind them. He then turned back in front of him, as he sadly stated, “Brother, I got some bad news. Those crazy chicks are after us again. And they are gaining on us.”
Between breaths, Stan stated, “How can they not only keep up with us, but also gain on us, while some of them are carrying such heavy weapons? With the magazine attached to it, that machine gun has to be thirty pounds, at least. We work out regularly. We are in great shape. How can these girls, that we keep meeting, be so much stronger and faster than we are?”
Between breaths, Lewis replied, “I don't know. But, I have some good news.”
Stan asked, “What?”
Lewis stated, “Except for the girl with the machine gun. And the one with the gauntlets, the other three girls had either sheathed or holstered their weapons.”
Stan agreed, “That is good news. Any bad news?”
Lewis stated, “They have these wild grins that set me on edge.”
Stan replied, “That is bad news.”
A few seconds later, as they exited the alleyway they found themselves next to street line with tables, in rows, with umbrellas near each table.
And the tables each had people sitting at them, blocking the brother's way around the tables in front of them.
Lewis cursed, “Damn it. There is no clear way around.”
Stan stated, “Just jump over the tables.”
Stan and Lewis jumped over the first table, in the first row in front of them.
Before they got to the same row, they saw two adults at the table they were running towards.
One of the adults was a asian-american redhead, in a shirt, and shorts, along with a pair of semi-automatic pistols in her shoulder holsters. The other adult was a fair skinned japanese man, with black hair, wearing a business clothing. Both were eating bowls of soup on their table.
A few seconds later, Stan and Lewis jumped over their table, and continued running.
Several seconds after that, the sisters jumped over the same table, and people sitting in the chairs, in the first row, and then they leaped over the tables, and sitting people, in second row of tables, as they continued running after the brothers.
The sisters recognized, the two adults at the second table.
Rebecca asked, “Were those our parents?”
Yukio answered, “I would say so.”
Molly cautioned, “Let us be careful not to cause a paradox.”
Kristina agreed, “Yes. Let's hope the brothers don't go near the docks, with us accidentally following them there. It would be an epic screw up if the rest of our parents saw us.”
Sarah commented, “Agreed. But, at the rate we are gaining on them, that should not be a worry.”
Molly asked, “As a way to avoid that. While Sarah and I were no hear in our previous lives. Do any of you three remember these streets, to avoid that situation?”
Yukio stated, “No.”
Rebecca said, “Nope.”
Kristina commented, “I wasn't here long enough, in my previously life, to remember that.”
Molly said, “Damn. Then, we will just have to be careful.”
By then, the sisters were twenty-five yards from the brothers.
The brothers then made a turn into an alleyway, only to find that it was a dead end.
Before the two teenage boys could backtrack, they turned around to find that the sisters had finally caught up with them, and blocked their only exit of escape. With the sisters being around thirty feet from the brothers.
Molly thought, with mild relief, 'Well, it looks like we don't have to worry about that situation arising.' She smirked towards the brothers, as she said, “No escape boys. Now, why don't you surrender?”
Stan stated, “We have seen what you did to those men.”
Sarah scoffed, as she replied, “Oh please. Those were sexist pigs.”
Lewis conceded, “You may have a point there.”
Kristina said, “Glad you agree.”
Molly said, “We just want to take you back with us. You come quietly, and you will not be harm, too much.”
Lewis inquired, “Define, too much?”
Rebecca said, “Well, you did land on us. I would think that deserves a mild beating. But, we do promise not to harm your faces, nor your groins. And you will likely recover from our beating, within around a week.”
Lewis replied, “Look. We sincerely apologize for falling on you. It was a complete accident. We don't even know how we ended up there. As such, we will decline the having the beating.”
Rebecca thought, 'They truly are clueless. The face they are still breathing, while in Roanapur, is a miracle in of itself. This town does not suffer for fools.'
Stan responded, “Besides there were mitigating circumstances. The fact of the matter, we were running from an intergalactic alien fleet. I think that such extenuating circumstances should negate any beating.”
Yukio stated, “We heard what happened, from Annie. And from what understand, we think you were let go by Scorpius. If she wanted you to stay, trust me, you would still be there.”
Stan inquired, “Annie came to that crazy island, after us? And what is up with there only being women on that island? I mean, as violent as you are, you don't act like any amazons in history, or the comics that we have read about.”
Yukio answered, “We are not amazons. We are descended from pirates.”
Lewis said, “Somehow, I think that is worse.”
Rebecca smiled wickedly, as she replied, “It is.”
Kristina smirked, as she asked, “You think they have their father's ability?”
Lewis and Stan's eyes went wide.
Kristina continued smiling, as she said, “I would say from their reactions, that the answer is, yes. Though, I am guessing that their abilities are dormant. Still boys, given you were kept in the dark about everything else, how did you figure that out? That is one of the biggest secrets Ed and Bob kept for you.”
Stan answered, “Scorpius told us. She did some DNA testing on us, and confirmed we have the genes for that ability. You could say we are latent gender benders.”
The girls giggled
Lewis asked, “What is so funny?”
As the girls stopped giggling, Sarah said, “Your father came up with that term, several years, before you either of you were born.”
Stan commented, “Interesting. Still, our genes are dormant.”
Molly deadpanned, “We already figured that out. If they were not dormant, you would already know what was going on, and you would have been joining us on that island.”
Stan replied, “Huh?”
Lewis inquired, “What do you mean?”
Rebecca suggested, in a mischievous tone of voice, “Oh, there is so much you don't know. Though, your situation can be easily changed with a little electricity.”
Sarah stated, “Hold it. Their parents would kill us, if we did that to them.”
Rebecca shrugged, as she conceded, “True.”
The brothers each let out deep breath.
(_)
Meanwhile, on of the roofs three stories about the groups of teenagers, a long individual was walk around, watching them from above. As she listened carefully to the conversation between the boys and girls below. The girls to her right side, and the boys to her left side, below.
(_)
In the alleyway, Yukio inquired, “So, Scorpius told you some of those secrets? Why did she tell you? She is not the type of person to give information out so freely.”
Lewis answered, “Well, she did tell us some things. And the reason why is simple. She was moonlighting as our highschool physics professor, and my personal tutor. I will be honest. I find it flattering to know that a leader of an intergalactic alien empire was taking a side job as my person tutor.”
Molly warmly smiled, as she replied, with amusement in her tone of voice, “I can agree with that.”
Stan stated, “Ironically, most of what we know, about what is going on, came from her. Though, at this point, even though she kidnapped us, she hasn't actually harmed us. We probably distrust her slightly less than our parents, at the moment.”
“Yet, I don't understand why you, and even Annie, distrust her. The only reason we ran from her was over a difference of opinion on our mathematical theories, of a formula we were working on. She wanted to go forward, and we wanted to wait, to check the numbers. Just to make sure we don't accidentally damaged the multiverse. Still, what is it about her that you don't trust?”
Sarah just shook her head, as she commented, “You guys really don't know a thing? Do you?”
Stan replied, “Exactly. We were completely kept in the dark. And to be honest, I am willing to compromise here. Not as a date, but we just treat you five to a nice dinner.”
The brothers could tell that the sisters were thinking over Stan's offer, for a few seconds.
The sisters then looked at each other, for a few more seconds. Then, the sisters turned back to look at the brothers.
Molly said, “Tempting. Highly tempting. But, I think we will go with the pounding. It is just our nature.”
The brothers saw the other four sisters either nodding, or shrugging, in agreement with Molly.
Lewis pleaded, as he asked, “Please, before you commence on the violence, there is an incredibly embarrassing question we need to ask you all. Scorpius also told us about the fact we are not fraternal twins. So, of our two parents, do you know which of them gave birth to each of us? We have been wondering about that.”
Kristina answered, “They never told any of us. To this day, there is a standing betting pool on that very question.”
Stan wondered out loud, “Can we get in on that bet?”
Molly said, “I don't see why not. You two clearly don't know either. Given no one would ask such an embarrassing question, if they knew the answers. Trust me. We know first hand... Yes. Our parents were like that too.”
Molly thought, 'When they told us that we reincarnations of people they knew, and how we exist in a reality that is fiction. With that fiction being the Black Lagoon anime, which we all saw.'
Molly cracked her knuckles. She then said, “Now, you need to take your poundings like men. It will be over before you know it. We will get you some ice packs afterward. And you will be seeing your parents soon enough. So, you can bitch at them for keeping such secrets from you.”
In response, the brothers stood their ground, as the prepared for a fight.
Just after the five sisters took a few steps towards the brothers, a woman suddenly landed between the two groups. With the woman quickly stood up straight. She did not appear to be harmed.
As the woman stood in place, her right side faced the girls, and her left side faced the boys.
The woman turned her head quickly, to look at the girls, then, the boys, and finally back towards the girls.
The woman smiled towards the girls.
Meanwhile, the sisters and brothers noticed that the woman had no weapons in her hands.
Everyone looked at the woman, and then at the building walls above them. There were no fire staircases, nor window ledges on the walls. And both buildings, to the sides of them, went up three stories. Meaning, the woman would have had to had jumped from at least roof, three stories up, and landed between them.
They all turned back to look at the woman.
Sarah complimented, “Not bad. We would have trouble from landing from a fall at that height.”
The woman politely replied, “Thank you for the compliment.”
They all saw that the newcomer was a asian woman with dark green hair. Her hair was bushy, and wild. She had two dark brown eyes. She wore a blue leisure suit, with a yellow button up shirt under her blue coat. She did not wear a tie. Though, her clothing fit for feminine form. She appeared in her mid-twenties in age. And she had a slender, physical build, with a pair of breasts, on her chest, that were respectably sized for her physical frame.
Though, considering the stunt she had just pulled with her landing, her clothing clearly hid her very will muscle toned body,
Stan asked the green haired woman, “Who are you?”
The green haired woman kept her eyes on the teenage girls, as she smiled. She slyly responded, in a feminine voice, “I am just an old-fashioned bounty hunter.”
Kristina warned, “Lady, you better stay out of our way.”
The woman said, “Sorry girls, but the boys are coming with me. There is a huge bounty on them. And I aim to collect.”
Rebecca inquired, “How big?”
Lewis questioned, “Bounty on us?”
The woman continued to look at the girls, as she answered, “Scorpius hired every bounty hunter she could find in the multiverse to capture you two. I just figured I start in the past, where it all started, and I got lucky.”
“It is a huge, set for life, royalty sized bounty. Her only rules are that one of you taken in alive, and both of your are left relatively unharmed. Though, there is a bonus for bringing in both of you at the same time. I intend to collect for myself, and, my six year old daughter.”
Stan flatly stated, “Oh hell. We're screwed.”
Yukio stated, “Sorry Ms Green. But, in that case, we will be collecting on that bounty.”
The green haired woman smile curled into smirk towards the girls, as she stated, “I think not.”
Before any of the girls to bring their weapons to bare on the woman, bounty hunter rushed at them.
First, the woman punched at Sarah's jaw, knocking Sarah to the ground.
The woman then did a sweeping kick Rebecca, causing her to fall to the ground.
Molly saw this, as she quickly thought, 'She is not only a skilled fighter. She is thinking fighter. She saw what weapons we have, and what roles we likely play on our team. And in this close quarters fight, she took our two melee fighters first. Good thinking on her part. Now, to handle this myself.'
Molly reached for her pistols, in her shoulder holsters, but her movement caught the woman's eye, as she did a backwards kick to Molly's stomach. The blow knocked the wind out of her, as she fell to the ground on her back.
Next, the woman snatched the machine gun from Yukio's hands, tossing it away from the group. The woman then punch Yukio in the side of her chest, sending her to the ground.
Finally, because she was so close to her sisters, Kristina could not use her gauntlet weapons on the woman. So, Kristina charged at the bounty hunter.
Before Kristina realized what had happened, she found herself on the ground.
A few seconds later, the girls started getting back up, for the second round of the fight.
As the green haired woman watched that the girls got back up, she smirked. She stated, “Not many people can take a beating like that, and still be able to get up. It just means I am going to have to give you a lesson on staying down, the hard way.”
The fight then resumed, with the sisters forgo weapons, and instead they aimed on beating the woman at her own game, in hand to hand combat.
(_)
As the teenager girls and woman fought each other, the boys look at each other, and nodded.
They quietly slipped passed the woman and the girls, and out of the alleyway. Then, they ran as fast as they could to a nearby, adjoining street, where they turned a corner, to their right, and they were out of sight of those fighting each other.
In addition, the woman and all five teenage girls' attention were focused on the fight, none of the noticed the boys had escaped them.
(_)
A minute later, the girls were back on the ground, with the green haired woman standing over them, again.
It was then that the green haired woman pulled out her own semi-automatic pistol, from her shoulder holster, hidden under her short, blue coat, under her left armpit.
Though, she did not point the weapon at the teenage girls. She did see the girls had noticed the weapon.
The green haired woman stated, “Now girls, are you going to behave, and yield? Or, am I going to have to seriously hurt, or even kill you?”
As the Lagoon girls laid on the ground, beaten, Sarah looked up at the green haired woman, as she said, “We yield.”
The green haired woman saw the other four girls nod, or shrug, in agreement.
The green haired woman commented, “Good.”
Kristina immediately recognized the model of pistol in the right hand of the woman. Though, she did not react, or say anything about it.
Molly groaned out, “Who are you, really?”
The green haired woman answered, “Like I said. I am just an old fashioned bounty hunter.” She then noticed the Lowe brothers missing, as she continued, in a slightly embarrassed tone of voice, “Whom just lost her bounties.”
The woman kept her pistol in her right hand, thought she did not point her pistol at the girls, as she walked around them. She then backed away from them, as she exited the alleyway.
As the woman ducked around a building, to her left, on the sidewalk, by the street, she holsters her pistol, as she ran off in a direction that she guessed the boys would have taken. Which was not the case.
After the woman left, Molly stood up, as she asked, “So, can everyone stand up?”
Rebecca groaned in unison, “Yes. Though, I am not in a hurry to do so.”
Yukio commented, “Just give me a minute, and I can.”
Kristina said, “I am okay. Sore, but okay. I will help the others up.”
Kristina was the least harmed. So, she was able to stand up quickly. She then helped Rebecca and Yukio onto their feet.
Sarah rubbed her jaw, as she stood up. She stated, “I will live. I just need an ice pack for my jaw. Though, I find it ironic that we were expecting to beat up someone else, and we ended taking a pounding.”
Molly winched, as she commented, “Yes. I found it poetic justice, as well.”
Rebecca asked, “Where are the boys?”
Kristina answered, “They got away, while we were fighting, and acting so stupidly macho, by trying to beat that woman at her own game. It is sad when I can say that I am more macho now, then when I was actually a man in my previous life. I remember much of my previous life fairly well. So, I can actually say that, and mean it.”
Yukio said, “Speak for yourself. I am happy I mentally blocked out most of my previous life.”
Rebecca replied, “Same here.”
Kristina stated, “Given you two, that is understandable. But, as I was saying, back then, except for the pyromania, I was a fairly nice guy. I would have known better than to try to pull a stunt like this.”
Sarah said, “Well that is probably due to the fact that only one of our five mothers could even generously be call ladylike... Oh well, I never much cared for trying to be a lady.”
Yukio replied, “I think none of us do, except Molly.”
Molly commented, “Well, sometimes.”
Sarah inquired, “Who was that woman? And given how much of a badass she is, why have we not heard of her?”
Kristina answered, “I think I know who she is. And you are probably not going to like the answer.”
Sarah replied, “I still want to know who she is.”
Kristina stated, “I think is Spike Spiegel turned into a woman with Chang's vat process.
The vat process likely regenerated her lost right eye. And that is why her eyes now match. Also, she is a green haired asian, like Spike was. But, the clincher was her gun. She was holding a Jericho nine forty-one, the same type of semi-automatic that Spike used in the Cowboy Bebop series.”
Sarah said, “We have all seen that Cowboy Bebop series. Given the way the series ended, with Spike lying on the ground, dying, it makes sense that Chang would have had Spike captured and process before he died.”
Rebecca commented, “That also explains those enhanced physical abilities, her physical age, and why she has a daughter. She was likely one of those the peacekeepers rescued, and she was pregnant with her daughter, when she was rescued.”
Yukio pointed out, “But, she said her daughter was six years old. She should be older, unless she is from our past.”
Molly said, “I likely doubt she is from our past. Spike probably found her own way to reality travel, and she took her daughter with her, when she started reality traveling.”
Yukio shrugged, as she commented, “That makes sense. Given she is enhanced like our parents, I no longer feel so bad about her kicking our asses.”
Kristina said, “Don't kid yourself. Spike was at Roanapur level badass, even before the super-soldier serum, when she was still a man.”
Sarah commented, “Let us just be happy that she didn't use her grenades.”
Kristina agreed, “No arguments there.”
Rebecca asked, “I know one of us has to ask the question. So, I will. Should we tell our parents, and the our friends, about Spike being alive? And that Spike is an enhanced badass woman like our parents?”
Yukio deadpanned, “Let us see. We came to Roanapur, in the past, against our parents' wishes. Seeking to capture two boys, and beat them up, slightly, against our parents' friends' wishes. What do you think?”
Rebecca replied, “I will take that as a, no.”
Kristina said, “Still, we are going to have to figure out how we are going to explain our roughed up appearances to our parents.”
Molly stated, “We will just tell them we got a little out of hand with our sparring with each other.”
Kristina agreed, “That could work.”
Molly checked her weapons, in her holsters. She then look back at her sisters, as she ordered, “Yukio. Go get your BAR, and everyone come close to me. We will head home, and recover, while I come up with a new plan to find the boys.”
Molly then reached into her left, front shorts pocket and pulled out her reality device.
Several seconds later, Yukio had retrieved her machine gun, and the five sisters were presently standing close to each other.
Molly thought of the proper time on Lagoon Island to teleport to. The exact place was the sparing mats in their sparing room, which was part of the downstairs workout gym of their family mansion.
Molly was teleporting both herself, and her sisters there, so if one of their parents saw them, as they went to get ice packs, they would be coming from the direction of the sparring room, thus enhancing their lies, about where they had been.
A second later, with the time and location in her mind, Molly pressed the red button on her reality device, and she teleported both her, and her four sisters, instantly back to their home, so they could nurse their wounds, and bruised pride.
(_)
An hour later, the green haired woman gave up her chase, for the time being. She then used her own reality device to leave the Black Lagoon reality, for her home, in another part of the multiverse. So, she could be with her daughter, until she could come up with a new plan to capture the Lowe brothers.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the Black Lagoon reality, a few minutes after Lowe brothers had escaped the Lagoon sisters, and the bounty hunter, a few streets away, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, were walking on the sidewalk.
The sidewalk was fairly deserted, except for them. The local citizens of Roanapur knew who Shenhua was, and they tried to avoid meeting her, and her friends, on the streets of the city.
Shenhua did not really mind such reactions to herself. She considered a form of respect towards her.
The three adults were running some errands. They decided, since the errands were all in a close location, and it was a beautiful day, they would just walk, and use the who chore as an excuse to get some excuse.
All of them were dress in their usual clothing. Except for Lotton, whom was wearing a lighter, black cloth jacket to hide his pistols, instead of his long black coat. He just did want to overheat in the warm temperature of the partly cloudy day.
Also, Sawyer had left her chainsaw at home.
Though, Shenhua had her long knives and throwing knives sheathed, and hidden among her clothing.
As they walked along the sidewalk, Sawyer said, with her electrolarynx choker, which was around her neck, “I hope Akira is enjoying her time with Revy.”
Shenhua responded, “I am sure she is.”
Lotton stated, “The one thing about Akira, is that it with her around, it never gets boring.”
Sawyer nodded, as she said, “I agree.”
Shenhua agreed, “No arguments there.”
As they walked by the entranced of an alleyway, to their left side, from the corner of Shenhua's left eye, she saw two teenage boy with tanned skin, and black hair, in plain clothing, except for their jackets, barreling towards them.
Fortunately, before the boys would have collided with them, they saw the three adults ahead of them, and they were able to slow themselves down, and come to a stop a few feet from Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton.
As the three adults, and two teenage boys, looked at each other, Lewis immediately apologized, “Sorry. We almost hit you.”
Sawyer said, “You did not. So, everything is alright.”
Lewis smiled, as he replied, “I am glad you feel that way.”
Shenhua inquired, “You two seem to be acting like you are running from someone? Or, a group of people?”
Stan commented, “Long story short. Just a minor misunderstanding. Nothing to worry about. The reason we are running was that the misunderstanding turned into a fist fight, and we wanted to avoid it.”
Lotton admitted, “That does happen here. So, who are you?”
Stan inquired, “Who are you?”
Lotton replied, “I asked you first.”
Stan answered, “Stan Lowe. And this is my brother, Lewis Lowe.”
Shenhua said, “I am, Shenhua. This small woman here is, Sawyer. The white haired man beside us is, Lotton.”
Lewis replied, “Hello.”
Stan said, “Nice to meet you.”
Shenhua commented, “You are not are from around here?”
Lewis questioned, “That obvious?”
Shenhua coyly smiled, as she said, “I like you, boy. You have a nice sense of humor.”
Sawyer asked, “Where are you from?”
Stan shook his head, as he answered, “Honestly. I doubt you would believe us.”
Shenhua suggested, “Try us. We are very open minded.”
The brothers did not miss the smaller woman giggling, while the white haired man winced, as the asian woman's private joke.
Just then, a red car drove by, as high speed, with a black hair, fair skinned, young man, driving.
Lotton stated, “I think that was the Lagoon company's car.”
A second later, the brother watched as another car, as high speed, passed by them.
In the second car, a bald, black man, in green clothing, was driving, while he fired a revolver out his window, with his left hand.
In the passengers seat was a blond, fair skinned woman, in a yellow cowgirl outfit, firing a revolver out her window, with her right hand.
With two identical redheaded asian, seating out their opposing backdoor windows, with each of them firing two semi-automatic pistols, each, at the car they were chasing.
Shenhua asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Is that Revy... And Revy?... In our car?”
Sawyer replied, “It would appear so.”
Lewis asked, “Who is Revy?”
Lotton said, “It doesn't matter... Still, I saw Akira in the passenger seat, with Dutch driving. So, we will get answers from either Akira, later at home. Or, we will get some answers from Dutch, over drinks sometime.”
Shenhua responded, “I agree.”
A few seconds later, a taxi stopped right in front of them, by the curb of the sidewalk.
The five individuals on the sidewalk then watched the two individuals walked out of the car.
As soon as the two individuals inside the taxi exited the vehicle, and shut the doors, the taxi took off.
Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton's jaws dropped at whom they saw standing in front of them.
Meanwhile, Lewis and Stan were surprised by whom they saw, but they wisely chose to remain silent.
They were looking at Sawyer and Shenhua, in their usual clothing. Only this Sawyer had her chainsaw strapped to her back.
The other Sawyer spoke, with her electrolarynx choker, “Relax. We are from the future. We remember this from your point of view.”
Past Shenhua said, “Interesting. So, did you come back to in time to warn us of the future.”
Future Shenhua, and Future Sawyer, walked up on the sidewalk, by the group, as Future Shenhua answered, “No. We just came here because we remember being here. And to screw with Lotton's mind.”
In response, the four women giggled, including Future Shenhua, for a few seconds.
Lotton mentally reflected, 'I don't like the fact that her comment is setting me on edge.'
Stan turned to Lotton, as he asked, “Is this a normal day for you people?”
Lotton answered, “No. And this day is getting weirder by the minute.”
Lewis commented, “This is just par for course, for us, today.”
Stan stated, “Our strangeness records seems to be breaking themselves, over and over, at an hourly rate.”
Lewis mentioned, “Strangely. Up until today, we have lead a fairly normal lives.”
Lotton said, “You might as well tell us where you are from. Trust me, I won't judge, no matter what your answer is.”
Stan responded, “Sure
Lewis relied, “Okay.”
Stan stated, “Though, we are human. We are not from this planet.”
Lewis commented, “We're from the planet, Mars”
Lotton mentally reflected, 'After Akira's gender bending, and this obvious example of time travel, in front of us...' He said, “At this point, I fully believe you.”
Lewis stated, “Thank you.”
Stan replied, “We appreciate that.”
Lotton said, “You're welcome.”
Meanwhile, the four women had calmed down. Past Sawyer asked, “So, how did you know to come here in a taxi, in the first place? I am still not clear on that.”
Future Sawyer explained, “It is a timeloop. As Shenhua said. Because we knew we would be hear, from your point of view, we knew to come. Don't think too hard about it. All it will do is give you a headache.”
Past Sawyer replied, “Thank you for the warning.”
Future Sawyer responded, “No problem. Though, by the point in time we are at, stuff like this happens a lot to us. But, I cannot give you any details.”
Part Sawyer smiled, as she said, “That is okay. I know I will find out eventually. Because, you are the me of the future.”
Future Sawyer returned her past counterpart's smile, as she complimented, “That is the attitude you are going to need for the insanity that is coming your way in the future.”
Past Sawyer inquired, “Speaking of which. In the future, I am surprised that I haven't done anything about my scars, yet?”
Future Sawyer said, “Actually, I am working on that, and restoring our voice. Along with a few other old injuries that need fixing.”
Past Sawyer grinned nearly ear to ear, as hearing the good new, as she stated, “That is nice.”
Future Sawyer coyly stated, “I have made some interesting contacts in the time span between you and I.” Future Sawyer mentally added, 'Like Annie.'
Future Sawyer continued, “That may achieve our goals. I found someone with the skills to properly do the job. I just need to make the arrangements.” She thought, 'After we finally track down, and capture Bob, Ed, and Boris.'
Past Sawyer said, “It is nice to know that our dream will someday come true.”
Future Sawyer agreed, “Yes. It is nice.”
Past Shenhua looked her future counterpart, as she commented, “It is nice that I will still look so youthful in the future.”
Future Shenhua smiled, as she stated, “Let us just say that we are not going to have to worry about losing our youth for a very long time.”
In response, Past Shenhua smiled towards Future Shenhua.
While Lotton, and the brothers just stood there, quietly, they had been listening carefully to conversation both sets of women were having with each other.
Lotton thought, with annoyance, 'These two are so damn vague about future events that I cannot understand most of what they are talking about. And they are intentionally being vague. Likely, they are trying to prevent a paradox. Which is why they came here in the first place. They were already in the timeloop, as their past selves, so they had to appear here as their future selves. And I guess it was just a matter of opportunity, which presented itself to them, to show up.'
'And there are opportunities that can still be made in this situation. Learning even a small nugget of information about the future could be invaluable at the proper place and time. I just have to figure out how to dig for such information, from these two. This will be difficult, but not impossible. The first step is the proper setting. And I know just the place.'
Lotton offered, “Ladies, as fun at it is to see two sets of your lovely faces, at the same time, I think it is best we find a more private place to continue this conversation. I suggest the chinese restaurant that we sometimes go to. It is only a block from here. And we can make an early lunch out of it.” He turned to the brothers, as he continued, “And I am sure you two are hungry, as well. You can join us. This will all be my treat.”
Lotton thought, 'And if those two boys really are both human, and from Mars. They can only mean to things. They are from the future. Or, they are form a parallel reality. Or, both. Either way, anything they tell us, might be useful to us.'
Both Sawyers just shrugged.
Future Shenhua said, “I remember the meal as being very good.”
Past Shenhua replied, “Then, I guess we will be having lunch there.”
Stan stated, “I speak for my brother, and I, when I say that we never turn down a free meal.”
Lewis commented, “My brother is correct about that.”
Lotton then did a simple hand gesture with his right hand, in the direction of the restaurant, as he said, “Then, right this way, ladies, and gentlemen.”
Lotton then turned, and started walking down the sidewalk, towards the restaurant, with the rest of the group following right behind him.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, inside the nice chinese restaurant, all seven of them were seated as a round table.
Future Sawyer had her chainsaw on the floor, beside her chair.
The employees there knew better than to ask questions about their customers, and to keep quiet about such secrets.
After the waiter had taken their drink orders, the seven individuals looked at the menus they had been given. Fortunately, in the menus, beside the name of each dish was an explanation in Thai, and below the Thai explanation was an explanation in english. So, all seven individuals had no problems reading the menus.
Past Shenhua looked up from her menu, as she asked, “By the way, you won't happen to know who these two boys are?”
The rest of those seated at the table, looked up from their menus, as the other adult present looked over at the brothers.
Past Sawyer included, “And if so, are you after them?”
Future Shenhua answered, “Nope. They are are not our targets. Though, this is our second time around on this event. And this is the only time, and place, so far, that we have seen them.”
Past Sawyer asked the brothers, “Have you seen us before?”
Stan answered, “No. I would remember if I had seen any of you before.”
Lewis commented, “Believe us. You are all clearly very memorable.”
Past Shenhua smirked, as she coyly said, “You have no idea.”
Lotton thought, 'Now, is my chance to learn about the future. Specifically, what happens to me.' He casually asked, “Seeing you here, from the future, I wonder what happens to me in the future?”
Both Future Sawyer, and Future Shenhua grinned wickedly towards Lotton, as they giggled, for a few seconds.
Lotton quickly said, “I retract me question.” He mentally added, 'Perhaps it is best that I don't know what happens in my future.”
As Future Shenhua and Future Sawyer stopped giggling, Future Shenhua requested, “I know everyone here is curious about their future. That is just human nature. But, please do not ask us any more questions about the future. It could create a paradox. That would be a very bad thing from everyone here.
Lotton nodded, as he replied, “Okay.”
Just then, the waiter came back with his tray full of drinks, which he served to the seven individuals at the table.
The group then gave all their meal orders.
The rest of the conversation was very casual, due to the fact that the Sawyer and Shenhua from the future, along with the Lowe brothers, were intentionally avoid any subjects about themselves.
The adults respected the boys' privacy for two reasons. They were polite, and they already had enough strangeness for one day. And they could all tell that the two teenage boys were probably loaded with strange knowledge that no one, not even the boys, wanted to think about.
Also, Lotton, Past Sawyer, Future, Sawyer, Past Shenhua, and Future Shenhua, intentionally avoid mentioning anything about their lives, and criminal lifestyles.
This left the conversation bland, but the conversation was still pleasant for everyone.
The brothers did learn some interesting things about the culture and food in Thailand, but otherwise, it was just a casual conversation for the entire time.
Soon, their meals came, and they ate their lunches. Everyone found both their drinks, and meals to be delicious.
All in all, it was a pleasant lunch for everyone there.
And at the end of the meal, Lotton kept his promise, and he paid for the meals in full. He even left a tip for the waiter whom had served them.
Soon, the seven individuals were gathered near the front doors. Where they said their goodbyes to each other. With the brothers were being the first to excuse themselves from the table, and leave the restaurant, through the front door.
Future Sawyer and Shenhua then called a taxi to pick them up.
As the taxi pulled up right outside the front door, Future Shenhua, and Future Sawyer got up, with Future Sawyer picking up her chainsaw.
As they were about to leave, Future Sawyer cryptically said to Lotton, “Just so you know. To answer you question earlier. It is not as bad as you thought it would be. You actually came to like it.”
Lotton asked, “What do you mean?”
Future Sawyer winked, as she replied, “You will find out soon enough.”
Then, the two women from the future left the restaurant, and took their taxi back to Lagoon Company headquarters, by the docks.
After the two women from the future left, Lotton questioned, “Why do I get the feeling that Sawyer, from the future, just told me something major about the future course of my own life, without giving me single detail?”
Shenhua smiled, as she said, “Because she did.”
Sawyer stated, “The comment is too vague to think about, Lotton. Don't worry about it.”
Lotton replied, “I won't.”
Sawyer suggested, “Let us call a taxi and head back home. I am sure that, Akira will show up back home soon, as well. I have a feeling she had just as much as interesting day as we did.”
Lotton nodded, as he agreed, “You are probably right.”
Shenhua agreed, “That is a good idea.”
Lotton then head over to the cashier's desk, to use their phone, to call a taxi, to come pick them up.
(_)
A few minutes after the Lowe brothers left the chinese restaurant, the brothers had found another deserted alleyway to duck into, so they could jump reality, without anyone else seeing them.
As Lewis pulled out his reality device from his right, side pants pocket, he stated, “At this point, I would like to see mom and dad. But, I regret not staying for the nightlife here.”
While Stan walked closer to Lewis, he agreed, “No argument there. But, to be honest, we have no money.”
Lewis said, “Good point. Let's get out of here, before someone else shows up for our hides.”
Stan commented, “Agreed. And at least we got a good lunch from it.”
Lewis agreed, “True. Who knew that the locals here would be so nice here.”
Both boys laughed, as Lewis press the red button on his reality device, that he was holding, and both of them jumped realities, to their next destination.
(_)
Two hours later, after having some lunch, Akira drove her car home.
When she entered her house, she saw Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua sitting in the living room chairs and couch, watching TV, and enjoying the rest of their day off.
Lotton and Sawyer were each sitting in a chair, while Shenhua was sitting in the couch.
As they turned towards Akira, Akira looked back at them, as she said, “You guys would not believe the day I had.”
Lotton challenged, “Try us.”
Akira said, “Well, it involved meeting two Revys. Seeing them fight it out. Then, having to chase this young, stupid American, across town, in the car he stole. Which was the Lagoon Company's car. He then crashed the car into the front Yellowflag, and he got away.”
“I am surprised that no one is more pissed about what happened. Anyway, beside that other Revy being there. There were also another Shenhua, and another Sawyer, there, as well.”
Shenhua stated, “That was not the only place they were at.”
Lotton answered, “Yes. I had to deal with two pairs of Shenhuas. Two pairs of Sawyers. And two teenage brothers whom claimed to be from Mars. By the way, I believe you now, about what you saw last night.”
Akira walked over, to sit beside Shenhua on the couch. As she got comfortable, she requested, “Okay. You have me beat. Care to tell me what happened?”
Lotton said, “Sure.”
The four adults then told each other what happened to them over the course of the last few hours.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
I found the escape scenes at the beginning of this chapter to be very enjoyable to write. I really like the explanation Annie gives, as to why she cannot just force open the doors to the shuttle bay. Pun intended.
And that explanation makes so much sense. The doors could warp, and stick in place. This could be applied to video games, as well.
And I believe that Annie was a little too general in telling the brothers how to work a reality device. Now, how a reality device works. There is a big difference.
Annie misunderstood Lewis' question, as being how a reality device work. Where as Lewis was just asking how to work a reality device.
And both of them were to caught up in the escaping to realize this misunderstanding.
This is just simple word play on how to create some mischief.
And Annie realized her mistake too later, and way after the face.
Also, I explained how Scorpius handles Annie. And Scorpius does so in a manner that shows how brilliant, creative, and careful she is.
Then, there is the party of Lagoon island, with Stan and Lewis escaping that craziness, as well.
Then, Ed and Bob realize who the two teenage boys are. And the later conversation of between the women, on what to do, to track down the Lowe brothers.
The Roanapur scenes were interesting to write. Also, I got a chance show what happened to Chief Watsup and many members of the Roanapur police force. While, at the same time, I show how dangerous the five Lagoon sisters were as a team.
And during the battle, Watsup realized how much trouble he had gotten himself and his men into. In that he believed that fighting the five Lagoon sisters was like fighting five Revys at once. And that is true. To bad he could not save himself and his men. But, then again, given the town they lived in. And the badass women they have heard of, and personally dealt with. They should have known better than to pick a fight with five heavily armed teenage girls, whom did not like the police.
Now, I did enjoy writing the Roanapur chase scene. And I enjoyed the conversations, including the lunch scene, between Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Future Shenhua, Future Sawyer, Lewis and Stan.
Also, yes. That was Spike Spiegel, as a woman. And the sisters got their butts kicked by her.
I liked how after the fight, it was Kristina who both figured out the green haired woman was Spike. And she also admitted that she is more macho in her current life, then when she was a man, as Claude, in her previous life.
This also shows that Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer, are not jerks. They do help Lewis and Stan a little.
Then, Shenhua and Sawyer's future counterparts show up, and everything still remains civil.
After which, for various reasons, Lotton provides good meals for both the brothers, and his friends.
And yes, the green haired woman that defeating the Lagoon sisters is Spike from Cowboy Bebop.
I spent so much time writing about the Cowboy Bebop reality, and the Cowboy Bebop characters, that it is nice to finally directly feature Spike in my anthology of insanity.
And it does make sense that Chang would save Spike, using the vat process. Though, Spike woke up pregnant with daughter out of the experience. But, that is a story from another time.
You will noticed that the scene of Akira getting home in this book, in this chapter, is the same one at the end of book three, chapter five. This was to show a situation, when you the readers, read the same exact scene, though, you view at a completely different angle.
Also, both groups took some time, right after the chase. For Akira it was getting the Lagoon company's car back to Lagoon headquarters. Then, Akira had something to eat with the Lagoon company. Next, she came home two hours later.
For Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer. They spent an hour having lunch with Stan, Lewis, Future Shenhua, and Future Sawyer. Then, they came home, and two hours later, Akira arrived.
There were two reasons I had Yukio carrying that machine gun without a shoulder strap.
The first reason was in case she needed to ditch the weapon in emergency.
It is a historic fact that a number of soldiers using heavy weapons, like a machine gun, were killed when they weapon became to cumbersome in a situation, and they were caught in the line of fire, due to being trapped, or distracted by their weapon.
Note, this is a military machine gun, not an assault rifle. This is a large weapon. This is not just the same model Browning Automatic Rifle, as what Gretel used. It is the same weapon that Gretel used.
I added the modified hundred round beta c-mag as a way to address a plot hold in the original Black Lagoon series.
For the most part, the creators of Black Lagoon did a good job of avoiding the, bottomless magazine, cliché. With the exception of Gretel’s automatic machine gun, which was only shown her having her weapon loaded with simple ammo magazines, but she never seemed to run out of ammo. By the way, the browning automatic rifle she had uses a twenty round detachable magazine.
The worst example of this, though it was a cool scene, in episode fourteen, when Chang jump out of the way, as Gretel shot up his car.
Now, Gretel would have had the number of rounds to do that, if she had been using a hundred round, modified beta c-mag, instead a regular ammo clip.
Along with this, the reason I say, modified beta c-mag, is so that if I decide to pick a type of machine gun, I can hand wave away it so if there is a problem that beta c-mags were not made for that weapon. Because, the beta c-mags would have been modified for that weapon.
Also, I could not figure out how Yukio could carry another beta c-mag on her, without it looking funny. And while carrying satchels are made for beta c-mags, I found it just wouldn't look right with the clothing I had her wearing. So, I just made her address that Yukio has a limited number of rounds for her weapon, she knows this, and she is not wasting them.
And Molly would loan Yukio one of her semi-automatic pistols, if Yukio runs out of ammo.
The second reason was as a way to show that the Lagoon Daughters inherited their parents super-soldier serum abilities.
Even without the shoulder strap, Yukio has very good aim with her machine gun.
And the other Lagoon daughters are just as physically fit at Yukio. Notice, that after all the running, with some of the Lagoon daughters haul heavy weapons around, none of the Lagoon daughter were not even winded.
Stan and Lewis were intelligent enough to realize that something was not right those teenager girl's abilities.
On Cad Bane and the Bounty Hunters.
Outside of the Fett family, Cad Bane is likely the most skilled bounty hunter in the Star Wars franchise. He is one of the most entertaining characters from the Star Wars Clone Wars animated series.
Cad Bane is intelligent, cunning, ruthless, crazy prepared, very skilled in a fight, with an incredible strength of will.
Also, takes a lot to impress Cad Bane, and the Peacekeepers are worthy of doing so.
As Cad pointed out, the Farscape Peacekeepers are who the Star Wars Galactic Empire wished they were.
Unlike the incompetence and lack of restraint the Galactic Empire shows. Baring a few exceptions, the Peacekeepers, in the Farscape series, have been shown to be very competent and extremely professional, from the lowest ranks to the top of their hierarchy.
And under Scorpius' leadership, these qualities have only been further encouraged among the Peacekeeper ranks. With Scorpius either getting rid of, or toning down, some of the less intelligent Peacekeeper regulations.
Along with their professional, most of the freelancers that are hired by the Peacekeepers, are also competent and professional. So, the Peacekeeper believes that such matters extend to those they hire, whom were outside of the Peacekeeper command structure.
Now, why would Scorpius want to send bounties hunters after the Lowe brothers, and not her own personal. The reason is simple. She is also using this as an opportunity to create a personal pool of skilled bounties hunters, from across the multiverse, that she can call on later to do other jobs.
And among these bounty hunters, Cad Bane is one of the most skilled and cunning. While Spike is a decent bounty hunter, Cad Bane is a very dangerous bounty hunter.
The fight between Spike and the five Lagoon sisters, was to show that the Lagoon sisters were outclassed by Spike. And they were nowhere near the league that Cad Bane is in.
And this was right after the Lagoon series massacred much of the Roanapur police force.
Cad Bane is on par with Boba Fett. And the reason I am not using Boba Fett, nor Jet and Faye, is because they have heard of the Farscape series, and Peacekeepers. For Fett, he heard about the Peacekeepers from John Crichton, and for Jet and Faye, they heard about the Farscape from both watching it, when they were younger, and later, with Bob and Ed.
So, that is why those three bounty hunters declined Scorpius' offer. And Scorpius is intelligent enough to make sure her agents know, that if someone declines such an offer, for the agents to just walk away, and leave those people alone, and unharmed. There is no point in making enemies out of people whom the agents just made a job offer to.
Anyway, these bounty hunters at a whole new angle to the chase to fine Stan and Lewis.
And Scorpius knows how to speak to her audience. For the bounty hunters, she just gets down to business, and they admire her for that.
And with Scorpius learning about Earth pop-culture of John Crichton's time, including the Tvtropes, and the Evil Overlord list. Along with her seeing both the Farscape series, the Peacekeeper mini-series, and even the comics. With the comics not part of her timeline. Scorpius is even more savvy and dangerous than beforehand.
And when Scorpius is on the ball, she is on the ball.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Three: “Dancing Through Time And Space.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
The next thing the Lowe brothers knew, they were in another alleyway.
But, this one was much different than the alleyway that they had just come from.
This alleyway was a bit dirtier. And the alleyway had a darker atmosphere, like the world around it was a bit darker in its setting.
Without talking, both brothers looked around, and they saw that one way of the alleyway exit was closer than the other. They turned and walked towards the exit that was shorter in distance to them.
As they did so, Lewis pocketed his reality device, into his right, side pants pocket.
Less than a minute later, they, walked out of the alleyway, with a street in front of them, and sidewalks, to their sides.
As they looked up at the sky, they saw that from the angle of the sun, that it was late afternoon.
And there was a slight chill in the air.
Stan and Lewis looked at each other.
Stan asked, “Do you have any idea where we are?”
Lewis said, “Not a clue.”
Stan suggested, “We might as well ask someone where we are.”
Lewis agreed, “Good idea.”
Fortunately, a mid-age asian man walked by them, on the sidewalk. With the man coming from their right side.
Given that the man was well shaved, and wearing casual clothing for the chill weather, both of the brothers guessed he was safe to approach.
The brothers stepped beside him, and as he walked by, Stan asked, in english, “Excuse me, sir. Can you please tell us where we are?”
The man did not response, as he continued walking.
Lewis thought, 'I wonder if he knows chinese.' He inquired, in chinese, “Excuse me, sir. Can you please tell us where we are?” he thought, 'I am glad that both of us know more than one language.'
Stan thought, 'Intelligent thinking Lewis. On trying some chinese, with this man.'
The man stopped walking, and turned to the two teenage boys. He spoke something in japanese to them.
Stan thought, 'Well, at least we have his attention. And we are likely in Japan. All things considered, not a bad nation to be in. And while we know a number of langauges. We don't know the japanese language. Let's see if he knows any of the language we know. Though, Lewis already tried chinese, with no luck.'
Stan stated, in english, “We apologize, sir. But, we do not speak Japanese. Though, we do speak English, Chinese, and Russian. Do you known any of those languages?”
The man some in english, with a heavy japanese accent, “I know english. To answer your questions. We are in Megatokyo, Japan?”
Lewis thought, 'There was never a Megatokyo in our reality. Meaning this is an alternate reality. I wonder what year it is here?'
Lewis asked, in english, “We apologize for troubling you further. But, what year is it?”
The man answered, “It is late two thousand thirty-two.”
Lewis replied, “Thank you.” He thought, 'It is winter. That explains why there is such a bit of a chill in the air.'
Something then caused Lewis eyes, in the distance, on the horizon, going forward over the street.
Lewis continued to stare at the structure in the distance, as he used his left hand to lightly tap Stan on Stan's right shoulder.
After Stan asked, “What?” Stan then noticed that Lewis was using his right hand to point at something in the distance.
Stan looked at the structure in the distance, as he stated, with amusement in his voice, “Well, don't that beat all. You could probably see that thing from space.”
The brothers were both look at a large, round, cone shaped, blue tower, in the distance. With the structure being the size of a small city.
The man noticed what they are looking at. He answered their unspoken question, “That is Genom tower. It is clear you that you boys are not from around here.”
Stan cautioned, “Trust me. You don't want to get mixed up in our business. But, we do thank you for answering our questions.”
Lewis stated, “It is going to get dark soon. And cold. We need to find somewhere to at least get inside, so we can figured out what to do next.”
The man they had questioned overheard them. He suggested, “There is a nightclub in the alleyway behind you. The nightclub is called, Hot Legs. You cannot miss it. As long as you don't order alcohol, and you can be polite, they don't mind older teenagers being there.”
Lewis turned to man, as he said, “Thank you. And have a pleasant day.”
The man replied, “No problem.” He then turned, and continued walking down the sidewalk, in the direction he was original heading.
Stan turned to Lewis, as he said, “Let's go back in the alleyway.”
Lewis agreed, “Yes. Let's do that.”
The brother turned back, and re-entered the alleyway.
Less than a minute later, they found the entrance to the nightclub.
They looked at up at the neon sign over the entrance, but below the above stairway, that stated 'Hot Legs'
Stan said, “Hot Legs? If this is a strip joint, I am out of here. Such places are not my scene.”
Lewis agreed, “Same here. Our parents taught us better. And I don't care for such places.”
Stan stated, “If I wanted to see a woman naked, I could look at my girlfriend, in private, or I could go on the internet, back home. And both are a lot cheaper.”
Lewis responded, “True. But, let's see if that is the case, or not. Maybe we will get lucky. But, not in that way.”
Stan said, “We could use another lucky break today.”
Lewis commented, “Yea. That lunch was good. And the company was nice.”
Stan stated, “I agree. And while I am sure they were dangerous. Those four women we hot.”
Lewis said, “Yes. They were. Though, you have a girlfriend. While I do not.”
Stan replied, “Point taken. Let's go inside.”
The brothers then walked down the stairs, and into the club.
When they made it inside, the to brothers stood at the entrance of the place. They looked around, and they were glad to see that it was not a strip club, but a nightclub, with a rock band.
To the brother's right side, they sat a stage.
One stage, the two brothers saw a hot looking blond woman singing rock songs in japanese, while a band members were beside her and behind here, playing their musical instruments.
In addition, the dance floor in front of the stage was being used by several people, as they danced.
There was a bar counter across the room from the stage, on the left side of the room. And above the bar was a second story overlooking the dance floor and stage.
Stan stated, “Well, as least it is not what we thought it was.”
Lewis replied, “Yes. That is true.”
It was then that the brothers noticed two people on the dance floor. A black haired, fair skinned, teenage boy in a brown long coat, was dancing with a tanned skinned, skinny redheaded girl, around his age, whom was wearing, pants, and a cloth jacket over her shirt.
Even given the extreme age differences, compared to what they looked like in the brothers' present, the teenage boys immediately recognized them as their parents, Bob, and Ed Lowe.
Lewis thought, 'Best not to risk being overheard about this.' Lewis quietly asked his brother, “Is that?”
Stan also realized the importance of not being overheard. As he whispered, “I think so. That is our parents, when they were our age.”
Lewis smiled, as he softly replied, “Cool. Let's go by the bar, and figure out what to do next. Still, we need to keep an eye on them. We don't want them to accidentally bump into us.”
Stan whispered, “Agreed.” He then stated in a regular tone of voice, “Well, let's just hideout here for a while.”
Lewis replied, “Good idea.” He then looked at the band playing on the stage, as he stated, “Even though we don't have any money, at least we can enjoy the entertainment.”
Stan responded, “Yea. To bad we don't know japanese.”
Lewis said, “Mores the pity.”
Stan suggested, “Let's sit by the bar.”
Lewis replied, “Okay.”
As they walked to the bar counter, they noticed a brown hair, fair skinned, older man, in dark clothing, and a black long coat. The man stood, while leaning his back against the bar, as he watched the band on stage.
Given their recent experiences, they just walked passed him, and sat in the stools beside him, which was the very end of the bar counter, when compared to where the entrance to the bar was.
Stan sat by the brown haired, fair skinned man, with a scar running down the bridge of his nose man, while Lewis sat on the other side of Stan.
The brothers leaned their backs against the bar counter, as they watched both the band play on stage, and their parents dance on the dance floor.
The boys then noticed a japanese man, in strange, bright blue clothing, walk into the bar.
Lewis whisper into Stan's ear, “Why do I got the feeling that man is somehow connected to us?”
Stan shook his head, as he softly said to Lewis, “I am not even taking that bet. Still, there is nothing we can do about. So, let us enjoy the show.”
The brothers turned their attention back to their dancing parents, and the band on stage.
Stan commented, “Brother, you got to admit. The music is good. And that longer haired, blond singer on stage is easy on the eyes.”
Lewis replied, “Yea. You got that right. And look who is on the dance floor. Who knew those two could dance so well? I am truly proud of them.”
Stan on looked at the dance floor, at Bob and Ed. He simply nodded in response.
The brown haired man looked down at the brothers, as he sternly asked, in english, with a heavy russian accent, “Do you to know them?”
Stan responded, “Not yet.”
Lewis replied, “We were just commenting on how well they danced.”
The russian man said, “Good.”
The brothers then noticed another brown haired man, wearing pants, a shirt, and jacket, walk down from the second story stairs. He looked to have a mix of asian and caucasian ethnicity.
The man look over at Natsuru for a few seconds, he then went over and talked to him.
Stan thought, 'At least the blue haired man is now busy talking to some one.'
The brothers then turned their attention back to their parents.
The band ended one song, and started a new song.
The boys did not know the song, but it was more low beat, and sadder.
The brothers then watched as Bob and Ed began slow dance to the rhythm of the song.
As Bob and Ed slow danced with each other, they closely embraced one other.
The brothers smiled as seeing their parents enjoy their time together as a couple.
The brothers remained silent while they watched for the next five minutes, as Ed and Bob slow dance in step with each other.
As the song ended, Bob leaned down so he could kiss Ed deeply on her lips. Ed returned the kiss.
Lewis whispered to Stan, “Now, that is what you call romantic.”
Stan softly replied to Lewis, “Yep.”
Ed and Bob soon broke their kiss, and the brothers saw they were both smiling at each other.
Soon Ed and Bob left the dance floor, and headed towards the brothers.
Meanwhile, the next song the band started playing had a much stronger upbeat tempo.
Stan whispered to Lewis, “We need to get out of here.”
Lewis quietly suggested, “I saw this place has a second story. The stairs are by the entrance.”
Stan softly agreed, “Let's go.”
The brothers got up, and walked passed the russina. Soon after they walked by the blue haired man, and brown haired man, whom were both watching the band play.
A few seconds later, the brothers reached the stairs, and they calmly made it up stair.
When they reached the seconds story, they saw that there were rows of tables, by the railing, which overlooking the bottom floor, including the stage, dance floor, and bar counter.
Lewis pointed at a two seat table that by the railings, that allowed them to look down on the bar counter. He stated, “That one.”
Stan replied, “Okay.”
After they seated themselves in the chairs at the table, Lewis asked, “Now what?”
Stan smiled, as he commented, “You really are jumping off the deep end with that question.”
Lewis stated, “I prefer to be straightforward. Though, we cannot talk about most of what has recent happened to us, in public.”
Stan agreed, “True. They would arrest us, with either sending us to jail, or the nuthouse. I am not sure which would be the worse situation.”
Lewis responded, “Yea. Though, we do know some things. There is a bounty on us, that those teenage girls, of both groups, are not a part of. With that bounty placed by our teacher.”
Stan added, “Also, it is a logical guess, given Annie was right behind us, at that island, that wherever our parents are, she has already contacted our parents by now, and all three of them are looking for us.”
Lewis commented, “Still, we have to keep moving. If we try to backtrack, or stay in the same place, to wait for our parents, we will likely be captured by someone. Though, I am upset with them, I do want to see them, because I know they could sort out this mess.”
Stan responded, “I know, and I agree. So, I guess the next question is, what is our next move?”
Lewis answered, “We need to find out about our teacher. That is the one move we have left. But, unfortunately, our teacher was clever enough not to tell use the title of her series, so we could not just look her up, and find out about her... Though, she did give us her real name. Scorpius. So, we have lead.”
Stan stated, “Yes. We have a lead. But, first we have to wait for those down there to leave.”
Lewis agreed, “You are right about that.”
Lewis the looked down at the bar counter, on the first floor, and he noticed that the brown haired russian man was talking to their parents.
Lewis said, “Hey, wait a minute. That guy knows mom and dad. He is talking to them.”
Stan looked in the same direction, as he agreed, “He clearly does know them. And they know him.”
Lewis inquired, “Why haven't we met him, nor heard of him, before? He gives off an impression that one does not easily forget.”
Stan stated, “The only fair skinned, brown haired person, that speaks with a russian accent, that we know of, is B. And B is a woman, while that guy is clearly a man… Of course, if B used to be that guy. I guess that could make sense.”
Lewis countered, “But, B is so slender and skinny, and that guy is a walking brick wall.”
Stan pointed out, “In the last twenty-four hours, we have seen, or learned of, nearly every conceivable insanity imaginable. At this point, it is not only possible, let us just accept it as fact, and move on.”
Lewis conceded, “When you put it like that, I have to agree.”
Stan asked, “So, what do we do now?”
Lewis answered, “Wait until our parents leave. Then, we head for the next destination. And we hope it has a place to stay. I could use some rest.” Lewis then stretched his arms for a few seconds, before lowing them again.
Stan agreed, “So, could I.”
The brothers then turned to watch the events on the first floor.
After a few more songs were played by the band on stage, the band finally finished their set. The blond female singer bowed, before the entire band left the stage.
Less than a minute later, the brothers saw the blue haired man leave with a brown haired man in a jacket.
Stan said, “I have the feeling that blue haired man is just starting out on his own adventure.”
Lewis commented, “Very likely. Considering we are in our own past, in more ways than one.”
Soon after, the brothers watched their parents, and the brown haired man, leave the nightclub, as well.
Stan said, “We will give them a couple of minutes. Then, we will walk out as well, and head to our next destination.”
Lewis agreed, “Good idea.”
A few minutes later, Lewis stated, “Okay. I think it is okay for us to leave.”
Both brothers got up, calmly walked down stairs, and then out the main entrance way to 'Hot Legs'.
As they exited the nightclub, and entered the alleyway, they saw no one around.
Lewis pulled out his reality device, as Stan took a few steps closer to his brother.
Lewis commented, “You know, while I am not that crazy about Megatokyo. I do wonder what Tokyo was like when our father was our age?”
Stan agreed, “I won't mind going there, myself. That is not a bad idea.”
Lewis then press the red button on the reality device, and the next thing the brothers knew, they were surrounded by homes.
While they looked around, they noticed were standing on the sidewalk, as they were in the suburbs of a major city. Also, it was middle of the afternoon, and partly cloudy.
As Lewis pocket the reality device back into the pocket in his pants that he had been keeping it, he commented, “Well, this is certainly peacefully.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. It is a nice change of pace.”
They heard someone to their side, opposite to the street, say, in english, “Hello.”
They turned to see a slender, pretty, asian, dark blue haired, blue eyed, woman, around their age, wearing dark blue pants, red belt, a long sleeved white blouse, socks, and red tennis shoes. Her dark blue hair went down to her shoulder blades.
Behind her was a well kept, two-story home.
Stan replied, “Hi.”
Lewis commented, “Hello. Nice to meet you.”
Stan asked, “Please, don't take this the wrong way. But, where are we?”
The woman answered, “Tokyo.”
Lewis thought, 'We were just talking... And thinking about Tokyo. And from the looks of this place, this is clearly further in the past. Maybe when our father was our age... Could that be how this thing works.'
Lewis said, “Thank you for the answer.”
The woman commented, “Don't mention it. Still, you two look like you have been through the ringer.”
Stan admitted it, “You could say that.”
Lewis greeted her, “Anyway, I am, Lewis Lowe. And this is my brother, Stan Lowe. It is nice to meet you.”
The woman replied, “It is nice to meet you both. My name is, Violin Cephon Shinmyou. You can called me Violin. Still, why don't you both come inside. You can meet my family. And at the very least, you can get something to eat, use the restroom, and get cleaned up a bit.”
Lewis smiled, while he responded, “Who are we to argue with a beautiful woman?”
Stan just shrugged.
Violin giggled for a few seconds.
The boys then started walking over towards Violin.
Violin then walked to her front door, and opened it, as she let the brothers into her home.
Once the brothers were inside, she walked into her home as well, closing the door behind her.
Violin then walked passed the brothers, as she said, “This way. And don't worry about the shoes. You can keep them on. We are a bit casual around here.”
The teenage woman lead the brothers into her family's living room.
When the brothers into the living room, they saw three other individuals sitting at the couch, in front of a coffee table, straight in front of a wall mounted flat, widescreen TV.
There three individual. A woman, a man, and a young boy.
There were books on the coffee table, at the three of them were looking over.
Violin lead the brothers to wear they stood between the turned off TV, and the coffee table, in front of the couch.
The adults, and young boy, looked up at the newcomers, while the boys looked down at them.
All their of them had blue eyes, and appeared asian, like Violin.
The woman that looked almost exactly like Violin, only a few years old. She had long dark blue hair. She was wearing a wearing pants, a blouse, and dress shoes.
The man was around the same youthful age at the woman. He has black hair, and wore dark pants, blue t-shirt, white tennis shoes.
The boy had white hair boy's school uniform, with matching tennis shoes.
Violin said, in english, “Mom, Dad, Yuuichi, I would like to meet Lewis and Stan Lowe.”
Stan thought, 'They look too young to be Violin's parents. But, whom am I to judge.'
Violin said, “The woman is Birdy Tsutomu Shinmyou, my mother, and a detective of the Tokyo PD. The man is, Nataru Shinmyou, my stepfather, and a physical rehabilitation nurse at a local hospital. And the eight year old boy is my half-brother, Yuuichi.”
Yuuichi was the first to speak, in english, “Hello.”
Stan said, “Hello to all of you.”
Lewis commented, “It is always nice to meet new people.”
Then, Violin and her family had a conversation in japanese.
Violin's family stood up from the couch, as Nataru turned the teenage boys, while saying, in english, “It is nice to meet both of you.”
Birdy collected her son's school books. As she picked them up in her arms, she looked at the brothers, while kindly stating, in english “Same here. I trust my daughter's judge of character. Anyway, we have something to discuss in the kitchen. Please, make yourselves at him.”
Nataru lead his son into the kitchen, with Birdy right behind her.
Violin turned to the brothers, as she said, “Have a seat at the couch boys. The downstairs bathroom is down the hall, if you need to go. Just please leave the toilet seat down when you are finished.”
Lewis said, “We will.”
Stan looked at the couch, as he inquired, “Violin, are you sure it is alright. We didn't not intend to run your family out of their own living room.”
Violin answered, “It is okay. We just have to talk about something. I will be back in a few minutes.”
The brothers then watched, as Violin walked into the kitchen.
The brothers walked to the couch, and they sat down on it, beside each other. With Stan on Lewis' right side, as both teenage boys monopolized the couch between them.
Lewis wondered, “What do you think they are talking about?”
Stan answered, “My money is on us. But, I am not sure why. It could be just a case of their daughter bringing in two strangers from outside. Or, they could know us. I am not sure which.”
Lewis responded, “There is not much we can do about it, either way. Let's at least enjoy the peaceful moment while we still have it.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
A few minutes later, Violin walked out of the kitchen and to the brothers, as she said, in english, “Now, let's kill some time, shall we, with my favorite scifi series. It is call Farscape. And I think you will find it informative.”
As Violin walked in front of them, and to the small chest of drawers, Stan asked, “What is Farscape about?”
With her back turned to the brothers, Violin pulled out the blu-ray boxset of Farscape boxset, and the Peacekeeper Wars blu-ray box. She inquired, “Have you ever seen Star Wars, and the Star Trek series?”
Lewis answered, “Star Wars, yes. Star Trek, no.”
Violin stated, “Well, when you get the chance, watch the Star Trek series. They are all worth a watch. Though, Voyager does drag a bit in the later seasons. They are about what would happen if the future of human space exploration went right. And humans actually created a galaxy span civilization, with other alien species, that was worth living in.”
Lewis stated, “Sound like it is worth seeing. We will do so when we have the time.”
Violin commented, “Farscape is sort of like the opposite of Star Trek. Think like Star Wars, only with black leather, S&M, and more well thought out characters thrown in.”
Stan stated, “If that is the case, I am surprised that your parents let you watch this in their living room.”
Violin turned to face them, as she smirked, “Well, the series does it so tastefully, that you barely notice.”
She turned back to turn on the TV and the disc player on top of the chest of drawers, but below the wall mounted TV.
She put in the first disc into the player. She then grabbed the universal remote, stood up, and head to sit in the a cushion, reclining armchair, by the couch, that faced the TV.
As the TV came on, and the disc came up to the menu screen, Violin explained, “Farscape is about an astronaut named, John Crichton, that gets sucked into a wormhole on the other side of the Milkyway Galaxy, where he is a fish out of water, and completely on the run by increasing more dangerous, and savvy foes.”
Stan deadpanned, “I can relate to John.”
Lewis chuckled for a few seconds.
The three teenagers then started watching the pilot episode of Farscape. The volume from the stereo built into the TV was audible, but not loud.
Fifteen minutes into the episode, the scene panned to a very familiar ship, that the brothers had seen up close and personal before.
Lewis thought, with surprised, “Is that? Yes. It is. That is a Peacekeeper Commander Carrier! We now know the series that Scorpius is from. She is from the Farscape series. I wonder if Stan noticed that?”
Lewis then looked over to see that Stan had fallen asleep.
Though, Lewis was tempted to wake his brother, he stopped himself from doing so.
Lewis thought, 'There is no point to waking, Stan. I cannot tell him, with Violin here. I will have to tell him later.' Lewis yawned, 'And the rate I am going, I am going to soon join him in slumber-land. Still, we could both use the rest. To say that it has been a long day would be an understatement. At least we are safe here. And it is a good idea to get some rest, while, we have the chance to do so. I will watch as much as I can, until I finally fall asleep as well'
Lewis then turned back to the TV, and watched the rest of the episode.
He took a quick bathroom break when the credits the first episode started. Before he exited the bathroom, he made sure to lower the toilet seat back down, and wash his hands.
When he got back, he started walking the second episode.
Unfortunately, Lewis fell asleep halfway through the second episode.
Violin looked over at the two slumbering brothers, as she thought, “I admit, the second episode is a bit slow. And I guess they need their sleep. Though, I can still watch the series, while they sleep.'
Violin then turned back to the TV, as she continued watching the Farscape series.
(_)
Four hours later, Stan was the first brother to wake up from his sleep.
During this time, Violin had played through a few more episodes, and changed out discs a few times. She was currently watching Farscape, episode ten, 'They've Got a Secret'.
Stan looked over at Violin, as he asked, “How long have I been out?”
Violin looked over at him, as she answered, “Around five hours. Lewis has been asleep for about over four hours.”
Stan replied, “Thanks.”
Violin replied, “No problem.”
Stan then looked around and noticed that the kitchen light, which was one of the room right by the living room, was turned off.
Stan inquired, “Where is everyone?”
Violin answered, “My mother had to head to work. And my father took my younger brother to a school play, that he has a part in.”
Stan commented, “I find it odd that a girl's parents would trust two teenage boys with their teenage daughter. Not that either my brother or I are planning in anything.”
Violin said, “I am sure you are not. I get the sense that you are good people.”
Stan replied, “Thank you for your trust.”
Violin replied, “You're welcome. And thank you for your trust.” She then turned back to watching the episode playing on the living room TV.
Stan got up and walked out the room, and to the downstairs bathroom.
A few seconds later, he reached the bathroom.
Stan went into the bathroom, turning on a light, using the wall switch by the inside of the door. He then shut the door. Next, he went to the toilet, and raised the seat. Finally, he unzipped his fly, and relived himself.
When he was finished, he flushed the toilet, lowered the toilet seat, and went to the sink to wash his hands.
As he washed his hands, something caught his eye, through the curtains of the windows.
He turned off the wash, as he flipped off the light switch.
In the dark, he went to the curtains, and used his right index finger to slightly left the curtains, so he could peek outside.
It saw that the bathroom face the side of the house.
Fortunately, there was a streetlight nearby that illuminated the area.
And in the light. He saw Nodoka, and Mikoto, as girls, slowly walk around the house to the back.
Stat thought, 'They probably saw me, but they don't realize that I have seen them. And the fact they are circling around back, means that Yurika, and probably those pirate girls are here, at the front. I have got to get Lewis and I out of here right now!'
Stan turned and opened the door. He then rushed to the living room.
As Stan walked into the living room, Violin turned to Stan, and she saw that anxiety was showing on his face.
Violin asked, “What is wrong, Stan?”
Stan ignored her, as he rushed around the couch, to stand in front of Lewis.
Stan leaned down, and shook Lewis on his shoulders.
Stan stated, “Lewis. You got to wake up. We got to leave, right now.”
Lewis started to wake up, as he said, in a weak tone of voice, “What is it?”
Stan thought, 'This is taking too long. He is still too groggy to think straight. And I don't have time for him to become fully awake. I am going to have to do this myself.'
Stan leaned further down, with his knees, and back.
Stan slid his hands, under Lewis' armpits, up to his forearms. He then carefully lifted Lewis up, until Stan was standing, with Lewis leaning his head over Stan's right shoulder.
Stan quickly thought, 'If I remember correctly. Lewis put that device in his right pocket. So, I need to free up my left hand.'
Stan reached around Lewis back, with his right hand and arm, to allow him to let go of his brother with his left hand.
Stan then used his left to reach into Lewis' front right pants pocket.
He immediately felt the reality device, as he thought, 'Pay dirt.'
As Stan used the fingers in his left hand to feel around Lewis' pocket, for the button on the device, he continued this thought, 'I wonder how my father handled his first unknown situation, like the situations we have been handling today?'
Violin got up, so she could walk to the two brother. But, just as she headed their way, there was a knock at the door.
Violin walked out of the living room, and to the front door.
Just as Stan press the red button on the remote in Lewis' pocket, he heard Violin said, in a strong tone of voice, that carried through the hallway, and into the living room, “What are you doing here?”
Stan thought, 'She knows them. Damn it! And she was so nice, too. I think I won't mention this to Lewis. He seems to like her. And there is no point in hurting his feelings, considering we will likely never see her again.'
The next thing Stan knew, he was standing outside, on the sidewalk, in an old style, modern American neighborhood.
From the sun, Stan could see that was morning, and though there was snow on the ground, he guess that the temperature was in the low fifties, in Fahrenheit. Fortunately, Stan knew that it was just warm enough that the clothing he and his brother's clothing would keep them safely warm.
Stan took his left hand out of Lewis' pocket.
Stan then noticed, Lewis then began to come around, as Lewis said, “What is going on?”
Stan stated, “Easy Lewis. We had to make a quick escape. That is why you are standing right now. I am sorry for the disorientation.”
Lewis lifted his head, as Stan slowly let go of his brother, with his right arm, as Lewis got his footing.
As Lewis looked around, he said, “Well, why did we leave?”
Stan stated, “When I went to take a piss, I saw Nodoka and Mikoto outside. I am sure that Yurika was there. And chances are they brought friends, so we had to get out of there.”
Lewis stated, “I agree.” He then looked at the front yard, by the sidewalk they were in. There was a two story home in front of them. He continued, “We might as well find out where we are.”
Stan agreed, “Given it's morning, if we just knock on the door, we can probably con our way into finding out where we are. I suspect this is America, in the past. And we can just find a newspaper for the date.”
Lewis inquired, “How do you know?”
Stan answered, “My instincts tell me. Also, this home looks very familiar.”
Lewis said, “It does to me too. Let's take a second look at it.”
They started at the home for an about a half a minute, before they realized what home they were staring at.
Stan stated, “No way. We could not be.”
Lewis commented, “It fits with everything else. We already saw our parents as teenagers, in another reality. And we know our father is from another reality as well. So, it all fits.”
Stan smirked, “Oh man. I am so happy we are here. Unfortunately, we are too far into the past, and they don't know about us yet.”
Lewis responded, “Yep. But, it is nice to be to return to our paternal grandparents' home.”
Stan commented, “Well this would explain why our parents stopped coming here when we got older. I always wondered about the blindfold game.”
Lewis stated, “Yea. Now, we know. We have been reality traveling to our grandparents home since we were babies.”
Stan stated, in disgust, “So many damn secrets kept from us...” He forced himself to calm down, as he said, “Well, we might as well say hello.”
Lewis commented, “Agreed, but we need to keep our identities secret.”
Stan complimented, “Good idea. We just say we are Stan and Lewis. And we can find out where our father is, at least the one in this time period. I still remember what our grandparents looked like, the last time we saw them. I can guess how long it has been into the past, from their looks.”
Lewis pointed out, “Nice idea. But, I don't think our parents lived parallel with their timeline. This reality might have lived less time, compared to our parents lives, in mom's home reality.”
Stan admitted, “You got me there. Still, if we are in the distant past, we can say we are our father's, Bob's, classmates.
Lewis stated, “You are right. This is basically a, 'back to the future', situation. And we have to be careful not create a paradox.”
Stan replied, “True. So, if either of our grandparents ask too many questions, we run. Like we have been doing.”
Lewis commented, “Running has been a good plan b so far. Anyway, I think you should do the talking.”
Stan replied, “Thanks for the vote of confidence.”
Lewis replied, “You're welcome.”
The brothers then walked up the concrete pathway, that went through the yard, and to the front door.
When the reached the front door, Lewis stood behind Stan, as Stan lightly knocked on the door. Stan then tried the door bell.
Half a minute later, the door opened.
The brother saw their parental grandmother, though, she was very much younger than the last time they saw her.
Stan thought, 'Well, this confirms we are in our father's past.'
Their grandmother asked, “Can I help you, boys?”
Stan answered, “Good morning, ma'am. We are looking for Bob Lowe. We are his classmates. Is he here right now?”
Their grandmother stated, “I do not know a Bob Lowe. Lowe is not our family name. But, if you are look for my son, Bob. You just missed him. He took a taxi to work, for his Saturday morning shift?”
Stan thought, 'So, it is a Saturday, today. Now, were does dad work in this time period?' He inquired, “I misspoke. Though, it is your Bob is the one I was referring to. Where does he work? And can you please give us directions?”
Their grandmother responded, “Sure. He works at the collector's store, The Gateway to Fantasy. The directions are...”
Their grandmother than gave them directions to the Gateway to Fantasy store. She even pointed out what direction to walk, how many blocks to take till turning, and how many more blocks to take.
The brothers looked at each other, as Stan stated, “That is not that far.”
Lewis commented, “It will only take about an hour to walk to. And it will save us money.” He mentally added, 'That we don't have in the first place.” He turned to his grandmother, as he stated, “Thank you, ma'am.”
Their grandmother replied, “It is okay. I am always happy to help my son's friends.”
Suddenly, two children, a girl and a boy, whom were dressed in winter clothing, ran from within the home, and out the front door, pass their mother, and the two brothers.
A second later, the brothers saw their paternal grandfather walk up beside their grandmother.
Their grandmother said, “Dear, this is Lewis and Stan, Bobby's friends from school.”
Their grandfather turned to the two brothers, as he said, “Nice to meet. I am just a little busy with my other children right now.”
Stan replied, “No problem. And have a nice day.”
Lewis commented, “Thank you again.”
Their grandmother said, “Good luck.”
The brothers turned and walked away, as the parents watched their children from the door.
The brothers soon walked passed the girl and boy, as the two children started throwing snowballs at each other. But, the kids did not thrown any snowballs at the teenage boys.
When the brothers reached the sidewalk, they used the instructions their grandmother gave them, as they turn in the direction of the store that they were told that their father was working at.
A few minutes later, when they were way behind earshot of their family, Lewis commented, “Looks like we have a real aunt and uncle we didn't know about.”
Stan state, “And Lowe is not our family name, on either side of our parents family tree.”
Lewis responded, “It is just another question to ask our parents, when we see them.”
Stan said, “True. Also, I vaguely remember this place. So, I think it is just a case we are not going to forget them. And we will find them in the future.”
Lewis stated, Good. Because when this is over, we are going to go visit them.”
Stan replied, “I second that idea.”
The two brothers then continued walking down the sidewalk.
(_)
An hour later, the brothers reached the collector's store, The Gateway to Fantasy.
They saw the sign over the store, and the windows that made up the front of the store.
Stan stated, “Well, let us go in and see what our father looked like, before he met our mother, and became a badass adventurer.”
As Lewis opened the door for Stan, he commented, “Why do I have a feeling this is going to be interesting?”
As Stan walked into the store, he replied, “Because it is.”
Was they walked into the store, they noticed the checkout counter was near the door.
But, whom they saw across the counter shock both of them.
It was their black haired, fair skinned, father, when he was very young. A few years young they were. Also, he was slightly overweight. He was wearing pants, and the store shirt, with the name on the store on the right side of his chest.
Bobby stated, “Good morning. Is there anything I can help you find this morning?”
Stan quickly said, “I am sorry, sir. But, I believe we were mistaken in coming here.” He thought, 'My dad is so young. And chubby, and plain. How did he go from that, to our father?'
Lewis commented, “I agree.” He mentally added, 'He clearly cannot help us. And staying here will only put him in danger.'
Bobby calmly, and politely said, “Okay. You are more than welcome to come back anytime.”
The brothers turned and left the store the same way they had entered it.
After the brothers exited the store, as they walked by, they notice a black hair, japanese man, exiting a taxi. He wore a black suit, and used a cane.
Stan said, “Well, that was a bust. What were we thinking?”
Lewis replied, “It was work a shot. Hey, at least we now know where our paternal grandparents live. And we do have an aunt, and an uncle. But, when it comes to our aunt. The person we previously thought as our aunt was not our aunt.”
Stan responded, “True. Also, we now know why mom and dad stopped taking us over there to visit them as we got older.”
Lewis commented, “And they gave us some of the nicest gifts when we were younger.”
Stan stated, while smiling, “Well brother, when we get out of this mess, we will go visit them the first chance we get. In the proper time and place.”
Lewis just smiled back at his brother.
A few seconds later, the japanese man enter the Gateway to Fantasy store.
As the brothers continued walking away, Stan stated, “Let us find some place private to leave.”
Lewis suggest, “How about around back of the store?”
Stan looked at the upper, outer walls of the stores, he then saw cameras. He stated, “No dice. There are cameras here.”
Lewis stated, “Okay, I saw an alleyway across the street.”
Stan looked over looked in front of them, and he saw the alleyway. He agreed, “That will do.”
As the brothers came the by the parking lot street, they checked both ways, and safely crossed the street.
The brothers then walked by a woman, in a parking lot they were passing through. The woman wore a red leather jacket, pants, and gloves. She also wore black boots, black leather belt, and a pink helmet. She was straddling a pink motorcycle.
Soon after, they were inside the alleyway.
Stan asked, “Where do you want to go to next?”
Lewis pulled out the reality device from his pocket, as he commented, “Somewhere, where we can get something to eat, and not be tracked while doing so.”
Stan walked up complimented, “Now, that is a great idea.”
Lewis thought, 'I am starting to think that my literally be the case. Now, let us test that theory.' He pushed the red button, and in an instant, he and his brother disappeared, as they jumped realities.
(_)
Nearby, in the parking lot, right outside the alleyway, Arcee, in her pink motorcycle alt mode, stated into the headphones in Revy's helmet, “Those two boys just jumped realities.”
Revy was sitting on top of Arcee's seat. The redhead replied, with her microphone in her helmet, “They are not our target. I am sure someone will get to them, eventually. Besides, I am enjoying watching that boy treat Rock like a king.”
Arcee agree, “Yes. People displaying such manners
A several minutes later, they watched as the boy help Rock into a taxi that picked him up.
A minute after they, they saw from the windows of the store, as a man walked out from back, to talk to the body.
Revy commented, “Is that? It is. Looks like Rock will have to wait. I just found someone I thought we would never see again.”
She then started Arcee's motorcycle engine.
Several seconds later, Revy drove Arcee across the road, into the other parking lot, after making sure the street was clear of vehicles.
As she drove Arcee, right up beside the front entrance of the Gateway to Fantasy store, Arcee asked, “Who is it?”
Revy smirked, “Rico.” She then got off the motorcycle.
Revy took off her pink helmet, leaving it on the seat of Arcee, in alt mode. She then unzipped her red jacket to reveal a white t-shirt under it.
Revy then started walking toward the front door to the collector's store. Within moments, she opened the door, and entered the Gateway to Fantasy.
A few seconds later, Arcee watched as the black haired, young teenage boy, whom had been so polite to Rock, rushed out of the store, from the front entrance. The teenage boy continued running passed the parking. He soon turned a corner, and he was out of sight.
Soon after, gunfire began, as Arcee thought, 'The one thing, above all, that I have to admire about Chang giving me this job, is that it has yet to ever be boring.'
'And to think, Chang was the one to put Revy in charge. Still, if she cannot handle this guy within a minute, or so, I will walk in and take matters. Though, either way, after this guys is captured, we are going to have to erase the security recording.'
'Given my sensors already located where the recordings are storied in this building, that will not be a problem. And from what I picking up on the police bands, law enforcement has yet to be alerted to this gunfight. So, we should have plenty of time.'
'Now, all I have to do is stand back, and watch the show. And when Revy is finished, we collect our target, destroy the store security recordings, and then all three of us teleport to the tower, with Chang, or should I saw her boomer double, congratulates us on a good job. All in all, a good days work. And we deal with Rock, and his group tomorrow.'
(_)
The next thing the brothers knew, they were in a slightly dimly list science fiction style bedroom. Though, there was still enough light to see each other, and the items in the room.
As Stan and Lewis looked around, they realize the design of the place was very different from the style of bedrooms of their home reality.
Lewis commented, “I wonder where we are? And when we are?”
Stan stated, “Given the architecture, we are not in our home reality. But, this is definitely designed by humans. The bed alone is made for human. It has a cushioned mattress, sheets, and even a pillow.”
Lewis looked out the window, by the bed, as he replied, “Agreed.” He then saw something above them, as he added, “We are in a sci-fi reality, with spaceships. Have a look outside. And I think this is a space station, with true artificial gravity. No centrifuge technology.”
Stan turned to look out the window. When he did, he saw saw that he was in the inner ring of a spacestation, as he looked out at the outer ring of the station. There was were curved arcs going, inwardly up and down the outer ring, with a large spaceship, being moored at the end of arc at the top.
Though, the spaceship was nowhere near as large as a Peacekeeper Command Carrier. The ship was the size of a standard passengers spaceship in the Lowe brothers home reality.
Stan stated, “Give the angle of degrees of the rings, and arcs, which I see, I would guess this spacestation is shaped the skeleton of a sphere.”
Lewis responded, “I think you are right. Now, let's take another look inside this place.”
As they both turned back to the bedroom.
Lewis stated, “I don't like to steal, but we do need to see if we can take a few valuables, that we could use to pay for our food, and maybe shelter. Something the owner of this place would likely miss.”
Stan replied, “I agree with the moral dilemma. The problem is we are out of options for cash. It would likely be unwise to try to hack the local computer networks, because we have no clue how they work. And we are on the run. Therefore, there is no time to figure out how to do a job, and get paid. So, like you said. Let's search for valuables to use to pay for the items we need just to survive.”
Lewis commented, “Though, let's keep things neat. And leave them the way we found them.”
Stan replied, “That is a good idea.”
The two brothers then searched the room. Though, as the searched, the were careful to leave what they searched, as it was, before they looked through it.
After searching some drawers, and other places, Stan stated, “I don't think the person that sleeps here actually lives here. I don't see any personal effects, nor pictures. And only a few changes of clothing.”
Lewis suggested, “Maybe this is a layover apartment for the person. Likely he, or she, is a pilot, or something, and this is just part of their regular route, allowing the person a place to stay off their ship, for a night, when they get here.”
Stan replied, “Like somewhere to stretch and relax?”
Lewis started looking through chest of drawers by the bed, as he answered, “Exactly... Pay dirt. I found gold in one of these drawers. Come take a looked.”
Stan walked over, and her looked at the open drawer. The drawer was halfway open, while the allowing for the brothers to see the two stacks of different shaped small gold bars in the drawer.
Stan inquired, “So, what gold bars do we get? And how much?”
Lewis answered, “The ones with the stamped symbols on it. They are likely worth more. And how much? I suggest two bars. I don't think the person would miss just two bars.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
Lewis reached into the open drawers and her pulled out two of the small bars with stamping on them. Then, he pocketed the gold bars, and closed the drawer.
As Lewis leaned up, he looked around. he asked, “So, is everything neat? We don't want this person to suspect we have been here, for a while.”
Stan responded, “Yes. I returned everything the same as it had been before I looked through it. How about you?”
Lewis stated, “Except for these two gold bars. I did the same. Now, how do we get out of here?”
Stan shrugged, as he replied, “Simple. The bathroom of over there, with the door open. So, the door nearby is open also, which has to the exit.”
They walked through the door, into the living room. Which was dimly lit in the same way as the bedroom. Then, they saw only one other door in the room, with that door being closed.
Lewis commented, “Process of elimination.”
Stan agreed, “Exactly.”
As the two brothers came to a stop in front of the closed door, they saw no latch to the door.
Stan commented, “I guess this is not so simple.”
Lewis saw, on the wall, by the door, a small panel, with a button on it. He tapped it, as he said, “Here.”
Suddenly, the door slid open. The boys quickly exit the bedroom suite, and into the hallway, before the door closed again.
As they found themselves in a hallway, without speaking to each other, the brothers used their ears to listen for sounds. Above the electronic humming in the hallway, they heard noises coming from a certain direction, and the boys walked down the hallway towards the noises.
Less than a minute later, they found themselves inside a large, open, two-story, circular shopping area, with several stores.
They looked around, and saw they were on the second story of the area. There were shops on the interior of the ring, but large windows, looking into the starry space outside, on the outer side of the ring.
In the gaps in the floor, behind the railings, the Lowe brothers saw, from the opening to the bottom story, that there were shops on both side of the circular hallways.
As the boys looked back up, Lewis suggested, “Now, to find somewhere to eat.”
Lewis then noticed a human man standing hear them, with his back turned to them. The human man, wearing what looked like a cross between pajamas and yellow uniform.
Lewis turned to the human man, as he said to him, “Excuse me, sir. But, we just got here. Could you please tell us a good place to get something to eat?”
The man turned around to face the brothers. It was then the brothers noticed that man had ridges on the bridge of his nose. The man responded, “I suggest Quarks. He serves human food. Quarks is on the bottom floor of the Promenade. That way.” The man used his right hand to point in a direction, that lead to the left of them, and closer to the center of the Promenade.
Lewis replied, “Thank you.”
The man did not response, as he turned and walked away from them.
The boys looked at each other.
Stan said, “I guess we go to Quarks.”
Lewis replied, “That works for me. And I believe our right to the second floor, is right in front of us.” He then used his right hand to point at a lift, directly in front of them, that was closer to the center wall of the Promenade.
The boys then walked over to the nearby lift down, and road it to the bottom floor of the Promenade.
A few minutes later of walking, and using the directions the man had told them. The teenage boys did not find it hard to guess which store was Quarks. There was only one large, restaurant in the direction they were told us.
The boys soon walked through the entrance of the gold and red styled store. They then came to a stop, at the entrance, as they saw that it was a bar and restaurant that was over half full.
Stan commented, “I guess we seat ourselves.”
The brothers walked straight in, and soon sat at an empty table, that was near the middle of the room, across an open aisle to the bar counter, on the left side of the room.
The brothers seated themselves, so they could see the front door, just in case they saw anyone they recognized come inside, looking for them. And they knew with their current luck, that would be the people they did not want to meet.
A few seconds after they were seated, a short, large headed, big eared, male, alien waiter came by their table. He asked, “What can I get for you two gentlemen today?”
The brothers turned to the waiter.
Lewis asked, “I apologize, but first I need to know something.” He pulled out the two gold bars, and held them for the waiter to see. He inquired, “Will this cover a meal and something to drink, for each of us.”
The waiter said, “Yes. It should.”
Lewis pocketed the gold bars, as he replied, “Thank you. Do you prepare human sandwiches?”
The waiter answered, “Yes.”
Lewis turned to his brother, as he inquired, “Care if I order for the two of us?”
Stan looked over at Lewis. He shrugged, as he replied, “Go ahead.”
The brothers then looked at the waiter.
Lewis stated, “A double order of club sandwiches, potato chips, and lemonade to drink. Are refills free?”
Waiter replied, “No.”
Lewis said, “Then, we will each have a large glass of lemonade, with ice for the each of us.”
The waiter nodded, and he then left to take other orders, before heading back to the bar to give them to the one that produced the food and drink.
Stan looked around, as he commented, “I don't see a kitchen in here, nor in an adjoining room, that could be a kitchen.” He then turned to Lewis.
Lewis looked around. He then turned back to his brother, as he responded, “Neither do I. And while there are hallways in back of both this floor, and the above floor, I don't see any of the uniform staff going in their and coming out with orders. So, I guess the location of the kitchen is a mystery. Though, I doubt it will be like they can produce our orders from thin air.”
A minute later, the waiter brought them there their plates of food, and large classes of lemonade. He then left, to attend to his other customers.
After the waiter left, the two brothers looked at their food and drinks.
Stan commented, “That was quick.”
Lewis said, “I am not going to look a gift horse in the mouth.”
Stan replied, “Me neither.”
Lewis took a bite of his sandwich and washed it down with some of his lemonade. After he swallowed what was in his mouth, he commented, “This is actually pretty good. Not great. But, good.”
Stan tried his sandwich, potato chip, and his lemonade, as he agreed, “Yea. You're right. Even the chips are okay.”
Lewis stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Given there is a real possibility that we might never get a chance to have another quiet moment like this, together, there are some things I need to tell you. First, I have been a poor brother to you. I focuses on my studies, instead being a loving brother to you. I regret not coming to more of your football games, and sharing in your hobbies.”
Stan said, in a comforting tone of voice, “It is okay, brother. You were busy having your own life.”
Lewis replied, “Up until today, my life had consisted of doing that damn formula with our professor. And look at where it gotten us.”
Stan pointed out, “Well, it is not all bad. Thought, it got us kidnapped. It also got us on the wildest adventure I can think of. And we learned that our parents had been keeping some major secrets from us.”
Lewis agreed, “True. Still, it is not an excuse for my behavior towards you. But, that is not the embarrassing part.”
Stan inquired, “Let me guess. You had a crush on the professor?”
Lewis quietly answered, “Yes.”
Stan casually stated, “Don't feel bad about it. She is hot. It happens. And you were professional enough not to act on your crush.”
Lewis cracked a smile, as he said, “That is true. Thanks.”
Stan replied, “You're welcome. And don't worry about.”
Lewis responded, “And if we both make it through this in one piece, I promise to be a better brother.”
Stan said, “Same here. We really should do more things together, as brothers. And I really should slack off the sports, to do some of your hobbies, with you. Even I will admit that sports are not everything in life.”
Lewis commented, “The sad part is, now that I reflect on it, I don't think we have any other hobbies, besides studying, and sports.”
Stan agreed, in a sad tone of voice, “That is probably true. That doesn't mean we cannot start some now.”
Lewis complimented, “Nice idea. Any ideas?”
Stan answered, “Sure. What about charting the multiverse, by seeing all the fictional series that everyone else has seen? Then, maybe going to the nicer place out there. Though, we got to figure how to navigate with that device.”
Lewis stated, “I think I solved that problem. I will tell you, later.”
Stan replied, “Good. That means we could learn about the nice places out there, and then visit them. We might even make some profit, on the side.”
Lewis smiled, as he responded, “I agree. Actually, I think dad might have originally had the same idea. I mean, think about. He worked in a collector's video store. He probably knew a lot of the nice places in the multiverse already, before he started his adventures. When he figured out how to travel realities, he already had a top ten list, of nice locations, lined up for him, and mom.”
Stan thought about Lewis' comment for a few seconds. He then answered, “I think you maybe right. No wonder mom fell in love with him. That man is more a genius than most people give him credit for. He may not as intelligent as us, and mom. But, he is up there.”
Lewis stated, “I agree. I get the feeling that those we have met that know him, respect him. It really says something with hardcore badasses, and alien leaders, respect a guy who started in a small town, working as a video sales clerk.”
Stan agreed, “I know. He has come very far in his life. He and mom can clearly play with the big boys and girls.”
Lewis inquired, “What does that say about us?”
Stan said, “I have been wondering about that question, myself. I don't have a good answer for you that doesn't sound either arrogant, idiotic, or both.”
Lewis suggested, “That sounds about the same line of thought as I have on the subject. So, let us enjoy the ambiance of this place, and keep an eye on the door, while we eat our meal.”
Stan replied, “Good idea. You never know who might walk into a place like this.”
Lewis just quietly nodded in response.
The brothers then finished the rest of their meals in silence.
Around twenty minutes later, as the two of them finished their meals, Lewis asked, “So, how deep would you say we are in?”
Before Stan could answer, the brothers saw, from the corner of their eyes, a black haired, fair skinned man, with a bushy, full beard. He wore a brown button up shirt, brown pants, brown belt, and black boots.
As he walked along the bar counter, near them, he turned as sat by the bar counter.
Still, even though the two teenage boys were not directly looking at the man, they were watching him from the corner of their eyes.
They noticed that the guy turns towards the brothers, and looked at them for a few seconds. The man then turn back to the counter. But, both brother realized that the man might still be trying to listen to them.
Stan thought, 'Given the risk of eavesdropping from that man, I think it is best to keep this vague. Meaning no using our real names.' Stan then looked at Lewis, whom looked eyes with his, as Stan continued, 'And it looks like Lewis has picked up on the situation as well. Still, there is something familiar about that man.'
Stan said, “Well brother. We are so screwed. I mean, we are in deep as possible, and going down.”
Lewis replied, “You're right. Our parents should have told us years ago what was going on. But, they wanted us to live a normal lives. Yet, anyone with a IQ of above room temperature could have guessed that wasn't going to happen.”
Stan responded, “I completely agree. Still, I am annoyed at you for screwing up my life. I was heading to college, on a sports scholarship. I was dating the hottest cheerleader in school. Even the damn quarterback envied me. And she was in the bag to be prom queen. I could have taken the prom queen to prom.”
“Do you know how lucky someone would have to be to have that happen to them? That is the type of social achievement that is so great that a century from now, on my death bed, and I mention it to people, and they would still be jealous of me. But, no. You just had to convince me to help you complete that damn formula, back home. Now, our lives are ruined, half of existence are hounding our asses, and we have no real answers so far.”
Lewis pointed out, “I know. I know. I had a science scholarship lined up, as well. Besides, you were the one that opened the door to those three strange girls at home.”
Stan replied, “How was I suppose to know?”
Lewis responded, “My point exactly.”
Stan snapped at his brother, “Teacher's pet.”
Lewis insultingly replied, “Jock.”
Stan accused, “Nerd. Besides, you owe me more than I owe you. I always got you a hot date when I went out with my girlfriend.”
Lewis conceded, “Yes, you did. And I am still thankful for you doing that.”
Stan responded, “That is nice to hear. But, on top of what you did, you made things worse by telling your physics teacher.”
Lewis replied, “I admit it. She had me fooled... She had us all fooled.”
Stan flatly said, “Yea. Now, we have nearly every type of bounty hunter imaginable after us. And we also have to deal with our crazy trio of crazy distant cousins, and those five teenage women. God, I never knew someone could be that violent. Let alone a woman. And we have had to deal with five such women.”
“That it would probably not have been so bad if we had previously not literally dropped on top of them, from out of nowhere. While they were having their bikini party. With their dozens of equally violent female friends. If those front doors to that mansion we rushed into, with those nutcases chasing right behind us, had not been unlocked, and steel reinforced, with us locking them out, behind us. And the walls were steel reinforced concrete. And the windows being bullet proof. All giving us just enough time to get our device to jump us to another reality, we would be dead, or worse.”
Lewis admitted, “Very true.”
Stan complimented, “You know, until that day, I didn't know you could run as fast as me.”
Lewis shook his head in disbelief, as he replied, “Neither did I.”
Stan stated, “I think we broke the men's speed record for the fifty yard dash on that one. Though, the worst part is I don't know how we ended there in the first place. I mean, when you have a planet destroying energy cannon pointed out at you, you are not very picky about where you want to go. Our luck is not that bad? Is it? All I wanted to do was see our mom and dad. What went wrong?”
Lewis explained, “Well, in the ensuing chaos, I thought I saw mom and our... aunt?”
Stan sighed, “Remember, that was not our aunt.”
Lewis commented, “Oh god, that group picture, of women in bikinis, in mom and dad's bedroom. That was them.”
Stan grumbled, “Business trip, my ass.”
There was an eerie silence between the brothers for the next a few seconds.
Stan commented, “I can see how this type of life could drive a man to drink.”
Nearby, at the bar counter, a fair skinned man with black hair, and a full, bushy beard, had just finished his first bottle of alcohol, and the bartender has just gotten him another bottle of alcohol to work on.
Lewis agreed, “I am with you there, man.”
The brothers said, in unison, “Crazy chicks.”
Lewis commented, “Still, that nice, teenage, dark blue haired girl from Tokyo wasn't too bad. She has good taste in science fiction.”
Stan said, “Dude, after everything that has happened, I will bet you five dollars that girl is weird in some way.”
Lewis replied, “I will take that bet. And look on the bright side. We are still ourselves, and we got each other.”
Stan admitted, “Yea. I hear you, bro. At least we got that going for us.”
Lewis stated, “Anyway, after thinking about it, I think got lead on the man that used to fight our physics teacher on a regular basis.”
Stan asked, “Where did you get the lead from?”
Lewis answered, “From that TV series that girl from Tokyo showed us. The spaceships on it, and the ones we personally saw, look identical.”
Stan agreed, “Okay. We got nothing else to go on. It is work a shot.”
Lewis said, “I am glad you agree. Though, I think this guy is kinda crazy.”
Stan pointed out, “What part of this situation we find ourselves in, isn't crazy?”
Lewis complimented, “Good point.”
Stan got up from his seat, as he inquired, “So, what are we waiting for?”
Lewis got up as well, while he answered, “Nothing, but to pay for the dinner.”
As they walked by the bar counter, they dropped the two bars they had found, to pay for their drinks and meal.
They then the passed by the bearded, black haired, fair skinned man, whom was on his way to being drunk.
As they were about to exit, the immediately realized who the man was, as they turned around and took a good hard look at him.
Stan thought, in surprised, 'Oh lord! It is dad! He is years younger, but I can tell that it is him, even with the beard. And he looks like such a badass with that beard. I wonder how I would look in a beard like that?'
Stan whispered, “Oh my god. That is him. He is so young. So manly. And I love his beard.”
Stan was about to walk over to the man, but Lewis stopped him, by placing his hand on his shoulder.
Lewis quietly stated, “You know the rules. Or, do you want to screw the space time continuum even worse than it already is for us?”
Stan softly admitted, “You're right. Still, I say you are the one in dealing with with that one question we really need an answer to.”
Lewis let go of his brother. Both teenagers then turned around and started walking towards the door.
Lewis responded, “Nah. I got the brains. You got the muscles. It doesn't take a genius to figure which is which on that question.”
Stan suggested, “Keep dreaming. And let's just find a way to fix this mess, so we can get back to blue skies and red soil.”
Lewis agreed, “Amen to that brother.”
Both brothers laughed, as they left Quarks.
After they exited the bar and restaurant, Stan stated, “Let's find a hallway, for privacy, so we can leave unnoticed.”
Lewis replied, “Good idea.” As brothers started walking towards a nearby hallway, Lewis added, “Also, I think I figured how the device works.”
Stan inquired, “Really? How?”
Lewis stated, “Annie was quiet literal in what she said about the device. The device takes you literally to where and when you want to go. You think of a reality, place, and time, in the multiverse, and hold that thought, while you press the red button, and the next thing you know, you are at that place, in that reality, in the proper time, you wanted to be in.”
“I suspect the selection can also be a general through, as well. Where one is thinking of an event. But, the person does not know the proper reality, place, nor time. Though, if you hold that thought, and use the device. Chances are, you will arrive in the correct reality, at the event, you head in mind, at the time you wanted to be.
Stan responded, “Cool. That solves a lot of our problems. This also explains a lot. I think we have literally shadowing our parents. We have been subconsciously thinking about them, while also wondering about other things, and the device just cross-referenced our desires, and took us to the best guess it had for the reality, place, and time, we want to be.”
Lewis pointed out, “I can see how most of our reality jumps are like that. But, what about the tropical city in Thailand? Or, the normal Tokyo?”
Stan thought for a few seconds. He then answered, “If I recall the situation, correctly, I believe, right after we went got to that city, in Thailand, we literally walked by our parents, when they were teenagers, and B, when she was a guy, on the sidewalk.”
Lewis agreed, “Now, that I think about it, I believe you are right. I do recall seeing our parents and B, as a guy.”
Stan stated, “And we were talking about what a normal Tokyo would be like, during our father's time, right before we left MegaTokyo.”
Lewis agree, “You are right on that, too. We did.”
By then, they reached a nearby hallway, and walked into it. They ducked in the hallway, where it turned.
The two brothers came to a stop, as they stood next to each other.
Lewis used his right hand to pull out his reality device from his right, side pants pocket, as Stan stood beside him.
Stan inquired, “So where exactly are you thinking of taking us? And when?”
Lewis explained, “I will think of going to Farscape. On Moya's bridge. And the time will be an hour in that reality, after we escaped Scorpius.”
Stan agreed, “That should work.”
Lewis said, “Okay. Here we go.” He then pressed the red button.
Suddenly, they saw realized that were in another reality, and on the bridge of Moya, with it's crew.
The brothers did not recognize the young human looking boy, with short black hair, whom could be no older than ten years old. And the woman with gray skin, and white hair. But, they knew the rest from the first couple of episodes of the Farscape series that they watched.
The crew on the bridge were all dressed in casual clothing, befitting they looks and personal tastes. With even the child dress in a white shirt, brown pants, and simple shoes.
On the bridge was John, Aeryn, Little D, Chiana, and Dargo, with Pilot face being shown on a nearby monitor screen.
John and Aeryn pulled out their pulse pistols, and pointed them at the brothers.
Meanwhile Chiana and Dargo gently pulled the boy away, and behind them.
John immediately ordered, in english, “Who the hell are you? And what are you doing here?”
Lewis still had his reality device in his right hand, while he and Stan quickly raised their hands up, as they said, in unison, “We surrender.”
Stan swiftly stated, “We are unarmed.”
Lewis quickly said, “Also, no translator microbes. Long story. Just don't inject us with them.”
From the nearby monitor screen, Pilot said, in english, “Understood.”
Lewis commented, “We did not come here to harm any of you. We can here for advice. And maybe some help from you. This is just a reality jumping device in my hand. Not a weapon. Can I please put it away?”
John looked at the device in Lewis' right hand. He then stated, “I recognize the device. Go ahead. Put it away.”
Lewis quickly put the device in his right side pants pocket.
Lewis then raised his hands back up.
Aeryn demanded, “Now, where did you get that device from?”
Stan answered, “It is a long story, in the span up about twenty-four hours.”
John inquired, “How can it be a long story, in under a day?”
Stan answered, “We have been doing cross-country traveling of the multiverse all day long.”
John stated, “Been there. Done that. Not fun.”
Stan said, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Lewis commented, “Anyway, we do know who some of you are. Like you John. We only saw the first couple of episodes of your series. And we are more than happy to tell you that a woman named Annie gave us the device. And we are willing to answer any other questions you have for us.”
John asked, “Annie? You know, Annie?”
Lewis answered, “Yes. Who is she to you?”
John said, “Short answer. She is an old friend. You boys have clearly gotten into some mess to be so desperate enough to come here for help. So, what is it?”
Lewis inquired, “Do you know a woman by the name of Scorpius?”
John began laughing for a few seconds
While John calmed down, he lowered and holstered he weapon. He turned to Aeryn, as he stated, “Aeryn, you can put you pistol away. I think they are on the level.”
Aeryn kept her weapon out, and pointed at the brothers, though her trigger finger was not resting on the trigger guard. She inquired, “Why do you think that?”
John answered, “Annie is empath. I know her. She would not give someone a reality device, unless they were both a good person, and they needed said device. Also, we have to admit, that if anyone got in trouble, when it concerns Scorpius, the logical person to seek out help from would be me.”
Aeryn lowered her weapon, and holstered it, as she admitted, “Sadly, I think you are correct, John.”
The boys then lowered their hands back to their sides, as they both breathed a sigh of relief.
John turn turned to the boys, as he stated, “You two better start from the beginning. Your names would be a good start.”
Lewis responded, “I am Lewis Lowe. This is my brother, Stan Lowe. We are super-geniuses. We got the intelligence from our mother, but we are not crazy geniuses, because we inherited our father's sanity.”
Aeryn commented, in english, “That is interesting. I am Aeryn. The human man is my husband, John. The boy is our son, Little D. The white alien woman is Chiana. The blue alien on the screen is Pilot. And the red giant alien man is Dargo. Except for Dargo, we can all speak english. Though, Dargo cannot speak your language, he can understand what you tell him.”
Lewis said, “Nice to meet you all. We are sorry for the surprise. But, we didn't know how best to approach you.
Chiana stated, in english, “You didn't come in shooting, or trying to steal something, so you already better than most people whom come over to say, hi.”
Lewis went onto say, “Good. And since Stan is better at talking, he will tell the story.”
Stan looked over at Lewis. He then turned to the crew of Moya. He stated, “Well, it all started at my American high school football, on Mars, on a Friday night. In our reality, Mars has been terraformed. Though, in many ways, the technology is not that more advanced that your Earth. We still have cars, and a few other things, from your time. Plus spaceships, and some new toys.”
“Anyway, after I helped my team win the game, with my skills at defense, I went to get my brother to celebrate. He was in the school, with his physics professor and tutor, whom we later found out was Scorpius, working under an alias.”
“But, we are getting ahead of ourselves. After we left our professor, and got something to eat. We returned to our home and with my help, we finished a formula my brother and Scorpius was working. Then, three teenage girls talked their way into let us welcome them into our family. Only then, after we let them in, did we find out, that they are gender bending, elemental wielding, lunatics.”
John commented, “I have dealt with gender benders before. It seems that insanity runs deep with that group. Which is not surprising. But, you have to watch out for their unpredictability.”
Stan deadpanned, “I bet.” He then continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “And that was only the start of our crazy day. After we escaped our own home, with the family car, and out ran them, we stopped several miles away, to find some vidphones. to call for help.”
“You see, are still teenager. We are seventeen. And we lived with our parents. Whom were not at home, when those girls showed up. We were told they would be back Monday. Normally that is not a problem. They have left a few times like that before with nothing happening.”
Stan thought, 'I will neglect to tell them where our parents were. And what they were doing. It is to embarrassing for my family. And it would tip them off to our genetic oddities. And a lot of the stuff after the escape is not important, or should remain secret, for our sake.'
Stan continued, “Everyone we called was either unreachable, or they could not get to us in time to be of help. So, Lewis here has a suggestion.”
Lewis said, “I admit that, in hindsight, it was a mistake.”
Stan turned to Lewis, as he said, “I know Lewis.” He turned to the crew of Moya, as he continued, “Lewis, here, suggested we seek help from his tutor, our high school physics teacher. A hot, young, fair skinned, white haired babe of a woman.”
John thought, 'I can guess what is coming next.'
Stan stated, “When we returned to her, at the high school that night, everything seem alright. Then, Lewis mentions we had completed the mathematical formula we were working on. Next thing we know, we were knocked out. When we came too, we were captured, on an alien spaceship, which soon docked with a large ship.”
“Given the there are no known aliens in our reality, that we know of. And we have colonized the Sol System. And also taking into account the nature of the formula we are working on. We realized we were in another reality. We were soon lead to person in charge, whom turn out that our hot teacher was Scorpius.”
The crew of Moya, even the little human boy, snickered at Stan's commented.
Dargo stated, in Luxan, “Since these two have been through so much already, it might not be wise to bruise their egos by telling them that Scorpius use to be a man.”
Aeryn replied, in Sebacean, “Agreed.”
Chiana said, in her native language of Nebari, “Though, they will likely find out eventually. But, not from us.”
Stan thought, 'I got a feeling there is a joke here that we are not being allowed to know.”
John asked, “This formula you keep mentioning. What is this formula about?”
Lewis inquired, “Do you know about the hyperspace gates in Cowboy Bebop?”
John answered, “Yes. I have seen the Cowboy Bebop series.” He thought, 'It is one of the series that I got the chance to watch, when I ran with Rock, Annie, and the others.'
Lewis questioned, “So, you know about the hyperspace gate system?”
John replied, “Yes. I guess you are both from that Cowboy Bebop reality?”
Lewis stated, “Correct. We are from that reality. Though, we have not seen that series. But, we have heard of that series.”
John inquired, “So, what about the gate system?”
Lewis said, “Whether you realize this, or not. The hyperspace gate system of our home reality, are completely man-made. Everything from the mathematical formulas, to their construction, was done by human hands.”
John commented, “Now, that I think about it. Yes. They are man-made. And I don't like where this is going.”
Stan stated, “That is not surprising. Though, do you know about the gate explosion?”
John said, “Yes. It drove humanity from Earth.”
Lewis explained, “Correct. Well, because everything, dealing with our gate system, was man-made, our professor believed that the hyperspace gate technology could be adapted for a hyperspace gate system across the multiverse.”
“A few years ago. For us. After she look into this possibility, she found us. Two, impressionable young, teenage boys, whom happened to the sane geniuses. And as Stan said, around a day ago, we cracked that formula. And solved the equations. And Scorpius wants that completely formula.”
Stan stated, “The reason we ran was that we are worried our math isn't exactly right, and we could cause another gate explosion, only this time. The explosion will be across the multiverse.”
Aeryn inquired, “How bad of an explosion are we talking about?”
John turned to Aeryn, as he asked, “Aeryn, do you remember that black hole I created, which I threatened to use, to destroy all creation in this reality with, to protect you and Little D?”
Aeryn answered, “Yes. I found it flattering for you to do that.”
Stan and Lewis gulped.
Lewis thought, with worry, 'This man was able to create a black hole. That is both amazing and scary. He also must have figured out how to disperse it, and done so, considering they are all still alive, and here.'
Stan thought, with concern, 'Okay. We may have the right guy to help. But, my instincts are starting to tell me that John and his friends are the type of people that we might not want help from.'
John stated, “A multiversal explosion would be a whole lot worse.”
The boys could see the other adults in the room, and alien on the screen, look horrified.
John looked at his family and friends, as he quickly said, “Though, just so you know. The main trait Scorpius has, in almost everything she does, is that she is very thorough. If she had that formula. Before she did anything else. The first thing she would do, she would check the math over, to make sure it is correct. Still, I don't like the idea of her having that formula.”
Dargo asked, in Luxan, “What could Scorpius do with it? Why would he.. Err she want it? Would would be the practical use for it, for her?”
Since the brothers didn't understand him, they just stared at him with confused looks on their faces.
Chiana turned to Dargo, as she said, in english, “You forgot that that these boys don't have translator microbes.” She turned to the brothers. She stated, “Dargo, asked why would, Scorpius, want this technology? What is the practical use for it.”
Stan stated, “To create a multiversal, hyperspace gate system, for the Peacekeepers to travel through. Though, she said it was for trade, and commerce. Given she said she realized how dangerous the rest of the multiverse is.”
John said, “Yea. Scorpius is never one to be stupid. She would be careful on such matters.”
Aeryn commented, “Even so. Scorpius would still have to get approval, from Peacekeeper high command, before launching such a project.”
Lewis questioned, “I guess you didn't hear?”
Chiana asked, “Hear what?”
Stan shrugged, as he replied, “Scorpius is now in charge of the Peacekeepers.”
John stated, “Oh frell, no.”
Aeryn cursed, “Dren.”
Chiana giggled.
Pilot remained silent.
Dargo commented, “This day is just getting worse by the minute.”
Aeryn thought for over Stan's comment, for a few seconds. She then said, “Wait a minute. Scorpius is a hybrid. A hybrid would never be allowed to rule the Peacekeepers. The purity regulations would never allow it.”
Stan stated, “From what I understand. Scorpius mentioned someone named Chang made her a pure Sebacean.”
Aeryn said, “In that case, it would be possible. And I guess you are screwed.”
John asked, “How long as has Scorpy been in charge of the peacekeepers?”
Lewis answered, “From what we understand. Years.”
Dargo said, in Luxan, “So, that is what she has been up to.”
Chiana commented, “Look on the bright side. At least she has left us alone all this time.”
Aeryn said, “True. I guess she finally learned her lesson of leaving us alone.”
John requested, “Okay boys. Tell us the rest, before I lose my nerve to hear it.”
Stan stated, “I know the feeling. Anyway, for the reasons of checking the math, we refused our professor's order of handing over the completely formula. Which, even she directly admitted we had point. Though, she did not torture us. She just stuck in the brig to. She even said, cool your heels.”
John interrupted them, “She actually said the term, cool your heels?”
Lewis answered, “She actually did say that.”
Stan asked, “Yes, she did. Why do you ask?”
Aeryn inquired, “What is it, John?”
John stated, “My worst nightmare. Scorpy has become pop-culture genre savvy... Given she has lived among humans. I am not surprised. But, it does mean she likely now gets most, if not all, of my jokes. And she knows my bag of crazy tricks.”
Chiana inquired, “You mean, Scorpius now understands your insanity?”
John answered, “Yes.”
Chiana said, “We are screwed if we fight her.”
Aeryn looked over at Stan, as she requested, in english, “Please continue, before we think to deeply on this subject.”
Stan thought, 'I can tell from their reactions, this is bad. But, Aeryn is right. I better continue.' He stated, “After we went to the brig, we got to talking. And someone in the next cell realized we were speaking english. It turned out to be Annie. And she knew us.”
John inquired, “Annie knows you?”
Stan responded, “Yes. From our parents. But, we have no clue who she is. Do you?”
John stated, “Yes. But, I don't think you would believe me?”
Lewis requested, “Try us.”
John refused to do so, as he replied, “Not my secret to give. By the way, who are your parents?”
Stan answered, “Ed and Bob Lowe.”
John said, “I have never heard of them.”
Stan mentioned, “Well, anyway. Ed is a woman. And yes, she was born a girl. She just likes to go by, Ed. She is a little crazy.”
John stated, “I am not one to talk.”
Aeryn snorted.
Stan stated, “Anyway, Annie was looking into what Scorpius was up to, as well. And she got captured. Or, she let herself be capture. I am not sure which. Once Annie learned that Scorpius was interested in us, she helped us escape. She used her weapon. A cylindrical hilt that created a red energy blade that looked like a lightsaber...”
John interrupted, “It is a lightsaber.”
Stan responded, “Really? Well, she used her lightsaber, and I guess her force powers, to cut her way to a nearby shuttle bay. So, we could escape from the ship, and use her reality device.”
John asked, “Why didn't you just use the device there?”
Stan answered, “We asked, Annie, that same question. It seems our teacher has a protective bubble that prevents unauthorized reality travel on her commander ship. I don't know if that applies to the rest of the fleet.”
John said, “That makes sense. And I would not put anything past old Scorpy. She probably has her entry entire fleet rigged with such reality protection screens. Boys, the one thing about Scorpy you need to know, besides her always have several escape plans, is that she is also crazy prepared in a way that even Batman would be envious of.”
Stan said, “I will take your word on that. Continuing on. Annie got us onto a shuttle, and gave us her reality device. She did not tell us how to work on of the device. She assumed that we knew how it work. Which we did not.”
John commented, “I can see that being a problem. Do you want me to explain how to work these devices? They are real simple, once you figure out how to do so.”
Stan answered, “We already figured it out on our own. Though, half the trouble we have been in was because we have no clue as to what the hell is going on most of the time.”
John shrugged, “Been there. Done that. Not fun. But, once you get the rules down, you will find yourself rocking to the beat.”
Stan replied, “Glad to hear it. Anyway, Annie had to leave the shuttle, to open the doors to the outside. A few minutes later, she did. We flew our shuttle out into space, and we escaped. But, Annie was left behind.”
John stated, “Knowing both Scorpy and Annie, I bet Scorpy knows whom Annie is and she just gave Annie a reality device just to get her to leave.”
Stan agreed, “We think that is the case, considering we met some violent teenage girls. A different set from the ones we met at our home. Whom had met Annie after we did. And they informed us that she told them what is going on, concerning us. They also claimed to be the children of pirates.”
John inquired, “How crazy were these teenager girls?”
Stan guessed, “You have met them?”
John answered, “No. But, I likely have met their parents.”
Stan shrugged, as he responded, “That figures. Anyway, after we flew our ship out of the protective bubble, we reality jumped. The next thing we know, we found ourselves on a tropical area, on an alternate Earth, surrounded by pretty women in bikinis, and girls in one piece swimsuits. No men, and no boys. And no. We are not that horny. And they were not happy to see us.”
John commented, “That sounds bad.”
Lewis mentioned, “Yes. And we think they may know us through our parents.”
John replied, “That is even worse.”
Stan stated, “We agree. We immediately jumped up, and ran for the only structure we can see, a large home. We got inside, and locked the doors behind us, before they could get to us. We were able to reality jump before they could get to us. Since then, it has been a day long chase across the multiverse, with us one step ahead of everyone else.”
Lewis reminded his brother, “Don't forget about that green haired woman said that Scorpius put a major multiverse wide bounty on our heads.”
John commented, “And I thought I was frelled when Scorpius had her sights set on me”
Lewis responded, “The good news is that from what we understand, the bounty states that we cannot be serious harmed, nor killed. And though our professor would settle for one of us. We are informed she had included a bonus for the bounty, if both of us were taken back to Scorpius, together.”
John said, “I guess Scorpy learned her lessons with us, and she is playing nice with you.”
Stan agreed, “Yea. I guess you could say from what we know of her. She is prefers to use the carrot more often than the stick.”
Aeryn pointed out, “That was not the case when we knew her. But, I guess she has used her new abilities to her advantages.”
Chiana commented, in english, “A calmer, nicer Scorpius. Whom is just as manipulative as before. If not more so. That is a scary thought.”
John said, “At least she knows better than to try anything with me.”
Aeryn agreed, “True.”
Lewis requested, “So, will you help us?”
Everyone was quiet for a few seconds, before John stated, “Well Scorpy has taken her wormhole fetish to a whole new level.”
Stan thought, 'So, this is not the first time our teacher has been studying such subjects. That is not surprising.' He responded, “It would seem so. She wants our multiversal hyperspace gate formula. And we don't want to give it to her, because we are not sure the math is right. And if it isn't, it could wreck part of the multiverse.”
John questioned, “I can appreciate that. I have been in a similar situation. And you have only seen a the first few episodes of our series?”
Lewis answered, “Yes. We didn't have time to get into it.”
John stated, “Well, I have not seen my own series. Neither have any of the rest of my crew. But, even I realize that you barely even know the basics, of this situation. It is clear that you boys have been working without a net this whole time.”
Stan said, “That is why we came to you, John. So, let's get the heart of the matter. What can you tell us about Scorpius?”
John answered, “Just enough to tell you that you two are screwed. A while back, I was hounded by Scorpius for years. I hate to tell you this, but the only way to get her off your back is to give her what she wants, and then show her why she doesn't want it. After I did that, she has left my family, my friends, and myself, alone.”
Stan said, with disappointment, “I was afraid you were going to say that. Can you give us any help?”
John looked over at his family and friends. He then turned back to the boys, as he said, in a sad tone of voice, “No. I am not about to start another fight with Scorpius. I have been there. And I got the scars to prove it. We all have. And I am not going to risk my own son, on something like happening again. I suggest you try to track down Annie. She, and her friends, can probably handle Scorpius, without my help.”
Stan stated, as he did a good job of hiding the disappointment in his voice, “Well, thank you for your advice, John. And it is a good to meet all of you. At least we have a direction now. Though, we have been trying to avoid Annie's friends. Long story on that one, by itself. But, I can see your point.”
Lewis commented, in a more openly disappointed tone of voice, “We will figure something out.”
John said, “Good luck.”
Little D peeked around Dargo, to look at the Lowe brothers. He commented, “Bye, bye.”
Lewis said, “Thanks.”
Stan stated, “Goodbye.”
The brothers walked away from the others, so they could safely reality jump, without the other being caught in the teleport.
As Stan took a few steps closer to his brother, he said, “I could use a beer, right now.”
Lewis pulled out the reality device, as he agreed, “Same here. And this is literally what I got in mind. An english speaking bar, during the early night, that will serve us beer.”
Stan replied, “Good.”
Lewis press the red button, and they disappeared, as they jumped realities.
After the brothers left the sight of the crew of Moya, John turned to the others in the room, as he commented, “You know. That went a lot better than I thought it would.”
Chiana stated, “I know. No shooting. No violence. Just a discussion. I wish all our meetings went that well.”
Little D walked out from behind Chiana, and Dargo. He walked over to stand by his parents. He looked over at the faces of his parents, as he said, in english, “Daddy, you did good.”
John looked down at his son, as he said, “I know, Little D.”
Dargo asked, “John, are you sure it is wise to not help them?”
John responded, “No. But, the alternative is scarier. I am not picking a fight with the Scorpius, if I can help it.”
Aeryn placed her right hand on her son's left shoulder. She said, “I agree with John.”
Chiana said, “I am with Aeryn and John on this one. I don't care what gender Scorpy currently is. He, or she, is still very dangerous. And we should avoid crossing her, at all costs.”
Dargo conceded, “Okay.”
John commented, “But if, later today, you feel like joining me in saying a pray for them, at dinner, you are more than happy too.”
Dargo cracked a smile, as he replied, “I just might.”
Aeryn commented, “With luck, we will never have to worry about them again.”
Pilot stated, on the small bridge monitor, “We have a ship nearby trying to contact us.”
Aeryn groaned, as she stated, “Spoke too soon.”
John asked, “Who is it?”
Pilot hesitantly said, “You are not going to like it.”
Aeryn inquired, “Pilot, who is it?”
Pilot deadpanned, “Annie, and three others. All of whom I guessing are looking for the two humans we just turned away.”
Everyone was shocked silent, as Little D stated, “Ah oh.”
Dargo commented, “And this is why we should not turn away strays.”
John stated, “Annie, and the others are going to be ticked off, when they find out that I had just turned away those boys. And because of my actions, they just missed them by seconds.”
Chiana said, “Yea. And if Annie is as tough as you said, John, I think we just frelled ourselves to the wall.”
Dargo asked, “John, I need to know. How angry can Annie get?”
John answered, “Well, before I knew Annie, in her old life, her rage use to be on par with Luxan hyper-rage.”
Dargo stated, “That is bad.”
Aeryn explained, “We didn't tell you what John told me. But, you remember that set of movies that John shows us, titled Star Wars.”
Dargo nodded, as he replied, “Yes.”
Chiana said, “Yea. Not a bad set of human movies.”
While smiling, Little D said, “Good movies.”
John commented, “Well, as you know that fiction reality situation I told you guys about.”
Dargo answered, “Yes. We just do not like to think about it.”
John continued, “Well, Annie was on of those individuals that was kidnapped and processed from a man to a woman. Though, she was rescued by Rock before she was impregnated.”
Dargo questioned, “I know I am going to regret asking, but who was Annie, before she was captured, and changed?”
John said, “Darth Vader, between episode three and episode four.”
Dargo turned to his lover, as he commented, “Chiana, you are right. We are frelled to the wall.”
Aeryn looked at John, as she sternly said, “You didn't mention this the last time Annie came on board, with those other people.”
John replied, “I didn't want to start a firefight in the middle of our planning, and preparations on rescuing, Dargo, here.”
Aeryn shrugged, as she conceded, “Point taken.”
John said, “Anyway, I am leaving you my reality device. It is in our lock weapons locker, to keep Little D from getting it. If something happens, you can escape with Little D.”
Aeryn replied, “Thank you. I will keep that in mind.”
Chiana looked over at the others, as she commented, “Hey. Lighten up everyone. We have been in worse situations. For example, when we faced, Maldis.”
Dargo pointed out, “Yes. But, we don't have Zhaan to help us now.”
John stated, “Even with Zhaan, I am not sure we could take Annie in a fight. Sure, Maldis was more powerful, but I know Annie. She can be vicious in battle. And if what the boys said is true, she is more powerful in the force than ever. The only good news is that she had mellowed a lot since she was turned into a woman. I guess no longer being trapped in the black suit, and being half a person, has given her a much more sunnier disposition.”
Aeryn commented, “That is good. Still, that just means when she does get pissed off as easy, as she use too.”
John replied, “Exactly.”
Chiana suggested, “Can we lie to them?”
John stated, “No. Annie is an empath. She is going to know that something is off the moment she is on board Moya.”
Aeryn said, “Then, tell them the truth when they come on board.”
John commented, “That might not be wise either. Like I said. Annie has a temper. Tell her in person, and she might just kill us in person.”
Aeryn countered, “Okay. We just talk to them through the communications.”
John stated, “That won't work, either. Remember those movies. Annie invented the concept of force choking. She could just use telekinesis, across the communications to choke to death the person she is talking to you.”
Pilot suggested, “What about starburst?”
John pointed out, “They have a reality device. They will teleport to where we are before we get there. Hell, they are just being polite to use a ship to talk to us, instead immediately coming aboard, like the boys just did. Annie knows we have itchy trigger fingers. She also knows she can take us all on in a fight. If we run, they will just teleport aboard, and Annie will be very upset.”
Dargo commented, “I miss the time when starburst could have solve all our immediately problems.”
Aeryn stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, “John, you are not giving us any options.”
John halfheartedly stated, “Well, I personally know, Annie. I will talk to her, and her friends. Annie, likely won't immediately kill me. She is not that merciful anymore.”
Dargo commented, “At least we got a good ten years of peace before the dren finally caught up with us.”
Aeryn said, “True.”
John looked at the others, as he ordered, “Everyone leave. Annie cannot force chock what she cannot see. And Aeryn, hide Little D.”
Aeryn nodded, as she took their son to their personal quarters.
Dargo said, “I will be my Pilot, monitoring the communications. We will cut communications at the first sign of trouble.”
Chinana commented, “I will be right outside the bridge, out of sight. In case you are choked. I will be ready to revive you.”
John complimented, “Good thinking on all your parts.”
John's friends then turned, and headed to their planned locations, while John turned to the main viewscreen on the front wall of the bridge.
When the large viewscreen in the front wall of the room came on, and John saw that the cabin that Annie and the other three were in, was small. Like a four passenger minivan of a spaceship. Though, there was an alias in the middle of the ship, leading to the back.
There was also plenty of light, from the ceiling lights in the cabin, for those in it to see around them, and for John to clearly see the four individuals, from the camera at the front of the cabin of the ship.
John thought, 'I guess that makes sense. If human's colonized the Sol System, and were still much like the people of my time, they would have spaceships, like we have cars and other vehicles on Earth. And the cabins would be designed in similar ways.'
'Though, I don't even want to think about where the toilet is on one of those things... It is not like you can get out, and take a piss on the side of the road, in a spaceship, going through space. I guess there is a restroom in the back of the ship, for such matters. That is what they do on passenger buses.'
In the picture, John saw two women up front. The left front seat of the spaceship was the pilot's seat.
Annie sat in the pilot's seat, on the left side of the ship. She was wearing casual clothing over her open Jedi robes.
John thought, 'I guess she finally decided to go back to what works for her.'
In the front row, at the cockpit, on the left seat, sat Annie. To Annie's right, in the co-pilot seat, was a tanned skin redhead woman in her late-twenties.
The tanned skinned woman was wearing casual clothing.
Behind the tanned skinned woman, in the second row, was a white haired, fair skinned man in his early sixties, whom wore casual clothing, with an open long brown coat.
Beside the fair skinned man, to his left side, and in the seat right behind Annie, was a young woman with fair skin, and dark blue hair that went to her shoulder blades. The dark blue haired woman was wearing casual clothing.
John thought, 'That woman behind Annie is cute. But, when I look at her, I wonder why I get the feeling as if someone was walking over my grave?'
(_)
Meanwhile, in the cabin of the small four seat spaceship, that was slowly coming closer towards Moya, in a casual manner.
Annie, being the best pilot, was piloting the ship.
Ed was up front, with Annie, because she was also a pilot. Though, Bob did know how to pilot the ship, the couple agreed that Ed was the better pilot, and that if something happened to Annie, Ed would be the better choice for being the co-pilot.
Bob was in back, behind his wife, with Violin beside him, to Bob's left side.
There was widescreen computer monitor in the middle of the dashboard, in front of the cockpit, directly in front of the open aisle, allowing everyone in the spaceship could see the video screen. There were speakers located in the sides of the ship, like it in a car, and there was a microphone and camera located at the top, front, middle of the cockpit, on the ceiling, above the front window. This allowed everyone in the spaceship to be seen and heard on the communications channel, when the vidphone, or radio, was in use.
The narrow walkway between the front and back seats, lead to some rooms in the back of the ship, including the restroom.
All four adults looked at the monitor, as Annie greeted, “Hi John. Long time, no see.”
Over the communications channel, John said, “Well, we don't get mail service this far out. It is good to see you, Annie.”
Annie stated, “I am glad to hear that. But, I sense a lot of fear coming from you, toward me. John, what did you do? I haven't sense this much fear from you, sense that time in San Francisco, during that one month break, while Rock was sleeping in the vat. When we had a poetry contest one night, in that mansion's garage. And your poem was titled, Annie get your lightsaber.”
Ed, Bob, and Violin, did their best not to laugh, at Annie's comment.
John defended, “I still say it was funny.”
Annie agreed, “It was funny. That is why didn't kill you.”
John commented, “I am still surprised that Megatron won that contest.”
Ed, Bob and Violin did not say anything, but Ed turned around, as all three of the just looked at each other with surprised.
Bob whispered, “We know so little about these people.”
Ed quietly said, “To say the least.”
Violin softly replied, “You got that right.”
Ed turned back to look at Annie, with the three adults turned their attention back to watching John on the screen.
Annie said, “Well, Megatron definitely has many hidden talents.”
John asked, “True. So, how is chromedome doing?”
Annie answered, “Fine. Last time I checked.”
John inquired, “So, you did visit him?”
Annie stated, “Yea. But, only after I regained my force powers. Megatron was happy to see me. Thought, there was some minor problems with his subordinates, considering I was an organic. During those troubling times, I displayed aggressive diplomacy. I even found out it is possible to force choke a cybertronian spark casing. Still, I did not kill any of them. Yet, I did have to force choke one of Megatron's more annoying subordinates. I believe his name was, Starscream.”
John replied, “I won't worry about that. Given who Starscream is, Megatron might have even complimented you for finding a new way to bring Starscream to heel.”
Annie cracked a grin, as she said, “Actually, Megatron did just that. And after I established my dominance with my force powers, over his subordinates, I had no problems visiting Megatron. I guess it scared them that I could kill them with a thought.”
“Meanwhile, Megatron, just found it amusing. Though, I did have to take an environmental suit sometimes to do so. Besides, I had to get Josephine, and the other grenade launcher, back for Fabiola. And Megatron was more than happy to return them.”
John asked, “Interesting. And are the others doing fine?”
Annie said, “Yes. I will tell you about them, later. So, back to the question at hand. What did you do, John?”
John let out a deep breath. He then stated, “Well, Annie. I will be honest with you. I just frelled up real badly. I know who you are looking for. Stan and Lewis were just here. And we turned them away.”
Bob yelled, “You what?!”
John asked, “Who is that?”
Bob stated, “Bob Lowe, Stan and Lewis' father.”
John said, “Well Bob, I don't mean to sound cold, but you just missed your boys by less than a minute.”
Bob thought, 'It is so tempting to ask Annie to force choke him a little. But, it will get us nowhere. And leave us without any of the answers we need.”
Ed demanded, “What did you do?”
John inquired, “Who are you?”
Ed answered, “Ed Lowe, their mother.”
John said, “Nice to meet you, Ed. You won't happen be related to the Ed, from the Cowboy Bebop anime series? I have seen that series, and from what I understand, the boys are from that reality.”
Ed glared at John, with rage in her eyes, as she stated, “That was me. When I was younger.”
John stated, with a bit of fear in his voice, “You have definitely aged gracefully,”
Ed flatly replied, “Thank you. Now, answer my question.”
John answered, “They came to us for help, and we turned them away.”
Bob stated, with venom lacing his voice, “So, you refused to help our boys.”
It was not a question.
John replied, “Yes. You need to understand our situation. We didn't want to pick a fight with Scorpius. We have been through so much hell with Scorpy, that Aeryn and I refuse to risk our son being put in danger.”
Bob coldly responded, “Oh. We understand your situation perfectly. We are just not happy in the way you handled it. And our sons are just as important to us, as your son is to you.”
Annie stated, “Trust me on this, John. When I say that the two older traveling companions with me have likely had just as much an interesting a life as you, and your friends, have had on Moya. They have even been chased across the multiverse for a number of years, by lunatics, until they got the lunatics off their backs.”
John said, “I will take your word on that, Annie.”
Ed stated, “We are coming aboard.”
It was not a request.
Violin whisper in the back seat, to Bob, “Can I speak?”
Bob whispered back, in a cold tone of voice, “No.”
Annie stated, “Everyone calm down. I can sense the hostility. And while it is justified, I can state from personal experience that John can be an idiot. Though, he was also an idiot in his series. Which we have all seen. And the rest of Moya's crew have had their moments, as well.”
Annie thought, with mild disbelief, “Given my past. I find it hard to believe that I have become the voice of reason. But, then I guess it is all relative.'
John gulped at the thought of those four knowing that much about him.
Violin thought, 'Vader playing peacemaker. Now, that is a scary thought.'
Ed stated, “You are correct.”
Wanting to get the conversation moving again, John stated, “I will have Pilot give you docking instructions for one of Moya's shuttle bays.”
Ed stated, in a flat, neutral voice, “That will be fine. Also, inform the DRDs not to inject any of us with translator microbes.”
John stated, “I will inform Pilot. Also, your boys also requested the same thing. Though they did not say why.”
Bob leaned up in his chair, so he could whisper into his wife's ear, “It is a safe bet that the boys know about my little ability, with them knowing they have the same latent ability.”
Ed softly replied, “Yea. We are going to catch hell from them over keeping that secret.”
Bob quietly replied, “Like you said, we will deal with that, later. We have to find the boys, first.” He then leaned back into his seat.
John said, “Like I said, Annie. I frelled up. But, please don't kill us for my stupidity. I take fully responsibility for this mess.”
Annie smirked, as she casually answered, “Oh. I won't kill any of you. I am not that nice anymore. On that matter. I have in mind a bit of revenge for all the teasing you gave me, when we were in Rock's group. For all those Star Wars jokes, you cracked in front of me. Many of them at my expense.”
John hesitantly asked, “What are you going to do to me?”
Annie continued smiling wickedly, as she stated, “Nothing. Except bringing aboard your greatest fangirl, to personally meet you, your family, and your friends. I cannot think of a more poetic revenge against you.”
John deadpanned, “And people thought you were evil when you were still in the black suit.”
Annie laughed for a few seconds. She then suddenly stopped laughing, as she warned, in a dead serious tone of voice, “And I expect her not to be harmed.”
John responded, “She won't.”
Violin looked at the camera. She waved, as she spoke up, in a cheerful, excited tone voice, “Hi John. I am Violin. I am looking forward to meeting you.”
(_)
On board the bridge of Moya, John look at the screen, at Violin, as he thought, 'Barring a few exceptions. Such as getting candy, liquor, and the occasional chilli dog. This is why I don't travel out of my reality. I don't want to deal with my fans. I have been on the other side of the fandom. It is fun to be a Trekkie, but not fun to be the actors that Trekkies are crazy about.'
'And while fanboys can be annoying. As one, I can state that. Fangirls are even scarier, and more annoying. This is the perfect revenge by Annie. She knows I cannot shoot the girl. My sense of the power of the fandom will not allow me to see a fellow fan be harmed, just because they are being an annoying fan. Even if I, my family, and friends, are her obsession. And so, I will have to put up with this girl during their visit.'
John stated, “It is nice to meet you, Violin. I look forward to talking to all of you, in person, in a few minutes. John out.”
(_)
On board the Lowe family spaceship, the communications switched to Pilot. With the screen shooing Pilot.
Pilot stated in english, “Hello Annie. Nice to see you again.”
Annie genuinely smiled, as she said, “It is nice to see you again as well, Pilot. I must say that the feelings of harmony I am sensing from Moya, even from here, is stronger than last time.”
Pilot happily commented, “That is because that last few years have been very kind for us. So, do you wish for me to deploy the docking web, or do you want me to just give you instructions, so you can fly into the shuttle bay, that I am already preparing for you.”
Annie stated, “I would prefer to fly us in.”
Pilot replied, “No problem.”
Pilot then gave Annie instructions in flying the Lowe family spaceship into one of Moya's shuttle bay.
A minute later, Pilot finished giving Annie the landing instructions.
Bob stated, out loud, “Of my five and a half decades of traveling the multiverse, this is the first time my manners have come to bite me in the ass. ”
Annie commented, “There is a first time for everything.”
Bob went onto say, “Forget manners and diplomacy. We should have not brought our ship, and instead, just teleported over, into Moya. If we had, we would have had the boys by now.”
Annie smiled, as she said, “But Bob, your manners are one of the things we like most about you. That, and when you change into a woman, you look great in a bikini.”
The three women in the ship giggled, for a few seconds.
Bob responded, “I am still upset with them.”
As the women calmed down, Ed said, “Same here. But what is done, is done. At least we are are right behind them, and on their trail.”
Violin defended the crew of Moya, “Let us be honest. I can fully understand why they would not want to tangle with Scorpius, he... err she now, is one of the ten top most dangerous magnificent bitches in the multiverse. Nobody would want to mess with her.”
Annie mentioned, “I am in the top ten list, as well. Or was. And it is clear, from earlier battle with the Peacekeepers, that Scorpius knows better than to mess with me. Still, we are about to get the help of an expert in reality travel, wormholes, and Scorpius, herself.”
Bob pointed out, “That is if he helps us. He literally just turned our boys away.”
Annie stated, “Don't worry, John and I go way back. He owes me a favor.”
Bob joked, “Like Lando Calrissian owed Han Solo that favor on in Empire Strikes back? We all know how that little incident ended.”
Annie continued looking forward, as she deadpanned, “That is your one Star Wars joke limit with me. Enjoy it.”
Violin commented, “Let me guess. It was not just John, but you're old crew, as a whole, ribbed you constantly with Star Wars jokes.”
Annie responded, “Yes. Though, John was the worst. And they do so, insistently. At the time, I lacked the power in the force to move things and choke them. I believed that saved their lives.”
Bob stated, “I have a general idea of your crew. John, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru I can understand. Those four are insane. Fabiola, and Megatron I am not sure. But, I would think that Rock would know better.”
Annie stated, “Well, Rock was dying for must of the time I knew him on that adventure. So, I made allowances with him. Then, he became a woman, like me. You three never got the full story on that adventure?”
Ed answered, “No.”
Violin replied, “Nope.”
Bob requested, “We would love to hear it.”
Annie smirked, “I will tell it to you some time during this trip. Now, let's go meet the crew of Moya, in person.”
Annie then piloted the Lowe spaceship closer towards one of Moya's shuttle entrances.
(_)
At the moment, on the bridge of Moya, John let out a sigh of relief.
John then turned towards the bridge exit, as he stated in the ships communications system, “Okay guys. Good news. Annie is not going kill us. But, she and three other people are coming aboard for a little while. I want all of us there to greet them. And in peaceful way... Aeryn bring Little D along, as well.”
Through the communications speakers, Aeryn asked, “Are you sure John?”
John answered, “Yes. And having our son there will help prevent any hostilities. It will become clear why in a minute. Pilot, what shuttle bay are they going to?”
Pilot said, “Shuttle bay seven.”
John stated, “You heard the man. I will brief you on the way. I got some bad news. And some worse news.”
As John left the bridge, Chiana was standing outside the door. As John walked by her, she walked with him, to his right side.
While the walked, Chiana asked, “What the is bad news?”
John answered, “Along with Annie, Bob and Ed Lowe are on that ship. We are going to have to talk to Lewis and Stan's parents, about how we frelled up.”
Through the communications, Dargo commented, “That is bad. So, what is the worse news?”
John said, “The fourth person coming is a young, dark blue haired woman, whom Annie stated was a fangirl of mine. Her name is, Violin.”
Chiana inquired, “How could that be bad?”
John stated, “Okay. I guess I never explained this to you. My pop-culture genre savvy, that has saved our asses several times, comes form being a fanboy of human entertainment. This is the heart of my insanity. This girl has the same insanity. That is why she is a fangirl. Fangirls, like fanboys, are legion on Earth. The only difference is that fangirls can get away with a lot more insanity than fanboys. And she is a fangirl of our little series.
Aeryn asked, “How big a fan?”
John answered, “Annie stated, my biggest fan. She would likely try to mount me, if I wasn't married.”
Aeryn pointed out, “If she tried, she will become a very dead fangirl.”
John carefully said, “Annie warned us, not to harm her. Though, I doubt Violin will go to that extreme. But, be aware that while she is here, she will likely act like a young woman on a drug high. Because coming here is a dream come true.”
Dargo stated, “I honestly do not see the appeal we would have for others to learn about us.”
John responded, “Don't worry about it. If you did see the appeal, you would likely go insane from the paradoxical points of view... Like me... Heheheh... Anyway, she will likely know a lot of embarrassing things about us. The type of stuff that we might otherwise keep someone for knowing.”
Chiana thought, 'Oh frell. She likely knows that I took John's virginity in the past. I knew that was going to come back to haunt someday. But, it was still worth it.'
Dargo asked, “How embarrassing?”
John cryptically said, “Lava planet. Noranti. What she did after she drugged those two pirates. What we saw of her, after that.”
Dargo responded, “To this day, I still have nightmares from seeing her like that. I mean, of everything we have been through, that was likely one of the top five worst moments of my life.”
John replied, “You and me both, buddy.”
Aeryn inquired, “Back to the matter at hand. Talking to Annie, Ed, and Bob, will not be too difficult. But, how do we handled Violin?”
John stated, “She just admires us. If we down play her energy towards us, while still being polite, things should be fine.”
Aeryn said, “Sounds good to me.”
Chiana requested, “I would like to talk to this woman.”
John replied, “Well, you will get the opportunity to do so in a few minutes.”
(_)
A few minutes later, the crew of Moya was standing at the entrance to shuttle bay seven, beside each other, as they watched the Lowe family spaceship gently land fifty feet from them.
Aeryn and John standing next to each other, with Aeryn to John's right side. Their son standing right in front of them.
Dargo and Chiana stood beside Aeryn, with Chiana to Aeryn's right side, and Dargo to Chiana's right side.
The crew of Moya had their weapons holstered, or in Dargo's case, with his qualta blade, sheathed in his scabbard, which was strapped to his back.
Meanwhile, the red, white, and blue, painted DRD, 1812, rerolled to be right beside John's feet, to the left side of John's feet.
A minute later, the ship's engines had shutdown, and the hatch, on the bottom back of the ship, lowered to the ground. The crew of the small ship started to depart from the open hatch, and walk onto the deck of the shuttle bay.
Annie was the first to exit the ship.
Annie looked around, as she smiled. She thought, 'It is nice to come back here. I should have visited Moya and her crew sooner. But, I first wanted to see what the multiverse had to offer.'
Ed and Bob were next to walk onto the deck of the shuttle bay.
As the couple looked around, Ed whispered into her husband's ear, “Even given the circumstances, it is kind of cool coming here.”
Bob replied, “True.”
As Violin got out, she overheard the couple. When her feet touched the deck of the shuttle bay, she stated, “It is not cool. It is awesome!”
Violin then went into pure, full blown, fangirl mode, as she squealed, “EEEEEEEEEEEE! I am actually standing on a landing deck in Moya!”
Violin started running around.
When Violin saw a regular DRD scoot by, she picked it up, as she said, in delight, “This is a DRD! I cannot believe I am holding and actual DRD!”
Suddenly, a small arm popped out of a panel, on the DRD, and the DRD used the arm to lightly shocked Violin, forcing her to let it go.
The DRD landed on its bottom, and quickly scooted away from Violin.
Violin yelped, “Ouch. But, who cares?” As she continued running around.
Bob and Ed saw this.
Bob commented, “Honey I am so happy we had boys.”
Ed nodded, as she replied, “I agree.”
While the crew of Moya also watched this insanity unfold, John commented, “Somebody needs to cut down that girl's sugar intake.”
The rest of the crew just nodded in agreement.
A few seconds later, when Violin approached Aeryn, the former peacekeepers quickly drew her pulse pistol on the dark blue haired young woman.
Violin swiftly stopped. She took a couple of steps back, as she said, “Okay. Okay. Backing off now.”
Violin then ran around the crew of Moya, to John's right side, and she headed down a hallway, further into the ship.
Aeryn holstered her pulse pistol.
John then noticed Annie, Bob, and Ed, approaching him, and the rest of the crew, at a casual pace. With Ed in the middle, with Bob to her right side, and Annie to her left side.
John looked over at the three adults, as he stated, “I did not expect her to be that energetic.”
Bob responded, “Well, she is likely your biggest fan.”
Chiana suggested, “Have you tried sedating her?”
Ed responded, “That has been tried before. Unfortunately, she is half alien, and her body metabolized the tranquilizer too fast. Though, she should tire out, eventually.”
Aeryn asked, “What should we expect from her?”
Bob stated, “Imagine bringing the craziest star trek fan ever on board the USS Enterprise, of the original series, to meet Kirk, Spock, Bones, and Scotty.”
John understood what Bob was saying. He turned to Chiana, as he requested, “Pip, make sure she doesn't get herself killed. And remember, she cannot understand your native language. So, use english. I know you picked up my language almost as well as Aeryn. And Dargo is not that far behind either of you.”
John turned to Ed, Bob, and Annie, as he continued, “Though, Dargo still has trouble with pronouncing english words.”
John then looked back at Chiana.
Chiana turned to John, as she said, “Okay. Right away.” As she ran after Violin, she stated, in english “Come back here, Violin. There is so much I would like to talk to you about. Like how much you know about me.”
As Chiana disappeared down a hallway, Annie turned to the rest of the crew of Moya. She stated, “Alright. We need to get down to business. You screwed up. Now, it is time to fix it. But, this is not the place for such conversations.”
John suggested, “We can have our meeting in the dining room.”
Annie complimented, “Good idea.”
Dargo muttered, in Luxan, “I hope this is a better dining experience with you, Annie, than that time with those other people on Cloud City.”
Annie looked over at Dargo, and she frowned. She said, “Dargo. The force lets me understand you. Which is why I decline to have your translator microbes injected into me. Also, I have seen your series. You are all sitting pretty in your own glass houses.”
Dargo responded, “I understand. And I apologize. My comment was uncalled for.”
Annie cracked a smile, as she replied, “Apology accepted. The irony is, I will likely never live the events of those movies down. What you are commenting on never happened to me. That was episode five. I was kidnapped in the middle of the nearly two decade gap, between episodes three and episode four.”
Aeryn pulled her son closer to her, as she look at Annie in Annie's eyes. She inquired, in english, “So, the Jedi massacre, and those kids?...”
Annie noticed Aeryn's body language, as she turned to look at Aeryn. She replied, in a sober tone of voice, “Yea. That was all on me. I was a monster. Now, I am trying not to be. If it makes you feel better. While I don't regret the massacre of the adult Jedi.” She continued in a more sorrowful tone of voice, “I do regret murdering those children.”
Aeryn flatly commented, “It doesn't make me feel better. I consider you just as bad as Scorpius.”
Annie admitted, “I was. But, I did some real deep soul searching. That, along with seeing those six movies from the viewer's point of view. And learning what was done to me. What I did. And what I would have done. Made me realize that I needed to change. And I did.”
John turned to Aeryn, as he spoke up, “Aeryn, Annie is not the monster she once was. I will vouch for her on that.”
Ed stated, “She really isn't.”
Bob said, “Everything I know about her points to that fact she is a changed person. And not just physically. I am saying she is a much better person mentally, and spiritually.”
Annie had a weak smile on her lips, as she looked around, at her friends. She responded, “Thanks guys.”
Aeryn continued to hold her son close, as she conceded, “Alright. But, this is going to be an interesting meeting.”
Bob turned to crew of Moya, as he asked, “So, which way to the dining room?”
John stated, “This way.”
The crew of Moya turned around, and started heading down the hallway, that exited the shuttle bay, as they lead their guests to the dining room. With their three guest following right behind them.
(_)
Meanwhile, down a hallway, that was nowhere between shuttle bay seven, and the dining room, Chiana caught up with Violin, as she said, “Hold up a minute.”
Violin stopped running. And she was not even winded, as she turned around to face Chiana. She watched the gray skinned woman catch up with her.
As Chiana came to a stop, a few feet from Violin, she was not winded. She turned to Violin, as she said, “There is something I would like to speak with you about.”
Violin replied, “Sure. What is it?”
Chiana stated, “John said you were a fangirl of our reality. Also, you likely know some secrets about us. There is one secret about me that I would like you to keep secret from the others.”
Violin casually said, “The one where you all time traveled to Earth of your past, and you took the opportunity to take John's virginity, while he was a teenager.”
Chiana's jaw dropped, for a few seconds.
Violin could not help but giggle a little from Chiana's reaction.
Chiana quickly collected herself, as she stated, “Oh frell! It is all true! John is not crazy. We are creations of a human fiction, and imagination.”
Violin shrugged, as she mentioned, “Actually, John is crazy. Just not about this. Don't feel bad about it. My parents and step-dad were part of a sci-fi series, as well. I have even seen a copy of it. I found it interesting. Though, a bit tragic, to see my step-dad's darker side. But, he did have good reasons for his actions.”
Chiana said, “That is an intriguing point of view. But, what sick, human mind would create this reality?”
Violin answered, “Actually, it was a family entertainment company that mostly focused on children's shows, and puppetry. That is how you guys got Rigel, and a few other species and characters.”
Chiana replied, “I can believe that.”
Violin said, “I am glad you can. You're series broke new ground in the combinations of special effects and use of dark plots and characters.”
“Anyway, this company decided to get in touch with their inner dominatrix. And they created your series, Farscape. And though, it is a sci-fi series, with sadomasochism. It is not porn. And in the sci-fi genre, your series is a well respected by fans, for being daring, with very well thought out characters, plots, and ground breaking mix of special effects.”
Chiana commented, while still being in a slight state of shock, “That is nice.”
Violin promised, “Anyway, I will keep that a secret from the others. I can even understand why you would want that kept secret, as well. You care about your friends. And I respect that.”
Violin's comment brought Chiana back fully, as the gray skinned woman responded, “Thank you.”
Violin commented, “There is one thing that I have always wondered. It has bugged me since I can remember. Now Chiana, we all know you are a wonderful woman. But, you have probably slept with a number of different alien species.”
Chiana said, “That is no secret.”
Violin mentioned, “Anyway, there is another series, title Star Trek. In the original series, the man characters, Captain James T Kirk. It seems that he slept with a different alien babe, from a different alien species, every episode. That casual attitude got him in trouble in the last episode of the series. But, that is another matter. Anyway, he likely is up there with you, on the number of people from different species he has slept with.”
Chiana stated, “I will have to see that series some time.”
Violin said, “No problem. It is pretty good, though a bit date in the special effects and costumes. Maybe I will even introduce you to Kirk some day. When I plan to meet him, one day. I am just trying to figure out how to do it, without causing any problems for anyone. Still, if you are looking for a fling. I am sure I can help arrange something with him.”
Chiana swiftly stated, “No thanks. I am happy with Dargo. I already screwed up my relationship with him, once. I am not risking doing that again.”
Violin smiled, as she said, “I can completely understand.” Her lips then curled into a lecherous grin, as she continued, “And let me guess. It is his tongue that keeps you coming back for more?”
Chiana shrugged, as she casually replied, “That, and a few of his other body parts. But, he is also a great guy. I doubt you humans are so creative in bed.”
Violin giggled a little, as she stated, “You would be surprised. Also, I am not completely human.”
Chiana raised an eyebrow, as she responded, “You are not. Are you Sebacean?”
Violin flatly answered, “Nope. My father was human, but my mother was a bio-engineed alien super-soldier. I have my mother's super-strength, super-speed, super-stamina, her physical toughness, and intelligence. I can probably take on a dozen Scarrans in a fight, barehanded, and win.”
Chiana smiled, as she replied, “Interesting.”
Violin requested, “But, please keep that from Aeryn and Dargo. I know they can be a little bit trigger happy.”
Chiana said, “I will. You kept my secret. I will keep yours.”
Violin stated, “Agreed.” She then looked around, as she continued, “And Pilot, I know you are listening. That goes for you too.”
From a speaker, Pilot stated, “I will keep your secret, Violin. And yours, as well, Chiana.”
Chiana continued to look at Violin, as she commented, “You are really are our greatest fan.”
Violin turned to Chiana, as she joked, “Yep. Just be happy that I use my knowledge for the forces of good.”
Both woman giggled at Violin's joke.
As they stopped giggling, Violin stated, “Pilot, there is something I have been meaning to ask you.”
On the speakers, Pilot said, “Go ahead.”
Violin inquired, “When Moya, and the crew, visited the present of John's world, Earth. Pilot, did you have Moya communicate with the internet on Earth?”
Pilot answered, “Yes. The opportunity was too great to pass up. I had Moya fill a fifth of her data banks with information from the human's internet. Which was a surprising amount of information. Including, copies of the series of the original Star Trek series, which you to were discussing about. And it is an interesting series. And so are the sequels to that series.”
Chiana commented, “Neat. I will have to watch that series some time.”
Pilot stated, “You are more than happy to, Chiana. The reason we communicated with the internet was that we wanted to learn about humanity's culture, and language. And we did, in so many ways. Moya and I are now fluent in several human languages, not just english, but russian, japanese, chinese, and a number of others. And we now understand most of John's jokes.”
Chiana replied, “Still, why didn't you tell us?”
Pilot responded, in a sad tone of voice, “Because we delved to deeply into the madness that is the human imagination. We saw more than should be legal.”
Violin started laughing, for a few seconds.
Chiana asked, “What is so funny?”
Violin began to calm down, as she answered, “The one thing humans have more of on the internet, than anything else, is human pornography.”
Chiana immediately realized what Violin was hinting at, as she accused, with surprise in her tone of voice, “Pilot! You dirty pervert!”
Pilot pointed out, “You are one to talk, Chiana. Also, I respect your privacy, when you, or the others of the crew, are intimate with one another. And unlike you, I am rarely able to leave, and meet people.”
Chiana conceded, “Good point, Pilot. I will keep quiet on this. And everyone needs to find some way to blow off steam.”
Pilot responded, “Thank you, Chiana.”
Chiana looked over at Violin, as she smiled at the younger woman. She casually said, “Violin. you know what? I think this is going to be the start of a beautiful friendship.”
Violin returned Chiana's smile, as she replied, “I believe you are right.”
Chiana offered, “So, you want to see my and Dargo's personal quarters?”
Violin continued grinning, as she said, “Sure. Just lead the way.”
Chiana turned, and she started walking towards her quarters, as Violin followed right beside her, to Chiana's right side.
(_)
Ten minutes later, in the dining area of Moya. Near the kitchen.
On one right side of the large, oval table, John, Little D, Aeryn, and Dargo sat.
Bob, Ed, and Annie sat on the left side of the table.
Pilot was on a nearby viewscreen, though he was silently listening to their conversation.
The group had made it to the dining room five minutes ago. And after they sat down, they had since been talking about what to do next, considering the Lowe brothers.
Dargo commented, “I say, given your time dilation options, and the fact that Scorpius is right in this reality, right now. You should go after Scorpius. You can find your sons, later. I have been in a similar situation. They will be okay. And if you are lucky, you might find them, to where it has only been five minutes for them.”
Bob and Ed looked at Annie, the force user translated.
Ed said, “We would prefer to find our children, first. That way we know where all the cards are on the table, before we confront Scorpius.”
Dargo shrugged, in response to Ed's comment.
Bob commented, “Still, we can see your point, Dargo. And by the way, how is your son doing.”
Dargo just smiled towards Bob.
Bob replied, “I will take that as meaning, he is doing well.”
Dargo just nodded once, as an affirmative.
Aeryn spoke up, “I am with Dargo on this. I may not like you, Annie, but given your abilities. And the fact that Scorpius let you leave his Command Carrier, once already. I say, since Scorpius is the heart of the matter, that you personally confront her. She will likely stand down, if you are the one doing the talking.”
Annie stated, “Nice idea. But, she probably has more contingency plans in dealing with me than I can even begin to imagine. She likely has a reality device on her, that her protective field does not effect. If I came after her, she would immediately use such a device. While throwing everything in she had against me, keeping the anti-reality travel field up, and having a silent self-destruct device in the location where I was fighting.”
“Though, from what I have seen, Scorpius does care for her subordinates, which, when I was in her position, I admittedly did not. She would not blow up her entire ship to get to me. But, she would likely destroy a section of the ship to kill me.”
John agreed, “Yea. That is Scorpius to a, t. Also, the boys mentioned that they are now dealing with bounty hunters, but that Scorpy's bounty states the boys cannot be serious harmed, nor killed.”
Bob said, “That is nice to know.”
Annie caution, “But, that does mean we will likely run into them, and they may try to kill us.”
Bob countered, “Then, we kill them.”
Annie shrugged, as she replied, “I can go along with that.”
John said, “Stan also mentioned that there are also the crazy girls, and those elemental wielding people, whom are after him, and Lewis.”
Ed stated, “We know who the elemental wielding people are. We already talked to them.”
Bob inquired, “But, we don't know who the crazy girls are? Did you find out who that are?”
Aeryn admitted, “We did not inquire about them. Though, Stan mentioned the girls claimed to be descendants of pirates.”
Bob commented, “Well, that does exactly answer our question.”
Ed stated, “Yes. It is not hard to guess who the girls are. They have to be the five teenage Lagoon daughters.”
John smirked, as he commented, “So, they did have kids?” He mentally reflected, 'As I thought was the case.”
Ed said, “Yes. They did.”
John inquired, “Given they are all women, how did that work?”
Bob flatly stated, “You don't want to know.”
John responded, “I will take your advice on that. Still, why would those girls be after the boys?”
Ed thought, 'I don't know how much the boys told these people. But, I doubt they mentioned Bob is a gender bender, so I will be vague on my explanation.'
Ed explained, “Well, it was reported that when the boys teleported onto the island, the Lagoon family lived on, they literally fell right on top of them. Though, all of them are alright.”
Aeryn commented, “From what John has told me about these women, if these girls are like their mothers, that would do it, when it comes to having a reason to harm others.”
John replied, “Yep.”
Annie stated, “You are correct about that.”
Just then, Chiana and Violin walked into the room.
Chiana said, “Pilot told us where you were, and we would like to join in on the conversation.”
Dargo asked, in Luxan, “And where have you two been?”
Before Chiana could answered, Violin spoke up, “Your girlfriend took me to see your quarters. You have a nice set up in there.”
Everyone went silent for a few seconds.
Violin responded, “What did I say?”
Dargo inquired, “You can understand me?”
Violin answered, “Yes.”
Dargo pointed out, “But, I am speaking Luxan, and from what I understand, you do not have translator microbes injected into you.”
Violin shrugged, “My mother was an alien. And when my mother taught me languages, when I was younger. I seemed to have pick them up fast. I am really good at learning languages.”
Aeryn commented, “Interesting.”
Little D spoke up, “Cool, my mom is a Sebacean, and my father is human.”
Violin turned towards Little D, as she said, “Look's like we have something in common, kiddo.”
Little D commented, “Only my dad calls me, kiddo.”
John spoke up, “Well son, it is a common Earth term, where I come from.”
Chiana walked around to sit by Dargo, while Violin sat by Annie.
Annie thought, 'Given Violin's actions in the shuttle bay, I believe it is not wise for Violin to spend a lot of time, with these people, in close quarters. As such, we need to leave. But, I do have a request for John. I just have to wait for the right time, to make it. I even wonder if he still remembers that incident? I guess I am about to find out.'
Annie stated, “I think that is everything we can learn from you.”
Annie then stood up. A second later, Bob, Ed, and Violin also stood up. Though, Violin did frown towards Annie.
Annie turned to Violin, and she gave Violin a stern look, that forced Violin to back down.
Annie then turned to John, as she thought, 'Now, is the right time.' She casually said, “Oh... There is just one thing. John, you are coming with us.”
John turned to Annie, as he flatly asked, “What?”
Aeryn sternly stated, “I think not.”
Annie pointed out, “John, you know Scorpius the most. And you are one of the few people that can play at his level.”
John responded, in a sober tone of voice, “I hate to break to you, Annie. But, from what the boys tell me, since we both last saw Scorpius, she has educated herself in Earth pop-culture. She now knows my bag of tricks. I have no doubt she can outplay me, now.”
Annie conceded, “I admit, that could be a problem. But, you are still a wild card that is very useful in tight situations. You can come up with the most insane, yet workable plans imaginable. And to be honest, I like to have you aboard, because you are fun to be around.”
John stated, “I am still not coming with you. As I told the boys, I am not picking a fight with Scorpius. I am not putting my family and friends in danger, again. You know what Scorpius is capable of. And she is only more powerful now. Please, don't put us into the middle of this situation.”
Bob flatly said, “You put yourselves into this situation, when you turned away our children.”
Ed added, “Though, we will do our best to keep you all out of the line of fire.”
Aeryn said, “I appreciate your feelings for your lost children. But, as my husband pointed out, he is not coming with you. Besides, why should he go on a possibly suicidal mission?”
Annie answered, “Because John here owes me a favor. And I am now collecting on that favor.”
Aeryn looked over at John, as she said, in a dangerously cold tone of voice, “You owe Darth Vader a favor?”
John looked at his wife, as he replied, “Actually, I don't know what she is talking about.”
Annie stated, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “Yes, you do. Remember that deathmatch you suckered me into, with Shenhua, in the past, at Chang's Casino, in Roanapur. I told you that you would owe me for that. Now, I have come to collect.”
Bob thought, 'Annie can still be a scary person, when she wants to be.'
John turned to Annie, as he hesitantly said, “Well... Is it possible we could do this in trade.”
Annie stated, “The only trade I am interest in, from you, is your skills. Or, do you wish for me to call in this favor at an even later date, for an even more dangerous job?”
John thought, 'She will do it. And she knows, that I know, she will do it. When I first got sucked into wormhole, and wound up on Moya, I never thought I would end up owing Darth Vader a favor. Well, I owe Annie a favor. I always thought I would be smart enough to avoid owing a favor to someone, as dangerous as her. It shows what I know about my intelligence. And not that I think about. I do remember that fight. And right after that fight, Annie did say I owed her for winning that fight. Which allow me to win my bet with Chang, get my questions answered by Chang.'
John stated, “You're right. I owe you for that one. I will do it. I will come with you. But, be aware, if I family, or friends, come into harms way, I will turn on you in a New York minute.”
Annie nodded once, as she responded, “I can appreciate that. Just give me an hour's warning ahead of time, on your defection. And I won't force choke you, or otherwise maim, nor kill you.”
John stated, “You have yourself a deal.”
Aeryn said, “Alright, but I am coming with you.”
John and Annie turned to Aeryn, as John stated, “No.”
Annie commented, “I would prefer if you did not come with us.”
Aeryn forcefully stated, “I am going with you.”
Ed stated, “No. You are not. Like the Lagoon crew, you are too trigger happy. We are rescuing our sons. We do not want to put them at more risk than they already are.”
Aeryn growled, “Fine. But, if anything happens to John, I am going to kill an four of you.”
Annie and Bob remained calm, as Ed and Violin gulped.
Violin thought, 'Superpowers, or no superpowers, Aeryn is one of the few women I know of, whom could take me in a fight. She is right up there with my mother, Annie here, River, and the Bloodhound. I am so happy those four are on good terms with each other, because I don't think the multiverse could survive a fight between them.'
Bob calmly stated, “I believe you.”
Annie promised, “If something happens to John, I will take fully responsibility.”
Aeryn said, “I believe you, Annie.”
Violin spoke up, “Besides, I don't see the problem here. This is just a simple rescue mission. What could go wrong?”
After Violin's comment, everyone turned to look at her, as a person could hear a pin drop, due to the silence in the room.
Aeryn's jaw just dropped.
John just slapped right right palm onto the top of his forehead.
Little D just said, “Ah oh.”
From the monitor, Pilot said, “Oh dear.”
Dargo just shook his head.
Chiana said, “Frell.”
Bob walked to a nearby wall, and started lightly banging his head against it, in mild frustration.
Ed said, “I cannot believe you just actually said that.”
Annie yelled at Violin, “You idiot! You never say that! Even I know better than to jinx a mission like that! Never, ever tempt fate like that! It will get you killed!”
Violin looked at Annie. As she cringed before the force user, she meekly apologized, “I'm sorry.”
Bob looked over at Violin and Annie, as he stated, “What is done, is done. We will have to be more careful than before.”
John lower his right hand from his face, as he said, “I agree.”
Aeryn commented, “And this was starting to turn out to be such a nice day.” Aeryn laid a hand on her son, Little D's shoulder, as she added, “I am having my doubts of letting my husband go with you. Especially, you women.”
John pointed out, “You didn't have a problem when I went off with those other women.”
Aeryn answered, “That is because they were all either enamored with each other, or just not in the mood for a relationship.” Aeryn pointed at Violin, as she continued, “She is clearly enamored with you.” Aeryn the pointed at Ed, as she concluded, “And something is... off about her. I just don't know what.”
Bob spoke up, “I won't worry about that happening. Your husband clearly loves you. Also...” Bob pointed at Ed, as he continued, “She is happily married... To me.” Next, Bob pointed at Annie, as he said, “She knows better than to cross you.” Bob then pointed at Violin, as he finished, “She is crazy. And I think we can agree that John does not find crazy to be attractive.”
Dargo and Chiana snickered.
Violin stuck her tongue out at Bob, for a few seconds.
Aeryn turned to John, in response, John shrugged.
Aeryn looked back over at the rest of the group. She then focused her attention on her husband, as she replied, “Okay. But, you never did tell me the full reason why you won't let me come with you last time.”
John admitted, “Well, besides Little D's safety, I was genuinely worried if the multiverse could handle the level of destruction that you, Vader here, and Megatron, could create by working together.”
Drago, Chiana, Aeryn, and Little D didn't get the joke.
But, Bob, Ed, Annie, and Violin, got the joke, and they lightly laughed for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Bob admitted, “John has a point there.”
In response, Aeryn just groaned in annoyance. She then said, in a tired tone of voice, “Fine. You can got, alone with them.”
John continued to look at his wife, as he replied, “Thank you.” He then got up from his seat, and turned to Bob, Ed, Annie, and Violin, as he stated, “Well, let's not keep this adventure waiting.”
(_)
A few minutes later, everyone was gathered in shuttle bay seven.
Annie, Ed, Bob, and Violin were standing by the open hatch to Ed and Bob's spaceship.
Meanwhile, the crew of Moya were standing by the interior entrance to the shuttle bay.
John stood near his family and friends, as he faced them, while saying his goodbyes.
John said, “Well goodbye guys.”
Chiana replied, “Good luck, John.”
Dargo stated, “I have faith in your return, John.”
John turned to Aeryn. They then hugged and kissed for a few seconds. As they broke from their kiss and embraces, Aeryn said, “Be careful.”
John smiled, as he said, “I will.”
John then knelt down in front of his son.
Little D looked at his father in his eyes, as he begged, “I don't want you to go, daddy. I got a bad feeling about this.”
John gave Little D a false smile that fooled no one, as he said, in a sad tone of voice, “So do I, son. But, sometimes people have to do things they don't want to do. But, I want you to know that I love you. And no matter what happens, I promise we will see each other again.”
Little D responded, with a weak smile, “Thank you, daddy. I love you, too.”
John then gently hugged his son for several seconds.
As he let go of his son, he stood up. He looked at his wife, son, and friends, before turning and walking over to the reality travelers.
When John reached Annie, Bob, Ed, and Violin, he turned back around to take one more looked at his family and friends.
John saw his son use his right hand to wave goodbye to him. John waved back with his right hand, before he turned around to face the dangers that were about to present themselves in his recently peaceful life.
John looked over to face Annie, Bob, Ed, and Violin, he warned, “If I die, I am going to haunt you all.”
Bob said, “I won't worry about that. If you die, be at peace knowing that Aeryn will soon have vengeance, by hunting us all down, and killing us, Kill Bill style.”
John stated, “Hey. I am the only one in the group who is suppose to be making the pop-culture references.”
Ed smiled, as she said, “Not in this group, buddy-boy. Now, get in.”
The five of them then headed into Ed and Bob's small spaceship.
(_)
A minuted later, after they were all inside the ship, with the hatch of the ship closed, and sealed.
They had all entered the cabin of the ship, which still had the ceiling lights on. Allowing everyone in to see around them.
John was behind the others, as he asked, “Where do I sit?”
Ed turned to him, as she answered, “I am sorry, John. This is a four seater, so you are going to have to sit on the floor. I will explain what I am planning to do in a minute.”
John said, “As long as you don't do any crazy flying, sitting on the floor won't bother me.”
Half a minute later, everyone was seated, Ed and Annie were back in the front seats, with Bob and Violin in the backseats. John was sitting on the floor, behind everyone.
Violin turned around in her seat to look at John. She noticed that John was not happy with his situation. She offered, “It is okay, if you want to talk about it.”
John said, “I just hope I return to my family soon, and I don't spend a lifetime away from my family.”
Violin stated, “Knowing you. You will see them again real soon. Heroes like you don't die like punks. They always rise like a Phoenix.”
John remarked, “Tell that to my twin.”
Violin winced, “Oh yea. Radiation poisoning is not a fun way to go.”
Violin then turned back straight in her seat, as she looked ahead.
Ed overheard their conversation. She quickly stated, “The good news is we are not taking off. We are going to reality jump. I built a reality device into this ship, just for occasions like this. We are going to reality jump to my home reality. The Cowboy Bebop reality, on a Saturday night, the night after our boys left our reality.”
John inquired, “Interesting. Still, how will the device know that you are the one that is the navigator?”
Ed smirked, without looking at John. She answered, “Simple. I built it so that whom ever dials in the code and push the enter key is considered the user.”
John commented, “You truly are a genius, Ed.”
Ed continued smiling, as she responded, “Thank you. Anyway. The plan is that we are going to teleport our ship right into the hanger we leave it parked in, at the spaceport in Tharsis city, on Mars.”
“I don't know if my boys told you this, but Mars is terraformed in our home reality, at the time we are going to. The atmosphere is breathable outside. And it has been for several decades since the terraformation.”
John said, “They did mention something about that. And I did see the Cowboy Bebop series.”
Ed replied, “Oh yea. Point taken. After we leave our ship at the spaceport, we will start searching for the boys. We will use our home as a base of operations, to sleep at.
Bob spoke up, “Yea. And it was not fun boarding up those broken windows, in the living room.”
Ed agreed, “Not. It wasn't. But, I am sure those girls are good for the damages.”
Annie offered, “Ed, Bob, I have been to your home. It is a lovely home. But, if the living room is damaged. There might not be enough room for everyone. So, if you want. I can just get a hotel room, nearby.”
Bob said, “It is alright. We will find room for everyone.”
John commented, “I will be happy to sleep on a couch. Though, I do have a question about your ship. I thought you humans, of the future, would be parking your ships by our homes. Jetsons style.”
Bob cracked a grin, as he turned towards John. He stated, “You would think that. But, that is not the case. In that reality they have cars and light model spaceship, call zipcraft. This is the minivan of zipcraft. Anyway, we keep the ship at a spaceport for security, and they offer a good regular maintenance plan for our ship.”
“You do not want to have a malfunction in a spaceship, when you are in the hyperspace gate, or in orbit.”
John turned to look at Bob, as he agreed, “I can see the logic in that.”
Bob replied, “Yea. By the way, I am from a similar era in time that you are from, on Earth. I am not from the Cowboy Bebop reality.”
John raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Really?”
Bob responded, “Yes. I am from the same reality as Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, and Violin here.”
John commented, “That place must be lively Earth.”
Bob shrugged, as he responded, “Not really. Unless you live in Tokyo, or parts of China. The rest of the world is about lively as your world. Small town, USA. Which is where I am from. Is a fairly calm and nice place to live.”
John chuckled. He then said, “That is nice to know.”
Violin turned back to look at commented, “Well, to be honest. Tokyo isn't that insane a place either... For most people.”
John turned to Violin, as he asked, “Are you from the same reality as Bob?”
Violin answered, “Yes.”
Bob mentioned, “This conversation reminds me of something I wanted to ask you, for a very long time. There is something I wanted to speak to you about, John. I suspect that there are likely adventure series set on your home world, John.”
John turned to Bob, as he asked, “Why is that?”
Bob explained, “John, your space organization is called, IASA, International Aeronautics and Space Administration. My reality's space organization in the U.S. is called, NASA, National Aeronautics and Space Administration. And NASA existed in a number of realities. NASA even use to exist in Ed's reality. As far as I know, the same cannot be said for IASA.”
John mused, “Interesting. I may have to look into that. At least with you here, Bob. Someone will get my jokes.”
Bob smiled, as he commented, “Actually, Violin is pretty good with pop-culture references. I am a fanboy whom worked at a video collector's store when I was a teenager, so I am probably at your level. But, Ed here is likely better at pop-culture references than all of us combined.”
Ed just giggled.
John stated, “Whoa. I have watched the Cowboy Bebop series. So, it is not surprising that Ed would turn into such a fascinating woman. Let's see, Ed here has super-genius, a sense of humor, and nice personality.”
Bob added, “And a hot body to boot.”
Ed just laughed for a few seconds.
John stated, “You hit jackpot with her.”
Bob grinned almost from eat to ear, as he replied, “I know.”
As Ed calmed down, she stated, “Okay, everyone. We are going to teleport now. Be ready.”
Everyone else turned to look towards the front of the ship.
Ed turned on her ship, with just enough to power to work the on board the reality device. She then dialed in the password keycode with her keyboard, below the monitor, in the middle of the cockpit dashboard. She then thought of the proper place and time she wanted to go. She then pressed enter on the keyboard.
Less than a second later, those in the ship, saw through the outside windows, as their ship was suddenly inside an enclosed, dark hanger deck, with only dim lights present. The day was Saturday night, after dark, October sixteenth, two thousand one hundred. Around a full day after the boys had first disappeared from Tharsis City.
Ed touch a button on her cockpit dash board, which send a remote signal for the flood lights in the hanger to come on.
Ed stated, “Here we are. Let's get out.” She then turned off the ship.
Less than a minute later, all five adults had exited the ship
Ed was the last one out. With her turned off in the interior lights, and then closing and locking the hatched of the ship, from an panel on the outside of the ship, which was by the hatch.
The other four adults just stood on the floor of the hanger, as they watched Ed finish with her ship.
Ed then turned to look at the other four adults. She stated, “The flood lights will turn off in about five minutes. Though, they do have motion sensors on them. So, let's get out of here, and have some fresh air, before we start looking for our boys, again.
Ed, Bob, Annie, and Violin, then lead John out of the hanger, and into the chilly, outside, night sky.
As John looked around, he saw they were on the far end of the space port, with several hangers near by.
Also, there were not many lights on near them, allowing them to see the stars. Though, there was enough light to see each other with.
The five adults stood around, near each others.
John continued looking around them, as he commented, “This place is kind of like an airport on Earth, back home.”
Bob said, “You got that right.”
Violin agreed, “Yea. It is.”
Ed stated, “This is much different than my Earth. But then, my Earth has an asteroid field between it and the Moon. And it is pockmarked by those rocks falling on it.”
Just then, the wind picked up in the cool night air, as the adults turned their attention back to each other.
Bob was caught off guard by the cold wind, which caused him to sneeze.
John was looking at Bob, while this happened, as he stated, “Bob, if there anything you want to add about your kids...”
John found himself staring at a slender, fair skinned, woman, with short black hair, in her mid-twenties, whom was in Bob's clothing.
While a woman, Bob look at John, as she laughed a few empty laughs. Bob then forced herself to sneeze, and she changed back into a man in his sixties.
John asked, in surprise, “You can turn into a woman?”
Bob growled, “Yes.”
John asked, “How?”
Bob inquired, “Do you know about the about genetic alien cocktail that lets Akira do the same thing?”
John answered, “Yes.”
Bob commented, “I have basically the same alien mix and abilities as she does.”
John asked, “How long?”
Bob answered, “A little over nineteen years.”
John replied, in disbelief, “That long. You are not like the others.”
Ed stated, “No. He is not. And I am happy about that.”
Bob replied, “Ed is right. I am not like the others.”
John stated, “You are still clearly pretty much a man, upstairs.”
Bob shrugged, as he said, “Yes. I am.”
Annie spoke up, “Oh Bob is very much a man, upstairs. I can confirm that with the force. Which is surprising, given some of the things that Bob as done as a woman. Still, he is very much a male. For example, the one time we finally forced her to shop for bras, Ed had to call me in, and I to use my telekinesis, to literally force her to go into the lingerie store we had picked out for Bob to enter.”
John questioned, “How? I mean most of the others are fairly girly. You are clearly still mostly a guy.”
Bob pointed out, “You really like using the word, how, today?”
John quipped, “The word fits the situation. And it is rare to talk to someone still a guy upstairs in such a situation.”
Bob shrugged, as he responded, “Fair enough. Finding a guy's point of view on this is very hard. And I don't mind answering your questions, John.”
“To start with, I had my genes activated in my forties. I spent four decades as a man, and I am proud of it. That much time as a man has an effect on one's personality, and the memory depth of said personality strengthen my masculinity.”
“Also, I knew from the start that after I began changing, back and forth, between genders, that I had to be real careful about what I did as a woman. After seeing the others, I realized that if one lived as a female, physically, even playfully, doing so will mess with one's head. And doing so can also mess up their gender identity.”
“This is because the change is total. When they are a female, their brains are hardwired as a female. They are set to female, not male. From these facts, I realized the laws of gender bending are very real. I found as long as I respected these rules, and I was careful, I would be fine.”
“Though, I admit it has made things more fun in the bedroom. Can you blame me?”
John looked over at Ed, whom was smiling towards him. He then looked back at Bob, as he answered, “No. I honestly can't. In your position, if it was my body, I would try out the new plumbing too.”
Bob chuckled a little. He then said, “I am glad we agree, John. I also, got out of the live of excitement, while I still had most of manhood intact. And my sons need a strong, though caring, father figure.”
John stated, “Those are all good reasons to get out of the game. Which I did as well.” He turned Annie, as he continued, “Until someone pulled me back into this game.”
Annie immediately realized John was talking about her. She stuck out her tongue at John for a few seconds.
John ignored Annie's reaction, as he turned back to look at Bob. He went onto say, “Though, I guess you didn't plan on telling your sons, about your abilities? Did you?”
Bob replied, “Nope.”
Ed interrupted, “Though, that was his choice. And I respected his wishes. Still, I did tell my husband that not telling our children about him being a gender bender, would someday backfire on him.”
Bob looked over at Ed, as he agreed, “Yes, dear. I admit I was wrong.”
Ed just smirked towards Bob, with an, 'I told you so', expression on her face.
John said, “I am not going to judge you on that. I am not sure how I would react in your situation.”
Bob turned to look at John, as he replied, “I am glad you understand. Still, it wouldn't matter much in a few years, when I permanently lock as a healthy, young woman.”
John responded, “Sorry to hear that, Bob.”
Bob said, “Don't be. Better than dying of old age. And Ed has had a rejuvenation treatment. She had the therapy years ago. It restored and maintains her youth to where she looks in her late twenties. The treatment has slowed her aging down drastically, as well. So, we can both spend many more years together.”
John said, “I hope it works out between you two.”
Bob replied, “I do to.”
John joked, “At least you didn't give birth to one of your kids.”
Bob fidgeted for a few seconds.
Meanwhile, John noticed Bib fidgeting, along with Ed, Annie, and Violin snickering.
John looked back at Bob, as he inquired, “Oh, you didn't?”
Bob answered, in an embarrassing tone of voice, “Actually, I did.”
John questioned, “Dare I ask why?”
Bob shrugged, as he replied, “Because my wife asked me too. And I love my wife.”
John conceded, “Those are good reasons.”
Bob added, “On the upside, she can never play the, you don't know what it was like when I was pregnant with our child, card on me.”
John responded, “Well, there is that. By the way, until recently, why haven't we ever met?”
Bob answered, “No offense, John. But, I was intentionally avoiding you, and your reality. I have seen your series. It is pretty good. Violin was not completely unjustified in her fangirl reaction. To that end. Like it, or not, John, you are a trouble magnet. And in some cases, so am I. And you know when magnets lock together, they create an even stronger magnet. I don't think either of us want any more trouble than what we already had. More than likely, we both prefer to have less trouble.”
John agreed, “How true.”
Violin spoke up, “As fun as this conversation is. We do have things to do?”
John asked, “Is she always this impatient?”
Bob answered, “I wouldn't really know. But, my friend Nataru could probably tell you. He is Violin's stepfather. And a good father at that.”
John asked, “Interesting. So, where are we going?”
Ed pulled out her small, remote sized, reality device, from a pocket, with her right hand. She questioned, “That depends. Did they finally figure out how to reality jump on their own?”
John answered, “Yes. They said they figured it out on their own.”
Ed smiled, as she responded, “Good. If I know my boys, they are going to look for help. I will simply think of my boys, and whatever help they are looking for. With luck, we will find them in a peaceful time and place, in the multiverse.”
Annie spoke up, “Not a bad idea.”
Bob complimented, “I like it.”
John stated, “That could work.”
Violin said, “I am just happy to be along for the ride.”
The other four adults walked closer to Ed.
When the four other adults came a stop, right beside Ed, Ed held her reality device in her right hand, as she thought of where, when, and why, she wanted to go to a specific time and place in the multiverse. She the pressed the red button, and all five of them vanished, as they reality jumped.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
This chapter allowed me to finish the scenes of a number of scenes in books one, two, and three, of my Anthology of Insanity. Among other scenes. And yes, Stan and Lewis did meet Violin, at a future point in time for Violin. That will be explained later.
Also, I now got to included some scenes Bob, Ed, Annie, Violin, and the crew of Moya.
Yes. The crew of Moya have made some very big mistake. And them turning away the Lowe brothers, with the crew of Moya immediately being called on doing so, is par for course for the Farscape series.
And why did I make Violin the biggest fan. For several reasons. Including, allowing me to write that funny scene, in the shuttle bay of Moya.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Four: “Those You Meet Along The Way: Part Three.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Another reality. Another place. Another time.
The next thing the brother knew, they were in the middle of a three lane street, at night.
Fortunately, the street was illuminated by lamp lights on the sidewalks on both sides of the street.
The street lights also showed that they were surrounded by three story buildings on both sides of the street, except for the two story, bar in front of them, with the bar being the only building with light coming from inside. And from the windows, the boys could see that the bar was quiet busy inside.
Stan stated, “Give the architecture, I would say were in small town the U.S midwest, in the mid to late twentieth century. And give the building in front of us is the only building with lighting on the inside, I would say that is the bar where we will find a drink in.”
As Lewis put his reality device back into the pants pocket he had been using to store it in, he said, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “I think that is the case as well, mister obvious.”
Stan flatly replied, “Ha, ha... Let's go inside.”
After the brothers walked into the bar, from the front entrance, both of them stood at the entrance, as they saw how many people were already inside.
Lewis asked, “This place is packed. Where are we going to sit?”
Stan looked around, he then saw a couple of places. He used his right hand to point towards the far side of the bar counter, to their right side, as he stated, “There are two places over there, at the counter.”
Lewis stated, “Works for me.” He then noticed three adults at a table near the counter. He said, “Don't looked directly at them. But, our parents, and B, of the past, are near the bar counter, sitting at a table. Given dad has a beard, I am guessing they are from our very distant past.”
Stan used the corner of his eyes to find them.
He saw that it was B and Ed, in their usual clothing. While Bob had a bushy beard on his face, and wearing a brown long coat over his clothing.
Stan responded, “Okay. I see them. Keep in mind that they don't know who we are. As long as they don't notice us, we should be fine.” He then added, in a harder tone of voice, “Besides, I am not leaving here until I can get a bottle of beer, or two.”
Lewis replied, “Agreed.”
They soon reached the two empty stools, set side by side with each other, as each brother sat in a stood. Stan sat to Lewis' left side. With other customers sitting next to them, on both sides, at the bar counter.
Seconds later, the bearded bartender walked up to them, from the other side of counter. He said to them, “Sorry. We don't serve kids. Please leave.”
Stan, whom had one too many disappointments over the last twenty four hours of his life, finally snapped.
Stan used his right hand to swiftly reach across the counter, and grabbed the top of the front of the bartender's shirt.
Stan then pulled other man close to him, over the bar. Stan held the bartender there, as he spoke in an even, yet dangerous tone of voice, “Listen man. In the last twenty-fours hours my brother and I have been driven from our homes by gender bending, elemental wielding lunatics. We were then kidnapped by an alien super-genius. We then escaped said genius' alien armada. After that, we had to outrun a mob of dangerous women, whom were all wearing only bikinis. It was more scary for us, then kinky. Next, we have been chased, literally across existence itself, by a group of psychotically violent teenage girls, and bounty hunters. And the capper of this day was that our only lead in this entire mess just screwed us over. We both deserve a few beers.”
Stan then let go of the bartender.
As the bartender leaned back up, Lewis politely said, “I apologize for my brother. It is just that we have had a very, very long day. And we could use something to take the edge off.”
The bartender took a hard look at them, as he straightened the top of his shirt. He said, “I can see why. By the way, any of of the women whom chased you, named Revy?”
Lewis shrugged, “No, but I think she did passed by us, at one point. Two of her. If I heard Shenhua and Lotton correctly.”
The bartender raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “You have met Shenhua and Lotton?”
Lewis replied, “And Sawyer. They are an interesting group of people.”
The bartender responded, “That would be an understatement.”
Lewis questioned, “You sound like you know them.”
The bartender answered, “Yes. Here.” He then pulled out two cold bottles of decent beer from a cooler under the counter. He set the two bottles in front of the boys, as he continued, “I am feeling charitable towards you two, because you clearly need these beers more than I do. They beer is on the house for you two. And let me know when you need some more. Though, don't get drunk.”
Lewis responded, “Thank you. And don't worry. We won't.”
As the bartender walked away, to serve his other customers. To be specific, the boys, saw from the corner of their eyes, the bartender walk over to a blond haired woman in a cowgirl outfit, that was across the counter, whom had just come from the women's restroom.
Meanwhile, the brothers opened their cold beer bottles, and took a drink from them.
The two teenage boys both set their bottles of beer down.
Stan turned to Lewis, as he commented, “I needed that. I see your theory worked. We found a bar that will serve us beer no matter what.”
Lewis turned to Stan, as he smiled. He said, “Yes. That is the case.”
Stan inquired, “So, what is your next idea on where we should go?”
Lewis answered, “Since this blind jump worked exactly as we hoped it work, I am going to tried a similar jump. But, it will not be of a place, or time, but of a whom. I will think of trying to find someone that can help us with our teacher. Or, just help us, in general, with this situation.”
Stan compliment, “That is a great idea, brother. Either way is a win for us.”
Lewis happily replied, “Exactly.”
From the corners of their eyes, they noticed the blond woman in a cowgirl outfit then walking passed them, and out the door.
Less than a minute later, they watched her return inside, pass by them, and near the end of the bar counter. When she got there, she picked up a tray of seven beer bottles, and she then took then up stairs, to a table on the second floor.
Lewis commented, “I wonder what her story is about?”
Stan responded, “I got a feeling that we don't want to know.”
The two of them went back to drinking their cold bottles of beer.
(_)
A few minutes later, outside the front of the bar, two groups of teenage girls teleported into the middle of the street, at the same time.
One group was Mikoto, Nodoka, and Yurika. All of whom were girls, and they were still wearing their clothing when the confront of the brothers at the Lowe family home, on Mars, in the Cowboy Bebop reality.
The other group was Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio. All of them wore the same styles of clothing they had worn when the confronted the brothers in Roanapur. And they had their weapons with them. Though, their weapons were sheathed, or holstered.
Or, in Kristina case, she wore here gauntlets, but the internal weapons were not primed, and charged, for combat.
Meanwhile, Yukio kept her machine gun barrel pointed at the ground.
The two groups had telepored to where they were facing each other.
Both groups looked at each other, while Mikoto inquired, “What are you doing here?”
Rebecca asked, “What are you doing here?”
Molly thought, 'We don't need a fight right now. Especially, with our friends.' She requested, “Mikoto, you go first. Since you asked first.”
Mikoto explained, “Thank you, Molly. We remembered a strange story that our parents told us, where they meet Ed in the past, at a bar, along with two teenage boys that fit Stan and Lewis' descriptions. We put two and two together, we thought of where and when in the multiverse that would be, used one of our reality devices, and we ended up here. How about you five?”
Rebecca stated, “About the same. We got to talking, and we remembered, on of the few times my mom, Revy, got drunk, that she mentioned meeting us, as teenagers in her past. Our future, her distant past. And the incident happen twice for her. Where she not only met her future self, her future children, us, but she then met herself, as her future version, then as her past self. With her future children there, both times. We used here reality device the same way you did, to lock on this time, place, and reality.”
Mikoto replied, “Interesting. I take it you don't want a fight with us? Because, we don't want a fight with you.”
Yukio stated, “We know better than to try to fight you three. Given the situation, we don't mind working together with you.”
Molly stated, “We will just call off the bet, for tonight.”
Nodoka said, “Good. We can agree to that.”
The other teenage girls nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Molly commented, “That works for us. So, what are you going to do now?”
At that moment, Yurika turned to look through the windows of the bar. She then saw someone, on from the windows of the second story. She continued to look through the windows, as she stated, “We are not going to do anything. Take a look at the second story of the bar.”
All eight teenager looked into the bar, through the windows, into the second story. And they saw who was there.
Yurika continued, “It looks like we came into our parents past, alright. And if we rush in there, we are going to create a paradox.”
The eight teenagers saw around a large table, seven adults. Those at the table were Rock, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, as girls. Also, there was Fabiola, Annie, and John Crichton.
Kristina frowned, as she stated, “That does kill the idea of storming the place.”
Through this windows of the first floor, Yurika saw other people of interest, as she said, “That is not all. Look at the far end of the bar counters, and the table nearby.”
They saw at the bar counter, the conspicuous jacket and shot coat of Stan and Lewis Lowe. And at a nearby table, there was B, Ed, and another guy with a full, bushy, black beard.”
Yukio asked, “Who is the bearded guy with Ed?”
Mikoto stated, “That is Bob. Before he has his latent gender bending abilities activated. From what I understand, one of the reasons it took so long for him to become a gender bender was that he liked his beard.”
Sarah commented, “Nice beard. I can see why he would have wanted to keep it. And on the matter of the boys. You got to admit that it, it takes guts for those two to be in that situation, and still remain calm.”
Mikoto agreed with Sarah, “Yea. The one thing I admire about the boys is that they may not have a clue as to what is going on, but I am sure they know that are sitting that close to the past versions of their parents. And yet they are so clearly calm about this situation.”
Molly pointed out, “Well, we cannot go in there. But, it is clear the boys don't see us. So, we have the element of surprise. We will just have to wait for them to come out. The question is where we will wait for them?”
Sarah then turned around, and she saw the back empty, three story building. She suggested, “How about we just hide in the building across the street, until they come out.”
The other seven teenager turned around, and smiled, as Kristina said, “Great idea, sis.”
The teenager then walked over to the front door of the building.
Nodoka pulled some small tools from a pocket, to pick locks with. She then started working on the locks to the front double doors.
Kristina asked, “Do you think this place has a security system?”
Molly stated, “I doubt that is the case. This place does not look like a gun store, nor bank. Still, if that is the case, we can use the police for a distraction to get the bar to let out early. And we flush the boys outside, and away from all our parent's past selves.”
Yurika looked overs at Molly, as she complimented, “That is brilliant.”
Molly looked over at the green haired girl, as she smiled. She said, “Being a genius in two lifetimes in a row comes in handy.”
Yurika replied, “I bet.”
Nodoka said, “Got it.” She then opened the double doors. Next, she got up, and pocketet her lock picking tools. After which, she walked inside, with the seven other teenage girls following her.
After all the girls were inside, Nodoka closed and locked the doors behind them.
As their eyes adjusted to the lower light, with the outside lamp lights providing enough light, from outside windows, to see the center of the room. The teenage girls saw they were in large room full of desks and chairs.
Whom the girls saw that were already inside room, surprised them.
While much of them were in the shadows, and they could only see their silhouettes, they could see enough of each of them to recognize them.
Sitting on a couple of chairs, beside each other were two pairs of Shenhuas. One was wearing her usual clothing, the other was in a white armor, with her helmet by the desk near her.
Nearby, were to Sawyers sitting beside each other, on top of a desk. One of the Sawyers was wearing her usual clothing, with her chainsaw sitting by her on the desk. The other Sawyer was wearing black armor, with her helmet set beside her on the desk.
There was also Roberta, in purple armor, and she had a robotic looking right eye. She was sitting in a chair, with her helmet in her lap. There was large, pink robot sitting on the desk top beside her. And there was an empty red armor leaning against the wall, near the two.
All five of the women, and the robot were looking at the teenage girls.
Molly quickly requested, “Please, do not shoot. We are from the future. We know who you are. In truth, we are good friends in the future.
The pink robot stated, “Interesting. Please, explain.”
Molly said, “Not to prevent a paradox, but I know you are the Autobot Arcee. Also, Roberta is beside you. And I see two Shenhua, and two Sawyers. It is just as one of our mothers described.”
Roberta asked, “Who is your mother?”
Molly admitted, “Actually, it is not my mother. But, my two sisters mother. I think you can guess who, by looking at us?”
Molly then pointed at Rebecca and Yukio, whom had her machine pointed at the ground.
Roberta commented, “The sad part is that I cannot see that junkyard bitch as a mother.”
All five of the Lagoon sisters said, in unison, “Hey!”
Roberta shrugged, as she replied, “Relax. I was just joking.”
The five sisters relaxed a bit.
Shenhua in the armor giggled, as she turned to Shenhua in her usually clothing. She then stated, “I see you were right.”
Mikoto inquired, “Right about what?”
The Shenhuas turned to face the teenagers again, as the Shenhua in her usual outfit stated, “Actually, we were just talking about you. As you have guessed, two of us are from the future. While two of use are from the past. And unlike Revy, we both have good memories.”
The Sawyer in her regular clothing spoke up, through the electrolarynx choker around her neck, “Yes. And it was fun the first time. And if I remember correctly, all eight of you are just in time. Though, the fireworks and party are not for a little while.”
Kristina asked, “What fireworks and party?”
Future Sawyer smirked, as she questioned, “We do not want to create as paradox? Do you?”
Kristina giggled a little, as she shrugged. She then said, “I see your point. And I can wait a few hours tell we find out what happens.”
Future Sawyer replied, “Exactly.”
Future Shenhua stated, “The Revys are on the roof, waiting for the two of you that are redheads. The stairwell is over there.” She then used her left hand to point at an open door.
Molly turned to Rebecca and Yukio, as she requested, “You two better head up there. But, do not give them you names. And try to be vague on the future.”
Rebecca said, “Of course.”
Yukio replied, “We understand.”
The two redheaded sisters head up the stairwell.
A few minutes later, the two redheaded sisters reached the exit to the roof.
As they gently opened the door to the roof, they saw the two Revys sitting beside each other, at the parapet in front of them.
As they walked up to the Revys, they overheard the Revy in her usual clothing said, to the Revy in red leather biker clothing, “I wouldn't worry about our relationship with Rock. I cannot go into detail, but I will tell you this, she still love you as much as you love her.”
The Past Revy, in biker clothing, smiled, as she responded, “Good.”
By then, the two teenage redheads started standing beside them, at the parapet, to the Revys' right sides.
Yukio then set down and leaned her machine gun against the parapet itself, causing the clinging sound which got the Revys attention.
Both of the Revys turned to Yukio and Rebecca beside them, by the parapet.
Rebecca and Yukio turned to look at the Revys.
Both Revy turned towards them, as they asked, in unison, “Who are you two?”
Both teenage girls smirked, as they said, in unison, “Hi mommies.”
Past Revy turned to the future Revy, whom was in her usual clothing, as she asked, “You had some kids?”
The other Revy answered, “Yea. But, they are small children.” She thought, 'But, these two look like mine, grown up. And they clearly got their hot looks from me.'
Yukio stated, “We are from the future. Sorry about startling you, but this thing can get kinda heavy.”
Future Revy said, “Well, it looks like I did a good job with you rugrats.”
Both of them said, “You did.”
Past Revy interrupted them, “As much I love the lovey dovy, I have a question. Who is the father, since Rock is a girl?”
Future Revy, Yukio, and Rebecca, just laughed.
Future Revy thought, 'It is so tempting to explain how these two kids being conceived. But, I don't risk not having these wonderful bundles of joy. Also, I better not mention our daughters, by name. Their names my tip my past self off that there other parent is Rock.'
Future Revy said, “Don't worry about it. Let's just you love life is going to get very interesting in the future.” The other Revy then turned to the girls, as she asked, “Daughters, are the other girls with you?”
Rebecca answered, “Yea. They are just waiting nearby for the word to attack. Just like your two groups.”
Future Revy commented, “We taught them so well. So, who are you two after?”
The girls pointed to two teenage boys at the bar table. The redhead with the machine gun stated, “We are after those two brothers.”
Future Revy asked, “So, who are the two brothers? And why are you after them?”
Rebecca stated, “We would love to tell you. But, you know the rules. No talking about the future. Except for the obvious.”
Past Revy stated, “Well, given none of us want to break reality, we are going to have to wait for them to leave and separate into their groups. Even I realize that attacking them now would be a very bad idea. This could take a while.”
(_)
A couple of hours later, the bar was closing.
The only ones left were the three groups of people, and the bartender.
Without realizing it, the three groups left in a row for the entrance doors.
The first group was Ed, B, and Bob.
Bob said, “So, where do you guys want to go to next?”
The group of three headed out the door, and started walking straight across the street.
(_)
The second group was Rock's group.
As the seven of them exited, Rock said, “At least we now have a plan.”
The seven of them then headed for their right, were they left Megatron in his alt mode.
(_)
The last group were the brothers.
Stan said to Lewis, “We still got to figure out what is going on.”
Lewis agreed, “True. But now, we won't get lost.”
Stan commented, “It is a step forward in our situation.”
The two teenage boys headed to their left.
(_)
Suddenly, everyone heard a strange, almost electronic voice say, “Ladies and Gentlemen. A moment of your time.”
That all turned to see that it was the alien, Star Wars bounty hunter, Cad Bane, in his usual clothing and weapons, including his two holstered blaster pistols, across the street from them.
Cad Bane said, “I want no trouble from any of you. I am only after the boys.” Cad then pointed at the two teenage boys.”
(_)
A number of feet away from the alien bounty hunter, Bob looked over at the two boys, as he thought, 'Who are those boys? Doesn't matter. They seem like nice kids, and a scumbag like Cad Bane isn't going to get them.'
Bob turn to Cad. He brushed open his brown long coat, as he put his hand on his holstered pistol. He stated, “I don't know who those boys are, but you are not taking them anywhere, Bane.”
(_)
The brothers turned to look at the other two groups, and their eyes when wide.
Stan thought, 'Oh crap, they see us!'
Lewis thought, 'This is bad!'
(_)
Then, from Rock's group, Ranma asked, “You and what army?”
(_)
Nearby, Bob thought, 'I know that voice.'
Bob, Ed, and B turned to looked at Rock's group, as their eyes went wide.
Bob thought, 'Oh boy. Now, we are in trouble.'
Ed thought, 'Now, this is getting interesting.'
B thought, 'I just hope they don't realize it is me.'
(_)
Cad Bane crossed his arms, as he smiled. He replied, “This one.”
Suddenly, an army of robots, with energy rifles in their hands, appeared right in front him.
Everyone looked at each other, and then made a run back into the bar for cover.
The bartender saw all this. He swiftly ducked under the bar table.
As Everyone made back into the bar, they rushed for cover wherever they could find it, just before the robots opened fire.
(_)
John and Lewis had jumped over the bar table, and joined the bartender behind it.
When they looked over at the bartender, they noticed that he had pulled out his shotgun.
The bartender said to them, “Relax gentlemen, this isn't my first rodeo. Just stay down. I used to have to deal with this a lot in the city I previously lived in. That is why I left place. My old bar must have been trashed or destroyed over two dozen times. I lived through each time without a scratch to myself. The only reason I escaped that town when things started getting weird there. I am so glad I listened to the warning that kid the russian brought into my bar one night. I almost waited to long to leave.”
Lewis asked, “How weird?”
The bartender answered, “I started losing more male customers and gaining more hotter, younger adult female customers. That part I didn't really mind. Who am I to complain about some free eye candy. Until, I realized that many of the women similar to the men I use to serve. But, they were like their sexy, younger sisters. For some reason, I noticed that my chinese customers were first. And they even told the same jokes.”
“It was then and there that I decided it was time to bugout and leave. But, right before I left, the last person in the world I expected, walked into my bar, just after I had closed it for good.. It was a caucasian man named, Caxton.”
Lewis interrupted, “Caxton? As in Shane Caxton?”
The bartender was surprised, as he asked, “You've met him?”
The boy replied, “Yea. Don't worry about him. He is doing fine.”
The bartender smiled, “That is good to hear. Anyway, I later learned that since Caxton had experience with the town before, the U.S. government sent him and a squad into to find out what was happening there. But, they were ambushed, with only him escaping. Even though it has been decades, we still recognized each other. And I owed him for helping get my ass out of my homeland.”
“We quickly realized that the exits to the island were cut off. And if we were going to escape, we were going to have to journey deeper into hell, and that damned tower. I had never fought so hard to escape somewhere since the fall of Saigon. And the horrors saw...”
“We just lucked out when we found that strange portal system. We were able to get it working. We randomized the coordinates. Caxton went first. I then changed the coordinates, and left myself. But, not before leaving a bag full of plastic explosives to destroy the machine and any record it had of where we went.”
“And I end up here. Now, I am starting to think I am cursed to face craziness like this.”
Lewis and John said, in unison, “Welcome to the club.”
The bartender stated, “Still, don't worry. The walls of this counter can take anything up to a fifty caliber round. If we keep our heads down, we should be fine. And you two look like the type who don't want to join in on the chaos unless they had too.”
Lewis just nodded an affirmative.
John replied, “You got that right. Still, it does not hurt to be prepared.” He then pulled out his pulse pistol.
The bartender cocked his shotgun, as he stated, “That is why I keep this shotgun. Just in case the trouble gets to close to me.”
Lewis turned to see to John. He thought, 'Oh my, it is John. What luck.' He greeted, “By the way, hi John.”
John was confused, as he asked, “Do I know you?”
Lewis thought, 'I don't really blame John for not helping me. And it would be nice to talk to him. I my still learn a few things from him.' He explained, “I just came from meeting you. Oh right, it must have been you from your future.”
John inquired, “How far in the future?”
Lewis responded, “How old is your son?”
John stated, “He is still a baby.”
Lewis responded, “When I meet you, your son is around ten years old. So, look on the bright side, you are likely going to get out of this alive.”
John just smiled at the revelation.
(_)
Meanwhile, Akira, Bob, and Stan took cover behind a turned up table, with their backs facing the table.
Akira pulled out her pistols.
To her right, Bob pulled out his revolver. As he looked over at Akira, he cursed under his breath, “Crap.”
Bob thought, 'I am right by Past Akira. Given she does not recognize me, this is clearly before she met me. Still, this can cause all sorts of problems.'
At the exact same time, Stan looked over at Bob, as he thought, 'Of all my rotten luck...' He muttered, “Crap.”
Stan overheard Bob say, crap, as the same time. He thought, 'But, when did my father say, crap, also, when he looked at the blond woman in the cowgirl outfit?... Wait a minute. They know each other. But, there is nothing I can do about find out what it is in this situation.'
Bob mentally wondered, 'Why did that boy also say crap? And I know I have seen him somewhere before, I just cannot place him. Still, I will have to worry about him later. Akira and there robots are the to problems I need to defuse.'
Akira then noticed Bob's revolver. She asked him, “Where did you get that revolver from?”
Bob thought, 'I have no time to think of a good lie. So, I will be honest, and hope for the best. By her not asking any more questions from me. Though, if I call her by name, that will cause her to ask where I know her from. So, how about I just call her, blondie?'
Bob smirked, “The same place you did, blondie. You got to admit that gunsmith makes quality weapons there.”
Akira admitted, “That's true.”
Bob thought, 'I might as well just tell her, it will get her mind off of me.'
Bob commented, “You are aware the gunsmith is Burt Gummer from the Tremors movies?”
Akira giggled, as she replied, “So, that is where I saw him from. No. I did not realize that. But, it makes a lot of sense. And to think I have customized firearms by one of the greatest gun nuts in the multiverse is a real treat.”
Bob smirked, as he said, “I know. That is one of the reasons I got my pistol from Burt, as well.”
(_)
Nearby, Rock, Fabiola, and the brown haired woman, took cover behind a turned up table.
As Rock pulled out her sonic shotgun, she look over at the brown haired woman. She inquired, “You look familiar. Have we met?”
B thought, 'Oh crap. If Rock recognizes me, it is going to screw up the space-time continuum... Damn, I have been sending a lot of time with Bob and Ed. Yes, those time travel movies are fun and informative. I will just have to give her a simple excuse.'
B pulled out her semi-automatic pistol, from her shoulder holster, hidden under her jacket. She pulled back the slide of her weapon, to chamber a round, as she answered in english, with a heavy russian accent, “I just have that type of face.”
Fabiola pulled out her shotgun, as she stated, “It doesn't matter. What matters is we have another gun to aid us.”
B complimented, “Good attitude.”
Fabiola replied, “Thank you, ma'am.”
(_)
Behind another turned over table were Annie, Ranma, Natsuru, and Ed.
Ed sat between Ranma and Natsuru.
Natsuru took a good look at Ed. She looked to be in her mid-twenties, but her face, and hair style, were unmistakable.
Natsuru asked Ed, “Are you Ed from Cowboy Bebop?”
Ed thought, 'Oh well. They know who I am. I might as well, just run with it. And they were nice enough to get Rock to agree to leave us alone.'
Ed smiled. She hugged both Natsuru and Ranma by the shoulders, as she said, “Yep. Ed has enjoyed the fun she has had with you two, and the blond. The others we faced. Not so fun.”
Natsuru thought with fear, 'Oh crap! If she is from our future, and the others are, we could be facing a paradox of epic proportions.'
Natsuru turned to Annie, as she requested, “Annie, please use the force to tell us what the hell is going on?”
Annie eyes were wide. She stated, “Chaos.”
Ed thought with worried, 'Annie... She is the gender bent Darth Vader that Bob and Boris talked about. And the fact she said, chaos, with her eyes wide like that, isn't a good sign for anyone.'
(_)
Outside, on the roof across from the bar, the two Revys and two teenage girls, watched what was happening.
Past Revy said, “Whomever that guy is, he just screwed the pooch.”
Rebecca pointed up at the sky, as she stated, “Look!”
Everyone looked up and saw that the night sky appeared to be breaking apart with energy.
Revy cursed, “Oh hell, this is getting a whole lot worse. Whatever is going on down there creating a paradox. We have to fix this now.” She turned to the other Revy, as she pointed out, “Since I am here, why don't you remember this?
Yukio said, “Mommy sometimes has a bad memory.”
Future Revy just shrugged.
Past Revy ordered, “Just great. Okay, everyone, go get your friends. We got to take care of those robots and fix this right now.”
Yukio picked up her machine gun, leaning against the inside of the parapet, as all four women when get their friends to help clean this mess up, as they rushed down the stairwell.
(_)
Less than a minute later, they made it it down to stairwell, in to the large room, where the others were at.
When the got there, everyone seems to be ready for battle. Those with melee weapons had unsheathed their weapons. Molly pulled out her pistols, and chambered a round into each her weapons. Future Sawyer had here chainsaw at the ready.
Only Arcee did not have out her weapons, because she did not want to start a fire, just yet.
Past Sawyer, Past Roberta, and Past Shenhua already had their helmets on.
All for redheads looked surprised.
Future Shenhua smirked, as she commented, “Revys, we got ready right after your daughters went up to greet you. Don't forget, Sawyer and I have been through this before. It is true what they say, hindsight is twenty-twenty. And this is one of the few times it is a benefit to one's own future, three times over.”
Future Revy commented, “I am so happy those two are my friends.”
Past Revy stated, “So, am I. And I will need a few seconds to get into my suit.” She turned to her pink robot, as she requested, “Arcee, get by my hardsuit.
Acree met Past Revy by her red hardsuit.
Past Revy quickly took over her red boot, red gloves. She then unzipper her jacket, while undoing her belt, and pants. As she took off all her clothing, she revealed that she was wearing her pink softsuit underneath.
Past Revy then handed all her clothing and boots she took off to Arcee. Arcee put Revy's belongings into a compartment in her body for save keeping.
Past Revy walked up to her hardsuit. She took off the helmet and set it by a desk. Next she push a couple of buttons in the inner neck collar of the suit for it to open up from the top, allowing her to get him.
As soon as, Past Revy slid into her hardsuit, she pulled the suit back together, and then locked everything in place.
Next, the walked over to her helmet and put on.
Finally, she booted up the operating system for her hardsuit, which took a few seconds to fully load.
Nearby, Rebecca inquired, “So, everyone already knows the situation?”
Kristina answered, “Yes. The multiverse is about to FUBAR, because of a three way paradox, if we don't rescue those we are after.”
Rebecca said, “That about sums up the situation.”
As Part Revy's hardsuit came online completely, she turned to the eight teenage girls, six other women, and the robot, as she stated, “Alright. Let's go.”
Rebecca asked, “Go where? How should we attack these robots.”
Future Shenhua and Future Sawyer said, in unison, “The roof.”
Future Sawyer added, “That is how we did it the first time. And it worked. We caught them by surprised. Those robots are dumb and weak. The energy rifles are the only thing that is danger about them. Just watch yourself and you will be find. If not, they the multiverse is screwed.”
Kristina commented, “I like it. It is a wonderful badass idea.”
Sarah spoke up, “I second their plan.”
Molly said, “I have not problems with it.”
Yurika responded, “Neither do I, nor my sisters. Actually, we were trained to attack from above.”
Both Revys looked at each other. They then looked at the others, as they said, unison, “Works for us.”
They then rushed back up the stairwell.
(_)
Several seconds later, they all made it to the roof.
Arcee decided it was good time to pulled out her flaming swords.
Everyone took a moment to look at the sky, as it look like it was breaking apart.
Kristina commented, “Yea. This is bad.”
Yukio commented, “To bad we cannot capture them right now.”
Sarah said, “We will all have other opportunities.”
Yukio shrugged, as she replied, “True.”
Rebecca commented, “Besides. We are doing this for the challenge. And there will be no challenge in capturing the brothers this way.”
Yukio said, “Very, very true.”
Future Revy walked over to the parapet, and looked down to see the robots were still firing at the bar.
Past Revy was right behind her.
Future Revy stated, “I think we need to hurry this up, before the bar collapses in on everyone.”
Everyone turned their attention to Future Revy.
Molly turned to Future Shenhua, as she requested, “So, how are we doing this.”
Future Shenhua responded, “We jump off the roof. Land on top of them. And then tear them apart.”
Nodoka commented, “Simple, but effective.” She then formed an ice staff in her hands.
Mikoto asked, “Do these things explode when they are destroyed?”
Future Sawyer answered, “No.”
Mikoto's hands erupted into fire, as she smirked, “Good. I rarely get to use my fire in combat.”
Kristina commented, “I never fully understand why you don't.”
Mikoto responded, “Because I am not a pyromaniac like you.”
Kristina replied, “I am not as bad I was in the distant past.”
Mikoto agreed, “True.” She mentally added, 'And I am glad you know better than to mention the term, past life, to these past versions of our friends, and your family.'
Electricity erupted from Yurika's hand, as she spoke up, “Ready, when you are.”
Both Revys looked at each other, they then looked at the group, as they ordered, “Charge!”
All sixteen individuals rushed to the parapet, and jump over it, and only top of the robots.
(_)
Outside, Cad Bane just laughed. He thought, 'Soon, I will collect on both Scorpius' bounty, and her bonus. If I do this right. I am sure she will have more jobs lined up for me in the future.'
It was then that he noticed something falling from above.
He looked up. He then cursed, “Oh damn.”
Cad Bane immediately used a device he had, to jump to another reality, right before he and the robots were attacked.
All sixteen individuals landed safely, and in one piece, as they tore into the robots that were attacking their prey.
(_)
Inside, everyone noticed the weapons fire above their heads had stopped.
For about a minute, they heard the sounds of battle outside.
A minute afterward, everyone, but the bartender, peeked their heads over the table.
What they saw outside caused their jaws to drop.
The streets lights on the sidewalks were still mostly intact and functioning, as the lights provided plenty of light for the groups inside to see the groups standing outside.
Those inside saw the four Hell Sabers in their hardsuits, to their right, with Arcee, in robot mode, standing behind them, holding her flaming swords. In their hardsuits, Revy had her knuckle-bombers ready, Sawyer had her wrist blades popped out, Roberta's shoulder missile pods were popped up, and Shenhua had one of her ignited lightsabers in each hand.
In the middle were Sawyer, Revy, and Shenhua in their usually clothing, holding classic their weapons. Sawyer with her chainsaw, Revy with her semi-automatic cutlasses, and Shenhua with her two kukri long knives.
And to their left were eight teenage woman in sexy clothing. Of the eight girls, five were holding various weapons, the other three were barehanded, and they looked just as badass as the other seven.
The first of the ones with weapons, from Stan's point of view, from right to left, was Rebecca, whom was holding what looked to be two eighteen twenty-seven Russian Pioneer short swords, like what Akira used.
The girl next to her was, Yukio, whom was holding her large M nineteen eighteen A two Browning Automatic Rifle machine gun up with both hands, with little effort.
The middle teenage girl was, Kristina. She had on two sci-fi looking gauntlets on each of her hands, that went up almost to her elbows.
A short burst of flame harmlessly erupted from each of the two gauntlets.
The next teenager girl was Molly. She was holding two M Nine stainless steel semi-automatic pistols, similar to Revy's cutlasses, that were from her two shoulder holsters.
The final teenage girl with weapons was Sarah. She looked like she was the other blond girl's sister, but they did look somewhat different. She held out a katana in front of her with both hands.
On the other side of the girl with the katana, was Mikoto. Her left hand was in a fist, as flames surrounded it. Meanwhile, her right hand was open, with her palm facing upwards, as a fireball was right above her open palm.
Next to Mikoto was Yurika, whom had her hands and fingers outstretched in front of her, with the palms of both hands facing six inches from each other.
Lightning laced between the Yurika's hands and fingers.
To the side of Yurika was Nodoka, whom held up her left hand, with her left palm upwards. A floating globe of water stood less than an inch above her left open palm. In her right hand was a staff made of ice.
All of the women were standing above the destroyed remains of the robots that they had just attacked and destroyed without suffering any injuries.
(_)
Bob thought, 'Considering, the women I do recognize, even Arcee, along with those eight teenage girls looking just as dangerous as the Lagoon crews. And the ordnance and equipment they all have...' Bob said, “That is probably the most badass assemblage of babes in the entire existence of the multiverse.”
Both Akira and Stan just nodded in agreement.
Bob then looked over at the Revy in the center. He thought with annoyance, 'That Revy, along with Sawyer and Shenhua, right beside, are the ones after us. Still, enough, is enough. I am tired of Revy hounding me. I am going to settle this once and for all, tonight. Fortunately, I am nowhere near drunk. No even buzzed. All that drinking at Quarks has increased my alcohol thresholds.'
(_)
Outside, after looking a the carnage they all had just caused, Future Revy, the Revy in the center of the group, in her usual clothing, turned to her daughters, as she said, “Mommy is very proud of you.”
Rebecca and Yukio turned, and smiled at her.
(_)
Rock heard the comment, as she thought, 'Revy becomes a mother. I do not like where is going. It is almost like what I saw at the...'
(_)
Outside, Yukio asked, “Is it okay if I handle this?”
Both Revys said, in unison, “Sure.”
Yukio let of the forearm of her machine gun, with her left hand, as she held her weapon by its grip, with her right hand. At the same time, she pointed her weapon at the ground, while keeping her trigger finger resting against the trigger guard.
Yukio yelled, “First of all! Stop talking to each other! Reasons for this will soon become clear as to why you should not speak to each other! Now, we have no interest in attacking you right now, so don't make us come in there! It would not be pretty! Now, everyone get out here! Group back up, and come out! Rock and her group to your right! The group of three in the middle! The brothers to the your left!”
Everyone did as they were requested to do.
A minute later, they were outside and in their proper groups.
Yukio then pointed to the sky, with her left hand. She ordered, “Everyone! Look up!”
They did so and saw that the night sky seem to be literally breaking apart.
Yukio stated, “This is what happens when you have a paradox.”
Yukio pointed at Rock's group, “Past.”
Yukio pointed at the Bob, Ed, and B, “Present.”
Yukio pointed at the brothers, “Future.”
Yukio continued, “All of you are intelligent people. So, I think you have figured out what is going on here. All three of your groups need to leave and avoid each other in the future. Do not worry about answers. If things go the way they should, you will all live to have your questions answered in the fullness of time. And just because we are being nice, we are giving you all a head start. Consider this our good deed for the year.”
The Hell Saber members, both present and future, along with the teenage girls all laughed for a few seconds.
(_)
The groups looked at each other for a moment. Then, they looked back up at the sky. They all realized, as much as they wanted to talk to each other, they couldn't. Less than a minute later, each group went their separate ways.
(_)
As Lewis and Stan walked away form everyone else, Lewis pulled out his reality device, while stated, “Let's get out of here, while the getting it good, and find some help.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
(_)
As everyone else left, the girls all saw the sky starting to return to the normal dark night.
The Revy in her hardsuit said, “Well, that crisis has been averted. So, let us all go get a drink to celebrate saving existence. Even you teenagers can come. I was never one for that twenty-one years or older rule.
The other Revy agreed, “You got that right.”
The teenager girls smiled at them.
As they all entered the destroyed bar, the Hell Sabers removed their helmets.
The Revy in her usual clothing yelled, “Hey bartender! We know you're alive! We could use some service!”
(_)
Behind the bar counter, the bartender's eyes went wide, as he tightly gripped his shotgun.
He thought, with a combination of fear and rage, 'Not that demon woman's voice! Damn you! Damn you! Damn you! How could I be so unlucky?! I crossed entire realities to get away from you, and you still found a way to wreck my bar!'
He then heard Revy's voice, which was just above the bar, warned, “Don't make us pull you out.”
He immediately jumped up and pointed the barrel of his shotgun at the Revy he saw was wearing her usual outfit, as he yelled, “Damn you, Revy! You destroyed my bar, again!”
He then saw the group she was with.
There was a Revy, with her cutlasses, and a second Revy in power armor, pointing her gauntlet mounted railguns at the bartender.
Shenhua, with her long knives, and a second Shenhua in power armor, holding two lightsabers.
Sawyer, with her chainsaw, and a second Sawyer in power armor, with wrist blades popped out.
The maid, Roberta, with cybernetics and in a power armor, pointing her wrist mounted firearms as the bartender.
Eight teenage girls that looked as dangerous as the rest.
Molly way holding her two semi-automatic stainless steel pistols, like the weapons Revy used.
Sarah was holding her katana.
By those two, Kristina had on her gauntlets.
Rebecca was holding her two long knives.
Yukio was holding her large machine gun.
Nodoka was holding a staff made of ice.
Lightning erupted from Yurika's hands
Flames surrounded Mikoto hands.
And behind all of them was a large pink robot, that barely was able to clear the ceiling, whom was hold two giant flaming swords in her hands, that were point towards him, over the heads of the other women there.
All of them were pointing their weapons, or powers, at him.
Future Revy asked, with curiosity, “Bao, is that you? It is you! We wondered what happened to you.”
At such a fearful sight right in front of him, a lesser man, facing these women alone, would have soiled themselves, and passed out. Bao just slightly wet himself.
Bao slowly lowered his weapon onto the bar counter, as he said in best calm manner he could in his nervous state, “Ladies. The drinks are on the house.”
Past Revy said, “Thanks Bao. But, you are still coming with us. Good bartenders are so hard to find. And trust me. You will like having your life extended, even at the price we are giving you.”
Future Revy stated, “But first, we could use some drinks.”
Bao thought, 'I am screwed. I might as well serve them, and see where this situation leads.' He requested, “What would ladies like to have to drink?'
Past Revy turned to the girls, as she requested, “Put away your weapons, power down, or whatever, so we can have a party.”
Future Revy, Molly and Yukio set the safeties to their firearms to the on positions.
Molly and Future Revy then holstered their weapons.
After which, Future Revy picked up Bao's shotgun. She pointed the weapon away from everyone, as she unloaded it. Next, Future Revy toss the shotgun across the room.
Meanwhile, Yukio leaned her machine gun against the outer bar counter wall.
Future Sawyer turned off her chainsaw, and set it on top of the counter.
The Hell Sabers set their helmets on top of the counter as well.
Rebecca, Sarah, Future Shenhua, Past Shenhua, Past Sawyer, and Arcee sheathed their weapons.
Kristina powered down her gauntlets. Past Revy powered down her hardsuit's knucklebombers.
Roberta has her shoulder mounted missile pods lower back into her hardsuit.
The flames disappeared from Mikoto's hands. As lightning disappeared from Yurika's hands.
Nodoka's ice staff disappeared into a fine mist.
Past Revy smile as she turned back to face Bao. She noticed Bao was frowning. She stated, “Bao. don't be that way. We are not going to kill. And we are not going to torture you. With this crew, you got to admit things could be a lot worse for you.”
Bao dropped his frown, as he admitted, “You are correct about that, Revy. So, how did you find me?”
Past Revy answered, “We didn't. We were following our prey, three times over. You seemed to be a crossroads for their fates.”
Bao shrugged, as he replied, “That is nothing new.”
Revy thought about Bao comment for a few seconds. She then said, “No. It strangely isn't.”
Kristina spoke up, “Nice to meet, Bao. Does that jukebox still work?” She then used her right hand to point at the shot up jukebox, which had its lights still on.
Bao picked up an empty beer bottle from behind the bar counter, and he threw it at the jukebox.
As the beer bottle shattered against the jukebox, the machine started playing county music.
Bao said, “Yea. It still works.”
The women and girls laughed at his trick.
Kristina complemented, “Nice trick.”
Bao deadpanned, “Years of having Revy as a customer has taught me how to get shot up stuff to work.”
The woman laughed even some more from Bao's comment. Even the two Revys laughed.
A few seconds later, the women and girls quieted down, Bao inquired, “So, what can I get for you? Keep mind those robots did a number on my hard alcohol collection.”
Past Revy answered, “I think we will start with beer for everyone. We are on duty, and I don't know the tolerance these girls have for alcohol.”
Molly spoke up, “We each can handle a few bottles of beer with ease. But, I think it best we stay away from the rum, and other strong drinks for right now.”
Future Revy stated, “And we are not looking to get drunk just yet, either.”
Past Revy said, “There is your answer. Beer bottles all around.”
Bao bent down, and opened a fridge below the bar counter that was still cold on the inside. He did a count of the number of beer bottles, and what types they were.
Bao stood up, and looked at the women and girls, as he stated, “I got about three dozen cold beers. Fortunately, they are good brands. I am sure I got some more in back.”
Past Revy responded, “You are not leaving our sight.”
Bao said, “Then, you are going to have to make do with what I have here.”
Past Revy shrugged, as she replied, “We can live with that.”
Bao bent down and started pulling out fresh, unopened bottles of beers from the fridge, and setting the bottles on to the top of counter.
Future Revy grabbed the bottles of beer, as they were set on the counter, and she passed them around.
After Bao pulled out fifteen bottles of beer, he stood back up. He looked up at Arcee, as he asked, “What is your name, pink robot?”
Arcee commented, “My name is, Arcee.”
Bao said, “Well, Arcee, you are the first robot I have ever knowingly served. So, I have to ask. Do you want a beer?”
Arcee responded, “No. But, thank you for asking.”
Bao replied, “You're welcome.”
Rebecca joked, “Still, that is good, Arcee. Because you can be the designated driver.”
Everyone, except Bao, laughed at Rebecca's joke for a few seconds, including Arcee.
Between laughs, Arcee mentioned, “It was not be first time I hauled Revy drunk ass home. And that is real fun in motorcycle mode, with no arms, and I have to keep shifting my weight, while rolling down the road, to keep her from falling off, while also preventing us both from tipping over.
Bao deadpanned, “You think that is something. The stories I could tell you, Arcee.”
Arcee cracked a grin, as she replied, “I bet.”
Everyone else even laughed harder.
(_)
A few minutes later, after everyone, but Arcee, and Bao, had a bottle of beer, and drunken a few swallows of the alcohol, Past Revy looked at the teenage girls, and then at Future Revy, as she asked, “So, who are these kids? And what are their names?”
Future Revy turned to Past Revy, as she stated, “I'm sorry, Revy, but I cannot tell you. Because it would great a paradox. Besides, I don't know about the girls with the green hair, purple hair, and blue hair with black highlights. But, I have my suspicions. Still, if I told you who the other five are, you would likely not stop laughing for a week. And we both know we cannot keep a secret for long to save our life. With that being where the paradox is created.”
Past Revy shrugged, as she conceded, “You have me there. Well, us there.”
Rebecca turned to the two Revys, as she joke, “This includes us not telling you who wins the next fifteen, or so, world series, in baseball.”
All the teenage girls giggled a little.
All the adults, even Bao, and Arcee, either groaned, or rolled their eyes, for a few seconds, in annoyance. They then turned their attention back to the teenage girls.
Bao spoke up, “Come on girls. Everyone has seen those three time travel movies. And they are tame compared to what I am looking at first hand.”
Kristina agreed, “True, on both counts. Though, we never did really pay attention to sports. Our personal lives and adventures were just so much more interesting. So, we couldn't tell you, even if we wanted too.”
Molly said, “Look on the bright side, you will all find out eventually. Still, let's just have some fun with the rules being no names, and no talking about the future.”
The rest of the teenage girls nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Past Revy stated, “That works for me.”
Future Revy replied, “Same here.”
Future Shenhua said, “I can go along with it.”
Past Sawyer stated, “I think I speak for myself, and my future self, when I say I am okay with it.”
Future Sawyer commented, “Yes. We are okay it.”
Past Shenhua said, “Let's just have some fun.”
Roberta commented, “It is always nice to relax.”
Arcee stated, “Being with you girls is always entertaining.”
Roberta turned to the trio of teenage sisters, as she commented, “Those are some nice tricks with the elemental abilities.”
Yurika replied, “Thank you.”
Mikoto said, “Coming from you, we consider that a high compliment.”
Nodoka commented, “It is not everyday that the Bloodhound gives praise to someone.”
Roberta smirked, as she stated, “Don't read too much into it.”
(_)
A few feet away, Past Shenhua turned to Rebecca, as she asked, “I noticed you fighting style with those short swords. I was wondered who you learned from, or will learn from, in the use of those weapons?”
Future Shenhua looked over at the two of them, as she giggled, due to her already knowing the answer.
Rebecca answered, “Actually, you are going to teacher me someday. And you were, or are, going to be, a wonderful teacher.”
Past Shenhua replied, “Interesting. And thank you.”
Future Shenhua smiled, as she spoke up, “I am still looking forward to teaching you.”
Past Shenhua smiled, as she agreed, “So am I.”
Future Shenhua added, “But, since you are a nice child, I think we will have a wonderful teacher-student relationship.”
Rebecca smiled back at both of Shenhuas, as she stated, “Oh, we will.”
(_)
Nearby, the two Sawyers were talking.
Past Sawyer asked Future Sawyer, “So, have you already met our past self, as our future self, in Roanapur, yet?”
Future Sawyer answered, “Yes. That was a while ago for myself. And it was fun both times.”
Past Sawyer said, “That is something for me to look forward too. I take it that those teenage boys we just saved here are the same boys we met then?”
Future Sawyer agreed, “I would guess so. I don't have any answers on them, yet. And I am sure these teenagers have the answers. But, we cannot ask them because it might create a paradox.”
Past Sawyer responded, “If the redheaded girl with the machine gun is right, we will find out eventually. By the way, on the matter of paradox, do you remember this conversation we are having right now?”
Future Sawyer replied, “No. As you know, our memories are not that good. While I remember being here, from your point of view. Talking to myself future self, as I am not. Though, I do not remember our exact conversation.”
Past Sawyer rubbed her right, gloved hand, against her electrolarynx choker on her throat, that was part of her hardsuit, as she commented, “Let us be thankful for that.”
Future Sawyer stated, “So true. By the way, I am still looking into getting our voice, and the our scars, fixed. I got a name of a doctor, and I have the wealth to do it. Now, I just need to meet with the doctor for an appointment to talk about the regeneration and reconstructive surgeries.”
Past Sawyer said, “I look forward to it.”
Future Sawyer commented, “So, do I. Don't let anything happen to, Annie. And try to be nice to her, even through you enemies, right now.”
Past Sawyer smirked, as she thought, in understanding, 'So, that is who our contact is. And if I read between the lines correctly, we won't be enemies forever.' She stated, “Don't worry. I won't.”
Future Sawyer returned Past Sawyer's smirk, as she replied, “Good.”
The Sawyers then noticed that Yukio had moved over to stand by them, at the bar counter, near her machine gun. With Yukio having move around, beforehand, for a few minutes, to talk to her friends.
Past Sawyer commented, “Speak of the devil.”
Both Sawyers turned to face Yukio, as Future Sawyer inquired, “That think must get heavy after a while?” She lightly tapped her shoe against the out bar wall, near where Yukio machine gun was leaning against the wall.
Yukio turned to the two Sawyers, as she realized that Future Sawyer was talking about her Browning Automatic Rifle. Yukio answered, “Yes, it does. But, the raw firepower makes it worth it.”
Past Sawyer suggested, “I have not seen you use a shoulder strap at all. It would make it easier on your arms, and your stamina, if you use a shoulder strap.”
Yukio responded, “Yes. But, I know of case where having a strap got the person killed, when their weapon got caught in a tight space, a bullet jammed, or they just ran out of ammo. Without the strap, I can quickly discard it, and dive for cover”
Future Sawyers replied, “Good point.”
Past Sawyer complimented, “That is a good precaution.”
Yukio replied, “Thanks.”
(_)
Nearby, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Arcee, and the two Revys were talking, as the women and girls of the group enjoyed their bottles of beer.
Arcee looked over at Kristina, as she inquired, “So, where did you get the gauntlets from? I can identify all the other weapons. But, not them.”
Kristina stated, “Parents got them from the Star Wars reality.”
Arcee replied, “Oh.”
Future Revy overheard Kristina comments, as she stated, “I look forward to that trip.”
Past Revy was right beside her counterpart. She heard everything, as well. She turned Future Revy, as she to inquired, “So, you know her?”
Future Revy turned to Past Revy, as she answered, “Yea. I know five of the teenage girls here. Counting our daughters. But, I cannot tell anything about them.”
Past Revy questioned, “Let me guess. It is really juicy? And worth the wait?”
Future Revy answered, “Yes. On both counts.” She then turned to Sarah, as she asked, “Since we are not saying names, I will just say, you with the katana. I saw you do some nice moves with that sword, on those robots. I was wondering. How good are you?”
Sarah turned to Future Revy, as she smiled. She stated, “I am very good with my blade. Why do you ask?”
Future Revy explained, “The reason I asked, is because there was this one guy I fought, way back when, that could cut bullets with his sword. Including bullets I fired as him. Barring the Roberta here, this guy, Jumbo. I called him for his size. Was the only other person that came within an inch of killing me in battle.”
Molly, Sarah, and Kristina laughed for a few seconds.
Future Revy commented, “Let me guess. Private joke?”
Sarah cryptically said, “Yes. But, you will find out eventually. Let's just say karma has a sense of humor.”
Past Revy stated, “With our actions, and deeds, karma is never a good thing with us.”
Future Revy replied, “Ain't that the truth.”
Sarah, said in a confronting tone of voice, “Don't worry. It is not a bad secret. Just a strange one.”
Past Revy replied, “Okay.”
Future Revy stated, “I guess I will find out, later.”
Sarah replied, “That you will. And it will be an interesting time for everyone involved.”
The group then continued their conversation, with their discussion moving towards more causal subjects. Such as the weapons everyone uses. And their likes and dislikes. Though, those from the future were careful about not telling those of the past, even their past counterparts, about the future, so as to avoid the risk of creating a paradox.
(_)
A while later, after all the women and girls had another round of drinks, and the jukebox finally died.
A few minutes after the music stopped, Molly stated, “Well, this was fun. But, we got to go.”
Rebecca turned to Molly, as she questioned, “Do we have to?”
Molly answered, “Yes. My instincts tell me it is time to leave. Besides, we have been up for almost sixteen hours. We could some sleep, back home.”
Rebecca yawned. She then conceded, “You're right. We could use some sleep.”
Kristina commented, “I believe my bed is calling my name.”
Sarah said, “Well, this was fun.”
Yukio picked up her machine gun, as she replied, “I agree. If it wasn't for the fact that reality almost collapse in on itself, I would suggest we do this another time.”
Everyone, including Bao, laughed a little bit.
Kristina said, “See you all in the future. Except for you, Bao. I don't have a clue what happens to you.”
Bao deadpanned, “I will consider that a good thing.”
Kristina slyly commented, “Still, I want you to know, that you are probably the best bartender I ever had, both times you served me something to drink.”
Bao raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Huh?”
Kristina coyly said, “Think about. These gauntlets are also flamethrower. Though, last time, you didn't serve me beer.”
Bao immediately understood, as he thought, 'Torch. Got to be. How? Reincarnation. Of course, the redheads are the vampire twins. From what I was told of those two, these two redhead fit the bill in a few ways. Including that BAR. So, they a reincarnated, also. And they seem to be in a better disposition, as well.'
'I am not sure about the two blonds. But, what I heard of the two Revys' comments to blond with the katana, I have my suspicions on the sword woman. And I have a feeling I may someday piece that one together.'
'Still, who is Torch's parents in her current incarnation? Wait a minute. No just the skin color. One of her parents has to be Dutch. Dutch one time showed me a picture of himself when he was younger. When he was sporting similar brown dreadlocks... But, I wonder... Given what I saw at the Tower... Well, I am not looking forward to that for myself... But, I still got to know.'
Bao coyly asked, “Do you take after your father? Or mother?”
Kristina smirked, as she answered, “Mother.”
For Boa, it started as a small chuckled, that turned into full blown laughter.
Past Revy looked at Future Revy. She noticed that her future counterpart was also staring at Bao.
Past Revy inquired, “What is it?”
Future Revy answered, “I don't believe. He is one of the few people to figure it out on his own. And with my memory, I don't remember this from your point of view.”
Future Revy thought, 'He figured out both Dutch was changed into a woman, and Kristina is Dutch's child. He likely figured out who the other children are, as well. And who their parents are. At least, one of their parents. Given the way the rest of us conceived our children. I doubt he knows that part, with the magic powder, and the medical instruments.'
Past Revy shrugged, as she said, “It happens.” She thought, 'I am not completely sure what Bao figured out. But, I guess I will some day find out.'
Future Revy replied, “Still, he is to good a bartender to kill over this. Besides, we will all learn the truth eventually. Besides, Bao can keep a secrets. Or, he would have long since been killed in Roanapur.”
Past Revy responded, “True. And I wont' ask him about it. But, I didn't realize Bao has such intelligence.”
Molly overheard them. She turned to both Revys as she stated, “Never underestimated, Bao. The very fact he survived years as your bartender should tell you that he is far more intelligent than most people would give him credit for.”
Bao continued laughing, as he leaned his head and arms on top of the bar counter, while he lightly banged his right fist against the counter top, in laughter.
Half a minute later, Bao stopped laughing. As he lifted his head, he quickly stated, “Don't worry, girls. I will keep your secret.”
Molly said, “I believe you. And good luck, Bao. You are going to need it.”
Bao nodded twice, as he stated, “That we both agree on. Thanks. And goodbye to you too.”
Molly ordered, “Okay girls, group up with me.” She then pulled out her reality device, as she walked out into an empty, open area of the hollowed out room.
A few seconds later, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio came over beside Molly.
Molly turned to the others, near the bar counter, as she smiled at them. She said, “See you in all in the future.” She then thought of where and when she wanted to go, as she pressed the red button on her reality device, and all five of the Lagoon sisters disappeared into another reality.
Just then, Mikoto coughed.
Everyone at the bar counter turned to see Mikoto, Yurika, and Nodoka standing next to each other, in another empty space in the room.
Mikoto had her reality device in her hands, as she politely said, “While, we are not as dramatic as those girls. We would like to say that it was fun. And we hope for the best for your future, from now to when you meet us, and beyond.”
Roberta commented, “Thank you. Now, that is a comment worthy of praise.”
All three sisters smiled and nodded towards Roberta, as Mikoto replied, “You're welcome.”
A second later, Mikoto used her reality device, and all three sisters disappeared, as they jumped to another reality.
Past Revy walked over to the bar counter, as she picked up her helmet. She turned to her future counterpart, as she said, “I guess it is our turn to leave... Well, duty calls.” She turned to Bao, as she ordered, “Come on Bao. You have a date with a vat. And Chang is going to happy to hear to you have returned to the fold.”
Bao deadpanned, “And here I was hoping you forget about me.”
Past Revy stated, “You are a very memorable person. Besides, the reasons we haven't harmed you, yet. Which is rare for us. Is because, except for pulling the shotgun at beginning, which we all fully understand, you have been completely cooperate, while showing how skilled a bartender you are. In your situation, most people would have cracked by now. On the other hand, you displayed you professionalism.”
Bao asked, “Thank you. Any chance you would let me go for being so nice?”
Past Revy smirked, as she answered, “No.”
Bao said, “Damn”
Bao then walked around the bar counter, to where the Past Revy was standing.
Meanwhile, the other Hell Sabers, walked up to the bar counter, grabbed their helmets, and put them on.”
The three women, along with Arcee, walked over to stand beside Past Revy.
As they did so, Past Revy put on her helmet, as well.
Using her helmet microphone, and her helmet's outside speakers, Past Shenhua stated, “I literally looked forward to doing this again in the future.”
Future Shenhua commented, “Well, just so you know. It was more fun the second time around.”
Both Shenhuas laughed a little over their comments.
Future Sawyer requested, “Remember what I told you, Sawyer.”
Past Sawyer said, through her speaker, “I will. And good luck.”
Past Revy said, through her speaker, “Now, back to the fun. Back to the past.”
Future Revy commented, “Yea. You were blasts from the past.”
All the women, along with Arcee, laughed at Future Revy's comment.
Past Revy then used her hardsuit's build in reality device to returned to Chang's Tower, at the proper time, in the Black Lagoon reality.
All five Hell Sabers, long with Bao, instantly disappear into the past of the multiverse, as they jumped realities.
A few seconds later, Revy said, “Well, it looks like it is just us, now.”
Sawyer replied, “Yes. But, it was fun while it lasted.”
Shenhua responded, “I agree. Still Sawyer, did you tell your past self about her future, your past?”
Sawyer turned to Shenhua. She coyly answered, “No more than what my future self did for me in my past self's position.”
Revy commented, “Now, that is a mind screw.”
Sawyer heard Revy, as she replied, “Perhaps.”
Sawyer looked over at Revy, as she asked, using her electrolarynx choker, “Revy, I have a serious question, for you.”
Revy stated, “Shoot.”
Sawyer stated, “Shenhua and I have been talking for while on the journey, and we are thinking that when we get back to the yacht, we are going to forgive Lotton for her part in Chang's operations, and brainwashing of us.”
Shenhua commented, “I think she has paid her dues, with losing her manhood, and her services on our yacht, and in our beds.”
Revy said, “Not to sound like a hypocrite. But, you actually slept with her, considering she did brainwash us?”
Shenhua smiled, as she said, “Of course. As a guy, Lotton was great in bed. And we found out that as a woman, she is even better.”
Sawyer giggled.
Revy raised an eyebrow, as she commented, “Really?”
Sawyer said, “Really.”
Shenhua commented, “And those three ways are fun.”
Revy shook her head in disbelief for a few seconds. She then responded, “Well, I have learned to move on in a lot of ways. I am just going after Bob, for the challenge of it. Still, when I comes to Lotton, I will support whatever you to decide to do.”
Sawyer said, “Thanks Revy.”
Shenhua inquired, “On another matter, I wondered what happened to Bao? We put him in the vat, but we were defeated before we saw what she would have looked like, when she got out. And I know there was enough time for her to fully change.”
Sawyer said, with her electrolarynx choker, “Mores the pity. Though, I doubt the peacekeepers took anyone out, until they were fully changed. If they did, they would likely stick them back in, when they realized that they would get sick if they stayed only partly changed.”
Revy stated, “Sawyer is right. It is likely the peacekeepers got to her. Considering all our lifespans, we will likely see Bao again. Whether she likes it, or not.”
The three women then heard a man, from the front of the bar, yell, “Revy! We got business to discussion!”
The three women turned and saw Bob, Ed, and B.
Revy smirked, as she said, “Well, look who decided not to run.”
Shenhua commented, “I never thought I would see that day, that he would actually come after us.”
Sawyer said, “And it was turning into such a good night.”
Bob stated, “Revy, I challenge to a duel.”
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
As some say. “In life, it is those that you meet along the way, that count.”
That was the most complicated, intricate set of interweaving chapters, I have ever created. But, it was worth it.
Please note, to avoid confusion, the last scene in this chapter is a lead into to Part II of Those You Meet Along the Way in, Book Three, Chapter Twelve, The Student, The Hacker, And The Soldier, of this story series.
If you want to read the rest of that scene, where I left off. Just go back to Book Three, in the middle of Chapter Twelve.
The next chapter of this book is about the Brothers. And they are about to meet an interesting character known as the Midnight Bounty Hunter. Whom is one of the few bounty hunters in this story that is not after the brothers. Don't worry, it will all make sense in the next chapter.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Five: “The Midnight Bounty Hunter.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, and unknown alternate Earth. Date, unknown. Place, unknown. Time, evening, before sunset.
The next thing the brothers knew, they were standing on a dirt narrow road.
As they looked around, they saw they were on a dirt the road lead out from some forest, and into a prairie as far as they could see.
They also noticed that it was close to sunset, with the temperature already being in the low sixties Fahrenheit With the sun setting on the prairie side of the landscape.
Stan stated, “Any ideas where we are?”
Lewis pocketed his reality device, as he said, “No landmarks. So, no clue. But, if we cannot find shelter soon, we are going to need your lighter to build a fire tonight, while we try to find whomever the device sent of to find, for help.”
Stan replied, “That works for me.” He then pulled out his zippo lighter. Next, he tested it, to make sure it work. After which, he pocketed it.
Lewis then looked over at the sunset, lowing over the prairie landscape, with the sun low enough that it was save to look at.
Lewis commented, “At least the view of sunset is nice.”
Stan turned towards the sunset, and looked out at the landscape. He agreed, “Yea. It is.”
Suddenly, as they were looking at the prairie, a two horse draw, wooden, four wheeled wagon, with three grown men on it, two in the front, on the bench, and one in the back bed, barreled out from forest, towards the brothers.
Lewis and Stan heard the wagon, as they turned around.
They had just enough time to jump out of the way, off the road, in the same direction, to their left side.
Unfortunately, their presence spooked the horses into turning the opposite way, to the horses' right side, and into a small ditch.
Stan and Lewis quickly stood up, and turned their attention over to the wagon.
Lewis said, “Those people may be hurt.”
Stan replied, “They we need to offer our help, and apologize.”
The brothers walked over to the wagon, and the three men, as Stan said, “Sorry about that. We would be more than happy to help you get you wagon back on the road. And if any of your are hurt, let us know. And we will do what we can to help you.”
As they watched the men got out of the wagon, stood on the ground, and looked out them.
The three men wore pants, and shirts, and leather vests.
And they did not appear to be injured, though they looked upset, as two of them pulled out knives, and the other one pulled out a pistol.
One of the men with a knife, asked, in english, “Where the hell did you to come from?”
Stan stated, “Long story.”
The man whom addressed the brothers stated, “You are not going to live to tell it.”
But, before anyone could react, there was gunshot here in the distance, from the forest. The bullet hit the man that had address the brothers, in his head. The man dropped his knife, as he fell to the ground, dead.
The brothers turned to see a who had taken the shot. They saw man galloping towards them, while firing a rifle at the three men whom were about to attack the brothers.
The man rode on a black horse, with a black saddle. He was dressed all in black. Black shirt, black leather vest, black pants, black belt, black gunbelt, black boots, black long coat, and black cowboy hat.
He was a fair skinned man with black hair that went to his shoulder blades, and was tied with a smile black string, into a ponytail. Along with this, he had a well kept, full beard.
The rifle he was using was a Winchester Model eighteen ninety-two, fifteenth round, level-action rifle.
As his horse galloped towards them, the man quickly used his rifle to put two bullets into the heads of other two men that were intent on harming the brothers, killing them before they even hit the ground.
Soon after, the man started to slow down his horse, until he stopped right in front of the teenage boys
As he got off his horse, he walked over to the boys, and the brothers go a closer look at him.
The man also had a revolver holsters on a gunbelt, on his right hip, while he had a large knife sheathed in a scabbard on his gunbelt, on his left hip.
The man then holstered his rifle in a black leather holster located on his back, over his long coat. The holster was head up by being attached to the coat.
When the man in black finally reach the boys, the man came to a stop, as he looked at them up and down from a second.
The man in black then stated, in english, “Thank you for stopping them. My horse was starting to tire. I did not expect them to steal that wagon in mid-chase.”
Stan thought, 'Those men were planning to kill us. So, I don't mind them being killed. But, we need help. Let's see if he can help us.' Stan requested, in english, “Glad to be of help. Could you help us get to a town?”
The man replied, “Sure. If you are willing to give me some help.”
Lewis stated, in english, “It depends on the help.”
The man said, “Well fortunately, the bounties on these three men pay either dead or alive.”
Lewis asked, “What did they do?”
The man answered, “They are both thieves and murderers. You are both lucky to be alive.”
Lewis replied, “Then, thank you for saving us.” He thought, 'Better them dead, than us.'
The man replied, “You're welcome.”
Stan inquired, “So, what do you need us to do?”
The man asked, “Do you know how to drive a horse draw wagon?”
Stan stated, “Let me guess, you want us to haul your bounties into town for you, in the wagon.”
Lewis commented, “You will find us to be quick learners. Though, we do not know how to work horse. But we are more than willing to learn.”
The man responded, “That will be fine. And I will be with you. So, that you should be fine. I will even help you get you a room at the local hotel, I occasionally use.”
Lewis inquired, “How far is the nearest town?”
The man replied, “Half a mile back through the forest. If we work hard, we will be there right before dark.”
Lewis stated, “Okay.”
The man commented, “From your clothing, I am guessing that you are not from around here.”
Stan stated, “No. We are not. I am Stan Lowe. This is my brother, Lewis Lowe. By the way, where are we?”
The man answered, “Well, Stan and Lewis, welcome to the Western Territories of the United States of America.”
The brothers looked at each other, as Stan said, “Western Territories? We are in the old west of the U.S.”
The man hid his smile, as he listened to the brothers.
Lewis asked, “Which reality?”
Stan said, with concern in his tone of voice, “Who cares? This is serious. This is clearly not a John Wayne western reality. This is a gritty, Clint Eastwood style western reality. We could be in some serious trouble here. We might want to leave.”
Lewis countered, “Maybe we are where we need to be?”
Stan inquired, “You think our device works like that?”
Lewis replied, “The device might have sent us to this guy.”
Stan shrugged, as he said, “Worth finding out.”
The brothers then look over at the bearded man. They saw that he had been watching and listening to them.
Lewis commented, with concern, “I think he listened to everything we said.”
Stan said, with worry, “This could be trouble.”
The bearded man chuckled. He then stated, “You two remind me of someone I use to know. A man that liked to joke around, in the most intense of situations.”
Stan asked, “What happened to him?”
The man coyly replied, “He brought the universe to its knees. And he then wisely retired, before the universe could reply.”
Lewis said, “Now, that is an interesting man.”
The man agreed, “He most certainly is. I will be right back.”
The man then walked over to the wagon and two horses attached to the wagon.
After a minute of inspecting the horses and wagon, he looked back up at the brothers, while said, “Well, the horses are fine. And so is the wagon. Also, this ditch is not too deep. We can probably get these two horses to pull the wagon out of the ditch.”
Stan responded, “Sounds good. Let's get this done before it gets dark.”
The man complimented, “I like your attitude, Stan. Here is what we need to do...”
The beard man then directed the two brothers, as he helped the brother get what he needed to be done.
(_)
Ten minutes later, the two horses, and wagon were out of the ditch, and on the road, pointing into the forest.
Also, after they checked to make sure the men were dead, the bearded man in black leather, and the two brothers, had piled three bodies into the back of the wagon, with Stan and Lewis sitting up front, on the wooden bench.
Once everything was ready, the bearded man spent a few minutes explaining to control the horses.
Since they are in a wagon, and taking it slow, with the bounty hunter right beside them, on his own horse, to the brother's right side. With all of them making their way down the road.
The bounty hunter believe that at long as he was present, this job would not present any trouble for amateurs, such as the two brothers.
Currently, Stan had the reigns to the horse. With Lewis sitting to Stan's left side.
As the bounty hunter, on his black horse, trotted down the road, he turned to his left side, and towards brothers. He asked, “Are you boys doing okay?”
Both brothers turned to the man, as Stan said, “Yes.”
Lewis responded, “Yes. But, we never got your name?”
The bounty hunter responded, “I am known as the Midnight Bounty Hunter. You can call me, Midnight.”
Lewis replied, “Nice name. It is explains the clothing.”
Midnight cracked a grin, as he said, “Yes. It does.”
Stan inquired, “So, why do you call yourself, Midnight?”
Midnight answered, “Because, I prefer to work at night, especially during the summer months, when I cannot stand the heat of the day.”
Stan replied, “Works us. And, I agree with my brother. I find your name kind of cool.”
Midnight said “Glad to hear it. Now, let us take this easy, and get back to town.”
Midnight then made his horse slowly trot forward, into the forest.
The brother turned to face ahead of the bounty hunter, as Stan used continued to use the reigns to make the two horses pull the wagon forward, right behind the Midnight Bounty Hunter.
(_)
Fortunately, the Lowe Brothers and Midnight made is back to the nearby town, without any problems.
Around two hours after the Stan and Lewis had first arrived in the area, Midnight had turned in the bounties to the local sheriffs office. Along with the bounties, Midnight also dropped the wagon and two horses that were with the wagon, off at the Sheriffs office, so they could be returned to their rightful owners.
Afterward, Midnight took his horse to a local stall, and he wiped down his horse, and took off his saddle, carrying it with him, as Midnight lead Lewis and Stan a local hotel in the small town.
By then, it was dark.
After checking Midnight after check in, with each of them getting a room, Midnight kept one of the three keys. He then gave a key to Stan, and a key to Lewis.
Next, Midnight dropped his saddle off in his hotel room. After which, the three individuals went into the dining room of the hotel to order some supper and drinks.
When they reached the dining hallway, the brothers and Midnight sat at a table.
The room itself was half full. Though, the people present, from the customers, to staff, were civil, with most of them being polite.
The dining area was also a bar, with a bar counter set across the room from where Midnight, Stan, and Lewis, sat at their table.
Each of them had a bottle of warm bottle of beer to drink. Along with cooked steak and a warmed up serving of canned beans, to eat.
All of this was being paid for by Midnight, for the brothers help in catching the three bounties.
As they enjoyed their dinner, Midnight commented, “Well, I get the feeling that you boys are running from someone.”
Stan snorted.
Lewis sarcastically stated, “Who aren't we running from?”
Midnight inquired, “You boys don't have any bounties on you?”
Both brothers tensed up.
Midnight casually said, “Don't worry. I don't take bounties on children. Besides, something tells me that you boys are not criminals.”
Stan stated, “We are not criminals. We are idiots, whom solved a math problem we shouldn't have. And the person whom put the bounty on us wants what's in our head.”
Midnight chuckled for a bit. He then said, “Sorry. You just remind of that guy, again. Anyway, you were saying.”
Stan stated, “We are looking for help.”
Midnight asked, “What kind of help?”
Lewis said, “Well, we know who is after us. That is likely the only thing we know for sure. Our parents keep a boat of secrets from us. And then those secrets came to visit while they were out of town. And our parents never prepared us for this... Well... We...”
Stan jumped into the conversation, as he stated, “What my brother is trying to say is that, sadly, we don't know how to fight. At all. We are book smart, and somewhat street smart. But, we don't know how to fight. The kicker is that we found out, after this mess started, that our parents are real badasses. And they didn't teach us the first thing about hand to hand combat, nor use of a gun.”
Midnight smiled, as he offered, “Those problems I can fix. Tomorrow morning, around ten, I will start teaching you two the basics of how to fight, and how shoot.”
Lewis asked, “Thank you. Though, why are you helping us?”
Midnight answered, “Because you need help. And you both remind me of some of the best times of my life.”
Lewis said, “We are grateful for you generosity.”
Stan replied, “We appreciate you gratitude.”
Midnight said, “You are welcome. Still, I am guessing you may have some other questions for me. Such, as the fact, from your clothing, you are from a more sophisticated place.”
Stan responded, in an uncomfortable tone of voice, “Yea. We probably need to mention we don't have any of the local money.”
Midnight commented, “That will not a problem. You need my help. And I will help you. Also, before you ask. The answer is, no. I am not going to ask you to bounty hunt and kill for me.”
Lewis inquired, “That is a relief. Also, where is the outhouse? Toilet paper? Bathhouse? Where and how do we wash our hands at night? Also, we need to know where to get our clothes washed? As these are our only change of clothing.”
Midnight answered, in a casual tone of voice, “Don't worry. I will answer all your questions after dinner.”
(_)
A few hours later, after the brothers got their answers from Midnight, they headed for their hotel rooms, in the second story of the hotel.
Meanwhile, Midnight stated he would be up for a few more hours, while he spent some time with his friends.
As the brothers walked down the hallway to their rooms, which were across from each other, Lewis said, “We got lucky that we found Midnight.”
Stan agreed, “True. We are going to learn some things, tomorrow. Looks like your theory was correct.”
Lewis smiled, as he stated, “Yes. It is nice being a genius.”
Stan replied, “You got that right.”
By then, they made it took their rooms. As they pulled out their keys, locked, and opened the doors to their rooms, Stan turned to face his brother. He said, “Good night brother.”
Lewis turned to brother, as he responded, “Good night brother. See you in the morning.”
Stan replied, “You too.”
Both of them turned and walked into their rooms, closing and locking their doors behind them.
(_)
The next morning, around ten, after the brothers met up with Midnight for a late breakfast, Midnight took them to a field, about fifty yards town. The field had a small dirt berm at the end of it, facing away from the town.
Midnight had his rifle holstered on his back. His revolver holstered on the right side of his waist. And his knife sheathed on the left side of his waist.
Between them and the dirt berm, Midnight set up a soap box, on its side, making it stand three feet high. He then set some empty beer bottles, and bean cans, onto of top box, in a row, facing them.
After Midnight was done setting up the targets, he walked back to the boys, about thirty feet from the soap box.
When Midnight reached the brothers, he pulled out a couple of boxes of ammo from his black long coat, which he set by them, on a small rock.
Then, Midnight pulled out his six round revolver, with his right hand. He point the end of the barrel away from them, and to the ground, with his right trigger finger resting on the trigger guard. Also, the hammer of the revolver was not cocked back.
Midnight turned to face the two brothers. He stated, “Today, I am going to start off by teaching you how to use a revolver. Next, we will move to using a rifle. And finally, I will teach you some of the basics to hand to hand fighting.”
“This pistol is a Colt M eighteen ninety-two. It can hold up to six forty-one Long Colt rounds. It loads from the side. It has open iron sights. It had a double-action trigger. So, you don't have to manually pull back the hammer, every time you want to fire. Just pull back the trigger, and the hammer will cock back, fire, and rotate to the next round.”
Midnight then continued in a more serious tone of voice, “Now, the first lesson gun safety is to treat every gun as if it is loaded. And always point the end of the barrel of the gun away from everyone. Pointing the end of barrel at the ground is a good choice. A second choice is the sky.”
“Also, when you are holding a gun, with no intention of immediately firing it, rest you trigger finger. Your index finger, against the trigger guard. Do not rest it against the trigger itself.”
“In addition, if you do not plan to fire a weapon in your hand, do not have the hammer cocked back. If the hammer is cocked back, you can slowly uncock the hammer. I will show you how to do this, later.”
“I cannot stress enough, if you do not follow these basic safety rule, you might get yourself, or someone else, either seriously harmed, or killed, by accident.”
“The second rule in handling a firearm is to immediately check to see if the firearm is loaded, before you handle it. While always keep the end of the barrel pointed away from everyone. For example, this is a side loading revolver. Here is how you open it.”
Midnight showed the boys how to open the cylinder to his revolver, while he kept the revolver's barrel pointed away from them.
Midnight soon closed the cylinder, and set it in place. He pointed his pistol back to the ground.
Midnight went onto say, “If you want to discard the rounds in it, just hold it up the cylinder, while it is open.”
“The third lesson of gun safety is to only pull your firearm, if you intend to use it. And only point a gun at a person you intend to kill.”
“The fourth lesson is know your weapons. Know, how to fire it. Know how to adjust to the recoil of the weapon. Know what your ammo can and cannot do. And know how to keep, and maintain the weapon in proper working order.”
“The fifth lesson is never take an untested weapon onto the battlefield. Do you understand?”
Stan said, “Yes.”
Lewis commented, “I believe so.”
Midnight said, “Good. Now, we will move on to aiming with open iron sights.”
Midnight kept the end of the barrel pointed at the ground, away form them, as he held it in his right hand. He continued to rest his right trigger finger against the trigger guard.
Midnight then used his left index finger to point at the pointed end of the top of the gun barrel. Next he pointed at the back of the barrel, were there was a two points, with a small groove between them.
Midnight stated, “When you aim a firearm with open iron sights, like this, the way to aim is to look at the target in the distance, with the top of the pointed end of the bar lining up with the two points on the back, until the grove is full, and all three points are level with each other. With the three points making a solid line directly at your intend target.”
“And you when you want to fire a weapon, the easiest way for someone new at this, is a two-handed approach. Where you eye you use to fire with, you use the hand on that side to grip the firearm and hold it nearly straight. Also, grip the pistol firmly. And be careful in the placement of your thumb, so it does not hit the hammer. You then, hold you other hand, at the bottom of the grip. Like this.”
Midnight then showed them the two-handed fire position, as he continued, “With the thumb of the hand covering your main firing hand, being place downward, instead of above. With the thumb of main firing hand resting over the thumb of the other hand.”
“See the placements of my hands and thumbs?”
Lewis said, “Yes. I will keep that in mind.”
Stan stated, “Yes. I won't forget.”
Midnight relaxed his stance, as he inquired, “Good. So, who wants to go first? Keep in mind, these weapons can be loud. And they have a bit of a kick.”
Stan stated, “I would prefer to go first.”
Lewis offered, “That is okay. You go first.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.”
Midnight handed pistol to Stan.
Stan took the two-handed approach he was just shown. He like up the sights and fired.
He missed, and the recoil caught him a bit off guard. But, he finally hit on of the bottles on his third try.
After a few reloads, and a couple of time replacing the targets, it was Lewis' turned.
Midnight and Stan found that Lewis was a natural when it came to using the revolver. While it took a little practice for Stan to use the pistol.
After Midnight was sure that both teenage boys had a handle on the use of his revolver. He then moved onto teaching them how to use a rifle.
Midnight found both of them to be naturals when it came to using a rifle.
(_)
An hour later, Midnight moved from firearm instruction, to hand to hand combat techniques.
After Midnight holstered his weapons, he stated, “When you are fighting someone hand to hand, always remember that the whole point of such combat is to take the other guy down as fast as possible. But, always try to avoid such fighting. Relying on a firearm us a better option.”
“Also, if you don't have a gun, and the person you are facing does not have a gun, but the person is bigger and tougher than you, then run. Until you find a way to have an advantage over him, or her.”
“Now, let us start with the very basics. This is how you make a proper fist.” He then made a fist with his right hand for a few seconds. Before he relaxed his right hand, while he continued, “Never put you thumb on the inside of you fist. And don't put it over the front of you knuckles. Instead, put it at the bottom of you knuckles.”
Midnight then spent the next hour teaching the boys the basics in fighting hand to hand.
(_)
An hour later, Midnight had finished teaching Stan and Lewis the basics of hand to hand combat. And Midnight found that both brothers picked up the basics fairly quickly.
Considering it was close to lunch time. Midnight stated it was time to take a break, so they could have some lunch. He then took the boys back into town, so they could get something to eat.
The three individual soon reached the town. They walked between two buildings, in a dirt alleyway, and onto the dirt main street of the town.
As they entered the main street of the town, which was a dirt road, like all the roads in the town, they did not noticed a person to their right side, whom in a rocking chair, by the front of a building, they passed by. The person wore a long coat, and a broad rimmed fedora.
It was then that they noticed there was no one else around.
Midnight came to a stop, as he said, “Something is off, boys. Be on your guard.
The brothers immediately came to a stop, behind Midnight, as all three of them looked around.
Lewis commented, “Did we just walked into an ambush?”
Then, someone to their right side, behind them, said, “Hands up!”
All three of them raised their hands, as they turned to clockwise, towards the voice to their right side, behind them.
They then saw Cad Bane, standing beside the front of a building, next to the rocking chair, with both his blasters drawn, and pointed towards them.
A few seconds later, six other alien bounty hunters came out of the hiding spots, with their weapons pointed at Lewis, Stan, and Midnight.
Midnight said, in a sad tone of voice, “Well, boys. I am sorry, but they got the drop on us. I don't think I can help you out of this situation.”
Stan stated, “That is alright, Midnight. You already gave us more help than we could have hoped for. Still, this is turning into one hell of weekend.”
Midnight pointed out, “It's a Tuesday.”
Lewis deadpanned, “Not for us.”
Stan said, “Brother, you do realize we are in now in a space-western? In the purist sense of the term.”
Lewis responded, “I know. It would be cool, it if weren't for the fact we are being captured.”
Cad turned to Midnight, as he asked, “Do those two ever shut up?”
Midnight shrugged, as he responded, “Actually, I find what they say to be humorous. They remind me a man I knew. Though, I know where you are coming from. And it is an acquired taste. And they will stay quiet, if you tell them to do so.”
Cad said, “I will keep that in mind.”
Lewis looked over at Cad, as he asked, “So, who are you? Besides your great taste in clothing, and hats, we know nothing about you.”
Cad Bane smiled at Lewis' compliment. He introduced himself, “The name is, Cad Bane. I am from what you call the Star Wars reality. I was one of the leading bounty hunters during the Clone Wars.” He thought, 'That was an interesting briefing from my Peacekeeper contact, after Scorpius' speech. Still, it was informative.'
Stan stated, “Sorry. We only saw the six movies. But, when we get out of this, we will be looking into the various Clone Wars series, to find out more about you. Though, from what I have seen of you so far, you are clearly one hell of badass.”
Cad continued to smile, as he commented, “Thank you. I almost had you before.”
Stan agreed, in a casual tone of voice, “You almost did. But, then no one expects death from above by a small army of badasses. I know some of those girls. I know some of the abilities of a few of those girls. Trust me. You're robots were outclassed.”
Bane responded, “True. My mistake was coming along with idiot droids. And I do not make the same mistakes twice. So, I just contacted a few of the other bounty hunters after you, and we teamed up. And there is plenty of wealth for everyone from the bounty.”
“That is not considering we are also getting a bonus for bringing in both of you. And I am in this for the long term planning. I look forward to that sweet bonus. And since Scorpius doesn't want you harmed. Bringing you in unharmed will only add to my reputation with her.”
Midnight eyes narrowed as he listened to Cad Bane, but he did not say a word.
Bane continued, “And I must say, the locals here have been very reason. After we locked the local law keeper in his own jail, we told everything that we were not here for them. In response, they quickly disappeared inside their businesses and homes.”
Lewis requested, “I am glad you are taking such a practical approach to this matter. I do have one minor request. Please, don't kill our friend here.”
Cad pointed out, “I am not being paid to. So, as long as he smart, and reasonable, he will remain breathing.”
Midnight commented, “I am reasonable.”
Cad smirked, as he said, “Good.” Cad then walked out onto the street, away from everyone else, as he kept his blasters trained on Midnight, Stan, and Lewis. As Bane walked, he continued to turn to face the three people he was holding at gun point.
Midnight, and the Lowe brothers did not take their eyes off of Cad Bane.
When Bane reached the center of the street, he came to a stop. He holstered his right blaster pistol. Then, he reached under his open coat, placed his right hand on the his reality device, on the right side of the belt, around his waist.
Bane ordered, “Alright team, and you boys, over here... And not a trick, man in black, or you're dead.”
Midnight simply nodded in response, as the boys slowly walked towards Bane.
A few seconds later, Bane's team, and the boys were right by him. He then used his reality device to return to Scorpius command carrier, at the proper time and place.
After they disappeared, Midnight said, “Good luck.” He then thought, 'I might as well get something to eat. And this day was looking so nice beforehand. At least I have a poker game to look forward to, later today.'
He then turned, and headed for the hotel.
(_)
Reality, Farscape Reality. Location, Peacekeeper Space. Place, The Peacekeeper Armada. Time, eighteen hours after Scorpius gave her speech to the bounty hunters. Local time on the flagship was late morning.
It has been thirty minutes after Cad Bane has captured the boys.
On board the Flagship commander carrier, Cad Bane, along with Stan and Lewis, were escorted by Peacekeeper guards into Scorpius' office.
Meanwhile, Cad Bane's team waited elsewhere in the ship for their part of the bounties.
The door to Scorpius' office slip open, with the group entering Scorpius' office.
A few seconds later, after the group had entered the room, the door slip closed.
Standing in front of Scorpius's desk was Cad Bane, on the left side, the Lowe Brothers on the right side, with Stan being furthest to the right side. And four guards were standing behind the three individuals.
Scorpius was sitting in her chair, behind her desk, as she looked at the group in front of herself.
As Scorpius looked up at them, she gave them a casual smile. She stating, in english, “Now, what do I see before me?”
Cad smirked, as he casually replied, “A job well done. ”
Scorpius responded, “Exactly.”
Cad stated, “As you can see. I bought both your bounties alive, and unharmed.”
Scorpius said, “Yes. You have. And I am quite pleased with you, Cad Bane. I could not have asked for a better manner, in how you accomplished this job. You, and your subordinates, will get the bounty, along with the bonus, to split equally among you.”
Bane realized something, as he inquired, “That will be fine. Also, I see you know of me?”
Bane thought, 'Even if the bounty is split equality. I will still have plenty for myself. But, I need to know what Scorpius knows about myself.'
Scorpius thought, 'So, he is more interesting in what I know about him. Then, the bounty and bonus. That shows his intelligence is greater than his greed. That is good to know.'
Scorpius answered, “I believe information is a powerful tool. And to be honest, I felt of the tens of thousands of bounty hunters I hired, you would likely be one of the top one hundred that would accomplish this mission.”
Cad complimented, “Thank you, for thinking so highly of me, Scorpius.”
Scorpius replied, “Yes. And this is what I call, punctuality, Bane. I can see much potential for future business dealings, between the two of us.”
Cad continued to smile, as he said, “That is what I was hoping for.”
Lewis turned to Scorpius, as he casually spoke up, “Hi professor. Sorry about the way we left last time, but Annie made a convincing argument to leave.”
Cad Bane dropped his smile, as he turned to look at Lewis. Though, he remained silent.
Scorpius turned to Lewis, as she calmly responded, “Quiet alright, young Lewis. I freely admit that Annie can be quite persuasive. And I see I did misjudge the situation from before. Also I wish to have... As you human say, a do over.”
Lewis said, “That works for me.”
Stan kept a neutral expression, as he looked over at his brother, whom was beside him, to his left side. He then turned his attention back to Scorpius and Cad Bane.
Cad Bane looked over at Scorpius, then towards the brothers. He asked, “You are teacher and students?”
Stan stated, “Yes. Why do you think she wanted us handled with kid gloves?”
Cad replied, “Point taken. Not that it matters. As long as, I, and my team, are paid.” Bane then turned his attention back to Scorpius.
Scorpius turned to Bane, as she said, “Don't worry, Bane, we will get to your reward, soon enough. I am a woman of my word. And you, and your subordinates, will be much richer within the hour.”
Bane thought, 'Even with the bounty and bonus divided up, I will be quite wealthy. And this will be a wonderful start for me getting back into the game, on a much grander scale. Still, there is one matter.'
Bane commented, “Scorpius, as long as you pay like this, I am more than happy to work for you. But, I do have one proviso.”
Scorpius inquired, “And that would be?”
Bane stated, “I did some digging, after one of your servants told me that one of my old rivals was back, and traveling the multiverse. And I did some checking around, and I found that person is now more powerful than she has ever been.”
“I even bumped into her a few days ago, but fortunately, she clearly paid me no mind, and she likely thinks I am beneath her for her to worry about. Which works for me. I think we both know whom we are talking about. I just don't want to say the name in front of witnesses.”
Scorpius thought, 'At yes, Annie. You clearly have been paying attention, and you likely realize the same Annie as the boys mentioned is the Annie you fought a few times.'
'I have seen that Clone War series, and Bane, you are truly one of the best at your job. As you have just proven by bringing in the boys without a scratch on them. And you are clearly not as brash as you once were, when you were younger.'
Scorpius stated, “I know who you are talking about. And I fully understand the hesitation to speak her name. But, please get to the point.”
Bane said, “After much experience, I have decided that I will not take any assignments to hunt down, nor fight force users, and the like.”
Stan thought, 'He has got to be talking about Annie. But, what is the connection between them?'
Lewis thought, 'He is likely talking about Annie. I wonder how their two pasts are related?'
Bane continued, “I like a challenge, but age and time have taught me that I have limits. Besides, my rival knows me too well, and I would be at a disadvantage in every way against her. And I prefer to enjoy my new wealth.”
Scorpius agreed, “I fully understand where you are coming from. I will honor your request. And I will keep that in mind, should I have any jobs in mind for you.”
Bane replied, “Thank you. And now to get my rewards, and leave for a much deserve celebration of my return to the game.”
Scorpius turned to the guards, as she ordered, in english, “Two of you, please escort Bane to the rest of his team. We will be organizing their new found wealth, very soon.”
Bane said, “Thank you.”
Bane then turned and started walking towards the door to the room, with two of the four guard following him out of Scorpius' office. With the door sliding open when the Bane and the two guards reach it. And the door slid closed a few seconds after they exited the room.'
After the door to her office shut behind Cad Bane, and two of the guards, Scorpius turned to the boys. She stated, “Now, you two are going to get cleaned up, and get some fresh clothes, in your assigned quarters. Which will be decent, and away from the randomness of the brig. Actually, they are VIP level quarters, which you will share. I want you both in the same place.”
“Though, I do need to know what your day and night schedule is right now?”
Lewis stated, “We were about to have lunch, before we were taken.”
Scorpius said, “Perfect. The ship clock is late morning. So the time adjustment for you both will be fine. I will have some food brought to you that I think you will like. Given, I know your eating habits. That should not be a problem.”
Stan replied, “We trust you on that point.”
Scorpius responded, “Glad to hear that, young Stan. We will discuss your math formula, and how to build a prototype device, based off of the formula, at supper tonight. All three of us will be having dinner at my private dining suite. And the dining suite offers a lovely view of space. Currently, the dining suite is facing towards a section of the fleet, offering a wonder vista for looking out at the fleet.”
Lewis stated, “We look forward to it. I believe we have much to discuss on the issue.”
Scorpius commented, “I agree. I appreciate that fact that you have changed your minds on discussing the matter.”
Lewis answered, “Yes. We have.”
Stan said, “I have a minor request on the clothing issue.”
Scorpius asked, “And that is?”
Stan requested, “We want to keep our jackets.”
Lewis commented, “Yes. We do.”
Scorpius responded, “I understand. And that will not be a problem.” She then turned to the guards, as she ordered, “Guards, please escort these two boys to the quarters I had arrange for them. And also, off them replacement clothing. And allow them to keep their personal effects.”
One of the guards responded in Sebacean.
Lewis said, “Thank you. And see you at dinner.”
Scorpius responded, “I look forward to seeing you then, as well, young Lewis. Which will likely be in seven or eight of your human hours. I cannot give a more specific time because running a galactic nation can eat away at one's time.”
Stan commented, “The curse of leadership.”
Scorpius said, “Exactly. To to show there are no hard feelings. You will be allowed to keep your reality device.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.” He thought, 'With that field on this ship. That device won't work at all. Still, it is nice to have.'
The brothers then turned, to face the guards. Next, the guards lead Lewis and Stan out of the room, and towards their new quarters.
Scorpius watched her students leave, with the door sliding closed behind them.
Scorpius then activated the intercom on her desk. She stated, “Commander Meka, Cancel the bounty for the brothers. They are now in our custody.”
Over the intercom, Commander Meka replied, “Yes Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius requested, “Also, bring a security detail with Cad Bane and his team, when you present them with their treasure.”
“While, I am sure Bane knows better, I want to make sure that none of Bane' team members get to greedy, that shots will be fire.”
“Explain to them that I will not tolerate such counterproductive violence on this ship.”
“And include, the bonus, which they earned. That will be double what we presented to them.”
“Along with that, now that I think about it, also have an accountant team accompany the security team. They will help divide the bounty equally among Cad Bane, and his team. And I want you to have each of their portions put into small cargo containers. I don't want any of them accusing us of cheating them.”
“Next, inform me when Cad Bane, and team have left this ship.”
“Finally, begin compiling a list of those bounty hunters, including Cad Bane, whom have shown the most potential in their initiative in accomplishing this mission. I think the top thousand will do. We will use them at our freelance pool for future multiverse assignments of this nature.”
Meka responded, “I will rely you wishes immediately, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius pressed the button to cut the communication. She then leaned back in her cushioned chair, as she thought, 'Things worked out better than I had hoped they would. And I have so much to look forward to, at diner, tonight.'
(_)
Two hours later, the brothers were in the large living room of new quarters. Which was, by the brothers standards, the VIP class quarters that Scorpius said it would be.
Their quarters were well furnish. The quarters had two bedrooms, with conformable beds, a nice bathroom, and living living room, which doubled for a dining room. There was no kitchen area, but the brothers guessed they could send out for food with through the communications system.
They would have to ask Scorpius about it later. For the moment they would just make do.
Fortunately, when they first got to their quarters, they were both presented with plates of tasty food, along with glasses, and two large pitchers of water, with lots of ice in the pitchers. So, the brothers were fine until they talked to Scorpius at dinner that evening.
Both brothers had already taken a shower in their bathroom, and gotten cleaned.
Though, before they got cleaned up, the guards pointed to their new clothing to wear. The clothing was standard black and red peacekeeper clothing to wear.
As they now wore their new clothing, they found the clothes fit them well.
Their clothing had been replaced, except for Stan's jacket, Lewis' short white coat, their tennis shoes, and their personal effects, including their reality device. Even though they knew the device did not work on the ship, Lewis kept it close to him at all times, just in case.
Currently, the brothers were sitting across from each other, on two cushioned, leather couches, with a small coffee table between them. The room moderately illuminated, as they talked to each other.
Stan stated, “I cannot believe, after everything we have been through, in the last two days... Dear lord, it has only been two days since this madness started for us?... Still, I cannot believe you are sucking up to our professor like that.”
Lewis pointed out, “We are prisoners. Let's at least using the good graces we have, with the professor, will be to our advantages.”
Stan conceded, “I will give you that one.”
Lewis said, “Everyone we talked to has said we cannot be stop Scorpius. That we will eventually have to get her what she wants.”
Stan stated, “I remember what John said. That the only way to convince her to stop, is to convince she does not want it.”
Lewis responded, “Exactly. And I am willing to listen to the voice of experience on this.”
Stan said, “You have a point. And I see where you are going. I will play ball with you, for right now. If nothing else, should we stay in one place long enough, our parents will eventually catch up to us, with Annie likely in tow.”
Lewis replied, “True. So, let us see how this plays out. Because, I have be looking forward to working on electronics, again.”
Stan conceded, “I hate to say it, but so am I. Though, we will just make sure the prototype is small enough to have a kill switch that we can turn off at a moments notice.”
Lewis stated, “Yes. We play this smart. And we treat this prototype with the same respect we would a nuclear weapon.”
Stan replied, “My thoughts, exactly.”
Lewis said, “Besides, Scorpius let us keep our reality device.”
Stan pointed out, “That is because it doesn't work here. And the fact that if things go to hell, our professor would rather have us escape, than be kill by accident. She knows she can find us in the multiverse, so us escaping is a small matter. And she found us in a short time span, to boot. For us. And from the pleasant mood our professor was in, during our conversation, I get the feeling our escape was not that long for her, either.”
Lewis replied, “Point taken.”
Stan gained a wicked smile, as he suggested, “Now, let's figure out how to work these computers in here, without breaking them.”
Lewis returned Stan smile, with his own wicked grin, as he responded, “I like a challenge. Besides, we have nothing else to do.”
(_)
At that moment, inside Scorpius' office, Scorpius sat in her desk chair, as she watched and listened to the brothers entire conversation, from small cameras and microphones that were hidden through out their new quarters.
Scorpius calmly thought, 'Their plans are all understandable. But, since they are welling to help, I will an eye on them.'
'And Stan is correct. Annie's. Or should I say, their reality device is just a fall back plan to make sure they are not seriously injured, nor killed, if something happens. Which, given the common understanding of Murphy's Law, means that something will likely happen. And one can only plan and prepare for so many insane outcomes, and eventualities.'
'Though, I must some day thank John for teaching myself a new level of crazy when it comes to being prepared. I was good before, but after I sparred with him, I was even better for it, in the end.'
'Still, on the matter of the boys. These are two genius, teenage boys. I am going to have to get them some movies, and books, to keep them at least mildly entertained when they are not working, or there could be problems. With one, or both of them doing something stupid, out of boredom. Right now, they are just trying to figure out how to work things in their assigned quarter. But, if their boredom continues, they might try something else, that will likely get them into serious trouble.'
'Still, that is a minor issue that I can easily solve.'
'I just have to be patient, and treat this situation with the delicate care it deserves. And in doing so, I will soon have everything I want.'
(_)
Reality, Old West Reality. Place, the small town Lewis and Stan visited. Time, several hours after the Lowe brothers were taken by Cad Bane, and his bounty hunter team.
It was sunset when Ed, Bob, Annie, Violin, and John, teleported in a dirt alleyway between to buildings.
Ed quickly pocketed her reality device, as she suggested, “Now, let us see where we are.”
All five adults walked out onto the dirt road of the main street of the town.
As they looked around, John commented, “I would say we are in an Old West reality. Sometime in the late nineteenth century, in the midwest, U.S.A.”
Violin said, “I agree.”
Bob stated, “I am from the midwest of the U.S., and I concur. So, how are we going to find the boys?”
John turned to Annie, as he requested, “Annie, I am not joking here, when I say, please use the force.”
Annie turned to John, as she said, “Since you asked so nicely, John, I will.” A few seconds later, Annie commented, “I do not sense the boys here. But, I do sense they were here.”
Ed stated, “Then, I think I made a mistake. I focused on any help they would get. Not the boys themselves.”
Bob shrugged, as he replied, “Things happen, dear.”
Annie stated, “But, we do know that the boys like found help from here. So, we just need to find out who here helped them. And from there, we will have a lead to find the boys.”
John looked around the town, as he said, “This could be a needle in a haystack.”
Violin stated, “Oh come. It is kind of obvious, any type of person that could help the boys would likely stop to get a drink, and would be mobile.”
Violin then use her right hand pointed at a two story building nearby, that was a hotel, as she continued, “That means said help would likely go to only hotel in town. Which likely has a bar in it. Lewis and Stan would stand out. It is possible that someone saw them, and may point us to their mysterious benefactor.”
Bob turned to Violin, as he complimented, “Good thinking, Violin.”
Violin turned to Bob, as she smiled at him. She said, “Thank you, Bob.”
Ed commented, “The hotel it is, then. We will head to the bar counter, and see what the bartender, staff, and patrons, have to say.”
The five adult then turned, and started walking towards the hotel.
(_)
Five minutes later, the five adults entered the bar, inside the hotel. After they did so, they walked up to the bar counter.
John looked at Bob, as he lamented, “To bad, in small towns like this, iceboxes haven't hit is big yet, in this time period. Or, I would be ordering a cold beer.”
Bob turned to John, as he questioned, “True. But, how do you plan to pay for it?”
John conceded, “Point taken.”
Bob said, “Besides, we have more important matters to deal with. Like finding a lead on where Stan and Lewis have gone too.”
Violin, Annie, John, Ed, and Bob then heard someone behind them say, “Scorpius, has the boys.”
John thought, 'I know that voice. But, from where?'
The five adults looked behind them to see a fair skinned man with long black hair, in a pony tail, wearing a black hat, and black long coat, with his back turned.
The man was sitting at a nearby table, with three other men.
The five adults then saw the three men that the man was with.
All four men were clearly sharply for their the time.
They were playing poker, with cards in their hands.
In a clockwise rotation, from the black haired man, the first man was a dark skinned man who looked like he had not shaved his face in a few days. The second man was an older fair skinned man with a thick, full beard. The third man was a younger fair skinned man with a clean shaven face.
The black haired man, whom was speaking to them, had his back turned to them, as he faced the three men at his table. The black haired man looked at the cards in his hands, as he continued, “If you want them back, I believe you are going to need my help. I just need a minute here to finish. And then I need to go upstairs, to get cleaned up, and change my clothing.”
Bob said, “As long as you have answers. And you are not wasting our time. We can wait a few minutes.”
The black haired man replied, “Good.”
The black haired man looked around at the other three men sitting at his table. He threw in some money, as he stated, “I call.”
After everyone showed their cards, he won the hand. Next, he set his cards down, as he said, “Bowler, Hawkes, Bret, it was a pleasure playing with all three of you, gentlemen. You may divide my money amongst yourselves. I have a feeling I won't be needing it any more.”
As the black haired man stood up, the dark skinned man started to collect the man's cash and divide it up amongst himself, and the two other remaining players. He said, “Midnight, you are my kind of player.”
The older, bearded player stated, “I consider it a privilege to have played you, Midnight. You show a lot of potential, and I hope to meet you for another hands of cards, someday.”
The younger, fair skinned man recommended, “Try to stay out of trouble, Midnight.”
As the man started walking their way, Violin noticed the three men at the table. She whispered to Bob, “Are those three, who I think they are?”
Bob looked at the faces of the three men. He softly replied back. “I think so.”
Bob looked over at Violin. He could tell that Violin was starting to slip into fangirl mode, as she quietly said, “I would almost kill to play a few hands with them. Even if I lose all my money, it would be worth it.”
Bob softly teased, “Go ahead. You are a pretty girl. I don't think they would mind.”
Violin snorted, “You are one to talk. I have seen your female form, you are almost as hot as me.”
Bob smiled, as he replied, “Don't tempt me.”
John overheard them, as he requested, “If you girls do so, please get me their autographs.”
Violin replied, “I would love to, John. But unfortunately, even I know we do not have time. I wish we did. But, we don't.”
John complimented Violin, “That is very mature of you.”
Violin smiled at John, as she responded, “Thank you, John.”
John returned Violin's smile, as he replied, “Any time, kiddo.”
By then, Midnight came to a stop in front of the five adults standing at the bar counter. The five adults could see that he also had a full, well groom, black beard.
Bob thought, 'I miss my beard.'
Midnight said, “This way.” He then turned and headed out of the room.
As the five adults then followed Midnight out of the dining area.
While they walked up the stairs, Midnight looked ahead of himself, as he said, “I met the boys yesterday. And I have grown quiet fond of them in the short time I knew them.”
Bob asked, “What happened?”
By then, they reached the second story of the hotel. Midnight turned and walked down one of the hallways, as he answered, “Early this afternoon, they were kidnapped by bounty hunters. The leader mentioned being hire by Scorpius.”
John asked, “How do you know of Scorpius?”
Midnight coyly answered, “All in good time.”
By then, they reached the door to the room that was Midnight's. Midnight pulled out the key to the door.
Midnight then unlocked the door, and opened it. He invited them in, “Come inside.”
After all six adults were inside, Midnight closed the door behind him.
Midnight then went to his saddle bags, and pulled out some clothing, along with a pair of scissors, and a folded straight razor.
Midnight then walked behind a large privacy screen, with those items. Behind the screen, there was a table with a mirror, with a water pitcher, and water bowl on it.
From behind the privacy screen, Midnight began to use his scissors, to trim his beard, as he stated, “Before we leave, I need to sell my horse, and find somewhere safe to store more clothing weapons, and possessions.”
Annie stated, “That should not be a problem.”
Ed asked, “So, who are you?”
Midnight answered, “Just a man enjoying his retirement. But, as you can guess, I am not from around here, myself.”
John stated, “The fact you know, Scorpius, proves that. Let me guess, you are a Sebacean whom use to be a peacekeeper.”
Midnight began to use his straight razor to shave, as he answered, “Yes. I was a peacekeeper officer. I disagreed with the direction the peacekeepers organization was going, under Scorpius' leadership. Though, some things had changed for the better. Scorpius respects loyal not only to herself, but to those that lead an honorable service to the peacekeepers. She know allows people to resign after ten years of loyal service. I resigned my commission, and I left.”
Midnight then folded the razor, and picked his scissors to beginning cutting his hair. He then continued, “I had a reality device, and traveled the multiverse for a while, until I ended up in this area, about a decade, or so ago. It was then that my reality device broke. And with no way to repair it, I was stuck here.”
Bob thought, 'I always feared that would happen to us. That is why we bring tools kits, with knowledge on repairing a reality device, and keep multiple reality devices with us, when we travel.'
Midnight went onto say, “But, it wasn't all bad. I found I liked the wide open spaces, and clean air.”
Violin commented, “And you went, native.”
Midnight stated, “Exactly. English was not that hard for me to learn. And I found most of the people here to be nice, as long as I was polite. I then applied my skills as a peacekeeper, to being bounty hunter. And I have made a nice living from it. Also, I found I like poker, in this area and time.”
“My only problem was the summer months, when I had to stay in the shade, to prevent overheating, and dying from Sebacean heat delirium. But, that was not to serious a problem. I just started working at night, and I made that my motif. For the most part. That is how I got the nickname, the Midnight Bounty Hunter. And I kept it.”
John commented, “I have to admit, that is a cool nickname.”
While smiling, Midnight replied, “I know. Anyway, even if you find a way to teleport directly to Scorpius' command carrier, you will still trip every alarm on the ship.”
“Though, getting onto the ship will not be hard. I know peacekeeper command codes that even Scorpius, as Grand Chancellor, does not know. And besides, we have time. Since becoming a woman, and pure Sebacean, Scorpius has calmed down a lot. She is actually more dangerous now, then when she had health problems, and a temper, as a hybrid.”
“She even got rid of the aurora chair.”
John said, “That is nice to know.”
Midnight agreed, “Yes. It is. And as such, she will not harm the boys, unless the brothers do something stupid. Knowing them, I think they will at least play along. So, we have time.”
Ed stated, “I believe you are correct. Considering, Scorpius was also their highschool physics teacher.”
Midnight took off his clothes, as he commented, “I am not surprised that Scorpius would use time dilation tricks to accomplish both her jobs. And maybe other jobs, as well. Maybe even a vacation, or two. Knowing her, she could use a vacation. Though, I wonder what makes the boys so special, for her to go so far out of the way to capture them.”
John stated, “Scorpy still has that wormhole fetish, and she had taken it up a notch. To a new multiversal level. And the boys are the keys to her plans.”
Midnight put on his fresh clothing, as he said, “That explains it then.”
A few seconds later, Midnight walked from behind the privacy screen, and the five other adults saw who Midnight really was.
In his peacekeeper, officer's uniform, retired peacekeeper captain, Meeklo Braca, looked back at the five adults whom were staring at him, in surprise. Braca's face was clean shaven, and his hair trimmed back to where it had been during his days as a peacekeeper.
Braca asked, “So, how do I look?”
Annie deadpanned, “Just great.”
Violin said, “And the hits just keep on coming.”
John greeted, “Nice to see you again, Braca.”
Braca replied, “Nice to see you to, John. I am glad you are here. I say we now have a fighting chance.”
John complimented, “I am glad for the vote of confidence.”
Violin asked, “Still, you were Scorpius second in command. What really happened to cause you to leave?”
John joked, “Yea. What caused the divorce?”
Braca stated, in a sad tone of voice, “He changed in more ways than one. And instead of being a scientist and leader of armies. She has seized control of the peacekeepers and become somewhat of a politician.”
John agreed, “Yea. That would do it.”
Braca said, “I am glad you agree. So, we will need a peacekeeper transport to get onto Scorpius' command. We cannot teleport directly there. She will be immediately alerted to our presence. Fortunately, I can provide both the a dealer for a small ship, and the command codes enter the Scopius' flagship. The only question is payment for the ship.”
Ed offered, “If you can get me to the ship, I can hack its computers.”
Annie made a counter offer, “Forget that. I will use my mind trick to get a ship. We just need to make sure the person is male, and likes women. That mind trick, and a little T&A from me, and he will give us a ship.”
John looked over at Annie, as he commented, “You have been a woman, way too long.”
Annie giggled, a little, in response to John's comment.
Bob stated, “Okay, everyone. Let's help Braca get what he needs done here. Then, we are heading to Braca's home reality, to the peacekeeper planet of his choosing, to find a ship. Then, we are going to rescue our boys, and deal with Scorpius, in one fell swoop.”
Braca turned to Bob. He grinned at Bob, as he complimented, “I like your attitude. Let us make that happen.”
The other five adults returned Braca's grin, as all six of the group heading out of the hotel room, and towards their plans on rescuing Stan and Lewis Lowe.
(_)
Farscape Reality. Peacekeeper Space. Around a week after the brothers were recaptured by Scorpius.
It was sunset on the area of city planet that Braca had taken them to. The retired peacekeeper captain stated the Peacekeeper Space Fleet was stationed near the planet.
The weather was dry, and warm, but not hot.
After finishing what they needed to do in the Old West reality, Ed loaned Braca her reality device, to take them to this peacekeeper planet, at the proper time and place.
When Braca thought of the time, he thought of the best opportunity to rescue Lewis and Stan Lowe.
When the reality jump was complete, Braca immediately returned it to Ed. With Ed putting her reality device into one of her pockets.
It was then that they got something to eat, and then went shopping for a few items, for their mission.
That was two hours ago, and the were on the last errand, before looking for a peacekeeper shuttle.
Currently, the three men of the groups were standing, as they waited outside of a women's clothing store, for the three women of the group to come out.
Bob thought, 'I am so happy that Ed didn't make me go in there, with them.'
The men soon overheard the three women of the group, as the women were walking out of the door.
Or, more specifically, two of the women convincing the third to come out onto the street.
Inside the door of the store, they could hear Annie stated, “Listen. I admit. I am having second thoughts about this plan. I promised myself, I would never get into this situation.”
Ed pointed out, “You mentioned using T&A in this plan. And your normal clothing just does not do your figure justice.”
Annie replied, “I was joking.”
Ed then stepped into the street, she was holding a bag, as she stated, “Annie, I have your clothes right here. You can change clothes after we buy the ship.”
Violin walked out onto the street, as she said, “I don't understand, Annie. You had no problem wearing a bikini. What is wrong with what you are wearing right now?”
Annie responded, with a bit of desperation and worry in her tone of voice, “That is on a secluded, tropical island, while being among friends. This is out in public.”
Violin admitted, “You have a point there. Be happy that you hair works the way it is for your new clothing.”
Annie coldly warned, “Touch my hair, and you will die.”
Ed stated, in a motherly tone of voice, “Annie, you are making a scene. Just grit your teeth, and step outside. The first three seconds are the hardest. It gets easier after that.”
Annie concede, “Fine.”
Annie then stepped out to the street.
Annie wore a black cloth midriff shirt, with skintight black leather pants, black sexy lace-less boots, and a black belt, which she had her lightsaber strapped to.
And Annie's clothing showed off her curves in every way possible.
John commented, “Hard to believe she use to be a man.”
Bob cautioned, “I know. And I am not one to talk. Still, just a reminder gentlemen, she can force chock us. So, let us be polite.”
John replied, “I am always a southern gentleman.”
Braca stated, “I have always tried to act as a professional, no matter what I am doing.”
Bob responded, “Good. By the way, thanks for the credits for the outfit.”
Braca said, “No problem.”
John inquired, “Are you sure those credits cannot be traced? I would not put anything passed, Scorpy.”
Braca answered, “Absolutely. They are from the hidden accounts from which I plan to buy the shuttle from.”
Bob questioned, “What about identification, and records? You, of all people, know how thorough Scorpius is with information retrieval.”
Braca smirked, as he commented, “Yes. I worked for Scorpius, for years. Who do you think he, or now she, had create all those fake records for her personal agents?”
John cracked a grin, as he replied, “Good point.”
By then, the three women had walked up to the men.
Annie warned, “Not one word. Especially, you, Bob. You know I can arrange for you to be in this situation.”
John noticed that Braca had a confused look on his face from Annie's comment. He leaned over and whispered in Braca's right ear.
Braca's eyes widened, as he looked after at Bob. He then looked over at John, whom just nodded.
Bob responded, “Annie, you have nothing but my sympathies.”
Annie let out a breath, as she said, “Let's just get this over with.”
(_)
Half an hour later, at a nearby spaceport, Violin, John, Ed, and Bob watched from a distance, as Braca and Annie haggled with a starship seller, over a slightly used peacekeeper transport shuttle, that the three adults were standing beside, on a landing pad.
The side hatch to the shuttle was open.
John quietly commented, “At least I am not crossdressing this time.”
Bob whispered, “We fans like to pretend that clam episode never happened.”
John agreed, “You are not alone. So, do we. But, how bad was that event from your point of view?”
Bob answered, “Almost as bad as DS9, Profit and Lace.”
John winched, as he replied, “Ouch.”
Violin commented, “Personally, I found those two episodes to be very funny.”
Ed looked at Violin, as she thought, 'And people call me, crazy.'
(_)
Meanwhile, by the transport shuttle, the middle-aged male, Sebacean, whom was a used spaceship salesman, was negotiating with Annie and Braca.
Braca flatly stated, “Ten thousand, and not a credit more.”
The salesman countered, “Twenty-five thousand. And I am being generous.”
Annie spoke up, in the best fake, demure tone of voice she could muster, “I think you can go lower.” She then thought, 'Actually, from what I sense from your emotions, you can go a lot lower. You Sebaceans are so close to your human cousins that your emotions are almost identical.'
The used starship salesman looked over at Annie.
Annie had to fight the urge to force chock the salesman, as she felt the man's lustful emotions, while he mentally undressed her.
From the look on the man's face, even Braca could tell that the man clearly liked what he saw.
Annie thought, 'Now, to turn on the charm, and force mind tricks.'
Annie smiled in a seductive manner, as she used her the force mind tricks, while she calmly said, “As my friend was saying, I think ten thousand is more than fair. Won't you agree?”
The seller replied, “Yes. I believe so.”
Annie asked, “Then, we have a deal?”
The seller answered, “Yes.”
(_)
Ten minutes later, after the transaction was over, and the seller had left, the Bob, Ed, John, and Violin walked up to Annie and Braca.
As all five of them turned to looked at the shuttle, John commented, “The piece of junk joke, concerning this ship, is just too easy to say.”
Bob replied, “Agreed.”
Ed pointed out, “The important points are, does this ship run? And is it safe to fly?”
Braca stated, “I took a look around it, and inside, before I even talked about the price. I even did an air pressurization check, along with checking to make sure the life support, engines, and other systems are in working order. Even its fuel tanks are nearly full. The emergency rations and water bottles are in the ship, and I believe have not expired. And the restroom works, and has toiletries.”
Annie said, “Okay. I need to check my clothing. Ed, can I have my clothes bag.”
Ed handed Annie the bag with her original clothing in it.
Violin teased, “But, I liked you in that outfit, Annie.”
Annie turned to Violin, as she stated, “Violin. Don't tempt me. I am not in the mood. And I expect privacy for the next few minutes.”
She then walked into the up the steps on the hatch, and into shuttle, by herself.
A few minutes later, Annie came out of the shuttle, wearing her old clothing and robes.
Her lightsaber was clipped to her belt, as she used her arms to carry her new clothing out of the ship.
Annie walked a few feet from the group, as she dumped her new clothes into a pile on the ground.
Then, to everyone else's surprise, Annie used force lightning from her fingers, on both hands, to burn and destroy her new clothing. Within seconds the items were turned into ashes.
After Annie stopped the lightning, she turned to the face group. As she walked passed them, and back into the shuttle, she smiled, while she said, “I feel much better now.”
When Annie came to the top of the steps, she stopped at the entrance to the ship. She turned to face the other adults. She explained, “Ah, yes. The force lightning. I never told anyone that I could do that now. As many of you have guessed, I am a lot more powerful than I have ever been. And my skills in the force are better than ever.”
“Though, you can relax. I only use force lightning to vent my rage in a quick constructive manner. I can now see why Palpatine used it so often. It is quite fun to use. But, I have found that as long as I don't use force lightning on people, I do not risk falling to the dark side of the force.”
Violin stated, “That is a relief to know.”
Bob commented, “If Kyle Katarn can use force lightning without falling to the dark side of the force. So, can you, Annie.”
Annie smiled in their direction, as she said, “Thank you for the vote confidence. And I have to admit that Kyle has a cute butt.”
Ed realized something, as she accused, “You played the Dark Forces games? Haven't you?”
Annie smile turned into a smirk, while she focused on Ed. She replied, “Yes. I have to admit that the reborn is an interesting concept. And I found Kyle, at the end of those game series, with the beard, force powers, and personality, to be a wonderful mix of Obiwan, and Han Solo.”
Bob thought, 'The thought of Darth Vader playing Star Wars computer games from Earth is insane. But, I have to ask.' He inquired, “What other Star Wars games have you played?”
Annie stated, “The early flight simulators. I found the original Knights of the Old Republic game to be entertaining. And even I didn't see that plot twist towards the end of the game. And... Well about, Force Unleashed. Though, I will tell you right now. For my reality, I did not have an apprentice, as Vader. So, he must be from an alternate reality, when compared to my home reality. And my force powers are not that powerful.”
“Though, I admit, I have sometimes fantasized using the force to pull down a Star Destroyer from space, onto the ground. But, even now, I am not that powerful.”
Ed, Bob, John, and Violin all looked at Annie, with mild states of shock, at the way she so casually talk about playing video games based off of her home reality. In some cases, the games she played had cameo appearances of her old male self.
Annie just giggled innocently at the expressions on Ed, Bob, John, and Violin's faces. She then turned, and happily made her way into the shuttle.
Braca turned to Bob, as he stated, “I am starting to see why you tread carefully when it comes to Annie.”
Bob turned to Braca, as he replied, “Braca, you don't know the half of it.”
Ed suggested, “Let's get inside. And who is going to be the pilot?”
Braca stated, “I will. Who is the best pilot among you?”
Bob said, “Actually, Annie is the best pilot.”
John agreed, “While I am a pretty good pilot. Annie is the best pilot here.”
Violin commented, “Yea. You are good Braca. But, Annie is better.”
Inside the ship, Annie overheard the conversation. She turned around, and stepped right outside of the door to the shuttle, as she looked at the other adults. She stated, “I am fine with Braca being pilot. I will be the co-pilot.”
Braca said, “Thank you, Annie. And being co-pilot will help take your mind off of what just happened.”
Violin complimented, “That is a good way of looking at things.”
Annie said, “I appreciate you comments, Braca.”
Brace replied, “You're welcome.”
Annie then walked back inside the ship, with the other five adults entering the ship, behind her.
When they were all inside the small shuttle, they made their some of the seats. Fortunately, there was plenty of seating for everyone.
A minute later, everyone was seated, with the hatch to the ship closed, and sealed.
Up front, in the cockpit, Braca was piloting, in the left chair, with Annie in the co-pilot's seat, in the right chair.
There were four rows in the ship. Two seats per row. With an aisle running down the length of the ship.
In the middle two seats were Ed, and Violin. With Ed on the left side, and Violin on the right side.
With John and Bob sitting in seats, on the third row. With Bob on the left side, and John on the right side.
Bob turned to John, as he asked, “Since you are the only one with an idea of the what exact Earth calendar date is here, when the boys were taken. Because, we made sure to run parallel with when Scorpius took the boys. At least that is what we hope the boys did the same, when they were taken back to this reality. How long as it been, since we last came here?”
John looked at the Peacekeeper calendar clock on a small readout, in the middle of the cockpit. He turned back to Bob, as he answered, “A week and two days since we left. And my gut tells me that the boys are right now, in this reality, with Scorpius, on her command carrier. Though, I plan to return five minutes after I left my ship.”
Bob complimented, “Intelligent thinking. And I doubt my sons are in trouble just yet. They know when to play ball, and buy time.”
John replied, “Let us hope so.”
Braca worked the controls of the ship, as he stated, loud enough for everyone to hear him, “Okay. Pre-flight checks have been completed. Everyone, prepare for take off. We should reach the fleet in about four human hours.”
A minute later, the transport shuttle took off into the sky. The ship was soon head away from the orbit of the planet they had just left, as the shuttle head for the peacekeeper fleet.
(_)
Meanwhile, at that moment, on the Peacekeeper flagship command carrier, in one of the many labs, Stan and Lewis Lowe were directing the peacekeeper scientists and technicians, whom were present.
The lab room itself, was a large room, with a theater level above it, with windows looking down into the lab.
For the last week, the Lowe brothers, and their team had been building a small, prototype multiversal gate system.
In addition, Stan and Lewis wisely chose not to make any attempts to escape Scorpius and the Peacekeepers.
The only major draw back was the language barrier. Due to the brother unique minds and DNA, to be on the safe side, Scorpius refused to inject them with translator microbes. And the brothers agreed with their teacher.
Though, all of Scorpius' tests on translator microbes showed they were safe even for gender benders, or those that could become gender benders. Scorpius own change of gender was proof of that.
Fortunately, Scorpius from a simple solution. She had the terminals in the lab translated to english. And the teams could understand the brothers, and type their responses on a computer, which would be translated to the brothers' native language.
Scorpius told her subordinates that this as just another security measure.
Though, the Lowe brothers were making an effort in learning Sebacean, and given their super-genius intellects, they were already showing marvelous results. But, it would still probably take them another week to successfully speak, read, and write, Sebacean, in a fluent manner.
The brothers were wearing peacekeeper casual clothing. Black pants, shirt, socks, underwear. But, they both wore their tennis shoes. Along with that, Stan wore his varsity jacket, and Lewis wore his short, white, long sleeved, lab coat.
The brothers were currently sitting down, as they used various tools to make the final adjustments to their first prototype gate system, on this end. With the adjustments on the other end, in another reality, already completed.
While they did so, Scorpius walked into the room. She was in her usual black armor, with her cap, nor cape.
Scorpius approached the brothers, near the gate. The gate, and base, was eight feet tall. The gate itself was ring shaped, with six feet wide diameter. The ring and the base were one feet in depth. There were also steps made into the base, that lead up into the portal, and to show which side was to be use to enter the portal from.
As Scorpius walked towards the brothers, the boys noticed her.
The brothers set down their tools, and stood up, as they face Scorpius. Stan stood to Lewis' right side.
While Scorpius smiled, she came to a stop in front, a few feet from Stan and Lewis. She greeted them, “I see that things are progressing well.”
Lewis said, “Yes. They are. Would you care for an explanation of what is going on? Including safety measures?”
Scorpius responded, “Of course. While my other duties have prevented myself from participating in this project more, I do enjoy such update.”
Scorpius thought, 'I wish I could spend more time on their project. I already did enjoy creating inventions. And I still do. I just presently no long have the time to do so. Though, I was able to handle multiple jobs. So, I probably can find the time, if I think about. But, that is a matter to contemplate for another time.'
Lewis stated, “We have made great strides in the last week. For example, what you are looking at is half of the prototype, which is a marriage of the reality portal technology that you shared with us, and the hyperspace gate technology of our home reality.”
“The other half is on a remote planet, in an alternate Star Wars reality, with a breathable atmosphere. But, the planet is uninhabited by lifeforms, except for some rodent like species, and plants. The other end of the portal is connected to an enclosed base, with robots monitoring that side.”
Scorpius asked, “What makes this different from the portals I already have?”
Lewis smirked, “Simple. Your portals are temporary, and burn a lot of energy, because there is no portal on the other side, to create a feedback circuit, to feed energy from, to maintain the portal. On the other hand, this is a bridged network. Like you wanted. Two different gates connecting across the multiverse.”
“Once the gates come on, they are powered by the frictional energy coming from breaking reality. This is due to their being two gates, creating a basic energy circuit, like electronics use. This is how the hyperspace gates in my home reality work. Only, instead of opening through full realities, the hyperspace gates just open through dimensional planes on in the same reality.”
Scorpius understood what Lewis was stating. She replied, “So, you already solved the energy problem.”
Lewis said, “Yes.”
Stan commented, “But, that is also the main danger, and the main problem.”
Scorpius inquired, “How so?”
Stan explained, “The feedback on the energy is a lot more than is needed to maintain the portal. It can build up very quickly. This is what caused the gate explosion in our home reality.”
Scorpius asked, “If this gate got out of control, how big an explosion from the feedback be?”
Stan stated, “Actually, there will be two explosions. One for each side of the gate system. The feedback explosions would happen on both sides of the gate at once, because it a loop. The reason, in our home reality, the gate explosion is only talked about on the Earth side, was the moon was nearly destroyed by the gate, and it damaged the Earth, as well.”
“But, the other explosion was in the middle of nowhere, with only a few people harmed, or killed on that side. Still, from this gate system, each, of the two explosions, would be equal to a one kiloton bomb of TNT. The explosion on this side would seriously harm, or kill everyone in this section of the ship. But, the explosion would not destroy your entire ship.”
“Yet, that is where the our safety measures, we invented, and installed, come in.”
Scorpius questioned, “What are your safety measures?”
Stan said, “At this stage of the project, We have three fail-safes. Given we have only worked on this for a week, that is all we could come up with.”
Scorpius pointed out, “Three fail-safes are a fine to start. Even I had to learn how to prepare simple plans, before I moved on to more complex plans.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. Our first safety measure is system to drain the feedback energy from the gates, and into the ship electrical systems. We, and our team, did some math. Your ship can safely bleed off an energy of a gate this small, without a problem. We just need you to power down some of your generators, and reroute some of the electrical systems. I am sure the technicians can find the right balance.”
Scorpius stated, “That will not be a problem. Any other problems with this feedback draining system?”
Stan answered, “One drawback. We have to power the feedback drain system from the ship's energy grid. This is because we are not sure how the feedback energy will happen. It might be constant. It might spike. We don't know. As such, having the feedback system feed off the feedback, which is currently an unreliable energy source, would be a bad idea.”
“This might have been the design flaw that caused the hyperspace gate explosions in our home reality. They built the feedback drain system into the gate, without properly testing and calibrating the systems. And there was an energy spike, which caused a cascade effect on the electronic system, that caused the gate explosions.”
“Though, we intend to do everything in our power to prevent that from happening here.”
“But, given we tied this feed back system to both the normal energy grid and the emergency grid, if power failed on both systems, we could have a gate explosion.”
Scorpius said, in a comforting tone of voice, “One can only prepare for so many outcomes. But, your precautions seems adequate. But, what other precautions do you have?”
Stan stated, “The next fail-safe is a software shutdown of the gate. But, that would take time, which would allow the feedback to still build up, as the main systems power down. Once the gate closes, without the extra energy from the gate, increasing the feedback, the feedback will drain very quickly on its own, without any explosions.”
“Though, due these software systems is not calibrated, nor properly timed, yet. If we do an emergency gate shutdown, we have a slow shutdown both sides at the same time. Or, one side will shutdown, and the other will still had an open portal, that will become unstable, acting like a gravity vacuum, sending things to another destination in the multiverse.”
“Where, when, and what reality, would be unknown. But, give everything we had seen with reality travel, like attracts like. So, the destination the person ended up, would be similar to where that person came from.”
Scorpius responded, “I can see the logic of what you are saying. But, why do you call it a, gravity vacuum, instead of a gravity well?”
Lewis answered, “Because, gravity magnet, sounded worse, and gravity well, was already taken. I say this is a gravity vacuum because it is not a true gravity well. Whomever designed the portals did a thorough job of solving very dangerous, yet simple problems.”
“One such such problem that was solved is that only solid objects being the only thing allowed through the power. Well more solid than normal air. We can get mist, and water, to go through, without bottling it. But, that is beside the point.”
“Another problem that has been solved is that particles, by themselves, are not allowed to pass through these portal, while solid objects are. Even I am not sure how that works. Though, this is a very good feature to have. It prevents a normal atmospheric vacuum to be created, where one side is a dense dense atmosphere. While the other side is a less dense atmosphere, or god forbid, hard vacuum of space, where the more dense atmosphere reality started having their atmosphere sucked into the portal, which can decompress a ship, or quickly contained the atmosphere. Though, I have only read about it. I don't know about you, but decompression is a horrible way to go.”
“On a similar matter, portals also do not allow ambient temperature differences, gravity, or radiation to pass through the portal. This means if someone accidentally opens a portal on a very environmentally hostile area, like the surface of a star, they will not immediately be vaporized, and eventually destroy their planet by a combination of heat, radiation, and a massive gravity well, which would have otherwise maintained the portal open, long after the gate was destroy.”
“This even applies to kinetic forces, as well. You can detonate a nuke the other side of the portal, and you won't feel the effects, in the slightest, on this side of the portal.”
“Fortunately, the fail-safes in the portal designs prevent all these problems, and more, from happening.”
“Still, if this portal does become unstable, it will start sucking in solid objects, but it will not decompress the area. So, we won't suffocate, due to how well this portal technology was originally designed.”
Scorpius commented, “Yes. Chang's researchers did a wonderful in designing such technology. I have to commend those humans for their skills, brilliance, and intelligence.”
Lewis thought, 'The professor mention someone named, Chang again. And it cannot the Chang I know.'
Meanwhile, Stan thought, 'I wonder who this Chang is, that Scorpius occasionally mentions? I have heard Scorpius mention this person in passing, a few times. But, I have no answers. The only Chang I know is a member of the Serenity crew, in my home reality. And I doubt that it is him. Nor, his sister, Daiyu.'
Scorpius inquired, “And these gates are even quiet. Still, given these gates are of a slightly different design, will a gate left open on one side eventually close on its own?”
Stan answered, “Yes. Without the feedback circuit, the gate will slowly close within a few minutes, to ten minutes. We are not yet sure of the exact amount of time that it will take to close.”
Scorpius responded, “That is still a short enough span of time for one to not worry about. And what is your final contingency plan to prevent a gate explosion?”
Lewis stated, “If we cannot shut the gate down fast enough, to prevent a gate explosion, we have explosives located inside the base of each gate, on both ends of the portal. An explosion on one of the gates would destroy the gate, and automatically close the gate on that end.”
“Though, we measured the power of the explosion so that almost nothing else would be destroyed, except for the lab. Also, if we were trapped in here, we could just blow the other gate, and take our chances with the unstable portal for a few minutes.”
“So, what do you think, professor?”
Scorpius responded, “I think you both have thought out you precautions very well. Will the reality protection field cause problems with this experiment?”
Lewis answered, “No. This used a different method of reality travel than your field protects against. Though, we have to open the original gate from this side, and thread it to the other side. Because you informed us that your field protects from both teleportation, and portals coming into the ship. But, it only prevents teleportation out. It does not prevent creating a portal from this side, to another destination. Where a person can come and got from here, as they please.”
Scorpius said, “Yes. That is a flaw. But, only a minor flaw. Now, when will this prototype be ready for its first trial?
Scorpius thought, 'That is likely how Chang was originally able to use her portals from the Tower, to other locations in the multiverse. Though, Chang later had reality devices that negated the reality protection field.'
'But, it is clear that Annie, and others do not have access to that technology. Or, Annie got her reality device from a source that did not have direct access to Chang's technology. Or, they had early versions of Chang's reality devices.'
Lewis stated, with a bit of excitement in his tone of voice, “We are almost ready, right now. We were just making the final adjustments on the software and electronics. It will only take a few more minutes. Our tests show opening the gate will not release any dangerous energy.”
“And we are just waiting to see if you would show up, when you usually do. Which has been the case.”
Scorpius complimented, “I appreciate that. I am ready to see you results right now. Though, take your time.”
Lewis said, “Thank you”
The brothers then went to prepare for the test of their prototype gate system.
(_)
A few minutes later, the brothers and their team completed their adjustments of their prototype.
The brothers then walked to their computer terminals, which were tied into the gate system.
Stan offered, “Why don't you do the honors, Lewis.”
Lewis replied, “Thank you, Stan.” He then loudly stated, “Everyone clear the area around the gate. We are doing our first test.”
As soon as their team had were out of the way of the gate, Lewis press a key to activate the multiversal hyperspace gate. He said, “Getting synchronized signals for power up of gate on both sides. With this one side being the side that threads the connection. Gate opening in five. Four. Three. Two. One.”
A second later, it started as a small dot in the center of the gate. It then quickly grew to a multicolored, swirling, rainbow vortex, which encompassed the circular, six feet wide, gate.
Lewis smiled, while he commented, “Now, that is a thing of beautiful.”
Even Stan grinned at their achievement, as he agreed, “Yes, brother, it is.”
Scorpius smiled at the sight before her, as she thought, 'And this is the type of leadership that gets results.' She asked, “Are you planning to send anything in?”
Stan stated, “Not for right now. We just want to test stability, and how long we can maintain the gate, until we shut it down for the evening.”
Lewis said, “If things work out, we will start sending inanimate objects back and forth. Along with probes, to study the inside of the gate, to make sure it is safe for organic living creatures to pass through safely. Our math says yes, But, we are playing it safe. If those tests work fine. Then, we will move up to sending plants and animals.”
Stan commented, “With luck, in a month, or two, we will have people traveling back and forth to the other location.”
Stan thought, 'Instead, of using reality devices to go back and forth. Which is, what our team has been using. Which you have banned us from personally using. As least you gave us some movies and books, from our reality, that we like, to keep us from becoming to bored on our off time. Still, it would be nice to get out of this ship.'
Scorpius complimented, “That is very wise of you, both. For the time being, I think I will stay here, and watch.”
Lewis offered, “We are more than happy to have you here.”
Scorpius stated, “Then, I shall stay here for a while longer.”
(_)
A few hours later, as Ed and Bob's crew flew to the peacekeeper fleet, Braca was piloting, with Annie in the co-pilot's seat, of the transport shuttle.
In the middle two seats were Ed, and Violin.
And in the third row, everyone was listening to John and Bob, as they bickered between each other.
As the crew listened to John and Bob's discussion, Violin thought, 'And they call me childish.'
John said, “Listen, Bob. We can't both be the Han Solo of the group.”
Bob replied, “Of course not. I will be the Han Solo of the group. You will be yourself, John Crichton.”
John inquired, “What is that suppose to mean?”
Bob stated, “You haven't figured out by now. John, I have seen your series. You are far more badass than Han Solo ever was. And more crazier to boot. Han wished he had your skills for crazy planning. Solo was many things, but he was not a genius. And look at your friends. Instead of Chewy, you had Dargo, whom became a much better, more well rounded person than Chewy ever was. Also, you didn't have to deal with the twins, or the drama from family connections of those two.”
Annie spoke up, “Bob has a point there.”
Bob turned to Annie, as he replied, “Thanks Annie.”
Bob turned to John, as he went onto say, “Moya and Pilot are far cooler than the Millennium Falcon and C3-PO ever were. Instead of just one cute R2-D2. You have an army of far cuter DRDs, that have a nice sense of humor about them. Especially, 1812. I am happy to see that little bot still around Moya.”
Violin said, “I second those motions.”
Bob commented, “And that is not all. You have a nice temptress, Chiana. You had your own Obiwan, known as, Zhaan. Rygel is basically the Yoda of hedonism. And best of all, you had a hot, intelligent, sane, badass woman to pine over. Do you have any idea how rare a combination is in the multiverse? Trust me. It is very, very rare.”
Ed spoke up, “No argument there.”
Bob continued, “I have met only two other women, besides Aeryn, that I would say fit that combination completely. That is Zoe of the Serenity crew, and the spacetrucker, V.T. of the Cowboy Bebop reality. And John your rogues gallery puts most of Star Wars shame. No offense Annie, but outside of raw power and combat skills, Scorpius has you beat in every other category.”
Annie stated, “No office taken. You are correct on that matter.”
Bob requested, “So John, all I am asking is you just be your badass self. And when the time comes, you bail our asses out when we need you too.”
John as slack jawed for a few seconds, as he thought about what Bob had told him. He then stated, “Oh lord, your right, Bob. I just never really thought it about way.”
Bob looked over at John, in John's eyes, as he flatly stated, “Yea. You thought you were, Dorthy Gale. Well, you are not. You are, John motherfucking badass Crichton. You made the greatest galactic powers of your reality kneel before your awesomeness. Now, act like the badass we all know you are.”
John responded, “Alright. I will do my best to live up to your expectations.”
Bob replied, “I know you will.”
Braca stated, in a tone that carried over everyone else, “I forgot how lively this type of living can be. Anyway, we should be at our destination in about half an hour.”
(_)
Half an hour later, the crew of the shuttle saw from the front window, as they came within visual sight of the Peacekeeper fleet.
Braca looked at instruments in his cockpit dashboard. He said, “I am getting a signal from the flagship. Keep quiet, while I talk to them in Sebacean.”
Violin quickly asked, “What if this doesn't work?”
Ed pulled out her reality device, as she commented, “Emergency reality jump.”
Violin replied, “Got you.”
Everyone became quiet, as Braca turned on the communications. He spoke up Sebacean, “This is a peacekeeper shuttle, on route to the Command Carrier flagship.”
The person on the other end, stated in Sebacean, “And state you identification code, and priority code.”
Braca then stated the fake codes he had for both requests.
A few seconds later, the other end of the line stated, “You are clear to proceed to shuttle bay sixteen. You guidance system has been updated to display your course. Do not deviate from your course.”
Braca said, “Roger that.”
Braca then turned off the communications. Next, he checked the updated guidance system, and he altered his course, to allow his shuttle to fly onto the path that he had been provided with.
Ed asked, “Did they buy it?”
Braca answered, in english, “Yes.”
Ed questioned, “Good. Now, is everyone okay with me staying my plan, for when we get there?”
John said, in a casual tone of voice, “I was wondering when someone would mention that little detail.”
Without turning his head, Braca commented, “I am surprised you didn't offer up a plan by now, John.”
John responded, “You know how my plans turned out, Braca. One time I set an entire planet on fire. Later, I literally nuked a secret meeting between the major powers, which sparked a galactic war. And finally, I nearly destroyed the galaxy itself. If not the universe. So, do you really want me to come up with a plan?”
Braca flatly replied, “No... I suppose not.”
Bob stated, “Don't worry guys. Ed is good with plans. They only screw up half the time.”
Annie turned back, down the aisle, to face the group, as she spoke up, “Yes. But, when her plans do fall through, they are epic screw ups.”
Ed turned to looked at Annie, as she stated, “That is the last time I tell you my secrets, girl friend.”
Annie just stuck out her tongue at Ed, for a few seconds.
Bob thought, 'I better keep this from getting out of hand.' He requested, “Dear, would you please tell us your plan?”
Ed replied, “Since you asked so nicely, I will. Well, my plan centers around my hacking abilities, and Annie's ass kicking abilities. Over the years, I have made it a hobby of learning alien software code. That includes Peacekeeper software. I cannot speak your language, but I can read and write it.”
Everyone looked her.
Bob spoke up, “Trust me. It is a lot better than her previous hacking hobbies.”
Braca continued flying the ship, as he stated, “That is a tall claim.”
Bob stated, “She is one of the best hackers in the multiverse. When she was a kid, she used to hack planetary networks, just for fun. But, she didn't do anything harmful. For the most part, all she did was leave his signature in their networks, just to prove she could do it.”
“Now, every few years, the Federation of my reality, not the Star Trek Federation, along with the Bajoran government of the Star Trek reality, hires Ed here to see if she can hack her way into their networks. The longest it has ever taken her was twenty minutes.”
Ed commented, “Actually, nineteen minutes, and twenty-three seconds.”
Bob said, “Ed here, one time, got into a computer hacking contest with another brilliant hacker, Motoko Kusanagi, of the Ghost in the Shell, Stand Alone Complex, reality. The contest ended in a draw. Between Motoko's cybernetic enhancements, and Ed's natural super-genius.”
Ed stated, “I still say I could have beaten Motoko if I had slept better the previous night.”
Bob responded, “Yes. I agree, dear. Still, on the battle before us, the questions, on the matter on Ed's abilities, that you should have, are. How long will it take for her to get into Scorpius' computers systems? And how big a repair bill we wish to leave Scorpius with, after we leave?”
Violin complimented, “I can see why your both are married to each other. I like the way you both think.”
Ed replied, “Thank you.”
Bob commented, “I appreciate that.”
Ed said, “Anyway, I could likely teach Scorpius a thing or two on network security. It will likely only take me a few minutes to hack my way into the ship's computer banks. And here is the plan.”
“Everyone, but Annie, goes with me to the nearest computer terminal. Just by me time to hack my way in. Meanwhile Annie, stays with the ship, with her reality device. The reason for this is Annie, you are our plan, b. Protect the ship. Because, if my plan does now work, we are going to have to escape back out on this our ship here.”
“I will hack my way into the computers. When I do, I will first look at the schematic of the ship, for a few minutes. So, I can find the boys. Braca will be with us, because he knows the layout of the ship, and once we have found our sons, he will know the quickest route to the boys. And Violin, you are with us, because we might need you to open some doors for us.”
Violin commented, in a casual tone of voice, “Got you. That should not be a problem.”
Ed stated, “After I find the boys, and how to get to them. I am going to shut down the field preventing reality jumping, shut down the power grid, and shut down the emergency power. Everything goes down, except for lighting, life support, artificial gravity, and atmospheric shields.”
“We need to see, and we need to breath. And I don't want to accident depressurize the ship, due to a few shuttle bay doors being open when power goes out. But, everything else will be down. That includes their communications, so they cannot call for help. And their weapons system, so we can escape.”
Braca commented, “And with the power out, they will not able to organize resistance against us. As such, we will not have to fight as much. And any fighting will be much easier.”
Violin spoke up, “Especially for Annie.”
Annie replied, “True. And that is nice to know.”
Braca said, “Still, if we have to escape back on this ship, we probably still have to deal with a few prowlers. But, I believe I can pilot this ship well enough to avoid being destroyed, until we are out of the field, and we can reality jump.”
Annie spoke up, “If you don't make it, Braca. I am sure I can pilot this thing fine.”
Ed went onto say, “Exactly, Annie. That is another reason I want you by the ship.”
John deadpanned, “I have noticed you have no mentioned my part of your plan, yet.” He continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “What do you want me to do?”
Ed answered “John, when the four of us go after the boys, I need you to find Scorpius, and keep her busy.”
John swiftly replied, “I am not sleeping with her... No matter how hot she has become after being turned into a woman. Besides, I am married.”
Annie halfheartedly stated, “No one is asking you to, John. Besides, I would think that Scorpius has better standards than you.”
John snapped, “Hey.”
Annie giggled a little, from John's reaction to her comment.
John said, “Still, how am I suppose find Scorpy in a mile long ship?”
Braca suggested, “Well, you are a very recognizable person, John. Just leave your weapon with Bob and Ed. Then go to a guard, with you hands up, introduce yourself as, John Crichton. Then, tell that person that you want to speak with Scorpius. The only question, how long it will take you to be escorted to Scorpius?”
Everyone was shocked speechless at Braca's plan.
Braca noticed their silence, as he commented, “I have been caught in the middle, between Scorpius and John, for years. You think I didn't learn a thing or two from them, during that time.”
Bob thought, 'Braca sounds like a guy stuck in the middle of a love triangle... Best not to touch that one with a ten foot pole.'
Ed stated, “John, just find Scorpius, and stall her for about ten minutes. Then, escape back to the shuttle. If something happens, and the field is down, we will teleport to you. If not... Bob.”
Bob pulled out his reality device and handed the device, across the aisle, to John.
John took the device, and put it in his right, side pants pocket.
Ed stated, “That is your emergency exit. But, don't use it, unless you have too.”
John stated, “I understand.”
Ed went onto say, “If the reality field does come down, and if we cannot get back to you, Annie. I am relying your force senses to tell you when it is a good time to leave.”
Annie replied, “That works for me. And thanks for the replacement reality device you gave me.”
Ed stated, “You're welcome. If the field stays up, you will know through the force to wait for us. If the field is down, when we find the boys, we teleport to quickly get John, then we all teleport to Annie, and finally we all leave, together. If Annie is overwhelmed, and the field is down, she can teleport out. Unfortunately Annie, if you are overwhelmed, with the field still up, you might be screwed.”
Annie stated, “As long as you hurry, I do not see a problem, Ed.”
Ed responded, “Thank you. Is everyone clear on their role?”
Violin replied, “Yep.”
Bob said, “Of course.”
John said, “Sure.”
Annie commented, “I have heard worse plans that have worked out for the best.”
Braca responded, “Sounds like a good plan, to me.”
Violin spoke up, “Braca, I have a question.”
Braca offered, “Go ahead, Violin.”
Violin asked, “How did you know which one of these ships is the flagship?”
Braca answered, “The identification numbers on the sides of the ships. I can see them from here.”
Ed stated, “I don't see the numbers.”
John commented, in a halfhearted manner, “That is because our human eyes are deficient.”
Bob mentioned, “Crackers Don't Matter.”
Ed replied, “Oh, thanks honey.”
Bob said, “No problem.”
Annie stated, “Don't feel bad about it. I cannot see the numbers yet either. I never could get the knack for using the force to enhance one's vision.”
Violin commented, “I can see the numbers now that I know what to look for. And I can even read them.”
Braca commented, “That is interesting. But, that is a matter for another time.”
Violin replied, “Agreed.”
Braca then continued to follow the path he was cleared for, as they approached the Peacekeeper flagship.
(_)
A few minutes later, as they flew closer to the Peacekeeper Commander Carrier flagship, Ed requested, “Annie. Can you sense the boys in that ship?”
Annie answered, “Yes. But, I cannot sense where exactly they are.”
Ed replied, “At least, it is a start.”
John spoke up, “Annie, could I have your honest opinion on something?”
Annie replied, “Sure. What is it?”
John asked, “Which do you find cooler, you Imperial Star Destroyers, and Super Star Destroyers? Or, Peacekeeper Command Carriers?”
Annie admitted, “That is a hard call. I use to think Star Destroyers were imposing, but these Command Carriers are in a class of their own. It guess it is like what you want in a car. It is a matter of personal preference. But, I don't want to be on the wrong side of either of those types of ships. Which is exactly what we are doing.”
John agreed, “You got that right.”
Bob commented, “As long as they are not shooting at us, we are fun.”
Annie replied, “Point taken.”
(_)
A minute later, they saw through the front window, that were entering the shuttle bay they were assigned to, Braca stated, “We will be landing in a minute. Get ready.”
John pulled out pulse pistol.
Braca used his left hand on the controls, as he used his right hand to pull out his pulse pistol. Braca had kept his pulse pistol with him during his years as retirement. It was half fueled, and still was in working order.
Bob pulled out his revolver.
Annie unhooked her lightsaber, but she did not yet ignite it.
(_)
A few minutes later, inside shuttle bay sixteen, of the flagship, the technicians and guards watched as older transport shuttle pass through the large open shuttle bay doors, and the atmospheric protect field, that kept the air inside the ship from being sucked out into the vacuum of space.
Less than a minute after the shuttle entered the bay, the shuttle found an open space to land.
A few seconds later, the hatch opened, they watched as Annie jumped out, while igniting her red lightsaber.
Annie landed in a defensive stance, ready to deflect any energy attacks directed at her, or her companions.
John was the second one to come out, with his pulse pistol at the ready.
Braca and Bob were right behind John. With Ed and Violin bringing up the rear.
What happened next surprised everyone.
Bob, John, and Braca, knew better than to fire first, because they each knew that doing so would draw fire towards them, in a situation where they had no cover, except for Annie's lightsaber, and force skills.
Annie did not go on the offense, because she providing cover for the other five members of her team.
Meanwhile, the peacekeeper technicians and guards looked at the intruders.
All of the peacekeepers recognize John Crichton and Annie.
Or, more aptly, the galactic threat level renegade, and the walking death machine that kicked security's ass, on the ship, last week.
Also, a few of them recognized, Braca.
The peacekeepers then looked at each, then back at the new group.
And as if a starter pistol went all, all the peacekeepers, even the guards, immediately turned, and ran from the intruders, as they swiftly evacuated the shuttle bay.
Within seconds, the room was cleared, without a shot being fire.
John turned to Annie, as he stated, “You really do know how to make an impression.”
Annie turned to John, as she smirked, as she replied, “You're just jealous.”
Bob pointed out, “No red shirts among that crowd.”
Violin replied, “You got that right. These guys are a lot smarter than stormtroopers ever were.”
Annie said, “Oh the stories I could tell you.”
Violin commented, “I bet. You know this situation is kind of reality ensuing.”
Everyone in the group turned to look at Violin, as John asked, “How so?”
Violin answered, “Think about it. Take for example the Dark Force video games. Especially the later games, like Jedi Outcast. If the enemies knew ahead of time what Kyle Katarn was capable of. They would not attack him. They would run away from him. Like we just saw here. It is clear the folks here know you two as, crazy awesome lunatic, and god mode Sue. And they ran.”
John replied, “Hey.”
Annie said, “Hold on a minute.”
Violin responded, “Don't feel bad. I am about in the same category as you two, given I inherited my mothers abilities. It is just that I am not a violent person.”
John commented, “I use to not be a violent person, until this section of the galaxy started passing me around like the town bicycle.”
Annie admitted, “I have always been adventurous.”
Ed commented, “Who cares? Where is the nearest terminal?”
Braca used his pulse pistol, in his right hand, to pointed away from the group, and towards a direction to their left, as he stated, “Over here.”
Braca then lead Ed, Bob, Violin, and John away from their small ship, as Annie stayed to guard their shuttle, and possible means of escape.
(_)
A minute later, the five adults reached the closed door to a hallway.
Braca stated, “The nearest computer terminal, with the proper clearance to do what you need to do, is down this hallway, passed this door.” He pressed a button by the side of the sliding metal door, to open it. But, the door stayed shut. Braca said, “Frell. They likely sealed all the doors and hatches, on their way out of the room.”
Bob commented, “Of course they would lock the doors behind them. The very fact they ran shows they are far more intelligent than most people in their position, in the multiverse. Braca, you need to realize that your people are at least somewhat genre savvy. If for any other reason than having to deal with John for all these years.”
Braca turned to Bob, as he conceded, “You may have a point there.”
John lips curled into a wicked grin, as he said, “I admit that I inspire people. I may have missed my calling as a motivational speaker.”
Ed stated, “Either way, we need to get the door open.” She turned to Violin, as she ordered, “Violin, please remove that door.”
Everyone backed away from the door, as Violin walked up to the door.
Violin rubbed her hands together, as she commented, “Anyone else find it humorous that the cute young girl of the group is doing the heavy lifting?”
Bob commented, “I find it very funny. I am just polite enough not to laugh about it. Now, please open the door, Violin.”
Violin smiled, as she commented, “Only because you asked nicely.”
Violin then gripped into the doors, in the middle, on each side. Her fingers pushed through the metal like it was tinfoil.
When she had a full grip on the door, with both her hands, she pulled back, and the door came with her.
As second later, she lightly dropped the ripped off door onto the ground, away from the group.
Violin then check her hands and fingers for any cuts, or bruises. She found none.
As if the strong door had been made of tinfoil to her.
While, Ed and Bob knew about Violin's abilities. John and Braca did not, with both of them showing surprise on their faces as they watched, the slender young woman display the incredible among of raw physical strength, to accomplish her feat.
John thought, 'I am so happy that girl is not a violent person.'
Braca thought, 'I thought when Ed stated that Violin would take care of the doors. She would pick the locks. Not tear the doors off of the walls. And her hands appear uninjured. Violin is a lot stronger, and tougher, than a Scarran. I am glad she has such a pleasant personality, of she could be trouble.'
Braca verbally commented, “Now, I know why you brought along for this mission.”
Bob shrugged, as he replied, “Don't worry. Violin here is a lovely girl, that does know her own strength.”
Violin turned to them, as she stated, “Yes. Learning not to accidentally harm people with my super-strength, was one of the first lessons my mother, and my stepfather, taught me.”
Ed commented, “Good parenting is a wonderful thing. Now, which was is that terminal?”
Braca help his pistol up, as he walked passed the group, to check the other side of the door. Braca found the hallway was clear.
While Braca entered the hallway, he stated, “This way.”
The other four adults followed Braca into the hallway.
(_)
Five minutes later, on the command deck of the Peacekeeper Flagship Commander Carried, Commander Meka, in her peacekeeper officer's uniform, stood at her post, in command of the flagship.
A female subordinate officer swiftly walked up to Meka. The subordinate said, in a calm tone of voice, “There has been an, intruder alert, issued in shuttle bay sixteen.”
Meka turned to the her subordinate, as she inquired, in a professional, even tone of voice, “What happened?”
The subordinate answered, “Six individuals broke into the shuttle bay, using a transport shuttle.”
Meka asked, “Has The Grand Chancellor been notified?”
The female officer replied, “No, Commander.”
Meka questioned, “Why not?”
The subordinate explained, “The manner in which they have to using drain the prototype gate, of its energy, is interfering with subsystems in that area of the ship. Including communications.”
Meka ordered, “Then, send someone to personally inform the Grand Chancellor.”
The female subordinate looked at a lower ranking male officer, whom was standing at a nearby computer terminal. The male officer had overheard Meka' conversation. He noticed his high ranking officer was looking at him. He turned to the female officer, nodded once, turned towards the doors of the room, and swiftly left the command deck.
The female subordinate then turned back to Meka. With Meka looking back at her subordinate.
Meka inquired, “Have the intruders been identified?”
The female officer answered, “Yes. We have identification on three of the six intruders. You are not going to like who they are. First, Annie is back. With her is, John Crichton, and retired captain Meeklo Braca.”
Meka was silent for a few seconds. She then asked, “What do the others look like?”
The subordinate answered, “All of them look like Sebaceans. But, with the human, Crichton, here. You never know. The first is a young, a fair skinned woman with dark blue hair. The next is a slight only woman with red hair and tanned skin. The third person is a man, who is much older than the first two. He has white hair and has fair skin.”
Meka thought over the description of the intruders. She then remembered, as she stated, “The one with white hair, and the one with red hair are a married couple. They are Stan and Lewis' parents. The blue haired girl is a friend. It is imperative we do not kill any of them. Because, in doing so, we may ruin the Grand Chancellor's plans.”
“Still, we have the advantage. We know who they are, and who they are after. They are not here to damage the ship, nor harm the crew. So, we can play this safely, until the Grand Chancellor gets here to give her orders on the situation.”
The subordinate replied, “Understood Commander. What would you prefer us to do?”
Meka inquired, “Were the doors the shuttle bay, and the adjoining areas to the shuttle bay, sealed from the rest of the ship?”
The female officer answered, “Yes. As personal evacuated, they locked several doors behind them. But, security cameras show the dark blue haired woman is literally opening the doors, and ripping them from the walls, with her bare hands.”
The subordinate standing next to Meka, overheard Meka mutter, “I forgot about that.”
Meka then focused back towards the face of the female officer, as she asked, “Where are the intruders now?”
The female officer answered, “Annie is staying by the transport shuttle they came in. The other five are together, and they were last seen going down a hallway.”
Meka ordered, “Inform personnel that we are dealing with a delicate matter. I want security teams ready to go after the intruders, but leave them alone, for right now. If personnel are engaged by the intruders, security teams are to use only stun weapon on the intruders. None of them are to be killed. None of the security teams are to attempt to capture them. Also, do not trap the intruders. And should they response with a lethal intent, security teams are to fall back, as needed.”
The subordinate asked, “And Annie?”
Meka ordered, “Leave Annie alone. No one enters shuttle bay sixteen. Also, close the outside doors to shuttle bay sixteen.”
The female officer inquired, “So, you intent to try to contain Annie?”
Meka answered, “No. My reasons are completely different than that. But, do not worry. Things will work out. Now, relay my orders.
The female officer responded, “Yes, commander.”
The female officer turned and had Meka's orders relayed.
As the female subordinate turned back to Meka, Commander Meka inquired, “Now, what are casualties, so far?”
The female officer answered, “None, so far, commander. When personnel saw Annie and Crichton. Everyone ran.”
Meka smiled, as she ordered, “Find out everyone whom ran, and make a minor commendation in their records for showing their intelligence.”
The female officer responded, “Yes commander. Any other orders?”
Meka answered, “No. Now, we wait for the Grand Chancellor to come, and take over the situation.”
A minute later, the Grand Chancellor had not yet arrived on the command deck, when the power suddenly shutdown, with emergency lighting coming on.
Meka deadpanned, “Now, what?”
(_)
Thirty seconds earlier, in shuttle bay sixteen, Annie was standing guard, by her ship, with her ignited lightsaber in her right hand. She then noticed something happening to the large, open doors, that let into space.
Annie then watched as the two, large, metal, shuttle bay doors, that lead out to space, began to close.
Annie mentally cursed, 'Damn it. There is nothing I can do. I cannot leave the ship unguarded. I will just have to hope for the best.”
A few seconds after the outside shuttle bay doors fully closed, the power went out, and emergency lighting came on.
Annie mentally deadpanned, “What wonderful timing.”
(_)
Five minutes ago, Ed and Bob's group had made it to a computer terminal, in a security room, near shuttle bay sixteen.
Ed sat in a chair, at the keyboard, as she looked at the computer monitor of the terminal, in front of her. She then began to work her magic in hacking the ship's computer network.
The other four adults stood by, and watched Ed work.
Thirty seconds later, Ed stated, “I am somewhat disappointed in the security systems on this ship. I would think Scorpius would have better firewalls.”
Braca stated, “Scorpius has complained about network security in peacekeeper software for years. But, the software is fault tested, and it takes years to make stable updates which meet peacekeeper standards. I guess she is still working on upgrading such software.”
Bob commented, “The pitfalls of bureaucracy.”
Braca stated, in a slightly sarcastic tone of voice, “Don't even get me started.”
Ed looking over various ship schematics, records, and sensor reading.
A few seconds later, Ed stated, “I found the boys. They are in a lab not far from here. Though, I am getting some screwing readings from where our sons are at, and the surrounding sections of the ship.”
Braca questioned, “What type of readings?”
Ed stated, “Mostly power fluctuations in the electrical grid.”
Brace commented, “That is not normal. Still, it could be a number of things. Since there is not an evacuation order, which could extend to even this part of the ship, I would not worry.”
Ed replied, “Good.”
Bob said, “It is an alien spaceship. I not worried about strange readings. I am just glad we found our sons. And knowing them, they are probably working on that formula the Scorpius tricked them into solved.”
Ed agreed, “That is very likely. Also, records state they have only been here for a week.”
Bob commented, “They cannot get into that much trouble in a week.”
Ed responded, “I agree. I am now working on finding the reality protection field generators...”
After a few more keystrokes, and the computer informing Ed of something. Ed stated, “We got a problem, the reality field generator is on an independent power system, and works on a standalone computer. I cannot shut it down.”
John said, “They we will fall back to plan, B, and escape on the transport shuttle.”
Ed stated, “Exactly. Now, to do the rest of our plans. This will take a few minutes.” She then started typing commands, to turn off the power grid, and emergency power, except for life support, artificial gravity, atmospheric shielding, and lighting. She then entered the command into the computer network.
Suddenly, power went out, as emergency lighting kick in.
As Ed stood up, she said, “Now, we should be able to move more freely, with communications cut.”
John commented, “I guess I got to go see Scorpy. I always hoped I would never have to see her, again, in this lifetime.”
Bob stated, “We all got to do things we don't like.”
John agreed, “True.” He then carefully handed his pulse pistol, Winona, to Bob.
Bob put his revolver into his left hand, as he gripped the pulse pistol with his right hand.
John requested, “Don't lose her.”
Bob replied, “Don't worry. I won't.” He thought, 'I am surprised that John is actually doing Braca's plan for him. Not that I am going to get in the middle of that mess.'
Bob then holstered John's pulse pistol in his gunbelt holster, with his own revolver still in his hands. It was a tight fit, but Bob's holster held the pulse pistol in place.
Bob then changed hands to where he held his revolver with his right hand, and his trigger finger was resting against the trigger guard.
Violin turned to John, as she said, “Good luck.”
John replied, “Thanks.” He then turned, and walked out of the room, as he left to look for the Scorpius.
A few seconds later, Ed stated, “Now, let's go get our kids. They are this way.”
Ed was careful, as she began to lead the way, out of the room, and down different hallway than John had taken, with the other three adults following behind her.
(_)
A minute before the power outage.
Inside the gate lab, Lewis, Stan, Scorpius, and their research team continued to monitor the open gate system.
As Lewis stood by Stan and Scorpius, he looked at the monitor readout, at a nearby computer terminal, for a few seconds. He then turned to his brother, and teacher. He stated, “The readouts state that gate, at both ends, are still stable. With no problems for the past few hours. Also, the time dilation between to two points is stable. With fluctuations of only a second, or two, back and forth. The feedback drain working better than we could have hope. I think we did it.”
Scorpius looked over at the brothers, as she smiled at them. She turned back to the swirling gate, as she said, “You boys have done better than I had hoped. And in record time. Mark this day, because you have brother created history. You will be remember in annals of peacekeeper history.”
Stan stated, “Thank you for that.”
Suddenly, a peacekeeper officer came running passed the large open, sliding metal doors of the room.
When the officer reached Scorpius and the brothers, he immediately stopped, as he stood at attention.
Scorpius asked, in a calm tone of voice, “What is it?”
The officer stated, in Sebacean, “Grand Chancellor, Commander Meka needs you on the bridge, immediately. There has are intruders in the ship. Unfortunately, the energy drain system is effecting communications, which is why I was sent down here to inform you.”
Scorpius said, in Sebacean, “That is quite alright. Please, go inform, Commander Meka that I will be there in a minute.”
The officer replied, “Yes, Grand Chancellor.” He then turned, and ran out of the room.
Scorpius turned to the brothers, as she said, in english, “Duty calls.”
Lewis said, “Good luck.”
Just as Scorpius was about to turn around, the power went out, with emergency lighting immediately coming on.
Scorpius, Stan, and Lewis' eyes all went wide.
Stan and Lewis rushed to their personal computer terminals need the open gate, while Scorpius swiftly inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Is emergency power off, as well?”
Lewis cursed, with worry in his tone of voice, “Damn it. Yes. It is. And I don't know why. Fortunately, these computers are still working, because they are tied directly to the gate system, and pulled electricity from it, directly, with a power adapter.”
Stan stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Starting emergency gate shutdown procedures, right now.”
Scorpius complimented, “Good, thinking, young Stan. How long is it going to take to fully shutdown the gate?”
Stan answered, “As we informed you. The shutdown will take several minutes. Both sides of the gate have to be powered down at the same levels, at the same time. If they are not, they could create an unstable portal, when one gate closes, with the open gate becoming unstable, as the end of that gate shifts to another destination.”
Lewis mentioned, “Also, someone has to stay here to monitor the shutdown. There is real chance the feedback will build up to an explosion before the gate fully shuts down. In that case, the person has to send the signal to the other gate to be destroyed, and risk being sucked into an unstable vortex for the next few minutes, before the gate on this end fully closes.”
“Though, the person might be able to outrun the gravity vacuum, if the person can get out of the room, quick enough, before the gate fully becomes a gravity vacuum.”
Stan said, “Good idea. Still, the only three people that are qualified to do this, are the three of us. And you cannot do it, professor. So, it is one of us. I which case, I will do it.”
Lewis countered, “No, you won't. I will do it.”
Scorpius spoke up, “At touching as it is for you both to display how much you love each other. I suggest you decide very quickly.”
Stan asked, “Why?”
Scorpius stated, “Any second now, the large doors are going to close on their own. They are on a battery. If the power is out to long, they automatically seal themselves. This was in case an experiment got out of control, and the accidentally killed the power for the area. The doors were designed to close, to protect the rest of the ship from an explosion.”
Lewis stated, “I fully understand the logic behind it. Though, I am not happy about it.”
Stan said, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Just great.” He looked over at their team, as he ordered, in a loud, serious tone of voice, “Everyone out! Drop what you are doing! And leave immediately for another section of the ship!”
As the team started to leave the room, the two large, thick, metal double doors started to close towards each other.
Lewis stated, “Professor, go do your job. We will handle things here.”
Scorpius said, “Good luck to the both of you.” She then turned, and calmly walked out of the room.
The brothers watched as their teacher left their sight, as she exited the lab, and turned down a hallway.
The brothers then looked at each other, as Stan offered, “Last chance to leave.”
Lewis replied, “We have gone this far together. I am not bailing on you, yet.”
Stan responded, “I appreciate that brother.”
Lewis then suggested, “Besides, if we needed to, we might be able to climb to those windows, that are thirty feet up from us.”
Stan looked at the theater windows, then back at Lewis, as he complimented, “Good idea. Though, I knew I forgot something in the project manifest.”
Lewis inquired, “That being?”
Stan answered, “A ladder.”
Both brothers laughed as the doors to their lab then shut completely together. Trapping them inside the lab with the powered prototype gate they were desperately trying to shutdown.
(_)
Five minutes later, John was walking the hallways, looking for someone to surrender too.
As John continued walking, he thought, 'No one around. Not a guard when you need one. Maybe I should just head up to Scorpy's office, by myself. I believe I remember where it is. Though, it has been a few years, since I have been to her personal office. And that is if it is in the same place, as Scorpy's old command carrier. Knowing her, for security reasons, I doubt she kept her new office in the same location on this ship.'
John then turned and walked down another hallway for another minute. Still, there was no one in sight.
John mentally wondered, 'This is getting ridiculous. I think Annie and I may have scared them off more than I thought. This reminds me when I used my reality device, a few years ago, to check out the Black Lagoon anime series.'
'Sure, I won't watch my series, because there is a real chance doing so will finally shatter what is left of my fragile sanity.'
'Still, the Black Lagoon series was an enjoyable series to watch. Also, I have to admit, even before the upgrades, those women were terrifying. Especially, the Bloodhound. She really did earn her, dreaded, status.'
'Though, I think that Annie and I, given our well earn reputations, have eclipsed her status of being the dreaded, when it comes to this situation. So, I might as well start heading for where I think Scorpy's office is. It is clear I am not going to find a guard to surrender to, because they know me too well.'
Just as John turned the next corner, whom he saw watching away from him, about twenty feet away, surprised him.
John stated, out loud, “You have got to be kidding me.”
The figure in dress black, except for her exposed, white haired head, stop walking, as she immediately recognized John's voice.
The woman turned around and did a double-take when she saw, John. She asked, in a confused tone of voice, “John?... What are doing here?”
John hesitantly replied, “Well... Long story about that. Anyway, you are looking good, Scorpy.”
Scorpius calmly said, “Thank you, John. Yet, I do not understand why you are here. I thought we had an understanding. I leave you, your family, and your friends, alone. And you leave me, and the Peacekeepers, alone.”
John responded, with sadness in his tone of voice, “I fully agree. It was a wonderful arrangement. If it helps, we turned down the brothers, when first they came to us. Unfortunately, I owed a favor to Darth Vader, herself. And she called in that marker. If it wasn't for that fact, you would have never seen me, again. And as much as I hate to admit it, Annie is one notch higher in the badass meter than you are.”
Scorpius admitted, “I have seen the Star Wars movies, and I must admit that you are correct, John. Though, you should be careful, John. Vader has been know for altering deals.”
John deflated, as he replied, “I know.” He then inquired, in a more hopeful tone of voice, “So, no hard feelings?”
Scorpius said, “None taken. I see that you are not here by choice. I will leave your family and friends alone. And I will try to not have you seriously harmed.”
John responded, “I appreciate that. Listen. We just want the boys. I will try to keep the damage to a minimum.”
Scorpius quipped, “That would be a first, John.”
Both adults laughed at the Sebacean's joke.
As the two of them calmed down, Scorpius stated, “Given your situation, John. I will allow you to take the first move. Good luck.”
Scorpius then turned and walked away from John. She continued calmly walking down the hallway, until she turned again, and was out of John's sight.
John thought, 'Damn, Scorpius has mellowed since her gender change... Just like Annie... I like it. Still, since I am clearly know going to be able to stall, Scorpy. I might as well head back to the shuttle bay, and join up with Annie. So, we can wait for the rest of the team to show up.'
John then turned, and headed back the way he came, as he retraced his steps. So, he could make his way to shuttle bay sixteen, without dealing with any seal doors. It soon became real easy, once he found the trail of doors that Violin had been tearing open, and he used those wholes to backtrack to the shuttle bay.
(_)
Elsewhere in the flagship, Bob, Ed, Violin, and Braca made it to the large closed metal doors that constituted the entrance to lab, where they believed the brothers were.
While they looked at the large doors, Violin asked, “Why are the doors shut?”
Braca winched, as he stated, “I forgot. When the power goes out, for security measures, labs like this have their doors automatically shut, via a battery powered system.”
Ed said, “This could pose a problem.”
Bob inquired, “Do you think the boys would stay in there? Or, leave for another part of the ship?”
Ed answered, “I don't see any why they would leave. They don't know we are here. Or, eve if they know there are intruders here. They do not know it is us.”
“So, they could just be hiding in there, because it is safe. Now, the question is. How do we get in... The answer... Violin.”
Violin stepped up to the large metal double doors. As she sized them up, she commented, “They are kind of big. And probably thick. I am not sure if I can open them.”
Bob commented, “It won't hurt to try.”
Violin responded, “Okay.”
Violin punched her fingers into one of the metal doors, creating holes in the doors that went up to the middle of her forearms. She then tried to pulled back, but the door would not budge.
Violin removed her hands from the doors. She rubbed her uninjured hands, as she stated, “It won't budge. It is too big, too heavy, and too thick, for me to move. I pushed just over a foot into the door and I didn't didn't reach the other side. And if I try to go any deeper, I will not be able to have any leverage with my arms.”
Violin turned to the group, as she suggested, “Braca, you said these doors are on a battery system. Can Ed here hack the doors open?”
Braca said, “No. While the mechanisms to doors are directly connected the batteries, and they trigger when the emergency power is cut off. The electronic controls to the doors are still on the main power grid, and not tied to the batteries. These types of doors are intentionally designed that way, just to prevent someone from shutdown the main power gird, and trying picking the electronic locks.”
“In other words, the main power grid has to be on to open the doors.”
Violin cursed, “Damn.”
Ed stated, “There had to be another way in. What about crawling through the ventilation system?”
Braca stated, “No good. Ventilation ducks going in and out of secure areas are intentionally made to be to small to crawl in, even for a child.”
Bob calmly requested, “Braca, you know this ship design better than anyone else here. Just take a moment and think if there is another way into this lab.”
Everyone stayed quiet for a few seconds, as Braca thought about a possible answer to their current problem.
Then, Braca's eyes went wide, as he smiled. He stated, “Yes. I believe there is. Labs like this had an upstairs theater room, with windows looking into the lab. And the sealed doors to that room are the same as the type of doors that Violin here has been opening with no problems.”
Ed politely said, “Then, please lead the way.”
Braca replied, “Follow me. It will not take long to reach the stairs to that theater room.”
Braca then started walking in a direction, down the hallway, towards a stairway, to the left side of the large metal doors, with Ed, Bob, and Violin following right behind him.
(_)
At that moment, inside the lab, Lewis and Stan were at their computer terminals, trying their best to shutdown the gate system, without causing a gate explosion.
As the brothers read the readouts, Stan cursed, “Damn it! The gates are not closing fast enough. The energy build up is too fast. While it will take the gates six minutes to close, we will have a gate explosion in five minutes.”
Lewis stated, “Looks like we are going to have to do the final fail-safe.”
Stan commented, “Yes. We will have to blow the other gate, and just ride out the unstable portal on this side. I just don't like blowing up our work. It is so cliché.”
Lewis agreed, “No arguments there. But, as least we have time to get ready, before we destabilize the portal on this side.”
Stan replied, “True. We need to look around and find someway to tie ourselves down. Look around for something we can use as anchor points, and to tie us too.”
The brothers quickly looked around.
Lewis stated, “We got plenty of extension cables we can use for rope.”
Stan used his right hand to point to the wall, which was only ten feet from their computer terminals, and twenty feet from the right side of the gate. He said “And there are metal handholds bolted to that wall, which we can use as an anchor points.”
There were for metal handholds side by side, in wide, three foot spans. The handholds were veritably attached to the wall. With the handholds being, u, shaped, with curved bars being one inch thick, with both ends being bolted to the wall. And the outer rims of the handholds were big enough for human adults to fully grip. Though, not big enough to stick their forearms into.
Also, each side of where the metal handholds were attached to the wall were bolted twice. With four bolts in all, for each metal handhold.
Lewis commented, “I suggest we use two of the handholds each. And we tie ourselves to the middle of the cables we use, around our waists. Then, we double knot and tie each end of the cable we have to both the handholds we are using. Also, leave enough slack, so we can hold on to the cables, and the cables will not bite into our waists.”
Stan replied, “Good idea. I will be the one to push the button to send the destruct signal to the other gate. But, we need to hurry. We got four minutes, with change.”
Both brothers rush over to some electronics that were not in use and unplugs some long power cables. They then dragged those cables over to the handholds by the wall.
As they tied the middle of the cables around their waists, Lewis stated, “I did some calculations in my head. Given how close we are to the gate, that gate gravitation pull of that gate from the distance is going to be around two times as much as Earth's gravity.”
“But, the good news is that the area of gravity pull will dropped off quickly. Right outside the doors and walls, will likely be equal to one and a half times Earth's gravity. Though, several feet from the other side of the wall outside, gravity will dropped off to normal levels.”
Stan stated, “I never was able bench press twice my own weight, on Earth standard gravity. Let along maintain that much weight for a number of minutes. Though, I have come close a few time.”
Lewis commented, “Neither, have I. Though, I am as strong as you. But, I guess there is a first time for everything.”
Stan stated, “A few pulled muscles I can live with.”
Lewis said, “Same here. Let's do this.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
As the brothers tied the first knots on one end of their cables to the dual pair of handholds, that each of them were using, with each of them using two of the four handholds by the wall, Lewis commented, “But, being this close the event horizon, we are going to be in for a wild ride for the next few minutes.”
Stan tied the other end of his cable, to his second handhold, as he winched. He requested, “Please. Do not compare the gate are standing by to a black hole.”
While Lewis tied the other end of the cable to the second handhold he was using, he said, “Sorry. It just slipped out that way.”
Stan commented, “Don't worry about it. Anyway, I did some figures, myself. I believe we will have about thirty seconds after the blast, before the gate on this side fully destabilizes. Still, I am going to have get to the terminal, give the signal, and run back here. Be ready to grab hold of me, if I cannot knot the other end of this cable in time.”
Lewis replied, “Not to worry. If that happens, I got you. Now, let's start this rodeo.”
Stan nodded, and went to his computer terminal. As he looked at the readouts, he stated, “The good news is we got two minutes, and change, until a gate explosion. Okay, sending self-destruct signal to the other gate in. Three. Two. One.” He then pressed the enter key. Next, he quickly ran back to the handholds, as he tied up the other end of his cable to the handholds, with him being tied down to the right of his brother, when facing the wall, his brother and himself, were bound too.
Stan finished just in time, as both brothers watched as lightning starting to arcing out around the sides of the circular gate, from both ends, as the gravitation pull of the gate began to increase. Still, the gate itself remained intact.
Within thirty seconds, the gravitation pulled was equal to two times Earth's gravity, but the forces the gravity sudden stopped at that intensity.
The pull of the gate soon swept the brothers off their feet, leaving them hanging in the air, towards the vortex in the center of the gate.
Small items, that were not very heavy, started to be sucked into the gate.
The brothers each gripped an end of the two cables they were using, to prevent the cables from biting into their waists.
They also worked through the muscle and joint strain of suddenly becoming two times heavier.
Lewis winched, as he stated, “This is going to be a long few minutes.”
Stan grunted. He then suggested, “Just clear you mind, and work through the pain.”
Lewis replied, “I am trying.”
Stan said, “If that doesn't help. Think of happy thoughts. Like that dark blue haired girl in Tokyo.”
Lewis inquired, “I thought you didn't like, Violin.”
Stan replied, “Oh, I admit that Violin is attractive. Just... There was something was... Off about her.”
Lewis responded, “Now, that I think about it, I will concede that point to you. Still, I wonder what her Tokyo was like, when her parents were around her age?”
Stan agreed, “Good question.”
(_)
At that moment, on the command deck, emergency power was manual restarted, and the computer systems are already rebooting, with the computer terminals, and sensors, being the first things to come online.
The same female officer as before turned Meka, as she stated, “Commander, we have a gravity well warning in one of the labs. It is two gravities above standard.”
Meka rolled her eyes, as she inquired, “Is it the one where the humans are conducting their experiments?”
The officer replied, “Yes, Commander.”
Meka questioned, “And the doors to the lab are already sealed.”
The officer stated, “Affirmative.”
Meka ordered, “As soon as communications are back online, order an evacuation of that section of the ship. Also, prepare for evacuation of the ship itself, if the gravity well increases in strength. We will not have another starburst incident.”
Just then, Scorpius walk into the room, she had overheard Meka's orders, as she stated, “Cancel those evacuation orders. The situation is being handle.”
As their Grand Chancellor entered the commander deck, all the Peacekeepers immediately stood at attention, as they face her.
Scorpius came to a stop, a few feet from Meka. She ordered, “At ease. And continue with their duties.”
Everyone then relaxed, as they went back to their duties.
Scorpius turned to Meka. She saw Meka looked back at her. Scorpius explained, “The brothers are implementing a fail-safe on their gate system, which is temporally creating an artificial gravity pull counter to the ship's artificial gravity pull. The gate will likely close on its own within a matter of few hundred micros, with the gravity then normalizing, as before.”
Meka replied, “That is a relief to know.”
Scorpius said, “Yes. It is. Now, we have much to do. And little time to do it in. Status report. What is offline.”
Meka answered, “As of this moment, main power, weapons, communications, security functions, and most of the data network. Also, the intruders behind this are...”
Scorpius interrupted her, “Yes. I would guess they are Bob and Ed Lowe, the brothers' parents. I already met John Crichton on the way here. By the way, he is not here by choice. Annie is putting him up to it. And since that is the case, Annie is likely present as well.”
Meka stated, “Yes. Though, we are not sure where all the intruders are. We do know that Annie is here. And she is guarding the transport they came in. Also, there is a young, blue haired woman here with super-strength whom has the ability to ripped the seal doors out of the walls.”
Scorpius commented, “That would likely be, Violin. Anyone else?”
Meka cracked a grin, as she answered, “Yes. Braca has returned, and he is with them.”
Scorpius smirked, as she inquired, “So, it is today. I have looked forward to this. Anyway, what has your response to the intruders?”
Meka responded, “I have ordered that they are to be avoided, and left alone. There is no point in wasting lives of our crew in a no win situation.”
Scorpius said, “A wise assertion of the situation. Have their been any casualties?”
Meka gave Scorpius a genuine smile, as she stated, “There have been none, Grand Chancellor. When personnel first saw them, they ran and locked the doors behind them.”
Scorpius complimented, “Good. I see I left the care of this ship and crew in good hands. Carry on with your plans.”
Meka replied, “Thank you, sir.”
(_)
A few seconds later, right outside the upstairs theater, to the lab the Lowe brothers were using, Violin ripped open the seal doors.
As Bob, Ed, Braca, and Violin walk into the theater room, they noticed they suddenly got slightly heavier in the room.
Violin inquired, “No fat jokes intended. But, in all sincerity, does anyone feel heavily in here. If with my super-strength, I noticed it.”
Bob commended, “I do, as well. It is notable. But, not painful, yet.”
Ed said, “Same here.”
Braca stated the obvious, “There there must be a problem in the lab.”
They all rushed over to the windows looking down at the lab. Each window was three feet, by three feet, paned windows, which were made of some type of clear plastic.
As they looked down, they saw that the gate was sucking everything not bolted down to the floor, or walls, in the lab. With the brothers having tied themselves to the wall, while they held on the cables holding them for dear life, as their bodies hung in midair.
Ed quietly said, “Oh no, they built a gate... And it has destabilize... I did this when I shutdown the ship.”
Bob said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Ed, you could not have known this would happen. Still, we have to get them out of there.”
Violin suggested, “Since we have no rope. We will just have to do the quick and dirty method. I could break one of the windows. Fall down beside them. Then, use my super-strength to pick both of them up, and then jump back up here.
Braca stated, “That would not work. The the gravitational pull will suck you into the gate, as you fall down. And even if you made it to the floor, there is too great a risk of you slipping, and being sucked into the gate.”
Violin frowned, as she conceded, “You're right.”
Braca commented, “Though, he you try to create handholds, on the wall, as you slowly make your way down, or up when you get the brothers. But, this will take time. And since there is no want to anchor you, there is a real chance you could slip, and be sucked that way. And still, you would have to rescue one brother at a time. Because, by the time you down to them, they wold be to tired to hold on to you.”
Violin continued to frown, as she stated, “That also sounds too risky”
Bob begged, “There must be something we can do.”
Violin replied, “If you got an ideas, Bob. I am more than happy to listen to them.”
Bob had no idea in this case, and instead he remained silent.
(_)
At the moment, in the lab below the four adults, the Lowe brothers were doing their best to hang on for their dear lives.
The gate continued to spit out lightning, as the gate crackled with energy.
The brothers firmly held onto the cables that tied them to the wall. They stood had enough strength to hold on, with their bodies currently being two times their weight, compared to the level of gravity on Earth.
With the brothers' feet danging in the air, Lewis commented, “Stan, if it makes you feel better, I have our reality device with us, in my pants pocket.”
Stan replied, “That is nice to know. Not, that it is going to do us any good.”
Lewis responded, “True. But, I think we only got another few minutes of this.”
Stan stated, “That is what I figure, as well. We just go to hold on.”
Lewis said, “No problems there.”
Suddenly, the brothers started hearing creaking sounds coming for the wall behind them.
They looked to see that the bolts holding the handholds they were tied to were start to crack.
Stan commented, “You know. I admire the professor for buying only quality products. Like this cable holding us in place. But, I have a distinct feeling this ship was built by the lowest bidder.”
Lewis replied, “Some things are a constant, no matter what reality.”
Stan agreed, “That is so true.”
Within a few seconds, one of handholds anchoring Lewis broke, leaving only the other handhold anchoring him.
Lewis stated, “I am a goner any second.”
Stan demanded, “Grab my cable!”
Lewis responded, “No. These handholds can barely support one of us. Let along two.”
A second later, the other handhold gave way, causing Lewis to start to fall towards the gate.
Lewis suddenly felt himself stop.
Lewis looked up to see that Stan had let go of his cable with his left hand, and caught Lewis' cable.
Stan strained at the extra weight he now held on to, plus his own weight. But, he held firm, as he looked at his brother. He stated, “You go. I go. Now, get up here, before I lose my grip!”
Lewis immediately started to climb up his cable. Within seconds he reached Stan. With his right hand, he grabbed Stan's cable, and with his left hand, he grabbed Stan's left wrist.
Stan let go of Lewis' cable, with some mild relief. He then change his grip, on his left hand, to grab Lewis' left wrist as well.
A couple of seconds later, both them heard a familiar creak.
They looked up just in time to see one of the two handholds still anchoring them both, break, leaving only one last handhold holding them. And the last handhold was beginning to creak, as well.
Lewis stated, “For what its worth. I would done it all over again.”
Stan replied, “Same here. Try to hold on to me!”
Lewis responded, “I will!”
A second later, the last handhold broke, causing them to fall into towards the gate, as the portal pulled them in with its gravity.
As they got closer to the gate, they turned, to where both of them were facing each other, as they tightly gripped each other.
A second later, they entered the lightning eruption vortex, in the center of the gate.
While they were being pulled through the multicolored vortex, both brothers could see each other, as they tried to hold on together, but the tidal forces within were to great. At first they slipped out of each others grasp, which they quickly grabbed the others cable, only to be forced to let go of the cables, as they were pulled further apart.
A split second later, they lost sight of each other, as they fell through the energy tunnel.
(_)
From the theater room above, Ed, Bob, Violin, and Braca watched Lewis and Stan be sucked into the vortex of the gate.
The group just stared down at the gate for several seconds, before long they saw the gate shrink to a pinprick, and then close completely. As the gate closed, gravity slowly decreased as the gate closed, until it returned completely to normal.
Ed softly said, “My children...”
Bob quiet stated, “No. No. No. This is not happening...”
Violin look over to see the shell shocked expressions on Ed and Bob's faces. She thought, 'They could crack any second. This is the last place we want that to happen. I got to say something to them... Wait minute...'
Violin stated, “Ed, Bob, you boys are fine, and still alive. I know where they are at. Remember what Akira and Futaba told us. I am sure the boys have yet to run across my reality, in the past, at that time. That means they will eventually get there.”
“And Akira and Futaba both said the brothers acted fine, when they were there. So, relax. This is a failed, screwed up rescue... Which is pretty much par for course when John is involved, but there is still a good chance we can find your boys alive, and well.”
The Lowe parents looked up at Violin, as they thought over at what she said. Both of them cracked a small smile.
Ed said, “Thank you for the reminder Violin.”
Violin replied, “You're welcome.”
Bob stated, “Let's get out of here, and see if we can find out exactly when and where they are, then bring them home.”
Braca stated, “I know the quickest way back to Shuttle Bay Sixteen.”
Braca swiftly turned and walked out of the room, as he lead the way. With the other three adults quickly following him out of the room.
(_)
Ten minutes, and a few ripped out doors, later, the four adults made it back to shuttle bay sixteen.
While they approached the shuttled, they saw both Annie, and John were standing next to each other, as they were looking back at them. They saw that Annie had her lightsaber deactivated, and though, she still held her lightsaber in her right hand.
When the four adults came to a stop in front for Annie and John, Annie asked, “Where are the boys?”
Ed admitted, in a disappointing tone of voice, “We screwed up. We will explain, later.”
Annie replied, “I am sure it will be interesting explanation.”
John commented, “Well, I got some good news. Scorpy is not pissed off about all this.”
Annie stated, “With us two here, her ship is still in one piece, and her crew are not dead. She is probably counting her blessings.”
John replied, “That is very likely.”
Bob stated, “Everyone, as fun as it is to talk about this. We need to get out of here, right now. We can talk, after we escape.”
Annie commented, “Well, we got a problem with that.” She used her deactivated lightsaber, in right hand, to point at the large, metal bay doors to outside the ship, which were currently closed.
As the group look over at the closed bay doors, Bob inquired, in a slightly humorous tone of voice, “If I asked you why you don't use the force to open it, would you have a good answer?”
Annie could not help but crack a grin, as she said, in a humorous tone of voice, “Yes. But, I think it would make you feel better to know your boys asked me that same question, in this same situation.”
Bob agreed, “That is nice.”
Suddenly, emergency lighting switched to normal lighting.
Braca turned to the group, as he stated, “This is not good. With normal power has been restored, it is safe to say that the weapons systems are back online, as well.”
John asked, in a sober tone of voice, “So, who is going to stay behind, to open those doors? And try to take down the weapons systems down, again?”
Braca holstered his pulse pistol, as he stated, “I have to stay. I know a few more command codes that will open the bay doors and temporally shutdown the defense systems, including the defense screens and weapons, for a few minutes.”
John looked over at Braca, as he stated, in a polite tone of voice, “Well, Braca. After everything you have done for us, you have proven yourself a far better person than I thought you were. Good luck.” He then extend his right hand.
Braca shook John's right hand, with his own right hand. Both had a firm grip on the others hand, as Braca said, “You to, John. After my time with humanity, on Earth, I see now why Scorpius has developed a fondness for humanity. Because, so have I.”
As they broke their handshake, John replied, “I am glad to hear it. After all this, you are welcome on Moya, any time you want.”
Braca said, “I will remember that. And thank you.”
Bob commented, “I will not forget you help today, Braca.”
Ed said, “Thank you for helping my kids. And helping us. We owe you much.”
Annie remarked, “I want you to know, Braca, for your help, you are in my top five favorite bounty hunters list.”
Bob stated, “Trust me. Coming from her, that is high compliment.”
Braca lightly chuckled.
Violin step towards Braca, and leaned up to whisper in his right ear.
As second later, Violin took a few steps back from Braca, while she smiled.
Braca looked at Violin, with a mild amused expression on his face. He inquired, “You would do that with me?”
Violin continued to smile, as she said, “After today. Yes.”
Braca returned Violin's smile, as he commented, “I should be a hero more often.”
John grinned, as he said, “Yea. It does have its perks.”
Brace look at over at the group, as he stated, “Well, I hope to see you, later.”
Braca then turned around, and started running towards door to the hallway, that lead to the nearby computer terminal, which Ed had originally hacked, when they had first arrived on the flagship.
As they lost sight of Braca, Bob turned to John, while he said, “Oh yea, John. Here.”
Bob swapped holding his revolver to hold it in his left hand. He then used his right hand to pull out John's pulse pistol, from his holster, and hand the pulse pistol to John.
As John gently grabbed his pulse pistol, and holstered it, he said, “Thank you.”
Bob swapped his revolver back into his right hand, as holstered his pistol. He replied, “No problem.”
Annie clipped her deactivated lightsaber to the right side of her belt, as turned around, and walking up steps of the hatch, and into the transport shuttle.
When Annie reached the entrance to the ship, she turned back to the others, as she stated, “Come on guys. The ship is leaving now.” She then ducked inside the ship.
Ed said, “It is best not to keep that woman waiting.”
John commented, “You don't have to say that again.”
Violin stated, “I call shotgun.” She the briskly walked up the steps, at a normal pace.
Bob said, “Let's get in there, before that young woman does something foolish.”
Ed cracked a grin, as she stated, “Good idea.”
Ed, John, and Bob, then followed Annie and Violin into the ship.
Bob was last inside. When he cleared the hatch, and he was fully inside the ship, he press a button on a panel, on the interior wall, to his right side, by the entrance to the ship.
Over the course of the next few seconds, the hatch the lowed upwards, and sealed the ship.
With all of them inside, Annie turned to the group, as she stated, “John. You are co-pilot. You know this technology, and your skilled pilot in your own right.”
Violin did not complain, as she volunteered, “I will see in a third row seat, and the married couple can sit together in the second row.”
Ed and Bob turned to Violin, as Ed said, “Thank you, Violin.”
Bob stated, “We appreciate that, Violin.”
Less than half a minute later, the group were in their seats.
Annie and John were up front, in the cockpit, with Annie on the left side, and John on the right side. Ed and Bob in the second row, with Ed behind Annie, and Bob behind John. With Violin in the third row, behind Bob.
Annie had already powered up the engine to the transport, got the ship to hover in the air, and she turned the ship around to face the shuttle bay doors.
John turned to Annie, as he joked, “You know, if those doors don't open, this is going to be a real short trip.”
Annie rolled her eyes for a few seconds, as she used her left hand to reach across the aisle, and lightly backhand the front John's right shoulder.
A few second laters, both Annie and John looked out the front window of the ship to see that the shuttle bay doors start to open.
Annie smiled, as she complimented, “Looks like Braca did it. Now, let us hope we don't run into any prowlers on our way out.”
As the doors opened wide enough transport to fit through, Annie gunned the engines, and quickly flew the transport out into space.
Annie stated, “I don't sense any immediate danger, so let's just get out of here. I will let you know when the force tells me that we can use one of our reality devices to teleport out of here.”
Ed pulled out her reality device, as she stated, “Thank you, Annie. I will do the jump for us. Though, it is unfortunate that Braca had to stay behind, so we could escape. I hope he is not tortured, nor killed.”
John commended, “I won't worry too much about, Braca. Scorpius will not immediately kill him. Nor, will she torture him, unless he decides to be a jerk. So, he has time to figure a way to survive. And when comes to survival, Braca could have not have had a better teacher than he already had. And that teacher was Scorpius herself. There is no need to rescue him. I am sure he will figure something out on his own.”
Ed said, “That is nice to know.”
A few seconds later, Annie turned to the group, as she stated, “Okay. The force it telling me that we can reality jump.”
The group stood up, as they got closer together.
Ed stated, “I am taking up back to our home on Mars, to get some rest, and work on the next part of our plan on rescuing the boys.”
Annie said, “We looked forward to some rest.”
John agreed, “So, do I.”
Violin stated, “I could go on for a few more hours.” She said Annie frown at her. She continued, “Though, I could use some sleep.”
Bob commented, “It will be nice to sleep in my bed, tonight.”
Ed replied, “You and me both, honey.”
A second later, Ed thought of where and when she wanted to take them. The place was home for the night, after the boys left, an hour after they returned their spaceship to its hanger in the spaceport.
Ed then pressed the red button on her device, and all five adults disappeared, as the jumped to another reality, leaving an empty transport ship behind, to drift in space.
(_)
Meanwhile, at that exact moment, on the Peacekeeper Flagship Command Carrier, in a security room, near shuttle bay sixteen, Braca look up from his terminal, as he heard footsteps coming nearer.
Braca held up his hands, as he thought, 'Looks like I am about to meet my old teacher, soon enough.'
A second later, a security team burst into the room. All the guards were in full black armor, and domed helmets.
As they pointed their stun weapons at Braca, the retired captain mentally noted, 'Those are stun weapons. It looks like they want to take me in alive. Well, I am more than happy to oblige.'
The lead guard stated, “Surrender, or die.”
Braca swiftly responded, “I surrender. Please, escort me to Grand Chancellor Scorpius. I am sure she wants to see me, as much as I want to see her.” He sarcastically mentally added, 'It is always fun meeting the ex... Oh frell, I have been around John too long.'
(_)
Ten minutes later, Braca was lead by two female guards, in black armored suits, and black domed helmets, into Scorpius' office.
His wrists cuffed behind his back, as he left inside the office, by the two guard, with the door sliding closed behind them.
As they came to a stop, ten feet from Scorpius' desk, the two guards were flanking Braca, to his right and left sides.
Braca looked in front of him, to see that Scorpius was standing in front of her desk, looking at her former second in command, with a puzzled expression on her face.
Scorpius casually commented, “Hello Braca.”
Braca calmly replied, “Hello Grand Chancellor Scorpius.”
Scorpius complimented, “Braca, you are always the professional. No matter the situation. I always respected you for that. And to be honest, when I was a hybrid, with a temper, I envied your emotional self-control. I wish the things that are about to happen to you could be done in a much more dignified manner. But unfortunately, that will not be the case.”
Braca flatly said, “After crossing you, I knew full well that I would be killed if I was captured. And I am prepared to die.”
Scorpius cracked a smile, as she responded, “You are not going to die, today. Still, I have to ask. Since you know me, so well. Why did you betray me?”
Braca stated, “You were my teacher. I admired the strength you had in your convictions. How could you expect anything less from me?”
Scorpius said, in a calm tone of voice, “And that is the final lesson, my student. You have gained my full respect. Still, I have plans for you. It will likely surprise you to know, but I already knew the events of today, long before they happened. But, we will get to that in a few moments.”
“I must say, when you resigned your commission, over nine cycles ago, I knew it would be difficult to find an assistant as skilled as you had showed to be me. But, as luck would have, an assistant, just as skill as you, appeared out of nowhere.”
Suddenly, Braca heard the door open and close behind him.
As he heard foot steps approach them. But, he did not dare take his eyes off of Scorpius.
Scorpius greeted, “Ah Commander Meka. Right on schedule.”
From behind him, Braca here a feminine voice say, “You said it yourself, Grand Chancellor. You admire punctuality. And as per your orders, the transport ship with, the intruders on board, was allowed to escape. As soon as, sensors showed the intruders had left for another reality, I sent a retrieval squad to reclaim the ship.”
Scorpius replied, “Thank you, Commander. If I killed the brothers' parents, I would never be able to get them to cooperate with myself.”
She turned back to face Brace, as she said, “Now, retired Captain Braca, let me introduce you to your replacement. Commander Meka.”
Meka then walked around to stand right beside Scorpius.
When Braca got a good looked at Commander Meka, his jaw dropped in surprise.
In height, Meka was only slightly shorter than Braca. She was also several years younger than he was. And she was quite beautiful. Her hair was cut short in the style of many female, peacekeeper officer. She wore a well fitted peacekeeper officer's uniform, that did nothing to hide her slender, yet athletic curves.
But, those were not the attributes about Meka that surprised him.
For Meka had black hair, and fair skin. And her face, and eyes, were still very familiar to Braca.
As Braca mentally collected himself, he thought, 'Meka liked like she could be my young sister. Which could only mean... Oh no...'
As Scorpius and Meka saw realization dawn in Braca's eyes, Meka smirked. Meka said, “It is nice to see the old me, again.”
Scorpius grinned wickedly, as she commented, “Isn't time travel a wonderful thing.”
Braca asked, “How? And how much of the future did you know?”
Scorpius stated, “To be honest. Not much. I did not even find out about the Lowe brothers, nor the hyperspace gate technology, from your future counterpart. And this was intentional on my part. I believe that one should not know too much of one's future. I did not wish to create a paradox. So, I did not send any informative messages to myself, in the past. All I sent back was you. After you were processed, and your loyalty to myself was restored.”
“I must say, I received a good laugh, when Meka here, or should I say, the you that you are about to be, first appeared right here, in front of me, while I was sitting at my desk, nine cycles ago. And she came to me only one solar day after you had resigned your commission. Meka explained who she was. She also had a brief record message from me in the future. Afterward, I make reinstated you as, Meka, and promoted you to Commander. And you were again, my second in command. And it has been a wonderful arrangement for us. Hasn't it, Meka?”
Meka continued smirking, as she replied, “Yes, it has. With occasionally benefits in the bed as well. I must say. The Grand Chancellor is a genius in all forms.”
Scorpius continued, “True. Though, we try not to make a habit of that. Now Braca, I did know about the events of today. And I do know a little more about the future. But, not much. I am sure you will be happy to hear that I can confirm that the Lowe brothers are still alive and well. Though, I have no clue where and when they are in the multiverse.”
Braca commented, “Yes. That is comforting to know. Still, that is likely the only comforting part to come out of this situation.”
Meka said, “Actually, you have much to look forward to. Starting with some wonderful rest. That month asleep was quite peaceful. And this body is so enjoyable.”
Braca turned to Scorpius, as he questioned, “Was I always this annoying with my prisoners?”
Scorpius replied, “You had your moments.”
Meka commented, “I cannot be angry at myself. It is just not right.”
Braca sarcastically thought, 'Great. And I thought John lead an interesting life. I wonder if he had days like this... Knowing him, that is likely... Still, Scorpius knew everything about my actions, long before I decided to take them. There is nothing left to do, but make the best of the situation.'
Braca complimented, “I must say, Scorpius. You played me. You played me, well. Even John Crichton could not have have imagined on outcome like this. Does your magnificence know any bounds?”
Scorpius replied, “Apparently not. Anyway, you know what the vat process is. You know what is going to happen to you.”
Braca turned to looked at Meka, as he replied, “I am looking at the results right now. Meka, are you just a puppet? Or, do you have any free will left?”
Meka responded, with a bit of annoyance in her voiced, “I have plenty of free will. Scorpius... I mean the Grand Chancellor, would not let me be second in command, if I did not have the free will to sometimes question her actions. And I have, on a few occasions.”
Scorpius spoke up, “That she has. On two occasions, it became a screaming match, due to how to reallocate resources, with millions of people's lives on the line. And given the stakes of those situations, I admired Meka's stubbornness on such matter. On one of those occasions, I even relented, and did as Meka suggested. And both of those incidents worked out for the better for everyone.”
Braca inquired, “So, what are you going to program my mind with?”
Scorpius answered, “Don't worry, Braca. I am not to brainwash you too much. Just basic loyalty, along with mental comfort in your new gender, and being more flexible with relationships... Well more so than you already are. And while you will be loyal, you will not be some, yes woman. You will still have you opinions, and you will still have the desire to voice them when the situation calls for it.”
“Also, I have found that super-soldier formula also works just as well on Sebacean as it does on humans. As I learned first. You will be stronger, faster, have more stamina, and be a little more physically tougher. Also, you will be a few years younger, and maintain your youth for a very, very long time. And finally, you can look forward to a promotion to commander when you get out of the vat process. You have so much to look forward to.”
Meka said, “Though, from your point of view, I know you will feel little comfort from my words, right now. But, I am quite happy, and pleased with my life as presently is.”
Braca replied, “You are correct.”
Meka responded, “Well, since I am the you that will be, we both know that you will eventually change you mind, and accept you situation, because I already have.”
Braca inquired, “I have one question. Scorpius, how big is your vat processing center? I hope you learned from Chang's mistakes.”
Scorpius answered, “Do not worry. I only keep about a dozen vats on this ship. And I rarely use them. And on those times I do, they are only used in special cases. Most of whom are volunteers which exceptional service to the Peacekeeper cause, whom have been wounds in the line of duty, and are willing to accepted the gender trade offs for the added physical benefits, which allow them to continue their duty as peacekeepers.”
Braca asked, “And what about the women?”
Scorpius responded, “I was able tweak the first formula, the gender change formula, to where it will not effect the gender of women, but its regeneration proprieties will work on women, as well. Though, my scientist are still trying to figure out why the second formula, the super-soldier serum is deadly to men. But, those are only minor drawbacks.”
Meka said, “As you can see, the Grand Chancellor, understands the concept of taking all things in moderation. Actually, the two guards here have been processed. So, we do not need to worry about our secrets getting out.”
Scorpius said, “See you in a month, Braca. Or, should I saw, Meka. After we make sure you are healthy, and loyal, we will send you back into the past, to resume your duty, as my student. And friend.” She turned to the females guards, “Guards. Take Braca to the vat processing room, so he can be immediately process, with the programs I have already sent to the technicians and doctors in that section of the ship. And remind the personnel there to keep me apprised daily on Braca's health and progress.”
Braca did not fight, as he turned around, with the guards escorting him out of the room.
After the door slid closed, Scorpius turned to Meka, “Commander, this afternoon, I would like for you to reinstate the bounty on the brothers. Make sure to contact, Cad Bane, and the others on the list we are preparing, for the freelancers we plan to retain for future work.”
Meka responded, “I will start on it as soon as I am finished here.”
Scorpius then invited her, “Good. Also, this is not an order. But, would you care for dinner, and some fun, tonight?”
Meka smiled at Scorpius, as she replied, “Sure. I look forward to such fun with you.”
Scorpius turned Meka's smile, as she said, “Yes. Such fun is always entertaining, with you.”
Meka responded, “Thank you, my friend.”
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
In this chapter. I wanted to do a few present a few things, that I had not yet had a chance to do in my anthology of insanity.
I got to write about a western reality, during the old west. And if you noticed the cameos, you can see how connected this western reality is. Especially, given who those cameos know. It is a very large epileptic tree.
And while the Lowe brothers do not know a number of series. They know that some fictional realities are real. And they are genre savvy enough do know the difference between a John Wayne style western, and a more gritty, and dangerous, Clint Eastwood style western. And they act accordingly.
I enjoyed how I present the Midnight Bounty Hunter, and how he taught Stan and Lewis a few lessons on gun safety, on how to use firearms, and hand to hand combat. It is not much, but the brother are better off than they were.
Gun safety is no joke. If you want to learn how to use a firearm. First, learn about gun safety, and how to properly, and safely, use a firearm.
And I liked the reveal on who the Midnight Bounty Hunter, and Meka are.
I must say, Braca is a surprisingly versatile, and interesting character to work on.
And after watching the Farscape series, and the Peacekeeper mini-series, a few times. I came to a feel that Braca, and Scorpius had a very unique friendship. It was more than just a subordinate to his officer. But, it was not deeply intimate. I felt more like a relationship between a student and a teacher. And I played along with the vibe, with much of the scenes, on how Braca felt about Scorpius, and his conversations with Scorpius at the end of this chapter.
In addition, I got the opportunity in this chapter to show what would happen, in a situation, where a badass team breaks into a spaceship with a competent crew aboard the ship.
The crew immediately recognized some of the members of the bad as team were. And instead of foolishly fighting, they fled, with them locking several doors behind them.
With the leaders of the ship ordering a hands off approach to the intruders.
And in true Farscape fashion, this intrusion turns into the most screwed up rescue mission possible. With the would-be rescuers being the cause brothers becoming lost in multiverse.
And the Ed and Bob's team even lampshade this, as they are heading in their shuttle, to Scorpius' flagship. With John refusing to be the one to come up with the rescue plan, because of how often his plans cause unintended, mass destruction.
Though, after Lewis and Stan disappear, Violin does point out to Ed and Bob that the brothers are not completely lost, and they are fine.
And from the hints I already gave, early in the story, you likely already know where, when, and what reality, the brothers ended up.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Six: “To The Other Side.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, an alternate Earth. Date, unknown. Place, unknown. Time, Unknown.
As Stan Lowe awoke, the first sensation that he felt was the feel of the grass on his back.
As he opened his eyes, he noticed that it was warm, partly cloudy day. From the angle of the sun, right over him, he guessed it was the middle of the day.
When he lean up, he felt the cable still tied to his waist. He quickly undid the knot around his waist. With him setting the cable to his left side.
As he did so, he checked himself to find that he was unharmed. Even his varsity jacket, and other clothing, were undamaged.
He looked in front of himself to see a large bay of water.
Then, his hearing caught up to mind, as he heard cars pass by him from behind himself.
Stan quickly stood up, and looked behind him.
He saw that he was right beside a highway, with cars racing back and forth.
Behind the highway were skyscrapers as far back as Stan could see, and running along the other side of the long, wide curved, bay highway, from him, in both directions.
Between him and the highway, was a sidewalk, where people walked by, as they were going about their day.
A few of them turned to look at Stan, as they passed by him, but none of them approached Stan.
Stan thought, 'Where am I? When am I? Where is Lewis?...'
He quickly looked around, but he did not see his brother, Lewis Lowe.
Stan mentally realized, 'I don't see Lewis anywhere. But, since I survived, and I am unharmed, Lewis is likely alive, as well. Though, with him having the reality device, I will have wait for him to find me. Now, where, and when, am I?”
Look at the people that walk by, along with the cars, and he turned around to look at the bay, then back at the buildings.
Stan thought, 'From the look of the people walking by, I can tell I am in Japan. From their clothing styles, and the model cars, I can guess I am just after turn of the second millennium. Given the weather, I am guessing it is in the spring. Also, I would guess that I am by Tokyo bay. Which means I am in Tokyo, Japan. This is not a great place to be for a foreigner. But, I can work with this situation. Many of the people here speak english, so I am not completely screwed, just yet.'
'Wait a minute. Right before we fell into the gate, Lewis and I were talking about Violin, and Tokyo of the past. When Violin's parents were our age. That is why I am here. But given it was an unstable portal, there is no telling if I am in the same reality as Violin is from. If I am lucky, Lewis is in this city, as well. But, that is a big, if. And it would be a needle in a haystack.'
'Still, at least I know where I am at. But, with no brother, and no reality device, I need to know think about my own survival... And maybe some fun, while I am here. I need to find a library with computer, and internet access.'
Stan looked to his right, and he saw that there was a crosswalk across the highway, at a light, only a hundred yards away from himself.
Stan briskly walking, off the grass, and onto the sidewalk. He then turned to his right, as he headed for that crosswalk, and the nearest library he could find.
(_)
At that moment, in another apart of Tokyo, in a small park, Lewis Lowe came too.
As Lewis sat up, he quickly notice the weather, and sun, when compared to the trees and foliage around him. He realized it was the middle of a warm, spring day.
It was then that he noticed the cable still tied to his waist. He swiftly undid the knot, and dropped the cable to his right side.
Lewis then stood up. Next, he checked him, to find that he was unharmed. Even his white coat, and other clothing, were undamaged.
Lewis looked around, while asking himself, in thought, 'Where is Stan?... I don't see him. That is a problem easily solved.'
He pulled out his reality device. He thought of going to where Stan was, in the multiverse, after they were separated, right after Stan arrived at his destination, from that unstable portal. Lewis held that thought, as he pressed the red button on the device, and nothing happened.
Lewis looked at the device. He did not appear to be undamaged on the outside.
Lewis thought, 'Okay. This thing might be damaged. But, not to badly, considering the outside appears to be fine.'
'Still, this thing is not working. Meaning, I am going to have to fix it. Which means a job that allows me to get access to the tools to do so, without questions. And knowing Stan, with him realizing I have the reality device, he will make do with his situation, until I can find him. Since I am fine, Stan has to be, as well. He might even be nearby. But, given this was an unstable portal, he could also be anywhere.'
'Right now, I have to figure out when and where I am. Then, set up a life for myself here, as I fix the reality device. Unfortunately, while I know portal technology. But, the professor never shared the technology on these reality device. Meaning, I know the basics of the technology, but not the exact mechanics. So, I am going to take my time in figure out what is wrong with my reality device.'
'And I will have to careful backwards engineer it, so I can figure out how it works. While, still being able to put it back order, in working order.'
Lewis pocketed his reality device, as he continued his thought, 'Still, that is for later. Now, I have to answer my immediately questions.'
Lewis looked around, and saw that he was nearby a sidewalk, with a two lane road on the other side of the sidewalk.
People walked back and forth on the sidewalk, as on the road several cars were coming and going, both ways.
Though, Lewis did notice something about the direction of how the cars were driving.
Lewis thought, 'The cars are driving on the left side of the road. That narrows down where I am on Earth. Though, I am still not sure where I am. Though, from the what the people here looking. I know I am somewhere in the southeastern part of Asia, or one of the nearby islands, off of Asia.'
'Though, if I want to know for sure. I should just politely ask someone in front of me, for answers to my questions.'
Lewis walked onto the sidewalk, and up to an older, well dress man, as he politely asked, in english, “Excuse me. I hope you are having a pleasant day. Could you please tell me where I am at?”
The older man stopped, and turned to face Lewis. The older man answered, in english, “You are in Tokyo, Japan.”
Lewis responded, “Thank you, sir. I hope you have a wonderful day.”
The older man nodded, turned, back the way he was heading, and walked away from Lewis.
Lewis though, 'I am in Tokyo Japan. And from the look of my surroundings, along with the cars, and people, I guess it was around the turn of the second millennium.'
'Hold on. Stan and I were were talking about Violin and Tokyo right before we were sucked into that vortex. Still, we could be in different realities. But, at least if he is in a Tokyo, that is decent, like this. With his skills, and intelligence, he will be fine until I can reach him.'
'Though, being a foreigner in Japan is not good. But, I can still make the situation work for me. Now, to find a library.'
Lewis turned to his right, and he started walking down the street, in search of the nearest library.
(_)
Three hours later, at two libraries across town from each other. Both of the Lowe brothers had been able to convince the staff of the libraries, to allow them access to the internet, on computers that had been set to english.
At the moment, both brothers were clandestinely hacking their way through the firewalls of two different banks. Their mother was currently one of the top skill computer hacks in the multiverse, and she taught her boys well. But, she also taught them that they should only use these skills in an emergency, and not on cheating at school. And fortunately, this was an emergency.
Currently, they were hacking into the bank computers to create fake bank accounts with their real names. The reason they used their real names was that there was no paper trail on them, and the fact they already had fake debit cards, in their wallets, that used their real names. They would transfer the debit card numbers to the accounts, and they also added enough money into the accounts to get them started.
As Stan typed away at his computer, he thought, 'If I am going to live here, I am going to have to learn to speak, read, and write, japanese. That should take me about a week.'
Across town, Lewis was at a computer, while he had a similar thought, 'If I am going to get a job here. I am going to have to learn japanese. Fortunately, languages have never been a problem with me. I will have the language masted within a week.'
On the other side of town, Stan thought, 'Now, that is done, time to cover my tracks. Though, I still have some work to do on an ID and records.'
Across town, Lewis thought, 'That was easier than I thought. Now, for the records, after I cover up my action.'
As both brothers worked on hacking the bank accounts they chose, with their computers, they covered their tracks, and moved on to the government computers
On the other side of town, Stan thought, 'Okay. I will never pass for japanese. So, I will just make basic immigration IDs and documents, with records. I think I will bump my age up to eighteen, to prevent any question of why I live alone. I guess I will have to live in a hotel. Though, I think I will look for a decent hotel.'
Across town, Lewis thought, 'And being eighteen will make getting a job easier. Though, I will need for these records to include immigration documents for my IDs. And with an ID and debit card, I can now get a hotel room to live in. But, it was be a fairly nice hotel.'
On the other side of town, Stan thought, 'I can do the rest later, with a laptop computer.'
Across town, Lewis thought, 'Including, getting them to mail me my documents, and ID cards.'
On the other side of town, Stan thought, 'I can even hack them to fast track say documents with a week.'
Across town, Lewis thought, 'I just need an internet connect. And I can find one at a decent hotel.'
As both brothers covered their tracks in the government computers, they thought, in unison, 'If I do this job right, no one will not come after me.'
Across town, Lewis thought, 'It is unfortunate, that I dare not search the records of various databases, to see if Stan is doing the same thing. Because, I will likely cause a red flag on my actions.'
On the other side of town, Stan thought, 'I wish I could look at the various computer records, to see if Lewis is also pulling this stunt. But, if I made such an attempt, I would likely get caught.'
Both brother hacked the servers and computers of the libraries they were using, to erase their tracks on it. They even had the security camera reset, and to start re-recording over tapes that recorded the last hour, since the brothers walked into the libraries. With the re-re-recording starting in ten minutes. Thus, there would be no records that the brothers had ever been to either location.
When they were finished, both brothers calmly exited the libraries they had just been in.
The two brothers then headed to different locations to use their fake debit cards to buy various items. Including a laptop, and some new clothing. Both brothers realized their peacekeeper clothing not going to cut it in the city were they were in. Then, they each would find a decent hotel, to stay in, that has internet access.'
(_)
Four hours later, it was sunset, as the brothers had both found separate, yet decent hotel suites, on to sides of Tokyo. With both hotels having internet access.
Before they had checked in, both brothers had done some shopping. After each bought a decent laptop computer, they had also bought books on learning japanese, which were learning japanese for english speaking people.
Given the brothers super-genius level intelligent, learning japanese would not be difficult, and would only take them a short time to do.
Also, they bought some new clothing for themselves, which they changed into before they checked into their hotels.
This clothing was basically the same type of clothing they wore at high school on Mars. With them only keeping their tennis shoes, jacket, or coat, along with their personal effects, and for Lewis, his reality device, on their person.
The rest of their items were in two large shopping bags that they carried with them into the hotel lobby. And after they signed in, and paid for their rooms, they took said bags within them, into their hotel suites.
The brothers switched on the ceiling lights to their suites, and they set down their bags/ They then looked around at their new homes for the foreseeable future.
Both hotel suites were a few floors up from the ground. With both hotels have indoor hallways, elevators, and accessible staircases. The brothers wanted to make sure they had multiple ways to escape. If need be.
Both hotel suites were clean, and in working order. Each suite having only one bed, with sheets and a pillow. A table, with couple of cushioned arm chairs by the table.
There was wide, low chest of drawers, with a TV, with remote on top of it. Along with a microwave on one end of the chest of drawers.
By the chest of drawers, there was a small refrigerator with an icebox section, on the floor. And there was a microwave, on top of the refrigerator.
Also, there was a bar for hanging clothing.
The bathrooms had showers, sinks with faucets, along with western styles toilets. And plenty of hand towels, large towels, and toiletries.
By their beds was a nightstand with a lamp, and an alarm clock on it.
And finally, there a balcony they could step outside of, from their rooms, to look at the cityscape before them. The balcony was accessed with a soundproof sliding door, and
Soon after, the brothers unpacked.
They also tried out their new laptop computers, including making sure the wireless internet they had access to worked. Which they found the connections did work.
When they were finished, both brothers walked out onto their balconies, as they looked at the cityscape, while the sun was setting in the west, over the land.
It was quite a loving sight.
(_)
Stan thought, 'I am going to need a school uniform, if I want to do, what I plan to do.'
(_)
Lewis thought, 'I am going to need to find some decent clothing, it I want to do, what I have to do. Still, I have a lot of work to do.'
(_)
Stan thought, 'Between the books I bought, and the internet, I should not have any problems learning japanese. It should only take me a week. Tops.'
(_)
Lewis thought, 'Once I have the language down, and the ID cards, within a week. After some more hacking. I can move on to the next part of my plan.'
(_)
Stan thought, 'Since, I have nothing better to do. I might as well go back to high school. I will hack a local high school and make myself a transfer student. I think American, the U.S. will be the best choice.'
'No one will question my mixed racial heritage, if I say I am American. Once I get the records and transfer order thought, I can have some fun at a new school. And given my size and intelligence, I doubt I will have any serious problems. If, I do. I will just go to another school. Or, I may just do something else.'
(_)
Lewis thought, 'I have to fix the reality device And to do so, I will need access to tools, and funds. Beyond what I dare use from my hacked bank account. So, I need a job. And I think the roll of school physics teacher will suit me well. I will dummy up the records.'
'Still, I am more than qualified on the subject. Besides, I always wanted to try my hand as teaching. And once I have the reality device fixed, I can find Stan, and figure out what to do next.'
'Though, I think I will teach students, which are few years younger than me, because I believe they will likely be more easier for me to deal with. Than students that are my age.'
(_)
Stan thought, 'The one good thing about being lost like this is that I doubt those crazy chicks, nor those bounty hunters can track me here. So, if I keep my head down, I should be fine, for at least a while.'
(_)
Both brothers then decided to get some supper. The brothers left their balconies, closed the sliding glass doors, shut the curtains, and left their rooms, in search of food at a near by restaurant, at their perspective hotels.
(_)
A week and a half later. On a Monday morning.
After Stan received his documents in the mail, to his hotel suit, he found that his documents were in proper order.
Then, among the numerous high schools in Tokyo, it took Stan to find a high school that he could both easily hack his way into the records of that school's database. And a high school that would allow him to transfer there, on short notice, without anyone raising any questions on his arrival.
Earlier that morning, two hours before class began, Stan walked into the front office, of the Tokyo high school, he had picked out, and arranged for his sudden arrival.
Presently, Stan was inside the home room he was assigned to. He was standing in the front of the class, as the home room teacher had Stan introduce himself to the other student.
Stan wore same school uniform, the teenage boys in the class wore. Which were around the same age as he was. His inform fit him well. In addition, he wore soft soled boys dress shoes. And he held his schoolbag in his right hand, by the handles. Within his schoolbag was his school books, and school supplies in it.
Stan did not have his red varsity jacket on. Instead, he kept his varsity jacket in his assigned locker room, to go get, when school let out.
Stan stood to the left side of the teacher's desk, with the teacher in his chair, behind his desk.
Stan looked out among the students in the room, as he calmly spoke, in fluent japanese, with only a hint of an american style accent, “Hello. I am Stan Lowe. I am a transfer student from america. I am happy to make your acquaintances.”
Stan thought, 'I am in a senior year class. And considering school starts in Japan, in spring. I have not missed much of the classes. So, this should be an interesting experience. As far as I am, and they, are concerned. I am a transfer student. It is just that I have been transferred far further than my records state I have.'
The teacher said, in japanese, “Thank you, Mister Lowe. You can take you seat by Mister Hatsushiba.” The teacher then used his left hand to point at a nearby empty desk a few years back.
Stan turned to the teacher, and followed the direction of where the teacher was pointing. Stan then calmly walked to the empty desk and sat down. He set his schoolbag on top of the desk.
The black haired teenage boy to Stan's left side, across the small aisle from Stan, greeted him, in japanese, “Hello. I am Akira Hatsushiba. Everyone calls me, Hatsushiba.”
Stan turned to Hatsushiba, as he stated, “Nice to meet you, Hatsushiba.”
Hatsushiba then used his right hand to point towards a small, brown haired japanese boy sitting in the desk, front of him. With the brown haired boy turned to look at Stan.
Hatsushiba said, “This is Kikuchi Masamune. My best friend.”
Kikuchi greeted, in japanese, “Hello Stan.”
Stan replied, “Hello Kikuchi.”
Hatsushiba requested, “We are wondering. Since you clearly sound like you have skills when it comes to languages. With Kikuchi and I not doing great with english. Do you think you could help, Kikuchi, and I?”
Stan said, “Sure. No problem.” He mentally added, 'And this will be a great way to make friends.'
Kikuchi stated, “Great. We will introduce you to the rest of the gang, after school.”
Stan replied, “Okay. I just need to stop by my locker for my jacket, and tennis shoes, I can join you.”
Hatsushiba said, “We will wait up for you, at the front entrance to the school.”
Stan said, “Thank you.”
Kikuchi stated, “We will talk about it later, between classes.”
Stan replied, “I looked forward to it.”
The three students then joined the rest of the students in the room, with them all turning in the direction of the teacher, as class began.
(_)
Around that time in the morning, across town, at Komatane Junior Highschool, inside a second year classroom, Lewis walked into the home room he had assigned, as he was the new physics teacher of the school, with a teachers physics school book in his hand. Along with a clipboard, with a sheet of paper, and pen clipped to it.
Earlier that morning, a few hours before class began, Lewis came into the front office. Lewis looked professional, for his prospective job. He was dressed in a white socks, underwear, soft soled men's dress shoes, dark brown pants, brown leather belt, a short sleeved light brown turtle neck shirt, under his long sleeve short white lab coat.
Lewis left his tennis shoes back at his hotel room, with the rest of his clothing, that he bought for himself.
In addition, all Lewis' records, and documents were in order. Also, the school needing a new physics teacher.
The principal of the junior high school, Mister Hirouin soon met with Lewis, and they talked about Mister Hirouin possibly being hired for the teaching position. And Lewis soon convinced Principal Hirouin to hire him for the job. With him starting work that day.
Lewis was then assigned a home room, given the teacher book on the course, and present with a clipboard, with a role call sheet, and pen, clipped to the board. After which, Lewis was given instructions on where his homeroom was.
Lewis was able to calmly find his home room, minutes before class was suppose to start.
Lewis then entered the classroom.
Presently, as Lewis came to a stop in front of his desk, he turned and set his book on his desk, but he kept the clip board in his left hand.
Lewis then turned to looked at his class of younger, teenage boys and girls, in their gender assigned school uniforms. Dark long sleeved shirts and dark pants for boys. And seifukus, with long skirts, for the girls.
Lewis could tell that the students were looking back at him, with curiosity on his face.
Lewis stated, in fluent japanese, with a slight american accent, “My name is Professor Lewis Lowe. I am your new physics teacher. I will now do role call.”
Lewis used his right hand to pull out his pin, from the clipboard, as looked at the role call sheet, attached to the clipboard. Lewis then noticed something odd about the role call list.
Lewis look back towards the class, as he inquired, “Though, I do have one question. Why are the names, Futaba Shimeru, and Kurin Shimeru, each listed twice on this form? If it is a typo, I need to call human resources, and have them correct it.”
Lewis thought, 'I just got this form, a few minutes ago. So, I did not have time to view it, in detail, until now.'
A black haired girl, sitting in her desk, answered, in japanese, “It is not a typo. There is an oddity about the Shimeru family. They like name their twin siblings of different genders, that same name.”
Lewis focused on the black haired girl, as he questioned, “Interesting. And you are?”
The black haired girl answered, “Misaki Shima.”
Lewis said, “Well, thank you for answering my question.”
Misaki replied, “Yes, teacher.”
Lewis then turned to look at the entire class, as he requested, “Would the two Futabas, and the two Kurins please raise their hands.”
A black haired teenage boy stated, in japanese, “I am the male Futaba, Professor Lowe. The female Futaba, and male Kurin, are absent today.”
Lewis responded, “Okay. And where is the female Kurin?”
A small black haired girl stated, in japanese, “Right here. Professor Lowe.”
Lewis thought, 'You might have gotten away with it, if you only had one person pulling that stunt. But, two people. Yea. Right. It is clear the Shimeru family are hereditary gender benders. Like my family. Though, I wonder if their ability is born turned off, like the members of my family, or if it is turned on. Given that their names are listed twice, I am guessing that there abilities are automatically turned on. Still, I am not going to hold this against them.'
Lewis said, “Alright. Just make sure that someone takes notes for them, so they don't fall behind.”
Kurin stated, “Don't worry. We will give them our notes.”
Lewis then notice that not only did Futaba and Kurin breath a sigh of relief, but so did Misaki.
Lewis thought, 'So, Misaki knows their secret too. Also, it is obvious that someone in the school faculty knows their secret, as well. Due to the role call sheet. Still, since they are technically here, I will just list both of their names as present. If there is a problem, I will say that it was a typo, and I wanted to make sure that the students that were here, were counted present, no matter what.'
Lewis then started rolled call.
A little over a minute later, Lewis finished role call, he was pleasantly surprised to find that none of his students were absent from his home room class, for his first day.
Lewis mentally reflected, 'Having everyone here is a good start for today. Now, to begin class.
Lewis then set the clip board with the sheet on it, along with the pen, onto his desk. After he did so, he turned back to face his class of students.
Lewis stated, “Now that role call is over, I am sure you are wondering about the same two questions. Yes. I am a foreigner. And while I am only a few years older than you, I am more than qualified for this job.”
Lewis used his right hand to pull something from his right, side pants pocket.
Lewis held up the object with his right index finger and right thumb. The class saw that it was a small rubber ball.
Lewis said, “I know what you are thinking. That physics can be very boring. With formulas that you have to memorize, which have no practical application in real life. You would be wrong. Physics is calculating the math of simple actions and reactions, into equations. For example...”
Lewis then threw the rubber ball into the back of the class room, he kept his right hand open in the same place where he let go of the ball, as everyone watched the rubber call quickly bounce a round the room.
A few seconds later, the rubber ball landed back into Lewis' unmoved, open right hand, allowing him to catch the ball.
Lewis then held the rubber ball back in his right index finger, and right thumb, for the class to see, as he explained, “What you just saw was physics applied in real life. In my head, I had already worked out the proper force needed for the ball to travel, along with measuring the angles, and calculating the distance between said angles, in figuring out how to get this ball to bounce around the room, without hitting anyone, and then land right back into my right hand.”
“Consequently, this is why I found sports to be boring. All sports are, is calculations of movement, angles, and force needed to be applied, in given situations. That is why I prefer studying the sciences, because it offers me a challenge.”
Lewis then put the rubber ball back into his right, side pants pockets.
From the expressions on the faces of the students, Lewis could tell they were impressed with his display of physics.
Lewis thought, 'Good. I now I have their interest.'
Among the students, Futaba, Misaki, and Kurin, all thought, in unison, 'I think I am going to like this teacher.'
Meanwhile, Lewis thought, 'I just hope I am this successful with this rubber ball trick with my other classes today. It is an old trick that I masted a few years ago. And it is a fun trick.
'Though, I am probably going to miss one, or twice, but as long as I do not hit a student, I should be fine. And I am sure, at least, I can do that. But, first we need to begin class. And I know just the lesson to teach them today.'
Lewis then turned to his desk, and picked up his physics book. He turned to look at the class, as he opened the book.
Lewis then soon found what he was looking for. He thought, 'Good. The lesson is right here.'
Lewis looked up from his book, and towards the classroom, as he stated, “Now, students. Please open your physics books to page one hundred and sixty-one. We will learn how to calculate the trajectories of angles.”
The students did what Lewis had instructed them to do. With Lewis beginning his lessons for the school day.
(_)
Later that day, after a few classes, it was time for lunch for those at Komatane Junior Highschool. During, Lewis had been able to walk across the street, from the school, to get a sandwich, bag of chips, and a bottle of soda, from a restaurant. He then returned to the school, with his lunch.
Like most teachers, Lewis was planning to have lunch at the teachers lounge. Fortunately, one of the other teachers had told him where it was. So, it was not hard for him to find the faculty room.
Lewis held his lunch in his hands, as he reached the door to the teachers lounge, he saw Principal Hirouin standing by the closed door.
Principal Hirouin was a much smaller, and older man. He looked up at Lewis, as he stated, in japanese, “Ah, Professor Lowe. I suspected you would have to get your lunch from restaurant just outside of the school. And I was waiting for you here.”
Lewis came to a stop, as he looked at the man. Lewis commented, “I hope you were not waiting very long.”
Principal Hirouin said, “Not at all. And I wish to introduce you to the rest of the faculty.”
Lewis replied, “Okay.”
Principal Hirouin then opened and held the door open.
Lewis walked inside, with the principal walking in, right behind Lewis, with Mister Hirouin closing the door behind himself.
After they entered the room, Lewis came to a stop, near the entrance to the room. He saw that there were several teachers, and other faculty there. All of whom were sitting in their chairs, at various tables, as they talked to each other, while they had lunch.
Principal Hirouin stated, “Everyone, if I could have your attention. This is Professor Lewis Lowe. The new physics teacher.”
Lewis looked around at the staff, as he said, “Nice to meet you.”
Principal Hirouin used his right hand, and pointed at a black haired, japanese man in his late-twenties, as he said, “This is Mister Sabuyama. One of our teachers.”
Sabuyama looked at Lewis, as he smiled. He said, “You have nice, tanned skin tone. You are not that bad looking. And I like exotic.”
Lewis inwardly frowned, which did not show on his face, as he thought, 'I don't like the way that man is looking at me. But, it is best to be polite.'
Lewis said, “Thank you.”
The principal then pointed at an older, more muscular, fair skinned blond man, as he said, “This is Duke Strike, our physical education instructor.”
Duke looked at Lewis with a calculating eye. He then said, in a calm tone of voice, “It is a pleasure to meet you.”
Lewis responded, “Like wise.” He mentally added, 'That guys strikes me as a real badass. It would be best if I am nice to him.'
The principal then pointed at three brown haired women, that each had a streak of blond hair above their foreheads. Two of the women appeared to be in their late-twenties. The third woman appear to be younger than Lewis.
All of them looked like sisters.
Mister Hirouin stated, “These are the Koujiro sisters. The older sister with large earrings is Maki Koujiro. She is our science teacher. The other older sister is Miki Koujiro, the school nurse. And the youngest sister, whom I am told is technically the oldest sister, is Yuki Koujiro. She is our mathematics teacher.”
The two older sisters just waved at Lewis, while Yuki requested, “Would you like to partake in one of my experiments”
Lewis looked at the three women's eyes, as he thought, 'I have seen the look those women have in their eyes. They are crazy chicks. Like those five crazy girls, whom are after Stan and I. And one of them is the school nurse. I need to make sure that I don't need medical attention while on the school grounds.'
Lewis replied, “No thank you.”
Yuki chirped, “You're loss.”
Hirouin then introduced Lewis to the rest of the teachers and faculty whom were present.
When the principal was finished, Lewis thanked him.
Lewis then sat in a chair, at an empty table in the room, alone, as he ate his lunch.
(_)
After Lewis finished his lunch, in the teacher lounge, he got up, and threw his trash in a trash can.
Hirouin noticed this, as he walked over to Lewis. Hirouin quietly said to Lewis, “Professor Lewis, I need to speak with you, in private, in my office, before you head to class.”
Lewis look down at the older man, as he responded, “Yes, Principal Hirouin. Just lead the way.”
The older man lead Lewis out of the room.
A few minutes later, they reached Principal Hirouin's office.
As soon as both men were inside, Hirouin turned around to face Lewis, while he requested, “Please shut the door.”
Lewis gently closed the door behind him. He then turned to face his new boss.
The principal said, “I want to apologize, Professor Lowe. But, when I first spoke to you, this morning, I did not realize that you would have Futaba Shimeru and Kurin Shimeru in your home room. There is something I need to tell you about them. But, you might want to sit down, first.”
Lewis thought, 'So, it is you who knew the Shimeru's secret.' Lewis calmly responded, “Let me guess. They are gender benders.”
Hirouin had a surprised look on his face, as he inquired, “How did you know?”
Lewis calmly answered, “I have had experience with such people before. Once you have dealt with such people, it is easy to see the signs.”
Hirouin agreed, “True. But, please keep this to yourself. And mark both sets of names as, present.”
Lewis responded, “I will. I already marked both pairs of names as, present, this morning.”
Hirouin replied, “Good.”
Lewis stated, “I am glad we are on the same page, Principal Hirouin. Now, if you don't mind, I believe that I have a class to teach, in the next few minutes.”
Hirouin said, “Good luck.”
Lewis turned around, opened the door, walked out of the room, and towards his classroom.
(_)
Fortunately, for both Stan and Lewis. The rest of the school days, for both brothers, were uneventful for their first time at their schools.
(_)
Across town, after school let out, with Stan retrieving his varsity jacket, and putting it one, along with replacing his school shoes, with his tennis shoes. He left his school shoes in his school locker.
Stan then met Hatsushiba and Kikuchi at the front entrance to the highschool they went took. Hatsushiba and Kikuchi then lead Stan to their planned destination. With all of them carrying their schoolbags, with books in their bags.
As they walked, Hatsushiba and Kikuchi told Stan about their destination, which was the Rock Stock Cafe
A little while later, as the three teenage boys entered the cafe, they were greeted by three other teenagers. Whom were standing in front of the counter, that ran along the far left side of the room.
Stan saw that there were three schoolbags on the counter.
Of the three teenagers. One was a taller and beefier black haired teenage boy, with a black facial hair around his cheeks and jaw. A slender, pretty, black haired girl. And a slender and pretty black haired girl.
As Hatsushiba and Kikuchi approached the three other teenagers, with Stan following behind them, Hatsushiba said, “Sorry, we are late. We had to wait for our friend to get his jacket. Though, I have to admit, it is a nice jacket.”
The black haired, slender, well figured girl replied, in japanese, “It is quite alright, Hatsushiba. So, who is your new friend.”
Hatsushiba answered, “Yurika, this is Stan Lowe from America. Stan, these are the rest of my friends. The girl who just spoke is Yurika Sakuraba. She works here. This is her uncle's cafe. The other nice girl is Haruna Yun. And this gentle giant is Fujiwara Shinobu.”
Stan mentally wondered, 'I wonder if this Yurika is connected to my gender bender cousin, Yurika, that I met.' He said, “Nice to meet all of you.”
Fujiwara replied, in japanese, “Likewise. You may not be as tall as me. But, you are close.”
Stan said, “Yes. I am.” He thought, 'Too bad they don't have american football here, he has the build for it.'
Yurika commented, in japanese, “It is always nice to make new friends.”
Stan commented, “I agree.”
Haruna said, “It is a pleasure to meet you, Stan.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.”
Yurika inquired, “I wonder where Akira is? So, we can introduce her to Stan.”
Stan had a confused look on his face, as he questioned, “Hatsushiba Akira is already here?”
Yurika giggled, as she explained, “No. A different Akira. She is small blond girl, a few years younger than us.”
Stan replied, “Okay.”
Hatsushiba stated, “Don't worry. You will see her in a minute. I will go get her.” He then rushed out the front door of the cafe.
Less than a minute later, Stan watched as a blond girl, with long hair, whom was a few years younger than the rest of the teenagers that were present, walk into the cafe. Also, Stan noted that the blond girl was slightly shorter than the other girls in the room. In addition, the blond girl wore a boy's uniform, that was very loose on her body.
Stan just looked at her, as he shook his head. He thought, 'I don't want to know. I am laying low. I don't need any craziness right now.'
Yurika looked over at blond girl, as she smile. She said, “Ah, Akira. There you are. Come meet our new friend.”
Akira approached the group, and she came to a stop in front of them.
Yurika pointed at Stan, with her right hand, as she stated, “Akira, this is, Stan Lowe. Stan, this is, Akira.” She then dropped her hand by her side.
Akira smiled, as she said, “Nice to meet ya.”
Stan replied, “Same here.”
Yurika turned to Stan, as she asked, “So, what brings you to japan?”
Stan answered, “Just broadening my horizons, until my brother shows up.”
Kikuchi asked, “You have a brother?”
Stan replied, “Yes. He looks somewhat like me. Similar build and looks. Though, if you looked at us together, you would see the differences. He is also my best friend.”
Akira said, “It is nice to have family that is friendly to you.”
Stan agreed, “Yes, it is.”
Yurika teased, “Don't be that way, Akira.” She then looked at Stan, as she commented, “Stan, I have a younger sister, Anju. She is a year younger than me. She is currently living, in France, with our parents, Ran, my mother, and Kouki, my father.”
Stan thought, 'France... Interesting.... Still, back to the matter at hand.' He said, “Yurika, it is nice to see that you understand where I am coming from.”
Yurika agreed, “Yes. Siblings that care for each other are a blessing.”
Stan commented, “You are preaching to the choir. Anyway, as soon as Hatsushiba shows up, I will start tutoring Kikuchi and him on their english skills.”
Yurika grinned at Stan, as she complimented him, “I appreciate you doing that. They could use the help.”
Stan smiled, as he replied, “I don't mind.”
Akira stated, “I will got get him.”
Akira rushed out of the cafe.
A minute later, Hatsushiba came back into the cafe, in his boy's uniform. Though, Hatsushiba's clothing looked a little wrinkled. He stated, “Akira had to leave. But, before she left, she said that you were ready to help me, Stan.”
Stan thought, with annoyance, 'Is reality trying to slap me in the face, with the obvious? Or, have I gone insane? I am not lucky enough to be insane. But, it is clear the others don't have a clue that Hatsushiba Akira, here, is a gender bender.'
'I got a very distinct feeling, given Hatsushiba's age, size, and hair, differences between gender forms, that Hatsushiba's abilities are like Yurika's and Mikoto's abilities. Hatsushiba likely changes when sneezing. Which means I am likely in my father's home reality, in the past. And that we are related. It is possible that Hatsushiba is even the parent to both Yurika and Mikoto. He, or she, could be their mother, or father. Depending on which of them I am thinking of.'
'If that is the case, Yurika's green hair color, and Mikoto's blue hair with black highlights. In relation to Hatsushiba's black hair as male, and blond hair as female. It is likely that Hatsushiba is the mother of Yurika, and the father to Mikoto.'
'Also, this means that the elemental abilities probably come from the other parent, whom is likely a gender bender also, with the other parent being Mikoto's mother, and Yurika's father. Sort of like, how Lewis and I are related.'
'Though, since Nodoka' gender bending works differently, I don't know how she fits into the equation. Maybe she is a half-sister, with the elemental gender bender being one of her parents, with a third person being Nodoka's other parent.'
'Still, I am not going to touch this situation with a ten foot pole. Hatsushiba is just a teenage kid, like I am. This is too serious a matter for someone as young as him to worry about. So, let us just move on.'
Stan said, “Yes. Ready when you are.”
Kikuchi requested, “Let's see how you can help us.”
Stan replied, “Okay. Let's sit at a table, and get started.”
The three teenage boys sat at a table. After they sat down in chairs, so they faced each other, Stan pulled out his student japanese to english book, from his schoolbag. Stan then set down his schoolbag on the floor beside him, his left side. He then began to use the book he had pulled out to tutor Hatsushiba and Kikuchi on the english language.
Meanwhile, Yurika walked around back of the counter, to get some work done. Haruna sat in a stool, at the counter, near her schoolbag. She did her homework. And Fujiwara pick up his schoolbag, and he moved over to sit in a chair, at a table near the other three teenage boys in the room, as he began to do his homework.
(_)
Around week later, it was a Monday. A school day. And the high school that Stan was going to had just let their students out for the day, five minutes, beforehand.
Stan it took a few minutes for him to retrieve his varsity jacket from his locker, and replace his schools, with his tennis shoes. When he was finished, he picked up his closed schoolbag, and he he head out of the front entrance, to meet with his friends.
As Stan walked out of the front entrance of the school, and into the open air, he noticed that it was a nice, sunny, warm day.
Stan then saw his two friend, Hatsushiba and Kikuchi, were waiting for him, about twenty feet away.
As Stan approach the two other boys, he noticed, they were looking at him, with both his friends grinning nearly ear to ear.
When Stan reached them, all three teenage boys stood, facing each other. With Hatsushiba to Stan's front right side, and Kikuchi being to Stan's front left side.
Stan asked, “Why the happy faces? Someone's birthday, and no one told me?”
Hatsushiba continued to smile, as he said, “No. It is just, thanks to your tutoring, we both got an, A, on our latest english tests.”
Stan grinned, as he replied, “That is good to hear.”
Kikuchi said, “We owe you big for this.”
Stan responded, “Don't worry about it. It is what friends do for each other.”
Kikuchi continued to smile, as he stated, “Well, my family is rich. The next time I go out on my family yacht, you are invited, along with Hatsushiba, Yurika, Haruna, even Fujiwara, and most of all, the wonderful, blond Akira.”
From the corner of Stan's right eye, he saw Hatsushiba's face winch for a split seconds.
Stan looked between his two friends, as he thought, 'Kikuchi has it bad for his best friend's female form, and he doesn't realize that Hatsushiba and Akira are the same person. Still, both Hatsushiba and Kikuchi are good kids. I hope when Kikuchi find out that Hatsushiba is a gender bender, that they are able to work this out, while preserving their friendship. Though, I cannot do a damn thing about it. Except...' Stan stated, “Well, just remember Kikuchi, there are three billion other women in this world. If things don't work out, there are always other women.”
Hatsushiba said, “Stan is right about that.”
Kikuchi replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
Stan responded, “Anyway, if I am still around, I will take you up on your offer, Kikuchi.”
Kikuchi said, “I look forward to it.”
Just then, a group of six skinny, teenage boys, in boy's uniforms, walk up to the three other boys.
The lead boy in the six member group stated, snobbish tone of voice, in japanese, “Hi Kikuchi and Hatsushiba. We heard you each both received an, A, today on your english test. What did you do? Cheat?”
The other five boys in the group just laughed at the two of them.
Stan thought, with annoyance, 'There is a group of jackasses in every school. If I was back home, I would take them down a notch in half a dozen different ways, without laying finger on them. But, those options are not available to me, right now. And if I hit them, I am the one that gets into trouble, because I am the foreigner. They are even so rude, as to ignore my presence. That is going to cost them.'
Kikuchi shrugged towards Stan, as he responded, “No. We had, Stan, here, tutor us. He is brilliant.”
The six member group looked over at Stan, as the lead member stated, in an insulting tone of voice, “I am surprised that a gaijin was even be able help himself, let along you two idiots. Especially, considering that jacket he is wearing, I would think he is just a muscle bound fool.”
Stan looked over at them, as he kept a neutral expression on his face. He thought, 'Nobody insults my jacket. That is really going to cost them. Now, to be creative in my vengeance.' Stan calmly asked, “And who would you six be?”
The lead teenage boy answered, “We are members of the school chess club. And I am the president of the chess club.”
Stan thought, with amusement, 'Oh, this is going to be so much fun.'
Stan casually said, “Ah chess. A game my brother and I mastered when we were seven years old. There are only so many combinations that game offers. And after our third tie in a role, against each other, we decided to move on other more challenging pursuits. Personally, I find first person shooting game in multiplayer mode to be more interesting than chess. Such games being designed to include the randomness of the human factor far more into gameplay than chess ever could.”
Stan noted that all six members of the chess club frowned, as they each understood the backhanded insult Stan had just given them.
The chess president smirked, as he challenged, “Willing to put you money where you mouth is?”
Stan hid his own smirk, as he thought, 'Game, set, and match. This is just too damn easy.' He said, “No money. But, I will take your egos to the cleaners. I will play all six of you, in six different, timed, chess games, at once.”
The chess club president looked at his members. They all smiled wickedly at him.
The chess leader turned back to look at Stan, as he smirked. He stated, “You're on.”
(_)
Ten minutes later, in the chess team's room, six chess games were set up.
The chess members were using the white pieces, with Stan using the black pieces.
Each member was sitting down, by their board.
Stan was standing up, on his side of the six table row of chess boards. He has set his closed schoolbag on a nearby empty table.
Meanwhile, Hatsushiba and Kikuchi kept their schoolbags hanging off their left shoulders, as they stood by the wall, from the others in the room, as they silently watched what was able to unfold.
There was a timer by each chess board. With each timer having to small clocks connected together. When the timer was set, each timer has the same amount of time on the two clocks. And when the timer was activated, one clock would run, while the other was temporally off. When then that close was turned off, the other clock would run. Until one of the clocks run out of time, of the timer was turned off.
The high school chess clue president had just set all the timers. He then over to stand by his chess board. Which was to his far right side of the row of tables, with chess boards, and pieces on them.
All of six chess club members was standing in a row. One member in front of each chess board. With the chess pieces set. And the chess clue members all picked the black chess pieces.
The chess clue president turned to Stan, as he stated, “We will all take the black pieces. Ten minutes for each side. If the clock runs out, the player loses.”
Stan looked over at the times. And he made sure they were all set to ten minutes each of their clock faces. Next, Stan turned to look at the chess clue president, from his side of the six boards. Stan said, “That is fine with me. I will even be generous. All six of you can make the first move on your boards.”
The chess club members all chuckled, as all activated their clocks. They then made their moves.
Each was a different move from the other. When the finished, the punched their button on the clock, putting Stan in the position of being on the clock with it being his turn on all six games.
Within ten seconds, Stan made six different moves, on the six different boards, to counter each of his opponents moves, as he set the timers to his opponents clocks.
All six chess club members were surprised by Stan's moves, on their individual boards. They were each different. Though, each of the chess club members noticed that none of Stan's moves were foolish.
The next move was twenty seconds later, by the president. Stan immediately countered the chess' leaders move, punched his button the clock by that board, making it the chess president's move.
The last member of the chess team to make their second move took a full minute, which Stan immediately countered, while working on the other five boards, as well.
Hatsushiba and Kikuchi leaned against a side wall, while they quietly watched, as the intellectual ass kicking began.
Two minutes into the tournament, Stan had beaten his first opponent.
A few seconds after Stan defeated an opponent, he offered and shook their right hand, with his own right hand, as he said, “Good game.”
Almost twelve minutes after the game started, only the chess club president was left. It was his turn, he knew that his next turn would be checkmate, no matter what, and there was thirty seconds on the clock.
Stan still had over eight minutes on his remaining clock.
Stan noticed the clock. He then looked over at the chess club president, as he calmly said, “We both know you will lose on your next move. Make the move, and face defeat like a man. Do not wuss out, and let the clock beat you.”
The chess club president of the chess clue look up at the Stan, in his eyes. He saw that Stan was not angry, nor arrogance. He was just calmly stating a fact.
The chess clue president looked back down at the board, and made his move. He then punched the clock.
Stan make his checkmate move. He punched his button on the clock, by that chess board, as he stated, “Checkmate.”
The chess club president of the chess club tipped over his king.
Hatsushiba and Kikuchi stood up straight, from the wall they had been leaning against. The two teenage boys could not believe what they had just seen.
Kikuchi said, “That was amazing, Stan.”
Hatsushiba commented, “I knew you were smart, Stan. But not, super-genius level.”
Stan turned to his friends, as he said, “Yea. I am just full of surprises.” He then turned back to face the chess club president.
Stan offered the president of the chess club his right hand, while he said, “Good game.”
As the president of the chess club shook his right hand, he asked Stan, “Who the hell are you?”
Stan answered, “Let's just say that Lazarus Long and I, along with my brother, have a few things in common.”
The reference went over the heads of both Hatsushiba and Kikuchi.
But, the chess members understood the reference, as they all showed shock on their faces. Some of their eyes widened, others jaws dropped. While the chess clue president his handshake from Stan, he said, “I believe you. Still, how did you become so intelligent?”
Stan responded, “While my mother is a crazy, though nice genius, my father is a pillar of sanity. My brother and I inherited my mothers brains and my fathers sanity. We got the best of both worlds.”
The chess club leader replied, “I would agree with your assessment. One more question. Why are you not a member of a chess, or some other intellectual club? You have the intelligence to be one of the top students in this school, if not the entire planet, of this generation.”
Stan stated, “I would not go that far, as to make that claim. I am sure there are a number of people on this planet that are more intelligent than I.”
“Still, I just do not find intellectual pursuits to be challenging to myself. This is why I prefer to play sports. Because sports are a challenge to me. On the other hand, my brother loved to study math and the sciences, because he found them more challenging than sports. We both find it humorous how our hobbies are reversed, for the same reasons.”
The chess club president requested, “Do you think you could introduce us to your brother?”
Stan answered, “If I knew where he was, I might just do that. Still, I believe I have made my point.” He then turned to his two friend, as he said, “Guys. Let's get out of here.”
Stan walked over, to pick his closed schoolbag up from a nearby table. He then lead the way out of the chess club room, with with Kikuchi and Hatsushiba right behind him.
After they entered a school hallway, they continued walking towards the nearest exit to the school, as Kikuchi asked, “What are you referencing back there, that shocked those chess club members?”
Stan commented, “It is a injoke from an old novel. It is of little importance.”
Hatsushiba said, “Still you beat them all so thoroughly. I think you might be more smarter than Yurika.”
Stan casually answered, “Guys, always keep in mind that intelligence, by itself, it not so valuable. It is how you apply that intelligences. Take for example those chess members. A few of them showed signs that if they applied themselves, they might have posed a challenge for me in beating them.”
“Still, it was not that hard to defeat them. That is because they were all going directly for my kings. None of them understood the value of strategic feigns. Which, my brother and I do. I sucked half of them into traps. The other half, I just flat out beat. So, what do you guys want to do next?”
Kikuchi cautiously said, “Remind me never to get on your bad side.”
Stan replied, “Don't worry. You would have to work at upsetting me.”
Kikuchi inquired, “By the way, you said you and your brother tied in chess three times in a row. How do you tie in chess? I thought that was impossible.”
Stan answered, “There is three ways to tie in chess. The first way, we found out by accident. We were going after each others kings, and end up killing all our men. With my last man, I had a straight shot to kill his last man, but not his king, which was right beside his last man. I decided to go for his last man. He then killed my last man with his king. Then, with only two kings on the board. It was draw, because we would never be about to use our king to kill the other king.”
“The second tie was we reach a point where the men we had left would just run around the board. But, we both realized we would never be able to reach the other brother's king.”
“The third tie was due to a lock between our chess pieces. Where it would end in either we would take out each others men, or just run around the board. After the third tie, we realized we had mastered chess. And with no challenge, after that, chess just became boring to us, and we moved onto playing another game.”
“To say that our parents were proud of our achievement, at the young age of seven, would be an understatement.”
Kikuchi said, “I can see why.”
Stan asked, “So, I will ask again. What do you want to do next?”
Hatsushiba suggested, “Let's go fishing.”
Stan said, “Sounds great.”
(_)
An hour later, the three of them were sitting on the concrete edge that dropped off into Tokyo bay. There was a nice breeze coming off the bay that kept them cool and comfortable.
Kikuchi and Hatsushiba were fishing with rods, while Stan just sat beside them, as he watched, and talked to them.
Kikuchi was in the middle, as Hatsushiba and Stan sat two Kikuchi sides. With Hatsushiba sitting to Kikuchi's right side. And Stan sitting to Kikuchi's left side.
They had small box of worms for bait, and they were just going to release what they caught.
The only sound was the sea breeze, and traffic in the distance.
Stan was caught up in the peaceful moment, as he broke the silence, by casually saying, “This is nice. Just a few friend, enjoying the nice warm weather, as we fish. This reminds me of the times I went fishing, with my family, on Ganymede.”
Stan immediately realized what he had said, as second after he said it. He mentally cursed, 'Oh crap.'
Kikuchi asked, “Where is that?”
Stan quickly lied, “A lake where I am from.”
Kikuchi commented, “Sounds nice. So, who is this brother of yours? You speak very highly of him.”
Stan smiled, as he answered, “He is my best friend. We are born around the same time? We look a lot alike. But, we recently found out we had different mothers. So, he is my brother from a different mother.”
Kikuchi and Hatsushiba chuckled a little at Stan's joke.
Stan went onto say, “This, our parental situation is a bit complicated.”
By then, Kikuchi and Hatsushiba had calmed down.
Hatsushiba looked over at Stan, as he inquired, “How complicated?”
Stan turned to his left side, as he looked across Kikuchi's front side, and over at Hatsushiba. He slyly said, “It is complicated, like how you can get blond from black?”
It took a few seconds for Hatsushiba to the hidden meaning of Stan's comment.
Stan then watched the Hatsushiba did a double-take toward hims, as the black haired boy stiffened a bit.
Stan just smiled at Hatsushiba.
Meanwhile, Kikuchi just continued staring out into the bay, as he calmly answered, “You use bleach.”
Stan continued to look at Hatsushiba, as he replied to Kikuchi, “That is one answer, Kikuchi.”
Stan noticed that Hatsushiba was still looking at him.
Stan rolled his eyes for a few seconds. He then turned back to look at Hatsushiba, as he said, “Oh hell. Don't worry about the small stuff.”
Stan then saw Hatsushiba look away, towards the bay, as he visibly relaxed.
Kikuchi suggested, while looking at the bay, “Let's just enjoy the rest of the afternoon here.”
Stan replied, “Sounds good to me.”
Hatsushiba said, “I agree.”
The three boys then spent the rest of the afternoon by the bay, until it was sunset.
They had caught a couple of fish, and released them.
While the three boys were presently sitting on the concrete, by the bay, Stan looked behind him, to his left, away from the two other teenage boys. He saw the sunset sky over the buildings. He thought, 'This is nice. But, this sunset is nothing comes part to the sunset on the Mars of my home reality. The reds and oranges of the sunset, against the red soil and blue sky, are just so lovingly. And the sunrise is just as lovely. I hope I make it back there some day, to see those sunsets and sunrises again.'
He then turned around to face the bay, as he mentally added, 'Still, this is not a bad place to be right now. It could be a lot worse.'
Kikuchi then stood up. He then reeled in his rod, as he said, “I guess it is time to go.”
Hatsushiba and Stan stood up as well. Hatsushiba then reeled up his rod.
Hatsushiba and Stan looked at each other. Hatsushiba then said, “We will catch up with you in a minute, Kikuchi.”
Kikuchi looked at the two other boys, as he said, “Okay.” He then turned around and started walking away.
When Kikuchi was out of earshot, Hatsushiba turned to Stan, as he stated, “You know.”
Hatsushiba's comment was not a question.
Stan looked over at Hatsushiba, as he shrugged. He commented, “It was not that hard to figure out.”
Hatsushiba pointed out, “I can see why. You are a genius.”
Stan shook his head, as he explained, “Not even that. The very fact you wear the same exact clothing, in the same size. You don't even do much to adjust your clothing between forms. And you go by the same name. Are you trying to have yourself found out? Or, do you not realize what you are doing?”
Hatsushiba admitted, “You have a point there. I have made some mistakes in hiding my secrets. But, my two forms are two different in size. Also, I have no place to keep a spare set of clothing. Nor, a place to change. And I was foolish enough to introduce my female form to my friends, using my real name.”
Stan replied, with sympathy in his voice, “Yea. You got yourself into a bind. And super-genius, or not, I cannot solve this problem for you. Except to suggest for you just come out and tell you friends and family.”
Hatsushiba responded, “I cannot risk that. I could lose everything. Still, the question that worries me is, are you going to tell on me?”
Stan said, “No. I am not. And I don't mind keeping your secret. By the way, for you next question. You are not my type. Besides, I have a girlfriend back home. She is even a cheerleader.”
Hatsushiba asked “If your girlfriend is a cheerleader, what are you?”
Stan stated, “Defensive lineman for an American football team. My team nicknamed me, the linebreaker. And I lived up to the name.”
Hatsushiba replied, “Nice. So, this is not an issue with you?”
Stan responded, “Nope. But, when your secrets blow up in your face, I don't want to be anywhere near you.”
Hatsushiba said, “I can live with that... Wait a minute. When we were leaving school, after your victory over the chess club, you made it sound like your brother and you had the same parents?”
Stan stated, “Yes. I did.” He mentally added, 'Oh no. I slipped up again. I think it is best if I just admit to the truth, if Hatsushiba calls me on it.'
Hatsushiba questioned, “But, then how can you and your brother have different mothers?”
Stan smirked, as he said, “Think about it.”
A few seconds later, Hatsushiba solved Stan's riddle, as his jaw dropped. As he collected himself, he inquired, “Are you?”
Stan answered, “No. The ability is latent.”
Hatsushiba questioned, “Oh. So, is your brother?
Stan responded, “Not as far as I know.”
Hatsushiba commented, with some sympathy in his tone of voice, “Still, that is messed up.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. And the sad fact is that is only the tip of the iceberg to my insane life.”
Hatsushiba hesitantly questioned, “I think you might have a more interesting life than I do. So, do I really want to know the rest?”
Stan coyly answered, “Not if you want to keep your sanity for a few more years.”
Hatsushiba said, “I think. As a wise idea. I will decline from asking any more about your past.”
Stan replied, “That would be a wise idea. So, what should we do for supper?”
Hatsushiba suggested, “Haruna's family runs a nice chinese restaurant.”
Stan thought, 'Getting chinese food in japan. That sounds so wrong. But, why not?' He said, “Sounds nice? So, whose paying?”
Hatsushiba and Stan continued to look as each other, for a few seconds. They then smirked towards each other, as they said, in unison, “Kikuchi.”
Hatsushiba and Stan turned and walked briskly towards Kikuchi, as Hatsushiba spoke up, “Hey, Kikuchi! Wait up! We would like to talk to you about getting some supper.”
Kikuchi stopped, as he turned around to face his two friends. He asked, “Sure. What you do have in mind?”
As the two other boys reached Kikuchi, Hatsushiba answered, “Haruna's family restaurant.”
Kikuchi responded, “Good choice. Let me guess. You want me to pay for it?”
Hatsushiba pleaded, “Please.”
Kikuchi shrugged, as he said, “Sure. Why not?”
Hatsushiba replied, “Kikuchi, you are the best.”
Stan said, “Thank you, Kikuchi.”
Kikuchi smiled, as he stated, “That is what friends are for.”
Kikuchi turned around, as all three boys then headed to Haruna's family's chinese restaurant, to get something to eat.
(_)
Nearly two weeks later, it was Saturday evening, right after dark, inside Lewis' hotel suite, Lewis was sitting in a cushion chair, at his table.
Lewis had finally gotten his first paycheck, and he had the money to buy the electronic tools he needed to start repairing on his reality device.
The reason he did not directly use his debit card account, that he hacked and created, was that he was trying to keep the cash limits low, so as to not raise any unneeded red flags. But, with his paycheck, he could use a little more money from his account, without the chance of raising any red flags.
Even thought the reality device was broken, he kept it on his person, or near him, at all times. So, it could not be lost, nor stolen.
Lewis had just had supper, which he had brought to his room, and he was now ready to work on his reality device.
Still, he had an open can of soda by his TV, which he was drinking. Though, he was careful to keep his can of soda away from his tools and the device.
Currently, he was using his new tools to open his reality device and look at its insides, to see if anything obvious was broken. Such as a burnt transistor, a blown capacitor, or a circuit being broken.
As Lewis inspected the electronics of the reality device he thought, 'This good news is that this looks a fairly simple design. Though, it is clear that some of the materials are not. Still, I believe I should be able to figure out how this device works, and fix this.'
'Yet, I need to be careful not to break it further. I don't think I can replace some of these parts with my small salary. And using the debit card, for some of the rare materials this device is made of would likely raise some red flags in the system.'
'Now, if Stan was here, we could probably fix this thing in a week. As it is, between my teaching job, and learning about this device, as I go, this could take a while.'
'But, I also need to keep in mind that I will put this thing back together later tonight, before I head to bed, and still keep it with me.'
Lewis then spent the rest of the evening working on the reality device, until he felt that it was time to head to sleep. Next, he put the device careful back together.
With his work on his reality device completely for the evening, he cleaned up after himself. Put away his tools. And he got ready for bed.
As Lewis laid in bed, he thought, 'At least I can sleep in tomorrow, because it is a Sunday. Still, I wonder whose idea it was to make those screwy half-school days, every other week, on Saturday? I am so happy I did not have to deal with such madness in my school system on Mars.'
Finally, he turned off his lamp light, on the nightstand by his bed, and he went to sleep, in the darkness surrounding him.
(_)
A few days later, in the middle of a sunny school day, during lunch break, Lewis was sitting down, in a chair, at a table, alone. He was eating his lunch, in the teacher's lounge.
Lewis noticed the PE teacher, Duke Strike, got up form his seat, at a nearby table, and walk up to him.
When Duke reached him, he greeted Lewis, “Hello Professor Lowe.”
Lewis set down his food, as he swallowed the food in his mouth. He then turned to Duke, as he responded, “You can call me, Lewis, Mister Strike.”
Duke smiled, as he replied, “And you can called me, Duke, Lewis. I do admire informality in such situations.”
Lewis agreed, “As do I, Duke. So, what can I do for you, Duke?”
Duke offered, “I have a fun errand I intend to run after school. It is out of town. And I will be gone for a few hours. But, I think you might enjoy it, as well. Would you like to come?”
Lewis thought, 'I need to learn about my coworkers. And Duke does seem to have a good head on head on his shoulders. Unlike others in this school, whom I will not name. So, I might as well take him up on his offer.' Lewis answered, “Sure. Where do I need to meet you at?”
Duke stated, “Meet me at the front of the teachers parking lot, around back of the building, half an hour after school lets out.”
Lewis replied, “I will do that.”
Duke grinned, as he responded, “See you there.” He then turned, and walked away from Lewis.
(_)
Across town, that afternoon, after school let out, Hatsushiba, and his group of friends, including Stan, met inside the Rock Stock Cafe.
Stan, Hatsushiba, Yurika, Haruna, and Fujiwara had put to tables together, so they five of them could sit five of the six chairs, at the large table.
Presently, they all looking at Kikuchi, whom was standing in front of them, with his back to the windows and front door of the cafe.
Since this morning, at school, they had all noticed that Kikuchi had been very happy for some reason, but he had refused to mentioned what was making him so happy. He only said that he would tell them after school let out. That it was too big a secret to say in school.
Hatsushiba requested, “Well, buddy. What is the big news?”
Kikuchi was grinning a toothy smile, as he pulled out six tickets with his right hand. He stated. “I got us six tickets to the new Koco concert, tonight. You are all invited.”
Stan noticed that everyone suddenly got a lot happy.
Fujiwara complimented, “Nice work, Kikuchi.”
Hatsushiba said, “Kikuchi, you magnificence bastard. How did you pull that off? Koco concerts are usually sold out within the first few hours they are available at the ticket booths, and the internet?”
Kikuchi continued smiling, as he answered, “I had asked my father to call in a favor. They are legit tickets. Direct from the ticket booth. These are not scalper fakes. But, I still had to agree to go on a date with, Mitsuba, this weekend. But, it is still worth it.”
Kikuchi then noticed the confused look on Stan's face. Kikuchi turned to Stan, as he explained, “Misuba Morinoin, is my unwanted fiancee. Long story. Don't ask.”
Stan inquired, “Okay. And you have my sympathies. So, who is this Koco band? What music do they play?”
Haruna looked over at Stan, as she stated, in an excited tone of voice, “Koco is only one of the most popular rock bands in Japan.”
Yurika said, in a slight calmer tone of voice, than Haruna, “Koco is a five member, all female, band. But, it is not an idol band. These five women were friends long before they formed their band. And their music is very good.”
Stan turned to the Haruna and Yurika, as he responded, “Sounds interesting. I look forward to going to the concert.”
Yurika turned to Kikuchi, as she asked, “So, what time is the concern, tonight? I do not want to miss it because of my work here.”
Kikuchi answered, “You can relax, Yurika. I know you get off of work as six, tonight. And you will still have time to get ready. The concert is at eight tonight, after dark. And the band will likely play for about two hours. Though, we need to get there early. And it is about a half hour drive. But, that won't be a problem. I will have my family limo meet us here at six thirty.”
Yurika said, “Thirty minutes will be plenty of time for me to go upstairs and get ready. I will grab a bite here to eat, before I close up.”
Hatsushiba spoke up, “This all sounds great. We can have supper here, and then head out for some great entertainment.”
Kikuchi agreed, “Good plan, buddy. Anyway, I will keep the tickets for tonight.”
Stan noticed that Yurika, Haruna, Fujiwara, and Hatsushiba were all giving Kikuchi death glares.
Kikuchi sweated slight in fear, as he said, “And don't worry. I won't lose the tickets.” He then put the six tickets in his one of his pockets.
Stan then noticed the four teenagers drop their glares, as Kikuchi let out a sigh of relief.
Stan just thought, 'It must be a japanese thing.'
(_)
Two hours later, outside of Tokyo, in some of the forests and hills, nearby the city, Duke drove Lewis down the road in his four door, red convertible, with the top and side windows down on the vehicle.
Duke was in the driver's seat, on the right side of the car. And Lewis was sitting in the left, front passenger seat.
Both of them were wearing their seatbelts.
During the trip, Lewis had noticed that Duke was going the speed limit, and driving his car with care.
Duke stated, “Lewis, we will reach our destination in a few minutes.”
Lewis replied, “Take your time, Duke. I am enjoying the ride.”
Duke smiled, as he responded, “That is what I like to hear.”
Five minutes later, Lewis noticed that Duke had turned onto a dirt road, a minute later, they reached a grassy field, with a large dirt berm in the distance.
After Duke stopped the car, both men took off their seat belts, opened their car doors, got out, and closed their doors behind them.
As Lewis stood by Duke's car, he noticed several large cratered holes on the other side of the field.
Duke stated, “I have something to show you, Lewis.”
Lewis turned to watch as Duke walked around to the trunk of his car.
After Duke used his keys to open his car truck, he opened it. He reached into the truck, as he said, “Before I was Duke Strike, I was known by another name. Duke Nukem. And trust me. I lived up to the name.”
Lewis then watched as Duke pulled out a large underarm RPG launcher that he held under this right arm, with both hands.
Lewis thought, 'I think my life just got a little bit weirder.'
Duke smirked, as he stated, “This is one of the few places, in that area, that I can practice with my weapons, in secret. Without being bothered. Now watched.”
He then walked away from the car, and Lewis. And he towards the dirt berm.
A few seconds later, he came to a stop. Duke aimed his weapon, as he held it under his right arm. And he fired two rockets towards the large, dirt berm on the other side of the grassy field. Both shots hit the berm and exploded.
Fortunately, the two men were far enough away that they were completely unharmed by the explosions.
Not even any of the dirt, thrown free of the explosion, hit them.
Duke then turned his head towards Lewis, while keeping his weapon pointed towards the other side of the field. He commented, “There is also something else I would like to talk to you about, Lewis. You don't act like you are from Earth. At least not of this time period.”
Lewis thought, 'He has a big gun, and he know how to use it. I might as well come clean.'
Lewis shrugged, as he replied, “What gave me away?”
Duke said, “Outside some statements on pop-culture entertainment, you have shown not real insight into local events. Nor, have you been seen with a newspaper. Nor, have you talked with anyone about local events, nor even world events, or happenings right now in the world.”
“I know. I checked with some of the faculty and students. You have kept to yourself. And you have not really talked to anyone for an extended amount of time. You have not mentioned your family to anyone. Also, you have not shown any interest in the movies and music here. Along with that, you live in a hotel.”
“And from what I can gather, it was like you just appeared only a few weeks ago, with just enough records to have an ID and get this job. Though, your records do not amount enough to actually being real. I am guessing you hacked the computers to create those records, and your bank account.”
“Yet, you are clearly highly educated. You taken no actions, outside of school, nor your hotel room, that are questionable. All you have done, is go to work, get something to eat, and come back to you hotel suite, to get some sleep. To add to this, you have been nothing but polite to everyone you meet. I would guess, you are lost, and you are just making the best of your situation.”
Lewis responded, “You would be correct, Duke. I am not from this time. Actually, I am from an alternate future. I am from an alternate, future Mars, to be exact. The Mars in my reality was terraformed long before I was born. Mars, in my time, is actually a nice place to live. And I was stranded here by accident. Currently, I am working on the means of returning home. But first, I intend to find my brother, whom was also lost, like I am.”
Duke stated, “I can sympathize. I played the reality warp twist, myself. I am sure, given time, you will find you brother, and return home.”
Lewis weakly smiled, as he said, “I appreciate your faith in me.”
Duke commented, “Still, I wonder why you choose to get a job as a school teacher.”
Lewis shrugged, “It is as the old saying goes. Find a job you like, and you never work another day in your life.”
Duke chuckled for a few seconds. He then agreed, “That is true.”
Lewis went onto say, “I enjoy physics. And I have found I enjoy teaching physics. Besides. I am more than qualified to teach the physics class, at Komatane.”
Duke responded, “I have seen some of your school lessons. I would agree with you. You make a wonderful teacher You have even improved the average school test grades by ten percent, in just the few weeks you have been here.”
Lewis said, “Thank you.”
Duke mentioned, “By the way, the principal loves what you have done for the students. It seems the students really respond positively towards you.”
Lewis stated, “That is nice to know. I try to leave a good impression. But, I make sure they don't walk all over me, either.”
Duke complimented, “That is a good balance. And honestly, I feel my students are more safer in your hands than in some of the other science and math teachers of that school.”
Lewis questioned, “I know what you mean. What is with those sisters?”
Duke stated, “I honestly don't know. But, even I can see they are crazy.”
Lewis commented, “I have already had my share of dealing with crazy chicks, to last a lifetime.”
Duke laughed for a few seconds. He then responded, “I know what you mean. One time, I had to deal with some crazy chicks in power armor, for a while there. Though, we eventually started to get along, and it wasn't that bad an experience. How about you?”
Lewis answered, “I had to deal with two sets of crazy chicks. One was a set of three sisters, that ware martial artist, elemental wielding, gender benders. The other set were five sisters, whom claimed to be descended from pirates, that were very violent, and very skilled with their modern weapons. Their weapons included a sword, long knives, flamethrowers, pistols, and a large machine gun.”
Duke let out a laugh. He grinned, as he stated, “Damn. I think I got the better end of the stick.”
Lewis replied, “You probably did.”
Duke offered, “So, would you like to know how to shoot my RPG, and fire it a few times.”
Lewis smiled, as he answered, “Sure.”
Duke then walked over to Lewis. While keeping his RPG pointed away from them. Duke then instructed Lewis on how to use the large, destructive weapon. When Duke was finished teaching Lewis, he spent the next hour letting Lewis fire his RPG across the field.
When they were done, Duke put his RPG back into the trunk of his car, and closed his truck. Then, Duke and Lewis got back into Duke's car, with Duke driving.
After which, Duke took Lewis to get some supper, for the both of them, at an american style restaurant that Duke liked.
When they were finished with dinner, they split the check, and Duke returned Lewis back to the hotel Lewis was staying at, so Lewis could get some rest.
(_)
It was seven fifty PM, that evening, as the sun was setting, nearly into twilight, in the outdoor stadium field which had been converted for the Koco concert.
Hatsushiba, Stan, Kikuchi, Yurika,. Haruna, and Fujiwara walked onto the crowed field, for the Koco concert.
There as plenty of lighting around the stadium for the concert goers.
Stan and his five friends stood near each other, as they looked across the field, they saw the large stage set up across the field. There were large speakers, and large monitors, set up on the sides, of the stage, to show close ups of the band members during the concert. Also, there were stage lightning around the stage. Along with, the instruments set out on stage for the Koco band members.
Stan thought, 'Nice set up. Since, I don't see any microphones. I am guessing that the Koco band members that sing by using microphone headsets. Still, I wish Lewis was here with me, to enjoy this concert.'
Stan then noticed there are was no one in the bleacher stands. He asked, “Why is there no one in the stands? If this band is so hot, I would think they would want to pack this stadium.”
Kikuchi answered, “From what my father told me. The stadium owners said the band, and concert goers, could use the field, for a fee. But, the owners did not want anyone in the stands, and risk having the stands be trashed, if there was a riot. Which, has been known to happen during concerts with this band. The field is easy to clean up. The stands, not so much.”
Stan agreed, “Okay. That is understandable.”
Haruna commented, “At least they have indoor restrooms, in the stadium. And we don't have to deal with those portable toilets.”
Yurika replied, “Amen to that.”
Hatsushiba asked, “So, guys. Who is your favorite Koco band member?”
Kikuchi said, “I like Kasumi.”
Fujiwara commented, “Shampoo seems nice. What about yourself, Hatsushiba?”
Hatsushiba casual responded, “I find Ranko to be cute.”
Yurika questioned, “What about Nabiki?”
Haruna answered, “Everyone can see Nabiki as the gold digger she is. I am surprised those girls allow her to be their manager. And something is off about Akane.”
Yurika replied, “No arguments there.”
Kikuchi turned to Stan, as he inquired, “How about you, Stan?”
Stan turned to Kikuchi, as he answered, “I already have a girlfriend. Besides, I have had my fill of exciting women, to last a lifetime. And I don't see the appeal of being attracted to such women.”
The others just lightly laughed him.
In response, to his friends' mild laughter, Stan looked around, and he saw someone that caught that his eye. He stated, “You think I am joking, on that it is possible for a teenage boy to have his fill of women. Just check out that guy over there.”
Stan then used his right hand to point at a teenage boy, whom had bright blue hair, whom had three teenage girls standing a by him.
Stan's friends continued to lightly laugh a little, as they turned to look at whom Stan had pointed to Stan then dropped his hand to his side.
Stan and his friends that all three teenage girls around the blue haired boy, had slender builds. One of the girls had black hair. Another girl had brown hair. And the last girl, by the boy, had light brown hair. And both the boy and the three girls looked maybe a year younger than Stan and his friends were.
Over the course of the next few seconds, Stan's friends stopped laughing, as they saw the look of uneasy in the blue haired boy's body language. And it was clear the blue haired boy felt the three teenage girls by him, were standing a little to close to him for his comfort.
Hatsushiba stated, “Yea. I got to admit. That guy does not look happy. I am so happy that the girls here, that are our friends, are nice, and clearly not as possessive as those three girls are of that boy.”
Yurika and Haruna smiled at Hatsushiba compliment of them.
Hatsushiba commented, “Still, let's enjoy the show.”
The group, except for Stan, then turned their attention back to the stage.
Meanwhile, Stan looked continued looking around the crowd for a few more seconds. The only of person that caught his eye, was a dark blue haired teenage boy, with his teenage friends. They were nearby, on the field, and they were staring at the staging, waiting for the concert to start.
Stan then turned to look at the stage.
(_)
Ten minutes later, the concert goers, on the ground, watched as up at the stage, the five woman band Koco, came out from backstage, walked up to the front of the stage, to greet their fan.
The women were all in their early twenties. They all had fair skin tones. All had slender to athletic physical builds. And they were all quite beautiful.
The tallest woman in the band, and whom appear to be the oldest, by a couple of years, had long brown hair.
The next tallest woman had short brown hair as well.
The third tallest woman had long purple hair. And she was a bit more muscular than most of the other women in the band.
The second to shortest girl, had short, dark blue hair.
And the shortest girl, had long red hair, tied in a pigtail. She was also bit more muscular than some of the women in the band. Also, the redhead was standing in the center of her girl.
The women were dressed various combinations of colored, sexy clothing. A few wore leather long skirts, the rest wore leather pants. All of them wore short sleeve, midriff shirts, along with short jackets, and flat soled slippers. All of these clothes were styled for a rock and roll motif, and the individual clothing pieces were different colors between the women, but none of the clothing each woman had on clashed with their own clothing, nor their band members' clothing. The shirts, the jackets, and the pants hugged their clothing, showing of their wonderful figures.
As Stan looked at the women, he mentally noted, 'So, they are all wearing microphone headsets over their right ears, which are likely tied to the speakers.'
A few seconds later, the women pick up the instruments, and as they stood beside each other, while facing their fans.
Suddenly, the large monitors, on the sides of the stage, came on, to show close ups of the Koco band members.
The women in the middle of the band, a small, japanese, redhead, with fair skin, and pigtail, spoke, in an excited tone of voice, in japanese, “Hello. I am Ranko Saotome. And from us in the band, to you, thank you everyone for coming out to see us. We hope you enjoy the show.”
The Koco band then started their first song playing their instruments, with skill, as all five began singing on key, and in sync with each other.
Stan thought, 'I have to admit that is a nice japanese rock and roll song. I think, I will likely enjoy this concert. And I can see why the guys like these girls. They have pleasant voices, and nice T&A.'
(_)
Later, as the concert started to reach full swing, several feet away from Stan, three teenage sisters had walked out onto the field, from under the stadium. The three teenager sisters stood by each other, as all three of them were looking at Stan, while Stan did not notice the three sisters.
Nodoka said, in japanese, “Well, there is Stan.”
Yurika stated, in japanese, “Good. It looks like we got lucky. Considering we just got here.”
Nodoka asked, “But, where is Lewis?”
Mikoto commented, in japanese, “I don't know. Though, considering those two are practically inseparable, there must be a good reason why Lewis is not here.”
Then, a few people moved, allowing the trio to see who was with Stan.
Nodoka said, “And guess who Stan is by?”
As the Yurika and Mikoto took a closer looked, as whom Nodoka was taking about,
Among the teenagers standing by Stan, was a teenage, male, Hatsushiba Akira.
Yurika groaned, as she stated, “Okay. This is the past of our reality. But, I cannot believe he is with my mother. How did he pulled that off?”
Nodoka shrugged, “We can ask aunt Akira, the next time we see her.”
Mikoto then noticed someone else in the crowd. She pointed at the person with her right hand, as she said, “Akira isn't the only one here. Take a look over there.”
Nodoka and Yurika looked over to see that Mikoto was pointing at her future mother, whom was currently a guy, the blue haired, teenage boy, Natsuru Senou.
The blue haired, teenage boy was with three teenage girls. The black haired Shizuku Sangou, the brown haired Akane Mishima, and the light brown haired Mikoto Kondou.
And Natsuru was clearly was not happy with his situation.
Mikoto dropped her right hand back to her side, as she grumbled, “Damn. My mom looks so unhappy with those three. And there is not a thing I can do about it. Those girls are obviously so clingy. No wonder she left them.”
Nodoka looked up at the stage, as she commented, “That is not all. Considering, my mom is on stage, with her ex-girlfriends, and friends, we are in a tight spot.”
Mikoto and Yurika looked up at the stage, as well.
Yurika stated, “You are right. We cannot confront Stan here. There is just too great a chance for a paradox.”
Nodoka replied, “Agreed. And we cannot stay here too long. Stan might see us, and we trigger a paradox, that way.”
Mikoto commented, “Yea. You both are right. Still, Aunt Ranma is one skilled singer.”
Nodoka smiled, as she responded, “Yes. She is. I even inherited some of her singing abilities.”
Yurika suggested, “We will head to the ladies restroom, and teleport out of this reality.”
Nodoka replied, “I agree.”
Mikoto said, “Yes. Let's do that. Don't worry, girls. We will get them eventually.”
The three women then headed into the hallways, under the stadium stands, to find a private place, in one of the ladies restrooms, to use one of their reality devices, to leave the past of their home reality.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Stan excused himself, as he heads to the inside the hallways, to find the men's restroom.
As Stan got closer to the entrance to nearest men's restroom, he noticed the dark blue haired teenage boy, he saw earlier, enter the men's restroom a few seconds before he reached the entrance.
(_)
At that moment, inside the men's restroom Stan was heading towards, the dark blue haired, teenage boy, Tsutomu Senkawa was checking the stalls. He quickly found that he was the only one in the men's restroom.
Tsutomu then stood by the sinks, as he stated, out loud, in japanese, “Birdy, there is no one here. You we can change now.”
Within a single second, Tsutomu's body then changed into Birdy's female form, with her long hair being her normal orange and white hair color. As their body changed genders, their clothing changed as well, to more casual wear for a woman.
Birdy stated, in japanese, “Thanks Tsutomu, for letting me enjoy the concert, as well.”
Tsutomu though, 'No problem.'
Birdy said, “At least I am not the one on stage this time. And I find it funny that I can actually attract less attention from people here with my normal hair color, than when I spray my hair brown.”
Tsutomu mentally pointed out, 'When they see you in brown hair, they also notice your face, and they realize you are the idol singer, Shion Arita. But, with your normal hair color, they notice the hair, and not your face.'
Birdy agreed, “You're right.”
Birdy then noticed turned to her right, and she a tanned skin, black haired teenage boy staring at them. The boy was wearing a red varsity jacket over his shirt, along with wearing pants, belt, and tennis shoes.
Birdy and Tsutomu both immediately realized that the teenage boy must have just walked in just as they changed, with him seeing the entire transformation. Along with this, he must have heard the audible part of their conversation.
Stan casually said, “You changing genders is not the strangest thing I have seen this month. And as far as I am concerned, I didn't see anything.”
Birdy smiled at the teenage boy, as she replied, “That works for me.”
Stan requested, “Now, if you don't mind. I have to pee. And a girl being caught in the men's restroom would cause questions to be asked.”
Birdy said, “Got ya. And thanks.”
Birdy then walked passed Stan, and out of the restroom. After she did so, Stan went to take care of his business.
Stan soon finish his business, washed his hands, and left the men's restroom.
After Stan walked out of the restroom, he headed towards the field, and his friends.
While Stan walked, he mentally reflected, 'The hair color is different, but that has to be Birdy. Violin's mother. So, Birdy is a gender bender. Not that I really care, at this point. And I am in the past of Violin's reality.'
'Okay, I know, where, when, and what reality, I am at. This is progress. And Violin knows the teenager girls that are after us. So, at worst, I will eventually bumped into some reality technology, at some point.'
'Or, worst comes to worse, after I finish this high school year, I will just build my own reality device. That portal technology is not to difficult to build. But, it will just take time and money to build. That could be a problem. And if I try to steal that much money, for materials and equipment, it would raise to many red flags. And the time factor would be to tight for me to build a working reality device. Which would likely take me a few years to develop, properly test, and eventually, get me home.'
'Besides, it would be cliché. I would be like some sort of super-villain. Which, I am not. I am just a teenager lost in the multiverse.'
Stan then saw that he friends. As he approached his friend, he continued his thoughts, 'And I am trying to make the best of my situation.'
Stan soon returned to his group of friends, in the field, as they watched the rest of the concert, by Koco, without a problem.
After the concert was over, Stan and his friends left the stadium, and entered Masamune family limo, which had a personal driver.
Kikuchi then had the driver take his five friends, including Stan, to each of their homes, or hotel in Stan's case.
When they all reached their homes, they soon had a pleasant night's sleep.
And when Kikuchi was finished dropping his friends off, his driver took Kikuchi back to the Masamune home, so Kikuchi could get some sleep as wel..
(_)
A week later, in the evening, Duke had invited Lewis to watch a martial arts tournament with him.
While this was a minor, mixed martial arts exhibition tournament, for adults, with double elimination rules. Anyone could enter, but Duke and Lewis just came to watch.
After Duke and Lewis had entered the room of the small tournament arena, in the building the event was being held in, Duke and Lewis soon found seat, beside each other, in one of the upstairs stands.
Duke sat to Lewis' right side.
Both men looked down on the tournament mats, as the contestants were getting organized, and ready for their matches.
Lewis thought, 'The last week had been interesting, and fun. It seems Duke is really lacking on finding a guy to share his hobbies with. And I am not doing much of anything.'
'Though, I did check with him. He likes women. Plus, he knows my secret of not being from this reality, so I don't have to worry about that with him. And I can actually relax for the moment. And it is nice to have to something to do, besides work and fixing the reality device. Which is coming along nicely. Still, I can put off a working on the reality device for a few nights, every week.'
Lewis turned to Duke, as he asked, “So, what is going on?”
Duke looked over at Lewis, as he answered, “Well, the first matches will be the men. Then, the women. This should be a pretty good. By the way, the odds on favorite to win tonight, for the men's competition, is a man named, Ranma Saotome. He is one hell of a martial artist. I have seen him compete. He might be able to take me in a hand to hand fight. You cannot miss him. He is the black haired man in a pigtail.”
Duke then turned back to the tournament mats, as he pointed, with his left hand, at a group of men standing, on the floor, to the side of the mats.
Lewis looked over at where Duke was pointing. Among the men, Lewis saw a black haired japanese man, in great physical shape, whom had a pigtail. Ranma appeared to be only a few years older than Lewis.
Duke dropped his left hand back to his side, as he went on to say, “Ranma even has a twin sister named Ranko Saotome. She is also very good on the women's side of these tournaments Though, I believe she is not going to be part of this tournament today. She is also in a popular rock band.”
“Ranko is easy to recognize. She has red hair. She is smaller than Ranma. And she has large beasts for her figure. But, not too big. Also, except for the size difference, hair colors, and genders, they look almost identical in their faces. Which is kind of odd. Especially, for siblings of different genders.”
Lewis thought, 'Unless, Ranma and Ranko are the same person. I have seen stranger things.' While Lewis continued to look at Ranma, he asked, “Has Ranma and Ranko ever been seen together?”
Duke continued looking at Ranma as well, while he thought over Lewis' question for the next few seconds. After which, Duke answered, “Now, that I think about it. No.”
Duke then realized what Lewis was hinting at, as he started laughing, for a few seconds.
Lewis then overheard Duke quietly mutter, between laughs, “Like the Shimeru family.”
Lewis thought, 'So, he figured out what I was hinting about, with Ranma and Ranko. And he knows about the Shimeru family, as well. We both know to keep this vague. But, I do have some questions.' He said, “So, the principal is not the only want that knows about some of our students more interesting quarks.”
As Duke stopped laughing, he inquired, “You know about it?”
Lewis shrugged, as he replied, “Same names. Same family. Once you know it is possible. It is easy to spot the signs.”
Duke agreed, “Very true.”
Lewis questioned, “Do you think he is related to those two at school?”
Duke answered, “Doubtful. Their trigger is lust and stress. A fight like this would more than likely trigger a change by accident. Which is that last thing such a person would want to happen. Especially, in public.”
Lewis commented, “I have meet other types like that, with different triggers for the change.”
Duke replied, “Really?”
Lewis said, “Yes.”
Duke commented, “Life just gets stranger every day.”
Lewis agreed, “Amen to that. Now, let's enjoy the show.”
As expected, two hours later, Ranma won the tournament for the men. Duke and Lewis did not feel like staying for the female tournament. And they both headed for their homes to rest, and get some sleep.
(_)
The next Saturday, during the evening, right after dark, both brothers found themselves sitting in the cushioned chairs, by their tables, in their individual hotel suites, across town.
Both of them thought, 'I wonder where my brother is right now?'
Lewis continued his thought, 'I could find out. All it would require is a little work. So, why not?'
Stan went onto think, 'I might be worth the work to learn where he is. Though, I hate doing math formulas. They are so boring'
In both their hotel suites, Stan and Lewis got up from this chairs. They each found a pen and some blank paper to write on, before they returned to chairs. They put their papers on their tables, and both of them began to crunch some numbers.
The formula was simple for those of their intelligence. They used a variation of their multiverse gate formula, in conjunction with how much power the unstable gate had at the time, versus long they were in the gate, until they were separated.
Two hours later, they had both reached the same happy conclusion, that both of them were in Tokyo, at the same time, in the same reality.
Stan said, “Lewis is here in Tokyo. And likely closer than I thought.”
Lewis stated, “When we first came to the reality, we were no further than thirty kilometers apart. That is spitting distance, when compared to the vastness of the multiverse. We really lucked out on that, along with where and when we ended up.”
Stan commented, “It is likely that we came to this reality because our father is native here, and we were thinking of Violin, along with Tokyo of the past, when Violin's parents were the same age, as when we met Violin.”
Lewis concluded, “And the unstable gate took us where, when, and what reality, in the multiverse we wanted to go.”
Stan and Lewis then asked the same question, “Now, how do I find my brother?”
Stan stated, “We are both like laying low. Unless we bump into each other, which would be a miracle. Given the population of Tokyo. Lewis probably realizes that I will likely wait for him, to come get me, with his reality device. But, given the amount of time it has been, I am thinking the device is broken. Which could be a problem for both of us.”
Lewis said, “Given the amount of time it has been, I am guessing that Stan realizes that the reality device is broken. And because we do not want to attract attention, we cannot just go looking for each other in the usual ways. I need to think on. I will decide what to do in the morning.”
Stan commented, “Since we cannot find each other, the straight forward way, I will just have to think of using alternative ways. I need to sleep on this.”
Both of them stated, “And as Dad said. That in hard times, a prayer never hurts. Maybe he is right.”
That night, both brothers prayed to find their other brother soon, and in good health.
(_)
The next day, in the sunny Sunday afternoon, Lewis had gone with Duke, to do some walking around town.
As they walked down a sidewalk, Lewis was looking around them. He thought, 'There is always the off chance, I might get lucky, and see Stan.'
Duke noticed what Lewis was doing, as he asked, “What are we looking for?”
While Lewis continued to look around, as they walked, he answered, “Last night, I worked on a math formula. I figured out that my brother is likely in this city, right now. Just keep an eye out for someone that looks similar to me in build, skin tone, and hair color. Whom wears a red varsity american football jacket, with the number, 69, the back of it.”
Duke nodded once, as he responded, “I will.”
Duke thought, 'I am not going to discourage, Lewis. I know what it is like to search for someone, like a needle in a haystack. And I have succeeded in finding those people, in a timely manner. I will help my friend, succeed, now. If this does not work, in a few hours. I will make some suggestions, that he might try, to help locate his brother. I can even make a few phone calls, and call in some favors. But, I really don't want other to know about Lewis, and his brother, unless we have no other choice, in finding Lewis' brother.'
Duke then started looking around with Lewis.
As both of them continued looking around, they turned a corner on the sidewalk, to their right side.
(_)
Nearby, a few seconds ago, Stan was with Kikuchi and Hatsushiba, as they walked down a sidewalk, beside each other, as they did some window shopping. Hatsushiba in the middle of the three of them. Stan was on the interior left side of the side walk. Kikuchi was on the right side, near the three lane street they were walking beside.
As Stan looked around, he stated, “Guys, I have some interesting news.”
The three of them continued walking beside each other, as Kikuchi asked, “What is it?”
Stan stated, “I have come to the conclusion that my brother is in this city. He almost looks like me, except he wears a white coat.”
Hatsushiba commented, “Stan, do you realize the odds of bumping into your brother in this city?”
Stan smiled, as he said, “Oh come, Hatsushiba. We both know that greater impossibilities have happened to the both us.”
Hatsushiba quietly said, “Point taken.”
Just then, as they came to the a corner in the sidewalk, they notice two people turning on the corner, in front of them, to face the three boys.
Both groups suddenly stopped, and stayed quiet, as they faced each other.
Stan and Lewis looked at each, as they smiled towards each other.
A second later, they ran towards each other, as they hugged one another.
Stan said, “I missed you, brother.”
Lewis replied, “I missed you too.”
They held each other for a few seconds. They then broke their hug, and took a few steps back from each other.
Stan turned to Kikuchi and Hatsushiba. He said, “Lewis, I would like you to meet my friends, Hatsushiba and Kikuchi. Guys, this is Lewis Lowe, my brother.”
Kikuchi said, “Nice to meet you.”
Hatsushiba stated, “It is good to finally meet you, Lewis. Your brother, Stan, speaks well of you.”
Lewis replied, “Thank you. And it is nice to meet you.”
Lewis turned around. And Stan noticed this, as he turned around, as well.
Lewis used his left hand to gesture at Duke, as he stated, “This is Duke Strike. A friend of mine from work. Duke, this is Stan Lowe. My brother.”
Duke looked at the two brothers. He then focused on Stan, with a critical look, as he said, “A pleasure to meet you.” He though, 'So, this is Lewis' brother. I see the resemblance. And that is a red varsity american football jacket.'
'Unfortunately, this also means Lewis will be leaving. And we were having such fun together. It is so rare in this country, to find someone to share my hobbies with... Oh well. It was fun while it lasted.'
Stan responded, “Likewise, Mister Strike.”
Duke replied, “Duke is fine.” He turned to Lewis, as he inquired, “Lewis, I take it you will be resigning from your job now?”
Lewis nodded, as he answered, “Sadly. Yes. I am.”
Duke stated, “I understand. I will let the principal know that you of your resignation.”
Lewis responded, “Thank you. And Duke, you have been a good friend, when I need one.” He extended his right hand.
Duke shook Lewis' hand with his right hand, while using his left hand to pat Lewis gently on his right should. He said, “Same here. Not many people here share my interests. It was refreshing to find someone who did. You.”
Both of them noticed the firm grip the other person had.
Lewis commented, “You are right about that.”
A few seconds later, they broke then handshake.
Duke turned to Stan, as he slyly said, “Good luck in your journeys. To the both of you.”
Lewis whispered into Stan's left ear, “He knows. Don't worry about it. I will tell you later.”
Stan just turned to Lewis, as he softly replied, “Okay.”
Both brothers turned to Duke.
Lewis offered, “Duke, you know what is out there. We are more than happy to have you come with us.”
Duke replied, “Nah. I prefer to help shape the minds of future generations.”
Lewis complimented, “That is a good goal.”
Kikuchi asked, “What is this, Duke, talking about? Are you to going somewhere?”
The brothers turned around to face Kikuchi, and Hatsushiba.
Stan explained, “I am sorry guys. But, I got to leave on short notice. I came here only to find my brother. But, you two, and the others, have been good friends to me. And I thank you for that. Still, now that I have found my brother. I have to go.”
Kikuchi inquired, “Are you in trouble?”
Stan admitted, “Actually, we are. But, don't worry. As long as we keep moving, we will be fine.”
Hatsushiba replied, “Okay. And stay safe.”
Stan added, “We will try. And there is always the hope we will see each other in the future. Stranger things have happened.”
Hatsushiba smiled at Stan, as he agreed, “That is very true.”
Kikuchi said, “Goodbye, Stan. I will let the others at the cafe, and the school, know that you had to leave.
Stan said, “Thank you. I won't forget any of you.”
Kikuchi replied, “I know you won't. We are very memorable people.”
Stan stated, “That you both are.”
Hatsushiba smile turned sad, as he said, “See you later, Stan.”
Stan winked at Hatsushiba, as he said, “Until next time.”
Hatsushiba's smile brighten, as he replied, “Yes. Until next time.”
Stan turned to Lewis asked, “So, which was do we go, while we talk in private?”
Lewis replied, “This way.” He then turned around, and passed Duke.
Stan followed Lewis to the crosswalk. With him standing to Lewis' right side.
The brothers then pushed the button for the crosswalk, they need to use. Next, they wait a few seconds at the crosswalk, before they were clear crossing the street. After which, the brothers sadly left behind the friends they had made, and the lives they had created in their father's home reality.
(_)
Across the street from the Lowe brothers, and their three friends, a man, dressed in a buttoned up long coat, whom looked similar to the deceased actor, Lee Van Cleef, watched the brother leave the others three individuals, as they crossed the street.
The man quietly followed the brothers, as the brothers left the area on foot.
(_)
Ten minutes later, as the Lowe brothers walked down the sidewalk, they talked, and caught up with each others lives, over the past month, or so.
They were walking side by side, with Lewis to Stan's left side. And the street being to Lewis' left side.
By then, they reached a part of town that was less busy, and was deserted at that time of day. To the point where there was only the occasional car that passed though the two-lane street, beside them. And there was not one on the sidewalks, near them.
The Lowe brothers passed by an abandoned, partly demolished building, on their side of the street, to their right side. The building was missing its doors and windows. In addition, the building set twenty feet from the street. With a green and dirt field between the building and the sidewalk.
Stan and Lewis walked onto the sidewalk, parallel with the building. Stan commented, “So, you played at being a junior high school physics teacher?”
Lewis said, “Yes. And it was fun. Also, we both can agree that I am more than qualified at being physics professor. And to be honest. So are you.”
Stan agreed, “True.”
Lewis commented, “Still, I am not surprised that you went back to high school, as a student.”
Stan shrugged, as he replied, “My thoughts for doing so, were that I am good at it. So, why not?”
Lewis stated, in a playful tone of voice, “No argument there.”
Stan inquired, “I take it the reality device is broken?”
Lewis answered, “Yes. But, it is in one piece. I have been studying it, while I was here. So, I could carefully fix it, without breaking it further.”
Stan complimented, “That is good thinking on your part. I am sure we can get it fixed, with enough time.”
Lewis stated, “That is what I am hoping.”
Stan asked, “Where is the device.”
Lewis used his right hand to lightly pat his right side pants pocket, as he commented, “I always keep it with me.”
Stan said, “Good. Anyway, it is great to have you back.”
Lewis replied, “Same here. And let's not do that again.”
Stan suggested, “I don't plan to. I guess our next move is we will need to collect our things from our hotel suites, and find another hotel with a two bedroom suite.”
Lewis responded, “Agreed. And if we pool our money that way, we can use our debit cards to live on. With enough left over to afford any more tools we need to fix our device. Besides what you have already bought.”
Stan said, “My thoughts exactly.”
It was then they heard, from the sidewalk, across the empty, two lane street, from them, a familiar voice, loudly say, in galactic basic, with basic being pretty much identical to english, “Hello boys!
As the brothers recognized the voice, they stop in their tracks, with the abonded, partly demolished building, still being to their right side.
The two brothers turned direction of the voice. When they turned to face the empty street, they saw across the empty street, standing on the sidewalk, on the other side, a man whom look like Lee Van Cleef, which confused them slightly.
Though, the Lee Van Cleef had familiar large fedora hat, and buttoned up long coat.
Though, the brothers did recognized the voice.
Stan stated, in english, “Cad Bane.”
Cad complimented, “Good memory.
Lewis said, in english, “It figures that you would be the one to find us. And while you may look different, but we would recognize you voice anywhere.”
Cad stated, “I could used a voice synthesizer I had. But, I chose not to. Still, this holographic device, which hides my true form, is nice. And for some reason, when I chose to look like a male human, it chose this appearance. Still, I like the appearance... For a human.”
Stan stated, “We fully agree.”
Lewis commented, “Whomever programed you holographic device has good taste in human old western movies. The actor you look like was named, Lee Van Cleef. If you have the chance, look up the Earth movie, from the last twentieth century AD, Earth calendar. It is the Sergio Leone movie, titled, The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly. The character you look like is called, Angel Eyes. And he was one serious badass gunslinger in that movie.”
Cad Bane smirked, as he said, “You know what? I just might do that.”
Cad turned off his holographic disguise, showing his true, blue, alien form.
Stan asked, “How did you find us?”
As Bane unbuttoned his long coat, he cryptically answered, “I have my ways.”
The brothers saw the gunbelt around Bane's waist, with a holster firearm on each side of his waist.
Cad then drew his two blasters. He pointed one blaster, as each other them, as he ordered, “Now, you two are coming with me.”
The brothers did the only sane thing they could.
They turned around, and ran towards the empty, partly demolished building that was behind them.
As the Lowe brothers reached the inside of the building, Cad Bane began laughing as he fired wildly into the building, causing the building to began to collapse in on the brothers.
From inside the building, as the building began to close collapse around them, Stan swiftly grabbed Lewis, as Stan pulled Lewis down to the ground, with Stan on top of Lewis.
Suddenly, everything went dark, as lots of dust was kicked up, causing the brothers to hack, cough, and sneeze, a little.
(_)
A few seconds later, outside, and across the street, Cad Bane stopped laughing, as he stopped firing.
As Cad watched the cloud of dust bellow outward, towards him, he thought, 'Damn. I forget to catch them... Oh well. I am sure they are alive. And I don't feel like getting that dust in my lungs. I will catch them, later. Besides, I could use a drink.'
Cad then holstered his weapons. Next, he used reality device, on the right side of his belt, to teleport to a bar he had already found, in his travels of the multiverse, that he liked.
(_)
Meanwhile, inside the nearby collapsed building, in a small dark hole, Stan realized that he was still alive, and unharmed.
Stan happily thought, 'I am alive, and uninjured.' He then felt his clothing, as he mentally reflected, 'Though, I wonder why my clothing is a little loose on me. But, who cares? Let's see if Lewis is alright.'
Stan pulled out his zippo lighter, with his right hand, from one of his pockets. He then ignited it, with his fingers on the flipped open cover part, to keep from burning said fingers from the heat.
As the lighter dimly illuminated the area, so Stan could see, Stan looked over to his right side, to see a small, slender, young teenage, fair skinned girl, with long red hair, that went down her back, to her shoulder blades, laying to her right side, staring right back at Stan.
Stan asked, “Who are you?” After he did so, he noticed that his voice was off.
The girl questioned, in a feminine tone of voice, “Who are you?”
Stan thought, 'I don't have time for this.' Stan replied, “Stan.”
The girl said, “It is me. Lewis.”
Stan's eyes widened, while stating the obvious, “Lewis, you're a girl.”
Lewis responded, “So are you, Stan.”
Stan looked at her left hand, and she noted it as the same fair skin tone as Lewis' new skin tone. Also, her hand and forearm was much smaller too. She then reached back, behind her head, and used her left hand to pull some of her hair, over her head, to look at. Her hair was the same red color at Lewis' red hair.
Stan cursed, in her new feminine voice, “Damn it. And we spent so much effort trying to prevent this.”
Lewis said, in a comforting tone of voice, “No use crying over spilt milk. Still, look around at this hole. We might be dead, if we had not shrunken in size.”
Stan admitted, “Yea. I think we are about half the size of our male forms.”
Lewis commented, “I guess the change really is painless, and instant. I didn't feel a thing.”
Stan responded, “Neither did I. Still, only electrical shocks are suppose to trigger the genes in the first place for use to change genders. When were we shocked?”
After a few seconds of thinking, they realized, as they looked each other. They then said, in unison, “The unstable gate.”
Lewis stated, “The gate was throwing lightning around its edges, and we went inside it. The electricity inside it must have trigger our genes.”
Stan questioned, “That is very likely. But, why did we take so long for us to change genders?”
Lewis pointed out, “Remember, for us, while the electricity turns on our dormant genes, trigger to actually change gender is sneezing. And this dust caused me to sneeze for the first time since arriving on this reality”
Stan realized, as she replied, “And we had yet to sneeze for an entire month.”
Lewis said, in a casual tone of voice, “Look on the bright side. We are the only two people right now that know that we can turn into girls, and know what we look like as girls.”
Stan countered, “Good point. Still, that is not going to do us much good, if we cannot get out of here. Let's see if we can find a way out.”
Lewis and Stan looked around, as Stan shifted her lighter around, to see around the small area they were in.
Lewis asked, “How much fuel do you have in that lighter?”
Stan answered, “I make sure it is full, once a month.”
Lewis answered, “Good.” She then spot a hole. She stated, “I believe I found a tunnel.” She used her right hand to point at the hole.
Stan moved up front, as she shined her fire at the hole. She saw that it was a tunnel that was just big enough for the two of them, in their female forms, to crawl through, single file.
Stan also saw specks of light at the other end of the tunnel, about ten feet away.
Stan stated, “I think this will lead us the way out. I see light on the other end.”
Lewis replied, “Good. But, if this collapses in on us. We are dead.”
Stan responded, “I know. Also, don't sneeze. This hole will barely fit our new female sizes. If either of us sneezes, we could cause a collapse, due to instantly getting to big for the hole.”
Lewis agreed, “Good point.”
Stan said, “I go first, since I have the lighter. Also, make sure to keep you clothes on.”
Lewis deadpanned, “I will try.”
Stan then started to crawl into the tunnel, with her left hand and knees, while using the lighter in her right hand.
Lewis soon crawled right behind her.
As they crawled through the tunnel, they made sure their loosing clothing, and shoes did not slip off.
Two stressful minutes later, Stan made it to the end of the tunnel. She saw light peeking outside the debris in front of her.
Stan closed her lighter, turning off the fire. Stan set the lighter down, in front of her. Because, her lighter was presently too hot to put into her pocket. She then used both her hands to began to push against the debris, until it gave way, outward, and she broke through to the outside.
Stan then swiftly picked up her lighter, which had cooled off enough to put back into her pants pocket. After she her lighter into a pocket. After which, she quickly crawl into the outside ground.
When Stan was about side, she continued crawling, to move out of the way, as Lewis was right behind her.
When Stan was clear of the hole, she stood up, and turned around. She then went over to help Lewis out of the hole.
Once Lewis had exited the tunnel, Stan helped her sister up.
After both girls stood up, they looked at each other.
Lewis said, “Thanks for the hand up.”
Stan stated, “No problem. I have good news. We are as strong in our female forms, as we are in our male forms.”
Lewis shrugged, as she replied, “That is nice. And it is nice to be alive, and out of that hole.”
Stan agreed, “Amen to that.” Something them occurred to her, as she inquired, “Do you still have the reality device?”
Lewis swiftly checked her pants. And she found the device still in the pants pocket she had it in. She stated, “Yes. I still have it.”
Stan let out a breath, in relief. She replied, “Good.”
As the two girls stood outside, in the light of the bright, sunny day, they got at good look at each other, while noticing that their clothing was several sizes to big.
Lewis commented, “Before we continued. We are going to need to make some minor adjustments to our clothing.”
Stan replied, “I agree. Also, let's get some of this dust off.”
They then used their hands dust off themselves, and their clothing. Next, they tighten their belts to the smallest hole on their belts. Also, they rolled up the bottom of the leggings of their pants. Along, with tightening their shoes laces. While their pants and shoes were still loose on them, their pants would not fall off their waists, and they would not lose their shoes, by just walking.
After the finished, the stood up straight, as the looked at each other.
Lewis then teased, “You know, Stan, as a girl, you are cute.”
Stan smirked, as she commented, “You are cute as well, Lewis.”
Lewis replied, “That is nice.”
Stan looked at herself. Then, she turned to Lewis, as she inquired, “We seem to be fairly slender in our builds. And I would guess we around average height for our current gender, age, and ethnicity. By the way, why are we so much younger than our male forms? We look like we are fourteen, to fourteen and a half.”
Lewis commented, “The male forms of the two of our cousins, that changed when they sneezed, were a few years younger than their female forms.”
Stan recalled the events where they learned those facts about their cousins. She replied, “You're right. It is likely a genetic trait. At least our breasts are not that big. Thanks to genetics. Mom, and dad's female form's breast sizes are average. Nice, but not too big. Also, we are young, so of course our breasts would be smaller.”
Lewis pointed out, “We are still going to have to get bras, and clothes, for our female sides.”
Stan responded, “Yes. But, we will deal with that later. Still, I wonder why our cousins' forms look like their gender counterparts? Yet, our female forms look completely different from our male forms?”
Lewis answered, “I have no clue how. But, I might have an answer to the, why. This is pretty much the reverse of our family's genes. Our father is a moderately tall, black haired, caucasian, with a medium physical build. And he is in good physical shape, for his age. Our mother is a skinny, redheaded woman, with tanned skin. And she is in great physical shape.”
“Black hair, darker skin tones, height, and larger physical builds, are dominate traits. While caucasian skin tones, red hair, and slender physical builds, are recessive traits. It is possible that we have the genes for all those traits, and the gender change ability activated our recessive traits.”
Stan agreed, “That is a workable theory.”
Lewis went onto say, “I know. And the theory also supports another theory I have. There is this guy at a martial arts tournament that Duke took me to watch. The black haired guy won, but it was still a good tournament to watch. Right before the contest. We got to talking, and Duke mentioned that this guy had a twin sister that looked almost like him, including hair style. The only different was that his sister was smaller, had red hair, and had was, of course, a girl.”
“And Duke commented that they had almost the same face. I am guessing baring gender differences, such as adam's apple, the ridge along the eyebrows of the forehead, and the contours of the cheek bones along the jawline.”
“Though, Duke also said that he could not recall both siblings being seen in the same place. We decided that it is likely this person was a gender bender using to identities. Ranma Saotome for his male form, and Ranko Saotome for her female form.”
Stan inquired, with mild surprise in her tone of voice, “Ranko? As in the Ranko from the rock band, Koco?”
Lewis answered, “I am not sure. Duke told me that Ranko was a martial artist, and she was in a band, which was fairly popular.”
Stan responded, “Then, it is that, Ranko. I saw her perform with her girl friends, in the Koco band, at a concert a few weeks ago. It was a good performance of japanese rock and roll by that five, all female band.” She mentally added, 'And Hatsushiba thought she was cute... Well, that figures. I wonder if gender benders are just naturally attracted to each other? It would not be surprising if that was the case.'
Lewis commented, “Interesting. I wouldn't be surprised if we are related to this Ranma, in some way. Or, at the very least, Ranma knows someone who is related to us.”
Stan replied, “Either way is possible.”
Lewis inquired, “On that note, did you meet any other gender benders while in this reality?”
Stan honestly answered, “Yes. That short haired black haired boy you met, that was with me. He turns into a smaller, slightly younger, cascuasin girl, with long blond hair.”
Lewis smiled, while she ran her right hand through her long red hair. She replied, “Now, that sounds like someone we are definitely related too.”
Stan smiled wickedly, as she said, “It gets better. None of his friends know about his little ability. And the girl he is most interested in, is named, Yurika.”
Lewis questioned, “You think that this guy is one of our Yurika's parents?”
Stan answered, “Yes. I didn't tell him, I was from the future, nor about his possible future children. And given that black is a dominate trait, and blond is a recessive trait, along with the fact that Yurika had green hair. I would guess that the black haired guy, is our Yukira's blond mother.”
Lewis said, “Possible. Still, given our father gave birth to one of us, in her female form, we are not ones talk.”
Stan asked, “True. So, how about you? Did you meet any gender benders?”
Lewis answered, “Two of my students come from a family of gender benders. I did not look into their family. But, I had this confirmed from a couple of sources.”
Stan inquired, “Like that Duke fellow?”
Lewis stated, “Yes. He even figured out I was from another reality. He stated he has been outside his reality, as well. But, he's cool. He told me that the family of gender benders change by either lust, or stress.”
Stan said, “Interesting. There are a lot we are going to have to ask our parents about, the next chance we see them.”
Lewis responded, “True. And we will have to get the answers from mom and dad.”
Stan suggested, “But, only after we have a long talk about them keeping secrets from us.”
Lewis stated, “Agreed. Now, I hate myself mentioning this. But given, as I pointed out, that our father gave birth to one of us, in her female form, it is safe to guess that since she has a fully functioning female reproductive system as a female, so do we. So... What do we do about... monthly periods?”
Stan carefully answered, “We will only worry about that... if that happens to us.”
Lewis complimented, “Good approach. Though, if we are going to hide as girls. We are going to have to learn how to pee sitting down as girl. The equipment is a bit different. Also, given that we will need new, smaller clothing for our female forms, we cannot just sneeze back and forth, when we want to pee. Also, we need to be careful when we sneeze, so we don't accidentally change, especially in public, and rip apart our female clothing, if we change into a boys.”
Stan agreed, “All good points. And peeing as a girl should not be too hard. Except for where the urine comes out, various parts between the bladder and outside, the bladder itself and the bladder muscles, are the same, in both genders. So, if you have to pee as a girl, just sit down on the toilet, and focus on the same bladder muscles.”
“Though, be mindful that men have better control of their bladder, due to having a prostate. As girls, we don't have that. So, be aware of how full your bladder is, so you don't accidentally wet yourself as a girl. Ironically, due to not having a prostate, your female form should be able to not have to pee as often, because the bladder is not pressing against the prostate, and aggravating the situation. As such, I guess there are trade offs in everything.”
“Also, Stephanie once mentioned that women made a note to wipe front to back, or dab, in the front, so as to prevent infections down there.”
Lewis responded, “I will keep those things in mind. And now, we are going to have to come up with a plan?”
Stan pointed out, “We just stick to the same plan as before. Only, we now have the added benefit of hiding as girls, whom no one has seen before. First, we change back to guys. Though, we need to make sure we loosen our belts first, and shoes laces, before we change. Then, we go back to our hotels. Get our things, check out, and get a hotel room with twin beds.'
'Though, since we will have to check in as men, we will just have to be careful, coming in and out of the room, as girls. And we spend time working on the reality device. And maybe having a little fun, as well. But, not that type of fun.”
Lewis stated, “I agree. And thanks for the reminder on our belts, shoes, and pants. Also, I don't see a problem with your plan. We can also get a room with a ground floor. That way, we have more ways to exit the building. If need be.”
Stan complimented, “Great idea... So, how do we get ourselves to sneeze. Because, I am not going to sniff that dust.”
Lewis said, “Good question. I guess we will just have to get some black pepper from a nearby restaurant, and then find a private place to change.”
Stan stated, “I think the men's restroom would be the best place. People make react oddly to a girl in the men's restroom. A boy in the girl's restroom could end up arrested. And we do not want that to happen to us.” She mentally added, 'That is likely why I saw Birdy change genders in a men's restroom. Though, I think I will not mention that to Lewis, since he... Or, she, right now, likes Violin.'
Lewis agreed, “Good point. Now, lets go find a restaurant, to change back to guys. Did you see that restaurant we passed by, on our way here.”
Stan responded, “Yes. That would be a good place to change genders.”
Both sisters then circled around the destroyed building, to the sidewalk. They, then turned to their left, as they walk down the sidewalk, and towards a restaurant they noticed, a block away.
(_)
A few minutes later, at a nearby restaurant from the Lowe sisters, and down the street, from the collapsed building, the customers and employees of a diner were going about their business.
The customers either sat in the booths, at the tables, or sitting in the stools, by the counter. With the staff serving the customers, or preparing the food.
Those in the restaurant then watched as two slender, young teenage, fair skin, redheaded girls walk into the diner. They were wearing male clothing, several sizes to big for them, and they were covered in dust and dirt.
They looked around, and saw where they need to head to. The two girls then turned to their left, as they began walking towards their intended destination.
Stan leaned over by one of the empty tables, to her left side, as she used her left hand to grab a couple of packets of black pepper.
As Stan leaned back up, she said, in japanese, “We need these.”
Then, Stan and Lewis walked back hallway of the restaurant, and to the restrooms. Some of the customers noticed the girls went into the men's restroom.
One of those customers muttered, in japanese, 'Stupid foreigners.'
(_)
Inside the men's restroom, Stan locked the door, as Lewis checked the stalls.
A few seconds later, Lewis walked back to Stan, as she said, in english, “All clear.”
Stan replied, in english, “Good.”
The to redheaded the sisters then stood and looked at each.
Lewis commented, “We are going to have to get a shower sometime. We are a mess.”
Stan looked down at herself. She then looked back at Lewis, as she agreed, “You are right about that.” She then teased, “So, are you thinking about checking out the new equipment?”
Lewis turned and looked at herself, and Stan, using the men's restroom mirror, which was above the sink. She turned back to Stan, as she commented, “Maybe. If I was a few years older in this form. Besides the obvious, there is nothing really to look at in this form.”
Stan agreed, “Yea. This bodies are definitely late bloomers.”
Lewis replied, “Perhaps it is for the best.”
Stan replied, “Agreed. And I am glad my jacket is machine washable.”
Lewis said, “Same for my white coat.”
Stan stated, “We will get cleaned up, and change our clothes when we get back to our hotel suites, before we check out of those rooms. We can got to your hotel first.”
Lewis smiled, as she responded, “Thanks. But, we need to stop off by a department store, to get some suitcases.”
Stan held the pepper packets in her left hand, as she said, “Good idea. But, let's change back first. Though, let out your belt and shoe laces first. Also, wait until after you change, to tied your shoes, and unfold your pants leggings.”
Lewis replied, “Okay.”
They let out their belts, to where they usually had the belts loops hooked at, as men. They then loosened their shoes laces, but left their loose.
Less than a minute later, they stood up straight.
Stan then held her left palm, open, while facing upwards, with the pepper packets in them. She offered, “I can go first. Or, you can go first.”
Lewis stated, “I will go first.” Then Lewis grabbed on of the pepper packets.
Stan watch as Lewis opened the pepper packet she had, and sprinkle a little into her hand, and sniff it.
A second later, Stan watched as Lewis sneezed, and instantly changed into a guys.
Stan commented, “Well, we now know that change is instant for us.”
Lewis winched, as he adjusted his clothing, which now fit him. He said, “While I did not feel the change. That stings pepper stings a little.”
Lewis kept his open pepper packet, in the palm of his right hand, as he leaned down, and unfolded his leggings, and tied his shoes.
Stan opened her packet of pepper, sprinkled a little into her hand, and sniffed it. A moment later, she sneezed, and changed into a guy.
As Stan adjusted his clothing as well, he agreed, “Yea. The pepper does hurt a little.”
Stan kept his pepper packet in the palm of his left hand, as he knelt down on his left knee, so he could tie the laces of his right shoe, and unfold his right pants legging. He then swapped knees, and knelt on his right need, so he could do the same to the laces of his left shoe, and his left pants legging.
By then, Lewis was finished with his clothing. He leaned up. Next, he rubbed his nose, as he commented, “Maybe with a little less pepper, it would not sting as much. Though, I think we are going have to find another way to trigger a sneeze.”
Stan had just finished with clothing, as he stood up straight. He responded, “We will work on that. Maybe, with some practice, we can figure a way force a sneeze on mental command.”
Suddenly, Lewis sneezed again, and changed back into a girl.
Lewis commented, “We are definitely going to have to put a little more thought into this.” Lewis this sniffed the last of her pepper, in her packet, to allow her to sneeze again, and change back into a guy. He quickly readjusted his clothing from the unplanned gender change.
Stan agreed, “Yep. And from now on, we got to be very careful about sneezing.”
Lewis replied, “You got that right.”
Stan then rubbed his chin with his free, right hand, and he immediately noticed that his chin was smooth. He then used his right hand to feel the rest of his chin, neck, and jaw line. All of which were smooth.
Stan dropped right hand back to his side, while he turned to look in the mirror. He noticed that he had no beard shadow on his face. Stan looked back at Lewis, and he saw that Lewis did not have a beard shadow on his face, either.
Stan commented, “My face is smooth. I don't feel any facial hair on my face. And neither of us has a beard shadow.”
Lewis felt his face with his free, left hand, as he answered, “Now that you mention it. Yes. My face is smooth. I guess this is due to the gender bending.”
Stan commented, “I agree. This is just another matter to talk to mom and dad about. When we see them again.”
Lewis said, “Agreed. Now, let's get to my hotel suite. It is about a twenty minutes from here, on foot. There is even a department store, in a shopping district, on the way there.”
Stan responded, “Nice. My hotel suite is a little over an hour's walk from here. So, we were closer than each other than we realized.”
Lewis said, “Yes. That seems to be the case.”
They walked to the door, with them dropped their packets of pepper into a nearby trash bin.
Lewis then unlocked, opened door, and held the door open for Stan. Lewis teased, “Lady's first.”
Stan cracked a grin, as he, “We are going to have so much fun teasing each other over this.” He then walked out the door, and the hallway, towards the dining area of the restaurant.
Lewis returned Stan's smile, as he replied, “Yes. We are.” He then exited the men's restroom, as he followed Stan.
The spring system at the top of the door then automatically caused the door to close on its own.
(_)
In the dining area of the restaurant, the customers and staff then watched as two older, much beefier and taller teenage boys, with tanned skin, and shorter black hair, walk out of the men's restroom.
Those in the restaurant also saw the teenage boys were wearing the same clothing the younger teenage girls had wore. And they were just as much covered in dust and dirt, as the redheaded girls had been.
Stan quietly said to Lewis, in english, “Just keep walking. Pay them no mind.”
Lewis did as Stan had suggested.
A few seconds later, the brothers had exited the restaurant.
Lewis then turned on the to his left side, with Stan following him, as they continued walking down the sidewalk, without looking back.
While they made their way down the sidewalk, Lewis said, in english, “It is this way to my hotel. Also, the department store, I saw, is only five minutes from here.”
Stan replied, “Just lead the way.”
Lewis then lead Stan to the department store, to purchase themselves some suitcases. Then, they would head to hotel that Lewis was staying at.
(_)
Around forty five minutes later, after the Lowe brothers stopped by a department store, and bought two suitcases, they soon reached Lewis hotel suite.
After Lewis opened the door to his suite, with his keycard, both brothers walked in, and set their suitcases on the bed.
Lewis then pulled out his wallet, the reality device, and a few other items. He carefully set the items on the table, by his electronic tool kit.
Lewis turned to Stan, as he said, “I will be a few minutes. Make yourself at home.” He then headed into the bathroom, to get a shower, with him gently shutting the door behind himself.
As Lewis went to take a shower, Stan walked around, as he looked at his brother temporary home.
Soon, Stan made his way to the table in the room.
When Stan looked down at the table, he saw by the reality device, and Lewis' belongings. Including, Lewis closed, electronics tool kit.
Stan opened it up, to see what tools were inside of it.
As Stan look at the individual tools, he said to himself, out loud, “Nice selection of tools.”
A minute later, Stan closed the tool kit, and left the tool kit like he had found it.
Stan then turned around, in the direction of the bathroom door. He stood in place, as he patiently waited for Lewis to finish up in his bathroom.
A few minutes later, the door to the bathroom opened up, and Lewis walked out of his bathroom. He was still drying his hair with a towel, while he had another towel rapped around his waist.
Lewis stood where he was, as he turned to face Stan. Lewis saw Stan looking back at him.
Stan complimented, “You have a nice set up.”
Lewis replied, “Thanks. It is surprising what you can get, even on a budget.”
Stan commented, “True. And I think we have all the tools we need to repair their things.”
Lewis responded, “I agree. When we get settled in, I will show you what I have learned so far about this device. But, I first need to get some clothes on.”
Just then, the air conditioner kicked on, causing a gust of cool air to blow on them.
The sudden cooler air hitting the nearly naked Lewis, caused him to sneezing, changing him, into a her. With the change in size, to a small form, causing the towel around her waist to loosen and drop to the floor. Which exposed Lewis' frontal nude body in front of Stan's gaze.
Stan could not help but see that Lewis' body was completely hairless, safe for her red head hair, and red hair on her crotch.
As second later, Stan politely averted his eyes, from his now naked sister.
While Lewis continued toweling down her now, longer hair, she looked down at herself for a few seconds. She then looked back up at Stan, as she said, “Sorry about that. The sneeze just came on very suddenly, and it happened before I could stop it.”
Stan continued looking away from Lewis, as he replied, “I figured that. I guess we need to be even more careful about controlling our sneezes.”
Lewis pointed out, “Look on the bright side, I think my hair expanding made it also half as wet. And at least we know that the hair changes to red, down there, as well.”
Stan commented, “Yea. And we are not crazy as chicks.”
Lewis shrugged, as she replied, “You got that right. And you know what? Now, that you can turn into a girl. I don't have anything currently that you cannot see on yourself, with sneeze.”
Stan commented, “Yes. But, it is still impolite to stare at someone who is naked.”
Lewis said, “True. But, at least I am okay with you seeing me like this, instead of being violent, like a woman in some cheesy romance story.”
Stan continued to look away from his sister, as he chuckled. He then offered, “Yea. That is nice. Do you need any help finding a way to sneeze back?”
Lewis shook her head, as she responded, “No. The cold air against my now sensitive nipples, along with my skin, is actually causing me to feel even more chilly. I feel another sneeze building.”
Stan said, “Good.”
A second later, Lewis sneezed, and changed back into a guy.
Lewis then quickly pulled some clothes from the dresser in the room. Next, he swiftly dressed himself in some fresh clothing. Including, pants and a shirt.
After Lewis put on his belt and laced up his shoes, he stated, “You can look down.”
Stan turned to face his brother, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Lewis stated, “I will be ready to go in a few minutes.”
Stan offered, “Do you need help?”
Lewis said, “No. I should be fine. But, you can check after me. Such as making sure I don't forget something. Like my toothbrush.”
Stan commented, “I will do just that. Though, I don't think we are going to need our razors and shaving cream.”
Lewis stated, “Yes. I guess we don't need such items now.”
Lewis then started packing.
First, Lewis put his dirty clothing in a plastic bag, including his white coat. Next, he opened his suitcase, placing his clothing, including his bag of dirty clothing, into the suitcase. After that, he placed the spare clean clothing, his tools, laptop, toothbrush, toothpaste, and other personal items into the suitcase, and shut it. Finally, he placed his wallet and reality device into separate pockets in his pants.
Lewis turned to Stan, as he said, “I am ready to go.”
Stan looked around, to make sure Lewis did not forget anything. He did not see anything of note, that Lewis would be leaving behind.
Stan looked at Lewis, as he inquired, “Yea. You look like you have everything. After you check out, do you have some spare cash, in yen, that we can use to take a taxi from here, to the hotel I am staying out?”
Lewis responded, “Yes. I have the cash for that. I have even already asked the front desk here. The hotel here will be more than happy to call a decent taxi service for us to use. Also, I should have enough to pay for another taxi to go to the hotel we picked out, but, we will have to use our debit cards to pay for our new room. Do you have a hotel in mind?”
Stan stated, “Yes. On the chance I would have to leave the hotel I was staying at. I have been looking at other hotels online, in the area. And there is a decently priced one near some restaurants, and a few shopping districts. The only reason I did not move there was that it was too far from the high school I chose to go to.”
Lewis replied, “Okay. I look forward to finding out about that hotel. Now, let's get out of here.”
The brothers each carried a suitcase, as they left Lewis' hotel suites. With Stan carrying his empty suitcase, and Lewis carrying his full suitcase.
(_)
Ten minutes later, they had it downstairs, to the front desk, with Lewis checking out of the hotel, and hotel front desk called for a taxi, for the two brothers.
Five minutes afterward, a taxi picked both boys up, in front of the hotel.
It was a fifteen minute ride to the hotel Stan was staying at. When the reached the hotel Stan was staying at, Lewis paid the taxi driver, and then existed the taxi, with their luggage.
The brothers soon made it inside Stan's hotel suite, with their suitcases in their hands.
Ten minutes later, Stan had gotten a shower in his suite, dried off, and changed into some clean clothing, with no sneezing accidents, like Lewis had.
Stan then put his dirty clothing, including his dirty red varsity jacket into a plastic bag, like Lewis had done with his dirty clothing. Next, he packed up the bag with dirty clothing, all his spare clean clothing, his laptop, toothbrush, toothpaste, and other items, into his suitcase. Afterward, he put his wallet into one of his pants pockets.
With Stan packed, Stan and Lewis left the hotel suite, with their luggage.
They soon made it to the front desk, where Stan checked out of his hotel suite. And Stan found that the front desk of the hotel was more than happy to call for taxi, for him and Lewis.
Ten minutes later, the taxi picked the brothers up, in front of the hotel.
It was another hour, an almost sunset, when the brothers finally got to the new hotel, used one of their debit cards to check into a new two bedroom hotel suite, and they were each given a keycard for their assigned suite, on the ground floor.
Their new suites had a sliding glass door, that opened to the outside of the hotel. With the sliding door having a lockable latch.
Both brothers then made it down the interior hallway, to the door to suite. When the reached the door, Stan used his keycard to open the door to their new suite.
As Stan walked in, he flipped on the ceiling light switch, on the interior side of the wall, by the door.
Lewis then followed Stan into the room. He shut the door behind them. With the door automatically locking, right after it fully shut.
After they walked inside their further into their two bed, bedroom, they saw that that the bedroom appeared to be a nice, clean, hotel suite.
As they reached the beds, Stan put his suitcase on the bed by the sliding glass door window, which was being a heavy curtain. Lewis put his suitcase on the bed closer to the inside door.
The brothers looked around their suite, as they checked to make sure the room was clean, and everything worked. This including checking the sheets, chest of drawers, and bathroom.
As they check around their suite, they found, as they expected beforehand, that the bathroom of their suite had a western style toilet. The bathroom also had a bathtub with a shower option. Along with plenty of hand towels, large towels, and toiletries.
After they finished checking their suite, for cleanliness, Lewis walked over to his suitcase, on his bed. He pulled out his laptop to check to make sure that the hotel wireless internet worked, which it did. He then put his laptop back into his suitcase. He then zipped up his suitcase.
Meanwhile, Stan tested the TV on top of the chest of drawers, across from the beds, the TV remote, the refrigerator with an icebox section, microwave for a few seconds by using the timer, and air conditioner, which all worked fine.
Stan then made sure the microwave was off. With the microwave being on top of the refrigerator, just like in their previous suites. And Stan turned off the TV. He set the TV remote on the top of the chest of drawers, to the left of the TV.
Next, he made the alarm clock and lamps, on the nightstand, between to the beds, worked. With Stan leaving the alarm on the clock set to being, off.
After which, Stan walked over to the slide glass door. He made sure lock on the sliding glass door worked, with the sliding glass door being locked, and the heavy curtains in front of it, in the room, being closed.
As Stan was being the sliding glass door, Lewis stood up, and turned to his brother.
Lewis stated, “Well, the wireless internet works.”
Stan turned to Lewis, as he said, “Good. And all I don't see anything wrong with the appliances in this room. They all seem to work find.”
Lewis asked, “That is nice to know. So, want to get some supper?”
Stan responded, “Sure. I saw that there is a restaurant inside the hotel, by the lobby.”
Lewis replied, “Works for me. Though, let's not state our names in public.”
Stan commented, “Yes. And let's a table away from the others. Also, we need to be caref to not directly mention our gender bending, as we talk in public.”
Lewis replied, “Of course. We need to keep our conversation subtle. Now, let's get something to eat.”
Both brothers left their shut suitcases, on their beds, in their hotel suite, as they exited the suite, and into the hallway. They then headed for the hotel restaurant, to get some dinner.
(_)
Ten minutes later, the brothers here inside the hotel restaurant.
The hotel restaurant was a steak restaurant, that catered to U.S. american style food.
The brothers had already found a table to see out, and they places their orders.
The brothers made sure to sit away from anyone else in restaurant, so they would not be easily overheard. They sat at a small, two chair table, by the wall. With them facing each other. The wall was to Lewis' left side, and Stan's right side.
When the waiter came to take their drink orders, they each had a glass of soda. They looked at their menus, as they waited for their drinks.
The waiter soon brought them their drinks, and they ordered their meals.
As they waited for their meals, they talked, in english, to one another, while not stating their names out loud. Nor, were they mentioned their gender bending, in a direct manner.
Lewis said, “Tomorrow, we need to go shopping for clothing for our new forms.”
Stan groaned, as he replied, “I am not really crazy about that.”
Lewis responded, “Neither am I. But, if we are going to hide in plain sight in our other forms, we need to get some clothing that fits those forms.”
Stan commented, “True. Also, we need to be careful to be seen as only siblings of the same type. If we attempt to go as brother and sister, we look so different, people that view us might get the wrong idea.”
Lewis agreed, “Good point.”
Stan wondered, as he asked, “Do you think we will need to get identities for the other forms?”
Lewis answered, “No. Our debit cards can be used in either form. Though, we need to be careful in how we use the IDs we have. Duke found me out that way. He just didn't turn me in.”
Stan commented, “Sounds like a cool guy.”
Lewis replied, “He is. I have an odd question to ask. Do you think these new abilities with effect our romantic tastes?”
Stan said, “Likely. But, there is nothing really we can do about it. Though, keep in mind, dad has never showed any interest in men, in that way.”
Lewis complimented, “That is an excellent point. And I like the way you think.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.”
Lewis inquired, “By the way. Our other forms are so young. And tomorrow is a school day. Do you think we might get in trouble with the local authorities?”
Stan said, “Nah. This hotel, and the shopping districts, we are going too, are tourist areas. We will just say we are running an errand, while are parents are sightseeing.”
Lewis replied, “Okay. That could work.”
Soon after, the waiter served them their meals. They ate their dinners, paid for their meals, left a decent tip for the waiter, and headed back to their hotel suite.
(_)
A little while later, inside their hotel suite, the brothers unpacked.
After unpacking, Lewis pulled out his toolkit and his reality device, and put the items on the table, in the hotel room.
As both brothers sat in chairs, beside each other, at the table, with Stan to Lewis' right side, Lewis stated, “Let me show you what I have learned, so far, form this reality device.”
Stan mentioned, “Okay. Also, if it helps, I seem to remember that Annie stated this device was build by our mother.”
Lewis smiled, as he admitted, “I honestly forgot that. And it does help. If mom built this, then surely we can fix it.”
Stan said, “Those are my thoughts, exactly.”
Lewis then used his tools to carefully take apart the reality device, and show Stan what he had learned about the reality device.
An hour later, Lewis finished his instruction, and put the reality device back together.
They then watched some TV, and finally got ready for bed.
As the brothers got into their beds, the only light on being the two lamps on the nightstand between their beds, by the wall.
Lewis stated, “I really don't look forward to hiding out as girls. I like girls, but I have no interest in being one. Even though I can now do so.”
Stan replied, “Yea. It is going to be a learning experience. But, we can always change back to guys in the privacy of our hotel room.”
By then, both brothers were laying on their beds.
Lewis said, “Tomorrow, we are going to be doing some embarrassing shopping.”
Stan commented, “True. But, we will be doing it together. Good night, brother.”
Lewis replied, “Good night, brother. Glad you are back in my life.”
Stan said, “Same here.”
Each brother reached for the lamp switch, to the lamp their side of the nightstand, and they turned off the lights.
In the dark, the brothers went to sleep on their beds.
(_)
The next morning, on Monday, both brothers woke up around eight AM. They got cleaned up and dress for the day.
The morning had brought many new experiences for the two. After the woke up, they went and bought a black pepper shaker, with black pepper in it.
After that, they returned their hotel room, and used the pepper to turn into girls.
While in their smaller female forms, they wore t-shirts, as they tightened their belts, and shoe laces, while rolling up bottom of their leggings, for their shorter legs.
They then went to breakfast in the hotel restaurant, which served breakfast in the morning.
They decided that if they were going to go out in public, as girls, for an extended amount of time, they might as well test the waters somewhere safe. In this case, they could retreat to the hotel room, if there was a problem, or they lost their nerve.
They did not have any problems, nor did they lose their nerve. And after they finished breakfast, they went back to their hotel suite, to wait for the obvious, that they needed to learn in private. And not in public women's restroom.
Within an hour both of them needed to pee, and both of them figured out how to pee as girls, for the first time. After they figured that minor problem out, they decided to begin their day of shopping.
As they exited the front of the hotel lobby, and to the outside, they found that it was a partly cloudy morning, slightly cool day.
The two sisters then walked to a nearby store that they learned about on the internet, for items they begrudgingly needed.
The store was in a nearby shopping district, only a ten minute walk from their hotel.
Both teenage girls stood in front of the lingerie store, as they looked at the front entrance.
The Lowe sisters saw, from the side on the window, that the lingerie store was already open.
Given how early in the morning it was, there was no one else near the Lowe sisters, on the sidewalk they stood on.
Though, a few cars, minivans, and trucks, drove by, on the street behind the two sisters.
Stan stood to Lewis' left side.
Stan commented, “We might as well take care of buying the intimate stuff first.”
Lewis said, “True. The women in the clothing stores will look at us funny if we are caught trying on clothing, while wearing male underwear, and no bras.”
Stan replied, “Well, that would be interesting.”
Lewis said, “We are going to have to be careful in here, just for that reason.”
Stan agreed, “You're right.”
Lewis stated, “Well, we need to find some bras and panties that fit us, and purchase them. So, let us bite the bullet, get this done as quickly as possible, and move on.”
Stan replied, “I agree. And it is not going to be fun having them do breast measurements and fitting bras for us.”
Stan agreed, “Nope. But, given how young we look, and the small size of our breast, we can play the ignorance card, and say we finally decided to get some bras.”
Stan replied, “True. That will work.”
Lewis added, “And for the love god, don't sneeze while we are these smaller clothes. We would literally destroy them, and be left nude, if we are lucky.”
Stan responded, “You don't need to tell me that twice. You were the one with the sneezing problem yesterday.”
Lewis responded, “Please, don't remind me.”
Stan suggested, “Still, let's get just simple panties and bras.”
Lewis said, “Good idea. Considering we are on a tight budget. I suggest eight pairs of bras, and eight pairs of panties, for each of us.”
Stan agreed, “Yea. That should do us fine, for the moment. Also, we will get another suitcase for our new clothing.”
Lewis stated, “Yes. That is that, also. We will do that last, and put our bags of clothing in it. That will make it easier for us to carry everything.”
Stan mentioned, “Good idea. And I almost forget. Stephanie once mentioned there is a special way to wash a bra.”
Lewis stated, “We will find out, when we get inside. Now, come on.”
Both girls then entered the lingerie store.
It took them forty-five minutes for the Lowe sister get go, get fitted, learn what they needed, purchase their items, and exit the lingerie store.
It was the longest forty-five minutes of their lives.
They found that, as girls, Lewis had slightly bigger breasts, but Stan had a slightly slimmer waistline. Though, a person would need a measuring tape to tell difference in sizes, between the two teenage girls.
When they walked out, they wear both wearing white silk panties, and simple white bras which fit them.
They had their male underwear in a bag, that Stan carried. With the bay also holding their female undergarments in it. Inside the bag were seven bras, and seven panties, for each of them. Counting what they had on, they had thirty-two pieces of female clothing, in all. Also, they bought some bra washing balls, for their bras.
The prices for the clothing was a bit much, but given they were buying just plain items, it was not too expensive. They had no problems using one of their debit cards to pay for the items.
Fortunately, the sisters found the a few women's clothing stores, and a shoe store. Where they needed to go to buy some more clothes and shoes, for their female forms. Were within walking a few hundred meters of the lingerie store, they had just left.
Within an hour, they had purchased some pants, shirts, belts and tennis shoes for their smaller forms. While the clothing they bought were for girls, none of it was frilly, nor was it brightly colored.
When the had finished shopping for clothing, they stopped by another clothing store, to buy one suitcase.
The sisters then put their bags of clothing and other items into suitcase. Lewis then volunteered to case the suitcase by its handle.
They then headed back to the hotel,
As the sisters walked back towards the hotel, they were careful. With them being wary of signs of trouble. Also, they were cautious when the used the crosswalks, to cross the various roads.
Also, during this time, Lewis found, that as she carried their new suitcase, that Stan was correct. That she was as strong in her female form, as in her larger, more muscular male form. She also found they kept their endurance, as well.
When Lewis asked Stan about this, Stan confirmed that she did not feel tired as all. Which meant she had her male body's endurance, as well.
After returning to the hotel, they headed to the hotel laundromat, to wash and dry their clothing. Along, with their new female clothing, they also washed and dried their dirty, male clothing, including their red jacket and white coat.
It was early afternoon by the time they finished washing their clothing, and putting their clothing up, and new suitcase of their suite.
Presently, the sisters wore their female clothing. Which was, for each of them, was a bra, panties, socks, pants, t-shirt, and tennis shoe, which all currently all fit their smaller female forms.
After folding and putting away the rest of their new clothing in the chest of drawers in their suite, they headed to the front doors of the lobby, to do some more entertaining shopping.
As they walked outside, Lewis commented, “We need to get some lunch, in a little while.”
Stan replied, “I agree. And then let's have some fun today.”
Lewis smiled, as she said, “I have an idea. After lunch, let's got to the video store, and see what they have.”
Stan responded, “Okay. Knowing you, you already have the address to the video store you have in mind.”
Lewis gave Stan a girlish grin, as she answered, “You are correct, sister. The one I have in mind is only about fifteen minutes by foot. Their is also a decent Italian restaurant on the way.”
Stan returned Lewis' girlish smile, with her own, as she replied, “I can go for some Italian.”
Lewis said, “I thought that would be the case.”
Stan requested, “Now, lead the way, sis.”
Lewis turned and started walking towards the sidewalk, in front of the hotel parking lot. Stan follow Lewis, as they headed a nearby Italian restaurant, and then a nearby video store.
(_)
Forty minutes later, the Lowe sisters had finished their good Italian style lunches. And presently, the two sisters were inside the video store.
Currently, they were looking at the sci-fi section of the video store.
They looked, together, at the shelves of blu-ray movies, tv series, and animations, on organization by titles, in boxsets.
One of the title's on a boxset caught Lewis' eye. As Lewis picked up the boxset, she said, “Stan, look at this.”
Stan was standing beside Lewis, to Lewis' left side. Stan turned to her right side to see what her sister had in her hand.
Stan saw that it was the blu-ray boxset of the Farscape series.
Stan inquired, “Isn't that the series that Violin showed us?”
Lewis said, “Yes. And this is the one that is about the reality which Scorpius is from. If we watch it, we might be able to learn something about Scorpius. Still, now that I think about it, do you think Violin knew we were being hunted by Scorpius? If that is the case, I don't mind losing that bet we have.”
Stan thought, 'Even if she knew the girls that are after us, it is doubtful she knows about Scorpius. She was too nice to be like the others.' She answered, “I doubt it. Even I would admit that she is too nice to be like the reality traveling teenage girls that we have met in this crazy journey.”
Lewis questioned, “You are right about that. By the way, does your laptop play blu-rays discs?”
Stan replied, “Yes. Does yours?”
Lewis answered, “Yes. I also seem to remember there was a mini-series blu-ray that was not part of the boxset series. Violin, pulled out both boxes for us.”
Stan responded, “You are right. Let's look for it. It has to be nearby.”
Lewis and Stan looked around the nearby shelves.
A few seconds later, Stan saw the blu-ray box of Peacekeeper Wars. She picked up the box, as she stated, “Here is it.”
Lewis complimented, “Good work.” She then looked at the boxset in her hands, as she commented, “Also, this boxset has an english dialogue option.”
Stan looked at her blu-ray box, as she suggested, “So, does this one. Let's buy these, and go back to the hotel to watch them.”
Lewis looked at the back of the Farscape boxset, as she responded, “I agree. Still, the boxset states that this is an eighty-eight episode series. With that total run time being sixty-eight hours, and six minutes.”
Lewis looked up at Stan, as she continued, “That means that each episode is around forty-six minutes and twenty-five seconds long. And I am sure the mini-series is also few hours long, as well.”
Stan looked at the back of Peacekeeper Wars mini-series box. The run time stated that the mini-series was a hundred and eighty-two minutes later.
Stan turned to Lewis, as she said, “Actually, this mini-series is just over three hours long.”
Lewis commented, “Well, it looks like we are going be watching this series for a while.”
Stan shrugged, as she replied, “I got nothing better to do.”
Lewis said, “Neither do I. We will work on the reality device, afterward.”
Stan stated, “Yes. Learning about our professor is more important.”
Lewis agreed, “You got that right.”
The two sisters then heading for the cashier counter, to purchase their video selections.
Five minutes later, they bought the two blu-ray boxes, and they were heading back to the hotel.
Twenty later, they made it back to the hotel, and into their hotel suite.
As they entered their hotel suite, Stan was carrying the blu-ray boxsets in a plastic bag.
Meanwhile, Lewis walked over to her personal suitcase. She then pulled out her laptop, so they could watch and listen to the first blu-ray disc.
Lewis set her laptop on her bed. She sat on her bed, in front of her laptop, as she opened it up, and turned it on.
While Lewis loaded her OS and account, on her laptop, Stan pulled out the boxsets in the bag she was holding, and she pulled off the clear, plastic wrapping, that sealed the boxsets.
A few minutes later, They sat on Lewis' bed, side by side, with Lewis' laptop right in front of them, as they the disc load on the computer, into the disc tray.
As the laptop software program loaded the video itself, Stan commented, “One nice thing about being this small again is that we can sit like this, on a single bed, while still having plenty of room for our legs to be on the bed.”
Lewis agreed, “Yes. And I am looking forward to sleeping as a girl tonight, because, due to our smaller size, we don't have to worry about rolling off our beds, so much.”
Stan inquired, “Yea. I wonder if we will dream differently as female?”
Lewis said, “That would be interesting to find out.”
Lewis then noticed that the disc menu had popped up on the screen on her laptop. As she used the track-pad, on her laptop, to check that the disc was set to english dialogue, which it was. She then went back to the main menus, and she selected the disc, and she selected the, play all, selection.
Lewis commented, “If I remember correctly, when we were at Violin's home, you fell asleep half way through the first episode. So, we might as well start from the beginning of this series.”
Stan stated, “You are right, sister. I did. But, I were so tired. Though, until I nodded off, I found the first episode to be an interesting episode.”
Lewis said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't feel bad about it. I feel asleep half way through the second episode. Now, let's enjoy the show.”
The sisters then began the Farscape series from the beginning.
By episode four, Throne for a Loss, they were clearly enjoying the series.
Stan stated, “This series is twisted.”
Lewis agreed, “No kidding.”
The sisters continued watching the series, in order. As they changed out the discs as needed.
The only breaks the sisters took were for food, drink, using the bathroom, sleep, showers.
And when it came to shows. Both sisters found that taking a shower was interesting, given they had different sensitive parts than their male forms had.
It was just passed twelve midnight, when they finished watching episode fourteen, Jeremiah Crichton.
They decided to call it a night, get ready for bed, and get some sleep.
The next morning, after they woke up, they both found that they had slept well, and normally as girls. Which made them both happy.
They then, got cleaned up, took their showers, changed clothing, and got some breakfast at the hotel restaurant, they returned to their hotel suite to continue watching the Farscape series, with episode episode fifteen, Durka Returns, which introduced Chiana.
Lewis commented, “So, that is how Chiana ended up on Moya.”
Stan said, “This is not a bad origins story.”
A few hours later, they reached episode nineteen, Nerve, which introduced Scorpius, in all his original glory and terror.
Stan inquired, “That is Scorpius? I mean that suit is a dead giveaway. Though, that is the only thing recognizable about the professor from then and now.”
Lewis stated, “I think you are right. And what a change. Scorpius did not just have a gender change, but she had the full works, as well.”
Stan commented, “I know. I thought our gender change, with the hair, size, and skin tones, differences were radical. Scorpius' change went so much further.”
Lewis suggested, “I know. Let's continue watching.”
Stan replied, “Yes. Let's do that.”
They continued watching the episode, and it soon showed John in the Aurora chair, with Scorpius introducing himself.
Lewis commented, “I have heard of mind screwing. But, the professor takes it to a whole new literal level.”
Stan said, “I am starting to understand why everyone we met, that knows about Scorpius, is careful with her. Or, in this case, in the series, careful with him.”
They continued watching the series, until late that night, when the stopped after finishing episode thirty-five, Look At the Princess, Part Three.
On the third day of the marathon, the sisters just powered on through the series. Watching from episode thirty-six, Beware of Dog, to episode sixty-two, Fractures.
Both sisters started giggling sometimes, as they continued watching the Farscape.
By the fourth day, they were starting to laugh more openly, as they enjoyed the series.
That morning, as they were watching episode sixty-three, I-Yensch, You-Yensch, Stan commented, “This series can be so sad. But, I find it so funny as well. I know I should not be laughing. But, I cannot help myself.”
Lewis agreed, “I know. But, it is fun to literally giggle like a school girl.”
Stan replied, “You got that right.”
The sisters then continued giggling, and sometimes laughing, as they continued watching the Farscape series.
That night, they quit watching the series on the final episode of the boxset, episode eight-eight, Bad Timing, which ended on a wicked cliffhanger.
By the fifth morning, the sisters were acting so loopy they didn't even both to shower, or change clothing. They even skipped breakfast, because they really wanted to see how the, Bad Timing, cliffhanger was resolve, and how the series ended as a whole, by watching the Farscape mini-series finale, Peacekeeper Wars.
Stan and Lewis giggled, along with sometimes out right laughing, as they watched the three hour mini-series.
Just after the mini-series finale ended, Lewis turned to Stan. Lewis quieted her laughter enough to say, “Well, we now know what all the fuss was about. And what a fuss it is.” She then went back to giggling.
Stan looked over at Lewis, as she stopped herself from giggling, long enough to state, “I understand now why the crew of Moya refused to help us. I understand now, how dangerous Scorpius already was, even before he became a clearly healthier she. Along with becoming leader of the Peacekeepers. I can now forgive the crew of Moya for turning us down, when we asked for their help against Scorpius.”
Lewis replied, “Yes. I mean Scorpius really knows how to think several steps ahead. I am surprised we have escaped from her forces so often.”
Stan stilled giggled a little, as she responded, with a bit of fear in her voice, “Unless she wanted us to escape.”
Lewis giggled a little, as she asked, with a touch of concern in her tone of voice, “But why? What would she have to gain by letting us roam free?”
By then, due to the seriousness of this conversation, they had calmed down, and stopped giggling.
Stan commented, “I have no clue. But, damn that Scorpius went from one dangerous dude, with health problems, to an even more dangerously cunning, healthier woman. The improved health has only made the professor more focused and dangerous.”
Lewis agreed, “No argument there, sis. But, how did he become a she? Except her mentioning someone named, Chang, whom helped her become not only a woman, but going from a hybrid, to a pure Sebacean woman. We know nothing of the events surrounding Scorpius' gender change.”
Stan replied, “True. Though, while we have no clue on the details. I am sure, like everything else, our parents, or Annie, have the answers.”
Lewis pointed out, “The problem will be getting the answers out of them. Still... You know, this series gives me idea for inventions. John's wormhole weapon, at the end of the series, was just so awesome. Though, think the other John's wormhole cannon, in season three, using part of the star to turn a wormhole into a big energy cannon, was more controllable. I think, with help, we could actually create working versions of those weapons.”
Stan conceded, “Probably. But, it would not be wise to do so, for a number of reasons. Besides, such weapons would be used to destroy cities, or even planets. Killing possibly countless numbers of kill people. Also, we do not have the material, nor resources, to create such weapons.”
Lewis pouted, “You're right.”
Stan sighed. She stated in a melancholy tone of voice, “I know You are not the only one that got a few ideas from that series that cannot be done with what we have.”
Lewis smiled wickedly, as she commented, “You know. It is true. Crackers Don't Matter. I get that title, and that joke, now.” She then started giggling, again.
Stan also giggled at her sister's joke.
Lewis then quieted herself down, she stated, “But, there is one thing we can still do. We can use our super-genius to hack this planet's entire internet system.”
Stan immediately stopped giggling, as she realized that Lewis was serious about her suggestion. Stan stated, in a direct tone of voice, “Are you crazy?” She said, in a quieter tone of voice, “Are we crazy?” She then said to herself, in barely a whisper, “Am I going crazy? But, like John, I am still sane enough to realize I am going crazy.”
Lewis only heard the first question, as she responded, “Oh, come on. Think about it. Our mom did crazy things like this, long before she was our age. So, why not us? I think she would be proud of us, if we did what I am suggesting.”
Stan smirked, as she agreed, “Yea. She did...” Stan immediately caught herself, in an emotion manner, as she continued, “But, whoa. Hold it... We are not thinking right... We have to change back, right now.”
Lewis gave Stan a wild, though warm grin, as she countered, “Why? I am having so much fun.”
Stan frowned, which made her look like she was pouting, as she said, “We are having too much fun. We don't usually act like this. We need to change back and figure out why we are acting like this. Listen, Lewis. If I am wrong. We can just change back into girls, and continue to have fun.”
Lewis shrugged, as she replied, “All right.”
Stan said, “We need to take our off clothes, and put on our male clothing. And remember to leave you belt and shoes laces for the correct size increase, in the gender change.”
Lewis responded, in a casual, humorous tone of voice, “Whatever you say.”
Both girls then got off Lewis' bed, and took off their clothing and shoes.
After they took off their clothes, and shoes, they were two naked girls, standing next to each other.
Lewis looked over at her sister, as she commented, “It is too bad that we are still so underdeveloped. Either of us can tell that in a few years, we are both going to grow up to be hot, sexy women, that most of those girls after us would envy.”
Stan stated, in a serious tone of voice, “Mores the pity. Now, let's get dressed.”
A few minutes later, they were dress in their male clothing, with their clothing loose. Their belts were in their proper notches for their male forms. They also had on their male tennis shoes, with their tied laces loose enough for the increase in size, the gender change.
Stan then got their pepper shaker, and she used a small bit of the black pepper to sneeze, and change back into a guy. With his larger male form filling out his clothing, and shoes, to where they were conformable, but not tight.
A few seconds after changing, Stan let out a sigh of relief. He then handed the pepper shaker to Lewis.
Lewis took the pepper shaker, using a little pinch of pepper to change back into a guy. He filled out his clothing, and shoes, as well, without a problem. He then set the black pepper shaker on the nightstand, between their beds.
A few seconds later, Lewis began to recalled the way he had acted, as a she, over the past few days. He looked at Stan with wide eyes.
Stan looked at Lewis as well. Stan saw Lewis' eyes, as he nodded once. Stan said, “Yes. You understand, now.”
Lewis stated, with shock, and surprise, “Oh lord. I don't believe I was acting that way. I mean, I was completely crazy. And loving every minute of it.”
Stan commented, in a comforting tone manner, “You were not alone. I have heard of addictive personalities. But, I have never heard of a personality that is addictive.”
Lewis said, “Yea. I guess that personality is like being on a constant drug high that just kept getting better as time went on. I was just enjoyed being happy, and I kept being more happier the longer I stayed as a girl.”
Stan agreed, “That is a good way to put it. I was almost as bad off as you were. And it is clear the effects were cumulative. The more time we spend as girls, without changing back into guys, the more crazier we get. A few minutes ago, we were treading on full blown mad genius insanity. Lord help the world if I had not realized what was happening, in time to stop us.”
Lewis questioned, “I know, Stan. You may have saved this world, if not this reality, and no one but us will ever know it. Though, the question still remains. Why were we acting that way? Gender bending by itself cannot cause that insanity. I remember when dad was sick, as a woman, pretending to be our aunt. Even then, dad never acted that way.”
Stan replied, “You're right. There has to be something else.”
A few seconds later, Lewis realized, as he commented, “Mom.”
Stan realized what Lewis meant, as he agreed, “Yea. It has to be from mom.”
Lewis stated, “We did not just get our physical recessive genes turned on with the change. We also got mom's crazy making genes turned on, as well.”
Stan pointed out, “Yes. We basically became crazy chicks, like mom can be.”
Lewis commented, “I think three days straight is safe. Then, we start acting screwy.”
Stan replied, “That is what I figure, as well.”
Lewis said, “The sad part is that it was so damn fun being that way. I now understand why those crazy chicks after us, act the way they do. Their behavior is clearly hereditary.”
Stan commented, “The problem is we are still hiding out a girls. So, we are still going to have to be careful. As long as we change back every few days, we should be fine.”
Lewis pointed out, “That is if the change resets the craziness. If not, we are in real trouble. And we might as well surrender to Scorpius, because we are to damn dangerous to be let loose on the multiverse, without supervision.”
Stan stated, “If that is the case, when we get the reality device working, we look for our parents to surrender too. Scorpius will be a second choice.”
Lewis replied, “Okay.”
Stan commented, “Though, that being said. I don't think this is the case. I think the gender change rests the craziness.” He then walked over and picked up the pepper shaker, from the nightstand. He said, “Still, there is only one way to find out.”
Lewis responded, “You still had some control over yourself, so you should be the one to change. And test out the situation.”
Stan looked at the pepper shaker in his right hand, as he replied, “I agree.”
Stan used a pinch pepper to sneeze back to a girl. Stan did not adjust her clothing. Instead, she turned around, and she just sat down, on her bed, with her legs hanging off her bed. Though, the bed was low enough for the soles of her shoes to be flat on the carpeted floor.
Stan set the pepper shaker on the nightstand. She then looked at the wall in front of her, as she mentally reflected on her current state of mind.
Meanwhile, Lewis walked over, and sat beside Stan, on the edge of the bed, to Stan's left side.
Both brother and sister than sat down beside each other, on Stan's bed. Lewis turned to Stan, as he inquired, “How do you feel?”
Stan turned to Lewis, as she answered, “I feel fine. Not sad. Not happy. Just calm.”
Lewis replied, “Good. Let's see if it lasts.”
As the siblings silently sat beside each other, they occasionally looked at the digital alarm clock on the nightstand.
Five minutes later, Lewis asked, “Feeling giddy?”
Stan answered, “No. I am still calm.”
Lewis replied, “Good. Now, it is my turned.” He got up, went over to the pepper shaker, got some pepper, and used to to sneeze into a girl. She then went and sat back down beside her sister, where she had been previously sitting as a boy.
They were silent, as they sat beside each other for another five minutes.
Stan looked at the clock, and after seeing that it had been five minutes after Lewis changed, she turned to Lewis. She calmly asked, “How are you doing?”
Lewis looked over at her sister, as she answered, “I feel very calm. Like you were said you were. You still calm.”
Stan responded, “Yea. It looks like we have solved our problem. We will just change into guys every few days, and we should be fine.”
Lewis said, “That is a relief. And even sane, in either gender, I do sincerely find it funny that it took watching Farscape to drive us crazy.”
Stan commented, “I think Farscape eventually drives everyone crazy. Both those within the Farscape reality, and those in other realities, whom learn about it. Such as us. Characters, cast, crew, viewers. None are immune to Farscape's insanity... Besides, we would have not likely realized how crazy we had become, if we had not talked about the crazy ideas the Farscape series had.”
Lewis agreed, “True. We got lucky. We could have gotten into real legal trouble if we went this crazy in public.”
Stan stated, “I realize that. But, that did not happen. And we will be careful, so we will be fine. Also, now we know about our professor. We are one step closer to getting out of this mess.”
Lewis replied, “You that got right.”
Stan added, “Though, I find it mildly amusing, and slightly annoying, that we can become the cliché, crazy redheaded, genius chicks.”
Lewis conceded, “Yea. I can see where you are coming from on that. Though, I would not call our mother, cliché.”
Stan casually remarked, “Good point. And like our mother, we are not violent.”
Lewis said, “True. I felt not desire to be violent, nor angry, while I was crazy. I was very happy, and I felt like having some very questionable fun.”
Stan responded, “I literally felt the same way. So, our actions would have been good natured. If insane. Like mom can be. Also, I knew mom could be happy. I just had no idea that she could be that happy.”
“Still, it is good we got our sanity back in both genders, because we need to do laundry for our female clothing. It has been five days, and I don't want to reach a point where we wash our clothing, when we run out run out of clothes.”
“We might have to make a quick escape, and not get a chance to clean our clothes, for a while.”
Lewis stated, “I can see your point.”
Stan commented, “I am glad we were not crazy when we went to the laundromat, in this hotel. I would have hate to see the type of damage we could have done to those washers, in the state we had been in.”
Lewis commented, “I know. Being sane super-geniuses is one thing. But, being crazy super-geniuses is quite another.”
Stan said, “Yep...” She then continued, in a worried tone of voice, “Oh no.”
Lewis inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “What is it?”
Stan stated, “I just remembered what our professor said to us, when she first captured us. Eventually, we will lock in our female forms.”
Lewis said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Yea... I remember that. But, she said that won't happen until our male forms are old. That is decades from now. And we know that should that happen, at least we will be happy.”
Stan agreed, “True. And in the meantime, maybe we can find medication to help us in our female forms.”
Lewis mentioned, “That is not a bad idea. And now, that I think about it. Sleep calmed us down a bit. When we woke up, we got crazier as the day went on. But, we were not as crazy when we woke up, as we were when we went to bed.”
Stan said, “True. But, I also remember that sleep slowly lost that sanity effect over the course of the days. With sleep, staving off insanity, becoming less effective, and less lasting, with each passing day.”
Lewis responded, “But at least, we have a starting point. If we needed to seek medical help on it.”
Stan said, “Yes. We do... Still, let's focus on the matter at hand. We need to change in the female clothing we had on, a few minutes ago. Then, we need to collect our female clothing, and go to the hotel laundromat to wash and dry them.”
Lewis said, “And afterward, we can get something to eat from the hotel restaurant.”
Stan smiles, as she replied, “My thoughts, exactly.”
Both sisters stood up from Stan's bed. They the put on the female clothing, and shoes, they had on fifteen minutes ago. Next, they collected their dirty female clothing into a plastic bag. After which, they headed out their hotel out of their suite, towards the hotel laundromat, to clean and dry their female clothing.
As they walked down the hallway, Lewis was carrying the plastic bag with her right hand, as she requested, “Stan, did you remember those plastic bra washing balls for our bras? To washing them safely.”
Stan answered, “Yes. I put all five of them in the bag, with our clothes.”
Lewis used her left hand to feel the plastic bag, as she said, “I feel them. And you know what. I can see why some get tired wearing their bras.
Stan replied, “Yes. I can also see why some women get annoyed with wearing a bra. They can chafe against the skin.”
Lewis stated, “True. I believe, if we want too. I don't think anyone will say anything to us about not wearing bras, as long as we don't go out into public.”
Stan said, “You are likely right about that.”
Lewis offered, “Since you mentioned chafing. Do you need me to help adjust you bras, like the lingerie clerk showed us how to do?”
Stan replied, “Nah. I was able to adjust mine on the day we bought them. I was just making a general comment about how bras can chafe.”
Lewis replied, “Okay. Now, let's get these clothes washed.”
The two sisters then continued walking down the hallway, towards the hotel laundromat.
Around an hour and a half later, when the Lowe sisters were finished their cleaning and drying their clothing. They put their clothing back up, in their suite. Then, they went to get something to eat.
(_)
The next day, in the early afternoon, the sisters went back to trying to fix the reality device. As they did so, they decided to try some of the local food they had to come across.
They brought home samples of different dishes to snack on, while they were not working on the reality device.
They were careful to keep their drinks and snacks away from the table, in their suite. To avoid any accidents towards the exposed circuitry of the parts of the reality device, which had been open, in hopes of being repaired.
Also, both Stan and Lewis were still in their female forms.
At the moment, Lewis was sitting in a chair, by the table. She had an electrical soldering iron in her right hand hand, and a piece of string solder in her left hand.
Stan sat on the other side of the table, in each of her hands, she had one of the two ends of a voltage meter.
After some talking, Lewis and Stan had come to the conclusion that some of the circuits on the board has micro cracks develop on them. Breaking the circuits.
So, given Lewis had more experience with soldering than Stan. They both agreed, that she was the one to do this job.
As such, Lewis used her soldering iron and solder to delicately bridge one circuit, after another With Stan checking after her, with the voltage meter.
And the voltage meter showed that they were seeing results with this approach.
Lewis carefully soldered part of the board, bridging an electrical circuit. She then backed away, to let the solder cool.
A minute later, Stan tested the repair, and found that it had electricity. She stated, “Good news. That section of the board now has power.”
Lewis stated, “Great. I think the device is almost fixed. We will work on it, later. For right now, we will put things up, and take a break.”
Lewis turned off the soldering iron, and placed it, with the tip being held outward, so it would not cause a fire, while it cooled down. She also placed her solder piece on the table as well. Next, Lewis closed the reality device covering, and put it to the side of the table.
Stan wrapped up the wires of the voltage meter in her hand, and turned it off, as she asked, “Okay. I believe we will probably had this thing fixed within a few days.”
Lewis asked, “I agree. So, when we do leave here. Do you want to go as boys? Or, as girls?”
Stan answered, “Even though we are recognizable as boys, I would prefer to go as boys, for a number of reasons. As girls, we are smaller, younger, and cuter. As boys, we are bigger, taller, more muscular, and as such, people will be more likely to leave us alone.”
Lewis offered, “Agreed. So, do you want to see what treat I got for us today, when we went to the grocery store, for a few items?”
Stan shrugged, as she replied, “Sure. Surprise me.”
Lewis got up, and walked over to the chest of drawers, across from the beds. On top of the chest sat a bag beside the TV. She reached into a bag, and she pulled out a small, styrofoam box, and two plastic spoons.
Lewis then walked back over to the table, sat down, and handed Stan a plastic spoon.
As Stan gently took the plastic spoon from Lewis' hand, she asked, “So, what is this? Your selections tend be both interesting and tasty.”
Lewis answered, “I got us some nattou.” She then opened the box lid to reveal that there were beans on top of rice.
Stan looked at the food, as she replied, “I have never heard of it.”
Lewis explained, “It is a japanese dish. It is fermented soybeans.”
Stan stated, “Sounds odd. But, then again, we are in a foreign land, in so many ways.”
Lewis replied, “Those are my thoughts, as well. So, let's try it.”
Lewis then dipped her spoon into the nattou and rice. She then took a bite. Stan leaned over and followed suit.
A few minutes later, they had finished the small box. Stan toss his spoon into the empty box. Lewis did also, as she commented, “Not bad. But, not that great, either.”
Stan stated, “I guess it is an acquired taste. I could eat it. But, it would not be my first choice.”
Lewis said, “It looks like I busted this time.”
Stan shrugged, “You cannot want them all. Still, it was not that bad.”
Stan then got up and went to the small refrigerator and got out two soda. She walked back over, and handed one to Lewis, which Lewis took.
Stan then opened the other can, and took a drink of soda, to wash the taste from her mouth. While she sat back in her chair, she suggested, “Let's watch some TV.” She then set her can of soda on the table.
Lewis opened her soda, took a swallow. She then replied, “Okay.” She then set her can of soda on the table. Next, she reached for the TV remote on the table, and turned on the TV.
The sisters then turned their chairs to face the TV, as they just sat back and relaxed.
After a few minuted of watching TV, Stan and Lewis started to feel different.
Lewis asked, “Stan, do you feel, off?”
Stan answered, “Now, that you mentioned it. Yes. You?”
Lewis replied, “Yea... Oh no... What if we are allergic to nattou. I really don't want to call an ambulance, for so many reasons.”
Stan pointed out, “The symptoms for allergic food reaction are digestive problems, rashes on the skin, swollen throat, and problems breathing. I don't have any of those signs. Do you?”
Lewis answered, “Fortunately, no.”
Stan stated, “Glad to hear it. Still, I really don't feel good.”
Lewis replied, “Neither do I. And it is getting worse. I feel kinda hot.”
Stan commented, “I am glad that is not my imagination, because I feel kind of hot, as well.”
Lewis suggested, “Let's get to bed.”
Stan agreed, “Good idea.
Lewis used the remote to turn off the TV. She then stumbled over to top of her bed, as Stan did the same towards her bed.
Both of them were moaning, as Stan commented, “We sound like Stephanie, when I am making love to her. But, I sure as hell don't feel like I am enjoying this.”
Lewis said, “Me neither. Something else is happening.”
Stan suggested, “Do you want to change us to change into guys?”
Lewis stated, “Bad idea. Doing so could make things worse. Best to let it run its course as girls?”
Stan agreed, “Good point.”
Lewis commented, “My clothes are getting tighter.”
Stan realized, as she commented, “Now, we are getting bigger. Strip down, before we rip our clothes.”
Both girls stripped down to nothing, as they continued moaning.
A few seconds later, the heat and off sensations stop for both sisters.
Stan and Lewis leaned up from their beds and looked at each other.
Each sister saw that the other nude sister was now several inches taller. They had large breasts, more shapely butts, along with slender physical builds. Their red hair was also slightly longer, to match their taller physical frames.
Both sisters then looked down at themselves, for a few moments.
As they look back up at each other, Stan stated, “We are smoking hot, sister.”
Lewis smiled wickedly, as she said, “I know. If I wasn't stuck in here with you, I would be tempted to go to town on myself, with my own hands.”
Stan conceded, “I admit. The thought crossed my mind, as well. But, I prefer to do so on a special occasional.”
Lewis dropped her smile, as she responded, “I agree. Which is why I haven't done anything with my female form, since I started to change into a girl.”
Stan stated, “I think it is academic that eating the nattou caused us to change.”
Lewis said, “I guess that the chemicals in fermented soybeans aged our female forms to be equal to our male forms.”
Stan asked, “Is it permanent?”
Lewis answered, “I doubt it. The question is how long is it going to take for it to wear off. And how long will it take for us to shrink back to our original, female body sizes.”
Stan commented, “I hate to saying this. And as much as I am enjoying the show from you, as you are of me, we need to get dressed. And since our girl clothes are obviously too small for us, we need to change into our male clothing.”
Lewis replied, “I agree.”
Both of them got up and changed into this male clothing. They adjusted their belts for their new waist size. Which was much slimmer than their waistlines as male, but still slightly bigger than their waistlines as younger teenage girls.
After they finished dressed, with them staying bare foot, they looked each other.
Lewis said, “Even in that clothing. You still look hot.”
Stan stated, “Yea. You are still hot, as well, under that clothing. Now, to test something else.” She loosened her belt, and walked over and got the pepper shake. She then used some pepper to change back into a teenage boy.
Stan looked at the mirror, by the TV. He noticed that he looked the same as before. He turned to Lewis, as he stated, “Well, at least it doesn't effect our male forms.”
Lewis responded, “Yes. Hand the pepper shaker over here.”
Stan walked over, and he handed the shaker over to Lewis.
Lewis stood up, and loosened her belt. She then used the pepper to sneeze and change into a guy. He then sneezed again, and noted that as a girl, she was still in her sexy female form.
Lewis set the pepper shaker by the chest of drawers, which was near. She then tightened her belt, to keep her pants up. After which, she looked over at Stan, as she said, “Well, it looks like the effect have to wear off on their own.” She then sat back down on her bed, and set the shaker on the nightstand.
Stan stated, “I guess that is the way it is.” Stan then noticed something. He walked over to Lewis and sniffed her.
Lewis asked, “What is it?”
Stan frowned, as he answered, “You smell good. And I don't mean normal good. I mean good in a very bad way.” He then walked over to the chest of drawers. He picked up the shaker, got some pepper form it, and set the shaker back down on the nightstand. He then used the pepper to change back into a girl, whom was just as sexy as Lewis currently was.
Stan then tightened her belt, as sat across from her sister, on her own bed.
Lewis asked, “What are you talking about?”
Stan explained, “In these sexy female forms, we are producing pheromones. A lot of pheromones.”
Lewis commented, “I don't feel any different towards you.”
Stan responded, “Same here, until I changed into a guy. Then, you smelled good to me. And your smell made me start to feel that way towards you.”
Lewis frowned, as she replied, “That is so wrong.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. That is why I turned back into a girl. It seems that our pheromones don't effect each other, when we are both girls.”
Lewis realized, as she stated, “But, they will likely effect others.”
Stan said, “Yes. Mostly men, but probably a few women, as well.”
Lewis stated, “Meaning we are stuck in here, together, until these effects wears off.”
Stan suggested, “Exactly. But then... Now, that I think about it. We could just change back to guys, together.”
Lewis countered, “Nope. It is better if we stay as girls. It will likely wear off more quickly in our female forms, since it has only effected our female forms.”
Stan admitted, “That is a good point.”
They got up from their bed, and went of to sit down in the chairs, by the table.
Lewis looked over at her sister, as she commented, “Stuck in a hotel room with a hot woman, and it had to be my sister.”
Stan giggled. She then responded, “I feel the same way. But, there is not much we can do about it, right now. Let's go back to watching TV.”
Lewis replied, “Good idea.” Lewis grabbed the remote, and turned on the TV.
The sisters then turned their chairs around. Lewis retrieved the remote, and turned on the TV. With the sisters watched something entertaining on TV, to kill some time.
(_)
Four hours later, as the sisters sat in their chairs, Stan felt different. She stated, “I feel something different.”
Lewis looked at the alarm clock. She then turned back to Stan. She commented, “Same here. Not bad, nor debilitating, like four hours ago, when we grew. I just feel, off.”
Suddenly, Stan noticed that she was shrinking. A second after Stan started shrinking, Lewis did too.
Several seconds later, they stopped shrinking, and both of them noted that they were both now their original, small female forms.
Lewis commented, “Well, that is an interesting. Slightly embarrassing. Though, not painful, experience.”
Stan mentioned, “Yes. But, look on the bright side, we now have three forms to use. At least, until we grow up a bit in our female forms.”
Lewis nodded once, as she replied, “True. If we need to pose as a date for the other, we can. That is if the other sibling, and those around her, can control themselves.”
Stan stated, “Good idea. And I can control myself. I just didn't like feeling that way towards my sibling.”
Lewis shrugged, as she replied, “That is understandable.”
Stan suggested, “So, want to go get some supper at the hotel restaurant.”
Lewis said, “Sure. Then, we will work on the reality device fixing the reality device.”
Stan replied, “No problem. And we need to change our clothes, before we let.”
Lewis agreed, “Yea. We need to at least put on our bras.”
Five minutes later, They had put on their female clothing and female tennis shoes on. Also, Lewis had put the reality device back together where she could take the device with them, with Lewis putting the reality device into her right side pants pocket.
The Lowe sisters then left their suite to get some dinner at the hotel restaurant.
(_)
A day later, in the middle of the afternoon, the Lowe sisters were working on the reality device some more.
Lewis used her soldering iron and solder to make one more bridge connection.
After the solder cooled, Stan tested the board completely with the voltage meter. She looked at Lewis, as she said, “All lights are green.”
Lewis smiled, as she stated, “Good. It means it's finally fixed.”
Stan also grinned, as she replied, “Great. Now, the hard question.”
Lewis understood what had was eluding too, as she responded, “Yea. Now to test it. Though, if one of us goes, it might not work, and that person would be lost in other reality, with the other guy stuck here.”
Stan agreed, “Exactly. Which is why we are both going?”
Lewis pointed out, “But, as guys.”
Stan said, “Yes. And we need to pack. I do not want to get stranded without our clothes... All our clothes. And our tools.”
Lewis commented, “Good thing we have three of those suitcases, for our clothing..”
Stan nodded, as she replied, “Exactly.”
The sisters then got up to change in more ways than one.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lewis had Stan had changed clothing and genders. Along with wearing their male clothing, Stan had on his red varsity jacket, and Lewis had on his short, white lab coat.
Also, Lewis had put the reality device back together, and he put up his tool kit.
Then, except for the reality device, their wallets, Stan's zippo lighters, and whatever else they kept on their person, they packed everything they had into their four suitcases.
Stan put his male clothing, laptop, and other items into, into his personal suitcase.
Lewis put his laptop, male clothing, and other items into his personal suitcase.
They put all their female clothing, female tennis shoes, plastic bra washing balls, and some bottles of water, in case the next place, in the next reality they ended up in was a desert environment.
As Stan stood close to Lewis, he held his suitcase that had his male clothing inside, with his right hand, by its handle. And Stan used his left hand to hold the handle of the suitcase with their female clothing in it.
Lewis was standing directly beside Stan, to Stan's right side. Lewis was holding the suitcase with his male clothing in it, in his left hand, as he held the reality device in his right hand. While doing so, Lewis asked, “Should we check out of the hotel first.”
Stan answered, “No. I have a better idea. Let's just jump five minutes later. If it works, we check out and leave. It if doesn't then they will eventually find us gone, anyway. If it doesn't work at all, then we don't have to go to the trouble of checking out, only to check back in, soon after. Which will raise questions.”
“And I like this hotel. The rooms are nice, and the restaurant cooks great food. If the device does not work, I do not want to go to all the trouble of finding another hotel.”
Lewis complimented, “I like your thinking.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.”
Both brothers then looked at the digital clock on the nightstand.
Lewis inquired, “Are you ready?”
Stan said, “Yes.”
Lewis thought of going only five minutes ahead in time, in the same place, in their hotel suite, and in the current reality they were in. Lewis held that thought, as used his right thumb to press the red button. And it seemed like nothing happened.
Stan asked, “Did it work?”
Lewis looked the clock, and he smiled. He turned to Stan, as he answered, “Yes. Look at the clock.”
Stan did so, and he saw that it was five minutes in the future. He looked over at Lewis, while he said, “Cool. It works. We are no longer stranded here.”
Lewis questioned, “So, where do we go now?”
Stan stated, “After we check out, and turn our keycards in, let's turn the tables on some of those after us. We can start with our cousins. Let's spy on them.”
Lewis agreed, “I like that idea. Also, even though those three are powerful, they have not acted that crazy towards us. Except for wanting to awaken our latent gender bending abilities. And since that has already happen. That is no longer a concern for us.”
Stan responded, “Exactly. And they don't know we can turn into girls. So, it works to our advantage.”
Lewis smiled wickedly, as he commented, “We are going to have so much fun with them.”
Stan smirked, as he said, “I know. Now, let's go check out of here, find a safe place in the multiverse, to stash our suitcases, and go after them.”
Lewis pocketed his reality device, as he replied, “I have just the time, place, and reality, in mind, on where to store our suitcases.”
Stan replied, “Good. I look forward to finding out. Though, when we go, focus on the three cousins, after they were at Violin's home, when we escaped them. We do not want to risk a paradox, by accidentally meeting their past selves.”
Lewis commented, “Okay. I will think of them, after that incident. Now, let me turned off everything, and we will head to the front desk.”
A few minutes later, Lewis turned off everything. He then walked over to the hallway door of the suite, and opened the door for Stan.
After Stan exited into the hallway, with his two suitcases in his hands, Lewis followed behind, with his suitcase in his left hand.
And the two brothers then headed for the front desk.
(_)
Ten minuted later, the brothers had checked out of the hotel, and turned in their keycards.
With their suitcases in hand. One for Lewis. And two for Stan. The Lowe brothers then headed for the men's restroom, in the lobby.
After entering the restroom, and making sure that no one else was in the restroom, Stan stood close to Lewis, as Lewis pulled out his reality device.
Lewis focused on time, place, and reality, of where he wanted to store the luggage that Stan and him, were carrying. He then held that through, as pressed the red button on the reality device, and the brothers, along with their luggage, instantly disappeared, as they jumped to another reality.
(_)
Reality, Bob's home reality. Date, early twenty-first century. A few days after Stan and Lewis left that reality. Place, Tokyo, Japan. Time, around noon.
It was the middle of the sunny day, as Ed, Bob, Annie, John, and Violin teleported onto the sidewalk of a deserted two land road, with a few cars parked on the sides of the street. Including, a few vehicles, parked near them, beside the sidewalk, they were on.
Ed put her reality device back into her right, side pants pocket.
While the five adults looked around, John questioned, “So, this is Tokyo? I expected a lot more people, and cars, in the middle of the day.”
Violin answered, “Tokyo is like any major urban city. It has its populated parts, and its deserted parts. If we have time after this, I will take you to the present of this reality, to meet my family. I will also show you around town.”
Bob commented, “I do looked forward to visiting Nataru, Birdy, and Yuuichi.”
Ed agreed, “So, do I. They are nice people to visit.”
Annie commented, “Violin, your family has always been nice to me. I would love to visit them some.”
John stated, “Maybe we will do that. I do wonder where you came from, Violin.”
Violin smiled, as she replied, “Thank you, everyone, for accepting my offer.”
Ed requested, “No problem. Now, everyone please be quiet. Annie needs to concentrate.”
Annie turned to Ed, as she said, “Thank you.”
Ed looked over at Annie, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
The others four adults remained quiet, as they watched Annie stand still, as she the expression on her face seem to show her spacing out, with her eyes unfocused.
The others watched the force user go work for about half a minute. Bob then turned to Annie, as he inquired, “Annie, do you sense the boys?”
Annie's eyes came to focus, as she looked towards Bob. She answered, “Yes. The boys were here. In this city. Not more than a few days ago. But, they are gone.”
Ed cursed, “Damn it. We were so close.”
Bob asked, “Anything else.”
Annie said, “There is something off about what I am sensing from them. But, I cannot tell what it is.”
Before anyone could reply, Violin stated, “We got company.” She then used her right hand to point across the street.
Everyone in their group turned to look across the street. They saw a humanoid sized robot, two human men, and a couple of humanoid aliens, on the sidewalk, across the street from them.
The other group of newcomers, were standing together, behind some cars. All of them were armed with projectile, or energy weapons. And all of them were dressed in dark, masculine sci-fi clothing, even the robot.
John inquired, “You think they are here for us?”
Bob deadpanned, “Who else would they be here for? But, let's see if we can talk our way out of this mess.”
John turned to Bob, as he questioned, “Has that ever worked for you?”
Bob looked over at John, as he answered, “Actually, it works more often, than not. One time, Ed and I were even able to talk our way our of trouble with Balalaika and Hotel Moscow.”
John replied, “Really? Well, when this is over, I would like I would like to take some etiquette lessons from you two.”
Bob responded, “Nah. You already know all the same lessons I do. Your problem is the same problem as mine, in such situations. Manners rarely work on crazies.”
John nodded once, as he agreed, “Very true. Now, let's see how good you are.”
Bob said, “Watch the master at work. But everyone, be ready to drive for cover if we need to.”
Bob and John then turned their attention back to the group across the street.
Though, Bob and John unhooked the straps to their holsters, that kept their pistols in place, with their right hands ready to draw their pistols.
Meanwhile, Annie unhooked her lightsaber, and held in her right hand. Though, she did not ignite her lightsaber, before concern she could spark a battle, that likely no one wanted.
Bob continued to look at the people across the street, as he loudly, but politely inquired, while continuing to speak english, “Hello. Do you any of you understand, or speak english?”
One of the human men loudly answered, in english, “We understand you just fine.”
Bob questioned, “Good. So, why you are here?”
The man responded, “Well, we were part of the army of bounty hunters sent by Scorpius, to capture Stan and Lewis Lowe. Given the size of the bounty, we five decided to pull our resources and work together. We soon learned that you, Bob Lowe, and the redhead by you, Ed Lowe, are the parents to Stan and Lewis Lowe. And that you are looking for you sons, as well. We decided that if we could not find the boys, we would follow you. And then take the boys from you. Unfortunately, we teleported too close to you.”
Bob complimented, “Well, things happen. And you are correct on all points. In your place, I would have likely come up with a similar plan. Still, I have a question for you. Do you know who is accompanying us?”
The man answered, “Yes. The brown haired woman is Annie, AKA Darth Vader turned into a woman. Honestly, we think it is an improvement from the black suit.”
Annie commented, “Thank you. Know this. For that compliment, if you do decide to attack, I will make your deaths as quick and painless as I can.”
The man replied, “We appreciate that. The brown haired man is John Crichton, whom is almost as dangerous as you are, Annie.”
John said, “I freely admit to that.”
The man went onto say, “Though, we are not sure on the dark blue haired woman.”
Violin frowned.
Ed whispered into Violin's ear, “Relax. It just means they underestimate you. That is a good thing.”
Violin dropped her frown, though she did not smile.
Bob stated, “Okay. You know us. Being savvy, and showing competence, wins points with us. So, we are giving you a chance to walk away. You cannot spend a bounty if you are dead.”
The man said, “That is true. But, Scorpius already paid this bounty once. So, we know she is good for the bounty.” The five bounty hunters held up their weapons, as he man concluded, “Also, we think we can take you. So, we are going with plan, b, and capturing you, and Ed. And use you both as bait to capture your sons. Though, I cannot promise the same, for the others.”
With that last sentence by the bounty hunter, something clicked inside Violin, causing her to freeze up, as she quietly said, in english, “I remember this.” She continued, with her tone of voice punctuating her words with a little more strength, than before, “I remember this. Why do I remember this?”
Annie quickly ignited her red lightsaber, as readied herself to deflect some of the incoming gunfire.
Meanwhile, Ed ducked behind a nearby car, with her husband right behind her, as he drew his revolver.
At the same time, John dived for cover, behind a car next to the car that the Ed and Bob were behind.
As John was about to pull out his pulse pistol, but he then noticed had Violin frozen up, and she was still standing, with a firefight about to begin.
John thought, with worry, 'Frell! This is why we don't bring children along!'
John jumped up, turned to where his back was facing the road, as he pulled Violin down from her front side. But just as he did so, the firefight began, and one of the first energy shots, from the bounty hunters, hit John near his left shoulder blade.
When John and Violin reached the concrete ground, on instinct, from being in countless firefights, John pull Violin up, and set up her, in a sitting position, with her back to the side of the near by car.
John then tried to sit beside Violin, to Violin's left side. But, as he leaned against the car, with his back, he immediately felt the wound on his upper back. He thought, 'Damn, that hurts. I think I am in real trouble here.'
Violin looked over at John, as her muttering, in english, with guilt in her tone of voice, “I did it. I did it. I'm sorry, I did it.”
John looked up at her, as he groaned, “Relax kid. It's okay. And you will be fine.” He mentally added, 'But, I don't think I will.'
Meanwhile, Bob waited for an ebb in the bounty hunters fire.
A few seconds later, when the bounty hunters gunfire started to slow, Bob popped up enough, to swiftly aim, and returned fire with his revolver. Bob fired to shots, he then ducked back down behind the car he was behind, before one of the bounty hunters could get a bead on him.
It was at that moment, in which Annie sensed that John had been seriously hurt.
During the battle she used her lightsaber to successfully deflecting all the energy and projectile shoots directed towards her. And she did so in a manner that would not cause some of the energy shots to reflect back on her friends.
Though, due to deflecting gunfire with her lightsaber, Annie could not look at John, and risk John becoming a distraction for her.
Annie continued to successfully deflect the shots, as she thought, with worry, 'John is hurt. I need to end this now.'
Annie swiftly did a force jumped across the street.
The bounty hunters saw her coming, as they fired at her, but she deflected their shoots, as she approached them.
Seconds later, Annie landed right behind them. As she turned around, to her right, she swung her lightsaber to slice through all five of the bounty hunters in half, in the middle of their chest. This not only sliced them in half in their chests, but it also slice off their arms, at their forearms, or elbow.
As the bounty hunters literally fell apart, onto the sidewalk. Annie calmly said, “I told you I would kill you as quickly as possible. Though, I sense you are in some pain, be aware that you will be dead within the next few seconds.”
Seconds later, Annie sensed four of the bounty hunters were dead, and the robot had ceased functioning.
Annie yelled over at her grouped, “Fights over! They are dead! But, John is hurt!”
Annie then forced jumped back across the street. She landed in front of John and Violin.
As Annie turned around, to face John and Violin, she saw that Bob and Ed were already nearby. With Bob having holstered his revolver.
John was looking up at all three of them.
Bob asked, “How bad is it, John?”
John smiled weakly, as he said, “I was shot in the back. You tell me.” He then leaned down, so they could see the wound.
A few seconds later, John leaned back up, as he inquired, “How bad is it?”
Annie answered, “Bad. It is an energy burn. It hit right behind your heart. You likely have internal damage to your organs and nervous system. But, we can teleport to an emergency room I know of, in another reality, with experience in treating energy wounds.”
John groaned, “Don't bother. I can feel my strength fading fast. This is not like the wounds Dargo had. I got seconds here. Not minutes, like he had.”
John fought back tears, as he continued, in a slightly broken tone of voice, “Tell Aeryn I love her. Tell my son that it was my fault for not listening to him. Tell my friends to have a good life. You all included. And don't blame the kid here for doing something stupid. We all do stupid things. It was my call to save her.”
Ed promised, “We will, John.”
John quietly said, “Looks like my luck finally ran out... This is a crummy way to end. But damn, it was fun ride.”
John's eyes then gaze over, as death finally took him.
Annie deactivated her lightsaber, as she held it in her right hand. She then leaned down, as she used the fingers in her left hand to close John's eyes. She said, in a sad, sober tone of voice, “Goodbye, John. And thank you for your friendship.”
Annie leaned back up, as Ed went to console Violin.
Meanwhile, Bob turned to Annie, as he whispered, “Aeryn is going to kill us.”
Annie quietly replied, “If need be, I will handle, Aeryn. It is Violin I am concerned about, right now.”
Bob and Annie turned to Violin and Ed.
Ed said to the blue haired young woman, in a comforting, motherly tone, “Don't worry, dear. This is not your fault. John made the call, and he knew the risks. He just said as much. You have nothing to feel guilty about.”
Violin looks up at them, as she stated, “You don't understand. I got myself killed.”
Bob asked, “What do you mean?”
Violin used her left hand to point at John's corpse, as she stated, “I am him. John Crichton. I remember being him, as him. I know it sounds crazy. Hell, it is crazy. But, it is true.”
Annie clipped her lightsaber, to the right side of her belt, as she commented, “As strange at is sounds, I sense deceit from Violin. She believes what she is saying.”
Ed asked, “But, is that even possible?”
Bob thought it over a few seconds. He then answered, “Well, this is Birdy's past. If Violin was conceived in this reality, then yes, it is possible, through reincarnation.”
Ed turned to Annie, as she asked, “Annie? What do you sense.”
Annie continued to look at Violin, as she said, “I am looking deeper into Violin's psyche. And I am sense some really screwy stuff going on inside Violin's mind, right now. But, I cannot make heads, nor tails of it.”
Bob turned to Violin, as he asked, “How much do you remember?”
Violin looked at Bob, as she stated, “Everything in John's life. Total recall. Get your ass to Mars level recall. I can actually feel my personality shifting, as my old and new memories are beginning merge into one long, organized memory.”
“I wonder if this is how my mom felt when my Birdy and Tsutomu merged into one personality. I will have to ask her about this. I remember her mentioning it once, but I never understood what she meant, until now.... Oh god, Chiana took my virginity when I was a teenager boy. Why didn't I remember that before?”
Violin continued to babbling, as Bob looked Ed and Annie. He said, “Everything she is saying, actually happened to John. She is John...”
Annie replied, “I think you are right.”
Bob commented, “Just when you think your life cannot be get any stranger, the multiverse throws you for another loop.”
Ed said, “No kidding.”
Bob stated, “Well, the good news is that Aeryn might not kill us, dear. But, Birdy and Nataru might.”
Annie stated, “Birdy and Nataru could be a bit more of a problem than Aeryn.”
Ed commented, “Well, at least they can only kill us each, once.”
Violin suddenly stopped babbling. She then spoke in a more coherent manner, “Don't worry. I will talk with both parents, and then my wife... And later, my son... But, first we have a multiverse to save.” Violin stood up, as she said, “Let's go?”
Annie asked, “Are you going to be okay?”
Violin looked at Annie.
Annie saw that Violin's eyes had an emotionally hollowness to them, as Violin softly answered, “No. I am slipping in an out of insanity. But, this is not the time and place for a mental breakdown. Collect my items. Leave the body. There is no point in taking it with us.”
Annie felt awkward about the situation, as she replied, “Okay.”
Violin inquired, “Do you remember how I showed you how to deactivate a pulse pistol?”
Annie replied, “Yes.” She thought, “Though, it was John that showed me how to do that.
Annie walked over to John body, and collected his pulse pistol, holster, and a few personal effects, such as his wedding ring, which was on one of his fingers.
Annie then deactivated the pulse pistols. Next, she slip the pistol back into its holster, and put the strap over the pistol.
With that done, Annie then searched John's his pockets for any other items, that she felt that she would take with them.
A few seconds later, Annie finished what she was doing, and she stood up. She offered the items to Violin. She offered, “Here.”
Violin responded, “Keep them, until I can get my head straight.”
Annie replied, “Okay. I will.”
Annie put the items into her pockets. She then turned to Bob and Ed. She directly stated, “From what I am sensing, Violin is in a fragile mental state, right now. And she clearly realizes this. Though, even with her abilities, I could probably take her in a fight. But, I am not sure.”
“Either way, we need to get her out in the middle of nowhere, so if she does lose control, she is away from people, and I have plenty of room to subdue her, without worrying about anyone else's safety.”
Violin commented, “I agree with Annie's assessment... I don't want to go berserk in a populated area.”
Bob commented, “A camping trip it is, then. I even have a place in mind.”
Ed said, “As long as we get to bring a few supplies, I am game. Also, we will keep our on fingers on our reality devices. If things go south, we are gone.”
Annie complimented, “That would be a wise precaution to take.”
Violin agreed, “That is a good idea.”
Bob pulled out his own reality device, as he requested, “Okay. Everyone, gather around. I will take us somewhere peaceful, and remote. Where you can sort out yourself, Violin.”
As the three women walked up to Bob, Violin said, “Thank you.”
When the group had gathered closely together, Bob thought up when and where he wanted to be. He then pushed the red button on his reality device, and all four adults disappeared, as they jumped realities.
Leaving John's corpse to be soon found by other individuals, whom had an interest in him.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
Not to sound cold, but I have been planning to kill John off since book one. And it is nice to finally be able to do it.
And in true Farscape inspiration, I killed off John in the most screwed up way possible. Also, at the same time, I immediately brought John back in the most screwed up way possible. With both John's death and reincarnation being responsible for John's reincarnation and death.
If that is not screwed up. I don't know what is.
The next chapter covers this in more detail, in the glorious insanity I call my imagination.
Also, while Violin is currently crazy. It is like “Cracks Don't Matter” level of John's crazy. Yes, Violin/John are crazy, but they realize they are crazy. And Violin/John are more than willing to go some place, where if they lose control, no one else will get hurt. And this give them the chance to sort their problems out, without worrying about anyone else getting hurt, as they do so.
Now, onto the brothers.
Given my writing tastes, I making Stan and Lewis into gender benders was just a given.
But, that gender bending was not the big twist in this chapter.
No, the twist is about Stan and Lewis' natural abilities, and why they are the way they are.
In most fiction, the super-geniuses gravitate to those hobbies they find most easiest to do.
Neither Stan Lowe and Lewis Lowe are like this. Both of them inherited their parents adventurous spirits. And they both like challenges.
One of the things I found fun to do about Stan, the jock, and Lewis, the nerd, is their choices in hobbies. That Stan is actually, a little better at the sciences and the math, than Lewis. While Lewis is actually a little better at sports and physical activities, than Stan.
Though, both brothers are more than able to keep up with the other brother, in any activity they both involve themselves in.
The reason their hobbies are reversed when compared to their skills, is that they like challenges. This is why Stan was able to solve the hyperspace formula so quickly, while Lewis was having problems with it.
So, Stan is naturally a badass bookworm, whom likes to playing being a genius bruiser in sports, for the challenge.
While, Lewis is naturally a genius bruiser, whom likes to playing the badass bookworm, in the form of studying the sciences, math, and physics.
In the above chapter, I even showed examples of both brothers natural traits coming out to the forefront.
For example, Stan kicking the high school chess team's asses at chess. Which Stan explaining to Hatsushiba, and Kikuchi afterward, how he beat them. Still, Stan was a polite winner.
Note, both brothers are very polite, like their father.
Another example being when Duke brought out Lewis' natural genius bruiser traits, in the forms of enjoying the act of firing big guns, and being a fan of mixed martial arts fighting.
Also, Stan and Lewis are both just as strong in their female forms as their male forms. And they have the same endurance in both forms.
On a side note, many of you may wonder why I called Hatsushiba Akira, Hatsushiba, instead of Akira, except when the character was a girl. The reason is simple, in the Gacha Gacha Secret manga, Hatsushiba Akira went by, Hatsushiba, as a boy. And, Akira, as a girl.
As such, I am just staying in line with that.
In book one of my stories, Hatsushiba Akira did not start going, by Akira, as a man, until after he left for college in America. Georgia Tech, in Atlanta, Georgia, USA, to be exact.
Also, this chapter allowed me to play with some of the subtle things I could only mention in passing in the previous BOM, Badasses Of the Multiverse, books.
Such as the Koco band.
Also, I got the chance to show Natsuru's previous girlfriends starting to become too clingy to him. If you look up the Kampfer series, at least the anime, those three girls were pretty much heading that way towards being to possessive towards Natsuru. Which, explains why he ran from them, and he headed for American, to find a college, to study aboard. And it was during that search when he met Akira, at the beginning of book one of my anthology of insanity.
And I am sure some of you readers may complain about book one, where Akira seems like, when he meets the other gender benders, he is thinking, with the line, 'there are others', that this is the first time he had has learned that there are other gender benders.
Though, keep in mind, that in english, that term could interpreted a couple of ways. Depending on which words in the sentence are stressed.
For example, 'there ARE others', can mean a confirmation of what someone already knew. Such as, 'there ARE other gender benders, as I was previously told about.'
It is fun what one can do when said person has a decent command of a language.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Seven: “John's Violin.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Farscape Reality. Date, Two days after the Lowe brothers had escaped a second time. Place, in Peacekeeper Space, among the peacekeeper fleet. Time, local time, mid-afternoon.
On board the Command Carrier Flagship of the Peacekeepers Fleet, Inside the front main Commander Carrier shuttle bay, which span two miles wide, by two miles long, by half a mile high. Stood, hundred thousand peacekeepers soldiers, in equal sets of blocks of people, spanning across the hanger, both in depth, and in width. From wall to wall.
All those attending were wearing their dress uniforms.
And all those present faced the front of the hanger. With the gigantic bays door open. The atmospheric forcefield kept everyone inside the shuttle bay, safe.
Those facing the large open doors, saw that behind the forcefield, a star that shown in the distance. The star was a large yellow ball, but the atmospheric forcefield, filter out the radiation, and light, to the point that those present could safely see outside, without harm to their eyesight, and other potential health risks.
Between the atmospheric forcefield and the soldiers, was a small podium. On that podium was a sealed casket. The lid of which was clear.
In that casket was the body of John Crichton, whom was dressed in a peacekeeper officer's uniform. His body was surrounded by the same white flowers that Scorpius kept as a reminder of her mother.
From the middle of the hanger, a woman briskly walked between the rows of peacekeepers, as she made her way towards the podium.
The woman was Scorpius, in her black armor, Her face and head was exposed her face, which showed off her short, white hair. She also had on her black cape.
The microphone hidden in her neck collar was connected speakers in the room, the ship itself, and to the communications relays of all of peacekeeper space.
Scorpius choose not to use the holographic projectors in the room. And she only had cameras there to record and transmit the funeral to other parts of the ship, and Peacekeeper space.
A few minutes later, when she reached the top of the podium, she came to a stop. She looked over at John, for almost a full minute. She turned and faced her subordinates.
As Scorpius spoke, with clear and forceful passion, the speakers of the hanger boomed with her voice, as she gave John his eulogy, in english, as a form of respect to John. With the translator microbes, that everyone present had, easily translating what Scorpius said.
Scorpius stated, “Peacekeepers, Sebaceans, sentient beings, everywhere, I know what all of you here are thinking. Why should we be giving a funeral to an enemy? Why not just forget him, and move on? I am here to tell you why. John Crichton was known as many things. Primitive. Criminal. Renegade.”
“But, John was not just an enemy. He was the greatest enemy the galaxy had ever faced! Do not look upon this man and never forget him! We must not forget this man! For if we do, we will lose one of the best lessons the universe has even given us.”
“That lesson is so simple.”
“That greatness can come from humble beginnings.”
“John came from such humble beginnings. But, he showed the galaxy itself what one person was capable of when he applied himself.”
“For his greatest triumph was to singlehandedly bring the two most powerful forces in the galaxy to their knees!”
“It is said that the highest form of praise is to receive respect from an enemy. And we are here to give due to the respect that John Crichton has earned!”
“This man, did not deserve to die the way he did. To be left on the side of the road, like garbage.”
Scorpius turned to the casket, as she said, “No John, you deserve the honorable funeral that would be fitting for a Peacekeeper Grand Chancellor!”
“I know, that if things had been different. We would have been friends. Colleagues. Maybe more...”
“We were both outsiders in this galaxy. And I understood your pain. You were the closest being to ever approach becoming my equal.”
Scorpius began to shed tears, as she continued, “You were my light. I was your darkness. May you find peace wherever you are.”
Scorpius then turned to face her soldiers, as she ordered, “Salute!”
Everyone present complied.
The casket then began lowering into the floor.
Scorpius turned to faced the atmospheric forcefield.
A few seconds later, Scorpius, everyone else present, and those viewing the broadcast, watched as John's casket was fired into the star.
Scorpius then commanded, “Honor guard! Fire!” Every ship in the fleet fired their guns straight forward for a solid minute, as the sun's gravity caught the casket, and took it to its fiery destiny.
Scorpius took off her microphone, on her collar. She then quietly prayed, “John, I will miss you. I hope wherever you are now, that you are happy.”
(_)
In another reality, Ed, Bob, Annie, and Violin were sitting down around a camp fire, in the middle of a valley, in an isolated area that Bob knew about..
Violin was sitting down against a log. She fumbled her lips with her fingers. Then, she started laughing for no reason. She then looked away from the group, as she asked, “What are you doing here?”
Ed stated, “She is getting worse. Do something, dear.”
Bob replied, “What would you have me do?” Bob turned to Annie, as he asked, “What is going on in her mind?”
Annie answered, “You don't want to know.”
Bob inquired, “Can keep you at least keep her from harming herself?”
Annie said, “I believe so.”
Bob replied, “Good. Still, we need to see if we can help her.” Bob turned to his wife, as he requested, “Honey, you speak crazy. You are the only one that can help her, right now.”
Ed looked at her husband, as she replied, “If I could help her. I would. Looks like we are just going to have to watch her, for right now.”
Ed, Bob, and Annie, then turned to Violin, as the silently watched the younger, dark blue haired woman.
(_)
At the moment, inside Violin's soul, John looked around, he noticed that he was in padded room in an insane asylum, with both Violin and himself, were sitting in white wooden chairs, with Violin to John's right side. And both John and Violin were wearing white straightjackets.
John saw, that sitting in a white wood chair, in front of Violin and himself, was Harvey, whom was wearing a white doctor's coat, under his usual black armor clothing, and black mask. Which was a more toned down version of Scorpius's black armor.
John continued to look at Harvey, as he demanded, “Harvey? What are you doing here?”
Harvey calmly stated, “It is good to see you to, John. I am your soul's very last shot as salvaging this situation. John, you have come back from the dead to haunt your current life.”
John looked at Harvey, in a confused look on his face, as he asked, “What do you mean, current life? And why is Violin here?”
Harvey sighed. He then calmly inquired, “John, would you say we have lead an interesting life?”
John replied, “That would be an understatement.”
Harvey responded, “True. And let us just say that our life had just gotten a little more interesting. It seems that Violin here is your next incarnation.” Harvey then did his best, Bones McCoy impression, as he continued, “You're dead John.” He then went onto say, in his normal tone of voice, “You died, John. And your soul got reincarnated into this young woman. We are currently in her body, as I try to sort this mess out.”
John quietly said, “Oh no. Aeryn... Little D...”
Harvey commented, “Yes. But, we will deal with that in a minute. Now, we must make the most of the situation, and try to clean up this mess.”
John turned to Violin, whom was catatonic
John looked back towards Harvey, as he asked, “Why is she like that? Or, if we are the same soul, why are we two separate people in here?”
Harvey answered, “Because you are the same soul, but two different personalities. Two different sets of memories. By some fluke of your crazy luck, you have managed to cheat the grand design. And here we are.”
“Because she was partly the cause for you being killed. With her hesitation getting you killed. By not only witnessing your death, but being one of the primary causes, this realization has shocked something in her soul that awoke you from the dreaming memory that you were.”
“Now, she not only knows she took a husband from a wife. A father from a son. She also has the memories of the love you have for them. Her personally has collapsed into a knot, and we have to bring her back. Because this is her life, John. Not ours.”
There was silence for several seconds, as John thought over what Harvey had said.
John then replied, “As much as I hate to admit it, I agree with you there. Just put me back in the bottle. I am more willing to go.”
Harvey explained, “It is not that simple. I cannot just put you to sleep. That is beyond my ability to do. And we cannot leave you two this way. Violin's body is too powerful. There is too much of a risk of her going berserk, and harming people, if you both stay like this.”
John agreed, “You are right about that. So, what are our options?”
Harvey answered, “There is only one option. You two have to became one personality.”
John flatly stated, “No.”
Suddenly, they were all on the command deck of Moya. John and Harvey were standing across the room from each other, with Violin laying on the floor, between them. Violin was in her civilian clothes. Harvey was in his usually black armor clothing. And John was in his usually clothing.
Harvey said, “John, do not be so quick to reject the idea. Do you not see the opportunity you are being presented with here. You have cheated death. You can now go back to your old life. Yes, with a new female body. But, you can be with Aeryn, Little D, and your friends.”
John stated, “I will not knowingly sacrifice one innocent person for my own gain. I survived the death of my mother, my son will survive the death of me.”
Harvey countered, “But, every day you wish you have more time with her. It is unfortunate that you were not able to see her after you died. That is because you died in a reality different from you own reality. This is why we are here in the first place. You realized that if you had stayed, you would never see those you loved again. You do not even remember what happened after your death. But, I do.”
Suddenly, they were in a white room, with no walls, nor ceiling.
For John, it felt like he was watching through his own eyes, and listening, with his own ear, as someone else was in control of the situation.
John yelled, “Where are my friends?! Where is my mother?!”
A chorus of voices said, “You are not of here. Those you seek are not of here.”
John then realized, as he said, “Oh no. I died in another reality. I didn't go to the heaven where my family and friends went.”
The chorus replied, “You understand.”
John asked, “How can I go back there?”
The chorus answered, “There is only one way. One small chance. You must live again as another.”
John inquired, “Reincarnation?”
The chorus replied, “Yes. Soon, there will be a strange union. A child will be produced. This child will have no destiny but her own. She will spend much of her childhood walking between realities, as you walk between doors. Through her, you have a slim chance of being reunited with those you love.”
John caught the pronouns of what the chorus was saying. He questioned, “What a minute. You said, her?”
The chorus answered, “Yes.”
John was silent for a few seconds. He then asked, “Oh well, it does matter as long I still love them, and they accept me... Will I still love them? Will they still accept me?”
The chorus said, “Love lasts longer than lives ever will. If they truly love you, they will accept you. If you truly love them, you will accept them.”
John stated, “Then, let's do this.”
Suddenly, John found himself on a tropical island. And he was back in control of himself.
John looked around, and he saw he was by the beach. As he turned to face land, he saw the beach he was not stretched to across the bay, to his right side. In the bay, there was boat dock, with a PT boat moored to the dock. In front of John, he saw that there was a grassy field inland, that lead to mansion.
John also noticed that the beach where he was standing was not part of the beach, but was exposed to the sea, with small waved breaking nearby. Though, he was on dry sand.
John then looked down at himself, and he saw that was he wearing only a buttoned up short sleeved shirt, and Bermuda shorts. He looked to his left, and he saw Violin was laying on the beached, wearing a dark blue bikini that match her dark blue hair. Her feet were pointed towards the water, and it looked like she was sunbathing.
John then noticed that between Violin, and himself, was Harvey, whom was standing closer to the tree and brush line.
John saw that Harvey was wearing a Hawaiian t-shirt, and a straw hat over his black armor. And John noticed that Harvey looked back at him.
John continued to look at Harvey, as he stated, “I don't remember this place.”
Harvey explained, “And you won't. This is not from your memory, John. This place is from Violin's life experiences. I come here when I want to be somewhere peacefully to think.” Harvey then continued in a more jubilant tone of voice, “And here we can have those margaritas shooters, and pizza, I always wanted.”
John laughed at his joke, few a few seconds. Then, as he calmed down, he walked to the edge of the shoreline, where the sand was still dry. He sat down on the dry sand, which his legs crouched up to his chest. And his arms around his legs.
John looked at the small waves breaking in front of him, and the vastness of the seat behind the waves. He asked, “Can I be removed, or cut out from Violin?”
Harvey calmly walked over, and around, behind John. He then sat down by John, to John's right side.
Harvey looked out at the sea, as he left out a deep breath. Harvey answered, “John, this is not your brain. This is your soul. Our soul. None of us can simply be cut out. And we have to deal with this now, or there might not be a later.”
John turned to Harvey, as he pleaded, “Let us go back in the box. I will even play checkers with you.”
Harvey looked over at John, as he said, in a calm, polite tone of voice, “John, I know why you don't want to do this. And I fully understand. But, it has to be done.”
John looked over at Violin, as he said, “Now, that I think about it. I have seen some of her memories. She is still so innocent. So, sweet and kind. On the other hand, I have so much baggage. All that pain and suffering. The loss. I do not want anyone to have to deal with that agony.”
Harvey continued to look at John, as he pointed out, “Not all of it was horrible. Focus on the joys, the gifts, the accomplishments. Look towards the good in your life. Not the bad.”
John continued to look at Violin, as he stated, “This girl deserves a normal life. Or, at least a pleasant one. I don't want to take away her innocence. We are so different.”
Harvey said, “You are wrong, John. You are more alike than either of you realize.”
Suddenly, John found that Harvey, and himself, were standing beside each other, in a room of an alien ship. Harvey to John's right side.
By them looked down, and in front of them, to see two children. One was a twelve year old boy, the other was Violin at age five, at the most.
Violin was drawing pictures, while the boy was looking at some of the pictures Violin had drawn.
Harvey explained, “This is from Violin's own memories. John, have a look at those pictures she drew.”
John did so. As he looked over, at the pictures on the floor, by Violin, he was shocked at what he saw. They were pictures of his friends. His lovers. His enemies. Pictures of creatures he had met. Places he had been too. And starships he had been on.
Harvey praised, “John, you lived a life so passionately, that even before this incident, your memories and personality were already bleeding through into Violin's dreams, and into her subconscious. Let me show you another example of her memories. Brace yourself. This one is going to floor you.”
Suddenly, they were in the middle of a huge lobby, with lots of people around, during a science fiction and fantasy convention.
By them was Violin as sixteen years old teenage girl.
What she had on shocked John to his core.
Violin was wearing a very good reproduction of one of Aeryn's sexier outfits. The one with the midriff that exposed her belly. And given her slender body frame, and dark blue hair, she pulled off the look very well.
Currently, Violin was talking on a cellphone. John could not hear the other end of the line.
Violin said, “Listen mom. You are just going to have to accept the fact that I am a diehard science fiction fan. I live for these conventions. And given who we are, this is not surprising.”
“You shouldn't worry about me being alone. You know what we are both capable of.”
“Yes. I kept my promise about not wearing a golden chainmail bikini. Unlike last time.”
“Yes. I am wearing that. Everyone is going as a jedi. I decided to do something different.”
“I know it is an old series, but watching Farscape makes me feel comfortable.”
Harvey mentioned, “If you are wondering, John, Farscape is the title of the series you are from. And that costume, along with some wonderful acrobatic abilities, that Violin inherited from her mother, won Violin first place at that year's cosplay contest, at this convention.”
John realized in horror, as he stated, “Oh lord! I made myself into my biggest fan!”
Harvey was amused by John's reaction. Harvey admitted, in a casual tone of voice, “Yes. Narcissistic. But, a bit touching, as well. Your love for your friends has managed to cross beyond lifetimes. Because of this, you have a lot in common with Violin. Including, your interests, hobbies, wants, tastes, needs, desires, and your love of dropping injokes at every chance you both get. This should tell you that merging with her personality won't change her that much. To be honest, it might be the best for both of you. And afterward, you will be able to swing both ways.”
Suddenly, they were in a formal bedroom, with a large bed, across from two nice, large, cushion chairs. The lamp softly lit the room with light.
John noticed he was sitting in one of the chair. And all he had on was a velvet bathrobe. Across from him was Violin in the other chair, and she appeared to be asleep.
John saw that Violin only wore a velvet robe, as well.
Standing in front of John was Harvey. He was wearing a butler's outfit.
John looked up at Harvey, as he stated, “I do not want to violate Violin's innocence.”
Harvey softly said, “When innocence is taken, it does not have to be a violation. When two people make love, their innocence is lost, but in making that sacrifice, they create something greater than their innocence. This is what I am trying to teach you.”
John thought about what Harvey said for a few seconds. He then sighed. He asked, “How did you become such a good poet?”
Harvey answered, “You were a poet, many times, in your various lives. I wish I had time to show you the works you have created. I wept from joy at reading your literary creations.”
John took a deep breath. He then slowly let out his breath. After which, he calmly inquired. “Okay. Here is the big question. How do I prevent myself from consuming her? I have more memories than her. And they are far more intense.”
Harvey answered, “The simplest method. Do not take her. Let her have you.”
Harvey then used his hands to pulled back and remove his mask, from his face and head, to reveal that though he still had the face of Scorpius as a man. But, Harvey's face was so much healthier. He looked more like a pale skin, human man.
Harvey smiled, as he began to cry. He stated, “John, it seems by some divine action, I have been allowed to continue to exist. It seems that part of me was grafted to your soul. And what an existence I have had.”
“I have seen so much. Experienced so much. And not just from you, and Violin. But, from all your past lives. And you, John, have truly lived an incredible existence. And because of this, I am not what I once was. I am no longer loyal to Scorpius. I am now only loyal to you.”
Harvey turned to looked at Violin, as he continued, “To her.”
Harvey then turned back to John, as he went onto say, “To every face. To every life you have lived, and will ever live. I will always love you like a sibling. And I will be here when you need me.”
John realized how sincere Harvey was.
John got up and hugged Harvey. Harvey returned John hug, for several seconds.
When they let go of each other, John looked at Harvey, in Harvey's face, as John's said, “Thank you, Harvey. If you can change, then so can I.”
Harvey stated, “I am glad, for once, to be your inspiration. If you need me. If you want me to come. You don't even have to call me. I will be there for you.”
Harvey then faded from John's sight.
John thought, 'I guess Harvey finally got his wings and halo. And he really is now my guardian angel. I am not sure how I feel about that. Though, I do not feel bad about it.'
John then turned his attention to Violin, as he continued this thoughts, 'Now, to deal with the matter at hand.'
John calmly walked over to Violin. When John came to a stop, in front of where Violin was sitting, he leaned down, and whisper in Violin's right ear. “I know you can hear me. What happened was not your fault. I choose to save you. That is my burden. Not yours. Please come back. All we can do know is move forward, work towards regaining the joys we had, and create new joys, as well.”
John then leaned up and took a few steps back from Violin.
A few seconds later, John watched as Violin opened her eyes.
Violin looked at John, as John looked back at Violin.
Violin asked, “Who are you?”
John thought, 'She is likely still slightly disorientated. Though, I might as well honestly answer her.'
John answered, “Well, it seems I am the you that was. But presently, you need to be the you that is now.”
Violin then recalled whom John was, as she inquired, in a confused tone of voice, “Oh, John. What do you mean?... And what are you doing here?...” She looked around, as she continued, “And where is here?”
John responded, “Just remember what I have remembered, from the last few minutes, and you will understand.”
Violin stopped looking around, as she looked straight ahead for a few moments. She then looked back up at John. She calmly said, “I understand. Though, I am slightly afraid.”
John admitted, “So, am I, Violin.”
Violin said, in a sober tone of voice, “I know. I just don't know if I am ready to do this.”
John responded, “Take your time. I am more than willing to wait until you are ready.”
Violin stated, “I think I will.”
Violin got up from her chair, and they slowly walked beside each other, over to the foot of the bed. With Violin standing to John's right side.
John then took off his robe, as he turned around, and laid on his back, fully onto the bed.
Violin looked at John, as she asked, in a slightly embarrassed tone of voice, “It is wrong to say that this is one of my teenage fantasies?”
John just laughed, for a few seconds.
As John stopped laughing, Violin smiled at John. She then took off her robe and joined him, as she said, “Now, I am ready.”
(_)
Back in reality, by the camp fire, Ed, Bob, and Annie, watched while Violin closed her eyes, and suddenly laid on her side, towards them, to their left side.
Violin then clutch her stomach with both arms, as she began to moan.
Ed commented, “Whatever is happening, I think she is enjoying it.”
Annie stated, “She is.”
The moaning slowly became passionate screaming, for several seconds. Until, Violin's screams suddenly stopped, as she went silent.
Violin opened her eyes, and sat up. She looked to her right side, at the group with a focus and clarity showing in her eyes.
Bob asked, “Are you Violin, or John?
Violin smiled, as she happily answered, “I am me.”
Bob praised, “Good answer.”
Violin continued to grin, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Annie offered, “Would you like you items back from your previous life back?”
Violin answered, “Yes.”
Annie stood up, and walked over to Violin. She then pulled from the pockets of her robes, John's holstered pulse pistol, which John called, Winona.
Violin stood up, and undid her belt and looped her holster on her right side of her waist, with the deactivated pulse pistol in it.
As Violin tightening her belt back up, Annie started pulling out the other items that she had taken from John's corpse. Annie handed those items to Violin.
Violin gently took those other items and put them in the pockets of her clothing. Except for her wedding ring.
Violin look at John's wedding ring. She saw that it was to big for her fingers, as she thought, 'I will have to get my wedding ring adjusted to fit my new ring size on my ring finger. I don't even have to try it on to know that it is to big for my slender fingers. But, that is a small matter. Right now, I have to deal with both my families. I guess telling mom and dad first, would be best. I will deal with my wife and son after this mess is over.'
Violin put her wedding ring into one of her pockets, as she turned to look at Annie. She said, “Thank you.”
Annie was careful to avoid the nearby campfire, while she took a few steps away from Violin, as she looked down at the younger, dark blue haired woman. She replied, “You're welcome.”
Violin turned Ed and Bob, as she asked, “Would it be okay if you take me back to my parent's home? After the last time I left there. Which was in the late morning, on a Sunday. I need to talk to my family about this... Well, Violin's family. And they should all be at home, then. I will also have to talk with John's family. Once I figure how I am going to do that.”
Ed stood up. Then, Bob stood up.
Bob and Ed looked over at Violin, as Ed stated, “I am sure you will. And as soon as Annie checks you out, and says you are fine. Yes. We will immediately take you there.”
Violin turned to Annie, as she asked, “What do I need to do?”
Annie continued to look at Violin, as she requested, “Just relax your mind. This will only take less than a minute to do.”
Violin continued to looked up at Annie, as she replied, “Okay.” She then did as Annie instructed her to do so.
A few seconds later, Violin felt as Annie touched her mind with the force. It was not painful, though it was not pleasant, either. But, Violin knew what Annie was doing would not last long. And Violin dealt with the situation, in a calm, mature manner.
Several seconds afterward, Annie stated, “Violin is back to being sane. Well, as sane as a person in her situation can be. There are is only one personality in her head, right now. It seems the Violin and John's personalities have merged.”
Ed stated, “That is good.”
Violin turned to Ed, as she agreed, “Yea. It is.” She turned back to Annie, as she asked, “By the way, Annie. Do you still consider us friends?”
Annie happily responded, “Always. As John, you were the only person I could partner with, where you were fun to be around, and I did not feel like strangling you most of the time. If you were not married, I would have slept with you, by now... Hey, you are not married, right now.”
Violin stated, “I consider myself married. I just need to talk Aeryn about it. Anyway, don't worry about Aeryn. I won't let her kill any of you, for my actions. Nor, will I let my mother, and stepfather, harm you for my stupidity.”
Bob questioned, “Thank you. So, do we call you Violin, or John?”
Violin turned to Bob, as she answered, “Either name is fine with me. But, I guess calling me, Violin, will raise few questions, while in public.”
Bob thought, 'That is a good point.' He said, “Okay. So, Violin, it is.”
Violin shrugged, as she replied, “That works for me.”
Violin turned to Annie, as she commented, “You know, Annie. The only thing about our partnership, back then, that I did not like, was that I could not play as rough as you could.” Violin then smirked towards Annie, as she continued, “Now, that is no longer a problem.”
Annie giggled, as she said, “Glad to have you back, John.”
Violin smile turned more warm, as she replied, “It is good to be back.”
Meanwhile, Ed pulled out her reality device, as Bob kicked some dirt onto the campfire, to put it out fire.
Ed turned to Annie, and Violin, as she stated, “Now, that this problem is solved. We can move on. Violin, we will dropped you by your family home, an hour after you left for the bikini part. And we be by tomorrow, at noon, to pick you up. For us it will be a few seconds. Do you think that will be enough time for you to sort out your problems with this part of your family?”
Violin turned to Ed, as she answered, “Yes. That should be long enough.”
Everyone walked up to stand close to Ed.
Ed then used her reality device to take Violin back to her family home, in Bob's home reality, an hour after Violin had left for the bikini party on Lagoon Island.
A split second later, the four adults appeared in the front yard of Violin's family home, in Tokyo Japan.
They saw that it was a partly cloudy day.
Ed stated, “It should be Sunday. Noon. Around an hour after you left. If you are right, your family should be here, at this time and day.”
Violin agreed, “Yes. They should be here. Because, I remember they were all here, when I left.”
Ed remarked, “Good. It is nice being able to keep a schedule.”
Violin mentioned, “And before I graduated. It was also nice taking a week off from school. With no one realizing it. Until mom realized what I was doing.”
Annie asked, “How did she catch you?”
Violin turned away from the other three adults, whom were looking at her, as she answered, in an embarrassed tone of voice, “Well, my mother, Birdy, is a police detective. And well, when she noticed, from the frequent use of our bathroom sanitary pads and tampons, that I was having my monthly periods almost every other week, she realized something was up.”
Ed and Annie laughed.
Bob just lowed his head, as shook his head, slightly, from side to side, a few times.
As Ed and Annie calmed down, Annie stated, “Busted.”
Violin looked at the three other adults, as she shrugged. She replied, in a casual tone of voice, “Yea. The perils of time dilation.”
Annie asked, “Why didn't you just have your periods, while on your vacations, outside your reality?”
Violin answered, “Because unlike some people we know, Annie, when I use my reality device to go on vacation. I want to get away from all my troubles. Including that. And, I don't like having sex during that time. It is just to messy for my taste.”
Annie responded, “I fully agree. So, you are not a virgin?”
Violin stated, “Of course not. Though, I waited until my sixteenth birthday to lose my virginity. I lost it to a male teenage school friend that was not very lucky with girls. Though, he was very nice to me. But, while he liked girls. He respected me enough to not make a pass at me.”
“I admired that about him. And I made him the offer. And he accepted.”
“We both went in knowing it was a one night stand. And we are still friends to this day. I admit, that after that, at the sci-fi conventions, I became known as a bit of a slut with the fans there.”
“I have slept with mostly boys, my age. But, also a few teenage girls, my age, as well. Given my current situation, with Aeryn, I consider being bi-sexual a plus.”
Annie commented, “No arguments there.”
Violin said, “Though, I always used a condom.”
Ed complimented, “That was intelligent of you.”
Violin mentioned, “Thank you. I have never gotten pregnant, nor gotten an STD. Though, my not ever getting an STD might be because I am part alien. But, I do not want to take chances. So, I continue to use condoms.”
Bob said, “Yes. It is best not to take chances, on such matters.”
Annie inquired, “Still, I don't understand one point about the situation. You are a genius, two times over. You knew that using such items, in your household, that you mother provided for you, for your month period, so often, might get you caught with you mother. Why didn't you just buy your own feminine hygiene products?”
Violin admitted, “Because I was being cheap. I hope that doesn't make a me a cheap slut. Especially, now that I realize I am married.”
Annie replied, in a casual tone of voice, “Nah. Though, I am going to have some fun with this later on.”
Violin warned, “Don't even start. There are things I have kept secret about your life.”
Annie dared, “Such as?”
Violin answered, “Back in San Francisco, the night after we watched that Pirates of the Caribbean movie marathon. We both went to our bedroom. With were beside each other. But, you clearly forget that our bedrooms shared a single wall. And you were moaning, 'Jack Sparrow' in your sleep...” She cracked a wicked grin, as she continued, “Well, I hope you were asleep, at the time.”
Annie blushed, as she denied, “I wasn't. Though, he is hot.”
Violin responded, “I won't deny that. Actually, I would be a hypocrite to say that I did not get wet in thinking about him, once or twice, when I started puberty.”
Annie shrugged, responded, “Understandable. I knew better than to fantasize about your old body, John. And it was tempting to do so. But, you were a married man. So, I had to think about someone, and I was just in the mood for something more masculine, than feminine. Speaking of which, how do you view Aeryn on that subject.”
Violin deadpanned, “Personality? Or body?”
Annie replied, “I see.” She then started giggling.
Violin said, “Well, I need to go inside, and talk to my parents.”
Bob stated, “Good luck.”
Violin commented, “Given the personality and gender issues that run in my family here, I am not expecting too much trouble. On the other hand. As I said before. I am not sure how I am going to break the news to those on Moya.”
Bob stated, “Tell them the truth. You all have been through strange experiences, for them to believe you.”
Violin let out a laugh. She then admitted, “There is some truth to that comment. We have even done the body swapping, gender bending before.”
Annie smirked, as she said, “We know. At least this time, Aeryn is not in your pants.”
Violin then laughed some more. She then said, “Though, I am hoping Aeryn will be in my pant, soon enough.”
Annie continued to smirk, as she teased, “Well, good luck, lover-girl.”
Ed said, “Okay. Group up.”
Annie and Bob took a few steps closer to Ed.
Ed then used her reality device to teleport a day into the future, of Violin and Bob's home reality.
While Violin calmed down, she watched three friend three disappear.
Violin turned around and started walking toward the front door to her home. As Violin did so, she pulled out her house key, from a pants pocket.
When she reached the door, she unlocked it, opened the door, went inside, closed the door, and locked it behind her.
Violin thought, 'Now, were are mom and dad?'
She the walked through the hallway, and to the entrance to their family living room
Violin said that her parents were sitting on the ends of the couch, with their son, Violin's younger half-brother, Yuuichi, sitting between them. There were school books on the table in front of the couch.
Birdy, Violin's mother, was currently holding a school book, while she, and Nataru, Violin's stepfather, were helping Yuuichi go over the material in it.
Violin mentally guess, 'While, I am not out of school, my younger brother is not. And it is nice that mom and dad are helping Yuuichi with his homework. Well, I might as well break the news to them.'
Violin wanted around the living room, to stand between the table, and the TV, with her family facing her. Violin said, in a serious tone of voice, in japanese, “Mom. Dad. Yuuichi. I am home. And we need to talk.”
Birdy, Nataru, and Yuuichi, stopped what they were doing, and they looked up at Violin.
As Birdy set the school book in her hand down, onto the table, she calmly asked, in japanese, “What is it, Violin?”
Violin walked over and sat on a cushioned chair, by the couch, to her family's right side. She turned to face her family, as she answered, “I have some things to say, that you are likely not going to believe. And you are probably not going to like.”
Nataru said, in japanese, “Violin, we are always open minded. Please, tell us what is going on.”
Violin admitted, “Long story short, I went to the Farscape reality, against your wishes.”
Birdy inquired, in a stern, motherly tone of voice, “How much trouble did you get into?”
Violin thought, with concern, 'Oh no. I know that tone of voice. Mom is not happy. But, I might as well get this over with.' She hesitantly replied, “Not as much as you would suspect.”
Nataru suggested, “Violin, perhaps you should start from the beginning, before you mother gets upset.”
Meanwhile, Yuuichi realized that his older half-sister was in trouble, and he wisely remained silent.
Violin said, “Good idea. It all started when I was at that latest bikini part, on Lagoon Island.”
Nataru commented, “I always felt those parties were nothing but trouble.”
Birdy cracked a smile, as she said, “They are not that bad. You should come some time.”
Nataru flatly stated, “No thank you. Not with the current requirements for those parties.”
Violin thought, 'I better keep this conversation moving in the right direction.” Violin stated, “Anyway, while I was there, two brothers dropped in on us, from another reality.”
Birdy commented, “Oh. Then, those two are in trouble.”
Violin said, “Not really. They took on look around, ran for the mansion, and jumped to another reality.”
Nataru theorized, “It sounds like they did not go there voluntarily.”
Violin agreed, “After they left, those of us at the party got to talking, and we all agreed that was the case. And we agreed that they should be left alone on coming there unannounced. They clearly didn't know where they were. What the rules were. Nor, what was going on. And they immediately left.”
Nataru commented, “I am glad that sanity reigned for once on that island.”
Violin sighed. She said, “Dad, you are never going to forgive the Lagoon family, for that one comment Revy made, when we went to visit them for Kristina's birthday, years ago.”
Nataru responded, “Likely not. I have seen their series. They have seen ours. It was clear that Revy, and most of the other women there, do not understand the difference between directed vengeance, and wholesale slaughter. On the other hand, I do. That is why they still lead somewhat dangerous lives, while I was able to return to a more civilized life.”
Birdy turned to her husband, as she stated, “That, and the fact that I used almost every favor I had to keep the Federation from coming after you.”
Nataru conceded, “That to.”
Birdy turned back to her daughter, as she inquired, “Now, when you say brothers, which brothers are you talking about?
Violin answered, “The Lowe brothers. And they were around my age, when they stopped by.”
Nataru commented, “Bob and Ed's kids?”
Violin replied, “Yes.”
Nataru inquired, “From what I understand, they decided to try to give them, as they called it, a normal life.”
Violin responded, “Yes, they did. Until their cousins stopped by at the Lowe home, while the Bob and Ed.
Nataru questioned, “Cousins? Which ones?”
Violin said, “Mikoto, Nodoka, and Yurika.”
Birdy commented, “Oh them.”
Violin responded, “Yes. Them. And those three set off the chain reaction that has lead the two brothers into becoming lost in the multiverse, while on the run from so very bad people. And, to be honest, this is not really their fault.”
Birdy stated, “Those three girls, well girls most of their time, are almost as troublesome as their parents. Though, they are great people. Just trouble magnets.”
Violin agreed, “No arguments there.”
Nataru requested, “So, what else happened?”
Violin responded, “A lot.”
Violin then told them the rest of the story.
(_)
Nearly a half hour later, Violin finished her story.
Nataru thought, 'I use to think that being an Alteran, living on an alien world, Earth. With my Alteran wife. Raising our children on an alien world. That our life could not get any stranger. Man was I wrong.'
Yuuichi was the first to speak. He said, in japanese, “So, you are sort of like, mom?”
Violin continued to look at her family, as she stated, “Sort of. I am the reincarnation of John Crichton.” She mentally added, 'I think I will omit what the means in my personal life, until I can first talk to Aeryn and Little D.'
Nataru inquired, with a little disbelief, “The main character of that sci-fi series which you like to watch?”
Violin admitted, “I know how this sounds. But, yes. That is the person. It is the reason I am such a fan of that series.”
Birdy directly said, “Violin, I think you may need some professional help.”
Violin responded, “I already had some Also, I cannot believe you can say that with a straight face. Given your personal life. The events surrounding my conception. That was a fun conversation we had a few years ago. Who and what we are. Our friends. And some of the places we travel to.”
Birdy conceded, “You may have a point there.”
Violin stated, “I can even prove it. I will be right back.” She got up, and headed to her bedroom, on the second floor.
A few minutes later, she came back down the stairs, with a small stack of loose papers. When she reached the living room, she stood in front of the table, facing her family, whom were still sitting on the couch.
She said the picture on the table. Her family then picked up, and looked at the pictures.
They saw they were the pictures that Violin drew as a child.
As Violin's family continued to look at the pictures, Violin said, “Mom. Dad. You have both seen the Farscape series. But, it has been a very long time since mom, nor I have seen these pictures I drew, with crayons, when draw them, from very early age, to around seven years old.”
As her parents, looked at the pictures that they had in their hands, Birdy commented, “I remember when you drew these, Violin.”
Violin smiled, as she commented, “So, do I. I even remember that party on the beach, when I was five. And I am glad we kept these drawings. Now, look more closely at the picture. I will even pointed them out for you.”
Violin walked around to stand behind to the left side of the couch, as she looked at her family. Violin then pointed at specific pictures. Both on the table, and in her family's hands. As Violin did this, she went onto to say, “That is Aeryn. That is Dargo. That is Zhaan. That is Chiana. That is Pilot. You can recognize most of the others. And that is a picture I drew of a Peacekeeper Command Carriers. I have to admit, when it comes to sci-fi ship designs, that is a cool spaceship.”
After several seconds of looking at the picture, Birdy and Nataru looked each other, over Yuuichi.
Nataru said, “Birdy. I think we should hear our daughter out.”
Birdy replied, “I agree.”
Both parents then looked up at Violin, as Birdy pointed out, “So, if you are telling the truth. That means you are a fan of your own series? Which, I will grants, given what we know of the multiverse, is theoretically possible, but very, very unlikely.”
Violin walked back to the chair, to the left of the couch, and right behind her. She sat down in the chair, and looked over at her family. She stated, “Yes. And I know it is twisted, almost behind belief... But... Look at our lives. Who and what we are. This is not that far fetched.”
Birdy said, “You have a pointed there. When you are at toddler, you told me about strange dreams you had of sci-fi battles. So, those dreams, and these pictures you drew, do support your claims.”
Violin requested, “I don't remember those dreams. Still, on another note, given your experiences with merging personalities, I was hoping to get your advice on the subject.”
Birdy offered, “If what you are saying it true, daughter. I am more than happy to give it to you.”
Violin replied, “Thank you.”
Nataru inquired, “As you say, daughter. Given everything we have all been through, I am going to give you the benefit of the doubt. Still, if that is the case, than whom am I truly speaking too?”
Violin answered, “Good question. I am still your daughter. I just got a lot more memories than I already had. Also, I suspect that my personality from my previous life has been bleeding into my personality in this life, since I was a young child.”
Nataru questioned, “How so?”
Violin explained, “This is why I am such a sci-fi fan, and die-hard Farscape fan.”
Nataru inquired, “Well there be any difference between you now, and then?”
Violin shook her head, as she answered, “Not likely. After reviewing both my lives, my personalities in both lives were not that different. It made the merger likely a lot easier, than what happened to mom.”
Birdy said, “That is likely.”
Violin commented, “Anyway, you will probably not even notice the difference, with my personality.”
Nataru replied, “I hope so.”
Meanwhile, Yuuichi was looked at the pictures. He then pointed at a young, black haired boy, in one of the pictures, as he asked, “Who is that?”
Violin inwardly frowned, as she thought, 'Of all the pictures he had to point too. It has to be that one.”
Nataru inquired, “Yes. Who is that? I don't recognize him from the series.”
Birdy requested, “I would like to know too.”
Violin looked away from them, as she answered, “Little Dargo. Little D... John's... My ten year old son.”
Birdy thought, 'And he is still alive, and so is you former wife, Aeryn. Oh, my poor, poor daughter. I never wanted something like this to happen to you. And you also have baggage from your previous life. And knowing you, Violin, you would try to do right by them. What a mess.'
Birdy got up, and walked over to her daughter, whom was still sitting in her chair.
Birdy then leaned down and hugged her daughter, as she said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't worry sweetie, we will help you through this.”
A few seconds later, Birdy let go of her daughter and lead up.
Violin looked up at her mother, as she replied, “Thank you, mom.”
Birdy then went back to her place on the couch. The Shinmyou family then continued talking about how they could help Violin with the problems that had come up in her personal life.
(_)
The Shinmyou family continued talking for another two hours, before they reached a stopping point.
Violin mentioned, “There is one other matter.”
Birdy inquired, “Which is?”
Violin stated, “I came here immediately after I merged my personality. To help sort out what happened to me. And I have done that, with all of your help. But, I have unfinished business to attend to in the multiverse.”
“Now, not to sound childish, but I am eighteen and I have already graduated from high school. On top of having the memories from another life. But, that life has loose ends I need to deal with. I am not sure yet how I am going to handle the situation. But, I do need to talk to Aeryn and Little D.”
Birdy said, “We will support whatever you decided to do, Violin. Isn't that right, Nataru?”
Nataru did not hesitate, as he replied, “Yes. We will.”
Violin responded, “Thank you, mom, and dad.”
Birdy thought, 'I remember a conversation I had with Bob, on Lagoon island, years ago, when I was pregnant with Yuuichi. Though, I doubt Violin remembers that conversation. I won't mention that now, to Violin, because I don't want to risk making the situation worse for everyone.”
“And if things go the way I hope, I have a feeling that this is going to turn out alright. Though, my son, and my step-grandson, are likely going to have an interesting life together, as good friends.'
Violin commented, “Also, I was helping Ed and Bob find their boys. And they are suppose to pick me back up tomorrow at noon.”
Birdy inquired, “I am proud of you doing that, but are you sure you are okay to do this?”
Violin answered, “Yes. I think so.”
Nataru asked, “Is there anyone else in your group?”
Violin said, “Annie is with us.”
Nataru replied, “Okay. Annie has a good head on her shoulders.”
Violin pointed, “Dad, I have never understood this matter. You have a problem with the Black Lagoon women. But, you have no problems with Darth Vader.”
Nataru explained, “Annie and I had a long conversation about our lives. And like myself, Annie has learned from her actions and moved on. I admire her for that.”
Violin conceded, “Okay. You have a point there. And Annie is also a friend of mine. I both my lives.”
Nataru replied, “That is good.” He thought, 'I do remember, when I talked to Annie, she mentioned that she had a friend named, John. That guess that was, John Crichton. And Annie and Violin seemed to have a decent friendship. So, I don't have to worry, on that matter. I have a lot of other matters right now, to worry about, with my daughter. But, not this matter.'
Birdy said, “Well, anyway. Considering you have my abilities. I am not that concerned about your safety. And with Annie, Bob, and Ed with you, I am sure you will be alright. Still, good luck.”
Nataru commented, “I have faith that you will be fine as well, Violin.”
Yuuichi requested, “Please, let me know what happens, sis.”
Violin responded, “Thank you. I am glad you all understand. And brother, I will let you know what happens.”
Yuuichi smiled in response to his sister's reply.
Violin said, “I am glad you all understand. I am now going out to the front yard to get some fresh air.”
Birdy responded, “Okay. We will be here helping your brother with his homework.”
Violin smiled, as she got up from her chair, and headed to the hallway that let to the front door.
Meanwhile, Birdy and Nataru went back to helping Yuuichi.
(_)
A few seconds later, Violin had exited the front door, and closed it behind her. She then walked around the yard, she took slow deep breaths to help her relax.
Violin happily thought, 'That went much better than I expected it would go. One family done. One family to go.'
Suddenly, she overheard to voices in front of her, by the sidewalk, in front of her family's front yard.
Violin turned to see the Stan and Lewis in front of her.
Lewis commented, in english, “Well, this is certainly peacefully.”
Stan agreed, in english, “Yes. It is a nice change of pace.”
Violin mentally screamed, in both excitement, and concern, 'You have got to be kidding me! I must be the luckiest person in the multiverse, right now. Even with everything else that has happened to me. Which is not really that bad, when I think about it. I also need to remember that these two likely don't know japanese.'
'I think Ed and Bob taught them a number of languages. But, they do know english. Just not japanese. Which I can work to my advantage.'
Violin turned to them, as she said, in english, “Hello.”
Stan replied, “Hi.”
Lewis commented, “Hello. Nice to meet you.”
Stan asked, “Please, don't take this the wrong way. But, where are we?”
Violin thought, 'That won't be a problem. I have asked that some of these questions in similar situations before. I wish I could tell you two straight out what is going on. But, I think you would just run. Still, I can help you in other ways. Like pointing you in the right direction, when it comes to Scorpius.'
'Though, I think I may have inadvertently screwed myself in doing so. I am not sure if you two are here before, or after, I met you on Moya. And I cannot directly ask you. So, I will just have to make the best of this interesting situation.'
Violin answered, “Tokyo.”
Lewis thought, 'We were just talking... And thinking about Tokyo. And from the looks of this place, this is clearly further in the past. Maybe when our father was our age... Could that be how this thing works.'
Lewis said, “Thank you for the answer.”
Violin commented, “Don't mention it. Still, you two look like you have been through the ringer.”
Stan admitted it, “You could say that.”
Lewis greeted her, “Anyway, I am, Lewis Lowe. And this is my brother, Stan Lowe. It is nice to meet you.”
Violin replied, “It is nice to meet you both. My name is, Violin Cephon Shinmyou.” Violin mentally added, 'But, I am likely soon going to change that to Violin Cephon Shinmyou Crichton.' She then continued, “You can called me Violin. Still, why don't you both come inside. You can meet my family. And at the very least, you can get something to eat, use the restroom, and get cleaned up a bit.”
Lewis smiled, while he responded, “Who are we to argue with a beautiful woman?”
Stan just shrugged.
Violin giggled for a few seconds.
The boys then started walking over towards Violin.
Violin then walked to her front door, and opened it, as she let the brothers into her home.
Once the brothers were inside, she walked into her home as well, closing the door behind her.
Violin then walked passed the brothers, as she said, “This way. And don't worry about the shoes. You can keep them on. We are a bit casual around here.”
Violin thought, 'Because my parents are aliens, and not native japanese... Well, I am half-alien, half japanese human. But, that is too much to get into. Let alone think about for too long.'
The teenage woman lead the brothers into her family's living room.
When the brothers into the living room, they saw three other individuals sitting at the couch, in front of a coffee table, straight in front of a wall mounted flat, widescreen TV.
There three individual. A woman, a man, and a young boy.
There were books on the coffee table, at the three of them were looking over.
Violin lead the brothers to wear they stood between the turned off TV, and the coffee table, in front of the couch.
The adults, and boy looked up at the newcomers, while the boys looked down at them.
All their of them had blue eyes, and appeared asian, like Violin.
The woman that looked almost exactly like Violin, only a few years old. She had dark blue hair. She was wearing a wearing pants, a blouse, and dress shoes.
The man was around the same youthful age at the woman. He has black hair, and wore dark pants, blue t-shirt, white tennis shoes.
The boy had white hair boy's school uniform, with matching tennis shoes.
Violin said, in english, “Mom, Dad, Yuuichi, I would like to meet Lewis and Stan Lowe.”
Stan thought, 'They look too young to be Violin's parents. But, whom am I to judge.'
Violin said, “The woman is Birdy Tsutomu Shinmyou, my mother, and a detective of the Tokyo PD. The man is, Nataru Shinmyou, my stepfather, and a physical rehabilitation nurse at a local hospital. And the eight year old boy is my half-brother, Yuuichi.”
Yuuichi was the first to speak, in english, “Hello.”
Stan said, “Hello to all of you.”
Lewis commented, “It is always nice to meet new people.”
Then, Violin and her family had a conversation in japanese.
Violin said, in japanese, “Mom. Dad. We just lucked out big time. Like I just said, this is Stan and Lewis Lowe. Also, speak in a japanese. They don't know japanese.”
Birdy questioned, in japanese, “So these are the Lowe brothers?”
Violin replied, “Yes.”
Nataru commented, in japanese, “I was wondering why you would bring two strange men into our home.”
Violin defended the boys, as she stated, “Don't worry. They are good people.”
Birdy said, “We know.”
Violin stated, “Listen. All we got to do is keep them here tell tomorrow at noon, when Ed and Bob come. And they can pick them up, and handle the situation from there.”
Nataru complimented, “Great idea.”
Violin commented, “By the way, thanks for playing like you did not know them.”
Birdy shrugged, as she replied, “It wasn't hard to figure out what was going on.”
Nataru nodded, as he said, “Yes. They are the only Lowe brothers we know of.”
Violin then turned to her brother, as she requested, “Yuuichi, try not to say anything, else. It is very important we don't mess this up.”
Yuuichi replied, in japanese, “Okay.”
Birdy said, “That is a good point. It might be best if we only interact with them as little as possible.”
Violin responded, “I agree.”
Nataru stated, “We will just take Yuuichi, head to the kitchen, and finish helping him, with his school work, there.”
Birdy said, “Violin, they are your guests. You keep them busy.”
Violin responded, “I can handled it. I have just the TV series in mind to keep them busy.”
Birdy replied, “Good.”
Nataru suggested, “Birdy, it might be a good idea to remind, Violin of our schedule to night.”
Birdy agreed, “Good point, Nataru. I have a shift at work in a few hours. And in a few hours, Nataru is taking Yuuichi to a school play that he is in. Can I trust that you will not do anything fool with those two men while we are gone?”
Violin pointed out, “I have recently found out that I am married, and have a ten year old kid from a previous life. And these two boys are the sons of close friends. Do you really think I would?”
Birdy replied, “No. Not in this situation.”
Violin replied, “I am glad you trust me on this. Besides. Look at them. They are dead on their feet.”
Birdy look over at this for a moment, before turned back to face Violin. Birdy said, “That they are.”
Nataru commented, “From the way they look. They will likely be asleep in less than an hour.”
Violin replied, “All the better for everyone involved.”
Birdy agreed, “True.”
Nataru turned to his, as he said, “Yuuichi, let's collect our books, and head to the kitchen.”
Yuuichi looked up, at his father, as he said, “Okay, dad.”
Birdy looked at her son as well, while she said, “We will also get a snack for you, when we get to the kitchen.”
Yuuichi replied, “Thanks mom.”
Violin's family stood up from the couch, as Nataru turned the teenage boys, while saying, in english, “It is nice to meet both of you.”
Birdy collected her son's school books. As she picked them up in her arms, she looked at the brothers, while kindly stating, in english “Same here. I trust my daughter's judge of character. Anyway, we have something to discuss in the kitchen. Please, make yourselves at him.”
Nataru lead his son into the kitchen, with Birdy right behind her.
Violin turned to the brothers, as she said, “Have a seat at the couch boys. The downstairs bathroom is down the hall, if you need to go. Just please leave the toilet seat down when you are finished.”
Lewis said, “We will.”
Stan looked at the couch, as he inquired, “Violin, are you sure it is alright. We didn't not intend to run your family out of their own living room.”
Violin answered, “It is okay. We just have to talk about something. I will be back in a few minutes.”
The brothers then watched, as Violin walked into the kitchen.
The brothers walked to the couch, and sat down on it.
Lewis wondered, “What do you think they are talking about?”
Stan answered, “My money is on us. But, I am not sure why. It could be just a case of their daughter bringing in two strangers from outside. Or, they could know us. I am not sure which.”
Lewis responded, “There is not much we can do about it, either way. Let's at least enjoy the peaceful moment while we still have it.”
Stan replied, “Agreed.”
A few minutes later, Violin walked out of the kitchen and to the brothers, as she said, in english, “Now, let's kill some time, shall we, with my favorite sci-fi series. It is call Farscape. And I think you will find it informative.”
Violin thought, 'And I can tell you all about Scorpius, without saying a word to you.'
As Violin walked in front of them, and to the small chest of drawers, Stan asked, “What is Farscape about?”
With her back turned to the brothers, Violin pulled out the blu-ray boxset of Farscape boxset, and the Peacekeeper Wars blu-ray box. She inquired, “Have you ever seen Star Wars, and the Star Trek series?”
Lewis answered, “Star Wars, yes. Star Trek, no.”
Violin thought, 'I guess, given you to are super-geniuses, that watching Star Trek might give you some ideas you might try out. But, it is never too late to convert someone into a Trekkie.'
Violin stated, “Well, when you get the chance, watch the Star Trek series. They are all worth a watch. Though, Voyager does drag a bit in the later seasons. They are about what would happen if the future of human space exploration went right. And humans actually created a galaxy span civilization, with other alien species, that was worth living in.”
Violin mentally reflected, 'I have toyed with the idea of having my family and friends visit that reality. But, given my luck with first impressions with aliens of any type, even though I am now one... Partly... I am not even going to set foot in the Star Trek reality, if I can help it.'
Lewis stated, “Sound like it is worth seeing. We will do so when we have the time.”
Violin thought, 'Good.'
Violin commented, “Farscape is sort of like the opposite of Star Trek. Think like Star Wars, only with black leather, S&M, and more well thought out characters thrown in.”
Stan stated, “If that is the case, I am surprised that your parents let you watch this in their living room.”
Violin turned to face them, as she smirked, “Well, the series does it so tastefully, that you barely notice.”
She turned back to turn on the TV and the disc player on top of the chest of drawers, but below the wall mounted TV.
She put in the first disc into the player. She then grabbed the universal remote, stood up, and head to sit in the a cushion, reclining armchair, by the couch, that faced the TV.
As the TV came on, and the disc came up to the menu screen, Violin explained, “Farscape is about an astronaut named, John Crichton, that gets sucked into a wormhole on the other side of the Milkyway Galaxy, where he is a fish out of water, and completely on the run by increasing more dangerous, and savvy foes.”
Violin thought, 'No wonder being around Annie didn't bother me that much. I have had dealt with worse than her. Such as Scorpius. Sure, Annie is more powerful, but Scorpius is more cunning and intelligent.'
Stan deadpanned, “I can relate to John.”
Lewis chuckled for a few seconds.
It took all of Violin’s willpower not to laugh, as she thought, 'Oh god, yes. I think you two, of all people, could relate to me. Or, at least the me I use to be. I should have helped you when I had the chance. And I paid for not doing so, with my life. Still, I got a new life out of it. I just hope Aeryn and Little D accept the new me. Though, I have to admit, it is weird watching this series, now that I know I was the main character of it, in my previous life.'
The three teenagers then started watching the pilot episode of Farscape. The volume from the stereo built into the TV was audible, but not loud.
Fifteen minutes into the episode, the scene panned to a very familiar ship, that the brothers had seen up close and personal before.
Lewis thought, with surprised, “Is that? Yes. It is. That is a Peacekeeper Commander Carrier! We now know the series that Scorpius is from. She is from the Farscape series. I wonder if Stan noticed that?”
Violin noticed the looked on Lewis' face. She thought, 'Yes. You put two and two together. You know now. Unfortunately, you both are so tired, that you probably won't make it long. But, you understand the important parts. It is best for you to at least have the basics of the situation. Considering you both are geniuses, I am sure you will figure out the rest on your own.'
Lewis then looked over to see that Stan had fallen asleep.
Though, Lewis was tempted to wake his brother, he stopped himself from doing so.
Lewis thought, 'There is no point to waking, Stan. I cannot tell him, with Violin here. I will have to tell him later.' Lewis yawned, 'And the rate I am going, I am going to soon join him in slumber-land. Still, we could both use the rest. To say that it has been a long day would be an understatement. At least we are safe here. And it is a good idea to get some rest, while, we have the chance to do so. I will watch as much as I can, until I finally fall asleep as well'
Lewis then turned back to the TV, and watched the rest of the episode.
He took a quick bathroom break when the credits the first episode started. Before he exited the bathroom, he made sure to lower the toilet seat back down, and wash his hands.
When he got back, he started walking the second episode.
Unfortunately, Lewis fell asleep halfway through the second episode.
Violin looked over at the two slumbering brothers, as she thought, “I admit, the second episode is a bit slow. And I guess they need their sleep. Though, I can still watch the series, while they sleep.'
Violin then turned back to the TV, as she continued watching the Farscape series.
(_)
Four hours later, Stan was the first brother to wake up from his sleep.
During this time, Violin had played through a few more episodes, and changed out discs a few times. She was currently watching Farscape, episode ten, 'They've Got a Secret'.
Violin thought, 'I love this episode. When I experienced it first hand, I think this was the very first time that we, the crew of Moya, ever came together for a positive emotional event. It was our first good moment together. Ah. That was a sweet moment.'
'This was when we learned that Moya was pregnant with Talon. And we also learned a bit about Drago's past. And that he was less a jerk, and just paranoid at being capture, along with being emotionally immature. But, he did finally grow up, with him turning out to be a great guy. And I still find it interesting that Dargo can survive fifteen minutes in the vacuum of space. He is one tough badass. He is right up there in toughness as Roberta is.'
'Given I am now a woman. If I wasn't still in love with Aeryn, and Dargo was single, I might take a shot at dating him. If only to see what he can do firsthand with his tongue...'
'Damn. I now understand where Annie is coming from. I am almost as bad as she was towards me, when I was John.'
Stan looked over at Violin, as he asked, “How long have I been out?”
Violin looked over at him, as she answered, “Around five hours. Lewis has been asleep for about over four hours.”
Stan replied, “Thanks.”
Violin replied, “No problem.”
Stan then looked around and noticed that the kitchen light, which was one of the room right by the living room, was turned off.
Stan inquired, “Where is everyone?”
Violin answered, “My mother had to head to work. And my father took my younger brother to a school play, that he has a part in.”
Stan commented, “I find it odd that a girl's parents would trust two teenage boys with their teenage daughter. Not that either my brother or I are planning in anything.”
Violin said, “I am sure you are not. I get the sense that you are good people.”
Violin, mentally answered, 'Because, I know you are good people. And soon enough, your parents will be here to pick you up.'
Stan replied, “Thank you for your trust.”
Violin replied, “You're welcome. And thank you for your trust.” She then turned back to watching the episode playing on the living room TV.
Stan got up and walked out the room, and to the downstairs bathroom.
A few seconds later, he reached the bathroom.
Stan went into the bathroom, turning on a light, using the wall switch by the inside of the door. He then shut the door. Next, he went to the toilet, and raised the seat. Finally, he unzipped his fly, and relived himself.
When he was finished, he flushed the toilet, lowered the toilet seat, and went to the sink to wash his hands.
As he washed his hands, something caught his eye, through the curtains of the windows.
He turned off the wash, as he flipped off the light switch.
In the dark, he went to the curtains, and used his right index finger to slightly left the curtains, so he could peek outside.
It saw that the bathroom face the side of the house.
Fortunately, there was a streetlight nearby that illuminated the area.
And in the light. He saw Nodoka, and Mikoto, as girls, slowly walk around the house to the back.
Stat thought, 'They probably saw me, but they don't realize that I have seen them. And the fact they are circling around back, means that Yurika, and probably those pirate girls are here, at the front. I have got to get Lewis and I out of here right now!'
Stan turned and opened the door. He then rushed to the living room.
As Stan walked into the living room, Violin turned to Stan, and she saw that anxiety was showing on his face.
Violin thought, 'Something is wrong. And I don't know what. Please, don't let it be whom I think it is.'
Violin asked, “What is wrong, Stan?”
Stan ignored her, as he rushed around the couch, to stand in front of Lewis.
Stan leaned down, and shook Lewis on his shoulders.
Stan stated, “Lewis. You got to wake up. We got to leave, right now.”
Lewis started to wake up, as he said, in a weak tone of voice, “What is it?”
Stan thought, 'This is taking too long. He is still too groggy to think straight. And I don't have time for him to become fully awake. I am going to have to do this myself.'
Stan leaned further down, with his knees, and back.
Stan slid his hands, under Lewis' armpits, up to his forearms. He then carefully lifted Lewis up, until Stan was standing, with Lewis leaning his head over Stan's right shoulder.
Stan quickly thought, 'If I remember correctly. Lewis put that device in his right pocket. So, I need to free up my left hand.'
Stan reached around Lewis back, with his right hand and arm, to allow him to let go of his brother with his left hand.
Stan then used his left to reach into Lewis' front right pants pocket.
He immediately felt the reality device, as he thought, 'Pay dirt.'
As Stan used the fingers in his left hand to feel around Lewis' pocket, for the button on the device, he continued this thought, 'I wonder how my father handled his first unknown situation, like the situations we have been handling today?'
Violin thought, 'I have to figure out what is going on, before these boys jump ship.'
Violin got up, so she could walk to the two brother. But, just as she headed their way, there was a knock at the door.
Violin walked out of the living room, and to the front door.
Violin mentally cursed, 'Oh no. I understand now. Stan went to the bathroom, saw someone out the window that he recognized, and it spooked him. The problem is that means it is either one of three groups. The girls. The bounty hunter. Or, Ed, Bob, and Annie. And it cannot be Ed, Bob, and Annie. So, it has to be the other two groups.'
'And either of those groups will kick down the door, and trash the house, if I don't quickly answer the door.'
Violin then walked out of the room, down the hallway, to the front door.
After the unlocked the door, she opened it see all five Lagoon girls, and Yurika.
The Lagoon girls had their weapons sheathed, or holsters, except for Yukio holding her large machine gun, and Kristina having her gauntlets on her hands.
Violin mental yelled, 'Damn it! Not them! I would rather face the bounty hunters. At least I would not feel guilty about kicking their asses. And if Yurika here, so is Nodoka and Mikoto, whom Stan likely saw out of the window. Now, to get them out of here.'
Violin stated a little more loudly than she intended, in english, “What are you doing here?”
Molly inquired, “Violin, what are you doing here?”
Violin deadpanned, “This is my home. Welcome to the Shinmyou residence. Fortunately, my family is not here. So, what do you want?”
Kristina stated, “We are surprised to be here, as you are. We are after the boys. We just mentally focused on finding Stan and Lewis Lowe, and we used one of our reality devices, and we ended up here a few minutes ago.”
Violin turn to Yurika, as she inquired, “And what are you doing here?”
Yurika answered, “We had the same idea. And we end up appearing just beside these girls, at the same time they got here.”
Violin questioned, “By, we, I am assuming that your two sisters are here, as well?”
Yurika replied, “Yes. And since my sisters and I are sneaker than these five, we all agreed that my sisters would go around back, while I stay here with these five, to keep the destruction down to a minimum.”
Violin thought, “And with your martial arts abilities, and electrical powers, you might be able to keep these five in line better than your sisters could. Nice plan. And it almost worked.
Sarah softly demanded, “So, where are the brothers?”
Violin played dumb, “What do you mean?”
Sarah said, “Don't play coy with us. We focused on the brothers, and we came here. At this time. That means Lewis and Stan are here.”
Rebecca stated, “You either let us in, or we come in by force.”
Violin smirked, as she mentioned, “I know none of you have actually spared with me. But, by now, you should know how powerful I am.”
Yukio said, “We remember that time you actually sparred with Arcee, and you won.”
Violin admitted, “Well to be honest. Arcee was not using her weapons, and I think she was going easy on me.”
Molly complimented. “Even so. That was one hell of a fight. Especially, considering you were only fifteen at the time.”
Violin smiled, as she replied, “Thank you. That sparring match was a birthday gift from Arcee to me. I always wanted to fight a transformer.” She mentally added, 'In both my childhoods.' She continued, “And I finally got my wish.”
Kristina spoke up, “Still, I lost money on that fight.”
Yurika smirked, as she commented, “I know. I was the one you lost money to on that fight.”
Violin said, “So, we have established that I can probably take you six in a fight.”
Molly smirked, “Maybe. But, the question would be. Would your house still be standing after the fight? And I am sure your parents would demand an explanation, afterward.”
Violin mentally cursed, 'Damn it. She has a good point, there.'
Molly ordered, “Now, let us in.”
Violin conceded, “All right. You got me, there. I see why you are their leader, Molly. But, if I let you in, no fighting.”
Molly stated, “I have no interest in upsetting Birdy and Nataru. Nor, do I want to catch hell from my own parents over such a fight.”
Yurika agreed, “None of us do.”
The other girls nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Violin stated, “Still, if the boys are here. You are not harming them. Nor, taking them anywhere. Their parents will be here tomorrow, to pick them up.”
Molly responded, “Fine. We will just talk to them.”
Violin opened the door for them, as she said, “This way. And please shut the door gently.”
Violin let the way, with Sarah being the last one in.
And Sarah did closely the door gently.
Violin smiled at hearing her requested honored.
When the reached the living room, they saw that no was there.
Rebecca inquired the obvious, “Where are they?”
Violin stated, “They were right here, when I left them. The problem was that I think you may have somehow spooked them. And they jumped realities.”
Yukio accused, “So, you bought them time?”
Violin looked over at Yukio, as she responded, “No. I just didn't want you to break down my front door.”
Yukio conceded, “Point taken.”
Molly then noticed that an episode of Farscape was playing on the large, living room TV.
Molly inquired, in an insulting tone of voice, “I see you are still watching that cheesy series. I outgrew that years ago.”
Violin looked over at Molly, as she suppressed a wicked grin. Violin thought, 'It is so tempting to kick your ass for that insult. But, there are other ways to deal with you.'
Violin explained, “Actually, it is a little more complicated than that. I didn't want to scare the boys away, with them learning that I know them. Still, I think that I should remind you that Scorpius is after them.”
Violin noticed all the girls tensed up slightly at the mentioned of Scorpius' name.
Violin slyly thought, 'Not so cheesy anymore.'
Molly commented, “We did here something about a bounty on the boys. I believe Scorpius' name was mentioned.”
Violin stated, “You six are playing a dangerous game, with dangerous people.”
Yukio smirked, as she said, “We are pretty dangerous ourselves.”
Violin responded, “Not at this level. Not on the battlefield. Sure, you can kick some serious ass. But, you have no real experience with fighting away from the battlefield. Where people plan several moves ahead, even before the first move is take. Scorpius would have all of you for breakfast.”
“It is fortunate, that the gender change has done wonders for Scorpius' personality. As she is now, if you confronted her, she would likely return you to your parents, in chains, alive, and mostly unharmed. She would let you parents deal with you. Which, might actually be a cruel mercy for all of you. Still, you would be in one piece, and mostly unharmed.”
Molly realized what Violin was saying. Molly stated, “If we see any Peacekeepers, or Scorpius, we will run, and teleport away.”
Yurika also took what Violin said, to be serious. Yurika said, “Same here, for my sisters and I.”
Violin said, “Good. Now, you fully comprehend the situation that the boys are in. And that is why I wanted to introduce them to the series that Scorpius is from.”
Sarah was the first to understand the logic behind Violin's actions. Sarah complimented, “So, they would have a clue as to what is going on. Without you truly divulging your identity, or how you could be connected to this mess. Thus, you would not risk scaring them away. That was not a bad plan.”
Violin looked over at her, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Yurika commented, “I agree. That was a pretty good plan. Still, the last time I saw some of that series with you, was at the sci-fi convention, that time, when you were wearing that golden chainmail bikini.”
Violin looked over at the green haired girl, as she quipped, “At least I was not wearing that seifuku, like you.”
Yurika responded, with a bit of annoyance in her voice, “I will have you know that seifuku was almost an exact replica of my father's white and black seifuku. The only difference was that except for the seifuku not being blue and white. Instead, the seifuku was green and what. With the green matching my hair. And, at the time, even you admitted that I looked good in that seifuku.”
Violin said, “Yes. I did say that. Thought, that statement should be wrong in so many ways.”
Yurika's lips curled into a wicked grin, as she replied, “Yes. But, it is true.”
Violin conceded, “Yes. And Mikoto wore that blue classic star trek, star fleet uniform costume for a Starfleet female officer. And I cannot believe that Nodoka went as a jedi that year. And she won first place at the cosplay contest with that Jedi costume.”
Yurika admitted, “Well, I think Annie helped Nodoka with her costume. Actually, knowing Annie, that might have been an authentic jedi uniform.”
Violin agreed, “That would not surprise me. And well, since the boys are no longer here. And my father will likely show up, with my brother, very soon. It would be best if you all left, before my father's car reaches the driveway outside.”
The girls looked at each other, as Kristina said, “Violin is right. None of us have known her to lie. And even if she did hide the boys, I doubt they would still be here.”
Sarah added to her sister's commented, “And it would be best if we don't trash Violin's family home.”
Molly agreed, “You are both right. We will find the boys later. Okay, girls. Let's leave before Violin's parents get home.”
The teenage girls then walked back the way they came, to the front door, with Violin following right behind them.
Kristina opened the door for the others, and held the door for them, until she was the only want inside, besides Violin, whom was standing beside her.
Kristina then walked, outside, as well.
Violin then walked up to stop at the threshold of the front door to her home, as she watched the other teenage girls walk away from the home.
When the girls were all outside, in the front yard, several feet away from the front door, they saw that Nodoka and Mikoto were standing there, waiting for them.
The two teenage girls walked up to their sister, Yurika, as Nodoka asked, “What did we miss?”
Yurika replied, “Not much. I will tell you later.”
Mikoto looked over and saw Violin standing inside the threshold of the front door to the home. She asked, “Why is Violin here?”
Yurika answered, “This is her family home.”
Mikoto turned to Yurika, as she responded, “You can tell us about it, later.”
As Yurika pulled out her reality device, she said, “Exactly.”
Both groups separated, as Molly pulled out her reality device, as well.
The members of each group then stood closely together, while Molly looked over at Violin. Molly said, “Another time, Violin.”
Violin replied, “Another time, Molly.”
Violin then watched as both groups disappeared, as they jumped to two different realities, times, and places.
Violin turned, and walked back inside. She more emotionally tired, than physically tired.
Violin though, 'I have had enough of today. I just want some sleep. I will tell my parents that the boys left, when I wake up in the morning.'
Violin then closed and locked the front door behind her. Next, she went into the living room, turning off the blu-ray player and TV. And finally, she headed upstairs, to her bedroom, to get ready for bed, and to get some sleep.
(_)
The next day, it was a cloudy Monday, at noon, as Violin stood in the front yard of her family home, waiting for Ed, Bob, and Annie to show up. With Ed holding her reality device.
Violin was clean, ready, and dressed in similar clothing to what she had the previous day.
Violin had already said her goodbye to her family that morning. Along with telling them that the boys had decided to leave. But, she left out the circumstances of why they left.
Violin had been standing for around ten minutes, when she saw Ed, Bob, and Annie appear fifteen feet in front of her.
Ed was holding her reality device.
Violin then realized, they were standing in the same place, with the same clothes they had on yesterday. She inquired, in english “So, you guys really did just jumped one day into the future?”
Ed stated, “Yes. It is just the for us easiest way to deal with the situation. We give you the time to deal with your situation. While, we don't waste our time waiting for you to get you head clear.”
Annie approved, “I like the idea.”
Bob said, “So, do I. And given you went from bubbling and catatonic, to having a personality merger. You really needed to the time. Though, we really want to find our children as soon as possible.”
As Violin walked up to the group, she complimented, “I fully understand.”
Bob asked, “So, how are you doing, Violin? Are you going to be alright?”
Violin came to a stop, to stand need the other three adult. She answered, “I am going to be fine. I sorted out my problems with this part of my family, at least.”
Bob inquired, “Good. And do you have any gender issues?”
Violin stated, “In that regard, there are no real issues for me. Keep in mind I already spent over eighteen years as a girl. And I am conformable being a girl. I am just sorting through my two pairs of memories. That will just take time. Also, it seems that as Violin, I always liked both genders. The John part of me is still getting use to liking both men and women, due to the merger. Though, that is a small part of me, as a while. And both sides of myself like being bi-sexual, because it means being with Aeryn, in an intimate relationship, is still possible.”
Bob questioned, “Are you sure she swings that way?”
Violin smiled, as she commented, “Take my word for it. My wife swings every way. Even though she hasn't done it as often as Chiana. When it comes to sexual imagination, my wife makes Chiana look like a sweet, innocent virgin.”
Bob said, “I believe you.”
Violin commented, “Also, you are not going to believe this. The boys were here.”
Ed asked, “Are they still here?”
Violin, “No. The Lagoon girls and trio sisters showed up. Your sons left why I was dealing with the girls. I am sorry. But, if I had not confronted them, the girls would have wrecked my home.”
Ed stated, “I understand, Violin. You did nothing wrong in that situation. You had to do, what you had to do.”
Bob commented, “I agree with my wife, Violin. You did what you had to do. But, it seems we will have to have a word with the girls, after all.”
Ed smiled wickedly, as she said, “Maybe more than words. I do not like it when people go around my back, and after my children.”
Bob turned to his wife, as he stated, “Ed, we will try the civil approach. That way, if they don't listen, we do not have to worry about any reprisals from their parents, when we get rough.”
Ed turned to her husband, as she agreed, “Good point. Perfect plausible deniability.”
Violin smiled, as she replied, “Thank you, guys.”
While Violin, Ed, and Bob, had been talking, Annie had been quiet, as she sensed around with the force. She then stated, “It may have been a good thing that the boys left.”
The other three adults became quiet, as they turned to look at Annie.
Violin inquired, “Why is that?”
Annie looked over at Violin, as she explained, “I sense they were from the past, compared to the last time I sensed them. It is best we did not confront them, at the time they were at, here. Doing so would likely would have created a paradox.”
Violin eyes widened, as she stated, “Oh frell. I screwed myself, didn't I? I showed them first couple of episodes of Farscape series. That lead them me, as John. Where I turned them down. And this who screwy situation started.”
Annie said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Sorry John. But, that is very likely the case.”
Bob commented, “It has happened to the best of us. It even happened to me.”
Ed pointed out, “Don't worry about it, Violin. You were already stuck in a time loop. If you did not do what you did. You would have created a paradox.”
Annie agreed, “Ed is right about this. And I sense in you that John is just as much there, as you Violin. So, you are still alive in every sense of the term. You could just consider your death between you old life and new life, to a minor speed bump, in your existance.”
Violin deadpanned, “Yea. A speed bump with tits, a pussy, and monthly periods.”
Annie responded, “I deal with the same problems you have. Actually, our origins are somewhat similar, in a few ways. My male body was a wreck, while your sanity was a wreck. I think I may have had the longer end of the stick on that.” She thought, 'And I don't believe I just said that.'
Violin thought on what Annie said for a few seconds. She then replied, “Oh lord. I can actually see the comparisons. And I find that disturbing.”
Annie acknowledged, “Yes. I admit that the comparisons are disturbing. It is likely why we are such good friends.”
Violin replied, “That, and the fact that I was already use to dealing with badasses of your caliber. As such, you didn't intimidate me.”
Annie stated, “That too. And you have a nice sense of humor, that you retained, even in your current life.”
Violin said, “Thank you.”
Annie commented, “You're welcome. Along with this, as you just said. Aeryn is flexible. Also, I am sure that she and your son will accept you. And now, you and Aeryn will have much more in common. Including, that she will never be able to play the, it's that time of the month, card against you, ever again.”
Violin conceded, “You have a point there. Did Padme ever pull that excuse on you?”
Annie admitted, “A couple of times. But, only a couple.”
Violin raised an eyebrow, “Interesting. Have you played that card, before?”
Annie responded, “Only when it really is that time of the month, and my partner wanted to have sex. And even then, I tried to be accommodating, in other ways. I do not use my period as an excuse to be a bitch.”
Violin replied, “Neither have I. I hate when women do that.”
Ed agreed, “Same here.”
A few seconds later, Annie and Violin looked over at Bob
Bob flay asked, “What?”
Annie hinted, “We know you change into woman.”
Bob understood what they their unspoken question was. He stated, “Oh. I never experienced that little problem. And I don't plan to for a while. Ed here has been nice enough not to make me go through that.”
Ed turned to Violin and Annie, as she said, “Bob has always been considerate when B and I had our periods. And I figured that given Bob was willing to become female for over nine months, get pregnant and give birth to one of our sons. That I was already asking enough of my husband, in such matters.”
Annie turned to Ed, as she responded, “Those are good points.” She looked over at Bob, as she continued, “But, from what I understand, you will eventually lock in your female form, Bob?
Bob said, “Yes. And we will talk this subject, then.”
Annie replied, “Okay.”
Violin said, “Works for me.”
Annie joked, “By the way, Bob. You know. If you changed into a woman, we could have an all female team.”
Bob smirked, as he casually replied, “Nah. I like being the oddball.”
Ed, Annie, and Violin giggled at Bob's comment, for a few seconds.
As they quieted down, Ed said, “Okay. Let's get moving. Those bounty hunters we ran into gave me an idea. I was thinking we might want to check with some our sons' teachers. They might have a clue about where they went.”
Bob turned to Ed, as he complimented, “That is a great idea. I suggest we start with Stan's coach. Caxton.”
Bob turned to Annie and Violin, as he continued, “And if you are wondering. Mister Caxton is a nice older man.”
Bob turned to Ed, as he went onto say, “If Stan was looking for help, besides us. He would turned to Coach Caxton. Let's focus on Caxton, in the next time period, after the boys left the Cowboy Bebop reality. When they likely return their home reality, and meet with Caxton. If he meets the boys, it will probably be after we saw the boys sucked through that unstable gate.”
Violin thought, 'Caxton? Where have I heard that name before?'
Ed responded, “Good thinking. And I agree. If the boys run out of options, they will eventually go to him. Everyone group up to me.”
The three other adults stepped up close a few feet closer to Ed. Ed then mentally focused on Bob's suggestion. She held that thought, as she pressed the red button on her reality device. The four adults then disappeared, as they jumped to their home reality, and time, on the planet Mars.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
I really like the title for this chapter. 'John's Violin.' This title fits this chapter very well.
That is not to say that Violin is now John's puppet. No. That is not the case.
This is a true merger for Violin and John. That is not Violin being Violin with some of John's memories. Nor, John possessing Violin, and overwhelming her personality with his own.
Their personalities have completely merged. One personality, with both of them being so alike, in a number of areas, that the merger has not serious problems. And besides the gender differences, for John's family and friends, Violin/John still has mostly same personality. While Violin has the same type of personality, with most of her family and friends not noticing any differences with her personality.
On the funeral that Scorpius put together, and hosted, for John's corpse.
I wanted to show how Scorpius has become genuinely nicer. It is shown that in the Farscape that Scorpius does have a nice side. He has honor. He can be honest. He rewards hard work and loyalty. And he is the type of person that if things had gone differently for him, he would have likely been a great person to know.
The problem was that Scorpius was haunted by his past traumas, healthy problems, and the result rage from these issues. And even then, it is shown, after Scorpius escaped the Scarrans, stated, and indirectly shown, how Scorpius spend much of his life working towards overcoming his past, his health problems, and his rage, to become a better person.
And with the gender change, Scorpius had all her healthy problems solves, and is a better person for it.
And with John's funeral, I would show how Scorpius has become a better person.
To that end, I found those scenes, I wrote, to be touching.
I always felt that Scorpius and John started on the wrong foot, in some many ways. With neither realizing how much potential the other had, when the first met. And that is why Scorpius treated John so badly. And visa versa.
Scorpius holding John's funeral, was her basically saying, that she wishes things did not turn out this way. That she is sorry for her part in this mess, that was John's life. And that this massive, extravagant funeral, would help make up for some of what she did to John.
Now, on the scenes dealing with the inside Violin/John's soul.
This was a delicate set of scenes. Though, I think I pulled it off, well.
I had to be careful of what lines I would cross, and how I would cross the lines I crossed in those scenes. I think it came out well.
I enjoyed bringing back Harvey. And how Scorpius is a different person, Harvey is not a different person. And John comes to realize this. And the reconcile with each other.
The tours that Harvey gave to John was fun to write. With John learning about Violin's life. And how their personality were not that different. And how John's own memories and personality were already effecting Violin, even when Violin was at a very young age.
Also, I found it both funny, and ironic, that given John is such a pop-culture fan, that as Violin, she become John's biggest fan.
Then the symbolism of sex as the personality merge. Harvey put it best. For John not to take Violin. But, for John to let Violin have him.
Afterward, I had Annie confirm the merger, and Violin/John relative sanity. Though, given Violin and John's separate personalities, beforehand. That is not saying much.
And I did enjoy the banter between Violin, Annie, Ed, and Bob.
On that note. Concerning Annie and John's friendship. I enjoyed writing Annie and John's friendship from Book Two, and Book Four. For those two, it is more like an odd couple situation. The relationship was platonic, with both of them tolerating the oddities the other had, while still getting along.
And with John's personality merged with Violin's personality, Annie has made it very clear that he friendship with John has extending into Violin's life.
And beforehand, Annie and Violin have a pleasant association, even before they learned she was the reincarnation of John.
Then, there was Violin heading back home. With Violin's family still accepting and loving her, as daughter to her parents, and a sister to her brother.
After which, the scenes begin to repeat some of the scenes in Book Four, Chapter Three, 'Dancing Through Time And Space.'
Only this time, it is from Violin's point of view. With the Lowe brothers being before they met John, but with Violin, it being after she merged with John's personality.
Though, by expanding on the scenes with Violin's thoughts, I changed some of the dynamics of the scene.
This is just another way to show how writing a scene, had been seen from a different point of view, without changing any of the actual events in the scene.
Also, in those scenes, I wanted to show that Violin/John screwed their self in more ways than one. And that they actions, in both lives, lead them to the situation, of John dying, and Violin and John's personality later merging, in Violin's body.
With Violin, after personality merger, showing the Lowe brothers the Farscape series, which cause them to go to John for help Which John turning them down. And Violin eventually getting John killed, and awaking John in her soul. With them their personalities now merged.
Depending on the point of view, of which character you want to talk about, this is case of effect coming before cause.
This is even pointed out the next day, for Violin. When she rejoined Annie, Ed, and Bob. With Annie stating, that what she sense through the force was that the Lowe brothers were from their past, and it would have likely caused a paradox, if Ed and Bob met them, at that point in their timeline.
In addition, due to my recursive writing style. You will likely go back and re-reach Book Four, Chapter Three. And now, when you read the scenes of Violin meeting Stan and Lewis, in Tokyo. You will realize what what point in time, that Violin was.
Also, when you read about Violin coming on board Moya, with Violin going into total fangirl mode, the scenes will be even funnier, because Violin you now know that Violin is the reincarnation of John, and she is basically squealing about her previous life, without knowing it... Though, I will admit these revelations about Violin being the reincarnation of John might make those scene a little creepy, as well. But, the scenes, in question, are still funny.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Eight: “Dancing In The Nightlife.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
In another reality, Stan and Lewis found themselves in an alley. With them standing, and facing, only twenty feet from the exit to the alleyway, with the other exit being a hundred feet away.
Given the color of the sky, they knew it was dark.
While the brothers were wearing the same clothing they had on, when they checked out of their hotel, together, they did not have their suitcases with them.
Stan inquired, in english, “Are you sure it was wise to leave our luggage back home. Two hours after we left our home in the first place.”
Lewis pocketed his reality device, as he stated, in english, “Sure. I cannot think of a safer place. Think about it. Who is going to look for our stuff under our beds, back home. And, except for the female clothing. No one is going to raise any eyebrows.”
Stan asked, “On second thought, I agree with you. So, did you focus on our three cousins, after they were at Violin's home, while we there?”
Lewis answered, “Yes. I made sure to do that.”
Stan stated, “Now, let's see where we are, and find our cousins.”
The brothers then walked twenty feet in front of them, and onto a main street that was connected to the alleyway.
They found they were in a business district of a busy modern, urban city.
Even though it was night, were plenty of lights from the buildings, and streetlights. Also, there were people walking down the sidewalks, on both sides of the four lane street. With two oncoming lanes and two ongoing lanes.
Cars, and other vehicles, passing by, both ways on the four lane street in front of them.
The vehicles were driving on the left side of the road.
As the brothers looked around, Stan stated, “Judging from the architecture. And the fact the vehicles are driving on the left side of the road. I would guess we are somewhere in the United Kingdom. Britain. In the late twentieth century, or early twenty-first century.”
Lewis commented, “And from the looked of the clothing styles and car models, I would say we are in the early twenty-first century.”
Stan replied, “Works for me. Now, where are our cousins?”
The brothers then looked around.
Then, Lewis saw something. He used his left hand to point across the street, at a trio of people. He stated, “I think I see one of them.” He then dropped his left hand back to his side.
Stan looked over, across the street, and he saw Nodoka, in a sexy dress, with her long purple hair pulled back in a ponytail. She was being accompanied by two equally sexy men, in suits.
The three individuals were being confronted by the bouncer at the entrance of the nightclub. Though, there was no line going into the nightclub. With just the three individuals present, with the bouncer.
As Stan looked more closely at the two men. He noticed that the two men seem somehow familiar.
One of the men had blue hair with black highlights, cut short at the neckline. And the other man had green hair, which was pulled back into a ponytail.
The two brothers then watched as the all three individuals were cleared by the bouncer, and let into a nightclub.
Stan agreed, “Yes. That is Nodoka. But, who are those two older boys with her? And where are her sisters?”
Lewis pointed out, “Well, one of them had blue hair with black highlights and the other man has green hair. I think they are our cousins, in their male forms. Even there hair styles are the same. Though, Yurika's has her... Er, his hair pulled back into a ponytail. Though, Mikoto's hairstyle works in either gender.”
Stan pointed out, “But, they are younger in their male forms, like we are in our female forms.”
Lewis stated, “I think they they ate some nattou to age their male forms by a few years.”
Stan said, “That makes sense. I also guess they are bi-sexual, because doing so, with their pheromones, will attract a lot of women.”
Lewis commented, “I would not be surprised if they play both fields.”
Stan replied, “Me neither.”
Lewis stated, “Now, let's confront them by going into the nightclub. I do not see a line out front, so I think we caught the place on an off day.”
Lewis and Stan headed to a crosswalk, where they were soon able across the street, and approach the entrance to the nightclub.
Just as the two brothers were about to enter the front entrance to the nightclub, a large, fair skin man, in a fine suit, clearly acting as the bouncer, stopped them. He stated, in english, “Hold it gentlemen. There is both a dress code, and some rules, that have to be upheld, before I can let you both go inside”
Both brothers stood in front of the bouncer, as they looked him, in his face, as he looked back at them.
Stan politely requested, “Okay. What are the rules? And does this include being over twenty-one?”
The bouncer answered, “Only if you are ordering alcoholic drinks.”
Stan replied, “We are not planning too.”
The bouncer commented, “Then, you will be fine on that matter. Still there are three other issues. First, you have to be eighteen, or older.”
Lewis said, “That will not be a problem for us.”
Lewis thought, 'I am glad we kept these Tokyo IDs. I just hope that we are within a few years of being parallel to the year we went to in Tokyo.'
'And it is worth the gamble. Given we have seen here, we should be within a few years different of the Tokyo we left. So, it is worth the risk. And if it works, we should be fine. If not. We will do something else.'
Stan and Lewis pulled out the fake Tokyo IDs they had. And they handed the IDs to the bouncer.
The bouncer looked at them for a moment, as he commented, “Tokyo. These are Tokyo IDs. I can barely make heads or tails from them. All I can read are the birth dates. But, no one would fake an ID from Tokyo, to get into a nightclub in London. And if it was a fake ID, it would say you are over twenty-one. Not nineteen.”
Stan thought, with amusement, 'We would. And at least we now also know when we are.'
Lewis thought, 'So, we are a year's difference from when we left Tokyo. Look's like we lucked on out that.'
Stan lied, “True. We caught a flight from their to here. And we heard about this place.”
The bouncer returned their IDs to them, as he said, “I don't think your age is going to be a problem.”
As the brothers put their IDs back where they had them, Stan inquired, “And the other other rules?”
The bouncers stated, “Men have to wear suits. Women have to were dresses.”
Stan shrugged, “That should not be a problem.”
Lewis lied, “Our hotel is nearby. We can come back in suits, and dress shoes, without a problem.”
The bouncer said, “We also have a cover charge for men.”
Lewis thought, 'And this is why I don't like going to nightclub. I find the cover charges just for men to be sexist. But, we need answers. So, we will just have to deal with the situation. And as such, we need to know how much the cover charges are.'
Lewis asked, “How much?”
The bouncer answered, “On Friday, and the weekend, it is two hundred British pounds, per man. But, on an off night, like tonight, it is fifty pounds.”
Lewis thought, 'Well, that does confirms that it is an off day for them. Which is a week night.' And I can get the cash, using our reality device, and other resources. But, I wonder if he will take U.S. cash? Which is easier to get.'
Lewis inquired, “Will you settle for a hundred U.S. cash, per each of us?”
The bouncer responded, “Yes. That will be fine. Though, your main problem is that we only allow couples and groups in. And there has to be at least one male, and one female in the group.”
The brothers looked at each other for a few seconds in silence. They then looked back at the bouncer.
Stan coyly inquired, “I have a girlfriend that I can bring back here. But, I have a question. Do the women have to wear high heels? She only wears flat soles.” He thought, 'I don't know how to walk with high heels. And I doubt Lewis knows how to either. Though, there is the question of who is going to convince the other to being the girl, and wear the dress?'
The bouncer stated, “As long as the shoes go with the dress, I have no problem if they are flat soled. Personally, I prefer women in flat sole shoes. Less chance of them slipping on the dance floor and suing us.”
Stan complimented, “Smart thinking.”
The bouncer replied, “Thank you. I guess I will see you later.”
Stan replied, “Yes.”
Lewis commented, “We looked forward to it.” Lewis looked around, and he saw what he was looking for. He turned to Stan, as he requested, “This way.”
Stan turned to Lewis, as he said, “Okay.”
Lewis the turned and started walking away, with Stan following Lewis. With the two brothers heading towards the left side of the front of the nightclub building.
A minute later, Lewis lead Stan around a corner, and into an alleyway, between the nightclub building, and another building.
There was still enough light around to see with.
Lewis came to a stop, and turned to face Stan.
Stan stopped a few feet behind Lewis.
The two brothers looked around, and they saw no one.
Lewis and Stan then looked at each other, as Lewis asked, “I don't see anyone? How about you.”
Stan replied, “I don't see anyone, either.”
Lewis stated, “Okay. By the way, I am not going as a girl, and wearing a dress.”
Stan inquired, “Why not? I am the a bit more macho than you.”
Lewis said, “Well, I don't want too. And it is debatable which of us is more macho. You may be a bit more macho than me in sports. But, I got you beat in love of guns.”
Stan replied, “I am not arguing that.”
Lewis suggested, “Good. So, I was thinking you could go as the girl, in a dress and slippers.”
Stan responded, “Well, I don't want to go as a girl, either. Also, our female forms don't look like they are eighteen, or older. Meaning that one of us, that does go as a girl, has to eat nattou, with the pheromone problems. With her fending off men all night.”
Lewis said, “Yes. I realized that, as well. That was my second, go to, excuse. Anyway, if we are going to do this. Also, I know where we can get a dress and nattou. So, those problem is taken care.”
Stan commented, “Still, we have to decide who is going to go as the woman.”
Lewis responded, “True. Let's make it fair.” He then reached into one of his pants pockets, and pulled out a coin. He suggested, “How about we flip a coin? You pick which side.”
Stan replied, “Works for me. I pick heads.”
Lewis flipped the coin, and a few seconds later, they saw how the coin landed, on the grown.
(_)
Two reality jumps later. Ten minutes later time for the reality where the nightclub was, and two hours time for the Lowe brothers.
Two people walking out, out of an alleyway, on the left side of the nightclub building.
The black haired, tanned skin boy, wore a black suit, and black dress shoes. The boy was over seventeen and a half years old.
The boy walked beside a redheaded fair skin girl, whom was with the teenage boy, looked as old as teenage boy was. She wore a red evening gown, with red flat sole slippers.
Two of the walked side by side, with the teenage girl being to the teenage boy's left side, and closer to the building.
As they turned the corner, to their left, and headed onto the front the sidewalk, towards the front entrance to the nightclub, they saw there was no one around. With them being around thirty yards from the bouncer, at the entrance to the nightclub.
So, the two teenagers knew it was safe to talk, for the moment.
Lewis turned to his left side, as he looked at his currently hot sister, Stan. Lewis noticed that Stan was not real happy with losing the coin toss, and being a teenage girl in a red dress.
While they continued to walk, Lewis thought, 'I need to do something to cheer up Stan.'
Lewis commented, “Oh don't sulk. Red is our color as girls. We might as well go with it.”
Stan turned to Lewis, as she said, in a calm tone of voice, “I am not sulking. It is just that I am not happy about losing the coin toss.”
Lewis commented, “Well, it was a normal coin, and you called it.”
Stan stated, “True. I lost. Fair and square. I am just not liking the situation.”
Lewis said, “Well, you only have to deal with this situation, for an hour, or so. You will be fine.”
Stan commented, “I know. And it was intelligent, on your part, to go back to the Tokyo, where and when we were living, a day after we left, to shop for our clothing.”
Lewis questioned, “Thank you. Are you okay with the clothes you have on?”
Stan responded, “Yes. I can live with wearing these clothes, for a little while. The bra and panties, for my more mature female form, are not that bad. And I can live with this red evening gown. It is a simple design, that looks nice, but not too nice. And I happen to like the slippers. Given I am not wearing socks, nor stockings. They actually feel comfortable on my feet.”
Lewis replied, “That is nice to hear. And at with our female forms, we don't have to shave our legs.”
Stan inquired, “True. Stephanie sometimes complained to me about her having to do that. Still, I need to know. Given my pheromones, are you turned on by me?”
Lewis admitted, “You smell good. But, just as it was with you, towards me. The fact we are siblings makes it you complete turn off for me.”
Stan replied, “That is comforting to her. And at least I am not wearing any makeup.”
Lewis said, “I would not put you through anything, that I would not go through.”
Stan smiled, as she commented, “I appreciate that. And I look good without it.”
Lewis questioned, “That you do. And you are welcome. So, what is your plan, if the nattou wears off?”
Stan said, “We already know that we have a few seconds warning. If that happens, I come get you, and we leave as quickly as possible.”
Lewis inquired, “That will work. Though, I am wondering, how are we going to deal with you not having an ID?”
Stan flatly stated, “My pheromones. If that doesn't work. We will teleport in.”
Lewis said, “Okay. Either way, could work. Also, I have the U.S. cash, that I got from that ATM, in Tokyo. For the cover charge. So, we are good there. But, I would prefer not to spend it. Just on sheer principle.”
Stan stated, “I understand. And I agree such fees are sexist. So, I will see what I can do.”
Lewis replied, “Thanks.”
Several seconds later, they reached the entrance and the bouncer.
Stan and Lewis stopped in front of the bouncer. With with other bouncer look back at him.
The bouncer commented, “Well, that was quick. But, what happened to the other man?”
Lewis lied, “He will be coming in a little while, with his date.” He then honestly said, “Also, you have seen my ID. Do I have to show it to you, again?”
The bouncer replied, “Yes. I have seen your ID. And given it has only been a few minutes. You don't have to show it to me, again” He then looked at Stan, as he commented, “But, I haven't seen yours.”
Stan took a few steps closer to the bouncer, as she said, “I don't think I need an ID.”
As the bouncer got one whiff of Stan's pheromones, and he enjoyed her smell. The bouncer said, with interest in his tone of voice, “You look old enough. Still, there is a cover charge for you boyfriend.”
Stan said, in the most seductive tone of voice she could fake, “And I think you could wave that charge, for now.”
As the pheromones continued to do their work, the bouncer agreed, “I think you are right. Both you can go right in.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.
Stan and Lewis then quickly entered the nightclub.
When they were inside, they saw that it was a standard nightclub, with techno music playing. Though, the music was not deafening. And one could easily talk over it.
The nightclub had a dance floor, in the back of the room. With a bar counter, with stools, to their right. And cushioned, curved, booths, with tables lining on wall of the room, to their left.
They both saw spotted their three cousins, at the same time.
They saw that Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika coming off the dance floor, and heading to one of the cushioned booths, by the left wall of the room. With Nodoka being female, and Mikoto and Yurika still be male, and in their nattou enhanced male forms.
Stan quietly reminded Lewis, “Remember. They don't know it is me. And they likely think you will not recognize that it is Mikoto and Yurika with Nodoka. Use that to your advantage.”
Lewis responded, “I will.”
Lewis and Stan then walked up to the both the other three teenagers, whom were around Stan and Lewis' age.
As Stan and Lewis came to a stop in front of the booth, they saw that Nodoka was sitting in the middle of the curved seats of the booth, with Yurika to Nodoka's left side, and Mikoto being to right side of Nodoka.
Also, the Lowe siblings noticed there was no one in the booths, beside their cousins' booth. Offering them some privacy, as they talked with each other.
As the three siblings looked up at Lewis and Stan. Though, the focused mainly on Lewis, due to them clearly not recognizing Stan.
Lewis and Stan then noticed the surprised looks that all three had for Lewis being there.
Stan thought, 'Well, they are clearly surprised to see us. Or, should I say, see Lewis. From the looked of things, they do not recognize me. Which is good for us. And Lewis will pretend he does not recognize Mikoto and Yurika.”
Lewis was the first to speak, as he looked directly at Nodoka. He greeted her, by politely saying, “Hello, Nodoka.”
Nodoka inquired, “What are you doing here, Lewis?
Lewis answered, “To find out what is really going on. And I figured I could get some answers from you.”
Nodoka responded, “So, you came to us?”
Lewis said, “Of course. Scorpius is after us. Bounty hunters she hired are after us. Those five psychos we have seen you with are after us. We have exhausted most of our leads. And we are still upset with our parents. You, Mikoto, and Yurika, are many things. But, we believe you are sane. So, will you help us? And tell us what the hell is really going on?”
Nodoka looked at Mikoto and Yurika. The other two nodded. Nodoka then turned back to Lewis, as she stated, “Okay. I will answer your questions. Though, where is Stan?”
Lewis lied, “He is elsewhere, looking for information.”
Nodoka inquired, “Okay. And who is this?”
Lewis lied again, “A hooker I picked up, because this place only allows couples, and more, to come in.” He thought, 'I regret I could not think of a better excuse. I will have to make it up to you, later Stan.'
Stan suppressed a frown, as she just ignored the comment. She thought, 'Well, it is a fair excuse, to come up with on the spot. And right now. As much as I hate to admit. I am just the distraction and pretty face of this plan. I will let Lewis know, I am okay with that excuse.'
The three cousins lightly laughed, for a few seconds.
While the trio calmed down, Lewis suggested, in a calm, though firm tone of voice, “I feel this is a conversation in best left in private. Between the two of us.”
Nodoka agreed, “Okay.” She turned to Mikoto, and then Yurika, as she requested, “You two, be nice to the redhead, while I talk to Lewis.”
Mikoto replied, in his male voice, “Okay.”
Yurika said, in his male voice, “We will talk to you, later.”
Stan smirked, as she teased, “Come on boys. You can treat me to a drink at the bar.”
Mikoto and Yurika smelled Stan's pheromones, while Stan smelled their pheromones.
Stan thought, 'I have to fight the attraction.'
On the other hand, Mikoto said, with interest in his tone of voice, “Sure.”
Yurika enjoyed Stan's pheromones, as he commented, “I would like to get to know you better.”
The two boys exited the booth, and escort Stan to the bar counter, with Stan sitting on a stool, between the boys, sitting on their stools.
There were not any customers nearby the three individual. And the bartender, whom was standing behind the bar counter, was busy with other customers.
Meanwhile, Nodoka move to Lewis' right side, in the booth, as Lewis entered the booth, to sit on the cushions to his left side.
At they looked across the table from each other.
Nodoka inquired, “So, Lewis. What would you like to know first?”
Lewis answered, “Well, I already know about my family. So, let's start with your family. How many of your parents are gender benders? And how many parents do you have?”
Nodoka thought, 'It is a fair question. And it is not like our parents ever tried to keep their gender bending secret from their friends. So, I might as well too him.'
Nodoka stated, “We have three parents. All three of our parents are gender benders. Each one of them gave birth to one of us three. Within the same hour. From what I understand, you father played midwife to all three of our births.”
Lewis suppressed a chuckled, as he thought, 'I will have to ask him about that adventure. But, first things first.'
Lewis asked, with a bit amusement in his tone of voice, “Interesting. Are your parents like my father, in their gender bending abilities?”
Nodoka responded, “No. Unlike you father, each of our parents are a different type of gender bender. My mother, Ranma, got her abilities by a water curse. Then, there is Natsuru gets hers by a magical bracelet. And Akira gets hers from her family. Akira's gender bending abilities come from the same gene combination as your father.”
Lewis questioned, “Hatsushiba Akira?”
Nodoka replied, “Yes. We saw Stan with him at a concert. But, not you.”
Lewis said, “I was not there. Though, Stan informed me of him. Or, should I say, her. So, where does Akira, and my father, get their abilities from?”
Nodoka explained, “Long story short, you, your brother, your father, my two sisters, and Akira, and Akira's family, are not completely human. And while my sisters are distantly blood related to you, I am not technically related you.”
Lewis stated, “You are close enough for me, and I guess, Stan.”
Nodoka replied, “Thank you. Anyway, while you are all mostly human, you are descended from two alien races Alteran and Shimeru. This genetic mix is what made you, and your father, Akira, and her sister, aunt Kaori, latent gender benders.”
Lewis inquired, “Shimeru? As in Futuaba and Kurin Shimeru?”
Nodoka asked, “Yes. I take it that you have met them?”
Lewis answered, “Yes. When we got blasted into the past of that reality. I became a teacher, and taught them, for a month.”
Nodoka recalled, as she said, “Oh. That's right. I overheard Futaba mention that.”
Lewis inquired, “You know him?”
Nodoka stated, “Yes. You and Stan are eventually are going to find out that most of the people you have been meeting, know each other, and your parents. Honestly, the whole, normal life plan, that your parents had for you, was considered kind of a joke, for most of us.”
Lewis questioned, “That figures. So, who are the Alterans?”
Nodoka answered, “Another alien race. Though, unlike the Shimeru, they are not gender benders... Well, not normally. Though, there is a long story dealing with you father, and a gender bending virus.”
Lewis thought, 'It looks like Stan and I have a lot to discuss with our parents, when we see them.' He calmly stated, “I will talk to my parents about that, later. Just please answer the question.”
Nodoka said, “Alterans are a long lived species. For example, Violin's family are Alterans. To be exact, Violin's family is actually a sub-species of Alterans, called Ixioran Altairian, whom are normally bred to be alien super-soldiers.”
Lewis thought, 'Damn. I just lost a bet. But, Stan doesn't know, yet. That also means that Violin's home reality is my father's home reality. Though, this does explain a lot. Still, that does not explain one thing.'
Lewis commented, “They don't act like soldiers.”
Nodoka pointed out, “That is because none of them are. Birdy was trained to be a cop, since she was a child. The others have no combat training. And they are very well adjust, for the most part. Actually, Violin is half-human. Her father was human, genetically... It is also a long story. Though, before you ask about Violin's father. That is a complicated answer. With Violin being raised by her mother, and stepfather. Whom are both Ixioran Altairian, along with Yuuichi, Violin's half-brother.”
Lewis rolled who eyes, for a few seconds. Then, he looked back at Nodoka, as he inquired, “Is everything a long story with this situation?”
Nodoka admitted, “Pretty much. But, I am trying to cut it down to where it won't take hours to explain this all to you.”
Lewis inquired, “Okay. Next question. How are you three related to each other?”
Nodoka answered, “By Natsuru, she is Yurika and my father. While she is Mikoto's mother. She is where we get our elemental bending abilities from. We also think we received our control of our gender bending, as part of the powers we inherited from Natsuru. We also inherited other interesting traits. Such as not having to worry about monthly periods, and getting pregnant, unless we want too.”
Lewis said, “That is nice to know. And who are the other five girls after us?”
Nodoka responded, “They are known as the Lagoon sisters. Or, Lagoon daughters. The reason deals with the reality they are from, and their parents. Though, this is too long a story to get into. But, I will say that three of their five parents were originally men that were changed into women against their will. Very long. Very ugly story.”
Lewis commented, “I will have to get that story some other time.”
Nodoka said, “Now, it is my turned to ask some questions.”
Lewis shrugged, as he replied, “Sure.”
Nodoka lips curled into a wicked grin, as she questioned, in an amused tone of voice, “Aren't you going to ask me about my sisters?”
Lewis cracked a grin, as he said, “Let me guess. Nattou?”
Lewis' comment caught Nodoka flatfooted, as Nodoka inquired, “How did you know?”
Lewis coyly answered, “Stan and I have been through a lot. Think about it.”
A few seconds later, Nodoka realized what Lewis was hinting at, as she said, “Oh no.”
Lewis slight grin turned into a smirk, as he commented, “Yes. Be careful what you wish for.”
Nodoka turned to looked over at the redhead siting between the her two brothers, at the bar counter, across the room. With all three of them having their backs turned to her. Nodoka turned back to Lewis, as she asked, “And that is not a hooker?”
Lewis calmly replied, “No.”
Nodoka inquired, “And you can, also?”
Lewis answered, “Yes.”
Nodoka questioned, “Is your female form just as different as Stan's is?”
Lewis commented, “Stan has eaten some nattou, as well. And... For lack of a better term... Our normal female forms are a few years younger than our male forms. Just like your two siblings.”
Nodoka mentioned, “That is just part of how your gender bending works. But, you will mature soon enough in your female form.”
Lewis responded, “We realize that. And to answer your question. Use, both our gender forms are different from each other. But, we do look alike, if we are in the same gender, and age. As boys. As young teenage girls. And as older teenage girls.
“We can still pass a fraternal twins, in either gender, or age. We have the same hair color, skin tone, and overall body build.”
“If I change right now, and ate nattou, I would change into a female form that looks similar to what you see Stan as, right now.”
Nodoka asked, “Why are your forms so different?”
Lewis said, “Stan and I are not sure ourselves.”
Nodoka commented, “You should have just let us shock both of you both. It would not have hurt much. And it would have saved us all a lot of trouble.”
Lewis replied, “Nah. If you did that. Our parents would have killed you.”
Nodoka conceded, “You may have a point there. Can I see your normal female form?”
Lewis requested, “Maybe later. Also, please keep this a secret from our parents.”
Nodoka responded, “No problem. I can speak for myself, and my sisters, when we say that we believe it will be more funnier when you and Stan tell everyone.”
Lewis replied, “Thank you.”
Nodoka smiled wickedly, as she said, in a mischievous tone of voice, “You're welcome. Oh. And by the way. Welcome to the club.”
Lewis commented, “Neither of us care much about being female. We prefer to be male.”
Nodoka continued to grin wickedly, as she stated, That is because you are new at this. And you will change you tune, once you experience some of the perks that come with being female.
Lewis groaned, as he thought, 'I really don't feel like have this conversation, and risking an argument.' He halfheartedly said, “I will take your word on that.”
Nodoka responded, in a happy tone of voice, “Good. I also look forward to seeing you at the next Lagoon bikini party.”
Lewis inquired, “What bikini party? Like the one we literally crashed?”
Nodoka answered, “Yes. That was the latest party they had there. Let me tell you about these parties. Which, your parents seem to love to attend. And they are fun parties. Though, the have some really screwy rules.”
As Nodoka continued talking to Lewis, at the bar counter, Stan was trying her best to keep Mikoto's and Yurika's hands off of her more shapely body parts.
Mikoto kept trying to put his arm over her shoulders, while Yurika kept trying to put his arm around her waist.
Stan mentally realized, 'Given the amount pheromones those two are putting off, and the pheromones I am emitting, as well, I have to be very careful. If I am not careful, I could end up in a three way, as the girl, with two men. And they are my cousins. I would never live it down.'
'Still, knowing they are blood kin is keeping me from being attracted to them. I wonder if that thought works on them, as well as it does for Lewis and I. Either way, I have to keep this from going to far. And I know just how to do it.'
Stan inquired, “Would you two like to hear a joke?”
Yurika replied, “Sure.”
Mikoto said, “I am more than happy to listen to what you have to say.”
Stan joked, “Well, I just don't find the appeal of being kissing cousins.”
It took a few seconds for the two boys to get the joke.
When Yurika and Mikoto did realize who the redhead, they were sitting next to, was, they gained shocked expressions on their faces, for a few seconds.
Mikoto and Yurika looked at Stan, as Mikoto asked, “Stan?”
Yurika inquired, “Is that really you?”
Stan looked in front of herself. From the corner of her right eye, Stan saw the bartender was busy with other customers, on the part of the bar counter closer to the front doors.
And with no other customers around, Stan smirked, as she answered, “Yep. I even used nattou, like you two did.”
Mikoto said, “I think I am going to be sick.”
Stan stated, “Don't feel back at about it. Your pheromones are bothering me a little.”
Mikoto conceded, “Good point.”
Yurika inquired, “Why didn't you tell us sooner?”
Stan said, “Well, this is for tricking Lewis and I, on the first night you came to our family home.”
Yurika admitted, “Okay. You got us. So, can Lewis change, as well?”
Stan requested, “Yes. Though, could you keep this quiet, from others. Except for Nodoka. Especially, Lewis and my parents.”
Mikoto said, “No problem. We can keep a secret.”
Yurika stated, “Yes. We will do that for you. And so will Nodoka.”
Stan inquired, “Thank you. Now, why are you two here as boys? And why are you using nattou?”
Mikoto explained, “The reason is simple. Yurika and I are older teenage boys to use our pheromones to attract some women, to invite them to an after party, at the hotel suite we rented. Nodoka takes care of getting a couple of guys, as well, for the after party.”
Stan stated, “That is a diabolical plan.”
Yurika smirked, as she responded, “We know. Want to join us for the after party? You and Lewis are invited.”
Stan declined, “No thanks. We have more important matters to deal with. Like not getting captured by Scorpius.”
Yurika said, “I can understand your priorities on that.”
Stan inquired, “So, what can you tell me about Scorpius?”
Mikoto said, “That depends. Have you seen the Farscape series, and Peacekeeper Wars finale?”
Stan answered, “Yes.”
Mikoto commented, “Then, there is not much we can tell you beyond what you already know. Except that Scorpius had her gender changed, and is now a pure Sebacean.”
Stan replied, “Damn. I already knew that. I was hope for more.”
Mikoto said, “Sorry. But, Scorpius likes to keep things close to her chest. We are sure she has seen her own series by now. But, beyond that, she keeps secrets from everyone. Even those close to her.”
Stan then got up from her chair, as she said, “Well, thanks for you help. And I hope you have a great party.”
Mikoto said, “We will.”
Stan warned, “And try not to get pregnant, nor get an STD.”
Yurika responded, “We always use condoms, no matter our forms. And you will find that for us, it is very hard to accidentally get pregnant. Nor, have monthly periods.”
Stan said, “That is nice to know. Thanks.”
Yurika replied, “You're welcome. And good luck.”
Stan turned around in her stool. She then stood up. She soon spotted Lewis sitting by Nodoka. Next, she walked towards their booth, which was only about thirty feet away from them.
A few seconds later, Stan made it to the booth that Lewis and Nodoka were sitting at.
As Stan looked down at them, they stopped talking, while they looked up at her.
Nodoka said, “Hi Stan.”
Stan replied, “Hi Nodoka. I see Lewis told you.”
Nodoka responded, “Yea. I take it my sisters know about you two, as well?”
Stan answered, “Yes. I told them. And will you three be quiet about this?”
Nodoka replied, “Of course, we will. As I said to Lewis, we would find it more funny when you tell your parents.”
Stan responded, “Thank you. And you will stop coming after us?”
Nodoka answered, “Yes. With your genes now active, we already have what we want. And I must say your genes did a wonderful number on you, Stan. You are hot as a chick. And from what Lewis has told me. His female form is the same way.”
Stan teased, “Thank you. Though, I hope that isn't the pheromones talking.”
Nodoka cracked a smile, as she replied, “No. It is not. And the fact you are teasing me about this means that you are already getting in touch with your feminine side.”
Stan said, “Well, I hope not too much.”
Nodoka lips curled into a smirk, as she stated, “Well, you will have plenty of chances to get in touch with your feminine side at the bikini parties.”
Stan looked over at Lewis. Lewis said, “I will tell you, later.”
Stan turned to Nodoka, as the purple haired girl said, “Also, you are both attractive as men, as well. Too bad we are family, or I might make a play for either of you.”
Stan stuck her tongue out in a playful manner. She then stated, “I will have to decline. I already got a girlfriend.”
Nodoka continued to smirk, as she said, in an amused tone of voice, “More girlish with each passing second. And, I am sure that your normal, younger female forms are more cute, than sexy.”
Stan replied, “That is about right.”
Lewis said, “I would agree.”
Nodoka inquired, “I have to ask. Which one of your has the better body as a girl?”
Lewis said, “It is about the same for both of us.”
Stan commented, “Yea. We are pretty much equal in that department. And we have seen each other, nude, in all our forms, and ages.”
Lewis said, “Yes. We are not going to get into a debate on that matter.”
Stan stated, “Though, if you are wondering. As female, I have a slightly slimmer waistline.”
Lewis commented, “And, as a girl, I have slightly bigger breasts.”
Nodoka responded, “Damn, I am jealous you two are not bothered about this with each other.”
Stan stated, “We hashed out our penis envy issues, between each other, years ago.”
Lewis responded, “And the breast size issues are the female gender equivalent to the penis size issues for men. It is the same difference.”
Nodoka commented, “Now, I understand why everyone that knows you considers you both to be geniuses.”
Stan said, “Oh, this is nothing.”
Lewis stated, “If we knew what the hell was going on, beforehand, we would be home long before now.”
Nodoka agreed, “Probably. Though, onto another matter, there is not much we can do about the five Lagoon sisters, whom are after you. They are not the type of people to listen to reason, when they don't want to.”
Lewis replied, “We'll figure something out.”
Stan added, “And we consider that fact that you three, out of all eight of you, are no longer after us, to be an improvement.”
Nodoka responded, “That is true. You know. We are having an after party. It would be a great excuse to give you two a little education on you new forms, and how to get the more pleasure out of those forms. It would save you a lot of time and experimentation.
Stan shrugged, as she teased, “But, that is half the fun.”
Nodoka and Lewis laughed at Stan's joke, for a few seconds.
As they calm down, Lewis said, “We really cannot stay. But, thank you for the invitation.”
Nodoka looked at Stan
Stan answered, “Your two brothers already made the offer. And I declined.” She then turned to Lewis, as she inquired, “Now, to the heart of the matter. Lewis, did you find out what we hoped from Nodoka, here?”
Lewis looked up at his sister, as he answered, “I got a lot of answers, to a lot of questions. But, none of those answers are helpful for our immediate problems. How about you?”
Stan shrugged, as she said, “About the same. But, I have some good news about a few things. I will tell you later.”
Lewis turned to Nodoka, as he said, “Well, it was fun tonight.”
Nodoka replied, “Yea. It was. I will see you guys later. Or girls, depending on your moods.”
Lewis chuckled a bit. He then said, “I guess that is how it works, now.”
Nodoka offered, “Either way works for us. Hell, we will be nice. The next time we five of us get together, we will let you two choose. We can have an all guys night out. Or, an all girls night out. Or, some combination between the two groups.”
Stan said, “Thank you. I think we might take you.”
Lewis commented, “I think such a visit is very possible.”
Nodoka replied, “Good.”
Stan commented, “Though, do not expect us to spent on day shopping for clothes, and wearing frilly things. Upstairs, we are still mostly guys... Even though I am currently wearing a dress.”
Nodoka giggled for a few seconds. She then responded, “Don't worry about that. Your reactions are not that surprising, since you were both born male. And just so you know. We don't care for frilly things, either. Honestly, though we prefer to be female to male, we are tomboys. And though we know that we were born as girls, we are very macho. Depending on the styles and colors of the clothing. Only one or two would enjoy spending the day shopping for clothes.”
“You might be surprised to learn. But, baring special occasions, more women could care less if they were a dress and skirt, or a shirt and slacks. As long as they looked good in their clothing, they could care less.”
“And many gender benders, that prefer to live as female, don't really case to wear dresses. And getting them to carry a purse is next to impossible.”
“Taking all this into account, I am genuinely surprised to see you in a dress, Stan.”
Stan flatly stated, “It was a matter of necessity. And this is just a very simple evening gown. And the slippers are flat soled.”
Nodoka looked on the floor to see Stan were red flat sole slippers. She looked back up at Stan's face, as she said, “I see. And given the rules of this nightclub, I can understand. Anyway, I think once your current problems are settle, you are going to find that you will fit right in with the rest of us.”
Lewis commented, “That kind of scares me.”
Nodoka turned to Lewis, as she grinned wickedly. She said, “It should.”
Nodoka watched as Lewis and Stan suddenly tensed up
Nodoka dropped her wicked grin, as she said, “Ah. Just kidding. We are not that bad... Well, most of us aren't, and we hold back those of us who are.”
Nodoka then saw the Lowe siblings relax.
Lewis got up from his seat. As he stood next to Stan, to Stan's left side, he looked down at Nodoka. He said, “Until next time.”
Stan commented, “See you later.”
Nodoka looked up at the Lowe siblings, as she said, “Good luck.”
The Lowe siblings then turned, and they headed for the front exit of the nightclub.
A few seconds later, as they left the nightclub through the front door, beside each other, they passed by the bouncer, as they turned right, on the sidewalk.
Except for the bouncer, there was not one else around them. With Stan walking to Lewis' right side.
The bouncer noticed them. He turned his head in their direction, as he said, “Goodnight.”
As the Lowe siblings kept walking, Stan turned to the bouncer, as she said, in the sweetest, kindest, tone of voice she could muster, “Thank you. We will have to come back here sometime.”
Stan turned her head back to face her front. She thought, 'You know? That bouncer was polite. I do feel kind of guilty having to use my pheromones, and, currently, girlish charms to have Lewis and I slip pass him. But, in the end, I don't think he will pay much thought about it.'
Lewis whispered, just loud enough for only Stan to hear, “Let's head back to that corner.”
Stan softly replied, “Agreed.”
A minute later, they had turned the corner on the building, in an alleyway, and they soon found the hiding spot that they had teleported into that reality from.
As they stopped walking, they turned to face each other.
Lewis commented, “That went a lot better than I had hoped.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. It did.”
Lewis pulled out his reality device, from one of his pockets. He said, “At least those three are no longer after us.”
Stan replied, “True. And we got what we wanted, for the most part. But, I feel like this is a defeat for us.”
Lewis pointed out, “That is because it is a defeat for us. They got what they wanted. We are now gender benders.”
Stan shrugged, as she said, “At least turning into a girl is not as bad as we thought it would be.”
Lewis inquired, “True. So, what did Mikoto and Yurika tell you?”
Stan answered, “A few things. Such as we probably won't have to worry about monthly periods, and pregnancy, for a long while. Until we finally lock in our female forms a number of decades. That is, unless we want too deal with those situations.”
Lewis smiled, as he replied, “Nodoka said something similar. And that is nice. Still, we need to use a condom when we do it in any gender form.”
Stan returned her brother's smile, as she said, “You got that right. We don't want to get a sexually transmitted disease. So, what did you learn?”
Lewis thought, 'While, I really could care less about our bet. I will omit what I learn about Violin, it would just confuse matter. But, I will tell the rest to him... I mean, her.'
Lewis stated, “I got a lot of answers about our family history. And some interesting knowledge about some of the people we have dealt with.”
Stan responded, “Good. You can tell me, later. As we wait for this nattou to wear off. And while I change my clothing to my usually male clothing.”
Lewis teased, “You are going to look hot, no matter wear, until that nattou wears off.”
Stan halfheartedly said, “I know.”
Lewis said, in a sincere tone of voice, “Also, I apologize for calling you a hooker. I just could not come up with a better excuse, on the spot, than that.”
Stan stated, “It is okay. I forgive you. We got the answers we were looking for. And we will come part notes, later.”
Lewis mentioned, “Thanks for being understanding. Also, Nodoka claimed that our father played midwife for the births of her, and her two sisters, at the same time.”
Stan responded, “Really? I am not sure I believe that claim.”
Lewis said, “Me neither. We will have to ask him, when we finally have that long talk, with him, and mom. Also, Nodoka mentioned some sort of incident, with an alien species, called Alteran, and a gender bending virus.”
Stan replied, sarcastic tone of voice, “This just gets more interesting by the minute.”
Lewis stated, “I know. Also, we are related to these Alterans and also the Shimeru. Whom are also aliens. It seems the genetic mix from these two species, is what makes us, and our father, gender benders. Then, there are these bikini Lagoon Island parties, that Nodoka told me about.”
Stan said, “Just more to ask our parents, when we see them.”
Lewis stated, “I agree. Though, we might not want to mention the bikini parties. It might give them ideas.”
Stan asked, “How so?”
Lewis answered, “The one we saw our parents in. As both female. With all the women, including our parents, wearing bikini. That is a rule. Only women. And women have to where bikini. Though, the younger girls can wear one pieces. Still, I like looking women in skimpy clothing. Though, I really don't feel being a woman wearing skimpy clothing.”
“And from what Nodoka told me, our parents like to go to these parties. And when they learned we can change, as well. They might drag us with them.”
Stan commented, “I see your point. We will just not mention those parties to them.”
Lewis replied, “Exactly.”
Stan mentioned, “Speaking of parties. About that after party that Nodoka mentioned. Well, Mikoto and Yurika told me the reason they were male, and under the effects of nattou, was to round up some women. While Nodoka rounded up so men. In the nightclub. For them to take to some other locations, for a private after party.”
Lewis replied, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Why am I not surprised?”
Stan stated, “Well, they did state that they were intelligent enough to use condoms in both forms. I decline their invitation to us.”
Lewis inquired, “Good. So, do you have an idea of where we should to go to next?”
Stan answered, “Yes. We do what we should have done in the first place. We go see my coach.”
Lewis replied, “I am not against that. Still, we will head back to our home, a few hours after we originally left. About an hour after we left our suitcases there. We will change out of this formal clothing, and get a couple of extra pairs of clothes. Then, we will call a cab, get a hotel suite elsewhere in the city.”
Stan complimented, “Good plan. I got some spare cash in my debit bank account, back home. It should cover a two bedroom hotel suite for a couples of night.”
Lewis offered, “I will help you cover that bill.”
Stan stated, in a happy tone of voice, “Thanks, bro. And let us just lay low for a Saturday, and talk to Caxton Sunday morning.”
Lewis said, “Agreed. We could use a day of rest, after everything we have been through. And being back in our home town will make us feel better.”
Stan smiled, as she stated, “You and me both. Now, take us home, Lewis.”
Stan then took a few steps closer to Lewis.
When Stan was close enough, Lewis used his reality device to teleport back to their home reality, on Mars, an hour after they were last there, late that Friday night.
The Lowe siblings then instantly disappeared, as they jumped realities.
(_)
Reality, Cowboy Bebop Reality. Date, Sunday, October seventeenth, twenty-one hundred. Place, Tharsis City, Mars. Time, ten thirty AM, on a slightly cool, partly cloudy morning.
On a two land street, a taxi stopped in front of half acre front yard. Beyond the front yard was a medium size, middle class home. With an equally large backyard, behind the home. With the side yards being slightly smaller, given they were nearby neighboring homes.
The front yard, and exterior of the home was clean and well kept. The green grass was trimmed, and the paint on the home was in good shape.
After paying their cab fare, Stan and Lewis got out of the two sides of the backseats of the cab.
Presently, Stan and Lewis were both boys. They were wearing their usual masculine clothing, and tennis shoes. Among their clothing Stan wore his red varsity jacket, and Lewis wore his short, long sleeved, white coat.
The day they spent resting, on Saturday, helped them immensely, as they felt more energetic at the moment. Instead, of run down.
After the two brothers both got out taxicab, they looked in front of them to see two adults, and two children playing in front of the yard.
The two adults were a man and woman.
The woman was a young, slender, beautiful, fair skin woman, with long brown hair, who was in her early thirties. Her name was Jennifer Caxton. She was wearing a long sleeved blouse, long skirt, and tennis shoes.
The man was a much old fair skin man, whom was in great physical shape for his age. His name was Shane Caxton. Shane was wearing a gray track suit, with a gray cloth jacket, that was unzipped, over a white t-shirt. Along with this, Shane was wearing some tennis shoes as well.
The two children were a boy and a girl. The boy was seven years old, and the girl was six years old. They were the Caxtons' children. They were in decent shape for their ages, and they wear wearing pants, shirts, and tennis shoes.
As the Lowe brothers walked away from the taxi, and onto the front yard, the taxi drove off.
The sound of the taxi leaving, got Caxtons attention, as the family stopped what they were doing, and looked over at the Lowe brothers.
Though, the Caxton family were well acquainted with the Stan Lowe. And they knew Lewis Lowe. And as such, they were happy to see the two older teenage boys.
Shane greeted them, “Hello Stan, and Lewis.”
Stan and Lewis came to a stop, as they looked at the Caxton family.
Stan turned to Shane, as he said, “Hello Coach, and Mrs Caxton.”
Lewis replied, “Good morning.”
Jennifer said, “Hello boys. It is nice when my husband's students came by to visit.”
Shane Caxton asked, “So, what brings you two here this morning?”
Stan sighed. He then said, “Unfortunately, this is not a social visit. We are in trouble, and we think you might be about to help us.”
Shane responded, “I am more than willing to listen.”
Shane then thought back to the first time he met Stan, years ago.
(_)
Over three years ago, in the afternoon, on a high school american football field, after a couple of hours of practices, Coach Shane Caxton dismissed his football team to head to the showers and get cleaned up.
As Shane was about to heading inside, as well, something caught his eye from under the bleachers stands, which he was facing.
Shane walked around the bleachers, and he saw a fourteen year old boy, obviously in junior high school. He had tanned skin, and black hair. He had a good physical build for his age. He wore blue jeans, orange shirt, and white tennis shoes. And he was clearly drinking out of a green bottle of alcohol.
Shane mentally realized, 'It is clear he has not noticed me yet. I hope he is not drunk. Now, let's see if I can still do this. I am a bit rusty.'
Shane then employed years of special forces training, as he snuck behind the teenage boy, and through the steel latticework under the bleacher stands, until he was right behind the boy.
Shane saw that boy was holding the bottle with his right hand.
Shane pounced, as he went around the boy's right side. Shane quickly gripped by the boy's right wrist, with his left hand, in a hold that was firm, but did not harm the boy's right wrist.
At the same time, Shane used his right hand, to grip the liter sized green bottle, and pull it from the boy's right hand.
Shane inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'After all these years, I still got it.' He then turned the boy around, as he said, in a stern tone of voice, “Okay, young man. You and I need to have a little talk.”
The boy did the last thing Shane expect. He did not struggle. He turned to look Shane in his face, as he said, “Okay.”
Shane though, 'Well, from the focused look in his eyes, and the way he is looking at me. He is clearly not drunk. This is good. Now, what hootch did this boy snag?'
Stan looked at the label on the bottle, in his right hand, and he did a double take.
It was a bottle of Ardbeg Providence. A high priced, quality alcoholic beverage from Shane's home reality.
Shane thought, “Ardbeg Providence does not exist in this reality. I know. I checked. Where did this boy get this from? I must know!'
Shane turned to the boy, as he asked, in a calm, though firm tone of voice, “Where did you get this bottle from?”
The boy flatly answered, “My parents liquor cabinet.”
Shane mentally realized, 'That means that one, or both, of his parents are not from this reality. I need to learn more about this boy. Because, this could mean not only trouble for him later, but myself, and my family, as well.'
'Along those lines, I am so happy I settled my debts with the Lovelace family, before my superiors made me take that one last, near suicidal mission to Roanapur. I lost a lot of good men that day. And I would have been lost to, if I had not stumbled onto Bao, as he was about to leaving town. That was fortuitous for both of us. And we managed to escape that hell by working together. I am not about to let that hell come back to bite me in the ass, without first getting an idea of what is going on.'
'Still, I got a feeling this boy may not know anything. If he did, he would not have stolen this from his family's liquor cabinet. And I do not dare approach his parents, for it will tip my hand on who I am. Though, I use my real name, so it is kind of obvious. But, I felt that no one would believe that it was me, if I used my real name. And it has worked so far.'
'But, I need to learn made about this boy, without stirring up a hornets nest.'
Shane inquired, “What is your name, boy?”
The boy said, “Stan Lowe.”
Shane let got of Stan's right wrist, as he mentally recalled, 'Stan Lowe?... Where have I heard that name before? Wait a minute. I wonder if he is one of the Lowe brothers, whom are talked about among the teachers. With their teachers stating they are geniuses.'
Shane questioned, “Of the honor roll Lowe brothers? Whom make almost all straight A in their courses?”
While Stan continued to look at Shane's face, he lightly rubbed his right wrist with his left hand. Stan replied, “Yes. That is Lewis and I.”
Shane thought, 'Oh hell. He is a genius, just starting down the wrong path. But, where is his brother?'
Shane inquired, “Stan, where is your brother, Lewis?”
Stan stated, “He is not here. He is in the library, studying a natural science book.
I don't find such books fun to read.”
Shane thought, 'A genius without a hobby could be a danger to himself, and others. I need to at least fine a hobby for him, to keep him out of trouble.' He asked, “What do you consider fun?”
Stan answered, “The internet and electronics. But, our mother mostly cut us off from both, a few years ago. And due to that, Lewis and I drifted apart. I just don't consider anything a challenge.”
Shane thought, 'A young man needs challenges. And I have an idea. A hobby, and a challenge, that is outside of his intellectual experiences. It might work. If nothing else, it will broaden his horizons, and show him that there are other interests that could be pursued, beyond what he finds boring.'
Shane inquired, “Stan, what is you opinion of american football?”
Stan said, “I never played it before. My parents prefer for my brother and I to focus on more mental hobbies like chess. But, chess is boring. Though, parents encourage us to exercise a lot.”
Shane introduced himself, as he stated, “Well, I am Coach Shane Caxton of the high school football team. Why not you come out to the field with me, right now? So, I can teach you at bit about football? One on one. You might like it.”
Stan responded, “Sure. I will give it a try. But, what about the bottle?”
Shane looked at the green bottle, in his right hand. Shane then back at Stan. He stated, in a kind tone of voice, “We will keep that between us. Everyone makes mistakes.” Shane mentally added, 'Lord knows, I have make some big ones. Mistakes that have gotten good people killed. Both my men, and others.' He verbally continued, “But, forgiveness is divine.”
Stan smiled, as he complimented, “Thank you, Coach Caxton. You are kind of cool, for an old guy.”
Shane chuckled. He then responded, “Yea. That I am. Now, let us go out to the field.”
Stan then followed Shane out from under the bleacher stands.
As they exited the bleachers, they turned and headed for the field.
While they passed by the side steps to the bleacher stands, there was an open trash can.
As they walked by the trash can, Shane dumped the nearly full bottle of Ardbeg Providence into the trash can. Shane thought, 'I best get rid of this.” He turned to Stan, as he continued his thoughts, 'And now, I can hopefully help Stan find a new hobby that will keep him out of trouble.'
When they reached the football field, Shane picked up a football, from a nearby bench. Shane then began to show Stan how to throw a football, pass, and tackle.
As Stan tried out the lessons that Shane was teaching him, Shane soon found that Stan had a knack in tackling, in the skill Stan used to train with the tackle dummy.
Shane and Stan then stood twenty feet from each other, as he started tossing the football, back and forth, between Stan and himself.
While they did so, Shane thought, 'In a few years, this boy is going to be impressive on the field. And I doubt I will have a problem getting Stan's parents to agree to let me coach him, and join the football team. If I explain how Stan here has so much natural potential. Besides, I think it is best that I keep an eye on him. Because, given his natural abilities, I know one day, he is going to need help in a big way, and I want him to know that he can trust me. And that I will be more than happy to help him.'
(_)
Date, Sunday, October seventeenth, twenty-one hundred. Ten thirty-five AM. Place, Tharsis, Mars. The Caxtons' front yard.
The Caxton family and the Lowe brothers continued to face each other, as Shane waited for Stan and Lewis to explain what was going on.
Stan stated, “Coach, we are in trouble. We are in way over our heads. We are not even sure where to start.”
Shane suggested, “Well, Stan. In such situations, I have found it is easiest to start from the beginning.”
Stan commented, “I don't know how to tell you this. So, I will just say it. My father is from another reality.”
Shane casually replied, “I was wondering which one of your parents it was.”
Lewis accused, “You knew?”
Shane explained, “Ardbeg Providence does not exist in this reality.”
Stan began, “How would you know?....” He then realized, as he continued, in a slightly surprised tone of voice, “You are from another another reality?”
Shane just calmly smiled towards the Lowe brothers.
Jennifer spoke up, “My husband is just full of surprises. Though, before you ask, I am from this reality.”
Stan inquired, “Coach, how did you get here?
Shane answered, “It is a long story. And one that I do not want to get into. Still, I wonder. Where does your mother fit into this situation?”
Lewis said, “Our mother, Ed. She was also known as the super-genius hacker, Radical Edward. Before she retired from the hacking community. We got our genius from her.”
Shane commented, “That does explain some things.”
Jennifer questioned, “I thought Radical Edward was a man?”
Stan stated, “A lot of people do. And given we don't want ISSP after mom, we don't mind that false rumor being repeated. Of course, she has not done any real hacking in decades. And she go that handle when she was twelve.”
Shane replied, “Interesting.”
Jennifer said, “I am glad to see that she is not a bad influence on you.”
Lewis stated, in a strong tone of voice, “She is not. Actually, neither of our parents are bad influences. It is our other relatives, that came to visit, two nights ago, while our parents were out of town, that were part of the problem.” Lewis thought, 'It is best not to mention that while it has only been two day here, we have spent months in the multiverse.'
Shane suggested, “Perhaps we should go inside and talk.” He mentally added, 'They are keeping things from us. But, I will get to them later. Right now, I have to help them with their immediate problems.'
Suddenly, a familiar voice, to the Lowe brother's right side, said, “Well, what do we have here? A touching reunion? Or something equally classy?”
Everyone looked over to see what look like seven humanoid aliens, that looked different from each other. They were clothing that was a cross between an American old west movie, and a sci-fi movies. With projectile and energy weapons to match their mixed motif.
The one that stood out was a blue alien man, whom wore a nice brown, wide brimmed, fedora hat, and brown long coat.
Shane thought, 'Looks like their problems found us. I am glad I always am armed, with a bullet in the chamber. That is what the gun safety catch is for.'
Lewis and Stan stated, in unison, “Bane!”
Bane smirked, as he looked at the Lowe brothers. He said, in a delighted tone of voice, “Hi boys. I knew you would survive that building collapse. Meeting you is becoming a habit. A habit I like. Because every time I meet you, I either become richer in wealth, or more entertained.”
Shane looked over at the alien bounty hunting team, as he asked, “You boys, know these... people?”
Stan answered, “They are alien bounty hunters, from other realities.”
Shane said, with a hint of surprised in his tone of voice, “You two really are in over your heads.” He turned to his wife, as he ordered, “Jennifer, take the kids inside. Get a pistol, and hold up in the bathtub.”
As Jennifer gathered their two children, she looked at her husband, as she said, “Do what you need to do, Shane.” She then lead her children into their home, through the front door, with her closing the door behind her, while locking it.
Shane then looked the blue alien in his eyes. Shane inquired, “I take it you're, Bane?”
Bane answered, “Cad Bane. Multiversal bounty hunter. And who you might be?”
Shane stated, with pride in his voice, “Retired Major Shane Caxton, of the special forces, of the United State of America.”
Lewis whispered to Stan, “The coach really is a retired government assassin from another reality.”
Stan softly replied, “I was just joking when I said that.”
Lewis suppressed a smile, as he quietly said, “I know. That is what makes it funny.”
Stan softly commented, “And he is an american, like our father.”
Lewis quietly said, “That is the least surprising thing about him. That is likely why he is such a good coach for american style football.”
Stan whispered, 'That is likely very true.”
Shane warned, “Bane, take your team, and leave. I have faced far worse than you, and lived.”
Bane countered, “So, have I, Caxton. I have no interest in you. Let me take the boys, and I will leave you, and your family, alone. ”
Shane forcefully stated, “You are not taking the boys anywhere.”
Cad ordered, “Have it your way. Men. Leave the boys, and the ones that went inside, alone. But, have you fun with this old fool, here.”
In response, Shane's lips curled into a smirk.
Before any of the aliens could point their weapons at Shane, the retired american shoulder quickly ran in a crescent angle, to his left, towards the bounty hunters. As Shane did so, he used his right hand to pull out his well maintained, M1911A1 semi-automatic pistol from his shoulder holster, hidden under his jacket, under his left armpit. His pistol had pearl white grips. His pistol fired forty-five ACP round.
Though, at the moment, Shane had one bullet chambered into his pistol, with a full seven round magazine. Giving him eight rounds in his pistol, in all. In addition, he had the hammer safety on his pistol, left own. And he also had two magazines in the slots of his shoulder holster, under his right armpit.
And when Shane did not have his pistol on him. He kept gun unloaded, while he kept a load magazine of forty-five ACP ammo on him, or nearby him.
While Shane ran in a crescent shape path, towards the bounty hunters, he used his thumb to turned off the hammer safety to his pistol, while he then begins to shooting them in the head.
The reason Shane went after Bane's men first, instead of Bane, was the Bane's men had their weapons in hand, where as Bane still had his own two blaster pistols holsters on the sides of his waist.
Also, Shane was careful to angle is aim to where he was not shooting into his neighbors homes, nor towards anyone, nor vehicles, he saw behind the alien bounty hunters.
As the brothers just watched their high school coach tear through the aliens, Stan asked, in mild surprised, “Is every adult we personally know secretly a badass?”
Lewis replied, in mild amusement, “How should I know? Thought, I do vaguely remember a bartender talking about Coach Caxton, I just forget to tell you.”
Stan responded, “For future reference. The next time you have information like that, please tell me.”
Lewis said, “I will.”
Meanwhile, Cad Bane quickly backed away from his group, as he watch Shane had kill to of his men, before he even reached them.
When Shane reached them, he used a combination of small arms fire, and hand to hand techniques to kill three more of the bounty hunters. But, when he reached the sixth bounty hunter he realized that his pistol was out of ammo, as the slide of his weapon was cocked back, and ready for a fresh clip of ammo.
As alien bounty hunter and Shane were less than two feet apart.
As the bounty hunter brought his weapon to bare, he lead out a laugh, in basic, “Ha. You have run out of ammo”
Shane dropped his pistol to the ground. He then swiftly used both hands to snap the bounty hunter neck, killing him, as he fell to the ground, dead.
Next, Shane turned to Cad Bane, as he reached for firearm, the hands of the dead bounty hunter, whom Shane had just killed.
Cad Bane saw all of this. He smirked, as he turned to Lewis and Stan, while he said, “I only need one of you for the bounty.”
Cad then fired his rocket boot jets. He then swiftly flew across the lawn, and tackled Lewis to the ground.
Lewis swiftly thought, 'He is taking me, whether I want to, or not. I have to make sure that Stan can follow me.' Lewis quickly pulled out his reality device. He tossed it to Stan, as he yelled, “Stan, I am counting on you to rescue me.”
As Stan caught the reality device, he saw Lewis and Bane instantly disappear, as Cad used his reality device, on the right side of his belt, to jump realities.
Stan screamed, “Lewis! No!”
Just as Stan was about to use the reality device to go after them, Shane saw all this. Shane dropped the alien firearm, as he ordered, “Stan! Wait!”
Stan stopped was he was doing, as he turned to his coach. He asked, in an upset tone of voice, “Why?”
Shane explained, “I was trained by the military. One of the first things they teach people in the military is to never act on impulse. I taught you that, as well.”
Stan admitted, “Yes. You did.” He then forced himself to start calming down.
Shane inquired, “Do you know where Lewis is?”
Stan stated, “Yes.”
Shane looked at the small TV remote shaped device in Stan's hands. He then turned back to look at Stan's face, as he questioned, “And that thing allows you to travel realities?”
Stan replied, “Yes.”
Shane asked, “Does that included time travel?”
Stan said, “Actually, yes it does.”
Shane pointed out, “Then, there is no rush. You can catch us to them, after you calm down. Also, I would guess that your parents have been trying to find you, as well. At the moment, no one is after you. If you stay here, it is likely Bod and Ed will show up.”
Stan stated, “You have a point there.” Stan then pocketed his reality device in his right, side pants pocket. He thought, 'In any case, with Scorpius' reality field protecting his ships, I would not be able to reach Lewis, with my device. I will have to think of another plan.'
Shane said, “Besides, I need some help with these bodies. But, first...”
Shane bent down picked up his weapon. As he leaned up, he checked the firearm, to make sure there was no dirt in the exposed parts of the breech, slide, and barrel.
A few seconds later, Shane found that fortunately, there was no dirt on Shane's gun, as he gun had landed on some grass in his front yard
Shane then pulled out his empty clip of ammo from his pistol. Next, he pulled out a full clip of ammo from its storage place, in his shoulder holster, under his right armpit. Afterward, he placed the full clip of ammo into his semi-automatic pistol.
Shane then released the slide lever, and the slide returned back in place, as it chambered a round. He then walked around the alien bodies, and he put another bullet into each of the skulls of each alien bounty hunters.
Stan had calmly watched Shane do this.
When Shane was finished, he looked up at Stan. He flatly stated, “It is call double tap. I want to make sure they are dead.”
Stan inquired, “I fully understand. But, what about the gunshots? Will the police come?”
Shane stated, “That is doubtful. I am on good terms with the local cops. And if they do, this is a clear case of self-defense. Still, we need to do something about these bodies. I will get a couple of shovels from my garage. We will have to bury the bodies in my back yard.”
Stan thought, 'Now, that I think about it. There is might be something on each of these bodies, which I can use to rescue, Lewis. Which will allow me, and others, to circumvent Scorpius' defensive. I can also think of a quick way to help Shane real quick with the bodies.'
Stan walked over to the bodies, and by Shane, as he said, “There is something on these bodies I need to get. After that, a shovel will not be necessary. We can just pile the bodies up, and I can teleport them elsewhere. But, first, there is something I need to get from each other these bodies.”
Shane responded, “Works for me. And please be quick. Even though this would be classified as self-defense, I would prefer not to have to explained this to the police.”
Stan said, “I understand. And I will be quick.” He then bent down, and checked each of the bodies. A minute later, he found what he was looking for, from each body, and took what need needed from the bodies.
Stan stood up. He looked over at Shane, while he stated, “Coach let's pile the bodies, and their weapons.”
Shane replied, “Okay.” He thought, 'As much as I would like to check out their alien weapons. We don't want any trace that these people were here. Besides, I have small children. And I don't want to risk creating any unnecessary dangers for them, nor Jennifer.'
Shane then assisted Stan in gathering the corpses, and their weapons, into a small pile.
Two minutes later, Stan and Shane were able to pile the bodies, and weapons, on top of one another, in a small pile.
Stan stood right by the bodies, as he pulled out his reality device, from his pants pocket. Stan politely requested, “Stand back, coach. I don't want you caught in the teleport.”
Shane nodded once, as he took several steps back, away from Stan and the bodies. He inquired, “So, when, and where, are you taking them? Or, on that matter, what reality are you going too?”
Stan answered, “I will dump them in our reality, on Callisto, in our present time period. I will be back within a couple of minutes. This device is fairly accurate within a couple of minutes.”
Shane thought, 'I doubt anyone will find the bodies, on that backwater moon, Callisto. Besides, I have a few things I can do while you do this.'
Shane stated, “Okay. I have some shell casings to pick up, while you are gone.”
Stan nodded. He then thought of a deserted place on the Callisto, one of Jupiter's moons, where is was breathable, and not very cold. A second later, Stan pushed the red button on his reality device.
Shane watched as Stan and the pile of bodies disappeared.
Meanwhile, Shane then bent down and started collecting the shell casing from his pistol.
Over the next few minutes, Shane found, and accounted for every shell casing he had fired from his pistol. Fourteen shots in all.
As Shane finished, he leaned back up, while he thought, 'Even though I am on good terms with the police here. I do not want to take any chances. No bodies. No shell casings. I will get a shovel to turned over the soils where there is a little alien blood.'
'Even if the police drive by now, they will have nothing really to see. I can appreciate how that reality traveling device can come in handy. But, I can also see how it can cause a lot of problems.'
Just then, Shane saw Stan appear twenty feet from him, in Shane's front yard.
Shane inquired, “Any problems?”
Stan put away his reality device, as he replied, “No.”
Shane suggested, “Then, let's go inside, and tell my wife and kids that everything is now fine.”
Shane mentally reflected, 'Though, before I enter our family bathroom, I need to announce myself to my family, so my wife doesn't accidentally shoot me.'
Shane verbally continued, “And then we will all sit down, and watch some TV in the living room. That will help you unwind, while you try to figure out a plan to help your brother. And with luck, your parents will eventually show up, in a few hours.”
Stan sighed, as he replied, “We can hope.”
Shane walked over to the front door of his home, with Stan right behind him.
When Shane reached the front door, he pulled out a key from his pants pocket, and unlocked the door.
As Shane open the door for Stan, he turned to face he student. He held the door open for Stan, while he said, in a kind tone of voice, which had a hint of nostalgia, “I have found hope spring eternal. Sometime, I will tell you about this blond, teenage boy I knew, and whom I admired for his hope and faith. He had faith that he would be able to save those he cared for. And he went through hell. But, his faith saw him through. And he able to achieve his goals.”
“He was also even able to find the heart to forgive those that had done grievous mistakes to his family. He was truly wise beyond his years.”
“And he didn't so much believe in happy ending, as he did in making happy ending happen for those he cared for.”
As Stan walked into his teacher's home, he inquired, “What was the boy's name?”
Shane answered, with a smile on his face, “Garcia Lovelace.” He then entered his home, as shut the door behind them.
(_)
Farscape Reality. Location, Peacekeeper Space, The Peacekeeper Fleet. Time, a week after Lewis and Stan had escaped through the unstable gate.
In was late morning, fleet time, inside her officer, on board the Peacekeeper Commander Carrier flagship, as Scorpius sat behind her desk, while she looked at her prize, once again.
Lewis stood beside his captor, Cad Bane. Cad was to Lewis' right side. Both men were standing in front of Scorpius' desk, with two Peacekeeper guards, in black armor, behind them both. Lewis' arms were to his side, as he was not cuffed.
While sitting in a chair, behind her desk, Scorpius was wearing her usual black armor, without the mask, cap, and cape.
As Scorpius look at those in front of her, she cracked a grin on her lips. She complimented, in english, for Lewis' benefit, “Cad Bane, you truly are one of the best bounty hunters in the multiverse.”
Cad Bane responded, “Thank you. It is a pleasure to be appreciated by those that pay well, while being polite.”
Scorpius replied, “Yes. Professionalism has its rewards.”
Cad Bane smirked, as he agreed, “That is does.”
Scorpius requested, “Cad Bane, I may have a job for you on this ship, in a few hours, to a few days. If you don't mind. In the meantime, I can have a some pleasant quarters assigned to you.”
Bane responded, “That will be fine. You have paid well, so far. So, I don't mind waiting a few days on a job, as long as the job pays well.”
Scorpius said, “Good.” She then turned her attention behind the to men, and towards her subordinates. She ordered, “Guards, both of you please escort Cad Bane to his latest bounty rewards. Also, rely my orders, in that I want one of the VIP suites prepared for Mister Bane. And when he has secured his reward, show him to his quarters. Also, do not worry. Young Lewis here poses no threat to me. We will be fine, alone.”
Cad Bane tipped his hat to Scorpius, as he continued to smirk. He said, “See you later, Scorpius.” He then turned around, and the two guards escorted Bane out of Scorpius' office.
Right after the door to Scorpius office slid shut, behind Cad and the two guards, Scorpius got out of her chair, and walked around her desk, to her right side, to stand in front of Lewis.
Lewis turned to face his teacher, as he flatly stated, “Professor. Since we have last met, Stan and I have seen your series. I know what you are. I know what you have done. I will not help you.”
Scorpius shook her head, as she calmly said, “Lewis. Lewis. Lewis. I make no excuses for my actions. Though, I have become a much better person since then. And I doubt you know everything.”
Lewis admitted, “I don't know about the events surrounding your gender change. And I do not know whomever this Chang person is.”
Scorpius replied, “Only a few people know such matters. And that is the way I prefer it to be.”
Lewis puffed himself up, as he inquired, “Are you going to torture me to work on that gate?”
Scorpius thought, 'It is so hard not to laugh when Lewis gets this way. Still, I need to respond to his question.' She said, “No. I have found torture to be counterproductive. And there are other ways, considering that unstable gate that you and your brother went through, was throwing off a lot of electricity, and that energy activated you gender bending genes.”
Lewis asked, while showing surprise, “How did you know?”
Scorpius smirked, as she stated, “I did not know, until you just told me.”
Lewis cursed under his breath, “Damn it.” Lewis then suddenly realized what Scorpius was sometimes into, in bed, as he quickly said, “Listen, Professor. I admit to having a slight school boy crush on you when I was younger. But, the spark is just not there anymore. And I have come to the conclusion that I am not ready for a relationship in any gender, towards any gender.”
Scorpius casually said, “Oh, don't worry, young Lewis. I am not going to take you virginties, just yet. But, I do have some ideas on what I plan to do with you.”
Lewis thought, in slight fear, 'I think I am screwed in more ways than one.'
(_)
Cowboy Bebop Reality. Place, Tharsis City, Mars. Date, Sunday, October seventeenth, twenty-one hundred. Twelve thirty PM.
Two hours after Lewis was kidnapped, Ed, Bob, Annie, and Violin appeared in the front lawn of the Caxton home.
Ed stated, “We are here, on the Sunday after the boys disappeared. In it around noon.”
Bob looked around, “Well, this should not be too hard. We knock on the door. Say hi. Ask. Have you seen the boys? And go from there. Still, Coach Caxton is a decent guy, with a great family.”
Violin inquired, “So, who is this guy?”
Ed answered, “He is the man who coached Stan's American football team. And he is a nice guy.”
Violin commented, “American football played on Mars.”
Bob cracked a grin, as he said, “Cool, isn't it?”
Violin giggled. She then admitted, “Yes. It is.”
Bob said, “Anyway, while we are looking for answers here, I see no reason we should drag the coach into our problems.”
Annie sense something in the force, as she calmly said, “There has been a battle here.”
Bob immediately placed his right hand on his holstered revolver. But, he did not draw his weapon, as he inquired, “Is there still danger here?”
Annie stated, “No. Whatever happened, it is already long over.”
Bob took his right hand off his revolver, as he said, “Good.”
Violin looked around, and she did not see anything out of the ordinary. She asked, “What do you mean? I don't see any signs of battle here”
Annie answered, “I can sense that it happened. But also, just look a the ground. There are tracks.”
The rest of the group did as Annie instructed. And they saw several foot prints, of different sizes of shoes.
Annie pointed as a part of the yard, as she explained, “That is not all. Bodies were stacked right here. I see it is a little blood, but this is not red blood.”
Ed stated, “There are no known native sentient alien life in this reality. Unless you count the Ganymede sea rat. But, that is highly debatable, considering they have the intelligence of a primitive fish on Earth. And Jet was right. They are disgusting to eat.”
Bob commented, “But, they are fun to catch and release.”
Ed agreed, “That is true.”
Annie responded, “Interesting. And since there is no red blood. That means that no human blood was spilt here. So, your sons, or, some other humans, are likely the victors.”
Ed admitted, in sad tone of voice, “It has to be someone else. We did not teach our sons how to defense themselves.”
Annie groaned, as she placed the palm of her right hand into her face, as she thought, with mild annoyance, 'What foolishness. Though, that does explain a few things with Stan and Lewis.'
Annie lowered her right hand, as she turned to Ed and Bob. She sternly said, “When this is all over, we are going to have a long talk about you not teaching your children how to fight and defend themselves.”
Bob commented, in a sober tone of voice, “Yes. We have a lot answer for. And when we get our sons back. We will teach them how to defense themselves, in several ways.”
Annie flatly said, “Good.” She turned to Violin, as she questioned, “And you, Violin.”
Violin looked at Annie, in her eyes, as she stated, “Aeryn and I are planning on teaching Little D both hand to hand combat, and the proper use of weapons, and gun safety, when he is a few years older.”
Annie replied, “I am glad to hear that.”
Annie then turned back to the disturbed earth. She stated, “Anyway, I don't see any heavy foot prints. Nor, dragging tracks. Nor, tires near where the pile that was here. So, the pile was not moved from here. Still, the earth is not disturbed, so this was not where the bodies are buried. The alien blood, plus no sign of disposal of the bodies leads me to believe that someone used a reality device to teleport the bodies elsewhere.”
Ed commented, “That means the boys were likely here. And recently.”
Annie said, “That would be my guess.”
Bob stated, “Okay. That means we have a lead here. I don't see any signs of damage on the home, so I am guessing that the battle did not get inside. That means that it is likely the Caxton family are possibly are alright. Now, let's see if the coach has any clue as to where the boys are. Ladies, just follow my lead.”
Bob then started walking up to the front door of the home, with Ed beside him, to his right side. Behind them were Violin and Annie, with Annie being to Violin's right side.
When they reached the door, Bob gently knocked on it.
A few seconds later, Jennifer Caxton open the door. She smiled when she saw then. She kindly greeted them, “Oh, hi Bob. Hi Ed. We have been expecting you.”
Bob raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “You have?”
Jennifer stated, “Yes. And I see you bought a couple of friends with you. Come on inside, my husband in the living room.”
Jennifer then held the door open for them. After all four of the adults were inside, she closed the door behind them. Next, she lead the four for other adults down the hallway, and to the family living room.
When the five adults walked into the living room, Ed, Bob, Annie, and Violin, looked around.
The living room lay out had three cushioned couches, forming a, u, shape, with the empty side facing a large, wall mounted, flat screen TV. There was a coffee table inside the semi-circle the couches made. There was a large, nice rug placed under three table and couches.
Ed's group them saw Shane sitting on middle couch, with his and Jennifer's two young children, and Stan sitting on the right couch, when facing the TV.
All four were watching TV.
Bob and Ed smiled at the sight of Stan being unharmed. But, Ed thought, with concern, 'Where is Lewis?'
Jennifer turned to her husband, as she calmly spoke, “Honey, we have guests. Stan's parents are here for him.”
Stan and Shane looked up at the group, while the kids continued to watch TV.
Stan did not look happy, while Shane's expression was unreadable.
Shane turned back towards the TV, as he grabbed the TV remote, from the table, and turned off the TV. He then set the remote back on the table, as he looked back at Ed and Bob.
On the other hand, Stan did not take his eyes off of his parents.
Annie and Violin were standing beside each other, with Violin standing to Annie's left side.
Violin thought, 'The woman and the kids seem open. But, I sense something is off about the old man.'
Violin whispered into Annie's left ear, “What is your read on this guy?”
Annie softly answered, “The force tells me he is one serious badass. And he is not in the mood for joking around.”
Shane calmly requested, “Jennifer, would you please take the kids to one of their bedrooms, to play. I have some things to talk about with this gentleman, and these ladies, here.”
Jennifer cracked a smiled, as she said, “Remember, dear. Blood is so hard to clean off the floors. Especially, getting it out of the carpet. And remodeling can be expensive.”
Shane returned Jennifer's smile, as he replied, “Don't worry. There will be no violence in our home.”
Bob, Ed, and Violin looked over at Annie, with an unspoken question. Annie said, in a relaxed tone of voice, “They're joking.”
Jennifer walked around the couches, and coached her children off the couch, as she gently said, “Come on children, let's go play elsewhere in the house.”
A few seconds later, Shane watch as his wife and children began to left the room.
After they did so, Shane turned around, and offered, in a flat tone of voice, “Come sit on the couches. We have much to talk about.
As the four adults circled around the couches, Stan moved to sit to Shane's right side, on the middle couch. Ed and Bob sat on the right couch, near Stan, with Ed sitting to Bob's left side. Annie and Violin sat next to each on the left couch, near Shane. With Annie sitting to Violin's right side.
As soon as everyone was sitting down, Stan looked around the group, while he stated, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “Hi Mom. Hi Dad. Hi Annie. Hi Violin. Long time, no see.”
Bob looked over at Stan, as he thought, 'Stan is not happy. And I don't blame him for that.' He carefully said, “Son, I know you are upset with us.”
Stan calmly replied, “I am not upset. Just disappointed in you two.”
Ed turned to her son, as she said, “Stan, if want to talk about want to talk about what we neglected to tell you.”
Stan looked at his mother, as he frowned. He commented, “Not right now. That is a conversation for when Lewis is present. And a conversation that should be in private.”
Annie inquired, “Stan, where is, Lewis?”
Stan flatly answered, “Scorpius has him. And after this conversation over, I am going to go rescue him.”
Ed ordered, “You are not going anywhere.”
Stan responded, “Mother, we will talk about this in a minute. Along with how to get there, and the details of the rescue plan.”
Ed disagreed, “We need to talk about this, right now.”
Shane thought, 'We do not need an argument, right now.' He spoke up, in a stern tone of voice, “Stan is correct. There are other things we need to talk about, first. Stan here has told me a few things. But, not much. The only real things he has said is that you two have kept a lot from him and Lewis. And due to that, your trouble was brought to my doorstep.”
Bob sheepishly said, “Sorry about that.”
Shane coldly commented, “You are fortunate that my family was not harmed, and my home only suffered minor damage.”
Bob agreed, “That we are.”
Violin asked, “So, what happen?”
Stan looked over at Violin, as he answered, “Seven bounty hunters showed up. The coach here killed all, but the last one. The last one tackled Lewis, and took Lewis back to Scorpius, in a quick reality jump, before we could stop him.”
Bob looked at Shane, as he complimented, “Not bad.”
Shane replied, “I have faced worse odds.”
Ed inquired, “Were you in the military?”
Shane coyly answered, “When I was younger.”
Stan continued looking over at Violin, as he stated, “By the way, I knew there was something off about you, Violin.”
Violin admitted, “Yes. That is an understatement. When we met, I was just trying to buy time for your parents to show up.”
Stan replied, “Okay.” He mentally added, 'And it looks like I won that five dollar bet with Lewis.'
As everyone continued talking, Annie was staring at Shane.
Shane noticed Annie looking at him. He turned to Annie, as he flatly inquired, “Why are you staring at me?”
Annie stated, “I cannot put my finger on it, but you look somehow familiar. What is your full name.”
Shane looked at her, as he responded, “Shane Caxton. Yours?”
Annie replied, “Annie. My last name is too well known. And while we are making introductions, the woman beside me is, Violin. Still, have we met before?”
Shane commented, “I never met you in my life. And I have met quite a few women in my life. Some of them were very scary, and very dangerous”
Shane's comment caused the others to look at Shane more closely, as well.
Violin thought, 'Shane Caxton?... I have heard that name from someone. It is on the tip of my tongue. Still, let's see what I know about him. He is an older caucasian man. He has had military experience. And he has met scary women. And given his military background, it is likely scary would rate at a badass level. Meaning he has met badass women before that are scary to him... Shane Caxton?...' Her eyes went wide, as she mentally realized, 'Shane Caxton! Could it be?'
Violin inquired, “Shane, do you know a, Garcia Lovelace?”
Everyone saw recognition register on Shane's face, at the mention of Garcia's name.
And everyone immediately realized who they were talking to.
Stan thought, 'That is the boy that Shane talked about early. This mystery just keeps getting deeper. And my parents, and the others clearly know who this Garcia is.'
Bob asked, “You're that Shane Caxton?”
Shane answered, “Yes. But, I don't see how you could know about me.”
Ed stated, “Oh trust us. We know about you. Though, in a good way.”
Annie smiled, as she said, “The others have always wondered what happened to you. The fact that you ended up a high school american football coach is just hilarious.”
Shane returned Annie's smile, as he replied, “I have always been a fan of the sport. And the job pays well.”
Annie said, “I bet. And the fact that you are the one coaching Stan here in the sport, it just icing on the cake.”
Stan spoke up, “Is anyone going to let me in on the big secret?”
Bob said, “Son, you know those crazy, teenage girls, with weapons, that are after you?”
Stan replied, “Yes. You know them? Don't you?”
Bob stated, “Yes. And don't worry. We will deal with them soon enough. Though, in a peaceful manner. Anyway, Shane here is from the same reality as they are.”
Ed mentioned, “Actually, Shane had a run in with those girls' parents, years ago.”
Stan looked as his coach, as he genuinely said, “Coach, you have my sympathies.”
Shane turned to his student, as he stated, “And you have mine. From the way you sound, Stan. I guess the apples didn't fall far from the trees, with those daughters.”
Annie spoke up, “No. They didn't.”
Bob commented, “Shane, I always thought you were a good man. This revelation just confirms what I believed. That you are an honorable man, whom is willing to take responsibility for your actions. I trust you with the lives of my family.”
Bob mentally added, 'That is a rare trait to have in any reality. And the fact he gave Garcia the opportunity to kill him, for killing Garcia's father, Diego Lovelace. With him even going so far as putting the gun in Garcia' hands, really says something about Caxton's character, in so many ways.'
Shane stated, “Thank you. Though. I would prefer if you keep my identity to yourselves. I have a lot of enemies. And from what it sounds like, you know a few of them.”
Ed said, “No problem. We will keep your secret.”
Violin spoke up, “Yes. We can appreciate keeping secrets.” Violin thought, 'So, he is from the Black Lagoon reality. That figures. But how... Of course. What the bartender said at that bar fight. Then, that bartender was Bao. Okay. Now, it all makes sense. Though, the fact this insane situation makes sense in any way, shape, or form, makes me question my sanity even more.'
Annie said, “Your secret is safe with us.”
Shane responded, “I appreciate that, from all of you.”
Bob stated, “Now, how are we going to rescue, Lewis?”
Annie stated, “That could be a problem. We already pulled the prison trick, and the fake shuttle routine.”
Stan inquired, “When did you do the fake shuttle trick?”
Ed answered, “When we tried to rescue you, after Cad Bane first captured you. Right after you met Braca.”
Stan looked over at his parents, as he stated, “I never met, Braca.”
Bob stated, “Yes. You did. You know him as the Midnight Bounty Hunter.”
Stan responded, “Braca was Midnight? Talk about a career change.”
Violin commented, “That would be an understatement.” She thought, 'Even coming from me.'
Bob admitted, “Yes. And we kind of screwed up that rescue attempt.”
Stan realized, as he accused, “Did you guys shutdown the both the power, and emergency power, to the command carrier?”
Ed hesitantly responded, “Yes. And it was my fault. I came up with the plan, and hacked that ships computers.”
Stan pointed out, “You nearly caused a small gate explosion. Think a kiloton level explosion. Lewis and I were sucked into an unstable gate.”
Violin spoke up, “Yea. We watched you two get sucked into it.”
Annie slightly elbowed Violin, with her left elbow, into Violin's right ribs.
Violin looked over to see Annie frowning.
Violin thought, 'Annie, is clearly not happy. I better shut up, for now.'
Ed said, with a bit of regret in her voice, “Yes. I would have done things differently, if I had known what was going on.”
Bob said, “Which is what we are about to do. And at least you two came out of it alright.”
Stan replied, “Yea. We are alright.” He thought, 'Oh the irony. The poetic justice. Our parents inadvertently turned us into gender benders. While both of them spent years trying to prevent from happening. Lewis is going to laugh his ass of at learning this. Also, Lewis should be here when we spring the truth on them. I am sure he has some ideas about how to go about it. He is a far better at jokes than I am.'
Annie questioned, “Back to the topic at hand. How are we going to get in?”
Stan stated, “Well, I can get us in. But, I am coming with you.”
Ed ordered, “As I said before, Stan. You are not coming with us. You are staying right here with Shane. Where you are safe.” She turned to Shane, as she inquired, “Is that alright with you, Shane?”
Shane answered, “Stan is more than welcome in my home. If, he wants to stay here.”
To prevent an argument, Annie asked, “How close to a multiversal gate system did you two get?”
Stan answered, “We had a working prototype, until you guys forced us to destroy the other end. Don't worry, the damage only destroyed that gate and the room it was in. We we are able to prevented an actual gate explosion.”
Bob stated, “When we rescue Lewis, we are going to have to hack the mainframe of that ship, as well. To delete your data on this project. It is too dangerous to be in the hands of Scorpius, of all people.”
Ed replied, “Agreed.”
Stan said, “Then, I am going to have to come along.”
Annie inquired, “How do you figure that?”
Stan explained, “It is at least a five person operation. Two people take on Scorpius and keep the peacekeepers busy. One person hacks into the main computer, while another guards that person. And one person looks for Lewis. You are a four person team. You are one person short. And I am willing, and available.”
Bob pointed out, “Not if Shane comes along.” Bob turned to Shane, as he requested, “So, would you like to come with us?”
Caxton refused, “No. I have a family.”
Bod said, “I understand.”
Stan smirked, at the situation around him.
Ed warned, “Don't be so smug, Stan.”
Stan dropped his smirk, as he thought, 'I don't want to push my luck.'
Violin inquired, “Still, how are we going to get in there? Scorpius has that anti-reality traveling forcefield.”
Stan stated, “True. But, her technology can breech her protective field. As I said, I have a way in. Our tickets are right here.” He then pulled six, small, TV remote sized, reality devices, from his jacket pockets. Next, Stan placed the reality devices on the table, in the middle of the couches.
Stan's own reality device was still in his left, side pants pocket.
Stan explained, “These are the reality devices that I found on the dead bounty hunters that Caxton killed. I have six of them.” He picked up one of them, as he continued, “I know for a fact that these devices will get us through the reality protection field, because the last time we were captured, the bounty hunters brought us to Scorpius' ship immediately.”
Annie, Ed, Violin, and Bob picked up one, and pocketed their new reality device. Though, they put it into other pockets, than the ones they had their own reality devices in, so they would not the two reality devices confused with each other.
There was one reality device left on the table.
Stan offered, “You want the extra one, Coach? I will even explain how to work it. You could take, your family, and yourself, to places you have only dreamed up before. Or, maybe to your home reality.”
Caxton said, “No thank you. I can see that those things are nothing but trouble.”
Bob chuckled. He then agreed, “You are right about that.”
Ed picked up the spare reality device. She stated, “This is good. It means we can plan a coordinated attack and rescue. Where we enter the command carrier at different places and times. We will go with Stan's plan. With minor time differences.”
“Annie will go alone, first, about five minutes before the rest of us. To keep the peacekeepers busy. The rest of us will teleport together. I will hack directly the mainframe of the ship, to delete the research on the multiversal hyperspace gate technology. I already know the location, from hacking the ship's map last time we went there. Bob will guard me.”
“Stan is on the job of finding and rescuing Lewis. Though, you will stay with us until we find Lewis. Then, you go get him, if he is not in a guarded area. If he is, we have Annie go get him. And Violin deals with Scorpius.”
Stan realized something about his mother's plan, as he asked, with concern in his voice, “Whoa. Hold it. You are going to send Violin. This young woman. After one of the most dangerous people in the multiverse. I am not sure what Violin is capable of, but I thought she and Annie would be in a team up situation.”
Annie snickered. She then said, “Nice idea. But, this would not be the right mission for a team up.”
Violin stated, “Stan, I can handle Scorpius. Besides, Scorpius will do everything in her power to avoid Annie.”
Stan inquired, “Am I missing something here?”
Bob said, “We will tell you later, son.”
Shane inquired, “Why would this Scorpius want to avoid Annie?”
Stan stated, “Well, I could guess. Coach. I don't know how to tell you this. But, you see that chrome cylinder hooked to Annie's belt?”
Shane replied, “Yes.”
Stan said, “That is a lightsaber. And she is a force user. As is she in from Star Wars.”
Shane replied, with skepticism in his voice, “You're kidding?”
Annie unhooked her lightsaber, ignited it with a snap-hiss, with the red blade going straight up. A few seconds later, Annie collapsed the blade on her lightsaber, and hook the weapon back to her belt.
Shane eyes went wide, as responded, with surprise in his tone of voice, “You are not kidding?”
Annie grinned wickedly, as she said, “Nope.”
Shane thought, 'Oh boy. I may have gotten myself mixed into something way more than I expected. Like what I saw at that tower in Roanapur. Still, I need to know how dangerous this Scorpius is.'
Shane asked, “How danger is this Scorpius woman?”
Ed answered, “She is a genius and expert schemer. Also, she is a skilled fighter that could probably fight Roberta to a standstill.”
Shane stated, “That is dangerous.” He mentally added, 'Roberta took out several of my men. I am so happy I declined to go on this rescue mission.'
Stan asked, “Now, how are we going to talk to each other?
Bob unhooked a small, hand-held radio from his belt, and he handed the radio to Stan.
He explained, “These are encrypted radios. We each have one. We will use this to talk to each other. I will be with Ed, so I don't need mine. Just press the talk button to speak into it. The volume is on the top of the radio.”
Stan took the radio. He clipped the radio to the right side of his belt. He then turned to his father, as he replied, “Thanks.”
Ed stated, “When Stan has rescued Lewis, and I have hacked the computer grid, we will signal for everyone to escape. Nobody be a hero. As I said before, Annie, Violin, you are there to keep the peacekeepers and Scorpius busy. You don't have to kill anyone. Not even Scorpius. Just keep them busy. And we when we gone, you both leave, as well.”
Violin said, “I understand.”
Annie finally realized her roled in Ed's plan, as she deadpanned, “I hate being bait.”
Violin replied, “Who doesn't? But, you are the only person we have that can take on Scorpy's army and survive.”
Annie admitted, “You are right about that. Unless they run from me, like last time.”
Bob pointed out, “I would consider that a good thing.”
Annie agreed, “So would I.”
Bob said, “Still, we also need to pick a time, place, and reality, for a rendezvous, to teleport to.”
Violin stated, “Simple. This reality, at your home, this afternoon. Around three PM.”
Ed complimented, “Good idea, Violin.”
Annie said, “Works for me.”
Stan inquired, “On that note, when should we rescue Lewis. If we go right after he got there, it could cause problems. Lewis might be in transit to somewhere on the ship. And we might not be able to find him. Even if we hack the computer record.”
Ed stated, “I would say one day, should be fine. In the early afternoon, at one PM.”
Bob replied, “I agreed.”
Stan stated, “Still, there is another matter that you guys need to be made aware of. There is a skilled bounty hunter that keeps capturing us. He was the leader of the bounty hunters that came here. The one that got away with Lewis. He is a blue skinned alien, who goes by the name, Cad Bane.”
Annie inquired, “You had Cad Bane after you? I am surprised you all are still breathing.”
Stan turned to Annie, as he inquired, “You know him?”
Annie answered, “Yea. I know him. We go way back?”
Stan commented, “I am surprised you don't remember meeting him at the bar.”
Annie asked, “What bar? I have been to a number of them.”
Stan explained, “The bar where we almost had that paradox. Where the girls, that were after all of us, saved reality by confronting Bane. Basically, you and your friends from the distance past. My parents here, with B, from the more recent past, before I was born. Me and my brother, all but literally bumped into the rest of you.”
Ed said, “So, that was you two.” She looked over at Bob, as she commented, “Looks like we were right, honey.”
Bob looked at Ed, as he agreed, “Yes dear, we were.”
Ed and Bob then turned back to look at the rest of the group.
Annie stated, “Well, I had other things on my mind at the time. Now, that I think about it, that was Bane.”
Violin commented, “I remember that night. That was a weird night. Even for us. And that is saying something.”
Annie replied, “You got that right.”
Stan thought, 'I don't remember seeing Violin there. Though, this is not the time and place for such a discussion.'
Shane commented, “Stan, I have a feeling that when you get around to telling me what happened to you this weekend, it is going to be one hell of story.”
The Ed, Annie, Violin, and Bob lightly laughed, as Stan replied, “Oh, it is. Trust me. It is.”
Shane stated, “Well, as soon as you rescue your other son, we are having a parent-teacher conference over this.”
Ed and Bob looked at each other, then back towards Shane. Bob inquired, “Are you sure you want to learn what we know? We are not against telling you. It is just a lot of information.”
Shane answered, “Yes. Being forewarned, is being forearmed. And I have a feeling that I might want to know this, in case some of the other, less pleasant, people that I know of, come looking for me.”
Bob said, “I understand. And we will tell you everything.”
Shane responded, “Good.”
Ed stood up, as she stated, “Well, we best go rescue, Lewis. I think it would be polite if we left outside, instead of teleporting where we are at.”
Stan, Bob, Annie, and Violin also stood up.
Shane stood up, as he complimented her, “I appreciate that. I will even escort you to the foot door.”
Soon, the five individuals made their way to the front door.
Before Shane could open the door, Annie warned, “Wait. Don't open that door.”
Shane stopped himself from turning the knob. He looked over at Annie, as he asked, “What is it?”
Annie answered, “The Lagoon sisters are out there. They are waiting right outside the front door.”
Shane asked, “The Lagoon sisters?.... Oh the PT boat was named, the Lagoon. Those are the teenage girls that are after Stan and Lewis?”
Bob complimented, “Good memory.”
Stan answered, “Yes. That would be them.”
Bob stated, “Shane, it would be best if you checked on your family. Those girls will likely recognize you, if they see you. We will lock the door behind us.”
Shane let go of the knob. He turned to the group, as he said, “Thank you for the warning. And good luck.” He then walked passed them, and deeper into his home, to be with his family.”
Ed turned to Annie, as she stated, “Good call.”
Annie replied, “No problem. I saw the series. Shane is a good man. And I sense that his family are good people, as well. I do not want anything bad to happen to them.”
Stan asked, “So, what series is the Coach from?”
Bob answered, “We will tell you, later. Right now, we have to deal with these girls. By the way, are the trio sister here as well, Annie?”
Annie answered, “No. But, I sense someone else in the distance, watching.”
Ed said, “We will deal with that person, later. Still, I am surprised that the trio sisters are not here.”
Stan mentioned, “Oh. Our cousins. Lewis and I worked out our problems with them before we came here.”
Ed complimented, “Good for you, son.”
Stan replied, “Thank you.”
Bob said, “Okay, let's do this.” He opened the door, and let Annie go out first, then Violin, after that Ed, soon after Stan, and finally himself. Bob locked the door, as he gently shut it behind him.
In the front yard, they saw the five sisters did not have their weapons out, save for Yukio, whom had her machine gun pointed towards the ground near her, and Kristina, whom was wearing her gauntlets.
And from the surprised expressions on the teenage girls' faces, they clearly did not expect to see Bob, Ed, Annie, and Violin, with Stan.
Bob stood to Stan's right side, and Ed stood to Stan's left side. Violin stood to Ed's left side. And Annie standing to Violin's left side.
Bob thought, 'From their reactions to our presence. Along with the fact they don't have their weapons at the ready. This may go better than I expected it too.'
Bob looked over at the teenage girls, as he stated, in a stern tone of voice, “Young ladies, we need to have a chat about you hounding our sons.”
Molly looked over at Bob. She smirked, as she thought, 'And I have just the excuse to use.' She said, “You're right. We should have a chat.” She used her right hand to point at Stan, as she stated, “Stan, and his brother, broke the rules. They came onto the island, uninvited, during the party.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Ed stated, “They didn't even have a clue what was going on. And they immediately left.”
Molly said, “Ignorance is no defense. If it is not their fault, then it is you fault for not telling them the rules, beforehand.”
Rebecca stated, “Someone should pay for falling on top of us.”
Annie spoke up, “Little girls. I have been reading your emotions. The only reason you mention those rules is that you have nothing else to defend your actions with. And to be honest, we all agreed they arrived there by accident.”
Stan stated, “For a group of violent crazies that hacked up a bunch of cops, you certainly get legal when it suits you. You're hypocrites.”
Ed and Bob looked over as their son, as Bob inquired, “They what?”
Ed requested, “Tell us, what happened, son.”
Stan looked at his mother. He then turned to his his father. He stated, “Lewis and I witnessed these five kill this police chief, and around a couple of dozen of his officers.”
Ed asked, “What was the police chief's name?”
Stan looked over at his mother, as he answered, “The only name he gave was, Watsup.”
Bob muttered, with a bit of disbelief in his tone of voice, “No way.”
Ed inquired, with a hint of shock in her tone of voice, “Of Roanapur, Thailand?”
Stan said, “We were not there long enough to learn where we were at. But, we did figure out we were in Thailand, in the late twentieth century.”
Ed questioned, “Did you meet anyone else?”
Stan stated, “Yes. We did. There was this white haired man named, Lotton. Whom looked to be in his twenties. A small American woman named, Sawyer. And a taller, slender asian named, Shenhua. They were quite nice. The even took us out to lunch at a chinese restaurant. The interesting a part is we went to lunch with the future versions of Sawyer and Shenhua.”
Bob mentally reflected, 'If there were two Sawyers there. And two Shenhuas, then it must have been when Ed, B, and I, when into Roanapur's past. And Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, followed us there. While there, I vaguely recall, that I think we even crossed paths with the boys, a few times. It is fortunate that we taught out sons manners, or they might not have made it out of that city alive. I will have to talk to Ed, in private, about this, later.'
Ed thought, 'My sons are lucky to be even alive, given they went to Roanapur, of the past, without knowing anything about that city, nor the dangerous people that live in it.'
Ed said, “We will have to talk about this, later. That place is one of the subjects we needed to tell you about.”
Stan responded, “Like I said. We will talk when all four of us are together. I am not having this discussion without Lewis being present.”
Ed replied, “I understand.”
Violin spoke up, “Well, that is an interesting tale you will have to explain, later.”
Stan turned to Violin, as he said, “I would be more than happy to tell you all about it, Violin.”
Meanwhile Annie had not taken her eyes off of the Lagoon sisters. She said, “As fun as it is, we have other pressing matters to deal with.”
Ed, Bob, Stan, and Violin realized what Annie meant, as they turned to face the Lagoon girls.
Bob questioned, “Well girls. Do you have anything to say in your defense?”
Kristina said, “Well, to be fair, they were sexist pigs that wanted us to surrender to them. And they were the ones that made the first hostile move.”
Ed asked. “How many police officers were there?”
Yukio answered, “Twenty-five, counting Chief Watsup. All of them had their guns drawn on us, and your sons.”
Ed admitted, “Well, them pointing weapons as my sons does change things a bit. So, which one of you killed Chief Watsup?”
Sarah calmly answered, “I did. After I sliced through three bullets he fired at me, with my katana, I sliced him in half, long ways. Instant death.”
Violin questioned, “So those rumors are true?” She mentally added, 'It is nice not to be alone on the reincarnation issue. Though, I wish I had some more sane people to talk it over with, whom has been through this, as well... Oh hell. I need to be honest. I am as crazy as these girls. The only difference is that I am not as violent. And I try very hard to be polite. It is not my fault that in my previous life, that I kept running into violent lunatics.'
Sarah answered, “Yes. And for your next question. We don't mind the situation at all.” She looked over at Rebecca and Yukio, as she continued, “And some of us are better for it.” She looked back at Violin, as she went onto say, “And I do not mind being a girl.”
Violin replied, “Okay.”
Stan inquired, “What rumors?”
Bob spoke up, “We will tell you, later. Though, basically, this deals with reincarnation of some seriously dangerous badasses.”
Kristina replied, “Thank you for the compliment. And the rumor is true. We are reincarnation of them. Same souls, different lives and bodies... Well, bodies. We pretty much are on track to lead similar lives, as we did in our previously lives.”
Molly stated, “Speak for yourself.”
Kristina pointed out, “Molly, you were on track to this life, in your previous life. It is just that things happened to prevent you from fully becoming what you would have become now.”
Molly shrugged, as she replied, “I guess you are right, sis.”
Sarah commented, “And in this life, we are working together.”
Molly turned to Sarah, as she happily said, “True.”
The Lagoon sisters then turned back to look at Bob, Ed, and Stan.
Bob coldly stated, “Now, that we have hashed that out. I would tell your parents about killing those cops. But, given how corrupt that city was, they would have probably compliment you for.”
Molly agreed, “Probably.”
Bob ordered, “So, instead of informing your parents. I am just going to use my parental privileges, and tell you five girls to go home.”
Rebecca questioned, “Just like that?”
Bob replied, “Yes. Just like that.”
Yukio asked, “And we get nothing out of it?”
Stan spoke up, “Well, Lewis and I, did apologize, and we offered to treat all five of you to a meal. You five girls declined, and decided you wanted to beat us up, instead.”
Ed stated, “You really should have taken them up on their offer. The men of the Lowe family are wonderful gentlemen. And the women are true ladies. That is one of the reasons I married Bob.”
Ed and Bob then shared a smile.
Molly said, “Fine. We know when we are beat. And I have no interesting in picking a fight with any of you adults. Especially, not Annie.” She then turned to Stan, as she lamented, “It is too bad that you, and your brother, don't change like your father, or we could really have some fun with the both of you.”
Stan didn't bat an eyelash, as he flatly responded, “You're type of fun I can do without.” He mentally added, 'And while Lewis and I can now change, we sure as hell don't want you five to find out about it. Though, you likely will, later on.”
Sarah inquired, “By the way, where is Lewis?”
Stan answered, “Captured by Scorpius.”
Sarah replied, “Well, good luck rescuing him. And no hard feelings.”
Stan commented, “Since you didn't actually hurt us. We would just prefer to peacefully part ways.”
Kristina said, “Good. And no hard feelings from us, either.”
Yukio commented, “It was a fun chase.”
Rebecca said, “I agree. Though, I wish it had ended differently.”
Molly stated, “I can see the merits, both ways, on the situation.”
Stan commented, “As long as you girls leave my family, and I, alone, I will be happy with you.”
Molly responded, “Okay. We will leave you and Lewis alone.”
Stan nodded, as he replied, “That is all we ever wanted from you five.”
Molly nodded in response. She then pulled out her reality device, as ordered, “Come on girls. We can have some fun, elsewhere, back home.”
Yukio, Rebecca, Kristina, and Sarah then walked up close to Molly.
Molly then thought of the time and place back home she wanted to go, in her home reality, and she then used her reality device to take her four sisters, and herself, there, in an instant.
The rest of the people present then watched as the five teenage girls disappeared, as they jumped realities.
Right after the Lagoon girls left, Stan took a few steps back from Bob and Ed, so he could look at both of them. He then inquired, “What is so special about Annie?”
Bob and Ed turned around to look at Stan. They said, in unison, “We will tell you later.”
Stan thought, 'This is getting to be a habit with my parents.'
Annie and Violin had watched what had transpired, between Stan and his parents. And the two women giggled at Bob and Ed's response.
A second later, they heard a feminine voice, coming from the street, say, in english, “I must thank you for getting rid of those children. I didn't feel like fighting them again. Barring a few exceptions. I never cared for children, nor women, with attitudes. Let alone both. And I still don't.”
Everyone turned to look over to see a slender, asian woman, with a wild, bushy, dark green hair. The woman wore a blue leisure suit styled to her body frame.
The group watched as the woman calming walked across the street, and towards them.
As they continued watching the woman approach them, Ed and Bob were the only ones that immediately got the reference.
Ed thought, 'Nah. It couldn't be... Could it?'
Ed then turned to look at Bob. With Bob looking at her. From what Ed saw in Bob's eyes, she could tell that he was thinking the same thing. Both spouses then turned back to face the woman.
Ed and Bob then turned back to look at the green haired woman.
By this time, the woman had made it to the front yard. The woman then came to a stop, several feet in front of them.
Stan looked over at the dark green haired woman, as he exclaimed, “You?!”
Bob asked, in a neutral tone of voice, “Stan, do you know this woman?”
Stan answered, “No. But, be careful. She took out those Lagoon girls singlehandedly, with her bare hands.”
Ed stated, “That is not surprising, considering I think I know her.” She focused on looking at the face the green haired woman, as she inquired, “Spike?”
Spike smiled, as she causally said, in her female voice, “Good to see you to, Ed. It is nice to finally come home.”
Ed commented, “Glad to see you are alive, Spike. Faye, Jet, and I searched all over for you, after you disappeared. I could careless if you are a man, or a woman. I am just happy that you are alive.”
Spike replied, “I appreciate that, Ed.”
Ed smiled in response.
Annie spoke up, “Chang?”
Spike replied, “Yep.”
Annie said, “Join the club.”
Spike stated, “I did. And then I found I had no real taste for the quiet life.”
Annie replied, “Me neither.”
Stan thought, 'Oh great. Another gender bender. And from the sound of it, by the others, and from what I have seen, she is a serious badass.'
Violin put two and two together, as she spoke up, “You are Spike? As in Spike Spiegel of the Bebop?”
Spike turned to looked at the dark blue haired woman, as she answered, “Yes. I hope you don't want to fight.”
Violin casually responded, “No. I would like your autograph. I am a big fan.”
Spike let out a laugh. She then replied, “I may give it to you, later. Depending on what course these next few minutes take.”
Violin pointed out, “Still. Didn't you die right after you confronted Vicious.”
Annie spoke up, “This is not the first time that Hell Sabers saved a badass on the brink of death. I know first hand that Nicholas Wolfwood, of the Trigun anime reality, is alive and well.”
Bob inquired, “Wolfwood is alive?”
Annie answered, “Yea. And she is running her orphanage, while raising her biological daughter, which she gave birth to. I got to play midwife on that one. Last I checked on her, she had a cute, nine year old girl. And Nicholas now goes by Nichole.”
Spike stated, “So, it was not just myself, that decided to strike out on their own, after leaving that tower of horrors.”
Ed inquired, “So, what happened?”
Spike responded, “Well, what happened was I shot and killed Vicious, while, at the same time, he literally introduced me to my own guts. I then stumbled down some stairs, in an attempt to get some medical attention. I found out, at those last moments, I really wanted to live. When I got down to the middle of the staircase, I was several syndicate members at the bottom of the stairs. All of whom looked like they were going to kill me anyway. So, I made a gun out of my right hand, pointed it at them, said, bang. Then, I collapsed.”
Violin spoke up, “Yea. The, bang, heard across the multiverse.”
Spike went onto say, “Well, so people have heard about that incident? I find that flattering. Anyway, after I collapsed, I quickly passed out. The next thing I know, some military people are pulling me out of a vat of green goo, I had been turned into a woman, my right eye had regenerated. With that eye looking like my original left eye. But, the big shock was finding out I was six months pregnant.”
Ed asked, “So, you have a child of you own?”
Spike answered, “Yes. A five year old daughter. And she looks I would now, if I was a child. Right down to my dark green hair. That is why am taking this bounty. Because, I now have two mouths to feed.”
Ed flatly stated, “You are not taking Stan with you.”
Spike inquired, “And why not? I am a bounty hunter. And the price on Stan's head is obscene.”
Ed flatly answered, “Because he is my son.”
Spike replied, in disbelief, “Really? Well that does complicate matters a bit. But, you don't look that old.”
Ed stated, “I am older than I look. And so are you. And we both know that. Stan, and Lewis really are my kids. So, I am asking you, as a friend, to stop this. Because, if you don't, it will only end up in tears for all of us.”
Spike shrugged, as she said, “Okay. For you, Ed. I will drop the bounties for these two.”
Ed stated, “Thank you, Spike.”
Stan let out a breath of relief.
Spike mentioned, “By the way, did you know a man named John Crichton, whom died?”
Violin spoke up, as she stated, “You could say that. Why do you ask?” She thought, 'I don't want those that don't know me, to know I am the reincarnation of John. So, I will just refer to John in the third person.'
Nearby, Stan walked over to stand between his parents. He then whispered into his father's left ear, “John's dead? What happened?”
Bob softly responded, “Long story. We will tell you, later. Though, don't grieve for him. This is not the first time he had died, nor the first time he had come back.”
Bob quietly replied, “Okay.”
Spike commented, “Well, Scorpius put on a marvelous funeral for him.”
Violin asked, “What funeral?”
Spike answered, “Scorpius found his body, and gave him a funeral fit for a Grand Chancellor. And her eulogy of John was beautiful. I just wanted to know why Scorpius went to so much trouble for the man?”
Violin stated, “They had a near legendary rivalry. The love, hate foe yay was strong with them. Though, I find what she did to be touching.”
Annie said, “I would like to see this funeral.”
Violin commented, “So, would I.”
Bob said, “We will get a copy of it when we get there.”
Ed stated, “Now, Spike. Faye and Jet will be glad to hear you are alive. We will go meet them later. And have a nice reunion. It will be wonderful.”
Spike looked away from them, as she frowned. She quietly replied, “I don't want to see them.”
Bob said, “Spike, if you worried about them not accepting you, due to being a woman, and a mother. Don't be worried about that.”
Spike looked at Bob, as she inquired, “And you are?”
Bob answered, “Bob Lowe. Ed's husband. Stan and Lewis are our sons. And we are all good friends of Faye and Jet.”
Spike said, “Nice to meet you, Bob. But, it is not that. It is that I didn't part on the best of terms with them.”
Bob stated, “We know. Oh, do we know. That being said. I know for a fact that they searched for you, for months, after you disappeared. They never gave up hope they would see you again someday. Don't give up on them.”
Spike admitted, “You may have a point there.”
Bob commented, “Also, we have plenty of experience with gender benders and gender bending relationships.”
Spike inquired, “And what would you know about that?”
Bob smirked, as he replied, “A lot.” Bob then made himself sneeze, he turning into a slender woman, in her mid-twenties.”
Stan silently looked at his much young father, as a woman. He thought, 'Okay. I admit it. My father is hot as a woman. And a lot younger.'
Bob then sneezed again, and she changed back to his much older, male self.
Spike turned to Ed, as she joked, “Didn't know you swung that way, Ed.”
Ed stated, “I don't. For Bob, the gender bending is genetic, and latent. He latent genes are born dormant. His abilities were not activated until his forties. And the reason they were was that it came down to saving my life, and a friend's life, or activating his abilities. He choose to save our lives. It is one of the many reasons I love him.”
Spike turned back to Bob, as she smile. She complimented, “You are willing to make that sacrifice for, Ed. You have my respect, Bob.”
Bob replied, “Thank you.”
Spike questioned, “By the way, how are Faye and Jet doing?”
Ed smiled, as she answered, “Doing great, actually. It has been almost three decades since you disappeared, and they are still doing the bounty hunter thing. But, it is more of a hobby, than a necessary career. Over the years, they have hit it big on several bounties. Also, years ago, Faye finally got out of debt, and got her gambling addition under control. Though, it has been a wild time for them.”
Spike replied, “That is great to hear. Are they a couple?”
Ed responded, “No. Just good friends. Both have dated plenty of people. But, no one stuck. And neither of them have children. But, don't feel sad for them. We are working on getting some options for them, dealing extending their lifespans. We just have to deal with saving Lewis, first.”
Spike commented, “Knowing you, Ed. I am sure it will be inventive, and absolutely brilliant.”
Ed grin turned a little bit mischievous, as she stated, “Oh. It will be. If it is okay, we could use your help in rescuing my other son, Lewis.”
Bob spoke up, “We would more than love to have you with us. Dual wielding pistols. Grenades. Jeet Kune Do. Add that super-soldier serum to the mix, and I don't even want to think about what you presently could be capable of.”
Annie stated, “You might give me a workout.”
Violin commented, “Me too.”
Stan thought, 'Super-soldier serum?... This situation gets stranger by the minute.'
Spike sadly responded, “I cannot afford to. I have a daughter now, and I cannot risk being killed.”
Ed replied, “I understand. And when this is over, we, and your daughter, are going to have that little reunion with Faye and Jet.”
Spike joked, “Consider it a date.”
Ed pulled out a small piece of paper, and pen, from a pants pocket. She then wrote down something. Next, she walked over to Spike and handed her friend the piece of paper.
As Spike took the paper, Ed explained, “That is our address here. Meet us there, later this afternoon, around three PM, local time, with you daughter. We will contact Faye and Jet. And then teleport over to the Bebop, to reunited with them.”
Spike looked at the piece of paper. She then pocketed it, as she said, “I will see you there.”
Ed replied, “Thank you.”
Ed then walked back over to Bob and Stan, as she pocketed her pent. When she reached her family, she came to a stop, as she turned around to face Spike.
Spike commented, “Well, I might as well go check on the looked rugrat, and get her ready to meet you guys.” Spike then pulled out her reality device from one of her coat pockets.
Ed asked, “What is your daughter's name?
Spike smiled, as she said, “Guess.”
Ed replied, “Julia.”
Spike complimented, “You always were smart, Ed.” She then used the her reality device to disappeared, as she went to got get her daughter, Julia, in another reality.
Violin said, “Okay. Now, that we have defused two major situations in a row. Let's go rescue Lewis, before we have another situation to deal with.”
Ed complimented, “Good idea. We are pushing are luck, as is.” She turned to the female force user, as she stated, “Annie. Your up first. Do you know when and where you are going to go in the ship.”
Annie stated, “A day after Lewis was capture by Bane, again. In the afternoon, at one PM, local time.”
“I will teleport into some random, empty hallway. In my career, I have snuck into shuttle bays, hanger decks, barracks, offices, mess halls, command decks, armories, vaults, engineering sections, security check points, elevators, waste processing plants, and hallways.”
“And I have found that the hallways tend to be the least guarded. Outside of closets. That people there are heading to somewhere, and are not expecting an intruder to show up there. Half the time, I can just walk into the crowd, with a basic uniform, without anyone noticing I don't belong there. Though, that will not be the case in this rescue.”
Bob inquired, “Which of those places are usually the most guarded?”
Annie stated, “Waste processing plants. I don't understand it, either. But, that seems to be the case.”
Bob rolled his eyes for a few seconds. He then looked back at Annie.
Violin turned to Annie, as she stated, “Speaking of which. Given the last time we did this. Try not to destroy the ship, Annie.”
Annie looked over at Violin, as she joked, “I will avoid the explosive areas, if you do.”
Violin giggled for a few seconds. She then said, “Deal.”
Annie then walked away from the group, as she pulled out the reality device that Stan had given her.
Annie soon came to a stop. She turned around, as she held the reality device in her right hand. She stated, “See you on the flip side.” She then used the reality device to instantly teleport to Scorpius' flagship, in an empty hallway, at the proper time, place, and reality.
Ed then pulled out one of the reality devices that Stan had given her. She ordered. “Okay, everyone get close to me. I am going to teleport us to a small security room, which was listed as unused on the flagship's computers. It is within walking distance of both the mainframe, and Scorpius' office. Violin, do you know how to get to Scorpius' office from there?”
Violin stated, “Yea. I still remember the way.”
Ed said, “Good. Now, let's go save Lewis, and the multiverse.” She then thought of where, when, and what reality, she wanted to go, while making sure it was five minutes after Annie arrived. She then pushed the red button on the reality device in her right hand.
Bob, Violin, Stan and herself, then disappeared, as they jumped realities.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
I really enjoyed writing the flashback scene, of how Shane Caxton and Stan Lewis first met. And how Shane convinced Stan to join the football team, as a way for Stan to stay out of trouble.
And though, at the time, Shane realizes that Stan's parents might be from another reality. Or, at least one of them is. Shane still helps Stan, but he is careful in dealing with the matter.
Also, I found this flashback scene to be a touching scene, to show that Shane is a decent person, trying to do what is right, while balancing the situation which he realizes that Stan and himself, are in.
With Stan finally seeing his parents, Annie, and Violin, again. Though, he refused to talk to Ed and Bob, about their person matter, until Lewis is with them.
Stan even convinced his parents to let him come with him, to rescue Lewis.
And the reunion between Ed and Spike, was sweet and touching. With Ed convincing Spike to let go of the bounty hunt for Stan and Lewis.
Also, now that Stan and Lewis have settled their matters with their cousins. In addition with the Lagoon sisters, along with Spike, have finally being convinced to leave Stan and Lewis. We can move onto Scorpius in the next chapter.
And it was nice to show how badass Shane Caxton still is. Though, Shane is intelligent enough to turn down the reality device. And instead, focus on the safety of his family, on not getting to directly involved in other people's problems.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Nine: From War To Love.
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Farscape Reality. Place, Peacekeeper Space, Peacekeeper Fleet. Time, a day after Lewis was kidnapped. Early afternoon. The equivalent of one PM, local time.
It was early afternoon, ship time, around the equivalent of one PM. Annie had just teleported into a hallway in the Command a Carrier Flagship.
As Annie got her bearings in the hallway she found herself in, she smiled, as she sensed that there was no one around. Though, she did sense she was being watched. Which could only mean one thing.
Annie pocketed the reality device Stan had given her. Though, she did so in a separate pocket that she had her personal reality device in. She then check her hand held radio, which Ed and Bob had given her. Her radio was clipped to the left side of her belt. And it was left turned on, to listen out, if Ed, Bob, Violin, or Stan, needed her.
After Annie made sure her radio was find, she unhooked her lightsaber, and ignited her lightsaber.
Annie held the red bladed lightsaber at the ready, as she used the force to find the hidden wall camera, that was being used to watch her. She then walked turned towards the direction of that camera, as she held her lightsaber towards she camera.
Annie came to a stop, in front of the hidden camera, as she grinned wickedly. She casually said, into the camera, “Hi everyone. I'm back.”
(_)
At that moment, on the Command Deck of the Flagship, Commander Meka, and a number of her officers, where watching the monitors, which showed Annie grinning for the camera.
Meka thought, 'Annie is like a rash that refuse to stay away. And Scorpius will not let me use anything powerful enough to kill her, because the ordnance would like wreck the ship... Which, in all honesty, I can understand Scorpius' reasoning.'
'Fortunately, I do have a plan to keep Annie busy, as we wait for her friends to soon arrive. Which they will, because Annie is not one to just come visit without a reason, and a decent plan.'
'Now, to keep the soldiers in line.'
Meka turned towards he subordinates. She then ordered, “Use only a silent alarm on this. Keep taps on Annie's location, and have the crew, and security avoid her. Though, have a security team made as each secure location that she comes within a kilometer of. And only have then security engage her if she enters those secure areas.”
“Though, before attacking her, you are first ordered to ask her to leave the area.”
“Annie is not to be underestimated. She has already killed and seriously injured a number of peacekeepers. With any appreciable injury to herself. And we lack the ability to seriously harm her, without wrecking the ship.”
“Conflict with her will likely result is massive casualties on our side. So, if she unknowingly enters a secure area, and we can convince her to leave on her own volition. All the better for us.”
“Also, inform the Grand Chancellor that Annie is back. And tell Cad Bane to get to his assigned location.”
One of the officers, a female office, replied, “Yes Commander.”
Another officer. This time, a male officer, asked Commander Meka, “Commander, how did she get passed the protective traveling shield?”
Meka turned to the officer whom asked her the question. She smiled at the officer, as she complimented him, “Good question. My guess is that someone salvaged one or more of bounty hunters reality devices. Which we gave to the bounty hunters, in the first place.”
Meka thought, 'Unfortunately, due to various alien species, we hired, being so different, coding the reality devices to only work for those that we gave them to, with a self-destruct function built in, when they died, was not feasible. We will have to look into fixing that flaw sometime in the future. At least on our end.'
Meka looked out at her officers, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, to reassure my crew.'
Meka stated, “And do not worry. I have a plan to deal with Annie.” She smirked, as she continued, “And the best part is that it will not get any of us harmed, nor kill.
Have the droids brought online, and set them to head to their preplanned location.”
Meka dropped the smirk, as she ordered, “Now, load of the automate voice system. We will need it.” She mentally added, 'I am so happy that Scorpius showed some of her more interesting information with me. Like those Star Wars movies.'
(_)
As Annie stood in the hallway, she heard a monotone, automated voice say, in Sebacean, which Annie understood through the force, “Greeting Annie Skywalker. It is a rare treat to speak to someone of your notoriety.”
Annie thought, 'Whoever is speaking, is using my last name, and is preventing me from sensing her, or him. That means they know about me, and my abilities, while letting me know that they know about me, and my abilities. Still, it is probably best to be polite in such situations.'
Annie stated, “I will take that as a compliment.”
(_)
On the Commander Deck, Meka said, “I am glad to hear that.”
As Meka spoke, one of her subordinates was typing down her works into the computer, which then spoke, in a computerized voice, from the speakers in the hallway Annie was inside of.
Meka thought, 'I have not intention of Annie harming me, nor my men. And I will do everything in my power to prevent such a situation. Such as using this system that Scorpius, herself, developed, if she ever had to talking to someone that could use their abilities to attack across communication lines. Such as Annie's force chocking abilities. And the system seems to be working. I am not actually speaking to Annie. The computer is. I am not even the person typing at the computer. This creates two layers of protection, and I have two other officers ready to cut the communications in two different ways, if things start to go badly for anyone of us here. '
Meka said, “Now, I have an offer for you.”
(_)
In a hallway, Annie stated, “I am listening.”
The automated voice said, “Here is the offer. We will play a little game. And while we do so, I will not send my subordinates after your friends, whom we both know will show up soon enough.”
Annie inquired, “And what is this game?”
The automated voice said, “You will entertain, myself, with a little battle, in a shuttle bay elsewhere in this ship.”
Annie stated, “I doubt you could provide a challenge for me.”
The automated voice baited Annie, “Then, this will not be a problem for you.”
Annie thought, with amusement, 'Nice come back.' Annie said, “Alright. Let's play.” She then warned, in a colder tone of voice, “But, if you break your word. I will literally tear this ship apart.”
Automated voice responded, “I know you will. That is why, I have no intention of breaking my word with you... As long as you do not alter your end of the deal.”
Annie rolled her eyes for a few seconds. She thought, 'It's bad when the villains get in on the injokes.' She mentally grumbled, 'I am never going to live down things I never, personality, technically did.' She then looked back towards the direction of where the hidden wall camera was.
The automated voice stated, “In a few seconds, a map will be posted to the terminal beside you. Memorize it. And then follow it. We will inform you if you get lost.”
Annie then noticed a monitor computer terminal on a wall beside her. A three dimensional map pop up, using red lines, popped up on the flat screen. The map then used a yellow line to show Annie a route how to reach a shuttle bay, in another part of the ship.
Annie thought, 'So, they want this battle to take place in a shuttle bay. That figures. The force will warn me, if they try to space me. And even if they do, I can just teleport out at the last moment. And then I will come after them.'
(_)
On the command deck, Meka and the officers watched the screens, as Annie starting walking briskly along the route she had been given.
Meka thought, 'I love it went a plan comes together. And this is going to be fun to watch. But, that is one thing I need to do first.'
Meka turned to her officers, as she ordered, “Now, order the security team, and personnel. Should any other intruders enter the ship, while Annie is here. You are to leave them alone. And avoid them. Though, inform me immediately of any intruders arriving, while Annie is present. And we shall keep taps on the individuals.”
Meka mentally reflected, 'I have no intention of break my word to someone as dangerous as Annie. Though, I do look forward to having some fun with her. Though, it will be a few minutes before the action starts. But, I have long since learned the value of patience.'
Meka then turned back to watch Annie made her way to the requested destination.
(_)
Five minutes later, as Annie made her way towards her destination, in an empty security room, elsewhere in the Command Carrier flagship, Ed, Bob, Violin, and Stan appeared.
The room was dark.
Ed stated, “Nobody move, I will take care of this.”
Stan offered, “I have my zippo lighter.”
Ed said, “Don't use it. You might trip the fire alarms.”
Stan replied, “Okay.”
Ed memorized the layout of the previous security room she had been in, and she made an academic guess that the layout was the same in this room. She then pocketed the reality device in her hand. Next, felt along the wall, and she soon found the light switch.
After the light came on, Violin said, “Thanks, Ed.”
Ed replied, “No problem.” She then quickly locations a computer terminal, and walked over, and sat down in the chair, in front of the screen and keyboard.
As Ed turned the computer terminal on, and became hack into it, Bob stayed by her side.
Though, Bob turned to Stan, as he asked, in a firm tone of voice, “You are not smoke, behind our back, now son.”
Stan turned to his father, as he quickly stated, “No. I just keep the lighter, in case I need. And Lewis and I have needed it a few times. To see with.”
Stan thought, 'Like when Lewis and I ended up in that collapsed building, and we had first changed into teenage girls. That was interesting. And we used my lighter to find out way out.'
'Though, that is another excuse I have for carrying my zippo.'
Stan commented, “Also, it can be used to make a fire, and keep from getting cold. Which is very useful if one is ever stranded.”
Bob conceded, “That is a good point, son.”
Stan replied, “Thank you, dad.” Stan then turned to Violin, as he joked, “It seems I just keep coming back here.”
Violin looked over at Stan, as she agreed, “No kidding.”
Stan said, “By the way, thanks for showing us that series. It pointed us in the right direction.”
Violin replied, “You're welcome.” She thought, 'And in doing so, I royally screwed myself, by getting myself killed, and reincarnated. Though, at least, I was able to help them. So, it was not a total tragedy.'
Stan requested, “Also, when this is over, I would like to know the story behind you, and those girls after us.”
Violin warmly smiled at Stan, as she offered, “Stan, when this is over. I will be more than happy to tell you and Lewis, everything.”
Stan replied, “Thank you. And I looked forward to it.”
Violin stated, “So, do I. Now, let's get to work, and kick some ass.”
By then, Ed was looking at the monitor in front of her, above a keyboard, as she said, “Okay. We are only online. And we are exactly where we want to be.”
Bob, Violin, and Stan, turned to looked at Ed.
Violin and Stan then walked behind her, and beside Bob, as all four adults looked at the computer screen. Bob was to Stan's right side, and Violin was to Violin's right side. With Ed in front of the other three individuals in the room.
Ed brought up a three dimensional map of the ship, in red lines, on the flat monitor. The map then showed a route with a yellow line. She stated, “This is the route to the mainframe.” The yellow line change to a different direction, as Ed continued, “And this is the route to Scorpius office. As I believe, both those locations are not that far from here.”
Violin commented, “Good. We might be able to wrap this up sooner than I had hoped.”
Bob inquired, “Any sign of, Lewis?
Ed responded, in a sad tone of voice, “No. But, I am not that worried. We will find him.”
Violin said, “Guys, don't worry. If I have too, I will literally pound the answers our of Scorpy.”
Ed inquired, “I know you would, Violin. Also, Violin, would you like to watch John's funeral?”
Violin answered, “Yes.”
Ed got up from her seat. She leaned down, and typed a few keys. She stood up, and turned to Violin. She said, “The video should start in a few seconds.”
Violin quietly said, “Thank you.”
Ed then turned to Bob, and Stan, as she stated, “Come on boys, let's head to the mainframe.”
As the members of the Lowe family exited the room, Violin overheard Stan asked, “Why would Violin want to see John's funeral?”
Ed and Bob said, in unison, “We will tell you, later.”
Their comments could not help by make Violin crack a smile. She sat down in front of the screen, as she waited for the video to start.
The video then started. The video showed the funeral, while the speakers, on the sides of the monitor, gave her Scorpius's wonderful eulogy about John's life.
A few minutes later, the funeral was over. With it showing the massive display of the fleets firepower, as a twenty-one gun style salute, taken to the extreme, as John's casket was sent into a nearby star.
Violin could not help be shed a few tears at what she had just saw, and watched.
While experiencing a range of emotions. Both good and bad. At the same time. Violin though, 'I didn't know that Scorpy could give such a touching speech. Given the effort she went through to put on the funeral, and that speech, I think she does care for me. While, I was not planning to to kill her. I will got a little easier on her. Still, I am just going to kick her ass some.'
Violin then got up from the chair, and she left the room. Next, she turned in the right direction, down the hallway, as she started walking toward Scorpius' office, as a swift pace, by human standards. Though, she did not use her super-speed.
(_)
At that moment, Scorpius was sitting behind her desk, as Commander Meka kept her up to date.
Scorpius thought, 'Meka is doing a wonderful job of following my plan. I think I will not step in, unless I have to. The question is, if I can pull this off without a problem. Oh well. If things don't work out as I had hoped. I have contingency plans.'
(_)
Elsewhere in the flagship, Annie finally entered the large shuttle bay, which she had been directed to.
Annie walked into the shuttle bay, with her ignited, red bladed lightsaber at the ready, in her right hand. With the red blade pointing away, and in front of her. She though, 'I wonder what they have planned for me here?'
(_)
On the command deck, an officer approached, Meka, as the commander walked the video of Annie entering the shuttle bay.
The officer stated, “Commander. As you expected, the Lowe family is heading for the mainframe.”
Meka turned to the officer, as she responded, “Good. There are two people, in two separate areas, that can deal with them. Whom are not part of this crew.” She thought, 'Though, that is all part of Scorpius plan. And they are not part of my personnel, so I am still keeping my word with Annie.'
The officer went onto say, “Also, the one known as, Violin, is on a direct course with the Grand Chancellor's office. Shall, I post a security team to intercept her.”
Meka ordered, “No. The reason being, Annie was not bluffing on her claim that she could tear apart this ship. She could literally do it with her psionic abilities. And we might not be able to stop her. Though, do inform the Grand Chancellor that she should be expecting company.”
The officer replied, “Yes, Commander.” He then went to rely his commander's orders.
Meka then turned back to the monitor, which showed Annie in a shuttle bay. She cracked a grin, as she thought, 'Now, the real entertainment begins.'
(_)
As Annie walked deeper into the large shuttle bay, she saw twenty large containers to her right side, on the far end of the shuttle bay. In a grid pattern, of five boxes wide, and four rows deep.
But, Annie did not see anything else in the shuttle bay. She did not even see any other small space ships.
Also, Annie did not sense anyone nearby.
Suddenly, to her right side, Annie heard an electronic voice state, “Halt. Or, be killed.”
Annie turned to see the voice. And she saw the contained had all broken apart. And she saw what was inside them.
As Annie looked at her enemies, she immediately recognized then from watching some Earth sci-fi movies, that she had seen, with John Crichton.
Annie held her ignited red bladed lightsaber, at the ready, in front of her. She thought, with glee, 'These peacekeepers know how to please a woman. This only brings a tear to my eyes. As it almost makes me nostalgic for my droid battles, during the Clone Wars.'
In front of Annie were twenty ED-209 enforcement droids from the Robocop reality. They were large, ten tall, two legged, walking tanks, with two arms, which had machine guns, and missiles, in them.
Annie thought, 'This is going to be so much fun. And I take back what I said earlier. This is going to be a challenge.'
Annie then did a running charge, that turning to a leaping attack, as she tore into the droids.
Annie had fun, as she deflecting the droids projectile shots, while she used her lightsaber to slice through them. In addition, she also used the force to toss some of them around the large hanger.
(_)
On the command deck of the flagship, Commander Meka watched on the monitor, which was relying real time recordings, from the security cameras, showed the beginning of Annie's fight with the droids, in one of the command carrier's many shuttle bays.
Meka thought, 'I remember when I bought these from that reality I learned about. I got them at a good deal, on wholesale, during a time period, where Omni Consumer Products went bankruptcy.'
'And while these droids' AIs are dren. They make good fodder. And they will keep Annie busy, until the rest of Scorpius' plan is complete. Though, after all this is over, I am going to have to talk to Scorpius' about her plan.'
'I do have some important questions for Grand Chancellor Scorpius.'
'And, from the look a joy Annie's face, it seems she is enjoying this. Though, she is actually having to push herself a bit to take on twenty enforcement droids at one. Well, eighteen know. She already sliced on apart with her lightsaber. Which I have to say is a cool weapon. While she used the force to take another enforcement droid into a third enforcement droid. Destroying the droid that was thrown, while damaging the third droid. A few other droids are also severely damaged.'
'I am also feel content that I was able to provide challenge for her. I was not sure I sure if I could. But, I was able too.'
'And while I doubt these droids will be able to seriously harm, nor kill Annie. I do hope these droids are able to keep Annie busy, long enough for Scorpius' to pull off her plan.'
'Though, if this turns into a quick conflict, this battle is truly entertaining to watch. I am glad I am recording, to watch again, later.'
Meka continued to watch as Annie fought enforcement droids.
(_)
Inside Scorpius' office, Scorpius was sitting behind her desk, when she heard door in front of her, slide open, and then close. She looked up to see a slender, fair skinned looking, young woman, with dark blue hair, that went down to her neck line, walking towards her. The woman wore black pants, a red t-shirt, and black tennis shoes.
As Violin approached Scorpius, she greeted her, “Hi ya, Scorpy.” She looked around as she said, “I like what you have done with the place. And look what I now have.” She used both her hands to gesture her breasts, as she continued, “And all thanks to you.” She then dropped her hands back to her sides, as she continued to approach Scorpius.
Scorpius got out of her seat, and walked around her desk to her right side, as she stated, “I have been expecting you, Violin.”
Violin grinned wickedly, as she inquired, “Is that what you are going to call me, now?”
Scorpius calmly asked, “Then, how should I address you?”
Violin sarcastically stated, “Oh girl friend. You hound my ass for years, and you forgot about me. That just hurts.”
Scorpius inquired, in mild surprised, “John?”
Violin replied, “Here's a hint.” She then used her super-speed and super-strength to quickly close the gap between them, and she swiftly knocked Scorpius into the wall, with her right fist.
Scorpius hit the wall, and slid down into a sitting position, that allowed her to see Violin.
It was then, Violin noticed that the force of the blow was about to cause the small vase of white flowers on Scorpius's was about tip over. Violin quickly rushed over, and she stopped by the desk. She then carefully placed her hands the vase to keep it from falling onto the floor. She then set the vase back in place, and let go of it.
After which, Violin turned to look back at where Scorpius was sitting, as she stated, “I didn't want to cause the flowers to fall over. I know how much they mean to you, Scorpy.”
While Scorpius looked up, from her sitting position, against the walled, she what Violin had done with the vase. She then heard what Violin said. And she put two and two together.
Scorpius guessed, “You have seen our series?”
Violin flexed her right fist, which she had just used to hit Scorpius with, as she stated, “Of course. I even saw the season three episode, Incubator. Real tragic stuff. Makes what Annie went through look tame in comparison.”
“That being said. We now know what makes each other tick, even though we are both different genders now. With you being a lot more pleasing to the eyes. And while I am not really crazy about being a girl, and having monthly periods, I have to admit this body is definitely built ford tough.”
“Also, do not think for one second that your physical and mental abilities are going to help you. I now outclass you in both. You may have used a super-soldier serum, but I have a bio-engineer alien badass for a mother. There is just no comparison.”
As Scorpius heard what Violin said, she had done a quick mental check to find that she was physically unharmed. With her armor and physical toughness being able the brunt of Violin's blow. She stood up, as she stated, in a confused tone of voice, “John? You're alive? I thought you were dead.”
Violin grinned wickedly, as she responded, “I could say the same about you. If you don't survive this battle, I will be highly disappointed with you. See, we are the Megatron and Prime of the uncharted regions. We just go around and around and around. By the way, I saw the funeral you did for me. I admit that you did a good job.”
Scorpius gave Violin a warm smile, as she replied, “Thank you, John.”
Violin then rushed at Scorpius, with her right fist. The peacekeeper easily caught Violin's right punch, with her left hand. What happened next caught Violin completely off guard.
Scorpius quickly moved toward Violin's face, and kissed her on her lips.
Scorpius then let go of Violin's right fist.
Violin swiftly backed up, as she stated, in shock, “Whoa. Hold it. I came to kick your ass. Not have a piece of it.”
Scorpius casually suggested, “Why not we do both?”
Scorpius then punched Violin across the room and into a wall, with her right fist.
As Violin landed on the floor. She did as her parents had trained her. She used the inertia to do a backwards roll, onto her feet. She then sprung back into a standing position,
Scorpius saw no signs of injury on Violin, as she complimented, “That was a marvelous display of acrobatics.”
Violin responded, “Thank you. Though, how can you be so strong? I though you were a pure Sebacean now?”
Scorpius explained, “John, you may have forget that I was originally born with Scarran strength. And what I told you, after I was first changed into this form, you see before you.”
“While my DNA was purified. And the purity tests stated I am a pure Sebacean. I kept a number of my abilities, which were all enhanced greatly.”
“Though, all my weaknesses have been removed. Such as it feels good not to have a cylinder inside my head. We are equals now in strength and mind.”
“And while you are a slightly faster than me, my skills and intelligence allow me compensate. In another words, I am going to enjoy every minute of this.”
Violin smirked, as she stated, “Then, let's play.”
Violin then charged at Scorpius, as Scorpius rushed at her.
(_)
At another location in the flagship, the Lowe family were making their to the mainframe.
As they walked though a hallway, Ed was leading the way. Bob had his hand on his holstered revolver, which Bob was ready to pulled out at a moments notice. And Stan walked behind his two parents.
Bob asked, “We have got through a few hallways, and a couple of elevators. How much further is it to the mainframe.?”
Ed said, “The mainframe is few chambers from here. We should be there in a few minutes.”
Stan inquired, “Given we haven't seen anyone since we have been walking through these hallways, and I am sure they know we are here, do you think there is a trap waiting for us at the mainframe?”
Ed and Bob answered, in unison, “Obviously.”
As they continued walking, Stan commented, “I get the feeling, before Lewis and I were born, you guys use to do this kind of thing a lot.”
Bob sarcastically responded, “What? Break into heavily guards fortresses?”
Ed giggled a little.
Stan replied, “Yea.”
Bob admitted, “Not really, son. But, we did have a number of adventures.”
Stan stated, “That is another issue. You didn't tell us anything.”
Ed spoke up, “That is because we wanted you to have safe lives.”
Stan pointed out, “Yet, you continued to live the high life behind our backs, while we lived mundane lives.”
Ed stated, “Okay. We admit that not telling you two about the bikini parties was wrong. But, the rules stated, no boys. Girls were allowed. But, no boys. And no gender bending of boys. Though, there was options to temporally gender bend any men, into women, whom wanted to come with their spouses and friends.”
Stan commented, with disgust in his tone of voice, “That is so sexist.”
Ed and Bob said, in unison, “We agree.”
Bob went onto say, “But, it wasn't our parties, and wasn't our rules. We were only guests.”
Stan said, “Well, we will have to continue this conversation, after we rescue Lewis.”
Ed stated, “That we will.”
Bob said, “I have a question for you, Stan.”
Stan requested, “What is it?”
Bob inquired, “Now, that I think about it, Lewis and you spent a week here? Do you have any idea where Lewis is?”
Stan shook his head, as he commented, “No. During the time, we were either in the lab, working on the gate system. In our quarters, resting. Or, dining with Scorpius. And to be honest, she was a wonderful hostess for those meals.”
Ed asked, “Interesting. Did you meet anyone while here?”
Stan said, “Only the support team assign to us, Scorpius, and her second in command, Commander Meka.”
Ed questioned, “Who is this, Commander Meka?”
Stan replied, “I am not sure. We did not see her much. But, I do know she was in charge of this command carrier, while her also being the go between for Scorpius and the rest of the Peacekeeper fleet.”
Ed stated, “I can see why Scorpius would need someone like that. Given that Scorpius is now the Grand Chancellor, she would need help. And with Braca not being there, she would need someone else to fill Braca' role.”
Stan said, “Yes. And I always got the sense that Scorpius and Meka were friends. And that Meka was very competent at her job.”
Bob pointed out, “That is not surprising. Scorpius values competent personnel, whom are not suck ups.”
Stan agreed, “Yea. I would say that Meka would be what Scorpius would want as an assistant.”
Bob commented, “After meeting Braca, I would have to agree. One can say many things about Braca, but he was competent, and profession.”
Ed inquired, “Do you want to see if Braca is alive? We still might be able to rescue him?”
Bob said, “I am sure, that by now, that issue is already resolved. One way, or another.”
Ed shrugged, as she replied, “You are likely correct.”
Ed then turned, and came to a stop at a doorway. She press a button, on panel by the doorway, with the door in front of them sliding open.
Ed stated, “This way.” As she walked into the next room, with Bob and Stan following right behind her.
As the door slid closed behind them, they saw they were in another, slightly larger hallway, than the one they had been in. The hallway was not very long, about fifty feet in length, from the door by them, to the door on the other side of the hallway. And there with a desk by the door, on the other side of the hallway.
Ed stated, “The door over there leads directly to the mainframe.”
Bob drew his revolver, as he stated, “Okay. I go first, into the next room. Ed, you are second. Stan, you’re third.”
The Lowe family walked briskly over to the other door.
When the reached the door, Ed pressed a button on the panel on the nearby wall to door. The door then slid open.
After the open the door, Bob walked the threshold of the door, with his pistol at the ready, as he looked around, inside the other room.
Stan asked, “What does it look like?”
Bob said, “We were right. It's a trap. I don't see the trap. But, I can see the layout is perfect for a trap. Basically, it is a large, circular room, about a hundred yards in diameter, with a small tower, in the center of the room. The tower has computer terminals around the base of the terminal, at waist level, and it stretches up to the ceiling, which is around a hundred feet up. I am guessing the tower is the mainframe. And there is no cover in that room, except for the central tower.”
Ed inquired, “Like the finale level, in computer game, for the boss fight?”
Bob cracked a smile, as he said, “Exactly.”
Ed stated, “Well, we don't have a choice. We get in there, and get out as quickly as possible. I will hack the other computer as swiftly as possible to delete the files, and find Lewis.”
Bob replied, “Okay. I am going in. You two stay right behind me.”
Bob cautiously walked into the room.
Just as Ed joined him in the mainframe room, someone, whom was hiding under the desk, quietly stood up, and walked behind Stan.
The person suddenly pulled Stan back, and to the floor, on his back. The person then quickly used the control panel on the wall to slide closed the door to the mainframe room, and lock it.
(_)
Inside the mainframe room, Ed and Bob quickly turned around, as they heard the door slide shut. they realized that someone had shut the door between then and Stan.
Ed turned to Bob, as she said, with concern in her tone of voice, “It's locked.”
Ed then bent down by the panel, as she pulled her tool kit. She turned to the panel, as she turned on the intercom between the two sides of the door.
After doing so, Ed started to try to take the panel apart, while she loudly stated, “Stan! Can you hear me?!”
(_)
On the other of the door, in the hallway, Stan leaned up, to see who had just thrown him to the ground.
When he did, his jaw dropped, in surprise.
Stan then, heard his mother say, through an intercom, between the two rooms, “Stan! Can you hear me!”
Stan quickly forced himself to calm down. He then inquired, “Yes. Can you hear me, mom?”
After hearing Stan's voice, Ed answered, in a slightly calmer tone of voice, “Yes. What is going on out there?”
Stan stated, “There is only one person here. And I am sure I can handle this person. Go get what needs to be done. I will meet you, later.”
Ed said, “Okay son.”
(_)
Inside the mainframe room, Ed put away her tool kit, as she stood up. She turned around, and looked at her husband.
Bob looked at her, as he said, “I trust that Stan can handle himself. If he says he can. Let's do the job, and then find Lewis.”
Both adults then started walking towards the mainframe tower, about fifty yards away, in the center of the circular room,
(_)
In the hallway, Stan stood up, as he requested, towards the other person, “Would you care to turn off the intercom, so we can talk in private.”
The other person touched a button on the panel to turn off the intercom. The person then turned to face Stan.
With the intercom turned off, Stan said, “Thank you. And, by the way, hi Lewis. This is not how I expect to see you, the next time we met.”
Standing in front Stan, was Lewis. Whom was in her taller, nattou enhanced, female form. Though, that was not the surprising part.
The surprising part was Stan see that Lewis was wearing a black leather, skin tight, full body, dominatrix outfit. Completely with a full mask, which covered her face and head. There were holes for her mouth, nostrils, eyes, and a hole in back, to allow her red hair to come out of the mask in a ponytail. She was also wearing flat sole, black leather, lace-less, cowgirl boots, with zippers running up the interior sides of the boots.
Lewis giggled, as she started walking towards, Stan. Then, she stop giggling, as she came to a stop a few feet from Stan. Just far enough for her to reach him.
Lewis asked, in a casual tone of voice, “Hi Stan. So, how did you know it was me?”
Stan shrugged, as he responded, “The red hair, and the fact that suit leaves almost nothing to imagination. And we have seen each other nude in our taller female forms. It is not a sight that one forgets. I can even see you camel toe in that suit. And that is wrong to say, on so many levels.”
Lewis giggled again. And between giggles, Lewis agreed, “Yes. It is.”
Stan commented, “I have a feeling that you are not planning on leaving with me.”
Lewis answered, “No. Not just yet. I want to have some fun, first.”
Stan questioned, “I hope it is not the type of fun that those suits are usually used for?”
Lewis flatly answered, “No.”
Stan looked at sister up and down, as he stated, “Anyway, I see you have been busy, Lewis.” He grinned mischievously, as he teased, “It is always the quiet ones.”
Lewis pouted, which was quite hilarious to see, given the dominatrix outfit she was wearing, as she commented, “Actually, I am still a virgin. Both ways. While, you are still only a virgin as a girl.”
Stan inquired, “True. But then, what is with the dominatrix outfit?”
Lewis answered, “Well, I admit that I am crazy at the moment. Scorpius temporally triggered my genes all the way up, without nattou. She used some other chemical she has to do it. Given what both now know that she is capable of, I didn't try to stop her. And the chemical also set my mind into full crazy genius mode. Then, she offered me this outfit, which fits, and asked me to capture you. And I said, yes, because I thought it would be fun.” She then looked down at her own black leather suit, as she said, “And this doesn't look half bad on me.”
Stan thought, 'If this is temporary, then I can probably knock some sense into Lewis, if I can get her to sneeze, and change into a guy. Even though it would be embarrassing to do so in that outfit.' Stan looked around, and he then realized there was nothing around to get Lewis to sneeze. He thought, 'My kingdom for a black pepper shaker... Okay. I need to stall her.'
Stan then noticed that Lewis was wearing flat, he stated, “True. In an S&M kind of way. But, hold it a minute. You cannot wear that dominatrix outfit without high heels. And those are flat soled boots.”
Lewis looked at her feet for a seconds. She then looked back up at Stan, as she responded, “Cut me some slack, neither of us know how to walk in high heels. I honestly don't think mom, let along dad, knows how to either.”
Stan thought, 'I need to know more about this chemical used on you, Lewis.' He conceded, “Fair enough. Though, given Scorpius probably plans give me the same chemicals. I wonder if they have had a permanent effect on you. Mom and dad would be pissed, if that was the case.”
Lewis responded, “That is a good point. And to answer you question. Scorpius said my change is not permanent. She said that should I changed into my male form, the chemical will immediately break down when, and start to flush, over the course of a few hours. She said it had something to do about being exposed to testosterone.”
Stan replied, “Okay.” He thought, 'That is a relief. Now, I just need to figure a way to change you back into your male form.'
Lewis said, “So, are you going to surrender to me?”
Stan flatly responded, “No. I guess you had decided to play the role of the crazy, dominatrix servant.”
Lewis stated, “Yes.”
Stan questioned, “Why?”
Lewis grinned wickedly, as she commented, “Because it is true what they say. Girls just want to have fun.”
Stan thought, 'Lewis, I really don't want to fight you. So, let's see if that is any chance to reason with you.' Stan pleaded, “Come on, Lewis. You sound like one of those crazy chicks that has been chasing us.”
Lewis smirked, as she pointed out, “At the moment, I am one of those crazy chicks. Which is a good excuse to do this.”
Lewis threw a punch at Stan, which connected to his jaw.
Stan took a steps back, but he did not otherwise falter. And he did not immediately response. With neither words, nor violence.
Lewis stated, “I will be honest. I always wondered which one of us would win in a fight between the two of us. And since our female forms retain our strength in our male forms, I am going to get the chance to find out.”
Stan continued to refuse to responded.
Lewis goaded, “What? You don't like hitting a girl?”
Stan swiftly punched Lewis in her gut, as he responded, “Actually, I don't care for violence outside of sports. But, I will defend myself, when I have too.”
Lewis then returned the blow in kind to Stan's gut.
Stan grunted, as he threw a punch to Lewis' jaw, which forced her a few feet back. Stan then stated, “Before we continue this. I would like to set some ground rules.”
Lewis said, “I am listening.”
Stan stated, “Do not go for my eyes, and groin, and I won't go for your eyes, breasts, and groin.”
Lewis commented, “I can understand the first two. But, I am a girl. Why would I worry about being hit in the groin.”
Stan pointed out, “You forget your medical lessons. While it does not hurt as long, it can hurt almost as bad for a women to get hit in the groin, as it does a man. A person just has to have better aim.”
Lewis replied, “Good point. I accept those terms.”
Stan said, “Good.”
The two Lowe siblings then went back to fighting each other.
(_)
At that moment, inside the mainframe room, Ed and Bob came with twenty feet of the mainframe tower, in the center of the room, when Cad Bane walked out from behind the center tower, to confront them.
Cad had his blasters already pulled out, and in his hands.
As Cad pointed a blaster each, at the two other adults, Bob pointed his revolver back at Bane.
Cad said, “So, I guess you two are the ones I will be fighting.”
Bob stated, “Nope. Just me. I have the gun. Still, if I asked you to walk away, would you?”
Cad replied, “No. I will not leave, old man.”
Bob pointed out, “You are right, I am an old man. Still, do you realize that the reason you are here, and not the peacekeepers, is that Scorpius considers you cannon fodder?”
Cad cracked a smile, as he agreed, “Of course. But, as long as Scorpius continues pays me well. And she does not give me any suicide missions. I am okay with arrangement.”
Bob kept his eyes on Bane, as he said, “Ed, get to the terminal, and do the job we came here to do. I will keep him busy.”
Ed responded, “Good luck. And went this is over, we teleport out of here.”
Ed then ran to a terminal facing her husband, as she began to hack directly into the Command Carrier mainframe.
Bob replied, “Exactly.”
Bob mentally reflected, 'I have seen the Clone Wars series. Cad Bane is a top rate badass. He could give Revy and Chang a run for their money, in both the dual wielding pistols, and hand to hand combat skills, even after those two received that super-soldier serum.'
'Cad one time fought two Jedi masters to a stand still, and he then got away. He was also able to withstand the mental attack of three powerful force users at once. Though, he gave into their demands after that, but they did not break him. He just didn't want to go through that again.'
'And I am an old man. I tempted to change into my much younger female form. But, he might take that as an insult, and shoot Ed. I just have to stall him, until Ed is finished.'
Bob commented, “By the way, Bane. I have to agree with others, on the subject. That is a nice hat.”
Cad said, “Thanks. And that is nice coat you have.”
Bob offered, “Thank you. I will give you the address of my tailor, if you agree to walk away.”
Cad replied, “Tempting. But no.”
Bob stated, “Worth a try. Now, you have been hounding our boys long enough. I am going to kick your ass for that.”
Cad smirked, “I would like to see you try.”
Bob replied, “Then, I aim to please.”
Bob then fired his pistol at Cad Bane.
Bane immediately used his boot rocket jets to move back, and up, around in the air, as he fired his blasters at Bob.
Bob quickly rolled out of the way, to his right side. As he came upright, and on his feet, he fired his revolver at Bane.
Both gunslingers continued moving, keeping mere feet from being shot by the other. As they returned fire. With neither hitting the other.
When Bob ran out of bullets, he was able to swiftly reload his top-break pistol with speed-loaders, while moving.
(_)
Elsewhere in the ship, in a shuttle bay, Annie was still fighting the enforcement droids.
From the twenty droids she started with, she was now down to three.
One of the droids fire a missile, which she used the force to deflect away from her.
At the same time, the other too fire their machine guns at her, which Annie has not problems using her lightsaber to deflect the bullets.
She then jumped onto the first droid, and used her lightsaber to slice the body of it long ways, causing it to fall to the ground, deactivated.
Next, as she jumped off on of the halves, of the fall the destroyed droid, she used the forced to literally crush the second droid into a metal ball.
And finally, she was within twenty feet of the third droid, as she used force lightning to electrocute the droid, over the course of a few seconds, until she sensed its circuits were completely fired.
As Annie looked around, she kept her lightsaber in a defensive stance. A minute later, when she confirm with the force that none of the droids were active, and they no longer presented a threat to herself. Nor, were their any other threats around her. She let out a breath of relief.
Annie thought to herself, 'Now, that was a workout... And what should I do now. I am not really tired.'
'Still, if I exit this shuttle bay, to another part of the ship, they will likely send peacekeepers to intercept my friends. I think it is best if I wait here, and listen to my radio.'
'If there is a problem, one of the others will call for help, and I will just use my reality device to immediately teleport over to their location.'
'Though, I will keep my lightsaber activated, just in case.'
Annie continued to use her right hand to hold her lightsaber at the ready, as she patiently waited for word from her friends.
(_)
On commander deck, Meka has moved to her personal office, as she continued to look over the situation.
Presently, Meka was sitting in a very conformable, cushion armchair, behind her desk, as she watch four different video feeds at once on her large desk screen. The reasons she moved to her desk to monitor the situation was for privacy, and because it was the only place on the ship that someone was allowed to watch the cameras in Scorpius' office.
The reason there were cameras in Scorpius' office was in case someone actually was about to take Scorpius hostage. Which was very unlikely. Still, Scorpius trusted Meka with her personal privacy.
While Meka watched the events unfolding in Scorpius' office, she smiled mischievously, as she thought, 'I have to admit that Scorpius is... inventive.
She was also looking over three other video feeds, which were divided on her screen.
The video feeds showed Annie's fight with the enforcement droids. The fight between the Lowe siblings. And the fight between Cad Bane and Bob Lowe.
Besides what had been happening in Scorpius' office, Meka been focusing her attention on the conclusion of the fight Annie had with the droids. With the battle just finally concluding.
Meka thought, 'Well, that fight lasted longer than I thought it would. And Annie does look a little winded, but I know better than to try to take advantage of the situation. Also, from what I can see, she is staying put. That shows she is intelligent. I will give her that. As long as she does not leave that shuttle bay, I won't have to use my security forces against any of her friends. Nor, herself.'
'Now, what about the other two fights?'
Meka looked at the video feeds of the Lowe sibling fighting, as she thought, 'I must say, the sibling fight is surprisingly evenhanded. And it is entertaining, given I know for a fact that neither of them have received real training in hand to hand combat, save for some very basic lessons. I will have to keep an eye on that fight. Now, to the other fight that concerns me more.'
She then looked at the fight between Bob and Bane. Bane was still in the air, with Bob moving around on the ground, as both kept trying to hit the other, and missing.
Meka mentally reflected, 'Bob is giving Bane quite a challenge. Not bad at all on Mister Lowe's part. I didn't realize that Bob was this good. On the other hand, I knew that Cad Bane was skilled. I learn this from watching the Clone Wars series, with Scorpius, while we were doing... other enjoyable things. But, this Bob Lowe is definitely a surprising dark horse in this fight.'
'Still, the fuel in those rockets on Bane's boots won't last much longer. At this rate, Cad Bane will likely grow impatient, and move in for a more closer combat situation. And from what Scorpius has informed me, close combat is a specialty of Bob's skill set.'
'Also, I need to keep an eye on, Ed. I hope that Ed does not do any serious damage to the ship's mainframe. Nor, that a stray shot from the other two, won't damage the mainframe, nor injured Ed. I just have to trust that Scorpius' plan works.'
Meka then continued to silently watch the video feeds.
(_)
In the mainframe room, Bob and Bane kept moving around, as they returned fire. With both of them continuing to miss.
Bob was moving on the group, while Bane was hovering around in the air, on his boot rocket jets.
While moving around in the air, Bane was not happy, as he thought, 'I am going to run out of fuel soon. And my blasters are almost out of ammo. I knew I should have reloaded them, earlier. I won't make that mistake again.'
'Still, from the way Bob's keeps reloading, he is likely almost out of ammo as well. So, I think I should take this fight to the next level.'
Bane holstered his blaster pistols, as he charged down out at Bob, with such speed, that Bob was forced to rolled his left side, to avoid Bane.
Though, Bob was quickly back to his feet, as Bane landed on his feet, at the same time.
Both combatants turned around to face each other at the same time.
Bob swiftly pointed his pistol at Bane, while Bane used his wrist mounted flamethrowers to try to roast Bob.
Bob quickly rolled at of the way, to his right side, to avoid the flames. He got back to his feet, as he fired a couple of shoots, which forced Bane to move, to get out of the way.
Bob continued moving, in a specific direction, as he thought, 'Bane is either close to empty on his blasters. Or, his blasters are empty. Either way, I can use this to my advantage. But, I will have to draw him into my trap.'
As the two combatants continued moving, with Bob leading the flamethrower wielding bounty hunter, Bane soon realized that Bob had lead Bane to where Bob was right in front of the mainframe tower.
Bane immediately shutdown his flamethrowers, as he thought, 'Damn. He knows I will catch hell from Scorpius, if I damage that mainframe.'
Bob thought, 'Now, to end this. I would prerfer to shot him, he is to agile too, and I am to few bullets, for me to risk that. So, I will try a different approach. And if this does not work, I will just dodge out of the way, and draw my weapon on him. I have done it before, and survived. I just hope I don't have to do it, this time.'
Bob then holstered his pistol, as he rushed at Bane.
Bane thought, 'He is either out of ammo, or close to it. It does not matter. I can take him in a hand to hand fight.'
When Bob reached Bane, he threw a punch to Bane's face.
Bane blocked the blow, while throwing a punch himself at Bob's face.
Bob blocked the strike, while sending an elbow to Bane's neck.
Bane sidestep Bob's elbow, while doing a sweeping kick to Bob's lower legs.
Bob jumped over the kick, and a second after he landed, he tried to knee Bane in the face. But, Bane rolled on his back.
When Bane finished the roll, he jumped back to his feet, but Bob had already closing the gap between them.
As they continued trading blows, and blocks, Bane mentally admitted, 'Okay. This guy is good. Time to cheat.'
As Bob threw his next punch, with his right hand, Bane swiftly grabbed Bob's extended, forearm with his right glove. With the right sleeve of Bob's coat being between Bane's right glove, and Bob's right forearm.
Bane then used the taser mounted in the palm of his right glove on Bob's arm.
What happened next surprised him, as Bob did not even react to the electrical attack, and instead he hit Bane in Bane's gut with his left hand.
The blow caught Bane off guard, as he let go of Bob's right forearm.
Bob followed his attack with an upper cut to Bane's jaw, with his left fist, that knocked the blue alien onto his back.
Both of them were breathing heaving from the intense exertion they had just been through, as Bob quickly drew his pistol, and cocked it. He pointed his revolver at Bane, while he ordered, “Don't move. It's over.”
Bane saw the weapon pointed at him. He immediately stopped moving, as he thought, 'Given the way he fights. I would guess that he has a few more rounds in his weapon. There is no point in getting shot. Still, I do have one question for him.'
Cad asked, “How did you not get shocked by my electrical attack?”
Bob answered, “My coat is insulated.”
Cad responded, “I'm impressed, old man.”
In response, Bob just laughed manically. Though, Bob also kept his eyes, and his weapon, trained on Bane.
Bob's reaction caused Bane to mentally wonder, 'Am I the bad guy in this situation? Because this guy is not acting like a good guy.'
Cad complimented, “For an old man, you are one hell of a fighter.”
Bob stopped laughing, as he smirked. He stated, “I am nothing compared to some of the people I know.”
Cad said, “I will be sure to avoid them. And, it is nice to know I still got it.”
Bob replied, “Bane, you never lost it.”
Cad smiled, as he stated, “And for that compliment, I am going to leave you, and your family, alone. Goodbye.”
Before Bob could react, Cad quickly thought of a place and time in the multiverse he would rather be, as he pushed the red button on the reality device hooked to his belt.
While Bob holstered his gun, he thought, 'At least, knowing Bane. He will keep his word, and leave us alone.'
Bob turned to see that Ed was alright, as she continued to hack into the mainframe.
Ed did not turned her eyes from the computer terminal she was using, as she asked, “Do you want to tell the others that you beat Cad Bane?”
Bob replied, “Nah. I don't want to make them jealous.”
Ed just giggled.
Bob inquired, “How long until you are done with deleting those files?”
Ed answered, “A few minutes. Then, I will search the mainframe for Lewis' location.”
Bob replied, “Good.”
(_)
On the command deck, in her personal office, Meka watched as the Bane and Lowe fight end.
As Meka sat behind her desk, she thought, 'Now, that fight was impressive. I will have to speak to Cad Bane about his fight with Bob Lowe, later. Bane did his job well in that fight. Still, let's see how the siblings fight will end.'
She then turned her attention to the video feed of the Lowe siblings fighting.
(_)
In the hallway leading to the mainframe room, Stan and Lewis were still fighting.
As the siblings trained blows with each other, in an amateurish, but not immature, fashion.
Stan thought, 'I have to figure a way to change Lewis back into a guy. There must be something I can do... That might work. It is gross. But, it might work.'
Just then, Lewis took a few steps back. Stan remained where he stood, allowing for a lull in the fighting.
Lewis stated, “You know, your position is hopeless, in this situation.”
Stan inquired, “How so?”
Lewis gestured to herself, with her right hand, as she stated, “This is our future.” She then held her right hand, at the ready, with her left hand.
Stan replied, “Honestly. I am not into the S&M scene.”
Lewis commented, “Not that. The fun insanity that got me into this black leather suit. Eventually, we will lock in these forms, and we won't be able to escape this insanity. And the worst part is we will be enjoy being insane.”
Stan stated, “We have already had this discussion. First, that will not happen for decades. Meaning, we have time. Second, there might be medication that may help us. When that does become a problem. And third, I want my brother back!”
Stan then charge at Lewis. He caught his sister off guard, as he used his right hand to grabbed Lewis by the throat, while, he stuck his left index finger up Lewis' right nostril, and wiggled it.
Lewis instinctively used her right leg to knee Stan in the groin.
The blow forced Stan to let go of Lewis, and for him take a few steps back.
Lewis stated, with disgust in her tone of voice, “How dare you play dirty like that!”
Stan did his best to remain standing, as he thought, 'Wait for it.'
Lewis said, “Of all the childish things to do. And I thought I was the crazy one here.”
Suddenly, Lewis felt the sensation come, but she could not stop it, as she sneeze.
Stan then watched as Lewis' black suit ripped and tore, to make room for Lewis' larger male frame.
A second later, Lewis sneeze again, and becoming a girl again. Only this time, she was much shorter, and appeared to be only fourteen years old.
While Stan watched all this, he thought, 'It is hard to tell which is more ridiculous looking. Lewis as a guy, in that outfit, which is way too small for him. Or, Lewis as a young teenage girl, with that outfit being way too big for her. Still, I need to get control of the situation.'
Stan asked, “Do you feel better, now?”
Lewis took a few deep breaths, as she looked down at herself. She then looked up at San, and Stan saw sanity had returned to his sister's eyes.
Lewis answered, in a calm, rational manner, “Yes. I am sane, again. And damn. You are good, Stan.”
Stan replied, “You're welcome.”
Lewis looked down at her big, shredded clothing, as she stated, “But, you ripped my clothing.”
Stan suggested, “How about you just get out of it?”
Lewis pointed out, “But, I will have nothing to wear. This is all I am wearing. There is no bra and panties underneath.”
Stan stated, “I know. I could tell. Don't worry about that. Trust me.”
Lewis replied, “Okay.”
Lewis unzipped the back of her mask, and pulled it off. Next, she unzipped the back of her suit. After which, she unzipped the interior sides of her black cowgirl boots. Lewis then stripped down to being naked.
Meanwhile, Stan took off his red varsity jacket. He handed it to Lewis, as he said, “Here. Wear this.”
Lewis looked up at her taller brother, as she took the jacket. She sincerely said, “Thank you, Stan.”
Lewis then put the large jacket. As she zipped it up, she noted that the bottom of the jacket went almost down to her knees, on her smaller female frame. Offering her some modesty, in her situation.
Lewis thought, 'At least as a smaller teenage girl, I am not nude by wearing this jacket. Though, as a male, the jacket is to small for this to work. So, I am still going to be a girl for a little while longer. Until, I find some clothing that fits me.;
Stan replied, “No problem.”
Lewis inquired, “So, how are your balls?”
Stan joked, “Still hanging on.”
Both siblings laugh at Stan's joke.
As they calmed down, Stan mentioned, “By the way, you remember that girl from Tokyo, Violin?”
Lewis looked up at her brother, as she said, “Yea.”
Stan commented, “She is just as strange as the rest of us.”
Lewis giggled a girlish giggle. She then replied, “As you can plainly see. I don't have any money on me. Speaking of which. I don't know what Scorpius did with my clothing. Including, my white lab coat, and wallet, with my IDs in it. It is not going to be fun replacing all those items.”
Stan warmly smile towards Lewis, as he stated, “Those are small matters. And don't worry about the money. That bet is not important. Also, I am sure mom will be able to get you replacement IDs without a problem. One way, or another. I am just happy to have you back.”
Lewis returned Stan's smile, as she responded, “Thanks. Besides, Nodoka told me that Birdy was half alien. Her family are aliens. I just didn't tell you, because I wanted to see if you could figure it out on your own. But, it is the only thing I held back from you, on what Nodoka told me.”
Stan shrugged, as he said, “I forgive you. Could you tell me what you learned about Violin, and her family?”
Lewis replied, “Sure.”
Stan responded, “Thanks. Now, let's let our parents know that we are alright. Then, we are out of here.”
Lewis stated, “This is not how I planned on letting them know our little secret.”
Stan looked at her, as he smirked, He said, “Don't worry. We are not going to tell them just yet. I have a plan. And you will like it.”
Lewis smile turned mischievous, as she commented, “I am sure I will.”
Stan unhooked his radio from his belt, he then pressed the talk button, as he stated, “Good news. I found Lewis. And we are getting out of here. And Lewis is fine.”
Ed replied, on her radio, “Good. The data is deleted.”
Stan replied, “That is nice to hear.”
Ed stated, “See you at the rendezvous point.”
Stan said, “Actually, we will me you elsewhere. Lewis has to get cleaned up.”
Stan looked down at Lewis, to see his sister hold back a giggle. Stan continued, “We will see you for dinner, around six pm, a few hours after you arrive. Back in the proper point in time. We will meet you at the barbeque restaurant that we all like, in Tharsis city.”
Ed responded, “Okay. We will see you there.”
Stan clipped his radio on his belt. He then pulled out the reality device that he stole from one of the bounty hunters Shane had killed.
Stan held out the reality device, for Lewis to see. He stated, “If you are wondering. This is one of the reality devices I got from those bounty hunters my coach killed.” She thought, 'But, not to use Coach Caxton's name. Given it is possible all of this is being recorded, by hidden electronic equipment.'
Lewis asked, “I already figured that out. Genius. Remember. So, where are we going now.”
Stan stated, “Back home. The rendezvous is to meet back home on the Sunday you were kidnapped, in the afternoon. At three PM. We are going back in the late morning. Around the time you were just kidnapped. There, we will get cleaned up and changed. Also, I can get an icepack for my balls. And I will tell you my plan. With luck, we will be gone, before our parents and friends get there.”
Lewis took a few steps closer to Stan. When she was right beside him, she said, “Works for me. Let's head over there. This jacket is kind of drafty between the legs.”
Stan chuckled, as he thought of the time, place, and reality, he wanted to go to. He then held that thought, as he pressed the red button.
In an instant, both Lowe siblings disappeared, as they jumped realities.
(_)
On the command deck, in her office, Meka laughed at how the Lowe sibling confrontation turned out. She thought, 'Now, let's see how the other events wrap up.'
(_)
In the mainframe room, Ed was standing by Bob, with her radio out. She pressed the talk button, as she asked, “Annie did you get all that.”
(_)
In the shuttle bay, Annie used her radio to respond, “Yes. As soon as you, Bob, and Violin are gone, and in the clear. I am leaving, as well. I will join you at the rendezvous point.”
(_)
In the mainframe room, Ed replied, through the radio, “Good. I am checking in on Violin right now.”
(_)
In her office on the command deck, Meka thought, 'That only leaves Scorpius and Violin. I wonder what Violin will say to Ed.'
(_)
At that moment, the inside of Scorpius' office was trashed, as Violin and Scorpius laid naked, and uninjured, with Violin's head resting on Scorpius' right shoulder. And with the rest of Violin's body resting to the right side of Scorpius.
Both of them were feeling very good, very relaxed, and were in very good moods.
Violin thought, 'That was the most intense, violent, destructive, and passionate sex I have ever had in both my incarnations. Though...' She turned her head to look at Scorpius' face, as she casually said, “Aeryn is going to kill me for doing this, with you.”
Scorpius turned to look at Violin's face, as she countered, in a casual tone of voice, “If she finds out, just lie to her, and tell her I used mind control. She'll understand.”
Violin asked, “She just might. Though, how did you make me scream in pleasure like that?”
Violin mentally reflected, 'I knew women could have multiple orgasms in a row. Though, my previous partners could just never pulled it off for me. But, Scorpy was able to keep me having them. One after right after another. Over and over again. I lost count at twenty.'
'Also, neither of us appear to be injured. Both, our bodies appear to be very tough. That is nice to know. And with this partly alien body, I am nowhere near tired, yet. And I am sure Scorpy is more than willing to keep going. I am tempted to stay here for a while, and continue this, if I did not have other commitments.'
Scorpius smirked, as she commented, “Being an, expert in the sciences, is a very broad term.”
Violin could not help but let out a laugh. She then inquired, “Is there any way I can convince you to stop your plans for the multiverse hyperspace gate?”
Scorpius replied, “That depends on if you can make me scream as loudly as I did for you.”
Violin put the palm of her right hand over her face, as she stated, “This is going to be a very long day.”
Scorpius just laughed.
Suddenly, they heard the radio on Violin's belt, which was still attached to her pants, not far away from the two women.
From the radio, they heard, Stan talk, then Ed talk, and Annie talk.
Violin said, “I better check in. Or, they are going to come for me. They will find us like this. And that will be bad for both of us.”
Scorpius replied, “That we agree on.”
Violin quickly crawled over to her pants, as she heard Ed stated, on the other end, “Violin. How are things on your end?”
Violin unhook the radio, as she answered through it, “Actually, I am doing fine.”
Annie inquired, over her end of the radio channel, “What is your status, Violin?”
Violin looked over at Scorpy, as she answered, “Scorpy and I are working on an arrangement.” She could see Scorpy stifling a giggle. Violin continued, “I will be along, around half an hour, behind you guys. About five minutes on the other side. And do not worry, I will be fine.”
Ed replied, “Okay. Good luck.”
Annie stated, “Whatever. But, let Scorpius know that if something happens to you, I am coming for her.”
Violin saw Scorpius nodded in response to Annie warning.
Violin commented, “I believe she got your message, Annie.”
Annie said, “Good.”
Violin then set down her radio, as she turned to Scorpius. She happily asked, “Now, where were we?”
Scorpius coyly responded, “That is up to you, and the bounds of your imagination, John.”
While Violin crawl back to Scorpius, she smirked, as she said “Oh Scorpy, you should know by now that my imagination has no bounds.”
Scorpius returned Violin's smirk, as she replied, “That is what I am hoping for.”
Both women laughed, at their shared, humorous moment.
(_)
Inside Commander Meka's office, on the command deck, Meka had watched was the entire conversation took place. From all three points of view, on the video feeds on her desk's monitor.
Meka then watched as Ed used her reality device to teleport both her, and Bob, out of the Farscape reality. A few seconds later, she watched Annie a reality device to teleport out of the Farscape reality.
As soon as Meka saw Annie disappear, as Annie jumped realities, Meka let out a breath of relief. She thought, 'That is one less problem to worry about. And no one died this time.'
Meka then turned to watch the video feed to Scorpius' office. She collapse the other video feeds, so she could enlarge the video feed to Scorpius' office, on her monitor screen.
As Meka watched Violin and Scorpius go back to their activities, she mischievously thought, 'And Violin has now found out why I like having sex with Scorpius, as a woman. I wonder how well she will please Scorpius.'
'I guess I will watch, and find out.'
(_)
Around half an hour later, in Scorpius' office, Violin gather her clothing, shoes, radio, and reality devices.
As Violin did so, she felt the stickiness between her legs, while she mentally reflected, 'I smell of sex. If I go to the rendezvous point, like this, the others will notice, and ask question.'
'Fortunately, I have a spare pair of clothing, just like what I have on now. I will just go home. Take a shower, dry myself, and my hair, change my clothing, and then meet with the others at the rendezvous point at the proper time.'
'Like I have longed believed, use of time dilation does have it perks. I just have to make sure I keep track of my monthly periods. Which, I am glad it was not that time of the month, for neither of us, right now.'
While Violin put on her clothing, and shoes, she looked over at a very sexually pleased Scorpius. Violin mentally added, 'And I think Scorpy is pleased with my efforts.'
Scorpius looked back at her, as she stated, “Not the best sexual experience since I have become a woman. But, one of the top ten. It would be in the top five, if you had decided to stay longer. But, you did a good job. So, I will leave off the multiversal hyperspace gate research, for a while.”
By then, Violin finished putting on her clothing. She started to slip into her shoes, as she said, “Glad to hear it, Scorpy. And the reason I don't stay, is that I feel that it is time to leave.”
Scorpius responded, “I understand. And I look forward to the next time we do this. Though, I doubt we will get the chance to do this anytime soon.”
Violin laced up her shoes, as she agreed, “True. But, there is always hope. And the fact that both of us are going to live for a very long time, means that it will likely happen some day.”
Scorpius smiled, as she replied, “That is what I was hoping you would say.”
Violin then clipped on her radio, to her belt. Next, she picked up, put her own reality device into her left pants pocket. After that, she picked up the bounty hunters reality device. As Violin held that reality device in her right hand, she pointed out, “Still, it would have to be Aeryn's decision.”
Scorpius said, “Of course. And if you are ever able to convince her to come with you. After she has sampled my skills, I am sure you both will return, often.”
Violin looked over at Scorpius, as she admitted, “That I now know, first hand. After everything you have done to me, my family, and my friends, I still want to go back to having sex with you, right now. That really says good things about your skills at the art of sex.”
Scorpius replied, “Thank you. And good luck with your reunion with Aeryn, Little D, and the crew of Moya.”
Violin said, “I appreciate that. It is manners like that, that make me sincerely think of coming back.”
Scorpius calmly requested, “If things don't work out with Aeryn. Let me know.”
Violin teased, “I just might.”
Scorpius commented, “Besides, I am a patient woman.”
Violin complimented, “It is one of your better virtues.”
Scorpius replied, “I know. I can wait. Though, I will have fun in the interim.”
Violin responded, “Of course. And I plan to have some fun as well, in the meantime. Well. see you later, Scorpy.”
Scorpius said, “Until next time, John.”
Violin then thought of her home, in Tokyo, in her bedroom, at the proper time, place, and reality. She then press the red button on her reality device.
Scorpius watched Violin disappear, as the younger woman jumped realities.
Scorpius then stood up. And while naked, she walked to her partly destroyed desk. She pressed the communications button, which she saw was still functional.
Scorpius stated, “Commander Meka.”
Meka replied, “Yes, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius ordered, “Assemble the repair crews. And in half an arn, send them to repair my office.
Meka responded, “Yes, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius requested, “Also, Commander. I expect a video recording to be made of the recent events in my office. For my personal collection.”
Meka said, “As you wish, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius turned off the communications, she then saw that the vase with her white flowers were still standing up right, on the floor. With vase and white flowers in it, being undamaged.
Scorpius let out a small laugh, as she smiled. She said, “Will wonders ever cease? I hope not.”
Scorpius then went to collect, and put on her clothing.
As Scorpius did so, she thought, 'With luck, my office will be back to normal within one solar day. Still, I wonder if Meka watched? She probably did. But, I won't fault her for that.'
'Given how violent the first part of that sexual encounter was, something could have gone wrong. And it would have been wise for someone elsewhere to be ready with a medical team. In case that happened. So, I will overlook her watching the intimate acts between John and I... And with luck, such viewings may even give Meka ideas, or at least inspiration, on such matters.'
(_)
On the command deck, in Commander Meka's office, while sitting behind her desk, Meka shut down the video feed to Scorpius' office, on her her desk monitor. She thought, 'I guess Violin, or should I say, John, did a good job. Now, to take care of what Scorpius wants me to do.'
Meka then began the take care of the tasks which Scorpius had assigned for her to do.
To be continued.
(_)
Author's Notes:
I hope you readers enjoyed the climax of this story. Which was a climax in more ways that one.
Yes. Pun intended. I could not help myself.
Now, I admit, I am likely going to catch some hell for the yuri sex scene between gender bent Scorpius and reincarnated Violin/John. But, it was worth it.
Ever heard the phase, used on two bickering people, get a room? Well, Scorpius arranged for her to have a room with Violin.
Scorpius and John have screwed each other every way, but that way. It is the only thing left those two have no done towards each other.
And while Violin/John would likely not want to openly admit to it. She was into it. And since she is eighteen, as Violin, it is all fine, from that end.
Though, Aeryn might be pissed, if she finds out about this. But, that is another matter. And if she does find out. Given how manipulative Scorpius is. Aeryn will likely not blame Violin/John, and instead blame Scorpius.
Also. Yes. I was inspired by that season six scene in Buffy the Vampire Slayer, when Buffy and Spike start fighting in an abandoned home, with them tearing into the home as much as each other. With the fight devolving into a very rough sex scene where they are still tearing up
Violin and Scorpius put it best.
Scorpius quickly moved toward Violin's face, and kissed her on her lips.
Violin swiftly backed up, as she stated, in shock, “Whoa. Hold it. I came to kick your ass. Not have a piece of it.”
Scorpius suggested, “Why not we do both?”
Scorpius then punched Violin across the room and into a wall.
And yes. Those two work out a lot of the issues with each other, in those battle, and sex scenes.
Now, the other parts of this chapter were fun. Meka got to have some fun with Annie, in having Annie be challenged by some Robocop droids.
With the situation being between the two being more tongue in cheek fun, than being serious with each other.
Though, I enjoyed showing Meka's use of the, 'automate voice system'. Where Annie cannot use her infamous force chock over communications lines, as seen in the Star Wars movies. This is do the indirect manner of the communications.
And I believe that given how crazy prepared Scorpius is, that she would more than likely have come up with such a system, should she ever have to communication with such powerful and dangerous individuals.
It is likely both of them have been around Violin/John and Scorpius, way to long.
I liked how the fight scene between Bob and Bane went, while Ed was hacking the main computer of the Command Carrier Flagship.
Also, I will admit that the way Stan saved Lewis, to change genders and snap out of it, was slightly gross. But, they are siblings. They can get away with that.
And I liked writing how Stan loaned Lewis his red varsity jacket, while Lewis was in his younger female form, with nothing to wear. I found that to be a very touching scene, given how much Stan cared his brother, over his jacket, which he took care of. And barring a few exceptions, Stan was almost always wearing his jacket. And that he was proud of his jacket.
Now, for Book Four, all that is left is the epilogue. And I hope you enjoy the last chapter of Book Four.
Until next time. Have fun.
Badasses Of The Multiverse: Book 4: “The Jock, The Nerd, The Bounty Hunters, And The Crazy Chicks.”
Chapter Ten: Epilogue: “Windows of Opportunity.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Reality, Cowboy Bebop Reality. Date, Sunday, October seventeenth, twenty-one hundred. Place, Mars, Tharsis City. The front yard of the Lowe Residence. Time, three PM, local time, in the middle afternoon.
It has been ten minutes since Spike arrived Julia had arrived in the front yard of the Lowe residence.
Spike was in her leisure suit, and Julia, in a simple yellow sundress and yellow slippers.
Julia was a cute, five year old girl, with long green hair, that went down to her shoulder blades.
Currently, mother and daughter wear sitting beside each other, at the bottom step of the outside staircase, leading up to the second story living room of the home, on the left side of the building, from the street. With Spike sitting to Julia's right side.
Julia looked up at her mother's face, as she asked, in english, “Mommy, how long until your friends will show up?”
Spike looked down at her daughter, as she answered, in a happy tone of voice, in english, “A little while more, sweetie. Then, we will get something to eat.” She thought, 'I am glad I taught my daughter to speak both chinese and english. And she was more than happy to speak english for me, while here. It makes things easier in dealing with the others.'
The girl smiled, at her mother's face, as she said, “Thank you, mommy.”
Just then, they watched as Ed and Bob suddenly appeared in front of the Lowe residence, in the front yard, on an empty part of their driveway.
Spike looked up and saw Ed and Bob standing by each other, with the redhead holding her reality device in her right hand.
Spike then saw Ed look down at the reality device in her right hand, as she overheard Ed state, “I am going to study this device, and figure out how it gets around that protective field that Scorpius has.”
Bob turned to his wife, as he agreed, “Good idea. But, be careful. That device could be booby-trapped.”
Ed responded, “I will.” She then pocked the reality device.
Spike coached her daughter stand up, onto the ground, as she stood up, as well. She then used her left hand to lightly gripped her daughter's right hand, as she led Julia over to Ed and Bob.
As they walked towards the married couple, Spike casually asked, “So, how did the rescue go?”
Ed and Bob looked over at the mother and child. Both of them smiled, as Bob stated, “It went great. We are going to see the boys later, today.”
By then, Spike and Julia stopped within a few feet of Ed and Bob.
Spike said, “I am glad to hear that.”
Bob responded, “We will formally introduce to Lewis and Stan, later.”
Spike replied, “I look forward to it.”
Ed looked down at Julia, as she complimented, “What a cute daughter you have, Spike.”
Spike smiled, as she said, “Thank you. And she is well behaved for her age.”
Julia looked up at Ed, as she said, “Hello.”
Ed replied, “Hi. I'm Ed. This person with me is Bob.”
Bob just waved at the girl, with his right hand.
Julia responded, “Hi Ed. Hi Bob. I am, Julia.”
Just then, Annie appeared, a few feet from them.
Annie looked around, as she pocketed the reality device in her hand.
The other four people looked over at Annie.
Annie commented, “You have a nice daughter, Spike.”
Spike replied, “Thank you.”
Just then, Violin appeared a few feet near Annie, to Annie's right side, with a reality device in her right hand.
Violin looked around. She waved at them, with her left hand, as she said, “Hi everyone.”
Bob turned to Violin, as she replied, “Hi Violin. You look good, considering you just confronted Scorpius.”
Violin shrugged, as she replied, “Actually, things went a lot better than I expected.”
Bob said, “That is good to know.” He then turned back to look at Ed, Spike, and Julia.
While the rest of the group was to far away to notice, Annie was close enough to see the slight sheen wetness on Violin's hair.
Annie walked over to Violin, as she whispered, “Why is you hair wet?”
Violin softly replied, “I will tell you later, in private.”
Annie quietly said, “Okay.”
Violin and Annie then walked over to the group.
When they reached the group, and came to a stop, near them, Violin looked down at Julia. She said, “So, this is Julia. She is cute.”
Spike replied, “Thank you.”
Violin then looked up at the adults in the group, as she asked, “So, what is everyone going to do, now that we won the battle?”
Ed looked over at Violin, as she answered, “Bob and I are going to contact Faye and Jet, and stage a reunion with Spike, and Julia here. Then later, Bob and I are meeting our boys to at a restaurant we all like, to have some dinner... And a long talk. What about you, Violin?”
Violin answered, “I am heading over to the crew of Moya, to deal with my personal matters.”
Ed replied, “Good luck.”
Bob offered, “If you need someone to talk to afterward, look us up.”
Violin smiled, as she responded, “If I need to, I will.” She then turned to Annie, as she asked, “And what about you, Annie?”
Annie stated, “I have some people I intent to speak to, about a few things. But, nothing too serious.”
Ed said, “Good luck with that.”
Violin put the reality device that she had in her hand, into one of her pockets. She then pulled out her personal reality device, from another pocket.
Violin stated, “Well, see you guys later.” She turned to Spike, as she stated, “And Spike, I wish the best for you and your daughter.”
Spike nodded in her direction, as she responded, “I appreciate that.”
Violin turned to Annie, as she said, “Some time, we will have to battle together, and see what what we are really capable of.”
Annie looked over at Violin, as she smirked. She stated, “I agree. And we will invite, Aeryn along, and make it a trio.”
Violin returned Annie's smirk, as she responded “Great idea. We could always use the range firepower. And Aeryn does like her big guns.”
Annie giggled for a few seconds. She then said, “Exactly.”
The other adults overheard their conversation, as Bob thought, 'Those, two working together, could cause a whole lot of trouble. Throw Aeryn into the mix, and I don't want to be on the same planet, when those three cut loose, together. I am glad my family and I are not some of their enemies.'
Violin went into say, to Annie, “Until next time, Annie.”
Annie whispered into Violin's ear, “See you, John.”
Violin smiled, and nodded towards Annie. Next, she took a number of steps, back away from the group, She then came to a stop, and used her reality device to leave.
As Violin disappeared, Annie pulled out her own personal reality device.
Annie turned to Ed and Bob, as she stated, “Please, let Lewis and Stan know that I wish them the best, and I apologize for the confusion at the beginning. Also, when you tell them who I really am. Please, do so, gently.”
Ed replied, “We will.”
Bob said, “Thanks for the help, Annie. We might not have been able to do this with out you.”
Annie smiled, as she responded, “You're welcome.” Annie then took several steps back from the group as well. After she came to a stop, she used her reality device to disappear, as she jumped realities.
With Anne and Violin gone, Spike turned to Ed and Bob, as she inquired, “I got to ask. Who are Annie, and Violin?”
Ed and Bob turned to Spike, as Ed answered, “Violin is complicated. Very complicated. We will talk about her, later. After I get her permission to do so. But, Annie is okay with me telling people about her. Annie, as she personally stated, is like you. Only she was rescued before she was impregnated.”
Spike sarcastically replied, “Lucky her.”
Ed commented, “In more ways than one. Annie's full name is, Annie Skywalker. But, you likely know her better as, Darth Vader of the Star Wars realities.”
Spike just silently looked at Ed, as her jaw dropped, in shock.
Bob stated, “To be fair, Annie has become quite a nice woman. And she is a wonderful friend, and a pleasant guest to have over. I guess having her limbs, skin, head hair, and lungs regenerate, to the point of having a healthy body. Even though it is a woman's body. Along with learning she did not murder her wife, and she has two children, has mellowed her out a bit.”
Ed said, “Bob is right about this. You can relax about Annie. She is not evil anymore.”
Spike collected herself, as she replied, “Okay. I see the vat process went into overdrive with her.”
Ed stated, “Yes. The vat process regenerate her body, much like your right eye.”
Spike questioned, “How did you know about my right eye?
Bob said, “Nobody told you? Did they?”
Spike flatly asked, “Told me what?”
Ed stated, “All realities are works of fiction of other another realities in the multiverse.”
Spike commented, with skepticism in her voice, “I find that hard to believe.”
Ed responded, “And given everything we have been through, when I was younger, I found it hard to believe that you were stupid enough to sleep with Vicious' girlfriend, behind his back. No wonder he was upset with you.” She mentally added, 'Julia does not need to know that this is the same woman she was named after.'
Spike demanded, “How did you know that, Ed?”
Ed explained, “As I said all realities are fiction. As well as this reality. Our home reality. And we were the stars of our own anime series. I have seen it. It is pretty good. It covered our time on the Bebop, from twenty seventy-one to twenty seventy-two. When you went to confronted Vicious for that final time.”
Spike was quiet for a few seconds. Even Julia could tell something was wrong, as Julia gently tugged at her mother's blue coat.
Spike looked down as her daughter, as she padded Julia lightly on her head, which calmed her daughter down.
Spike then looked up at Ed and Bob, as she said, “This is insane. Even for what has already happened to me.”
Ed responded, “Don't feel bad about it. The shock of the revelation will wear off in an hour, or so.”
Bob said, “The series, and movie, are both titled, Cowboy Bebop. We have a copies of both the series and movie. Though, we hid them, so our boys wouldn't accidentally find them. We will show the entire series to you, later. Jet and Faye got a kick out of watching the copies we gave them.”
Spike inquired, “So, they know about the affair?”
Bob replied, “Yes.”
Spike said, “I am having second thoughts about meeting up with them.”
Ed responded, “Don't worry about that. They will be happy to see you. And they will enjoy meeting Julia, here. We will all have a wonderful tone, together.”
Spike stated, “Okay. I am trusting you one this, Ed. Please, don't disappoint me.”
Ed replied, “I won't.”
Bob mentioned, “And to be fair, you are also considered one of the most interesting people in anime.”
Spike shrugged, as she replied, “That is nice to know.”
Ed suggested, “Let's go inside, so I can call Faye and Jet, and find out where they are. And the entrance we use, to enter our home, is up the outside stairs, leading to our living room.”
Ed then walked to the stairs, as she pulled out her house keys. Bob, Spike, and Julia were walked right behind her. With Spike slowly walking with Julia. To prevent Julia from accidentally slipping. As they took their time up the staircase.
Less than a minute later, they were all inside the Lowe family's living room.
As Spike looked around, with her daughter standing beside her, to her right side, she saw a well cleaned living room, except for the windows facing the front yard, which were broken, and boarded up.
Bob noticed Spike looking at the broken windows, as he stated, “Sorry for the windows, but some distance relatives stopped by. We plan to have a word with them, later on, concerning the repair bills.”
Spike turned to Bob, as she replied, “I can sympathize.”
Bob thought, 'I need to know something, before it becomes an issue.' He asked, “I have a question for you. If you ever found out who was responsible for changing you into a woman, and making you pregnant, what would you do?”
Spike thought over the question for a few seconds. She then answered, “Likely nothing. I have thought over that battle with Vicious, and the aftermath, a dozen times over. I was dead, no matter what happened. So, waking up as a woman was not that bad a situation. Compared to the alternative. I have a feeling, given the life I led, that I was not going upstairs.” She then placed her right hand over Julia, and gently, onto Julia's right shoulder, pulling her daughter closer to her, as she continued, “Besides, I love my daughter.”
Bob complimented, “You are a better person, than I thought.” He mentally added, 'And I don't have to worry about Spike starting a war between the Bebop crew, and the Serenity crew, when she eventually learns that Chang was the person in charge of this entire mess.'
Spike replied, “Thank you.”
Meanwhile, Ed went to the vidphone, on a table, in the room. When she reached the vidphone, she dialed the number encrypted communication line which only she personally created, and only a few people knew. Including her family.
Ed set the vidphone audio for conference, so the others in the room could listen to the conversation.
A few seconds later, the vidphone was picked up on other end.
And on the screen, Ed saw Faye's face.
Ed greeted, “Hi Faye.”
Faye replied, in english, “Hi Ed.”
As Bob, Spike, and Julia heard that Ed was on the phone, they quieted down, as they listened to the conversation. They then took a few steps close to Ed. Though, they stayed out of the camera view, as they stood and listened to the conversation.
Ed requested, “Could you put Jet on the phone as well.”
Faye replied, “Sure. Just hold on a sec.” Faye then left the screen.
A few seconds later, Faye came back to the screen, as the screen splitting, vertically, to show both Faye and Jet's faces. With Faye on the right side of the screen, and Jet on the left side of the screen.
Jet said, in english, “Hi Ed. How are you doing? We got the phone call from Stan. I'm sorry we could not help him, and Lewis. Is everything fine with them?”
Ed replied, “Don't worry. We got it all worked out.”
Jet responded, “Good. I hope family life is treating you well.”
Ed smiled, as she said, “I am doing great Jet. And I have some great news. You are not going to believe who is with me.”
Jet replied, “Knowing you. It could literally be anyone.”
Faye asked, “So, who is it?”
Ed simply said one word, “Spike.”
Faye inquired, with excitement in her tone of voice, “Spike is alive?”
Ed replied, “Yes.”
Jet asked, “What rock has he been hiding under, for most the last three decades?”
Faye requested, “Can I see him? Please, put him on the phone.”
Ed sadly said, “Not just yet. We need to talk, first.”
Jet realized, “Something is wrong.”
Ed responded, “Yes.”
Jet inquired, in a calm tone of voice, “How bad is it?”
Ed coyly answered, “It depends on your point of view of, bad.”
Jet responded, “Let me rephrase that. Is Spike able to speak with us?”
Ed turned, and she saw that nearby, outside of the camera's eye on the phone, Spike, Julia, and Bob, were listening to the conversation.
Spike took a step towards the phone, when Bob gently caught her left forearm, with his right hand.
Spike looked at Bob's face. Bob just shook his head, for her to stop walking towards the phone.
Spike nodded, and Bob let go of her.
Ed turned back to the vidphone screen. She answered, “Yes. Spike is able to talk. But, I have a question for you both, before you meet with, Spike. Do you remember what Bob told you, years ago, when you first met him? He told me about your conversation. And I was wondering if you still remember that discussion.”
Jet replied, “Of course.”
Faye commented, “Learning you are a fiction characters by someone from another reality, and you believe them, is not a conversation you forget.”
Ed said, “And do you remember what he told you, besides the reality is fiction situation?
About that multiversal war?”
Jet answered, “Yes.”
Ed went on to say, “And do you remember what we told you, in private, about what else we learned about that war. About those victims that had their gender bent, and impregnated?”
Jet stated, “I remember you two talking about that... Oh no.”
Ed replied, “Yes.”
Faye quietly asked, “And was she?...”
Ed answered, “Yes. She has a five year old daughter with her, right here with her.”
Jet questioned, “Is Spike still sane? Or, is she now as crazy as you sometimes are?”
Ed responded, “I have gotten a lot better since the day we met.”
Jet conceded, “True. And back then, I chalked up a lot of your insanity to going through puberty.”
Ed replied, “Thank you. And yes, Spike is still sane. And her daughter is a sweetheart.”
Jet said, “That is nice to hear. And speaking of Spike's daughter. Since her daughter is five years old, how long has it been for her?”
Ed stated, “Best I can figure, it has only been around six years for her, since she last saw us.”
Faye commented, “It has been so long, I wonder if she will even recognize me.”
Ed complimented, “Trust me, Faye. You are like wine. You have had aged gracefully.”
Faye smiled, as she said, “Thank you, Ed.”
Ed smiled, towards Faye, on the screen.
Jet asked, “What does Spike look like as a woman?”
Ed said, “She looks like her own, younger, twin sister.”
Jet joked, “If that is the case, she must be hot. Do you think she would take offense if I hit on her?”
Ed turned to Spike, as she saw the dark green haired woman burst out laughing at Jet's joke.
Jet commented, “From that feminine laughter I hear in the background. I will take that as a, no.”
Ed turned back to the vidphone, as she replied, “Yea. She got the joke.”
Faye asked, “So, what is Spike's daughter's name?”
Ed smirked, as she replied, “Guess.”
Faye and Jet casually stated, in unison, “Julia.”
Ed said, “Got it in one.”
Jet suggested, “It might be best if you just teleport here, with Spike and Julia.”
Ed replied, “I agree. So, where are you?”
Jet answered, “We are in orbit around Neptune.”
Ed inquired, “What are you doing near Neptune?”
Jet explained, “We are getting a line on a bounty. We got the information, but it is worth letting go of this lead, so we can meet with Spike and Julia.”
(_)
Faye agreed, “Jet is right. Meeting Spike and Julia is more important.”
Ed responded, “I am glad you both feel that way. We will come to you. We will meet you in the hanger of the Bebop, in a few minutes.”
Jet said, “We will be there.”
Faye and Jet them disconnected the vidphone communication line.
Ed turned off her vidphone, as she turned to her husband, Spike, and Julia. As she stood up straight, she asked, “You guys get all that?”
Bob answered, “Yep. I am ready when these two are ready.”
Spike looked down at her daughter, then back at Ed, as she answered, “Ready went you two are.”
Ed stated, “Then, let's go.”
(_)
Cowboy Bebop Reality. Place, in orbit of Neptune.
A few minutes later, Ed, Bob, Spike, and Julia teleported into the enclosed, sealed, hanger of the Bebop.
Ed pocketed her personal reality device.
They stood, together, in an empty space in the hanger. They saw the ceiling lights were on, as they looked around.
Spike thought, 'This place hasn't changed a bit.'
Spike then looked over at the zipcraft in the hanger. She saw the Hammerhead, and the Red Tail, beside her old zipcraft, the Swordfish II.
Spike thought, 'It is nice they decided to keep the old beauty.'
Bob noticed Spike looking at her own zipcraft. He commented, “It still runs like dream. ”
Spike looked over at Bob, as she smiled. She said, “Nice.”
Bob stated, “We have all flown it, at least once. I hope you don't mind.”
Spike replied, “I don't. Considering, as far as you all were concerned, I was dead. Honestly, I am glad you guys didn't junk it.”
Bob agreed, “I am to. Jet, Faye, and Ed, were even the ones that taught myself, and later my sons, how to fly zipcraft.”
Spike said, “It is always nice to learn something new.”
Bob replied, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Spike asked, “By the way, how is there gravity in the hanger?”
Bob commented, “Ed and I helped Jet and Faye, install some gravity and inertia dampeners, in the Bebop. The technology is from the Star Trek reality, and they do not required that much energy to use. This ship now has full artificial gravity, without use of centrifuge technology.”
Spike said, with astonishment in her tone of voice, “Eh, nice.”
Bob replied, “Thank you.”
Just then, Faye and Jet entered the hanger from the common area of the Bebop. With Jet being to Faye's left side.
As they approached the group, Ed, Bob, Spike and Julia, turned to look at them.
Spike said that both of Faye and Jet were both still in great physical shape. Though, while Faye was still slender, Jet had to trim down in muscle bulk, due to his age.
While Faye and Jet approached the group, Jet said, “Welcome to the Bebop.”
The two adults stopped within a few feet of the group.
As everyone remained silent, Faye looked more closely at Spike, for the next few seconds.
Faye to a few steps close to Spike. As they stood looking at each other, Faye used her right had to slap Spike across her left cheek. The next thing Spike knew, Faye was hugging her, as she joyfully said, “It is good to have you back.”
Faye let go of Spike. As she took a step back from Spike.
Faye and Spike looked at each other, as Spike replied, “It is good to be back.”
Jet extended his right hand, as he stated, “I am happy you are here, Spike. Though, it seems that life just keeps getting weirder, and weirder.”
Spike shook Jet's hand, with her own right hand. Both gave the other a firm group, for a few seconds.
After they broke their handshake, Spike replied, “No kidding. Think about it from my perspective.”
Jet said, “I am.”
Faye looked down at Julia, as she said, “Hi Julia. I am Faye. And the man with me is, Jet.”
Julia said, “Hi Faye and Jet.”
Jet looked down at Julia, as he said, “Hi Julia.”
Spike said, “So, what happened to you guys?”
Jet and Faye looked up at Spike, as Jet answered, “We got older.”
Faye pointed out, “While taking account of your daughter's age, you seem a little younger than you should be. Is that part of that super-soldier serum I have heard about?”
Spike answered, “Yes. Excluding the gender change, the other benefits to the vat process are nice.”
Faye asked, “How about regeneration of scars?”
Spike admitted, “I am not sure.”
Bob spoke up, “Actually, the vat process uses two formulas. The first is the gender change on men, that does the regeneration process. The other is the super-soldier serum, which restores one youth, health, even curing cancer, while enhancing the personal physical abilities.”
“And while the super-soldier serum will not remove old scars, and regrow limbs, it does have some minor regenerate properties. Such as maintaining health, giving the person extreme longevity, faster recovery time for injuries and exertion. And the serum allows the person to keep peak physical fitness, even when pregnant, and recovery from birth.”
Spike turned to Bob, as she asked, “And how would you know that?”
Jet answered for Bob, “One of Ed and Bob's friends went through the process.”
Bob stated, “Yes. We will have to introduce you to B, sometime.”
Spike replied, “I look forward to it.”
Faye said, “Now, that I think know more about the vat process. I might have to look into this vat process. I would like to be younger. And the added physical benefits are nice a touch.”
Ed stated, “If that is what you want, Faye, we have friends that have access to that technology.”
Faye turned to Ed, as she replied, “Thanks Ed.”
Spike turned to Jet, as she teased, “You know, Jet. That vat process would restore your left arm, and the hair back on your head. Though, you would be turned into a woman in the process.”
Jet lightly chuckled. He then said, “Actually, Faye and I were looking at the rejuvenation process that Ed used. And while, Faye may take the vat process. I will plan to use the process Ed used. That is because I know for a fact that it works on men, and allows a man to stay a man.”
Spike replied, “I understand.”
Bob mentioned, “By the way, Spike. If you want to be a guy again, temporally. We do have access some magical powder. Not joking. That will turn you into a man with cold water, and change you back into a woman with hot water.”
Spike turned to Bob, as she inquired, “Do I even want to know why you have such powder on hand.”
Spike look over at Ed, and she saw Ed face blush a deep shade red.
Meanwhile, Jet and Faye had started laughing.
Spike said, “You really have gone places, Ed.”
Ed looked at Spike. She smirked, as she stated, “You have no idea.”
Spike agreed, “You are probably right.” She turned to Bob, as she said, “And I think I will take you up on your offer.”
Bob said, “Okay. I will get you some packets, in a day or two. After you settle in. Wherever you plan stay?”
By then, Jet and Faye had calmed down. Jet stated, “Spike and Julia are welcome to stay here. You can use your old room. We even have a nice, comfortable, spare cot for Julia.”
Spike turned to Jet, as she asked, “What did you do with my old room.”
Jet answered, “We turned it into a guest bedroom for our friends, when they came over. The room is swept and dusted. And the bed sheets are clean.”
Spike stated, “That sounds great. And I accept your offer, Jet. As long as we are not just having only bell peppers, instead of bell peppers and beef. I have a growing girl to take care of.”
Jet noticed Julia looking up at Spike, while smiling.
Jet looked down at Julia, then up at Spike. He stated, “Don't worry. Our pantry, freezer, and refrigerator, are fulling stocked with food, and drink. We are no longer broke. Honestly, Faye and I are rich. Not super-rich. But, we could retire, if we wanted to.”
Spike commented, “I heard from Ed that this was now more of a hobby for you two.”
Faye said, “It is. We just got nothing better to do.”
Spike replied, “That is nice to hear.”
Faye commented, “When we finally hit it big a few times, and became rich, we realized we were still addicted to an exciting life. So, for us, it was a choice of either continuing to bounty hunt, or drugs and wild orgies. And we consider bounty hunting a more productive use of our time.”
The adults laughed for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Spike inquired, “By the way, Faye, do you still spend as much time in the bathroom, as you use to, when I was here?”
Jet answer for Faye, “Yes. She does.”
Faye asked, “And why would that matter to you? The toilet is in another part of the ship.”
Spike conceded, “Good point. Though, now that I am a woman, I know it does not take you that long to wash up.”
Faye looked more intently towards Spike, as she replied, “So, I like to enjoy a hot soak.” She then smiled, as she teased, “And on that matter. Who is the woman with the attitude now, Spike?”
Spike chuckled a little. She admitted, “You got me there. Though, at least I refuse to be a bitch during that time of the month. Though, you were not that bad during that time, yourself.”
Faye smiled, as she said, “Thank you. It is never wise to be a bitch, while sharing close quarters with someone you have to trust your life too.”
Jet spoke up, “Wiser words were never spoken.”
All the other adults nodded in agreement.
Jet then looked down at Julia, as he offered, “Julia, would you like a tour of the rest of the ship.”
Julia said, “Sure.” She looked up at her mother, as she requested, “Can we do that, mommy?”
Spike looked down at Julia, as she stated, “We will do that in a minute, dear.”
Ed pulled out her reality device, as she stated, “Well, it has been fun. But, we have a dinner engagement with our sons, in a little while, that we have to get ready for. Though, we will check in on all of you, later.”
Jet said, “That is fine, Ed. You and your family are welcome here, anytime.”
As Bob and Ed turned and took several steps away from the group, Faye asked, “By the way, when are you going to tell you sons the truth about your secret? They are almost adults, now.”
Ed and Bob came to a stop, and turned around to face Faye, Spike, Julia, and Jet. Ed answered, “They already found out. That was why they called you Friday night.”
Bob said, “Their cousins. The trio sisters came to visit, while Ed and I were out of town.”
Faye teased, “I bet that was an interesting meeting for the boys.”
Jet whispered into Spikes ear, “I will tell you later, who they are.”
Spike softly replied, “Okay.”
Ed stated, “Yes. We are sure that it was. Anyway, it has been a very long weekend for our family, in many ways.”
Bob commented, “We are likely about to catch hell over that, during dinner, tonight.”
Faye said, in a mischievous tone of voice, “Good luck with that.”
Jet requested, “Please, let us know what happens.”
Ed replied, “We will.”
Spike spoke up, “Ed, before you leave. I just have one question for you. Whatever happened to, Ein. Being a dog, I guess he is dead. But, how did he live the rest of his life?”
Ed mentioned, “Actually, Ein is still very much alive, and healthy. He is doing great at his job, that he has had for years. I check on him, now and again. Remember, he was genetically engineered. And where he is, and what he is doing. Well...”
(_)
At that moment, on Mars, in Tharsis City, in the skyscraper building of one of the major internet, and telecommunications companies for the entire solar system, the CEO of the company was in his highrise office.
Inside the CEO's office was a very small, low lying desk, without a chair. The desk had a build in keyboard, touch pad, monitor, and speakers, that the CEO could use.
Currently, the CEO of the company, Ein, the data-dog, stood on his desk, as he happily barked, “Life is good.”
(_)
Elsewhere in the multiverse, on another Earth, in a modern civilization, it was an evening in a medium size city.
Six women, all wearing various nice dresses, of different colors, to go with their different hair colors, walked into a nice restaurant.
All the women had slender to athletic physical builds.
Three of the women were girls, in their late teens. Two other women were in mid-twenties. With the last women, a redhead, being in her late-twenties.
They had reservations in the restaurant, and when they had arrived, they were soon seated in their own private room.
The table in their room was round, and looked like it could seat up to eight people. Though, it had only six conformable cushion chairs surrounding it.
The younger members of the group sat across the table from the older members of the group.
After the women were seated, the waiter gave them all menus, and they all soon gave their drink and meal orders. Due to the six women having come to this restaurant often, they did not need to see a menu, and they gave their drink and meal orders, at the same time.
After the waiter left their private dining room, to fill their orders, the six women started talking in japanese.
Ranma inquired, “So, how long were you gone? For us, it was a couple of days.”
Nodoka answered, “Well mom, for us it was about a week.”
Akira asked, “So, how did the plan go?”
Yurika stated, “We were lucky your plan worked at all. But, it did. Lewis and Stan's dormant genes have been activated, and they are now gender benders, like us.”
Mikoto said, “It was wise for use to have waited until Bob and Ed were elsewhere.”
Natsuru agreed, “Yes, it was. To bad we could not have done it in a more civil way.”
Ranma said, “True. And I think I speak for all of us when I say that we never liked what Ed and Bob did in raising their sons. It was a farce what they were doing in raising their children.”
“The brothers being super-geniuses was more than enough evidence that they were destined for greater things. But, Ed and Bob, in their flawed wisdom, agreed that they wanted their sons to lead a so called, normal life. And given the situation, we could not directly interfere without starting a literal small war within our social circles. So, this was the only workable plan we could come up with.”
“And with Lewis and Stan now gender benders, and with them knowing what is going on. Or, on the path of learning what is going on. There is no excuse for them not to experience the greater life that Bob and Ed had previously denied them, through their childhoods.”
Akira agreed, “That is so true.” She then turned to the sisters, as she kindly said, “I want to apologize again, girls. About what we had to do at Lagoon Island. We had to act like we were surprised by what you did.”
Yurika answered, “It is alright, mother. We understand.”
Mikoto commented, “I am not upset.”
Nodoka replied, “And neither am I.”
Ranma stated, “Good. Because, it was necessary, given both River and Annie were there. We are just lucky, that years ago, I learned techniques in hiding our thoughts and emotions from being scanned by telepaths and empaths. And I taught you these techniques. Still, Annie showing up was a real surprise. If she had focused on our emotional states, she might have still figured out what we were up to.”
Natsuru inquired, “Yes. It is fortunate that she was in a hurry. So, since you did not trigger the change, do you know who caused the Lowe siblings to become gender benders?”
Mikoto answered, “We are not sure. But, it has to do with Scorpius.”
Akira suggested, “Maybe we should send Scorpius a thank you card.”
Natsuru countered, “Nice idea. But, it would tip our hand that we were the ones responsible. And that is something we should keep secret.” She then looked at the sisters, as she complimented, “Still, you three did a good job. And you came out of it alive, and unharmed. That is the most important part of this situation.”
All three sisters smiled at their parents.
Yurika pointed out, “Still, we are going to have to pay for some minor damage to the Lowe's living room windows.”
Akira shrugged, as she said, “Small matter. We will work something out with them in a few days.”
Ranma asked, “So, how do Lewis and Stan look in their girl forms?”
Natsuru requested, “Yea. What do they look like?”
Akira stated, “I would like to know that myself.”
Nodoka answered, “You would be surprised. They don't look anything like their male forms. It seems their mixed parentage has caused other changes between their genders. As male, they have nice physical builds, slightly above average height, with tanned skin, and black hair.”
“As girls, which are a few years younger than their male sides. Like my sisters. They have slender building. They are shorter than their male forms, but they are of average height for their physical ages. The have red hair that goes down to their shoulder blades. The same shade of red as their mother's hair. And they have caucasian skin tone, like their father.”
Natsuru commented, “That is an interesting change. That sounds like Akira's change. Do you think we need to worry about brain damage?”
Akira stated, “No. The threat of brain damage to me was from a forced female imprint of my female form into my brain, when my alien genes were activated. None of the others that we know of. Not our daughters here, my sister, Bob, have had any signs of brain damage from changing. And we have checked, over the years, just to make sure. It is safe to say that this is just a natural gender change for Lewis and Stan, and there is no threat of brain damage for them.”
Natsuru replied, “Good. And I guess that their younger female forms are cute?”
Mikoto commented, “We guess that is the case. Because, it gets better. They must have discovered what nattou does to the female sides. And even though we only saw Stan in her mature female form, and not Lewis. Though, we are fairly sure that both of them, in their younger female forms, are cute. And Stan, in her more mature female form, under the influence of nattou, is smoking hot. And it wasn't just her pheromones talking, on that matter.”
Nodoka said, “She is right. Stan was hot, and I am sure that Lewis would be just as hot, in that situation.”
Akira turned to Ranma, as she teased, “I hope you are not jealous with a few more redheaded babes showing up.”
Ranma looked over at Akira. She shrugged, as she responded, “Nah. And I am sure that River is not bothered, either. When she dyes her hair red. I believe she went back to her natural brown color, for her hair.”
“Though, River has always tried to have a laid back attitude, even with her mental problems. I have always admired that about her. But, I do wonder about Revy, and her two redheaded daughters?”
Natsuru said, “That goes without saying. Still, I wonder how cute Stan and Lewis' younger female forms are. And as girls, they are likely as cute as Akira's female form was at that age.”
Akira turned to Natsuru, as she said, “Thank you, Natsuru.” She then looked back at the rest of the group, as she commented, “It is going to be fun when we see the entire Lowe family as women.”
The other five women agreed, with rest of them nodding.
Yurika said, “Yea, mom. It is going to be fun.”
Ranma inquired, “So, anything interesting happen to you, while you were searching for Lewis and Stan.”
Yurika mentioned, “Actually, yes. There were a few events that we would like to talk you three about. Including, stopping a paradox, while meeting your younger selves. But, that is a conversation for another time, in a more private place. But, speaking of your younger selves, we even found Stan in the distance past of our home reality. In Tokyo, of all places. When tracking him, we even ran into your younger selves, as teenagers.”
Akira commented, “I bet that was an interesting experience. Seeing your mothers living as teenage boys.”
Mikoto stated, “It was. We found you three at a Koco concert. Aunt Ranma was on stage, as a woman. She was singing a song, with her friends, and doing a good job of it.”
Ranma said, “Thanks. I rarely get a chance to sing, anymore. Except in the bedroom.”
Akira teased, “I don't think screaming, counts as singing.”
The six women giggled for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Mikoto went onto say, “We also saw my mother here, as male, with his old girlfriends.”
Natsuru commented, “I do not like to think about that time of my life.”
Ranma conformed Natsuru, as she said, “Don't worry about it. That is in the past. Let's enjoy the present.”
Natsuru looked at Ranma, as she smiled. She replied, “I agree.”
Mikoto commented, “And we saw dad here, was with his friends, as male. And Stan was with you, mom. We decided that it was better to leave, than to risk a paradox.”
Akira complimented, “That was a wise decision. Still, I probably need to look up my old friends, sometime. They will flip when they learn I am a mother. Though, Yurika, Anju, and Kikuchi would likely find my situation funny.”
Mikoto requested, “Can I come with you, mother? To visit them?”
Akira offered, “Sure. You can all come.”
Ranma said, “Sounds great.”
Natsuru commented, “That will be a fun trip.”
Akira said, “And I also need to talk to Stan, and thank him for his help with my english lessons.”
Ranma stated, “I am sure you will get the opportunity at a future bikini party. Because, I am sure we will see all four of them at the next bikini party.”
Nodoka commented, “I look forward to seeing Stan and Lewis at the next bikini party.”
Natsuru agreed, “That will be nice.”
Akira commented, “Though, knowing Bob and Ed, they probably won't immediately take their children to a Lagoon bikini party. They will likely wait a few months, until Lewis and Stan are use to their female forms.”
Natsuru said, “That would be an intelligent idea. Most of us were forced into the deep end of the gender bending situation, before we were ready. I hope that Lewis and Stan have better luck with getting use to their female forms.”
Akira stated, “Yes. That would be a wise thing to do. Though, we disagree with the Lowe parents raising their children like they were going to have normal lives. Ed and Bob do clearly love Lewis and Stan, and now that the cat is out of the bag. So to speak. They will likely help their children adjust to their gender changing abilities.”
Ranma replied, “Agreed.”
Yurika wondered out loud, as she said, “Still, Lewis stated they had not told their parents about their gender bending abilities. And I got the feeling that Lewis and Stan had something special in mind, in how they plan to tell their parents. I wonder how they will spring that surprise on their parents?”
Natsuru said, “I am sure it will be very funny.”
Mikoto stated, “And we can ask Lewis and Stan, the next time we see them. Though, it might be best not to visit their home on Mars until our parents here, come with us.”
Akira agreed, “Yes. We will keep things come. And we will pay for the windows. And make sure the windows are fixes. Still, it will be fun the next time we meet with the Lowe family.”
Just then, as the waiter entered the room, to serve them their drinks, the women quickly switched to a more casual conversation, they continued their conversation into the evening. With their meals soon being served, as well.
(_)
Black Lagoon Reality. Place, Lagoon Island.
It had been nearly a week since the Lowe brothers had literally dropped by, and a few days since the latest Lagoon bikini party had ended.
It was the middle of a sunny day, as the five teenage Lagoon daughters were currently sunbathing in their bikinis, on the dry sand of the beach, by the island's bay, near the treeline.
In the middle of the group was Kristina. To Kristina right was Yukio. To Yukio's right was Rebecca. On Kristina's left a Molly. On Molly's left was Sarah.
Yukio happily stated, “This is the life.”
Rebecca agreed, “Yes. It is. Sun. Surf. Beauty. Health. Wealth. Friends. We have it all.”
Kristina stated, “Yep. And now we are resting and relaxing after a week of violence.”
Sarah used her right hand to gently gripped Molly's left hand. She turned her head to look at Molly, as she smiled. She spoke up, “A perfect time for some vice.”
Molly turned her head to look at Sarah, as she smiled. She slightly tightened her right hand's grip on Sarah's left hand, as she said, “You are correct about that.”
Suddenly, all five of the girls were lifted up by some unseen force, and thrown into the water, about twenty feet out from the beach, which was waist deep for them.
As the five teenage girls stood up, in surprised, they looked back at the beach, where they had been.
Kristina demanded, “What the hell?!”
All five then saw Annie, in her full jedi clothing and robes, walk out from among the brush, behind where they had been laying on the dry sand.
Annie came to a stop on the dry sand. She looked at the five teenage girls, as she said, in a firm tone of voice, “You girls, and I, need to have a little talk. Since I am fairly sure your parents would do nothing to you, for your recent actions concerning the Lowe brothers. I will have to deal with this matter.”
Molly stated, “Annie, you have no right to do this.”
Annie conceded, “Perhaps. But, somebody has too. You five seem to not understand the difference between, accident, and intention. The Lowe brothers dropping on you was an accident. What I did just now was intentional. Even as Vader, I still understood the difference. As Vader, I did have a few people accidentally bump into me. It happens, and I did not immediately kill, nor seriously harm them for doing so.”
“And I realize that someone has to teach you the difference, before your pride gets you all killed, or worse. And I am one of those few people with the abilities, and skills, to do so, without having to worry about reprisals from you. None of you are crazy enough to take me on.”
Sarah pointed out, “Our parents might.”
Annie commented, “Actually, I did talk to your parents about this, right before I came here. That is how am sure they were likely not going to do anything to you over this. Because, they said as much. Though, they agreed that someone should. And as long as I was not too rough, I would not have to worry about Revy, Rock, and Dutch, going on the warpath against me.”
Rebecca questioned, “Really?”
Annie responded, “Yes. Because they understand the dangers out there, while some of you may have honestly forgotten what those dangers are.”
“You luck out, this time, in your recent adventure. On the other hand, it could have go very badly for you. And I am not talking about being killed. You could have been crippled. Or worse.”
“Such as during your visit in Roanapur, I checked, during that time period. Though, most are just prostitutes, there were a sex slaves, in that town, as well. If things had gone differently, you five could have ended up as such slaves. You have the bodies for it. Two of you were actually caught up in that in your previous lives. And none of us, your parents, my friends, nor myself, want that to happen to you again, in this life.”
Annie saw recognition register on all five of the teenage girls' faces. Their facial expressions ranged from fear, to anger, to disgust, as they thought about what Annie has just said.
Annie continued, “I see you are beginning to understand what I am telling you. And with luck, this will not be to rough a lesson for you.”
Yukio asked, “You are not going to hurt us? Are you?”
Annie smirked, as she said, “No. I have already made my point. Only your pride has been hurt. And even though your parents decided to let me handle this matter. You are still going to have to face them. And that will be a punishment in of itself. For the disappointment you have brought to them.”
Annie could see the expressions of dread on the five daughters' face. She thought, 'At least they understand their situation. And they will be fine. Besides, I could use a snack.'
Annie began to chuckle, as she said, “Now, have a pleasant day, girls.'
Annie then turned and started walking inland, towards the mansion on the island. As she left the five teenage girls, with their thoughts, as they waded out of the water, and to the dry part of the beach.
(_)
Farscape Reality. Location, Uncharted Territories. Time, a few hours after John Crichton had left his family, to go with Annie, Ed, Bob, and Violin. Place, the bridge of Moya.
Violin teleported onto the command deck, of Moya. She thought, 'If I timed this correctly, everyone should be in the dining room, eating, except for Little D, whom should be taking a nap. I don't want my son to be here, in case things go wrong. And I hope that is not the case, but with my luck, I never know for sure. Now, to prevent a panic.'
Violin said, “Pilot. This is, Violin. Could you please inform the crew that I am here, on the command deck, and I only wish to speak with them, at their earliest convenience.”
The small monitor on the command deck came on, to show Pilot's face. Pilot said, “Welcome back, Violin. I will rely your requested.”
Violin calmly replied, “Thank you, Pilot.”
Pilot realized something, as he commented, “There is something is different about you, Violin. You seem less... Energetic.”
Violin responded, “A lot is different about me, Pilot. I will explain everything when the others get here.”
(_)
In the dining room, Aeryn, Dargo, and Chiana were having a quiet meal, when the small monitor in the room came on, to show Pilot on the screen. Pilot said, “Violin has returned. She is on the bridge, and wishes to speak with you, when you have finished eating.”
Chiana thought, 'I look forward to seeing, Violin again. She is fun to be around. Still, I also look forward to John's latest, strange tale of adventure.' She said, “It will be fun to hear what happened to John. This time.”
Aeryn replied, “I agree. And it will be nice to have him back here, safe with us.”
Pilot pointed out, “John is not here. Only Violin is.”
They all stopped eat, as they realized the subtext of what Pilot was saying.
Dargo commented, “Something is wrong.”
Aeryn stated, “And I intent to find out what it is?”
All three adults got up from their seats and rushed out of the dining room, as they headed for the command deck.
(_)
A few minutes later, on the bridge, Violin turned to face the door to the command deck, as she watched as Aeryn, Dargo, and Chiana walked into the room.
Violin standing by the podium with the manual controls to Moya.
As the three adults approached Violin, she mentally noticed, 'I don't see Little D, so that means he is taking a nap. As I thought. But, I will ask, soon enough.'
While the three other adults came to a stop, about fifteen feet from Violin, they stood beside each other. With Aeryn in the center. Chiana to her left, and Dargo to her right, Violin saw that all of them had their weapons holstered. Or, sheathed, in Dargo's case.
The three were by the large table in the room. With Chiana was sitting on the table, as she faced Violin.
Pilot's face was on the small monitor in the room, as he watched, and listened, to what was going on.
Violin thought, 'I need to be careful not to start a fight.'
Dargo ordered, “Disarm yourself, now.”
Violin careful removed her deactivated pulse pistol, leaned down. She set the pistol gently on the ground, and slid it to the others. She leaned back up straight, as she responded, “Yes, Dargo. I did not come here to fight.”
Aeryn picked up the pulse pistol. As she stood up, she looked at the weapon. She then frowned. She set the pistol down, on the table, by Chiana. She turned to Violin, as she stated, “This is John's weapon. He would not leave without it. Where is, John?”
Violin responded, “It is complicated. I am still trying to work out how I am going to tell you what happened. The explanation pushes the limits, even for our lives.”
Aeryn was not in the mood for cryptic statements, as she asked, in a more serious tone of voice, “Is my husband dead?”
Violin stated, “It depends on your point of view, Aeryn. First, where is Little D?”
Aeryn warned, “Taking a nap. Now, explain fast, Violin.”
Violin quickly stated, “Okay. It involves time travel, reality jumping, meeting oneself, and reincarnation. In short, I am John. This body is my next reincarnation. I was killed, and when I witnessed my death, as John, while as Violin, I got all my memories of my life with you.”
The other four adults were not sure how to response, as Dargo flatly stated, in a slightly dumbfounded tone of voice, “That is quite a claim.”
Chiana chirped, “Either she is looney, or things are going to get a lot more interesting here. I'm pulling for the latter”
Aeryn was mentally grasping for straws, as she inquired, “Can you prove this?”
Violin said, in Sebacean, “Yes. You may notice, I have no translator microbes in my body. Yet, I am able to understand each of your languages. And I speaking Sebacean fluently, right now. A language you taught me, Aeryn.”
Aeryn had a minor glimmer of hope, as she softly said, “John...”
Dargo commended, “Okay. That is definitely helps your case. But, we are going to need more.”
Violin smirked, as she replied, “Alight.”
Violin walked over to Dargo, as she said, “Well Big D, you one time told me that what you could do with your tongue was...”
Violin then whispered the rest in Dargo's right ear.
As Violin took a few step back from Dargo, Dargo looked down at Violin.
Dargo turned to look slightly down, at Violin's face, as he blunt stated, “She's John.”
Chiana requested, “Do me next.”
Violin turned to look at Chiana. She said, “You took my virginity as a teenage boy, that time we when into my Earth's past. Sorry, about that promise earlier. But, learning that was me, whom you did that to, negates that promise. And I was going to tell Aeryn, anyway.”
Chiana suddenly frowned, as she realized Aeryn was in the room.
Aeryn turned to Chiana, as she stated, in a very controlled, even tone of voice, “Chiana, we are going to talk about this, later.”
Chiana chirped, “Eep.”
Aeryn looked over at Violin. Next, she walked slowly towards Violin.
When Aeryn reached her husband, that had been reborn into a woman, she softly placed the palm of right hand on the left side of Violin's check. After which, she gently moved Violin's face closer in line with her own.
Aeryn then deeply kissed, Violin on her lips. Violin did her best to return the kiss.
A few seconds later, as Aeryn broke the kiss, as she let her right hand dropped to her side.
Aeryn and Violin look at each other in their eyes, as Aeryn mentally realized, 'She is, John. They kiss the same way.'
Aeryn smiled, as she said, “John. It is you?”
Violin replied, “You know that, death do us part, of marriage vows. Forget it.” She then hugged her wife, as she kissed her on Aeryn's lips.
Aeryn returned the hug, as they kissed for a solid minute.
When their lips broke, they continued to embrace each other. They shared a smile, as Violin said, “I would come back from the grave for you a thousand times over.”
Aeryn replied, “And I, for you.”
Both lovers continued to smile warmly towards each other.
A few seconds later, the two women broke their hug, and took a couple of steps back.
Aeryn smirked, as she teased, “Oh, the fun we are going to have tonight.”
Violin responded, “I am looking forward to it, love.”
Dargo asked, “So, how did you die?”
Violin said, “The short answer is I got myself killed by being stupid.”
On the view screen, Pilot spoke up, “Well, as you, John, would say. This is par for course for our lives.”
Violin turned to the monitor showing Pilot, as she agreed, “True. Also, Scorpius found my old body. You should see a copy of the funeral she hosted for me. It was incredible.”
Chiana commented, “Scorpius always did seem a little too interested in you.”
Violin blushed slightly, as she replied, “No arguments there.”
Aeryn asked, “So, what name do you want to go by, now?”
Violin turned to look at Aeryn, as she answered, “John is fine for you, but I would prefer if those that don't know me, call me, Violin.”
Aeryn replied, “That works for me, John.”
Violin commented, “And I do have some more good news. Though, I am now a woman, and my new father was human, my new mother is an alien, bio-engineered super soldier. And among other things, I inherited her longevity. I might outlive you.”
Aeryn smiled, as she stated, “That is good news.” She thought, 'And that means we have centuries more together. Instead of decades.'
Chiana said, “Well. That is that. Welcome back, John. So, let's got back to the dining room, and continue our meals.”
Violin complimented, “Good idea.”
As they began walking out of the bridge, and towards the dining hall, Violin walked by the large table in the room. She then picked up her deactivated pulse pistol, and holstered it.
Violin then turned to her wife, as she inquired, “So, how are we going to break this news to Little D?”
Aeryn said, “We will figure out something. He is young. He will likely adapt. But, at least he still has his father in some form.”
Violin smiled. She then inquired, “That is my hope as well.” She turned to Chiana and Dargo, as she asked, “So Pip, and D, I know you guys are getting married. Did you do any more planning on that, while I was gone?”
Chiana answered, “We are planning to have the wedding in about a month. But now, there might be a small problem.”
Violin questioned, “What?”
Dargo joked, “Well John, I was hoping you would be my best man. But, it is looking more likely you are going to be a Chiana's bridesmaid.”
As they left the bridge, and entered the hallway, Violin laughed a little at Dargo's joke.
(_)
Farscape Reality. Place, the Peacekeeper Fleet, in Peacekeeper Space.
Three days after the last attack by Ed and Bob's group, in the mid-morning, fleet time, in Scorpius's Peacekeeper Command Carrier Flagship, inside Scorpius's office, Scorpius sat behind her desk, in her new cushioned armchair, while clothed in her usual black clothing, with face and short white hair being the only exposed parts of her body.
Scorpius' office had been completely repaired, and restore the day before. Even the undamaged vase with white flowers, sitting on top of her desk, was back where it had been on her desk.
As Scorpius looked around her office, she thought, 'The repair crews did a marvelous job of repairing my office. If I didn't know better, I would think that nothing had happened in here, a few solar days ago. I will think of a way to reward their skilled labors. Skills like this needs to be commended.'
Just then, Scorpius' attention was drawn to the far wall of her office, directly in front of her. As she heard the door, located there, slide open.
Commander Meka, in her peacekeeper uniform, walked in the room.
As Commander Meka continued walking further into the room, towards Scorpius, the door slid closed behind her.
When Meka came within ten feet from the front of Scorpius, she stopped, and stood in place, while looking at her commanding officer.
Scorpius looked over at Meka, as she inquired, “Good morning, Commander. How goes the vat process with your younger, temporal counterpart?”
Meka answered, “Everything is going well, Grand Chancellor.”
Scorpius asked, “So, what brings you here this morning?”
Meka stated, “You requested to be informed that Cad Bane has been paid, and sent on his way.”
Scorpius thought, 'But, you could have just contaced me by the communications equipment. No. You wish to discuss a personal matter with myself. And I am more than happy to do so.'
Scorpius responded, “Yes. He played his part well. And he made for such a convincing actor. He went easy on the Lowe parents, and then he feigned defeat, right before his escape, by teleporting, to another part of the ship. For him, a job is a job. And we paid him well for such a fine performance, on his part.”
“And I am happy with that results. The Lowe family is alive, uninjured, and reunited. As I planned. And Bane knows that I have future jobs for him, that will pay even more, so he is happy, as well. I feel that most everyone will be satisfied with their current situations, from their points of views. I even plan for Spike and her daughter Julia, to be left alone. Because, they will only brighten the lives of my students and their family.”
Meka pointed out, “Still, we lost much in what Ed Lowe hacked, and deleted, from our data base.”
Scorpius said, “Not to worry, Commander. I will inform you of my plan on that subject, before you leave my office, today. I am sure this is one of the reason you came to see me, personally. Though, I feel that you have more important matters to discuss with me, on recent events.”
Meka commented, “Yes. I have been thinking over the events of the last few days, and I need a few things clarified.”
Scorpius responded, in a casual tone of voice, “By all means. Ask your questions.”
Meka stated, “Unlike you, I do not think about the past that much. But, for obvious reasons, the last few days have made me think about my past. And a few things occurred to me. When I came out of the vat process, and woke up as a woman, I spent the next few months in this time period, adjusting, before I went back in time.”
“During that time, I will come to learn the basics of the events that had transpired during the last few solar days. Some of these events I will even tell myself about, when I wake up. Some, you will tell me.”
“When I went to the past. I told you about these events, to help in resuming my commission with you. You knew of my capture, and the gender change. Also, you knew that the boys would become gender benders, as well.”
“You knew that the brothers parents would erase the data the Peacekeepers had on the multiversal hyperspace gate technology.”
“You knew that John Crichton would be reincarnated into that dark blue haired girl, Violin. And that Violin would regain her memories, and personality, of being John Crichton. And finally, you knew, in advance that you would have sex with this female John Crichton.”
Scorpius admitted, “Yes. I lied to your past self, about not knowing that. But, I did not want to upset you at the time of your capture. There was no point in doing so.”
Meka commented, “I agree. There was no reason in stating such matters, at that point in time. Besides, the guards were there, and I am sure you did not want others to know how much you knew, and when you knew it.”
Scorpius said, “Exactly.” She then teased, “Still, concerning John, I hope that is not jealously I hear in your tone of voice.”
Meka flatly replied, “No, Grand Chancellor. I am just concerned that you may have misappropriated Peacekeeper resources for personal gains.”
Scorpius calmly responded, “I can see how you might think that, from an outside point of view. I shall explain my reasoning, in detail.”
Scorpius pushed a few buttons on her desk, and a hologram appeared above the front of the desk.
It was an image of John Crichton, in his usual black and red clothing.
Scorpius pressed another button, and John clothing and skin disappeared, to show his internal organs, tissues, and bones.
Scorpius explained, “As you may remember, John spent some time with us, on my previous Command Carrier, before he, and Bialar Crais, had Talon do a suicidal starburst, which destroyed our previous ship.”
Meka flatly stated, “How could I forget?”
Scorpius said, “Yes. It was quite a memorable experience for everyone involved. When John first arrived there, after we put on those empathic I-Yensch bracelet, I convinced him to have a complete medical physical, with our doctors scanning his body, and taking DNA samples. My excuse for these medical tests were simple. I did not want to have him drop dead of an unknown medical condition, with the bracelets on, thus taking me, with him, into death.”
Meka complimented, “That is proper reasoning. Still, did you find any information on wormholes, from John's DNA? I regret not asking you before. But, given the Scarrans were obsessed with trying to recover such knowledge from John's DNA, I thought it best to inquire.”
Scorpius answered, “No. I found the wormhole knowledge that was in his DNA to be garbage. The data is completely fragmented. This is why I was not concerned with the Scarrans retrieving John's DNA. It would have been useless to them.”
“And I wisely did not try to clone him. This reality can barely handle one John Crichton, as is. It is scary that two, or more, of them have existed in parallel with each other for a while, on three separate occasions. The most recent being John, with his future incarnation, Violin.”
Meka admitted, “That thought does worry myself, as well. Still, I have a feeling that you found something in your medical scans of him?”
Scorpius calmly responded, “I found plenty. And all of it was troubling. Spending much of my life as a hybrid has taught me the dangers of genetic flaws. In my previous male form, my thermal problems was only the tip of the iceberg for me. While, I did not disclose this to anyone else, outside of the doctors I went too. To stay alive, I had to have gene therapy, to prevent cancer. I had to receive organ regeneration treatments, and surgery, to repair internal birth deformities.”
“These are some of the numerous reasons I was more than happy to become a woman, in exchange for a much more healthier body.”
“The reason I am mention this is that for John's people, at the time he born on Earth, they only had basic genetic screenings for the most obvious of genetic problems. And while, for a human, John was very healthy. Compared to the rest of the galaxy's spacefaring species, he was not.”
“Before John was killed, he was around fifty cycles old. Nothing for a Sebacean, whom can live for centuries, without medical aid. But for John, his lifespan was likely passed the halfway mark. Peacekeeper doctors that had looked over John's medical scans and DNA samples built a profile for how he will age, and what problems he would have someday faced.”
Scorpius pushed a button, on her desk. And the hologram highlighted the internal problems with John's heart. She continued, “What you are seeing is John's heart when he would have been in his mid-seventies. As you can see, by then, his heart will start to fail.”
Scorpius pressed another button. The insides of John's body start to show development small growths. Scorpius said, “When John would have been in his mid-eighties, his DNA would start to breakdown, causing him to develop cancer through out his body.”
Scorpius then press another button. The top of John's skull disappeared, to show problems development in his brain. Scorpius went on to say, “And when John would have been in his mid-nineties, he would have started to develop mental problems in his brain.”
Scorpius then press another button, that caused the holographic image of John to disappear.
Scorpius commented, “That is not the worst of it. Even with medical resources, which could have saved John from those problems, his body would have started shutting down when he reached around a hundred and twenty-five cycle in age. Meanwhile, his family and friends will live on for centuries. Even his hybrid son, Little D. It is unfortunate, but the human body is just not made to last.”
Meka asked, “What about the vat process? It restores youth, and gives extreme longevity to humans.”
Scorpius answered, “While that would have extended John's lifespan by centuries. After everything between us, John would have never trusted me to do the vat process on him. And John would not likely put his life into the hands of lunatics of the Black Lagoon reality. John likely would see himself dying of old age as a nature course in his life, and he would accept his death.”
“Still, John's slow death would served no purpose. John has always been more an asset, than a liability. It is just that the Peacekeepers started on the wrong foot with John. Even from the beginning, with Bialar Crais' madness. And I admit, that I made things worse by capturing John, and using the Aurora chair on him. I deeply regret doing that.”
“Also, if Little D, is anything like his parents, with him grow to become as dangerous as his parents, by the time he reaches adulthood. Having John die would be only cause problems, as Little D and Aeryn would mourn John.”
“So, I had to find another option in saving John's life. Along with figuring out how to approach John on the matter. And when you came to me, as Meka, and told me of the future, I realize had a window of opportunity. Though, I knew it was a gamble. Because, I was not sure of the how all this would happen. Only, the results. But, it was the only option. And it paid off... In so many ways.”
“John now has a new, healthy, young body, that is so much superior, in so many ways to her old body. And even unaided, her new body's lifespan is measured in centuries. She will likely be with us for a very long time.”
“And she really knows how to use her body. That was some of the best sex I have ever had in my entire life.”
“It was so nice, for once, to thrown caution to the wind, and not have to hold back, in fear that I might accidentally injure my partner. That was why I was almost always the submissive one in my sexual relations with others. Because, if I let go of my control in such a situation, someone could be harmed, or killed. And I was pleased to find that John, in her new body, could give as good as she could take.”
Meka sarcastically replied, “I am sure of that.” She inquired, in a more serious tone of voice, “But, what if John's family rejects her? Not just the crew of Moya, but John's new family, as well? Whomever they are.”
Scorpius smiled, as she said, “All my trusted Peacekeepers profilers, and psychologists, whom I showed my data to, state that in this situation, John's, or should I say, Violin's family and friends will accept her. Both her new family, and her old family and friends.”
Meka pointed out, “As wonderful as that is for an outcome. We still have lost much, when the Lowe parents erasing our data on the multiversal hyperspace gate technology.”
Scorpius grin turned wicked, as she stated, “Commander, you are still working under the false assumption that I did not achieve both my goals in this operation. I make it a habit to have back-ups made of my projects. And back-up of back-ups made of all my works. With regular updates.”
“I have done so, since I lost much of my research data, but not all of my data, in the Gammak base explosion. Ed and Bob Lowe destroyed the copies that were on the ship's mainframe. They did not delete the data I had hidden on the projects, that I had on standalone systems, which are not listed in the mainframe. Nor, the data on hard copies that I have made, that I keep in several hidden places.”
Meka complimented, “Brilliant as ever, Grand Chancellor. Will you be able to continued work on the gate project without the Lowe siblings.”
Scorpius said, “As I have stated, on a few occasions. Human technology is simple to understand. And the Lowe brothers' work are no exception to that. Lewis and Stan already solved the most difficult parts. From the mathematical formula, to solving the feedback problems for the gate system. Because of that, I will leave them be... To enjoy their new gender abilities, and longevity. All that is left is development, and refinement,”
Meka inquired, “What about the rest of those that attacked us?”
Scorpius stated, “There will be no reprisals on anyone else that was involved in this operation. The Lowe family, their friends, and the crew of Moya should be left alone. I have all that I wanted. Including, a new army of freelance operatives, which I did not originally plan for. That was my bonus in all of this. Now, I intend to enjoy my spoils.”
“Still, we will be doing things slowly. I promised John, as such. And in so doing, no one outside of this ship will notice what we are doing.”
“Besides, there is no rush. We have time. All the time we could ever need. And more.”
(_)
Reality, unknown. Date, unknown. Place, unknown. Time, unknown.
In another reality, on a civilized, alien world, inside a bar, in the back corner table, hidden in the shadows of the establishment, sat a very satisfied, and happy Cad Bane.
Currently, Cad Bane was sitting in a chair, with his back to the corner of the room. So, he could see the rest of the room, and the entrance, as he drank from his bottle of a quality alcoholic beverage.
Cad Bane picked up his bottle, and took a drink, as he thought, 'This last week might have been the more profitable in my entire life. And likely the easiest money I have ever made. I just capturing the same boys, twice, over and then Scorpius paid me to throw the fight with that old man. Still, that old man did give me a workout. Still, too bad my team died, but that is a small matter. Though, I will toast to their memory.”
He then took another swig of his bottle, as he continued his train of thought, 'Talk about how things had turned around for me. Last week I was in hiding, while running a dump like this. Now, I am rich beyond my wildest imaginations. Wealth I have placed in several, very protected places. I am beyond the reach of my enemies. I can now go literally anywhere, or any when, I can imagine. I can understand almost any language spoke to me. The multiverse has literally opened up for me, with a near infinite number of opportunities.'
'I will always be grateful to my Peacekeeper agent, for finding me, and offering me that job. Choosing to work for Scorpius was the be decision of my life. And while I plan to continue to work for Scorpius.'
'I also intend to find other jobs. And I have found that reputations are harder to gain across the multiverse, because most of the various populations of the multiverse are cut off from each other. So, using my reputation will have its limits. Still, my skill will soon speak for itself. So, the only question now is, where am I going to go to, next, in search of a job, adventure, and more wealth?'
Just then, Bane noticed what look like a tall, muscular human was was walking towards him.
The person appeared to be a middle-aged human male, with fair skin, blond hair that was cut short on his head. He were sunglasses over his eyes, a green business suit from the turned of the second millennium on Earth, and dress shoes.
When the man reached Bane's table, Ban placed his bottle on the table. He then lowered his hands below the table, as he slowly drew both his blasters, in case he needed to fight.
Bane calmly said, in galactic basic, “Hello. Is there something I can do for you?”
The man answered, in a relaxed tone of voice, in english, “Yes. My name, Gomez. I know you are the bounty hunter, Cad Bane, and I have a job offer for you.”
From under the table, Cad Bane continued to point both his blasters pointed at the man. Bane casually replied, “I'm listening.”
Gomez politely requested, “May I please sit down.”
Bane said, “Sure.”
Gomez mentioned, “And there will be no need for your blasters. I am unarmed. And I have no intention of resorting to violence. Should you decline the offer, I will simply leave.”
Bane holstered his blasters, as he complimented, “Very perceptive. And very professional. I like both those traits.”
Bane mentally reflected, 'I will have to keep on my toes with this one. This guy is clearly also a multiverse traveler. Still, if he is this good, he might have a job worth my time.'
'And it seems that those that travel the multiverse are of a much high quality of competence, than most of the people I have worked for, and worked with, back home. I think I am going to like being a bounty hunter of the multiverse.'
As Gomez sat down in the chair, which was across the table from Bane, he replied, “Thank you, for your consideration, Mister Bane.”
Gomez then made his pitch to one of the most notorious bounty hunters in the known multiverse.
(_)
Cowboy Bebop Reality. Location, Mars, Tharsis City. Date, Sunday, October seventeenth, twenty-one hundred. Six PM sharp, local time.
Ed and Bob entered the barbeque restaurant.
They were dressed in their casual wear, with Bob in his male form.
The restaurant itself was a fairly popular restaurant. With the establishment being known to fix some of the best barbeque on the planet. But, their prices were fair, the service from the staff was good, with the restaurant and both restrooms, being clean.
The barbeque restaurant has been open for decades, and the Lowe family had enjoyed going there to eat, as a family, since before the Stan and Lewis were born.
Bob liked the motif of the restaurant.
The barbeque restaurant went for a late twentieth century, american western style steakhouse, set around the lat twentieth century. The motif included wooded tables, chairs, booths, walls, and flooring. Though, the chairs and booth seats were cushions, and conformable to sit in.
Bob honestly thought those that furnished the restaurant, nailed the look completely. He knew of barbeque restaurants, back in his home reality, on his Earth, in his america, of his time period, that were nowhere near a good, in both food, and style, as the one that Ed and he were currently inside of.
As they walked further into the eating area of the restaurant, they looked at the tables and booths, for their two wayward teenage sons.
Ed asked, “Do you see them?”
Bob answered, “No. You?”
Ed replied, “I don't either. Let's get a table, while we wait for them to show up.”
Bob complimented, “Good idea. Let's get a booth table.”
Ed responded, “Okay. And we will sit on one side, so the boys can sit on the other side.”
Bob replied, “I agree with that idea. I will sit on the inside.”
Ed commented, “Thank you. And we will wait to order, until they get here... That is, if they feel like eating.”
Bob agreed, in a sober tone of voice, “Yea. This is going to be one of those conversations.”
The married couple then walked over to one of the empty booths, and seated themselves.
Bob slid into the boot first, with Ed to his left side.
As one of the waitresses walked up to them, she said, in english, “Hi guys. How are you two doing?”
Bob turned to the waitress, as he responded, “Great actually. It has just been a long weekend.”
Ed commented, “Too long.”
The waitress giggled. She then agreed, “I hear that. So, what can I get for you two? Your usuals?”
Bob answered, “No. We are waiting for the boys to meet us here. At the moment, we are not sure if we are eating here, or not.”
The waitress responded, “Ed, Bob, I understand. You two are some of our best customers. And we appreciate your business. You two can sit here for as long as you want. I know the boss won't mind.”
Bob replied, “Thank you.”
The waitress said, “Just let me know if you two want anything.”
Ed said, “We will.”
The waitress then turned, and went to check on her other customers, as Ed and Bob patiently waited for their two sons to show up.
A few minutes later, Ed and Bob saw two, very beautifully, redhead teenage girls approach them.
As Ed and Bob looked at the two teenage girls, they saw that the girls were in their later teens in age. They had long red hair, that went down to their shoulder blades, and they had fair skin. They had slender physical builds, moderately large breasts, and they were of average height for their race. Given the similar physical builds, height, hair, skin tone, they were clearly sisters. And the way the two teenage girls walked in lock step with each other showed they were emotionally close to each other.
The two sisters both wore the same clothing. A short sleeved red blouse, short white skirts, white socks, and red tennis shoes. With their blouses, and tennis shoes being the same color of red as their hair.
The only real difference between the two teenage sisters, besides their slightly different, yet pretty faces, was that one girl wore her hair loose. While, the other girl had her hair in a ponytail.
As the two teenage sisters came to a stop in front of Bob and Ed's booth, they turned to looked at the husband and wife.
The girl with the loose hair looked over at the empty seat, and then back at Ed and Bob. She inquired, “Is this seat taken?”
Bob and Ed look at the two girls, for a few seconds.
Ed thought, 'I cannot put my finger on it, but I have a feeling that I know these two young women from somewhere. And I want to know from where.' She said, “We are expecting company, you can have a seat for, now. Until they show up.”
The girl with the ponytail replied, “That will be fine.”
As the girls slid into the empty booth beside Bob and Ed, the girl with the ponytail was first, with the girl with the loose hair being to her right side.
After the teenage girls were seated, the girl in the ponytail asked, “So, who are you waiting for?”
Ed answered, “Our sons.”
The girl with the loose hair inquired, “What do your sons look like? Maybe we passed by them, as we came in.”
Bob answered, “They are around your age. Taller, more physically muscular. They have tanned skin, like my wife, but black hair, like I use to have.”
The girl in the ponytail replied, “You don't say?”
Both girls looked at each other other, as they grin mischievously to one other. They continued grinning, as they looked back towards Ed and Bob.
Through the conversation, Ed was continued trying to figure out why the two girls looked so familiar. Then, recognition dawned her her face, as her jaw dropped, and her eyes widened, while she thought, 'The family resemblance is uncanny. It is just the hair color and skin tones are reversed to our sons... Along with their genders!'
The two teenage girls noticed the look on recognition on Ed's face. In response, they their smiles took on a wicked tone.
Bob turned to Ed, as he noticed the looked on his wife's face. He asked, “What is it, Ed?”
Ed collected herself, as she answered, in the calmest tone of voice she could muster for the situation. “Bob, they're our daughters.”
Bob looked at the two teenage girls, as he commented, in a confused tone of voice, “Ed, we don't have daughters.... Oh....”
Stan and Lewis broke out laughing for the next several seconds.
Bob said, “Very funny guys... err girls...”
As the two sisters started to calm down, the girl with the loose hair said, “Oh, come on. You have to admit that was funny.”
Ed agreed, “Yes, it was.”
Bob complimented, “You are right. And it is a classic. And you both pulled it off nicely.”
Stan and Lewis continued smiling, as they responded, in unison, “Thank you.”
The one with the ponytail said, “Both of you are at fault for our genes being activated.”
Ed guessed, “The unstable gate? The electrical storm it created?”
The girl with the loose hair complimented, “Got it in one.”
Ed commented, “Oh, the irony.”
Bob said, “And we spent so much effort trying to prevent this very thing, and we ended up being part of the cause.”
The girl with the loose hair shrugged, as she replied, “I guess some things are meant to happen. And this ability doesn't seem to effect you to much, dad.”
Bob pointed out, “That is because I took precautions. We will get to that, later.”
Ed inquired, “So, I take it your normal female forms are a few years younger than your male forms? And that you used nattou to temporally physically mature you female forms?”
The girl with the loose hair answered, “Yes. We discovered what nattou does to us, by accident, Though fortunately, we found we are immune to the effects when we were both girls. And nothing happened between us, nor others, while we were girls.”
Ed commented, “That is good.”
Bob stated, with disappointment in his tone of voice, “Still, you two are foolish to use nattou to bump up the physical maturity of you female bodies like this, and then go out into public. Your pheromones could drive people to assault you. Do you realize that?”
The girl with the loose hair calmly responded, “Yes. We understand the dangers. And relax. We have that covered. First, we both retain our physical strength and endurance of our male forms, in our female bodies. We are a lot stronger than we look.”
Bob countered, “That is nice. And I have found that is true for myself, and others like us. Still, that won't help you much if you are vastly outnumbered.”
The girl with loose hair commented, “But, we also both took thorough showers after the nattou took effect. And as long as we don't physically exerted ourselves, and sweat, we will keep the pheromones to a minimum. Notice, how none of the men here have been looking at us.”
The Lowe parents looked around the room, and the married couple notice that none of the other people in the room were looking in their direction.
As Bob and Ed turned back to face their daughters, Bob said, “Okay. You both lucked out this time. And it is fortunate that I know from our cousins, that children's pheromones do not effect their parents.”
The girl with the ponytail replied, “That is fortunate.”
The girl with the loose hair agreed, “Yes. It is.”
Bob went onto say, in an annoyed tone of voice, “And I am shocked at what you are wearing. The blouses are fine, but the skirts are too short. I can almost see your panties. Your grandparents would be shocked at what you are wearing now.”
The girl with the ponytail smiled, as she said, “And we realized that. And that is why we are wearing boxer shorts made for women. I believe they are called, boyshorts.”
The girl with the loose hair giggled for a few seconds.
Ed giggled a little too, as well, until Bob glared at her.
As Ed noticed Bob's stern look towards her. She calmed down, took a more neutral expression, as she looked towards her daughters.
Bob also turned back to look at their children.
Ed said, in the most stern tone of voice she could muster, without giggling from the absurdity of the situation, “Still, boys... Err girls. We are going to have a long talk about this when we get home. About using nattou, dressing up like that, and fooling us.”
In response, both their daughters just giggled like a pair of school girls.
The girl with the loose hair stated, “Well mom, as least you admit that we had you both fooled.”
Ed admitted, “Yes, you did. Which is why I am only mildly annoyed, instead of angry.”
Bob requested, “So, which one of you is which? This isn't the Parent Trap movie. Ed, do you have any ideas?”
Ed replied, “Honestly, I could not tell you, Bob. Unless we spent more time with them.”
Lewis and Stan smirked, in unison, as they realized they finally beaten their mother in a game of wits.
The girl with the ponytail said, “We will tell you. But, there is one question we would like answered, first.”
The girl with the loose hair continued for her sister, “Which one of you gave birth to which one of us?” Most specifically... Dad, which one of us is your child?”
Bob became very uncomfortable, as he cursed under his breath, “Damn.” He asked, in a more normal tone of voice, “How do you two find out?”
The girl with the loose hair stated, “Scorpius told us. She got DNA from hair samples from us. She informed us that we had the same parents, but different mitochondria DNA. Meaning, we had two different mothers. Though, she could risk getting hair samples from you two. And being discovered. So, she does not know which is which.”
Bob grumbled, “That figures.” He sighed. He continued, “I might as well tell you both. But, not in this form.”
Bob looked around, and he noticed that no one was paying attention to them. He then force himself to sneeze by will alone.
Bob and Ed's children watched as their white haired, elderly father, became a pretty black haired woman lass than half her male form's age.
The girl with the loose hair said, “So, it is possible to learn to sneeze on command.”
Bob said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Yes, it is. It just takes practice. I will teach you both how to do it, later. And just so you know, the dual pregnancies was your mother's idea.” She looked over at Ed, as she continued, “And I am sure she got the idea from her friends.”
In response, Ed girlishly giggled.
Bob turned to her daughters, as she stated, “And honestly, the shared experience did bring us emotionally closer together. Still, I found it very awkward for my male ego to handle, but I got through it. Which is to say I still retained quite a bit of my male ego. Anyway, I know this is not going to be fun, but Stan, I'm your mommy.”
The girl with the ponytail lower her head onto the table, giving herself away as Stan.
Meanwhile, the girl with the loose hair, Lewis, turned to Stan, as she laughed a little. She then said, “I told you so.”
Meanwhile, Ed had a smug look on her face.
Bob turned to her wife, as she stated, “Don't look so smug. Remember, we agreed that if our boys ever became our girls, I had to tell them the truth, while you would give them the speeches on monthly periods, and unwanted teenage pregnancies.”
Lewis' laughter immediately died in her throat, as she turned to look at her parents, for a few seconds. She then joined Stan in lowering her head onto the table.
At that moment, the smug look on Ed's face instantly disappeared.
Bob could see the news about learning about their health as women, were bothering their children. She gently said to them, “Relax... girls. Every time you change back and forth, you it resets your monthly cycle. You won't have to worry about that for a very long time. But, if you get pregnant, you will be locked as female until you give birth to your child.”
Lewis thought, 'So, this is likely what Nodoka meant by them not having to worry about those two biological, female events.'
Stan thought, 'So, Mikoto and Yurika, were right.'
The two teenage girls began to raise their heads, as they heard proverbial small glimmer of hope.
Bob added, “But, you will still have to learn about it.”
The sisters heads dropped back down to the table.
Bob continued, “Fortunately, there is a book written on the subject of people that gender bend back and forth, at a moments notice. With the book detailing on how to deal with such problems, and how to hand relationships. Both for the gender bender, and the perspective partner.”
“The book was written by Natsuru Senou. She is one of the... parents of our distant cousins, that came to visit you. We have a copy of the english version of the book, in your mother and I's bedroom. When we get home, I will lend it for you both to read. I found the book very helpful, for myself.”
“And I am sure you both realize now, on the flip side, because of changing back and forth, you won't be able to grow a beard for very long... And I do I miss my beard... Though, when you change into a girl, the facial hair either all falls out, or, if it is very short, it completely disappears. Though, when you change from girl to boy, it takes almost a week solid as a boy for your facial hair to show back up. So, you don't need to worry about shaving your face, either.”
“Yet, even thought we don't have any body hair except for our head, and our groin, as girls, our body hair returns when we become male, just not our facial hair.”
Without raising her head from the table, Stan inquired, “And I was planning to grow a beard after graduation... Oh well... So, it is true? We will eventually lock as women?”
Bob calmly said, in a reassuring tone of voice, “Not for a very long time. When you are in your sixties, or seventies. I am due to lock in a few years. But, being a women is not that bad. And the trade off for our abilities is that we will live far longer and healthier lives.”
Without raising her head, Lewis brought up another issue, as she commented, “So, we get to watch our lovers, and close friends, grow old and die? While we remain young?”
Bob stated, “Not necessarily. For example, take you mother. She used some youth rejuvenation therapy to extend her life and she had never looked better.”
Ed smiled, as she commented, “And it has worked very well for me.”
Bob said, “So, as you can see. We have options if you find that special someone. Or, even a few trusted, close friends.”
Bob then continued, in a firm, though calm, tone of voice, “Now, girls. Boys. Wherever you want me to call you, right now. Raise you heads. There is nothing to be ashamed of. It is just we are different than everyone else. I have been to alternate Earths where the entire population had their gender bent two decades before I got there. And barring a few more options they have in their personal lives, they act just like the rest of humanity we deal with every day. Human nature just continues forward. So, this is not going to change your lives that greatly. If you don't let it. You can still continue your life as you wish.”
The speech from their father, whom was currently their second mother, was enough to get the brothers, whom were now sisters, to raise their head, and face their parents.
Lewis commented, “We do have a minor problem we need to tell you about.”
Ed asked, “What is it?”
Lewis answered, “When we first realized we could change genders, we stayed girls for a few days straight. We found, that on top of the gender, hair, and skin changes. If we stayed girls for a three days, or more, we slowly start to become crazier, and crazier. Though, sleep does help. But, sleep loses its effectiveness over time. Though, the our sanity in our girl forms are reset if we just change back into boys, and then return to being girls.”
Bob asked, “How crazy? And what type of crazy?”
Lewis looked at Ed, as she said, “We become crazy, like mom can be.”
Bob turned to Stan, as she inquired, “Does the change also effect you the same way, Stan?”
Stan looked at Bob, as she replied, in a sober tone of voice, “Yes.”
Bob commented, “Interesting. The change does not effect me in that way. Nor, anyone one else that I know with these abilities.”
Ed said, “They just inherited their craziness from me. As I did from my father. Fortunately, the genes for this madness are dormant in their male forms, But, the activation of their alien genes also activated other recessive traits in their genome. Such as the crazy genes they got from me.”
Lewis agreed, “That is also what we figured.”
Ed commented, “Still, as fun as it is to be a crazy redhead, I can see how that could be a problem for the both of you. But, I overcame my madness. And I am sure you two can, as well. But, if it becomes a problem, we will look into possible medication.”
Lewis replied, “Thank you.”
Stan begged, “Now, can we please talk about something that does not involve human bodily functions?”
Lewis quickly added, “Like what our true birthdays are?”
Ed stated, “Actually, your birthdays are what we told you, they are. You were both on the same day. Just several hours apart. Stan, you were first. Your father gave birth to you, Stan, in the morning. Then, I gave birth to you, Lewis, in the evening.”
Bob commented, “Fortunately, this let Ed be with me, during my birth, of you, Stan. And it was enough time for me to rest and recover, so I could be with your mother when she gave birth to you, Lewis.” She then turned to her wife. She smirked, as she continued, “And honey, when you did give birth, you could not complain that I didn't know what you were going through.”
Ed giggled, as she looked at her spouse. She then said, “True. Yet, you didn't really complain about giving birth, either.”
Bob replied, “That is because I knew you were about to go through it, right after me.”
Stat looked over at her sister, as she said, “It looks like I am still the older sibling.”
Lewis turned to her sister, as she smiled. She commented, “I think I still got the better part of this deal.” Lewis then turned to their parents, as she asked, “And where did our first and last names come from?”
Stan agreed, “Good question, Lewis.” She turned to her parents, as she inquired, “Where did our family name come from? Dad, we know about our paternal grandparents, and that Lowe, is not their family name. Nor, is it mom's maiden name. And we do have an aunt. Just, not the person we thought was our aunt. We even also found that we had an uncle.”
The Lowe parents turned to face their daughters. Ed explained, “We also have enemies. So, we wanted to protect you both. And using a new last name we picked out was a good idea. Still, with you both learning all this, we will be visiting you paternal grandparents, Bob parents, along with Bob's siblings, and their families, in the near future.”
Stan and Lewis smiled, as Lewis replied, “Thank you.”
Stan said, “Good. I do miss seeing our grandparents. Even Pop-Pop.” She thought, 'Our mother's father.”
Ed commented, “We will visit him, as well.”
Stan asked, “How much does Pop-Pop know?”
Ed said, “A good portion of the situation. I was never really good at keeping secrets from him. But, he is okay with what is going on with our family.”
Stan replied, “That is nice.”
Lewis inquired, “I do have a question. Dad, Nodoka mentioned you played midwife for her, and her two sisters. At the same time. Is that true?”
Stan commented, “I did not really believe Lewis, when he told me what Nodoka said. So, I would like to know the truth on that, as well?”
Bob groaned. She then answered, “Yes. That really happened. And it was just part of one very strange, and stressful day. Even for us.”
Ed stated, “Yes. It was. I was there with him.”
Bob commented, “Yes. I will tell you, later. It is not the type of story, one tells while completely sober.”
Lewis commented, “I look forward to that conversation.”
Stan replied, “So, do I.”
Lewis stated, “And Nodoka mentioned something about a gender bending virus, dealing with the Alterans?”
Bob said, “I will tell that story, after the midwife story.”
Lewis inquired, “Okay. Now, on the subject of how much our family knows about us. While, we look forward to vising them again. How much do our paternal grandparents know?”
Bob answered for Ed, “Not much. But, we feel that we may soon change that. Still, you see girls, even though we used the American spelling, the pronunciation of, Lowe, can be either an Asian name, or an American name. Since your mother is part asian, and I am american, we decided to go with Lowe for that reason. Another reason is... Well... You two remember that old movie, the original Revenge of the Nerds movie? Well, your mother and I love watching that movie, together.”
Stan stated, in shock, “You named me after the jock?”
Lewis said, in surprise, “I was named after the nerd?...” Lewis then realized, as she continued, “And Lowe was the last name for the other nerd.”
Stan commented, “Talk about a prolific set of names.”
Ed smiled, as she stated, “Given how the lives we lead before you were born, how you two sweethearts turned out in school didn't really surprised us. But, as your parents, we are very proud of you both.”
Both sisters smiled at their mother's compliment.
Bob commented, “And girls. Look on the bright side. Your love life, in hopefully a few years. Is going to be a lot more interesting. And there are some upsides. You can go anywhere with your lover. You are no longer excluded from some gender segregated places, like some spas, and other places.”
Ed mentioned, “Like that spa we went to for our tenth year wedding anniversary.”
Bob said, with a smile on her lips, “Yes. And shopping for clothing with your lover will be a lot more fun. But, you got to be very careful not to sneeze at the wrong time. If it does happen. Don't lock up, like I once did. Just continue going forward, and, as quickly as possible, find some place private to sneeze back into the gender that fits your clothing.”
The teenager girls just nodded in acknowledgment to their father's advice.
Lewis said, “Speaking of names. We have a question. Who is Annie, really?”
Stan stated, “Annie, told us that you would tell us eventually.”
Ed said, “Well, girls, we don't want to shock, but Annie is very well known by her real name.”
Bob explained, “You see. Before you were born, Annie was originally a disfigured man that was kidnapped, and changed into a healthy woman by a person named Chang.”
Ed mentioned, “We will tell you about Chang, later. That is a conversation to be talked about in the privacy of our home.”
Stan asked, “The only Chang we know is from the Serenity.”
Bob said, “Same, Chang. And yes, Chang is like us. And her female form goes by the alias, Daiyu. Like your mother said. We will tell you about Chang, and the rest of the Serenity crew, later. Anyway, I want you to know that Annie has actually become quiet a nice person, since the change, for a number of reasons. But, you know Annie best, as Darth Vader, from the Star Wars reality.”
Lewis stated, “Annie was Darth Vader?”
Stan commented, “No wonder she did not want to personally tell us her identity. We might have freaked out at the worst possible time.”
Ed answered, “Yes. That might have happened. But, as Bob said, she is much nicer person, now.”
Stan agreed, “Mom, dad, you are both right about that.”
Lewis nodded a few times, as she said, “Yes. She is a much nicer person, now.”
Bob stated, “Yes. And Annie went through a lot to save you two.”
Lewis commented, “We will have to thank her for her help, the next time we meet her.”
Ed said, “Yes. We will. Also, she was kidnapped between Episodes three, and episode four of the Star Wars movies. Though, she has seen the movies herself.”
Lewis commented, “That must have been an interesting experience for her.”
Ed stated, “From what we heard. Yes. It was.”
Stan said, “No wonder she said that her name was important. Annie was Anakin's nickname as a child.”
Lewis stated, “I guess that really does bury the argument of which one of those two. Luke? Or, Anakin? Was the better pilot?”
Stan agreed, “Yes. It does when one of them personally says the other was the better pilot. I admire Annie for her feelings on the matter.”
Lewis pointed out, “That is because you won that debate.”
Stan said, “I didn't win. We just found out from the horse's mouth. So, to speak.”
Lewis agreed, “True. Now, I realize why she found it ironic and funny that she gave us one of mom's reality devices. In this case, she really was like, Obiwan.”
Stan agreed, “Yea. Now, that we know the truth. It is funny and ironic.”
Bob commented, “I hope neither of you are annoyed by this revelation..”
The sisters shook their heads, as Stan said, “No. We are not.”
Lewis added, “No. We are just annoyed we didn't get the chance yet to get Annie's autograph.”
Stan agreed, “Yes. We would have liked that.”
Bob said “Don't worry. I am sure that getting an autograph from her will not be a problem. Just, please don't say any Star Wars jokes in her presence.”
Stan commented, “I can see how that would get old with her, real quick.”
Bob stated, “You have no idea. And from what I understand, John Crichton was the worst, with the Star Wars jokes. Though, Annie was not above telling a few, herself.”
Lewis said, “Darth Vader telling Star Wars jokes. Now, that is a scary thought.”
Ed agreed, “You are right about that.”
Stan inquired, “Speaking of John, what happened to him? And what is up with Violin?
Bob asked, “Did you ever see the Farscape series?”
Stan answered, “Yes. During our journey, we bought a copy of the series, and mini-series finale. And we watched all of it. We were hiding as girls them. And watching that series was one of the contributing factors to us staying as girls for an extended amount of time, as we lost track of time.”
Bob commented, “That is not surprising. That series seems to cause some form of crazy to everyone who is touched by it. Both inside and outside of the Farscape reality.”
Lewis said, “That is what we figured, as well. So, what did happen to, John?”
Bob stated, “Well, John died. And we found out at the same time as John died, that Violin is the reincarnation of John. And witnessing John death cause her to regain her memories of being John, along with her personality merged with John's personalty.”
Stan said, “And I thought our lives were interesting.”
Bob mentioned, “My life experiences have taught me that there is not end to the possible weirdness in the multiverse.”
Ed said, “Trust your father on this, girls. He... err she knows what she is talking about.”
Lewis asked, “Is Violin still sane?”
Ed shrugged, as she replied, “About as sane as she always was, as either John, or Violin. Which is not saying much. But, then again, I am not one to judge.”
Bob commented, “And I wish her the best of luck with sorting out her personal life.”
Ed mentioned, “At least her new family, in Tokyo, accepted her. And I have a feeling her old family, on Moya, will, as well.”
Bob replied, “I agree. And we will check on her later, in a few days, to a week. Our time. Maybe a day, in her time. To make sure things are fine with her.”
Ed looked at her spouse, as she complimented, “Good idea.” She then turned to looked at her daughters across the table, as she softly ordered, “Now, I am sure you two have your male clothing stashed somewhere nearby. I want you to get go change both your clothing and your gender. And then, we will go home, and continue our discussion. Including, how running does not solve your problems. While facing your parents does.”
Stan and Lewis looked embarrass, as they stated, in unison, “Yes, mom.”
As the girls slid out of the booth, and walked away to change their clothes, and change back into guys, their parents whispered to each other.
Ed inquired, “That was a funny joke they pulled on us, by making us think they were someone else. So, when are we going to take them to the next Lagoon bikini party? I am looking forward to showing them off, in all their cuteness, to the other parents. I think the other parents will be jealous.”
Bob smiled, as she replied, “The parents might. They definitely inherited your beauty.”
Ed returned Bob's smile, as she said, “Thank you. But, I think they inherited some of you feminine beauty, as well.”
Bob commented, “Thanks for the compliment, dear. Still, there is no rush. We need to let them get use to their new female bodies.”
Ed replied, “Good idea. We will suggest they stay as girls at home. That will speed things up a bit.”
Bob responded, “Yes. Let them ease into the situation. Which, if I remember, you denied me from doing.”
Ed whined, “Okay. You are still complaining about that.”
Bob cautioned her wife, “Next time you decide to hand out extremely personal information on me to others, without first talking to me about it, I am going to eat enough nattou, while a woman, that my pheromones will leave you hot and bothered for a week. And I will give you no relief in bed. And don't try to lie to me. I know my female body's pheromones effect you.”
Ed winched, as she thought, 'Over a decade and a half of marriage. And I keep forgetting that, when she gets upset, Bob has a real mean streak as a woman. Not that I will ever admit that to her. Though, when she is not upset, she is as nice as when she is male.'
Ed quickly calmed her spouse down, by gently saying, “Okay. Okay, honey. I get the message. Now, let's get our boys home, and get some much deserved rest, for all us.”
Bob smiled, as she complimented, “Dear, that is the best idea I ever heard all day.”
The Lowe family soon returned home, as Bob, Stan, and Lewis, also returned to their male genders. After another hour of questions and answers, the Lowe family turned in early, to get some much deserved sleep.
(_)
The next day. Monday, October eighteenth, twenty-one hundred. The Lowe brothers returned to their high school, on Mars, as if nothing had happen to them. With them only being missing during the weekend for those on Mars. Except for those involved in their adventures, no one, locally, asked any questions on the matter.
Though, the brothers had to be careful not to sneeze in school. And they had to take a taxi to school, because parents understandably forbid them from using a reality device to go to school. And they left the family car at the high school, which they did return home, after school.
A few days later, the four members of the Lowe family had the parent-teacher conference with American Football Coach Shane Caxton, at Shane's family home, in private. With Jennifer, Shane's wife, taking their two children, to a nearby playground, as he talked with the Lowe family.
Shane took the knowledge, of what the Lowe family told him, much better than the Lowe family thought he would.
Shane found it humorous learning about the world as myth reality. And getting the name of the series he was from. Shane even planned to check out the Black Lagoon anime series, sometime. And he was fine about what he learned on what happened to his reality, and the people he met, after he left his home reality.
Shane was even okay with the gender bending. Shane did not even bat an eye at watching Stan change genders, back and forth.
Though, Shane did have one comment on the gender bending. That was if Stan got a cold. For safety reasons. Shane would have to bench him while he had a cold. An accidental sneeze, and gender change, in mid-tackle could be dangerous for Stan.
The entire Lowe family, including Stan, agreed with Shane.
All Shane asked in return for his silence, was that they keep the secret that he was alive and well, in the reality they lived in, from those of the Black Lagoon reality.
Shane understandably did not want their craziness to effect his family, nor his own, personal life.
And the Lowe family gladly agreed to Shane's request.
(_)
Several months later, Stan got Lewis another girl for a date, this time the prom. Stan took his steady girlfriend, Stephanie, to the prom. And Stan's girlfriend did get voted prom queen, with one of Stan's most favorite moments in his life was dancing with the prom queen during prom. Stan and his girlfriend even let Lewis share one dance with the prom queen.
And the brothers were able to continue their schooling towards graduation without letting anyone around know about their gender abilities, except for Coach Caxton. Though, after everything that has happened, and their new gender bending abilities, they were not sure if they want to go to college, or do something else.
(_)
And of course, after the graduation, the parents eventually got their revenge on their children, for tricking them at the barbeque restaurant, by making the siblings attend the next bikini party, by the Lagoon family, in their then fifteen year old female bodies, in very cute, though not sexy, bikinis. And everyone there knew who the Lowe sisters were, ahead of time.
Though, the Lowe sisters decided that if they were going to be forced to be surrounded by crazy chicks, they might as well become crazy chicks. So, they stay as girls for days on end, at the week long island party. And after three days of not changing back into guys, their other crazy personalities started to take over. And by the forth day, the sisters were caught trying to turn the Lagoon PT boat into a giant robot.
Though, the Lowe sister were not punished, because the others soon realized what the personality shift of their gender change does to them.
But, that is another story...
The End.
(_)
Author's Notes:
That's it for this book. I hope you enjoyed this part of my “Anthology Of Insanity”.
I hope in this chapter, for you readers, that I gave good enough justifications for Scorpius's actions, but for the actions of the trio sisters, and their parents.
In addition, I enjoyed writing the reunion between Spike, Jet, and Faye. With Ed and Bob present. Along with Julia being introduced to everyone.
I really do like Jet and Faye. And I find it unfortunate that I could not find a more active role in Book four, for these two. But, their life turned out alright, in the end. So, it is okay.
I hope you enjoyed where I had Ein end up. With me, even the dog is given a happy ending.
I did enjoy writing the reunion of the Lowe family. After everything they have been through, Stan and Lewis deserved to play that joke on their parents.
And Stan and Lewis finally getting the answers they wanted.
With the entire Lowe family back together, with no serious issues left between them.
Until next time. Have fun.